S-4

As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on September 27, 2006

Registration No. 333-            

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

FORM S-4

REGISTRATION STATEMENT

UNDER

THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933

Education Management LLC

Education Management Finance Corp.

(Exact name of registrant issuer as specified in its charter)

SEE TABLE OF ADDITIONAL REGISTRANTS

Delaware	8249	20-4506022
Delaware	8249	20-4887689
(State or other jurisdiction of incorporation)	(Primary Standard Industrial Classification Code Number)	(I.R.S. Employer Identification Number)

c/o Education Management Corporation

210 Sixth Avenue, 33^rd Floor, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15222

(412)-562-0900

(Address, including zip code, and telephone number, including area code, of registrants’ principal executive offices)

J. Devitt Kramer, Esq.

Senior Vice President, General Counsel and Secretary

210 Sixth Avenue, 33^rd Floor, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15222

(412)-562-0900

(Name, address, including zip code, and telephone number, including area code, of agent for service)

With a copy to:

Richard A. Fenyes, Esq.

Simpson Thacher & Bartlett LLP

425 Lexington Avenue

New York, New York 10017-3954

Tel: (212) 455-2000

Approximate date of commencement of proposed exchange offers:  As soon as practicable after this Registration Statement is declared effective.

If the securities being registered on this form are being offered in connection with the formation of a holding company and there is compliance with General Instruction G, please check the following box.  ¨

If this form is filed to register additional securities for an offering pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.  ¨

If this form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(d) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.  ¨

CALCULATION OF REGISTRATION FEE

Title of Each Class of Securities to be Registered	Amount to be Registered	Proposed Maximum Offering Price Per Note	Proposed Maximum Aggregate Offering Price(1)	Amount of Registration Fee
8 3/4% Senior Notes due 2014	$375,000,000	100%	$375,000,000	$40,125
10 1/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016	$385,000,000	100%	$385,000,000	$41,195
Guarantees of 8 3/4% Senior Notes due 2014(3)	N/A(3)	(3)	(3)	(3)
Guarantees of 10 1/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016(3)	N/A(3)	(3)	(3)	(3)

(1) Estimated solely for the purpose of calculating the registration fee under Rule 457(f) of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Securities Act”).

(2) See inside facing page for additional registrant guarantors.

(3) Pursuant to Rule 457(n) under the Securities Act, no separate filing fee is required for the guarantees.

The Registrants hereby amend this Registration Statement on such date or dates as may be necessary to delay its effective date until the Registrants shall file a further amendment which specifically states that this Registration Statement shall thereafter become effective in accordance with Section 8(a) of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, or until the Registration Statement shall become effective on such date as the Securities and Exchange Commission, acting pursuant to said Section 8(a), may determine.

Table of Additional Registrant Guarantors

Exact Name of Registrant Guarantor as Specified in its Charter	State or Other Jurisdiction of Incorporation or Organization	I.R.S. Employer Identification Number	Address, Including Zip Code and Telephone Number, Including Area Code, of Registrant Guarantor’s Principal Executive Offices
AID Restaurant, Inc.	Texas	01-0691168	8080 Park Lane Suite 100 Dallas, Texas 75231 214-692-8080
AIH Restaurant, Inc.	Texas	76-0431417	1900 Yorktown Houston, Texas 77056 713-623-2040
AIIM Restaurant, Inc.	Minnesota	41-1977654	15 S. 9th St. LaSalle Building Minneapolis, Minnesota 55409 612-332-3361
Argosy University Family Center, Inc.	Minnesota	16-1665500	310 East 38th St. Minneapolis, MN 55409 612-827-5981
Brown Mackie Holding Company	Delaware	20-3108775	210 Sixth Avenue, 33rd Floor, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15222 412-562-0900
The Connecting Link, Inc.	Georgia	58-1987235	5126 Ralston St. Ventura, CA 93003 805-654-0739
EDMC Aviation, Inc.	Pennsylvania	20-0212231	210 Sixth Avenue, 33rd Floor, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15222 412-562-0900
EDMC Marketing and Advertising, Inc.	Georgia	58-1591601	210 Sixth Avenue, 33rd Floor, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15222 412-562-0900
Higher Education Services, Inc.	Georgia	58-1983881	709 Mall Avenue Savanah, GA 31406 803-799-9082
MCM University Plaza, Inc.	Illinois	36-4118464	210 Sixth Avenue, 33rd Floor, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15222 412-562-0900

The information in this prospectus is not complete and may be changed. We may not sell these securities until the registration statement filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission is effective. This prospectus is not an offer to sell these securities and it is not soliciting an offer to buy these securities in any state where the offer or sale is not permitted.

SUBJECT TO COMPLETION, DATED SEPTEMBER 27, 2006

PRELIMINARY PROSPECTUS

Education Management LLC

Education Management Finance Corp.

Offers to Exchange

$375,000,000 aggregate principal amount of its 8 ³/4% Senior Notes due 2014 and $385,000,000 of its 10 ¹/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016, each of which have been registered under the Securities Act of 1933, for any and all of its outstanding 8 ³/4% Senior Notes due 2014 and 10 ¹/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016, respectively.

We are conducting the exchange offers in order to provide you with an opportunity to exchange your unregistered notes for freely tradable notes that have been registered under the Securities Act.

The Exchange Offers

• We will exchange all outstanding notes that are validly tendered and not validly withdrawn for an equal principal amount of exchange notes that are freely tradable.

• You may withdraw tenders of outstanding notes at any time prior to the expiration date of the exchange offers.

• The exchange offers expire at 12:00 a.m. midnight, New York City time, on                     , 2006, unless extended. We do not currently intend to extend the expiration date.

• The exchange of outstanding notes for exchange notes to be issued in the exchange offer will not be a taxable event for United States federal income tax purposes.

• The terms of the exchange notes to be issued in the exchange offer are substantially identical to the outstanding notes, except that the exchange notes will be freely tradable.

Results of the Exchange Offers

• The exchange notes may be sold in the over-the-counter market, in negotiated transactions or through a combination of such methods. We do not plan to list the notes on a national market.

All untendered outstanding notes will continue to be subject to the restrictions on transfer set forth in the outstanding notes and in the applicable indenture. In general, the outstanding notes may not be offered or sold, unless registered under the Securities Act, except pursuant to an exemption from, or in a transaction not subject to, the Securities Act and applicable state securities laws. Other than in connection with the exchange offers, we do not currently anticipate that we will register the outstanding notes under the Securities Act.

See “ Risk Factors” beginning on page 23 for a discussion of certain risks that you should consider before participating in the exchange offers.

Neither the Securities and Exchange Commission nor any state securities commission has approved or disapproved of the exchange notes to be distributed in the exchange offers or passed upon the adequacy or accuracy of this prospectus. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.

The date of this prospectus is                     , 2006.

You should rely only on the information contained in this prospectus. We have not authorized anyone to provide you with different information. The prospectus may be used only for the purposes for which it has been published and no person has been authorized to give any information not contained herein. If you receive any other information, you should not rely on it. We are not making an offer if these securities in any state where the offer is not permitted.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Industry and Market Data	i
Trademarks	i
Prospectus Summary	1
Ownership and Corporate Structure	8
Summary Historical and Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Financial and Other Data	20
Risk Factors	23
Forward-Looking Statements	37
The Transactions	38
Use of Proceeds	40
Capitalization	40
Unaudited Pro Forma Condensed Consolidated Financial Information	41
Selected Historical Consolidated Financial and Other Data	44
Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations	46
Business	66
Management	91
Principal Stockholders	97
Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions	99
Description of Other Indebtedness	101
The Exchange Offers	104
Description of Notes	114
Certain United States Federal Income Tax Consequences of the Exchange Offers	173
Certain Erisa Considerations	174
Plan of Distribution	175
Legal Matters	176
Experts	176
Where You Can Find More Information	176
Index to Consolidated Financial Statements	F-1

INDUSTRY AND MARKET DATA

Some of the industry and market data contained in this prospectus are based on independent industry publications or other publicly available information, while other information is based on internal company sources. Although we believe that these independent sources and our internal data are reliable as of their respective dates, the information contained in them has not been independently verified, and neither the initial purchasers nor we can assure you as to the accuracy or completeness of this information. As a result, you should be aware that the market industry data contained in this prospectus, and beliefs and estimates based on such data, may not be reliable. We obtained information relating to the U.S. post-secondary education market from the National Center for Education Statistics, which is the primary federal entity for collecting and analyzing data related to education, the College Board, the U.S. Census Bureau and the U.S. Department of Labor—Bureau of Labor Statistics.

TRADEMARKS

We have proprietary rights to a number of trademarks used in this prospectus which are important to our business, including Argosy University, Brown Mackie College, The Art Institute Online, as well as the names of certain of our schools. We have omitted the “^®” and “^™” trademark designations for such trademarks in this prospectus. Nevertheless, all rights to such trademarks named in this prospectus circular are reserved.

i

PROSPECTUS SUMMARY

This summary highlights information contained elsewhere in this prospectus. This summary may not contain all of the information that may be important to you in making your investment decision. You should carefully read the entire prospectus, including the financial data and related notes and section entitled “Risk Factors,” before making an investment decision.

On June 1, 2006, EM Acquisition Corporation, a Pennsylvania corporation (“EM Acquisition”) formed by investment funds associated with Providence Equity Partners and Goldman Sachs Capital Partners (the “Sponsors”), merged with and into Education Management Corporation (the “Merger”), and investment funds designated by the Sponsors became the owners of Education Management Corporation. Unless the context otherwise requires, references in this prospectus to “we,” “our,” “us,” “the Successor” and “the Company” refer to Education Management LLC and its consolidated subsidiaries (including Education Management Finance Corp.), which consist of all of EDMC’s operations prior to the Merger. References to “EDMC” and “the Predecessor” refer to Education Management Corporation, our indirect parent company. References to our fiscal year refer to the twelve month period ended June 30 of the year referenced.

Our Company

We are among the largest providers of post-secondary education in North America, with more than 72,000 active students as of the fall of 2005. Our educational institutions offer students the opportunity to earn undergraduate and graduate degrees in a broad range of disciplines, including media arts, design, psychology and behavioral sciences, education, information technology, legal studies, business, health sciences and culinary arts. Since 1996, we have generated a compounded annual enrollment growth rate of 18.4% and a compounded annual revenue growth rate of 23.0%.

Over our 35-year operating history, we have expanded the reach of our educational systems and currently operate 71 schools across 24 states in the United States and two Canadian provinces. Additionally, we offer an online education platform, enabling our students to pursue degrees online or through a flexible combination of both online and local campuses. Our programs enable students to earn various degrees, including Doctorate, Master’s, Bachelor’s and Associate’s, as well as certain specialized non-degree diplomas. These academic programs are designed with a distinct emphasis on applied, career-oriented content and are primarily taught by faculty members that possess practical and relevant professional experience in their respective fields.

Our student population includes both traditional students, typically recent high school graduates pursuing their first higher education degree, and working adults, who are pursuing additional education in their current field or preparing for a new profession. Based on information collected by us from graduating students and employers, we believe that of the approximately 12,300 undergraduate students who graduated from our institutions during the calendar year ended December 31, 2005, approximately 88% of those available for employment obtained employment in their fields of study or a related field within six months of graduation. Similar to traditional public and private colleges and universities, each of our schools located in the United States is recognized by accreditation agencies and by the U.S. Department of Education, enabling students to access federal student loans, grants and other forms of public and private financial aid.

Our schools are organized and managed through four educational systems, each focused on specific programmatic and degree areas:

• The Art Institutes. The Art Institutes offer Master’s, Bachelor’s and Associate’s degree programs, as well as certain non-degree diploma programs, in graphic design, media arts and animation, multimedia and web design, game art and design, video and digital media production, interior and industrial design,

1

culinary arts, photography and fashion. Students can pursue their degree at one of our 31 Art Institute campuses in 18 states and two Canadian provinces, including The Art Institute Online, a division of The Art Institute of Pittsburgh.

• Argosy University. Argosy University is primarily focused on Doctorate and Master’s degree programs in clinical psychology, counseling, education and business administration. It also offers Bachelor’s and Associate’s degrees in similar fields. There are 18 Argosy University locations in twelve states.

• Brown Mackie Colleges. The Brown Mackie Colleges offer Associate’s degree programs, as well as certain non-degree diploma programs, in health sciences, business, information technology, legal studies and design technologies. There are 16 Brown Mackie College campuses in seven states, primarily in the Midwestern United States.

• South University. South University offers undergraduate and graduate degree programs in business, legal studies, information technology and health sciences fields through five campuses in the Southeastern United States and online programs.

In addition to the educational systems listed above, we also operate Western State University College of Law in California, which offers Juris Doctor degrees.

We have provided educational services for more than 35 years since the acquisition of our first Art Institute in Pittsburgh in 1970. Throughout our history, we have selectively pursued acquisitions to augment our network, program and degree offerings with established franchises such as Argosy University in 2001 and South University and American Education Centers (renamed the Brown Mackie Colleges) in 2003. Of the 26 acquisitions we have completed, the majority have been select acquisitions of single campuses where the economics of acquiring an existing school were more favorable than opening a new school.

Industry Overview

We believe the post-secondary education market in the U.S. is a $320 billion annual market, which includes public and private two-year and four-year degree granting institutions, graduate and professional schools, and non-degree vocational schools offering specialized diplomas. In the U.S., there are over 17 million students enrolled in over 6,000 institutions that offer Doctorate, Master’s, Bachelor’s and Associate’s degrees and diploma programs. According to the National Center of Education Statistics, traditional students, typically recent high school graduates under 25 years of age who are pursuing their first higher education degree, represent approximately 61% of the national student population, with the remaining 39% comprising non-traditional students, who are largely working adults pursuing additional education in their current field or preparing for a new profession.

We believe there are a number of factors contributing to the long-term growth of the post-secondary industry. First, the shift toward a services-based economy increases the demand for higher levels of education. According to the Bureau of Labor Statistics, over the next decade 61% of projected growth in employment is expected to come from jobs that require at least some college experience. Second, according to the U.S. Census Bureau, the median annual income in 2004 for a person with a Bachelor’s degree was 62% higher than that of a high school graduate. This income benefit of education has helped increase the percentage of adults over 25 years of age with Bachelor’s degrees from 11% in 1970 to 28% in 2004. Third, government and private financial aid in various forms, including loan guarantees, grants and tax benefits for post-secondary students, has consistently increased from $4.4 billion to $142.7 billion between 1971 and 2005, representing a compounded annual growth rate of 10.7%. We believe this support will continue as the government emphasizes the development of a highly-skilled, educated workforce to maintain global competitiveness. Finally, the strong demand for post-secondary education has enabled educational institutions to consistently increase tuition and fees, with public four-year colleges increasing tuition and fees by 6.9% annually on average over the last ten years, according to the College Board.

2

We believe that for-profit providers will capture an increasing share of the growing demand for post-secondary education, as this demand has been largely unaddressed by traditional public and private universities. Non-profit public and private institutions may face limited financial capability to expand their offerings in response to the growing demand for education, due to a mix of state funding challenges, declining contributions and significant expenditures on research and the professor tenure system. Certain private institutions may also control enrollments to preserve the perceived prestige and exclusivity of their degree offerings. Additionally, we believe traditional non-profit institutions generally have not emphasized flexible course schedules and online offerings that appeal to working adults, nor have they aggressively pursued fully online course offerings.

As a result, for-profit post-secondary education providers continue to have significant opportunities for growth. The National Center of Education Statistics has reported that, over the last 7 years, enrollments at for-profit post-secondary education institutions have experienced a compounded annual growth rate of approximately 11%, compared to compounded annual growth rate of approximately 2% for traditional non-profit colleges and universities over the same time period. For-profit providers have continued their strong growth, principally due to the higher flexibility of their programmatic offerings and learning structure, their emphasis on applied, career-oriented content and their ability to consistently roll out new campuses and programs. Despite rapid growth, the market share of post-secondary education captured by for-profit providers remains relatively modest with ample room for continued growth. In 2003, according to the National Center for Education Statistics, for-profit institutions accounted for approximately 6% of all post-secondary enrollments, up from 4% in 1997. In addition, for-profit post-secondary providers continue to enlarge the size of the education market through targeting underserved students who might otherwise forgo post-secondary education, increasing marketing budgets and investment in online education, which is the fastest growing segment of the post-secondary market.

The post-secondary education industry is highly fragmented, with no one provider controlling significant market share. Students choose among providers based on programs and degrees offered, program flexibility and convenience, quality of instruction, placement rates, reputation and recruiting effectiveness. Such multi-faceted market fragmentation results in significant differentiation among various education providers, limited direct competition and minimal overlap between for-profit providers. The main competitors of for-profit post-secondary education providers are local public and private two-year junior and community colleges, traditional public and private undergraduate and graduate colleges and, to a lesser degree, other for-profit, career-oriented schools.

Our Strengths

We believe that the combination of the following strengths differentiates our business:

• Flexible, diverse program offerings and broad degree capabilities. Our operational infrastructure and management approach are highly flexible and enable us to adapt quickly to changing market trends. We continuously monitor and adjust our programs based on changes in demand for new programs, degrees, schedules and delivery methods. We provide education to our students through traditional classroom settings as well as through online instruction. Our educational institutions offer a diverse range of academic programs in the following areas:

— Business	— Health sciences
— Information technology	— Media arts
— Education	— Design
— Law and legal studies	— Fashion
— Psychology and behavioral science	— Culinary arts

3

Our breadth of programmatic and degree offerings enables us to appeal to a diverse range of potential students. This helps to reduce our exposure to a decline in popularity in any one area of study. Our online education platform enables us to leverage our unique educational systems to expand our total addressable market, reaching new students who would otherwise not have the opportunity to attend classes at one of our local campuses.

• National presence. We have 71 school locations in 24 states and two Canadian provinces. Our schools are located primarily in major metropolitan areas and we focus our marketing efforts on generating demand within a 100-mile radius of the campus. Throughout our history, we have invested in our schools in order to develop what we believe is an exceptional portfolio of schools, offering state-of-the-art facilities and learning infrastructure. Our schools provide attractive and efficient learning environments including many elements found in traditional colleges, such as libraries, bookstores and laboratories, as well as the modern equipment necessary for the various programs we offer. This aids us in recruiting and retaining students and faculty. For the fiscal year ended June 30, 2006, no single campus accounted for more than 5.5% of our total revenues.

• Strong reputation for positive student outcomes. We believe that the success of our business is based upon our ability to generate positive outcomes for our students in terms of education, graduate employment and starting salary. We use these performance metrics to determine a part of our management compensation both at the corporate and campus level. This focus on student achievement has resulted in a consistent record of high student retention and graduate employment rates, which have been critically important in maintaining a strong reputation among students, faculty and employers. Based on information collected by us from graduating students and employers, we believe that, of the approximately 12,300 undergraduate students who graduated from our institutions during the calendar year ended December 31, 2005, approximately 88% of those available for employment obtained employment in their fields of study or a related field within six months of graduation. Employers of our graduates include companies such as Nordstrom, Electronic Arts, Expo Design Center, Ethan Allen and Nike.

• Strong regulatory reputation and recognition. Each of our schools located in the United States is authorized to offer educational programs and grant degrees or diplomas by the state in which the school is located and is accredited by a national or regional accreditation agency recognized by the U.S. Department of Education. Authorization by the state and accreditation by a recognized accrediting agency enables our students to access federal student loans, grants and other forms of public and private financial aid. In the regulated post-secondary education market, maintaining accreditation and state authorization at various levels is critical for operating existing schools, opening new schools and introducing new programs. We have established a culture of compliance and devote substantial resources to ensure that we meet applicable rules, standards and laws. Our success in this regard is evidenced by the success we have had maintaining the licensing and accreditation of our schools.

• Highly attractive business model. We have predictable and consistent revenue growth, a scalable operating cost structure and significant operating cash flow generation.

Predictable and consistent revenue growth. We believe that our revenue model is highly predictable given the extended period of student enrollment, historically stable retention rates and annual tuition increases. Since 1996, we have demonstrated a compounded annual enrollment growth rate of 18.4% while increasing our tuition on average by 5.7% annually. This combination of enrollment growth and tuition increases has resulted in a compounded annual revenue growth rate of 23.0% since 1996.

Margin expansion from scalable cost structure. Management’s focus on increasing the efficiency of our existing physical infrastructure and leveraging the costs of operating these facilities over a broader student population is a key component of our operating margin improvement. The scalable nature of our cost structure at the campus level has enabled us to consistently expand our EBITDA margins in each of the last

4

10 years, improving from 15.4% in the fiscal year 1996 to 18.9% in the fiscal year 2006, which we refer to as fiscal 2006, an average of more than 30 basis points of annual improvement. With an aim towards maximizing utilization, we monitor and make adjustments to our facilities’ operation plan based on changes in demand for new programs, class schedules and other elements of our operations. In addition, we expect our shared location strategy to allow us to continue to leverage our historical investment in school facilities and to control our ongoing operational and maintenance costs.

Significant operating cash flow generation. The combination of moderate maintenance capital requirements and a positive benefit from working capital enables us to convert a significant portion of our revenue to cash available for investment in existing campuses, organic growth initiatives and debt service. Additionally, given the advanced payment of tuition and fees which is customary for the post-secondary education industry, our working capital is on average a source of cash, although subject to significant seasonal fluctuations.

Our Business Strategy

We intend to pursue the following key elements of our current business strategy:

• Augment and improve our academic curricula and programs

Create new and revise existing academic programs. We continually strive to identify emerging industry trends in order to understand the evolving educational needs of our students and the employment market. We rapidly develop and introduce new programs in response to these needs with the assistance of our curriculum advisory teams, which consist of over 1,200 industry experts and employers. For example, during fiscal 2006, we introduced six new academic programs, including criminal justice, fashion and retail management, simulation and virtual environments, and community college executive leadership. We also regularly evaluate our existing program offerings and revise existing courses to meet changing market needs.

Rollout existing programs to additional schools. Our broad base of 71 schools enables us to drive growth through introducing programs that have been successful at one school to other schools within our systems. During fiscal 2006, we successfully rolled out 87 existing educational programs to additional schools. The rollout of existing programs at additional campuses allows us to drive enrollment growth at existing locations with minimal incremental costs, leverage existing curriculum development and quickly capitalize on identified market needs.

• Continue to improve our marketing and student services

Increase and optimize the use of marketing resources. We continuously evaluate the efficiency of various marketing media channels by student, program, campus and school systems, which enables us to rapidly optimize the allocation of our marketing budget. We also put significant emphasis on recruiting qualified admission officers. During fiscal 2006, we increased the number of admissions officers at our schools by approximately 36%.

Continue to emphasize student services. In student services, we focus on student retention and assisting our students in obtaining full-time employment. We maintain dedicated career services personnel at our schools, who provide assistance by establishing relationships with potential employers and preparing students for interviews and post-graduate employment. We also evaluate the placement of our students from each of our programs to assist us in determining how to allocate our resources in the future. Our focus on student outcomes also helps us to maintain a strong student retention rate and manage our cohort loan default rates, enhancing profitability and regulatory compliance. It also helps us to attract new students, because approximately 26% of the new students at our Art Institutes first come to us through referrals, generally from satisfied existing students and alumnus.

5

• Expand the number of online students

We believe that a significant growth opportunity exists in offering fully-online programs to students who may not otherwise have attended our schools. As the quality and acceptance of online education continues to increase, we continue to invest in both expanding our online course offerings and enhancing our online marketing presence. Online programs primarily target students who are not able to pursue campus-based post-secondary education, due to schedule and location constraints, and thus address an additional market beyond our campus-based target demographics. Online courses provide these students flexible schedules which can be tailored around a student’s working hours and can be combined with traditional on-campus classes. Online offerings represent an attractive avenue for growth that utilizes many of our existing education curricula while requiring less capital expenditures relative to campus-based expansion. Our online efforts continue to experience significant success, with approximately 4,100 students taking all of their courses online and approximately 9,100 students taking at least one of their courses online during the fall term of 2005, compared to approximately 2,500 and 6,400 students, respectively, during the same term in 2004.

• Grow our portfolio of schools in a capital-efficient manner

Develop new school locations. We believe that there are many attractive opportunities available to us to develop new school locations in the United States. Prior to opening a new campus, we perform a detailed analysis of the geographic area, including ranking the statistical attractiveness of a metropolitan area based on population size and growth, the percentage of the population likely to pursue education in a particular program area and the level of unmet demand represented by a student population not served by existing local post-secondary educational institutions. In opening new campuses, we utilize our centralized infrastructure and existing curricula to cost-effectively expedite the opening and ramp-up of a location. Since the beginning of fiscal year 2005, we have opened eight new school locations.

Utilize shared services locations. Since fiscal 2004, we have combined the facilities and administrative functions of some of our schools that are located in the same geographic regions. The administrative services which are combined for two or more schools located within a single facility may include career services, finance, human resources and information technology, among other functions. Currently, 24 of our schools are in shared services locations, and we plan to continue to utilize this model for new campuses in order to minimize capital expenditures and operating expenses, and increase facility utilization.

Education Management Corporation was incorporated under Pennsylvania law in 1962. EM Acquisition Corporation was incorporated under Pennsylvania law on February 3, 2006. Education Management Holdings LLC and Education Management LLC were organized under Delaware law on March 15, 2006. Education Management Finance Corp. was incorporated under Delaware law on May 2, 2006. EDMC’s principal executive offices are located at 210 Sixth Avenue, 33^rd Floor, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15222 and its telephone number is (412) 562-0900.

6

The Transactions

On March 3, 2006, EM Acquisition, formed by investment funds associated with the Sponsors, entered into the Merger Agreement with EDMC pursuant to which EM Acquisition merged with and into EDMC (the “Merger”). As a result of the Merger, investment funds designated by the Sponsors own EDMC.

At the effective time of the Merger, each share of EDMC’s common stock outstanding immediately prior to the Merger (other than shares held in treasury or shares held by any of our respective subsidiaries) was cancelled and converted into the right to receive $43.00 in cash. As described below, our Chief Executive Officer and our Chief Financial Officer entered into agreements with the Sponsors pursuant to which they agreed, among other things, to participate in the equity of EDMC in connection with the Transactions (as defined below). These executive officers are referred to in this prospectus as the “senior management participants.” Investment funds designated by Providence Equity and Goldman Sachs Capital Partners each invested $500.0 million in equity securities of EDMC for a total equity investment by the Sponsors of $1,000.0 million as part of the Transactions. Certain other investors, including certain affiliates of Goldman Sachs Capital Partners, co-invested with the investment funds designated by the Sponsors (the “Co-Investors,” and together with investment funds designated by the Sponsors and the senior management participants, the “Investors”), invested an aggregate of $300.0 million of equity in EDMC as part of the Transactions. Upon the consummation of the Transactions, the senior management participants purchased an aggregate of $3.5 million of the Sponsors’ equity interests in EDMC. We anticipate selling an additional $9.5 million of equity interests to other members of senior management pursuant to an employee stock purchase plan. In July 2006, Leeds Equity Partners IV, L.P. (“Leeds Equity Partners”) exercised an option (the “Leeds Option”) to purchase $100.0 million of EDMC securities from the Sponsors ($50.0 million from each of Providence Equity and Goldman Sachs Capital partners), which reduced the Sponsors’ total investment to $896.5 million. (From and after the exercise of the Leeds Option, the term “Co-Investors” includes Leeds Equity Partners). The Merger was approved at a special meeting held on May 25, 2006 by the affirmative vote of a majority of the votes cast by holders of shares of EDMC’s common stock entitled to vote thereon. The Merger became effective upon the closing of the Transactions on June 1, 2006.

The purchase of EDMC by the Investors was financed by borrowings under our new senior secured credit facilities, the issuance of the notes offered in the Transactions, the equity investment and participation described above and cash on hand.

The offering of the notes, the initial borrowings under our senior secured credit facilities, the equity investment and participation by the Investors in EDMC, the Merger and other related transactions are collectively referred to in this prospectus as the “Transactions.” For a more complete description of the Transactions, see “Ownership and Corporate Structure,” “The Merger” and “Description of Other Indebtedness.”

7

OWNERSHIP AND CORPORATE STRUCTURE

The following diagram below sets forth our corporate structure. Subsidiaries of Education Management LLC own all of the operating assets of EDMC. See “The Merger” and “Principal Stockholders.” This structure was achieved through a series of equity contributions that occurred in connection with the Merger.

(1) Includes $1,000.0 million of cash equity contributed by investment funds designated by the Sponsors and $300.0 million of cash equity contributed by the Co-Investors. Upon the consummation of the Transactions, the senior management participants purchased an aggregate of $3.5 million of the Sponsors’ equity interests in EDMC. In July 2006, the Sponsors sold $100.0 million of their EDMC securities to the Co-Investors, reducing the Sponsors’ total investment to $896.5 million.

(2) The obligations under our senior credit facilities are guaranteed by Education Management Holdings LLC and all of Education Management LLC’s existing direct and indirect domestic subsidiaries, other than any subsidiary that directly owns or operates a school or any inactive subsidiary that has less than $100,000 of assets. The exchange notes are fully and unconditionally guaranteed by all of our existing direct and indirect domestic restricted subsidiaries, other than any subsidiary that directly owns or operates a school or has been formed for such purpose and has no material assets.

(3) Upon the closing of the Transactions, we entered into a $300.0 million revolving credit facility with a six-year maturity, of which $50.0 million was drawn on the closing date of the Transactions. To satisfy certain regulatory requirements, EDMC and its subsidiaries will be required to maintain a letter of credit in favor of the U.S. Department of Education, which will be provided and reduce availability under our revolving credit facility. The U.S. Department of Education has notified us that the letter of credit will be approximately $87.9 million during the first year after the Transactions and is due on October 28, 2006.

(4) Upon the closing of the Transactions, we entered into a $1,185.0 million term loan facility with a seven-year maturity.

(5) Education Management Finance Corp. has only nominal assets, does not currently conduct any operations and was formed solely to act as co-issuer of the outstanding notes.

8

Sources and Uses

The sources and uses of the funds for the Transactions are shown in the table below (in thousands).

Sources of funds			Uses of funds:
Revolving credit facility(1)	$50,000		Equity purchase price(4)	$3,380,598
Cash and cash equivalents from Predecessor(5)	374,078		Cash and cash equivalents to Successor(5)	147,750
Senior secured term loan facilities(2)	1,185,000		Transaction costs(6)	140,730
Senior Notes due 2014 at 8.75%	375,000
Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016 at 10.25%	385,000
Equity contribution by Sponsors and other investors(3)	1,300,000
Total sources of funds	$3,669,078	(7)	Total uses of funds	$3,669,078

(1) Upon the closing of the Transactions, we entered into a $300.0 million revolving credit facility with a six-year maturity, of which $50.0 million was drawn on the closing date of the Transactions in order to satisfy certain regulatory financial ratios. The U.S. Department of Education has notified us that we will be required to maintain an $87.9 million letter of credit in favor of the U.S. Department of Education due to our failure to satisfy certain regulatory financial ratios after giving effect to the Transactions. The letter of credit, which is due by October 28, 2006, will be provided and reduce availability under our revolving credit facility.

(2) Upon the closing of the Transactions, we entered into a $1,185.0 million term loan facility with a seven-year maturity.

(3) Represents $1,000.0 million invested in equity securities of EDMC by investment funds designated by the Sponsors and $300.0 million invested in equity securities of EDMC by the Co-Investors. Upon the consummation of the Transactions, the senior management participants purchased an aggregate of $3.5 million of the Sponsors’ equity interests in EDMC. Following the closing of the Transactions, the Sponsors sold an additional $100.0 million of their EDMC securities to the Co-Investors, reducing the Sponsors’ total investment to $896.5 million.

(4) The holders of outstanding shares of common stock received $43.00 in cash per share in connection with the Transactions. Includes 76.0 million shares outstanding and 0.6 million of restricted shares plus intrinsic value of options outstanding of $88.6 million, which is calculated based on approximately 4.4 million options outstanding with an average exercise price of $22.82 per share.

(5) Excludes restricted cash.

(6) Fees and expenses associated with the Transactions, including placement and other financing fees, advisory fees, transaction fees paid to affiliates of the Sponsors, compensation expenses, payroll taxes and other transaction costs and professional fees. These amounts have been derived from Education Management LLC’s audited consolidated financial statements and related notes appearing elsewhere in this prospectus.

(7) We anticipate selling an additional $9.5 million of equity interests to other members of senior management in September 2006 pursuant to an employee stock purchase plan.

9

The Sponsors

Providence Equity Partners Inc.

Providence Equity Partners Inc. (“Providence Equity”) is a global private investment firm specializing in equity investments in media, communications and information companies around the world. The principals of Providence Equity manage funds with over $9 billion in equity commitments and have invested in more than 80 companies operating in over 20 countries since the firm’s inception in 1990. Significant investments include Bresnan Broadband Holdings, Casema, Comhem, eircom, Kabel Deutschland, Metro-Goldwyn-Mayer, Ono, PanAmSat, ProSiebenSat.1, Recoletos, SunGard, VoiceStream Wireless, Warner Music Group, and Western Wireless. Providence Equity is headquartered in Providence, Rhode Island and also has offices in New York and London.

Goldman Sachs Capital Partners

Founded in 1869, Goldman Sachs is one of the oldest and largest investment banking firms. Goldman Sachs is also a global leader in private equity and mezzanine investing. Established in 1986, the GS Capital Partners Funds are part of the firm’s Principal Investment Area in the Merchant Banking Division. Goldman Sachs’ Principal Investment Area has formed 12 investment vehicles aggregating $35 billion of capital to date. Significant investments include Allied World Assurance, Burger King, Coffeyville Resources, Kabel Deutschland, Nalco Company, Sanyo Electric, SunGard, VoiceStream Wireless, Western Wireless, and YES Network. With $8.5 billion in committed capital, GS Capital Partners V is the current primary investment vehicle for Goldman Sachs to make privately negotiated equity investments. Goldman Sachs’ Principal Investment Area is headquartered in New York and also has offices in London, San Francisco, Hong Kong and Tokyo.

10

The Exchange Offers

In this prospectus, the term “outstanding senior notes” refers to the 8 ³/4% Senior Notes due 2014 and the term “outstanding senior subordinated notes” refers to the 10 ¹/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016, both of which are referred to together as the “outstanding notes.” The term “exchange senior notes” refers to the 8 ³/4% Senior Notes due 2014 and the term “exchange senior subordinated notes” refers to the 10 ¹/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016, each as registered under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Securities Act”) and both of which are referred to together as the “exchange notes.” The terms “senior notes” and “senior subordinated notes” refer collectively to the outstanding senior notes and exchange senior notes and to the outstanding senior subordinated notes and exchange senior subordinated notes, respectively. The term “notes” refers collectively to the outstanding notes and the exchange notes.

On June 1, 2006, Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. issued $375 million aggregate principal amount of 8 ³/4% Senior Notes due 2014 and $385 million aggregate principal amount of 10 ¹/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016 in a private offering.

General In connection with the private offering, Education Management LLC, Education Management Finance Corp. and the guarantors of the outstanding notes entered into registration rights agreements with the initial purchasers in which they agreed, among other things, to deliver this prospectus to you and make the exchange offers. You are entitled to exchange in the applicable exchange offer your outstanding notes for exchange notes which are identical in all material respects to the outstanding notes except:

• the exchange notes have been registered under the Securities Act;

• the exchange notes are not entitled to any registration rights which are applicable to the outstanding notes under the registration rights agreements; and

• the liquidated damages provisions of the registration rights agreements are no longer applicable.

The Exchange Offers Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. are offering to exchange:

• $375 million aggregate principal amount of 8 ³/4% Senior Notes due 2014 which have been registered under the Securities Act for any and all of its existing 8 ³/4% Senior Notes due 2014; and

• $385 million aggregate principal amount of 10 ¹/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016 which have been registered under the Securities Act for any and all of its existing 10 ¹/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016;

You may only exchange outstanding notes in minimum denominations of $2,000 and integral multiples of $1,000 in excess of $2,000.

Resale Based on an interpretation by the staff of the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”) set forth in no-action letters issued to third parties, we believe that the exchange notes issued pursuant to the exchange offers in exchange for outstanding notes may be offered for

11

resale, resold and otherwise transferred by you (unless you are our “affiliate” within the meaning of Rule 405 under the Securities Act) without compliance with the registration and prospectus delivery provisions of the Securities Act, provided that:

• you are acquiring the exchange notes in the ordinary course of your business; and

• you have not engaged in, do not intend to engage in, and have no arrangement or understanding with any person to participate in, a distribution of the exchange notes.

If you are a broker-dealer and receive exchange notes for your own account in exchange for outstanding notes that you acquired as a result of market-making activities or other trading activities, you must acknowledge that you will deliver this prospectus in connection with any resale of the exchange notes. See “Plan of Distribution.”

Any holder of outstanding notes who:

• is our affiliate;

• does not acquire exchange notes in the ordinary course of its business; or

• tenders its outstanding notes in the exchange offers with the intention to participate, or for the purpose of participating, in a distribution of exchange notes

cannot rely on the position of the staff of the SEC enunciated in Morgan Stanley & Co. Incorporated (available June 5, 1991) and Exxon Capital Holdings Corporation (available May 13, 1988), as interpreted in the SEC’s letter to Shearman & Sterling, dated available July 2, 1993, or similar no-action letters and, in the absence of an exemption therefrom, must comply with the registration and prospectus delivery requirements of the Securities Act in connection with any resale of the exchange notes.

Expiration Date The exchange offers will expire at 12:00 a.m. midnight, New York City time, on                    , 2006, unless extended by Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. do not currently intend to extend the expiration date.

Withdrawal You may withdraw the tender of your outstanding notes at any time prior to the expiration of the applicable exchange offer. Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. will return to you any of your outstanding notes that are not accepted for any reason for exchange, without expense to you, promptly after the expiration or termination of the applicable exchange offer.

Conditions to the Exchange Offers Each exchange offer is subject to customary conditions, which Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. may waive. See “The Exchange Offers—Conditions to the Exchange Offers.”

12

Procedures for Tendering Outstanding Notes If you wish to participate in either exchange offer, you must complete, sign and date the applicable accompanying letter of transmittal, or a facsimile of such letter of transmittal, according to the instructions contained in this prospectus and the letter of transmittal. You must then mail or otherwise deliver the applicable letter of transmittal, or a facsimile of such letter of transmittal, together with the outstanding notes and any other required documents, to the exchange agent at the address set forth on the cover page of the letter of transmittal.

If you hold outstanding notes through The Depository Trust Company (“DTC”) and wish to participate in the exchange offers, you must comply with the Automated Tender Offer Program procedures of DTC by which you will agree to be bound by the letter of transmittal. By signing, or agreeing to be bound by, the letter of transmittal, you will represent to us that, among other things:

• you are not our “affiliate” within the meaning of Rule 405 under the Securities Act;

• you do not have an arrangement or understanding with any person or entity to participate in the distribution of the exchange notes;

• you are acquiring the exchange notes in the ordinary course of your business; and

• if you are a broker-dealer that will receive exchange notes for your own account in exchange for outstanding notes that were acquired as a result of market-making activities, that you will deliver a prospectus, as required by law, in connection with any resale of such exchange notes.

Special Procedures for Beneficial Owners If you are a beneficial owner of outstanding notes that are registered in the name of a broker, dealer, commercial bank, trust company or other nominee, and you wish to tender those outstanding notes in the applicable exchange offer, you should contact the registered holder promptly and instruct the registered holder to tender those outstanding notes on your behalf. If you wish to tender on your own behalf, you must, prior to completing and executing the applicable letter of transmittal and delivering your outstanding notes, either make appropriate arrangements to register ownership of the outstanding notes in your name or obtain a properly completed bond power from the registered holder. The transfer of registered ownership may take considerable time and may not be able to be completed prior to the expiration date.

Guaranteed Delivery Procedures If you wish to tender your outstanding notes and your outstanding notes are not immediately available or you cannot deliver your outstanding notes, the applicable letter of transmittal or any other required documents, or you cannot comply with the procedures under

13

DTC’s Automated Tender Offer Program for transfer of book-entry interests, prior to the expiration date, you must tender your outstanding notes according to the guaranteed delivery procedures set forth in this prospectus under “The Exchange Offers—Guaranteed Delivery Procedures.”

Effect on Holders of Outstanding Notes As a result of the making of, and upon acceptance for exchange of all validly tendered outstanding notes pursuant to the terms of the exchange offers, Education Management LLC, and Education Management Finance Corp. and the guarantors of the notes will have fulfilled a covenant under the applicable registration rights agreement. Accordingly, there will be no increase in the interest rate on the outstanding notes under the circumstances described in the registration rights agreements. If you do not tender your outstanding notes in the applicable exchange offer, you will continue to be entitled to all the rights and limitations applicable to the outstanding notes as set forth in the applicable indenture, except Education Management LLC, Education Management Finance Corp. and the guarantors of the notes will not have any further obligation to you to provide for the exchange and registration of the outstanding notes under the applicable registration rights agreement. To the extent that outstanding notes are tendered and accepted in the exchange offers, the trading market for outstanding notes could be adversely affected.

Consequences of Failure to Exchange All untendered outstanding notes will continue to be subject to the restrictions on transfer set forth in the outstanding notes and in the applicable indenture. In general, the outstanding notes may not be offered or sold, unless registered under the Securities Act, except pursuant to an exemption from, or in a transaction not subject to, the Securities Act and applicable state securities laws. Other than in connection with the exchange offers, Education Management LLC, Education Management Finance Corp. and the guarantors of the notes do not currently anticipate that they will register the outstanding notes under the Securities Act.

United States Federal Income Tax Consequences The exchange of outstanding notes for exchange notes in the exchange offers will not be a taxable event for United States federal income tax purposes. See “Certain United States Federal Income Tax Consequences of the Exchange Offers.”

Use of Proceeds We will not receive any cash proceeds from the issuance of exchange notes in the exchange offers. See “Use of Proceeds.”

Exchange Agent The Bank of New York is the exchange agent for the exchange offers. The addresses and telephone numbers of the exchange agent are set forth in the section captioned “The Exchange Offers—Exchange Agent.”

14

The Exchange Notes

The summary below describes the principal terms of the exchange notes. Certain of the terms and conditions described below are subject to important limitations and exceptions. The “Description of Notes” section of this prospectus contains a more detailed description of the terms and conditions of the outstanding notes and the exchange notes. The exchange notes will have terms identical in all material respects to the outstanding notes, except that the exchange notes will not contain terms with respect to transfer restrictions, registration rights and additional interest for failure to observe certain obligations in the applicable registration rights agreement.

Issuers Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp., a newly formed wholly-owned subsidiary of Education Management LLC, jointly and severally issued the outstanding notes. Education Management Finance Corp. has only nominal assets, does not currently conduct any operations and was formed solely to act as co-issuer of the outstanding notes.

Securities Offered $760.0 million aggregate principal amount of notes, consisting of:

• $375.0 million aggregate principal amount of 8 ³/4% Senior Notes due 2014; and

• $385.0 million aggregate principal amount of 10 ¹/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016.

Maturity The exchange senior notes will mature on June 1, 2014.

The exchange senior subordinated notes will mature on June 1, 2016.

Interest Rate The exchange senior notes will bear interest at a rate of 8 ³/4% per annum.

The exchange senior subordinated notes will bear interest at a rate of 10 ¹/4% per annum.

Interest Payment Dates June 1 and December 1, beginning on December 1, 2006. Interest will accrue from the issue date of the exchange notes.

Ranking The exchange senior notes will be our senior unsecured obligations and will:

• rank senior in right of payment to our future debt and other obligations that are, by their terms, expressly subordinated in right of payment to the exchange senior notes, including the exchange senior subordinated notes;

• rank equally in right of payment to all of our existing and future senior debt and other obligations that are not, by their terms, expressly subordinated in right of payment to the exchange senior notes; and

• be effectively subordinated in right of payment to all of our existing and future secured debt (including obligations under our senior secured credit facilities), to the extent of the value of the

15

assets securing such debt, and be structurally subordinated to all obligations of each of our subsidiaries that is not a guarantor of the exchange senior notes.

Similarly, the guarantees of the exchange senior notes will be senior unsecured obligations of the guarantors and will:

• rank senior in right of payment to all of the applicable guarantor’s future debt and other obligations that are, by their terms, expressly subordinated in right of payment to the exchange senior notes, including such guarantor’s guarantee under the exchange senior subordinated notes;

• rank equally in right of payment to all of the applicable guarantor’s existing and future senior debt and other obligations that are not, by their terms, expressly subordinated in right of payment to the exchange senior notes; and

• be effectively subordinated in right of payment to all of the applicable guarantor’s existing and future secured debt (including such guarantor’s guarantee under our senior secured credit facilities), to the extent of the value of the assets securing such debt, and be structurally subordinated to all obligations of any subsidiary of a guarantor if that subsidiary is not also a guarantor of the exchange senior notes.

The exchange senior subordinated notes will be our unsecured senior subordinated obligations and will:

• be subordinated in right of payment to our existing and future senior debt, including our senior secured credit facilities and the exchange senior notes;

• rank equally in right of payment to all of our future senior subordinated debt;

• be effectively subordinated in right of payment to all of our existing and future secured debt (including our senior secured credit facilities), to the extent of the value of the assets securing such debt, and be structurally subordinated to all obligations of each of our subsidiaries that is not a guarantor of the exchange senior subordinated notes; and

• rank senior in right of payment to all of our future debt and other obligations that are, by their terms, expressly subordinated in right of payment to the exchange senior subordinated notes.

Similarly, the guarantees of the exchange senior subordinated noted will be unsecured senior subordinated obligations of the guarantors and will:

• be subordinated in right of payment to all of the applicable guarantor’s existing and future senior debt, including such guarantor’s guarantee under our senior secured credit facilities and the exchange senior notes;

16

• rank equally in right of payment to all of the applicable guarantor’s future senior subordinated debt;

• be effectively subordinated in right of payment to all of the applicable guarantor’s existing and future secured debt (including such guarantor’s guarantee under our senior secured credit facilities), to the extent of the value of the assets securing such debt, and be structurally subordinated to all obligations of any subsidiary of a guarantor if that subsidiary is not also a guarantor of the exchange senior subordinated notes; and

• rank senior in right of payment to all of the applicable guarantor’s future subordinated debt and other obligations that are, by their terms, expressly subordinated in right of payment to the exchange senior subordinated notes.

As of June 30, 2006 (1) the senior notes and related guarantees would have ranked senior to the $385.0 million of senior subordinated notes, (2) the senior subordinated notes and related guarantees would have ranked junior to approximately $1,185.0 million of senior indebtedness under the senior secured credit agreement, $160.0 million outstanding under the revolving credit facility and the $375.0 million senior notes and (3) we had an additional $140.0 million of unutilized capacity under our senior secured revolving credit facility.

Guarantees The exchange notes will be fully and unconditionally guaranteed by all of Education Management LLC’s existing direct and indirect domestic restricted subsidiaries, other than any subsidiary that directly owns or operates a school or has been formed for such purpose and has no material assets, and will also be guaranteed by certain future restricted subsidiaries that guarantee other debt. Our guarantor subsidiaries accounted for approximately $9.7 million, or 0.8%, of our total revenue, and a loss of approximately $5.4 million, or 2.4%, of our total EBITDA, in each case for the year ended June 30, 2006, and approximately $0.5 million, or less than 0.1%, of our total assets, and approximately $3.3 million, or 0.1%, of our total liabilities, in each case as of June 30, 2006.

Since our non-guarantor subsidiaries are our primary source of revenue, the guarantors will have limited ability to make payments in respect of the exchange notes if the issuers are unable to satisfy their payment obligations. As a result, the guarantees will be of limited value.

Optional Redemption Prior to June 1, 2010, we will have the option to redeem some or all of the exchange senior notes for cash at a redemption price equal to 100% of their principal amount plus an applicable make-whole premium (as described in “Description of Notes—Optional Redemption—Senior Notes”) plus accrued and unpaid interest to the redemption date. Beginning on June 1, 2010, we may redeem some or all of the exchange senior notes at the redemption prices listed under “Description of Notes—Optional Redemption—Senior Notes” plus accrued interest on the exchange senior notes to the date of redemption.

17

Prior to June 1, 2011, we will have the option to redeem some or all of the exchange senior subordinated notes for cash at a redemption price equal to 100% of their principal amount plus an applicable make-whole premium (as described in “Description of Notes—Optional Redemption—Senior Subordinated Notes”) plus accrued and unpaid interest to the redemption date. Beginning on June 1, 2011, we may redeem some or all of the exchange senior subordinated notes at the redemption prices listed under “Description of Notes—Optional Redemption—Senior Subordinated Notes” plus accrued interest on the exchange senior subordinated notes to the date of redemption.

Optional Redemption After Certain Equity Offerings At any time (which may be more than once) (i) before June 1, 2009, we may choose to redeem up to 35% of the exchange senior notes at a redemption price equal to 108.75% of the face amount thereof and (ii) before June 1, 2009 we may choose to redeem up to 35% of the exchange senior subordinated notes at a redemption price equal to 110.25% of the face amount thereof, in each case, with proceeds that we raise in one or more equity offerings, as long as at least 50% of the aggregate principal amount of the exchange notes issued of the applicable series remains outstanding afterwards.

See “Description of Notes—Optional Redemption.”

Change of Control Upon the occurrence of a change of control, you will have the right, as holders of the exchange notes, to require us to repurchase some or all of the exchange notes at 101% of their face amount, plus accrued and unpaid interest to the repurchase date. See “Description of Notes—Repurchase at the Option of Holders—Change of Control.”

We may not be able to pay you the required price for exchange notes you present to us at the time of a change of control, because:

• we may not have enough funds at that time; or

• terms of our senior debt, including, in the case of the exchange senior subordinated notes, the indenture governing the exchange senior notes, may prevent us from making such payment.

Your right to require us to repurchase a series of notes upon the occurrence of a change of control will be suspended during any time that the applicable series of notes has investment grade ratings from both Moody’s Investors Service, Inc. and Standard & Poor’s.

Restrictive Covenants We will issue the exchange senior notes and the exchange senior subordinated notes under separate indentures. The indentures governing the notes contain covenants limiting our ability and the ability of our restricted subsidiaries to:

• incur additional debt or issue certain preferred shares;

• pay dividends on or make distributions in respect of our capital stock or make other restricted payments;

18

• make certain investments;

• sell certain assets;

• create liens on certain assets to secure debt;

• consolidate, merge, sell or otherwise dispose of all or substantially all of our assets;

• enter into certain transactions with our affiliates; and

• designate our subsidiaries as unrestricted subsidiaries.

These covenants are subject to a number of important limitations and exceptions. See “Description of Notes.” These covenants will be superseded with respect to a series of notes at all times when the applicable series of notes have investment grade ratings from both Moody’s Investors Service, Inc. and Standard & Poor’s but will be reinstated if such notes cease to have an investment grade rating.

No Public Market The exchange notes will be freely transferable but will be new securities for which there will not initially be a market. Accordingly, we cannot assure you whether a market for the exchange notes will develop or as to the liquidity of the market. The initial purchasers in the private offering of the outstanding notes have advised us that they currently intend to make a market in the exchange notes. The initial purchasers are not obligated, however, to make a market in the exchange notes, and any such market-making may be discontinued by the initial purchasers in their discretion without notice.

Risk Factors

Investing in the notes involves substantial risks. See “Risk Factors” for a description of some of the risks you should consider before investing in the notes.

19

SUMMARY HISTORICAL AND UNAUDITED PRO FORMA CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL AND OTHER DATA

Set forth below is summary historical consolidated financial data and summary unaudited pro forma consolidated financial data of our business, at the dates and for the periods indicated. The historical data for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2004 and 2005 and the period from July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006 have been derived from Education Management Corporation’s historical consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus and the historical data for the period June 1 through June 30, 2006 and as of June 30, 2006 have been derived from Education Management LLC’s historical consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. All such periods which have been audited by Ernst & Young LLP. The Predecessor financial data contain information relating to Education Management Corporation prior to the consummation of the Transactions. The Successor financial data contain information relating to Education Management LLC after consummation of the Transactions.

The summary unaudited pro forma consolidated financial statement of operations and other financial data for the twelve months ended June 30, 2006 have been prepared to give effect to the Transactions as if they had occurred on July 1, 2005. The pro forma adjustments are based upon available information and certain assumptions that we believe are reasonable. The summary unaudited pro forma consolidated financial data are for informational purposes only and do not purport to represent what our results of operations or financial position actually would have been if the Transactions had occurred at any date, and such data do not purport to project the results of operations for any future period.

The summary historical and unaudited pro forma consolidated financial data should be read in conjunction with “Pro Forma Condensed Consolidated Financial Information,” “Selected Historical Consolidated Financial and Other Data,” “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and the consolidated financial statements and related notes appearing elsewhere in this prospectus.

The combined results for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2006 (fiscal 2006) represent the combination of the Predecessor period from July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006 and the Successor period from June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006. This combination does not comply with GAAP or with the rules for unaudited pro forma presentation, but is presented because we believe it provides the most meaningful comparison of our results.

	Predecessor								Successor			Combined		Pro Forma
	Year Ended June 30,					July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006			June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006			Year Ended June 30, 2006		Year Ended June 30, 2006
	2004		2005
	(dollars in millions)
Statement of Operations Data:
Net revenues	$	853.0	$	1,019.3		$	1,095.8		$	74.4		$	1,170.2	$	1,170.2
Costs and expenses:
Educational services		546.1		640.4			644.6			64.7			709.3		709.0
General and administrative		167.0		203.8			278.5			26.0			304.5		309.1
Amortization of intangible assets		6.9		6.5			4.0			1.7			5.7		18.8
Total costs and expenses		720.0		850.7			927.1			92.4			1,019.5		1,036.9
Income (loss) before interest and income taxes		133.0		168.6			168.7			(18.0	)		150.7		133.3
Interest (income) expense, net		2.5		(0.2	)		(5.3	)		14.1			8.8		173.4
Income (loss) before income taxes		130.5		168.8			174.0			(32.1	)		141.9		(40.1	)
Provision (benefit) for income taxes		53.5		67.2			73.6			(12.4	)		61.2		(6.7	)
Net income (loss)	$	77.0	$	101.6		$	100.4		$	(19.7	)	$	80.7	$	(33.4	)

20

	Predecessor									Successor			Combined			Pro Forma
	Year Ended June 30,						July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006			June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006			Year Ended June 30, 2006 (3)			Year Ended June 30, 2006 (3)
	2004 (1)			2005 (2)
	(dollars in millions)
Statement of Cash Flows Data:
Net cash flows provided by (used in):
Operating activities	$	166.3		$	192.5		$	301.7		$	(22.4	)	$	279.3
Investing activities		(239.9	)		(98.1	)		(56.4	)		(3,534.1	)		(3,590.5	)
Financing activities		102.0			(39.0	)		(43.2	)		3,445.5			3,402.3
Effect of foreign exchange on cash		(0.6	)		(0.2	)		0.0			0.1			0.1
Other Data:
EBITDA(4)	$	188.3		$	252.7		$	231.6		$	(10.6	)	$	221.0		$	218.0
Capital expenditures(5)		82.3			74.9			57.9			7.7			65.6			65.6
Enrollment at beginning of fall quarter		58,828			66,179			72,471						72,471
Campus locations (at period end)(6)		66			70			71			71			71
Balance Sheet Data (as of the period ended):
Cash and cash equivalents, excluding restricted cash										$	263.3					$	263.3
Total assets											3,945.4						3,945.4
Total debt(7)											2,110.0						2,110.0
Net debt(8)											1,846.7						1,846.7
Total shareholders’ equity											1,282.8						1,282.8

(1) South University and the Brown Mackie Colleges are included as of their respective acquisition dates during fiscal 2004. Note 1 to the consolidated financial statements for the fiscal year ended 2004 provides pro forma results as if the acquisitions had been acquired and consolidated as of July 1, 2002. A charge of $2.2 million was recognized in fiscal 2004 to increase the valuation allowance related to our Canadian net deferred tax assets.

(2) Results for the fiscal year 2005, which we refer to as fiscal 2005, include non-cash, pretax charges of approximately $4.2 million related to fixed asset impairments. Also, cumulative adjustments for lease accounting recorded in fiscal 2005 increased educational services expense by approximately $3.8 million. These adjustments are comprised of $19.5 million of amortization expense and $15.7 million of reductions to rent expense.

(3) Fiscal 2006 and pro forma year ended June 30, 2006 include $32.2 million in compensation costs resulting from the implementation of SFAS No. 123(R). We adopted the modified prospective method and, therefore, results of operations in prior fiscal periods were not affected by the implementation of the standard. Also reflects $40.1 million of costs incurred as a result of the Transactions, including $30.2 million of accounting, placement, other financing, investment banking, legal and other professional fees and costs and $9.9 million of employee compensation and payroll taxes.

(4) EBITDA, a measure used by management to measure operating performance, is defined as net income plus interest expense (income), net, taxes, depreciation and amortization. EBITDA is not a recognized term under GAAP and does not purport to be an alternative to net income as a measure of operating performance or to cash flows from operating activities as a measure of liquidity. Additionally, EBITDA is not intended to be a measure of free cash flow available for management’s discretionary use, as it does not consider certain cash requirements such as interest payments, tax payments and debt service requirements. Management believes EBITDA is helpful in highlighting trends because EBITDA excludes the results of decisions that are outside the control of operating management and can differ significantly from company to company depending on long-term strategic decisions regarding capital structure, the tax jurisdictions in which companies operate and capital investments. In addition, EBITDA provides more comparability between the

21

historical results of EDMC and future results that will reflect purchase accounting and the new capital structure. Management compensates for the limitations of using non-GAAP financial measures by using them to supplement GAAP results to provide a more complete understanding of the factors and trends affecting the business than GAAP results alone. Because not all companies use identical calculations, these presentations of EBITDA may not be comparable to other similarly titled measures of other companies.

Historical EBITDA is calculated as follows:

	Predecessor								Successor
	Year Ended June 30,					July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006			June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006			Combined Year Ended June 30, 2006		Pro Forma Year Ended June 30, 2006
	2004		2005
	(dollars in millions)
Net income (loss)	$	77.0	$	101.6		$	100.4		$	(19.7	)	$	80.7	$	(33.4	)
Interest (income) expense, net		2.5		(0.2	)		(5.3	)		14.1			8.8		173.4
Provision (benefit) for income taxes		53.5		67.2			73.6			(12.4	)		61.2		(6.7	)
Depreciation and amortization, including amortization of intangible assets(a)		55.3		84.1			62.9			7.4			70.3		84.7
EBITDA	$	188.3	$	252.7		$	231.6		$	(10.6	)	$	221.0	$	218.0

(a) Depreciation and amortization includes non-cash charges related to fixed asset impairments and write-offs of $0.9 million in fiscal 2006 and $4.2 million in fiscal 2005. The year ended June 30, 2005 includes $19.5 million related to cumulative adjustments for changes in lease accounting.

(5) Capital expenditures include net cash paid for property and equipment, leasehold improvements, online curriculum development, software and other assets.

(6) Brown Mackie College-Dallas and Brown Mackie College-Fort Worth discontinued accepting new enrollments effective August 4, 2005 and completed the teach-out of all students at each school by June 30, 2006. Upon completion of the teach-out, each school closed. Brown Mackie College-Los Angeles, Brown Mackie College-Orange County, Brown Mackie College-San Diego and Brown Mackie College-Denver have discontinued new enrollments. We established a degree site of Argosy University at each location which assumed the non-diploma Brown Mackie College class offerings. The Brown Mackie College locations closed once current students completed their classes. Except for Argosy University-Denver, the Argosy University degree sites that assumed the students of the closed Brown Mackie College locations do not constitute campus locations of Argosy University.

(7) Total debt at June 30, 2006 consists of the current portion of long term debt, existing long-term debt, the term loan facility, the senior notes and senior subordinated notes and $160.0 million of our revolving credit facility that was borrowed in order to satisfy certain year-end regulatory financial ratios and repaid on July 3, 2006.

(8) Net debt is not a defined term under GAAP. Net debt is total debt less cash and cash equivalents at June 30, 2006.

22

RISK FACTORS

You should carefully consider the risk factors set forth below as well as the other information contained in this prospectus before deciding to tender your outstanding notes in the exchange offers. The risks and uncertainties described below are not the only ones we face. Additional risks and uncertainties that we are unaware of, or that we currently deem immaterial, also may become important factors that affect us.

Any of the following risks could materially and adversely affect our business, financial condition or results of operations. In that case, the trading price of the exchange notes could decline or we may not be able to make payments of interest and principal on the exchange notes, and you may lose some or all of your investment.

Risks Relating to the Exchange Offers

There may be adverse consequences if you do not exchange your outstanding notes.

If you do not exchange your outstanding notes for exchange notes in the exchange offers, you will continue to be subject to restrictions on transfer of your outstanding notes as set forth in the prospectus distributed in connection with the private offering of the outstanding notes. In general, the outstanding notes may not be offered or sold unless they are registered or exempt from registration under the Securities Act and applicable state securities laws. Except as required by the registration rights agreement, we do not intend to register resales of the outstanding notes under the Securities Act. You should refer to “Prospectus Summary—The Exchange Offers” and “The Exchange Offers” for information about how to tender your outstanding notes.

The tender of outstanding notes under the exchange offers will reduce the outstanding amount of each series of the outstanding notes, which may have an adverse effect upon, and increase the volatility of, the market prices of the outstanding notes due to a reduction in liquidity.

Risks Related to Our Indebtedness

Our substantial leverage could adversely affect our ability to raise additional capital to fund our operations, limit our ability to react to changes in the economy or our industry, expose us to interest rate risk to the extent of our variable rate debt and prevent us from meeting our debt obligations.

The following chart shows our level of indebtedness as of June 30, 2006.

	As of June 30, 2006
	(in millions)
Revolving credit facility(1)	$	160.0
Senior Secured term loan facilities due 2013		1,185.0
Senior Notes due 2014		375.0
Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016		385.0
Capital leases		3.1
Mortgage debt of consolidated entity		1.9
Total	$	2,110.0

(1) Upon the closing of the Transactions, we entered into a $300.0 million revolving credit facility with a six-year maturity, of which $160.0 million was drawn at June 30, 2006 to satisfy certain year-end regulatory requirements and repaid on July 3, 2006. The U.S. Department of Education has notified us that we will be required to maintain an $87.9 million letter of credit in favor of the U.S. Department of Education due to our failure to satisfy certain regulatory financial ratios after giving effect to the Transactions. The letter of credit, which is due by October 28, 2006, will be provided and reduce availability under the revolving credit facility.

23

Our high degree of leverage could have important consequences for you, including:

• making it more difficult for us to make payments on the notes;

• increasing our vulnerability to general economic and industry conditions;

• requiring a substantial portion of cash flow from operations to be dedicated to the payment of principal and interest on our indebtedness, therefore reducing our ability to use our cash flow to fund our operations, capital expenditures and future business opportunities;

• exposing us to the risk of increased interest rates as certain of our borrowings, including borrowings under our senior secured credit facilities, will bear interest at variable rates;

• restricting us from making strategic acquisitions or causing us to make non-strategic divestitures;

• limiting our ability to obtain additional financing for working capital, capital expenditures, product development, debt service requirements, acquisitions and general corporate or other purposes; and

• limiting our ability to adjust to changing market conditions and placing us at a competitive disadvantage compared to our competitors who are less highly leveraged.

We and our subsidiaries may be able to incur substantial additional indebtedness in the future, subject to the restrictions contained in our senior secured credit facilities and the indentures governing the notes. If new indebtedness is added to our current debt levels, the related risks that we now face could intensify.

Our pro forma interest, not including non-cash amortization of deferred financing fees, for the twelve months ended June 30, 2006 would have been $165.7 million.

Our debt agreements contain restrictions that limit our flexibility in operating our business.

Our senior secured credit facilities and the indentures governing the notes contain various covenants that limit our ability to engage in specified types of transactions. These covenants limit our and our restricted subsidiaries’ ability to, among other things:

• incur additional indebtedness or issue certain preferred shares;

• pay dividends on, repurchase or make distributions in respect of our capital stock or make other restricted payments;

• make certain investments;

• sell certain assets;

• create liens;

• consolidate, merge, sell or otherwise dispose of all or substantially all of our assets; and

• enter into certain transactions with our affiliates.

In addition, under the senior secured credit agreement, we are required to satisfy and maintain specified financial ratios and other financial condition tests. Our ability to meet those financial ratios and tests can be affected by events beyond our control, and we cannot assure you that we will meet those ratios and tests. A breach of any of these covenants could result in a default under the senior secured credit agreement. Upon the occurrence of an event of default under the senior secured credit agreement, the lenders could elect to declare all amounts outstanding under the senior secured credit agreement to be immediately due and payable and terminate all commitments to extend further credit. If we were unable to repay those amounts, the lenders under the senior secured credit facilities could proceed against the collateral granted to them to secure that indebtedness. We have pledged a significant portion of our assets as collateral under the senior secured credit agreement. If the lenders under the senior secured credit agreement accelerate the repayment of borrowings, we cannot assure you that we will have sufficient assets to repay our indebtedness under the senior secured credit facilities, as well as our unsecured indebtedness.

24

Risks Related to Our Business

Opening additional new schools and growing our online student programs could be difficult for us.

We anticipate continuing to open new schools in the future. Establishing new schools poses unique challenges and requires us to make investments in management, capital expenditures, marketing expenses and other resources. When opening a new school, we are required to obtain appropriate state or provincial and accrediting agency approvals. In addition, to be eligible for federal student financial aid programs, a school has to be certified by the U.S. Department of Education. Our failure to effectively manage the operations of newly established schools or service areas, or any diversion of management’s attention from our core school operating activities, could harm our business.

We anticipate significant future growth from online courses we offer to students. As of June 30, 2006, The Art Institute Online offers a broad suite of programs in the creative fields and South University offers online bachelor’s degree programs in business administration, information technology and health sciences. In future years we plan to continue to roll out new online programs at The Art Institutes and South University along with online classes at Argosy University. Further, the success of any new online programs and classes depends in part on our ability to expand the content of our programs, develop new programs in a cost-effective manner, and meet the needs of our students in a timely manner. The expansion of our existing online programs, the creation of new online classes and the development of new online programs may not be accepted by students or the online education market.

The development of new programs and classes, both conventional and online, is subject to requirements and limitations imposed by the U.S. Department of Education, the state licensing agencies and the accrediting bodies. Such requirements and limitations may or may not be related to the Transactions. The imposition of restrictions on the initiation of new educational programs by any of our regulatory agencies as a result of the Transactions may delay such expansion plans.

Our success depends, in part, on the effectiveness of our marketing and advertising programs in recruiting new students.

In order to maintain and increase our revenues and margins, we must continue to attract new students in a cost-effective manner. Over the last fiscal year, we have increased the amounts spent on marketing and advertising, and we anticipate this trend to continue. If we are unable to successfully advertise and market our schools and programs, our ability to attract and enroll new students could be adversely impacted and, consequently, our financial performance could suffer. We use marketing tools such as the Internet, radio, television and print media advertising to promote our schools and programs. Our representatives also make presentations at high schools to promote The Art Institutes. Additionally, we rely on the general reputation of our schools and referrals from current students, alumni and employers as a source of new students. Among the factors that could prevent us from successfully marketing and advertising our schools and programs are the failure of our marketing tools and strategy to appeal to prospective students, current student and/or employer dissatisfaction with our program offerings and diminished access to high school campuses.

Failure to keep pace with changing market needs and technology could harm our student population.

The success of our schools depends to a large extent on the willingness of prospective employers to employ our students upon graduation. Our schools must keep current with changing technological needs and skills demanded by prospective employers. If we fail to respond to changes in industry requirements by offering new programs to our students or investing in new technology, it could have a material adverse effect on our ability to attract students.

Our success depends upon our ability to recruit and retain key personnel.

Our success also depends, in large part, upon our ability to attract and retain highly qualified faculty, school presidents and administrators and corporate management. We may have difficulty locating and hiring qualified

25

personnel, and retaining such personnel once hired. The loss of the services of any of our key personnel, or our failure to attract and retain other qualified and experienced personnel on acceptable terms, could cause our business to suffer.

In June 2006, we experienced certain changes in our executive management. Upon consummation of the Transactions, Robert T. McDowell retired as our Executive Vice President—Chief Financial Officer and was replaced by Edward H. West. Robert B. Knutson, our Chairman of the Board of Directors, retired and J. William Brooks, formerly our President and Chief Operating Officer, resigned from the Company effective June 30, 2006. We do not anticipate hiring a new President or Chief Operating Officer.

Failure to obtain additional capital in the future could reduce our ability to grow.

We believe that funds from operations, cash, investments and borrowings under our revolving credit facility will be adequate to fund our current operating plans for the foreseeable future. However, we may need additional debt or equity financing in order to finance our continued growth. The amount and timing of such additional financing will vary principally depending on the timing and size of acquisitions and new school openings, the sellers’ willingness to provide financing for acquisitions, and the amount of cash flow from our operations. To the extent that we require additional financing in the future and are unable to obtain such additional financing, we may not be able to fully implement our growth strategy.

Competitors with greater resources could harm our business.

The post-secondary education market is highly fragmented and competitive. Our schools compete for students with traditional public and private two-year and four-year colleges and universities and other proprietary schools, including those that offer online learning programs. Many public and private colleges and universities, as well as other private career-oriented schools, offer programs similar to those we offer. Public institutions receive substantial government subsidies, and public and private institutions have access to government and foundation grants, tax-deductible contributions and other financial resources generally not available to proprietary schools. Accordingly, public and private institutions may have instructional and support resources superior to those in the proprietary sector, and public institutions can offer substantially lower tuition prices. Some of our competitors in both the public and private sectors also have substantially greater financial and other resources than we do.

Failure to effectively manage our growth could harm our business.

Our business has grown rapidly. Our continued rapid growth may place a strain on our management, operations, employees, or resources. We may not be able to maintain or accelerate our current growth rate, effectively manage our expanding operations, or achieve planned growth on a timely or profitable basis. If we are unable to manage our growth effectively, we may experience operating inefficiencies, and our net income may be materially adversely affected.

Failure to integrate acquired schools could harm our business.

From time to time, we engage in evaluations of, and discussions with, possible acquisition candidates. We may not continue to be able to identify suitable acquisition opportunities or to acquire any such schools on favorable terms. Additionally, we may not be able to successfully integrate any acquired schools into our operations profitably. Continued growth through acquisition may also subject us to unanticipated business or regulatory uncertainties, barriers or liabilities. Acquired schools may not enhance our business and, if we do not successfully address associated risks and uncertainties, may ultimately have a material adverse effect on our growth and ability to compete.

In the event we decide to acquire an institution, the U.S. Department of Education and most applicable state authorizing and accrediting agencies would consider that a change of ownership or control of the institution has

26

occurred. A change of ownership or control of an institution under the standards of the U.S. Department of Education may result in the imposition of requirements for the posting of a letter of credit in favor of the U.S. Department of Education. It may also result in the imposition of limitations on the growth of the institution and could result in the temporary suspension of the institution’s participation in the federal student financial aid programs until the U.S. Department of Education issues a temporary certification document. State authorizing agencies and accrediting agencies may likewise impose restrictions or deny or delay approval of an acquisition. If we were unable to promptly reestablish the state authorization, accreditation or U.S. Department of Education certification of an institution we acquired, depending on the size of the acquisition, that failure could have a material adverse effect on our business.

We may be unable to operate one or more of our schools due to a natural disaster.

A number of our schools are located in Florida and elsewhere in the Southeastern United States. We also have a number of schools located in southern California. One or more of these schools may be unable to operate for an extended period of time in the event of a hurricane, earthquake or other natural disaster which does substantial damage to the area in which a school is located. The failure of one or more of our schools to operate for a substantial period of time could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations.

The Sponsors, acting collectively, have the right to control us and may have conflicts of interest with us or you in the future.

Investment funds designated by the Sponsors collectively own approximately 80.5% of our capital stock. While the Sponsors are not under common control, either directly or indirectly, were the Sponsors to act collectively they would have control over our decisions to enter into any corporate transaction and have the ability to prevent any transaction that requires the approval of stockholders regardless of whether noteholders believe that any such transactions are in their own best interests. For example, the Sponsors could collectively cause us to make acquisitions that increase the amount of indebtedness that is secured or that is senior to the exchange senior subordinated notes or to sell assets.

Additionally, the Sponsors are in the business of making investments in companies and may from time to time acquire and hold interests in businesses that compete directly or indirectly with us. One or more of the Sponsors may also pursue acquisition opportunities that may be complementary to our business and, as a result, those acquisition opportunities may not be available to us. So long as investment funds designated by the Sponsors collectively continue to indirectly own a significant amount of the outstanding shares of our common stock, the Sponsors will collectively continue to be able to strongly influence or effectively control our decisions.

Risks Related to Our Industry

Failure of our schools to comply with extensive regulations could result in financial penalties, restrictions on our operations, or loss of external financial aid funding for our students.

Approximately 70% of our revenues in fiscal 2004, 2005 and 2006 were derived from federal student financial aid programs pursuant to Title IV of the Higher Education Act of 1965, as amended (“Title IV programs”). Our participation in the Title IV programs is subject to oversight by the U.S. Department of Education and is conditioned by approvals granted by other agencies as well as subject to independent certification by the U.S. Department of Education. Each of our schools must also obtain and maintain approval to enroll students, offer instruction and grant credentials from the state oversight agency in the state in which the school is located. Such approval is also a precondition to the ability of our students to participate in the Title IV programs. Participation in the Title IV programs also requires each school to be accredited by an accrediting agency recognized by the U.S. Department of Education as a reliable authority on institutional quality and integrity. Accreditation is, in turn, conditioned on each school maintaining applicable state authorization. Our schools must also comply with the requirements of any loan guarantee agencies which guarantee certain federal student loans made to our schools’ students, the requirements of such state grant programs as may be available to our students, and the requirements of specialized accrediting agencies which oversee institutional quality in

27

particular program areas. As a result, our schools are subject to extensive regulation and review by these agencies which cover virtually all phases of our operations. These regulations also affect our ability to acquire or open additional schools, add new educational programs or substantially change existing programs, or change our corporate or ownership structure. The agencies that regulate our operations periodically revise their requirements and modify their interpretations of existing requirements. See “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Regulations.”

If one of our schools were to violate or fail to meet any of these regulatory requirements, we could suffer financial penalty, limitations on our operating activities or termination of the school’s ability to grant degrees and certificates or the school’s eligibility to receive federal student financial aid funds on behalf of its students. A significant portion of our students rely on federal student financial aid funds to finance their education. We cannot predict with certainty how all of these requirements will be applied or interpreted by the regulatory body, or whether each of our schools will be able to comply with all of the requirements in the future.

Congress may change the law or reduce funding for federal student financial aid programs, which could harm our student population and revenue.

Political and budgetary concerns can significantly affect the Title IV programs and other laws governing the federal student financial aid programs. The Title IV programs are made available pursuant to the provisions of the Higher Education Act of 1965, as amended (“HEA”), and the HEA must be reauthorized by the Congress approximately every six years. Independent of reauthorization, Congress must annually appropriate funds to fund the Title IV programs. The HEA is currently expected to be reauthorized or extended (and funded for the following fiscal year) during 2006. Reauthorization may result in numerous legislative changes, including funding reductions. Congress may also impose certain requirements upon the state or accrediting agencies respecting their approval of our schools. Any action by Congress that significantly reduces funding for the federal student financial aid programs or the ability of our schools or students to participate in these programs would have a material adverse effect on our student population and revenue. Legislative action may also increase our administrative costs and require us to modify our practices in order for our schools to comply fully with applicable requirements.

If we do not meet specific financial responsibility ratios and other compliance tests established by the U.S. Department of Education our schools may lose eligibility to participate in federal student financial aid programs.

To participate in the federal student financial aid programs, an institution must either satisfy certain quantitative standards of financial responsibility on an annual basis, or post a letter of credit in favor of the U.S. Department of Education and possibly accept other conditions and/or limitations on its participation in the federal student financial aid programs. As of June 30, 2006, three of our schools did not satisfy the quantitative measures of financial responsibility on an individual school basis and three other of our schools were required to post letters of credit for other reasons.

Certain transactions such as those associated with the Merger Agreement may give rise to a separate U.S. Department of Education review of financial responsibility. We have been notified by the U.S. Department of Education that we will be required to post a $87.9 million letter of credit by October 28, 2006 and will be subject to provisional certification and additional financial and cash monitoring on our disbursements of Title IV funds due to EDMC’s failure on a consolidated basis to satisfy the financial responsibility standards after the completion of the Transactions. The amount of the letter of credit is currently set at 10% of the Title IV funds received by students at our schools during our most recent fiscal year. The U.S. Department of Education’s evaluation of our schools financial responsibility on the basis of EDMC’s consolidated financial statements may continue through future annual reviews, and result in continuation of the letter of credit, provisional certification, and financial and cash monitoring in future years. Any conditions and/or limitations on our participation in the federal student financial aid programs in addition to the letter of credit, provisional certification and additional financial and cash monitoring could adversely affect our net income and student population. Although the initial

28

letter of credit will expire in March 2008, there can be no assurance that the letter of credit requirement will not be extended or that additional restrictions will not be imposed in the future, including an increase of the percentage or dollar amount of the letter of credit. Our inability to obtain a required letter of credit in the future could result in a loss of access to the student financial assistance programs which would adversely affect our net income and student population.

An institution may lose its eligibility to participate in some or all of the federal student financial aid programs if defaults by its students on their federal student loans exceed specified rates. Certain of our schools have default rates in excess of specified rates in the Federal Perkins Loan Program, which is not a material federal student aid program for the Company or its institutions. Additionally, a school is ineligible to participate in the federal student financial aid programs if it derives more than 90% of its revenue from these Title IV programs in any fiscal year. Though we believe our schools do not exceed the specified rates for student default for our material programs or the percentage of revenue limitation test, loss of eligibility to participate in the federal student financial aid programs by one of our schools could have a material adverse effect on our student population and revenue.

Additionally, in the event of a bankruptcy filing by any of our schools, such schools would not be eligible to receive Title IV program funds, notwithstanding the automatic stay provisions of federal bankruptcy law, which would make any reorganization difficult.

If our schools do not maintain their state authorizations and accreditations, they may not operate or participate in federal student financial aid programs.

A school that grants degrees, diplomas, or certificates must be authorized by the relevant agencies of the state in which it is located and, in some cases, other states where the school is deemed to be operating. State authorization and accreditation by an accrediting agency recognized by the U.S. Department of Education also are required for an institution to participate in the federal student financial aid programs. The failure by one or more of our schools to maintain their state authorizations and accreditations could have a material adverse effect on our business.

If regulators do not approve transactions involving a change of control or change in our corporate structure, including the Transactions, we may lose our ability to participate in federal student financial aid programs.

If we or one of our schools experiences a change of ownership or control under the standards of applicable state agencies, accrediting agencies or the U.S. Department of Education, we or the schools governed by such agencies must seek the approval of the relevant agencies. Certain of these regulatory agencies considered the Transactions to constitute a change of ownership or control. Though we anticipate receiving all required regulatory approvals, some of these agencies have yet to provide final approval of the Transactions. The failure of any of our schools to reestablish its state authorization, accreditation or U.S. Department of Education certification would result in a suspension of operating authority or suspension or loss of federal student financial aid funding, which could have a material adverse effect on our student population and revenue. Further, such a change of ownership or control could result in the imposition of growth restrictions on our schools, including limitations on our ability to open new campuses or initiate new educational programs. We have obtained assurances from the U.S. Department of Education that it will not implement such growth restrictions solely as a result of the Transactions. However, such assurances do not apply to future changes of ownership or control or to the state or accrediting agencies. Such growth restrictions could have a material adverse impact on our student population and revenue and future growth plans.

Loss of or reductions in state grants and the availability of alternative loans for our students could negatively impact our revenues from students.

In fiscal 2006, approximately 3% of our net revenues were indirectly derived from state grant programs. State grant programs are generally subject to annual appropriation by the state legislature which may lead to the

29

state eliminating or significantly decreasing the amount of state aid to students at our schools. The loss of access to these state grants by our students could have a material adverse effect on our business due to enrollment losses at our schools.

Federal, state and Canadian financial aid grants have not kept up with increases in the cost of living and the growth of tuition rates. As a result, an increasing number of our students who need additional funds to attend our schools rely on alternative loans to fund tuition payments. During fiscal 2006, alternative loans to students at our schools represented approximately 19% of our revenue. The loans are credit-based so not all potential students satisfy the qualification standards. Third party lenders may impose terms on these loans which make them less attractive to our students or may impose additional restrictions on the loan terms to our students or schools. The inability of our students to obtain alternative loans from third party lenders could have a material adverse effect on our business due to enrollment losses at our schools.

Failure to comply with extensive Canadian regulations could affect the ability of our schools in Canada to participate in Canadian financial aid programs.

Our schools located in British Columbia and Ontario derive a significant percentage of their revenue from Canadian governmental financial programs. These schools must meet eligibility standards to administer these programs and must comply with extensive statutes, rules, regulations and requirements. If our Canadian schools cannot meet these and other eligibility standards or fail to comply with applicable requirements, it could have a material adverse effect on our business and results of operations.

Additionally, the Canadian and various provincial governments continuously review the legislative, regulatory and other requirements relating to student financial assistance programs due to political and budgetary pressures. Although we do not currently anticipate a significant reduction in the funding for these programs, any change that significantly reduces funding or the ability of our schools to participate in these programs could have a material adverse effect on our business and results of operation.

If we fail to demonstrate “administrative capability” to the U.S. Department of Education, our business could suffer.

Regulations adopted by the U.S. Department of Education specify criteria an institution must satisfy to establish that it has the requisite “administrative capability” to participate in the Title IV programs. These criteria require, among other things, that the institution:

• comply with all applicable federal student financial aid regulations;

• have capable and sufficient personnel to administer the federal student financial aid programs;

• have acceptable methods of defining and measuring the satisfactory academic progress of its students;

• provide financial aid counseling to its students; and

• submit all reports and financial statements required by the regulations.

If an institution fails to satisfy any of these criteria, the U.S. Department of Education may:

• require the repayment of federal student financial aid funds;

• transfer the institution from the “advance” system of payment of federal student financial aid funds to the “reimbursement” system of payment or “cash monitoring”;

• place the institution on provisional certification status; or

• commence a proceeding to impose a fine or to limit, suspend or terminate the participation of the institution in Title IV programs.

30

If one or more of our schools loses or is limited in its access to, or is required to re-pay, federal student financial aid funds due to a failure to demonstrate administrative capability, our business could be materially adversely affected.

Government and regulatory agencies may conduct compliance reviews, bring claims or initiate litigation against us.

The post-secondary education industry is highly regulated. From time to time, we may be subject to program reviews, investigations, claims of non-compliance, or lawsuits by governmental agencies or third parties, which may allege statutory violations, regulatory infractions, or common law causes of action. If the results of the investigations are unfavorable to us or if we are unable to successfully defend against third-party lawsuits, we may be required to pay material monetary damages or be subject to material fines, penalties, injunctions or other censure that could materially and adversely affect our business. We also may be limited in our ability to open new schools or add new program offerings and may be adversely impacted by the negative publicity surrounding an investigation or lawsuit. Even if we adequately address the issues raised by an agency investigation or successfully defend a third-party lawsuit, we may have to devote significant money and management resources to address these issues, which could harm our business.

Risks Related to the Exchange Notes

We may not be able to generate sufficient cash to service all of our indebtedness, including the notes, and may be forced to take other actions to satisfy our obligations under our indebtedness, which may not be successful.

Our ability to make scheduled payments or to refinance our debt obligations depends on our financial condition and operating performance, which is subject to prevailing economic and competitive conditions and to certain financial, business and other factors beyond our control. We cannot assure you that we will maintain a level of cash flows from operating activities sufficient to permit us to pay the principal, premium, if any, and interest on our indebtedness, including the notes.

If our cash flows and capital resources are insufficient to fund our debt service obligations, we may be forced to reduce or delay investments and capital expenditures, or to sell assets, seek additional capital or restructure or refinance our indebtedness, including the notes. These alternative measures may not be successful and may not permit us to meet our scheduled debt service obligations. In the absence of such operating results and resources, we could face substantial liquidity problems and might be required to dispose of material assets or operations to meet our debt service and other obligations. Our senior secured credit facilities and the indentures under which the exchange notes will be issued restrict our ability to use the proceeds from the disposition. We may not be able to consummate those dispositions or to obtain the proceeds that we could realize from them and these proceeds may not be adequate to meet any debt service obligations then due.

Despite our current leverage, we may still be able to incur substantially more debt. This could further exacerbate the risks that we and our subsidiaries face.

We and our subsidiaries may be able to incur substantial additional indebtedness in the future. If we incur any additional indebtedness that ranks equally with the exchange senior notes or the exchange senior subordinated notes, the holders of that additional debt will be entitled to share ratably with the holders of the exchange senior notes and the exchange senior subordinated notes, respectively, in any proceeds distributed in connection with any insolvency, liquidation, reorganization, dissolution or other winding-up of us. This may have the effect of reducing the amount of proceeds paid to you. If new debt is added to our current debt levels, the related risks that we and our subsidiaries now face could intensify.

31

Your right to receive payments on each series of notes is effectively junior to those lenders who have a security interest in our assets.

Our obligations under the exchange notes and our guarantors’ obligations under their guarantees of the exchange notes are unsecured, but our obligations under our senior secured credit facilities and each guarantor’s obligations under their respective guarantees of the senior secured credit facilities are secured by a security interest in substantially all of the domestic tangible and intangible assets of us and the guarantors, including the stock of most of our wholly-owned U.S. subsidiaries, and a portion of the stock of certain of our non-U.S. subsidiaries. If we are declared bankrupt or insolvent, or if we default under our senior secured credit agreement, the lenders could declare all of the funds borrowed thereunder, together with accrued interest, immediately due and payable. If we were unable to repay such indebtedness, the lenders could foreclose on the pledged assets to the exclusion of holders of the notes, even if an event of default exists under the indentures governing the notes at such time. Furthermore, if the lenders foreclose and sell the pledged equity interests in any subsidiary guarantor under the notes, then that guarantor will be released from its guarantee of the notes automatically and immediately upon such sale. In any such event, because the notes will not be secured by any of our assets or the equity interests in subsidiary guarantors, it is possible that there would be no assets remaining from which your claims could be satisfied or, if any assets remained, they might be insufficient to satisfy your claims fully. See “Description of Other Indebtedness.”

As of June 30, 2006, we had $1,345.0 million of senior secured indebtedness, all of which was indebtedness under our credit facilities, including $160.0 million outstanding under our senior secured revolving credit facility that was repaid on July 3, 2006, leaving us with significant additional borrowing capacity under that facility. We will be required to post a letter of credit of $87.9 million with the U.S. Department of Education by October 28, 2006 due to our failure to meet certain regulatory financial ratios after giving effect to the Transactions. The indentures governing the exchange notes permit us and our restricted subsidiaries to incur substantial additional indebtedness in the future, including senior secured indebtedness.

Claims of noteholders will be structurally subordinate to claims of creditors of all of our non-U.S. subsidiaries and some of our U.S. subsidiaries because they will not guarantee the notes.

The exchange notes will be fully and unconditionally guaranteed by all of our existing direct and indirect domestic restricted subsidiaries, other than any subsidiary that directly owns or operates a school or has been formed for such purpose and has no material assets. The exchange notes will not be guaranteed by any of our non-U.S. subsidiaries or future subsidiaries, unless they guarantee other debt. Accordingly, claims of holders of the exchange notes will be structurally subordinate to the claims of creditors of these non-guarantor subsidiaries, including trade creditors. All obligations of our non-guarantor subsidiaries will have to be satisfied before any of the assets of such subsidiaries would be available for distribution, upon a liquidation or otherwise, to us or a guarantor of the exchange notes.

Our guarantor subsidiaries accounted for approximately $9.7 million, or 0.8%, of our total revenue, and a loss of approximately $5.4 million, or 2.4%, of our total EBITDA, in each case for the year ended June 30, 2006, and approximately $0.5 million, less than 0.1% of our total assets, and approximately $3.3 million, or 0.1% of our total liabilities, in each case as of June 30, 2006.

Since our non-guarantor subsidiaries are our primary source of revenue, the guarantors will have limited ability to make payments in respect of the exchange notes if the issuers are unable to satisfy their payment obligations. As a result, the guarantees will be of limited value.

Your right to receive payments on the exchange senior subordinated notes will be junior to the rights of the lenders under our senior secured credit facilities and all of our other senior debt and any of our future senior indebtedness.

The exchange senior subordinated notes will be general unsecured obligations that will be junior in right of payment to all of our existing and future senior indebtedness. As of June 30, 2006, we had approximately

32

$1,345.0 million of senior indebtedness under our senior secured credit facilities, including $160.0 million outstanding on our revolving credit facility that was repaid on July 3, 2006 and $375.0 million of senior indebtedness under the senior notes. An additional $140.0 million was available to be drawn under our revolving credit facility at June 30, 2006.

We may not pay principal, premium, if any, interest or other amounts on account of the exchange senior subordinated notes in the event of a payment default or certain other defaults in respect of certain of our senior indebtedness, including debt under the senior secured credit facilities, unless the senior indebtedness has been paid in full or the default has been cured or waived. In addition, in the event of certain other defaults with respect to the senior indebtedness, we may not be permitted to pay any amount on account of the exchange senior subordinated notes for a designated period of time.

Because of the subordination provisions in the exchange senior subordinated notes, in the event of our bankruptcy, liquidation or dissolution, our assets will not be available to pay obligations under the exchange senior subordinated notes until we have made all payments in cash on our senior indebtedness. We cannot assure you that sufficient assets will remain after all these payments have been made to make any payments on the exchange senior subordinated notes, including payments of principal or interest when due.

If we default on our obligations to pay our indebtedness, we may not be able to make payments on the exchange notes.

Any default under the agreements governing our indebtedness, including a default under the senior secured credit agreement, that is not waived by the required lenders, and the remedies sought by the holders of such indebtedness, could prevent us from paying principal, premium, if any, and interest on the exchange notes and substantially decrease the market value of the exchange notes. If we are unable to generate sufficient cash flow and are otherwise unable to obtain funds necessary to meet required payments of principal, premium, if any, and interest on our indebtedness, or if we otherwise fail to comply with the various covenants, including financial and operating covenants, in the instruments governing our indebtedness (including covenants in our senior secured credit facilities and the indentures governing the exchange notes), we could be in default under the terms of the agreements governing such indebtedness, including our senior secured credit agreement and the indentures governing the exchange notes. In the event of such default, the holders of such indebtedness could elect to declare all the funds borrowed thereunder to be due and payable, together with accrued and unpaid interest, the lenders under our senior secured credit facilities could elect to terminate their commitments thereunder, cease making further loans and institute foreclosure proceedings against our assets, and we could be forced into bankruptcy or liquidation. If our operating performance declines, we may in the future need to obtain waivers from the required lenders under our senior secured credit facilities to avoid being in default. If we breach our covenants under our senior secured credit facilities and seek a waiver, we may not be able to obtain a waiver from the required lenders. If this occurs, we would be in default under our senior secured credit agreement, the lenders could exercise their rights, as described above, and we could be forced into bankruptcy or liquidation.

We may not be able to repurchase the exchange notes upon a change of control.

Upon the occurrence of specific kinds of change of control events, we will be required to offer to repurchase all outstanding notes at 101% of their principal amount plus accrued and unpaid interest. The source of funds for any such purchase of the exchange notes will be our available cash or cash generated from our subsidiaries’ operations or other sources, including borrowings, sales of assets or sales of equity. We may not be able to repurchase the exchange notes upon a change of control because we may not have sufficient financial resources to purchase all of the exchange notes that are tendered upon a change of control. Further, we will be contractually restricted under the terms of our senior secured credit agreement from repurchasing all of the exchange senior subordinated notes tendered by holders upon a change of control. Accordingly, we may not be able to satisfy our obligations to purchase the exchange senior subordinated notes unless we are able to refinance or obtain waivers under our senior secured credit agreement. Our failure to repurchase the exchange notes upon a change of control

33

would cause a default under the indentures governing the exchange notes and a cross-default under the senior secured credit agreement. The senior secured credit agreement also provides that a change of control will be a default that permits lenders to accelerate the maturity of borrowings thereunder. Any of our future debt agreements may contain similar provisions.

The lenders under the senior secured credit facilities will have the discretion to release the guarantors under the senior secured credit agreement in a variety of circumstances, which will cause those guarantors to be released from their guarantees of the exchange notes.

While any obligations under the senior secured credit facilities remain outstanding, any guarantee of the exchange notes may be released without action by, or consent of, any holder of the exchange notes or the trustee under the indentures governing the exchange notes, at the discretion of lenders under the senior secured credit facilities, if the related guarantor is no longer a guarantor of obligations under the senior secured credit facilities or any other indebtedness. See “Description of Notes.” The lenders under the senior secured credit facilities will have the discretion to release the guarantees under the senior secured credit facilities in a variety of circumstances. You will not have a claim as a creditor against any subsidiary that is no longer a guarantor of the exchange notes, and the indebtedness and other liabilities, including trade payables, whether secured or unsecured, of those subsidiaries will effectively be senior to claims of noteholders.

Federal and state fraudulent transfer laws may permit a court to void the exchange notes and related guarantees, and, if that occurs, you may not receive any payments on the exchange notes.

Federal and state fraudulent transfer and conveyance statutes may apply to the issuance of the exchange notes and the incurrence of the related guarantees. Under federal bankruptcy law and comparable provisions of state fraudulent transfer or conveyance laws, which may vary from state to state, the exchange notes or related guarantees could be voided as a fraudulent transfer or conveyance if (1) we or any of the guarantors, as applicable, issued the exchange notes or incurred the related guarantees with the intent of hindering, delaying or defrauding creditors or (2) we or any of the guarantors, as applicable, received less than reasonably equivalent value or fair consideration in return for either issuing the exchange notes or incurring the related guarantees and, in the case of (2) only, one of the following is also true at the time thereof:

• we or any of the guarantors, as applicable, were insolvent or rendered insolvent by reason of the issuance of the exchange notes or the incurrence of the related guarantees;

• the issuance of the exchange notes or the incurrence of the related guarantees left us or any of the guarantors, as applicable, with an unreasonably small amount of capital to carry on the business;

• we or any of the guarantors intended to, or believed that we or such guarantor would, incur debts beyond our or such guarantor’s ability to pay as they mature; or

• we or any of the guarantors was a defendant in an action for money damages, or had a judgment for money damages docketed against us or such guarantor if, in either case, after final judgment, the judgment is unsatisfied.

If a court were to find that the issuance of the exchange notes or the incurrence of the related guarantees was a fraudulent transfer or conveyance, the court could void the payment obligations under the exchange notes or such related guarantees or further subordinate the exchange notes or such related guarantees to presently existing and future indebtedness of ours or of the related guarantor, or require the holders of the exchange notes to repay any amounts received with respect to such related guarantees. In the event of a finding that a fraudulent transfer or conveyance occurred, you may not receive any repayment on the exchange notes. Further, the voidance of the exchange notes could result in an event of default with respect to our and our subsidiaries’ other debt that could result in acceleration of such debt.

As a general matter, value is given for a transfer or an obligation if, in exchange for the transfer or obligation, property is transferred or an antecedent debt is secured or satisfied. A debtor will generally not be

34

considered to have received value in connection with a debt offering if the debtor uses the proceeds of that offering to make a dividend payment or otherwise retire or redeem equity securities issued by the debtor. Because we will use most of the proceeds to fund the merger consideration to our parent’s shareholders, a court could conclude that we received less than full value for incurring the indebtedness represented by the notes.

We cannot be certain as to the standards a court would use to determine whether or not we or the guarantors were solvent at the relevant time or, regardless of the standard that a court uses, that the issuance of the related guarantees would not be further subordinated to our or any of our guarantors’ other debt. Generally, however, an entity would be considered solvent if, at the time it incurred indebtedness:

• the sum of its debts, including contingent liabilities, was greater than the fair saleable value of all its assets; or

• the present fair saleable value of its assets was less than the amount that would be required to pay its probable liability on its existing debts, including contingent liabilities, as they become absolute and mature; or

• it could not pay its debts as they become due.

Our obligations under the exchange notes will be guaranteed by certain of our existing domestic restricted subsidiaries, and the guarantees may also be subject to review under various laws for the protection of creditors. It is possible that creditors of the guarantors may challenge the guarantees as a fraudulent transfer or conveyance. The analysis set forth above would generally apply, except that the guarantees could also be subject to the claim that, since the guarantees were incurred for our benefit, and only indirectly for the benefit of the guarantors, the obligations of the guarantors thereunder were incurred for less than reasonably equivalent value or fair consideration. A court could void a guarantor’s obligation under its guarantee, subordinate the guarantee to the other indebtedness of a guarantor, direct that holders of the exchange notes return any amounts paid under a guarantee to the relevant guarantor or to a fund for the benefit of its creditors, or take other action detrimental to the holders of the exchange notes. In addition, the liability of each guarantor under each indenture is limited to the amount that will result in its guarantee not constituting a fraudulent conveyance or improper corporate distribution, and there can be no assurance as to what standard a court would apply in making a determination as to what would be the maximum liability of each guarantor.

We are dependent upon dividends from our subsidiaries to meet our debt service obligations.

We are a holding company and conduct all of our operations through our subsidiaries. Our ability to meet our debt service obligations will be dependent on receipt of dividends from our direct and indirect subsidiaries. Subject to the restrictions contained in the indentures, future borrowings by our subsidiaries may contain restrictions or prohibitions on the payment of dividends by our subsidiaries to us. See “Description of Notes—Certain Covenants.” In addition, federal and state regulations governing our regulated subsidiaries and applicable state corporate law may limit the ability of our subsidiaries to pay dividends to us on their capital stock. We cannot assure you that the agreements governing the current and future indebtedness of our subsidiaries and these applicable laws will permit our subsidiaries to provide us with sufficient dividends, distributions or loans to fund payments on these exchange notes when due. Additionally, we are required to maintain a majority of independent directors on the board of several of our non-guarantor subsidiaries. As a result, we may not be able to require such subsidiaries to pay us dividends. Our ability to satisfy obligations under the exchange notes may be impaired if the issuers’ or the guarantors’ ability to receive dividends from these subsidiaries is limited.

Your ability to transfer the exchange notes may be limited by the absence of an active trading market, and there is no assurance that any active trading market will develop for the exchange notes.

We are offering the exchange notes to holders of the outstanding notes. The outstanding notes were offered and sold in June 2006 to institutional investors and are eligible for trading in the PORTAL^sm Market.

35

We do not intend to apply for a listing of the exchange notes on a securities exchange or on any automated dealer quotation system. There is currently no established market for the exchange notes and we cannot assure you as to the liquidity of markets that may develop for the exchange notes, your ability to sell the exchange notes or the price at which you would be able to sell the exchange notes. If such markets were to exist, the exchange notes could trade at prices that may be lower than their principal amount or purchase price depending on many factors, including prevailing interest rates, the market for similar notes, our financial and operating performance and other factors. The initial purchasers in the private offering of the outstanding notes have advised us that they currently intend to make a market with respect to the exchange notes. However, these initial purchasers are not obligated to do so, and any market making with respect to the exchange notes may be discontinued at any time without notice. In addition, such market making activity may be limited during the pendency of the exchange offerss or the effectiveness of a shelf registration statement in lieu thereof. Therefore, we cannot assure you that an active market for the exchange notes will develop or, if developed, that it will continue. Historically, the market for non-investment grade debt has been subject to disruptions that have caused substantial volatility in the prices of securities similar to the notes. The market, if any, for the exchange notes may experience similar disruptions and any such disruptions may adversely affect the prices at which you may sell your notes.

36

FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

This prospectus contains “forward-looking statements” within the meaning of the federal securities laws, which involve risks and uncertainties. You can identify forward-looking statements because they contain words such as “believes,” “expects,” “may,” “will,” “should,” “seeks,” “approximately,” “intends,” “plans,” “estimates,” or “anticipates” or similar expressions that concern our strategy, plans or intentions. All statements we make relating to estimated and projected earnings, margins, costs, expenditures, cash flows, growth rates and financial results are forward-looking statements. In addition, we, through our senior management, from time to time make forward-looking public statements concerning our expected future operations and performance and other developments. All of these forward-looking statements are subject to risks and uncertainties that may change at any time, and, therefore, our actual results may differ materially from those we expected. We derive most of our forward-looking statements from our operating budgets and forecasts, which are based upon many detailed assumptions. While we believe that our assumptions are reasonable, we caution that it is very difficult to predict the impact of known factors, and, of course, it is impossible for us to anticipate all factors that could affect our actual results. Important factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from our expectations (“cautionary statements”) are disclosed under “Risk Factors” and elsewhere in this prospectus, including, without limitation, in conjunction with the forward-looking statements included in this prospectus. All subsequent written and oral forward-looking statements attributable to us, or persons acting on our behalf, are expressly qualified in their entirety by the cautionary statements. Some of the factors that we believe could affect our results include:

• our substantial indebtedness following consummation of the Transactions described in this prospectus;

• certain covenants in our debt documents following the consummation of the Transactions described in this prospectus;

• general economic and market conditions;

• government and regulatory changes, including revised interpretations of regulatory requirements, that affect the post-secondary education industry;

• the integration of acquired businesses, the performance of acquired businesses and the prospects for future acquisitions;

• the effect of war, terrorism, natural disasters or other catastrophic events;

• the effect of disruptions to our systems and infrastructure;

• transition of certain of our senior management personnel following the Transactions and the failure to attract, retain and integrate qualified management personnel;

• failure to maintain relationships with key industry participants and/or key customers and/or loss of significant customer revenues;

• failure to effectively compete;

• failure to comply with regulations or maintain state authorizations and accreditations; and

• the other factors set forth under “Risk Factors.”

We caution you that the foregoing list of important factors may not contain all of the material factors that are important to you. In addition, in light of these risks and uncertainties, the matters referred to in the forward-looking statements contained in this prospectus may not in fact occur. We undertake no obligation to publicly update or revise any forward-looking statement as a result of new information, future events or otherwise, except as otherwise required by law.

37

THE TRANSACTIONS

On March 3, 2006, EM Acquisition, formed by investment funds associated with the Sponsors, entered into the Merger Agreement with EDMC pursuant to which the parties agreed to the Merger. As a result of the Merger, investment funds designated by the Sponsors own EDMC.

At the effective time of the Merger, each share of EDMC’s common stock outstanding immediately prior to the Merger (other than shares held in treasury or shares held by any of our respective subsidiaries) was cancelled and converted into the right to receive $43.00 in cash. As described below, the senior management participants entered into agreements with the Sponsors, pursuant to which they agreed, among other things, to participate in the equity of EDMC in connection with the Transactions. Investment funds designated by Providence Equity and Goldman Sachs Capital Partners invested $500.0 million and $650.0 million, respectively, in equity securities of EDMC for a total equity investment by the Sponsors of $1,000.0 million as part of the Transactions. The Co-Investors invested an aggregate of $300.0 million of equity in EDMC as part of the Transactions. Upon the consummation of the Transactions, the senior management participants purchased an aggregate of $3.5 million of the Sponsors’ equity interests in EDMC. We anticipate selling an additional $9.5 million of equity interests to other members of senior management pursuant to an employee stock purchase plan. In July 2006, Leeds Equity Partners exercised an option to purchase $100.0 million of EDMC securities from the Sponsors ($50.0 million from each of Providence Equity and Goldman Sachs Capital partners), which reduced the Sponsors’ total investment to $896.5 million. The Merger was approved at a special meeting held on May 25, 2006 by the affirmative vote of a majority of the votes cast by holders of shares of EDMC’s common stock entitled to vote thereon. The Merger became effective upon the closing of the Transactions on June 1, 2006.

The purchase of the Company by the Investors was financed by borrowings under our new senior secured credit facilities, the issuance of the notes offered in the Transactions, the equity investment and participation described above, and cash on hand.

The following diagram below sets forth our corporate structure following consummation of the Transactions. See “The Merger” and “Principal Stockholders.” This structure was achieved through a series of equity contributions that occurred in connection with the Merger.

(1) Includes $1,000.0 million of cash equity contributed by investment funds designated by the Sponsors and $300.0 million of cash equity contributed by the Co-Investors. Upon the consummation of the Transactions, the senior management participants purchased an aggregate of $3.5 million of the Sponsors’ equity interests in EDMC. Following the closing of the Transactions, the Sponsors sold $100.0 million of their EDMC securities to the Co-Investors, reducing the Sponsors’ total investment to $896.5 million.

38

(2) The obligations under our new senior credit facilities are guaranteed by Education Management Holdings LLC and all of Education Management LLC’s existing direct and indirect domestic subsidiaries, other than any subsidiary that directly owns or operates a school or any inactive subsidiary that has less than $100,000 of assets. The exchange notes will be fully and unconditionally guaranteed by all of our existing direct and indirect domestic restricted subsidiaries, other than any subsidiary that directly owns or operates a school or has been formed for such purpose and has no material assets.

(3) Upon the closing of the Transactions, we entered into a $300.0 million revolving credit facility with a six-year maturity, $50.0 million of which was drawn on the closing date of the Transactions. We have been notified by the U.S. Department of Education that we will be required to maintain an $87.9 million letter of credit in favor of the U.S. Department of Education due to our failure to satisfy certain regulatory financial ratios after giving effect to the Transactions. The letter of credit, which will be provided and reduce availability under our revolving credit facility, is due by October 28, 2006.

(4) Upon the closing of the Transactions, we entered into a $1,185.0 million term loan facility with a seven-year maturity.

(5) Education Management Finance Corp. has only nominal assets, does not currently conduct any operations and was formed solely to act as co-issuer of the outstanding notes.

Pursuant to the Merger Agreement at the effective time of the Merger, each outstanding option, whether or not vested or exercisable, to acquire our common stock was canceled, and the holder of each stock option was entitled to receive from EDMC an amount in cash, without interest and less applicable withholding taxes, equal to: (a) the number of shares of our common stock subject to each option as of the effective time of the Merger, multiplied by (b) the excess, if any, of $43.00 over the exercise price per share of common stock subject to such option. If the exercise price per share of common stock under a stock option is greater than or equal to $43.00, no payment was made in respect of the cancellation of that option. Pursuant to the Merger Agreement, at the effective time of the Merger, all shares of restricted stock then outstanding were canceled, and the holder of each such share received a cash payment of $43.00 per share of restricted stock, without interest and less any applicable withholding taxes.

In connection with the Merger, we (i) entered into new senior secured credit facilities, consisting of a $1,185.0 million term loan facility and a $300.0 million revolving credit facility and (ii) issued the $760.0 million aggregate principal amount of outstanding notes. See “Description of Other Indebtedness.”

39

USE OF PROCEEDS

We will not receive any cash proceeds from the issuance of the exchange notes pursuant to the exchange offers. In consideration for issuing the exchange notes as contemplated in this prospectus, we will receive in exchange a like principal amount of outstanding notes, the terms of which are identical in all material respects to the exchange notes. The outstanding notes surrendered in exchange for the exchange notes will be retired and canceled and cannot be reissued. Accordingly, the issuance of the exchange notes will not result in any change in our capitalization.

CAPITALIZATION

The following table sets forth our capitalization as of June 30, 2006. The information in this table should be read in conjunction with “The Transactions,” “Pro Forma Condensed Consolidated Financial Information,” “Selected Historical Consolidated Financial and Other Data,” “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and the June 30, 2006 consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus.

	As of June 30, 2006
	(in millions)
Cash and cash equivalents, excluding restricted cash	$	263.3
Capital leases and existing long-term debt, including current portion	$	5.0
Long-term debt, including current portion:
Revolving credit facility(1)		160.0
Term loan facility(2)		1,185.0
Senior notes		375.0
Senior subordinated notes		385.0
Total long-term debt, including current portion	$	2,110.0
Total shareholders’ equity		1,282.8
Total capitalization	$	3,392.8

(1) Upon the closing of the Transactions, we entered into a $300.0 million senior secured revolving credit facility with a six-year maturity, of which $160.0 million was drawn at June 30, 2006 to meet certain year-end regulatory financial ratios and was repaid on July 3, 2006. The U.S. Department of Education has notified us that we will be required to maintain an $87.9 million letter of credit in favor of the U.S. Department of Education due to our failure to satisfy certain regulatory financial ratios after giving effect to the Transactions. The letter of credit, which is due by October 28, 2006, will be provided and reduce availability under our revolving credit facility.

(2) Upon the closing of the Transactions, we entered into a $1,185.0 million term loan facility with a seven-year maturity.

40

UNAUDITED PRO FORMA CONDENSED CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL INFORMATION

The following unaudited pro forma condensed consolidated statement of operations has been developed by applying pro forma adjustments to the historical audited consolidated financial statements of EDMC and Education Management LLC appearing elsewhere in this prospectus. The unaudited pro forma consolidated statement of operations gives effect to the Transactions as if they had occurred on July 1, 2005. Assumptions underlying the pro forma adjustments are described in the accompanying notes, which should be read in conjunction with this unaudited pro forma condensed consolidated financial statement of income.

The pro forma adjustments are based upon available information and certain assumptions that we believe are reasonable under the circumstances. The unaudited pro forma condensed consolidated statement of operations is presented for informational purposes only and does not purport to represent what our results of operations or financial condition would have been had the Transactions actually occurred on the dates indicated and does not purport to project our results of operations or financial condition for any future period or as of any future date. The unaudited pro forma condensed consolidated statement of operations should be read in conjunction with the information contained in “The Transactions,” “Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data and Other Data,” “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and the consolidated financial statements and related notes thereto appearing elsewhere in this prospectus. The pro forma adjustments give effect to the offering of the notes, the initial borrowings under our new senior secured credit facilities, the equity investment and participation by the Investors in EDMC, the Merger and other related transactions. All pro forma adjustments and their underlying assumptions are described more fully in the notes to the unaudited pro forma condensed consolidated statements of operations.

The Transactions were accounted for using purchase accounting. The total purchase price was allocated to our net tangible and identifiable intangible assets based on their fair values as of June 1, 2006. The excess of the purchase price over the net tangible and identifiable intangible assets was recorded as goodwill. The preliminary allocation of the purchase price for property and equipment, intangible assets and deferred income taxes was based upon preliminary valuation data and the estimates and assumptions are subject to change.

	July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006			June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006						Pro Forma Year Ended June 30, 2006
	Education Management Corporation			Education Management LLC			Pro Forma Adjustments			Education Management LLC
	(Dollars in millions)
Net Revenues	$	1,095.8		$	74.4		$	—		$	1,170.2
Costs and expenses:
Educational Services(1)		644.6			64.7			(0.3	)		709.0
General and administrative(2)		278.5			26.0			4.6			309.1
Amortization of intangible assets(3)		4.0			1.7			13.1			18.8
		927.1			92.4			17.4			1,036.9
Income before interest and taxes		168.7			(18.0	)		(17.4	)		133.3
Interest (income) expense, net(4)		(5.3	)		14.1			164.6			173.4
Income (loss) before income taxes		174.0			(32.1	)		(182.0	)		(40.1	)
Provision (benefit) for income taxes(5)		73.6			(12.4	)		(67.9	)		(6.7	)
Net income (loss)	$	100.4		$	(19.7	)	$	(114.1	)	$	(33.4	)

See accompanying “—Notes to Unaudited Pro Forma Condensed Consolidated Statements of Operations”

41

NOTES TO UNAUDITED PRO FORMA CONDENSED CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS

OF OPERATIONS

(1) Reflects net adjustment to depreciation of $1.3 million less reduction in rent expense due to the amortization of unfavorable lease liabilities recognized as part of purchase accounting of $ 1.6 million for the year ended June 30, 2006.

Net adjustment to depreciation represents pro forma effect on depreciation on a straight-line basis of property and equipment as a result of purchase accounting related to the acquisition of EDMC less the elimination of the historical EDMC depreciation as follows:

	Year Ended June 30, 2006
	(in thousands)
Pro forma depreciation expense(a)	$	65,908
Less historical depreciation expense		(64,612	)
Net adjustment to depreciation expense	$	1,296

(a) Pro forma depreciation represents depreciation on $360.9 million of property and equipment over the estimated average remaining useful life of approximately 12 years.

(2) Reflects pro forma effect on advisory fees in the period July 1, 2005 to May 31, 2006.

(3) Reflects pro forma amortization of finite-lived intangible assets related to the acquisition of EDMC less the elimination of the historical EDMC amortization to reflect the application of purchase accounting. Pro forma amortization represents amortization on $75.1 million of finite-lived intangible assets over their estimated average life of approximately 5.2 years.

(4) Reflects pro forma interest expense resulting from our new capital structure as follows:

	Year Ended June 30, 2006
	(in thousands)
Pro forma interest expense(a)	$	165,686
Less: interest expense recorded in historical financial statements		(14,631	)
		151,055
Pro forma amortization of deferred financing fees		7,670
Less: historical amortization of deferred financing fees		(1,934	)
Net adjustment to amortization of deferred financing fees		5,736
Elimination of historical interest income		7,809
Net adjustment to interest expense	$	164,600

42

NOTES TO UNAUDITED PRO FORMA CONDENSED CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF OPERATIONS—(Continued)

(a) Reflects pro forma interest expense excluding amortization of deferred financing fees, resulting from the Transactions as follows:

	Fiscal Year Ended June 30, 2006
	(in thousands)
Senior credit facilities:
Revolving credit facility(i)	$	—
Term loan facility(ii)		90,017
Senior notes		32,813
Senior subordinated notes		39,463
Existing debt(iii)		317
Commitment fees(iv)		1,049
Letters of credit(v)		2,027
Total pro forma interest expense	$	165,686

(i) Assumes no borrowings under the revolving credit facility. $160.0 million of our revolving credit facility was borrowed at the fiscal year end in order to satisfy certain year-end regulatory financial ratios and was repaid on the next business day, July 3, 2006, the interest expense of which was immaterial.

(ii) Reflects pro forma interest, not including non-cash amortization of deferred financing fees, on our term loan facility at an assumed rate of LIBOR (rate of 5.125% based on a one month LIBOR effective June 30, 2006) plus 2.5%, and repayment of 0.25 percent per quarter of the aggregate principal amount of term loan outstanding.

(iii) Reflects interest expense on pre-existing debt that remained in place after the Transactions.

(iv) Reflects commitment fees on the undrawn portion of our senior credit facilities.

(v) Reflects fees on outstanding letters of credit, including an $87.9 million letter of credit in favor of the U.S. Department of Education and $2.2 million in other letters of credit used primarily for insurance purposes.

At June 30, 2006, on a pro forma basis, we had $1,185.0 million of floating rate debt under our senior secured credit facility. A 0.125% change in interest rates would change pro forma interest, not including non-cash amortization of deferred financing fees, on our floating rate indebtedness by approximately $1.5 million on an annual basis. Effective July 2006, we entered into interest rate swap agreements to manage the variable rate portion of $750.0 million of debt under our term loan facility. Under the terms of the interest rate swap agreements, we receive payments based on variable interest rates based on the three-month LIBOR and make payments based on a fixed rate of 5.397% plus the applicable margin.

Deferred financing fees and other issuance costs incurred as a result of the financing arrangements put in place in connection with the Transactions are amortized over the terms of the related arrangements, which range from 7-10 years, using the straight-line method, which approximates the effective yield method.

(5) Reflects the income tax benefit on pro forma adjustments using a combined federal and state effective income tax rate of 37.3%. This rate differs from the overall fiscal 2006 effective tax rate of 43.1% to account for the fact that we would not have realized Pennsylvania state tax benefits on a majority of the pro forma adjustments because these adjustments would have created Pennsylvania net operating losses. As it would have been more likely than not that we would not have realized the benefit of the deferred tax asset associated with the Pennsylvania net operating loss carry forward, we would have recorded a full valuation allowance against the related deferred tax asset. Therefore, we have computed the income tax benefit on the pro forma adjustments using only the federal and unitary state effective tax rates.

43

SELECTED HISTORICAL CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL AND OTHER DATA

The following table sets forth selected historical consolidated financial data as of the dates and for the periods indicated. The Predecessor financial data contain information relating to Education Management Corporation prior to the consummation of the Transactions. The Successor financial data contain information relating to Education Management LLC after consummation of the Transactions. The selected historical consolidated balance sheet data as of June 30, 2005 and consolidated statement of operations data for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2004 and 2005 and the period from July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006 have been derived from Education Management Corporation’s audited consolidated financial statements and related notes appearing elsewhere in this prospectus and the selected historical consolidated balance sheet data as of June 30, 2006 and statement of operations data for the period from June 1 through June 30, 2006 have been derived from Education Management LLC’s audited consolidated financial statements and related notes appearing elsewhere in this prospectus. The selected historical consolidated statement of operations data as of June 30, 2002, 2003 and 2004 and the consolidated balance sheet for the periods ended June 30, 2002, 2003 and 2004 presented in this table have been derived from audited consolidated financial statements not included in this prospectus. The results of operations for any period are not necessarily indicative of the results to be expected for any future period. The selected historical consolidated financial data set forth below should be read in conjunction with, and are qualified by reference to, “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and the consolidated financial statements and related notes thereto appearing elsewhere in this prospectus.

	Predecessor															Successor			Combined
	Fiscal Years Ended June 30,												July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006			June 1 through June 30, 2006			Year Ended June 30, 2006 (5)
	2002 (1)			2003 (2)			2004 (3)			2005 (4)
										(dollars in millions)
Statement of Operations Data:
Net revenues	$	500.6		$	640.0		$	853.0		$	1,019.3		$	1,095.8		$	74.4		$	1,170.2
Costs and expenses:
Educational services		325.0			417.5			546.1			640.4			644.6			64.7			709.3
General and administrative		102.5			125.3			167.0			203.8			278.5			26.0			304.5
Amortization of intangible assets		4.1			4.4			6.9			6.5			4.0			1.7			5.7
Total costs and expenses		431.6			547.2			720.0			850.7			927.1			92.4			1,019.5
Income (loss) before interest and income taxes		69.0			92.8			133.0			168.6			168.7			(18.0	)		150.7
Interest (income) expense, net		1.6			1.3			2.5			(0.2	)		(5.3	)		14.1			8.8
Income (loss) before income taxes		67.4			91.5			130.5			168.8			174.0			(32.1	)		141.9
Provision for income taxes		25.1			35.2			53.5			67.2			73.6			(12.4	)		61.2
Net income (loss)	$	42.3		$	56.3		$	77.0		$	101.6		$	100.4		($	19.7	)	$	80.7
Balance Sheet Data (as of period ended):
Cash and cash equivalents (excludes restricted cash)	$	92.1		$	89.0		$	116.7		$	172.0								$	263.3
Total assets		492.7			577.6			828.0			956.0									3,945.5
Total debt, including current portion		28.6			38.5			128.6			70.4									2,110.0
Total shareholders’ equity		346.6			427.8			528.7			666.0									1,282.8
Statement of Cash Flows Data:
Net cash flows provided by (used in):
Operating activities	$	100.4		$	79.4		$	166.3		$	192.5		$	301.7		$	(22.4	)	$	279.3
Investing activities		(154.2	)		(108.4	)		(239.9	)		(98.1	)		(56.4	)		(3,534.1	)		(3,590.5	)
Financing activities		98.5			24.3			102.0			(39.0	)		(43.2	)		3,445.5			3,402.3
Effect of foreign exchange on cash		0.3			1.6			(0.6	)		(0.2	)		0.0			0.1			0.1
Other Data:
EBITDA(6)	$	103.1		$	137.7		$	188.3		$	252.7		$	231.6		$	(10.6	)	$	221.0
Capital expenditures(7)		45.4			80.8			82.3			74.9			57.9			7.7			65.6
Enrollment at beginning of fall quarter(8)		32,180			43,784			58,828			66,179			72,471						72,471
Campus locations (at period end)(9)		23			42			66			70			71			71			71
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges(10)		5.9	x		6.6	x		7.7	x		9.2	x		9.4	x		—			4.8	x

(1) Results for Argosy University are included as of the acquisition date of December 21, 2001.

(2) Fiscal 2003 results reflect a change in accounting estimate due to our evaluation and adjustment of the useful lives for our property and equipment to more closely reflect actual usage. The useful life adjustment decreased income before interest and taxes by $3.2 million.

44

(3) South University and the Brown Mackie Colleges are included as of their respective acquisition dates during fiscal 2004.

(4) Fiscal 2005 results include non-cash, pretax charges of approximately $4.2 million related to fixed asset impairments and write-offs. Also, cumulative adjustments for lease accounting recorded in fiscal 2005 increased pretax expense by approximately $3.8 million.

(5) Our combined results for the year ended June 30, 2006 represent the addition of the Predecessor period from July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006 and the Successor period from June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006. This combination does not comply with GAAP or with the rules for pro forma presentation, but is presented because we believe it provides the most meaningful comparison of our results. Fiscal 2006 includes $32.2 million in compensation costs resulting from the implementation of SFAS 123(R). We adopted the modified prospective method and, therefore, results of operations in prior fiscal periods were not affected by the implementation of the standard. Additionally, fiscal 2006 includes $40.1 million of costs associated with the Transactions, including $30.2 million of accounting, placement, other financing, investment banking, legal and other professional fees and costs and $9.9 million of employee compensation and payroll taxes.

(6) EBITDA, a measure expected to be used by management to measure operating performance, is defined as net income plus interest expense (income), net, taxes, depreciation and amortization. EBITDA is not a recognized term under GAAP and does not purport to be an alternative to net income as a measure of operating performance or to cash flows from operating activities as a measure of liquidity. Additionally, EBITDA is not intended to be a measure of free cash flow available for management’s discretionary use, as it does not consider certain cash requirements such as interest payments, tax payments and debt service requirements. Management believes EBITDA is helpful in highlighting trends because EBITDA excludes the results of decisions that are outside the control of operating management and can differ significantly from company to company depending on long-term strategic decisions regarding capital structure, the tax jurisdictions in which companies operate and capital investments. In addition, EBITDA provides more comparability between the historical results of EDMC and results that reflect purchase accounting and the new capital structure. Management compensates for the limitations of using non-GAAP financial measures by using them to supplement GAAP results to provide a more complete understanding of the factors and trends affecting the business than GAAP results alone. Because not all companies use identical calculations, these presentations of EBITDA may not be comparable to other similarly titled measures of other companies. EBITDA is calculated as follows:

	Predecessor					Successor	Combined
	Year Ended June 30,				July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006	June 1 through June 30, 2006	Year Ended June 30, 2006 (10)
	2002	2003	2004	2005
	(dollars in millions)
Net income	$42.3	$56.3	$77.0	$101.6	$100.4	$(19.7)	$80.7
Interest (income) expense, net	1.6	1.3	2.5	(0.2)	(5.3)	14.1	8.8
Taxes	25.1	35.2	53.5	67.2	73.6	(12.4)	61.2
Depreciation and amortization, including amortization of intangible assets(a)	34.1	44.9	55.3	84.1	62.9	7.4	70.3
EBITDA	$103.1	$137.7	$188.3	$252.7	$231.6	$(10.6)	$221.0

(a) Depreciation and amortization includes non-cash charges related to property and equipment impairments and write-offs. The year ended June 30, 2005 also include $19.5 million related to cumulative adjustments for changes in lease accounting.

(7) Capital expenditures represent net cash paid for property and equipment, leasehold improvements, online curriculum development, software, and other assets.

(8) Represents the number of students enrolled in our schools as of the first week in October of the preceding calendar year. Excludes students enrolled at The National Center for Paralegal Training (“NCPT”), which has completed instruction for all programs. NCPT had 45 students enrolled at the beginning of the fall quarter of fiscal 2003 and no students at the beginning of the fall quarters of 2004.

(9) Brown Mackie College-Dallas and Brown Mackie College-Fort Worth discontinued accepting new enrollments effective August 4, 2005 and the completion of instruction for all students at each school in June 2006. Upon completion of the instruction of students enrolled at August 4, 2005, each school closed. Brown Mackie College-Los Angeles, Brown Mackie College-Orange County, Brown Mackie College-San Diego and Brown Mackie College-Denver have discontinued new enrollments. We established a degree site of Argosy University at each location which assumed the non-diploma Brown Mackie College class offerings. The Brown Mackie College location closed once current students completed their classes. Except for Argosy University-Denver, the Argosy University degree sites that assumed the students of the closed Brown Mackie College locations do not constitute campus locations of Argosy University. We do not count our online schools as separate campuses.

(10) For purposes of calculating the ratio of earnings to fixed charges, earnings consist of income before income taxes plus fixed charges. Fixed charges include interest expense, whether expensed or capitalized; amortization of debt issuance cost; and the portion of rental expense representative of the interest factor. During the period June 1 through June 30, 2006, the Successor’s losses exceeded the fixed charges by $16.1 million.

45

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

Overview

We are among the largest providers of post-secondary education in North America, with more than 72,000 active students as of the fall of 2005. We offer education through four different educational systems and through online platforms at three of our four educational systems. Our schools offer students a wide variety of programmatic and degree choices in a flexible learning environment. Our curriculum is designed with a distinct emphasis on applied career-oriented content and is primarily taught by faculty members that possess practical and relevant professional experience in their respective fields.

Education Management LLC is a wholly owned subsidiary of Education Management Holdings LLC, which is wholly owned by EDMC. On June 1, 2006, EDMC was acquired by a consortium of private equity investment funds led by the Sponsors. The acquisition was accomplished through the merger of EM Acquisition into EDMC, with EDMC being the surviving company. Although EDMC continued as the same legal entity after the Transactions, EDMC contributed substantially all of its assets and liabilities to the Successor in connection with the Transactions.

Pursuant to the terms of the merger agreement, all outstanding shares of EDMC’s common stock were cancelled in exchange for $43.00 per share in cash by investment funds designated by the Sponsors. The Sponsors, together with certain other investors, became the owners of EDMC. As described in Note 3 to the accompanying consolidated financial statements, the Transactions were accounted for as a purchase in accordance with Statement of Financial Accounting Standards SFAS No. 141, “Business Combinations”. The accompanying consolidated balance sheets and consolidated statements of operations, cash flows and shareholders’ equity are presented for the Predecessor and Successor periods, which relate to the periods preceding the Transactions (July 1, 2003 through May 31, 2006) and the period after completion of the Transactions (June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006), respectively. Accordingly, the Predecessor periods included in the accompanying consolidated financial statements relate to EDMC.

The largest component of our revenue is tuition collected from our students which is presented after deducting refunds, scholarships and other adjustments. Net revenues consist of tuition and fees, student housing fees, bookstore sales, restaurant sales in connection with culinary programs, workshop fees, finance charges related to credit extended to students and sales of related study materials, reduced for student refunds and scholarships. We recognize revenue on a pro rata basis over the term of instruction or occupancy or when received in the case of certain point-of-sale revenues. The amount of tuition revenue received from students varies based on the average tuition charge per credit hour, average credit hours taken per student, type of program, specific curriculum and the average student population. Bookstore and housing revenues are largely a function of the average student population.

The two main determinates of our revenue are average student population and tuition rates. Factors impacting our average student population include the number of continuing students attending school at the beginning of a period and the number of new students entering school during such period. We believe that the size of our student population at our campuses is influenced by the number of graduating high school students, the attractiveness of our program offerings, the effectiveness of our marketing efforts, changes in technology, the persistence of our students, the length of the education programs, our overall educational reputation and general economic conditions. We seek to grow our average student population through offering additional programs at existing schools and through establishing new school locations, whether through acquisition or new facility start-up. With regard to tuition rates, historically we have been able to pass along cost increases through increases in tuition.

The majority of our students rely on funds received under various government-sponsored student financial aid programs, especially Title IV programs, to pay a substantial portion of their tuition and other education-related expenses. For the last three completed fiscal years approximately 70% of our net revenues were indirectly

46

derived from Title IV programs. Because of the dependence on government sponsored programs, we participate in industry groups and monitor the impact of newly proposed legislation on our business.

Our quarterly revenues and income will fluctuate primarily as a result of the pattern of student enrollments. Student enrollment at the Art Institute schools has typically peaked in the fall, our fiscal second quarter, when the largest number of recent high school and college graduates traditionally begin post-secondary education programs. The fiscal first quarter is typically the lowest revenue quarter due to student vacations. The seasonality of our business has decreased over the last several years due to an increased percentage of students at our schools enrolling in Bachelor’s programs and the effect of recent acquisitions.

Educational services expense, the largest component of our operating expense, consists primarily of costs related to the development, delivery and administration of our education programs. Major cost components are faculty compensation, salaries of administrative and student services staff, costs of educational materials, facility occupancy costs, information systems costs, bad debt expense and depreciation and amortization of property and equipment. Many of these items are relatively fixed in nature and are not subject to volatile input pricing. We anticipate these expenses to decrease as a percentage of revenue in the future due to economies of scale as our schools grow through the introduction of new programs at our existing schools and continued growth in the number of students taking classes online as well as costs savings at our shared services locations.

The second largest expense line item, general and administrative expense, consists of marketing and student admissions expenses and certain central staff departmental costs such as executive management, finance and accounting, legal, corporate development and other departments that do not provide direct services to our students. We have centralized many of these services to gain consistency in management reporting, efficiency in administrative effort and cost control. With regard to the marketing component, we have seen a change in the way we market to and attract inquiries from prospective students as the Internet has become an increasingly important way of reaching students. Internet inquiries, which generally cost less than leads from traditional media sources like TV and print, convert at a lower rate than traditional media sources.

Results of Operations

Our combined results for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2006 represent the combination of the Predecessor period from July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006 and the Successor period from June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006. This combination does not comply with GAAP or with the rules for pro forma presentation, but is presented because we believe it provides the most meaningful comparison of our results. The following table sets forth for the periods indicated the percentage relationship of certain statements of income items to net revenues.

	Predecessor						Successor		Combined
	For the fiscal years ended June 30,				Period from July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006		Period from June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006		Period from July 1, 2005 through June 30, 2006
	2004		2005
Net revenues	100.00	%	100.00	%	100.00	%	100.00	%	100.00	%
Costs and expenses:
Educational services	64.0	%	62.8	%	58.8	%	87.0	%	60.6	%
General and administrative	19.6	%	20.0	%	25.4	%	34.9	%	26.0	%
Amortization of intangible assets	0.8	%	0.6	%	0.4	%	2.3	%	0.5	%
Total Costs and Expenses	84.4	%	83.4	%	84.6	%	124.2	%	87.1	%
Income (loss) before interest and income taxes	15.6	%	16.6	%	15.4	%	(24.2	%)	12.9	%
Interest (income) expense, net	0.3	%	0.0	%	(0.5	%)	18.9	%	0.7	%
Income (loss) before income taxes	15.3	%	16.6	%	15.9	%	(43.1	%)	12.1	%
Provision (benefit) for income taxes	6.3	%	6.6	%	6.7	%	(16.7	%)	5.2	%
Net income (loss)	9.0	%	10.0	%	9.2	%	(26.4	%)	6.9	%

47

Combined Period from July 1, 2005 through June 30, 2006 compared with Year Ended June 30, 2005

Net Revenues

Revenues for fiscal 2006 increased 14.8% to $1,170.2 million, compared to $1,019.3 million for the same period a year ago, primarily resulting from a 9.8% growth in average total student enrollment and an approximate 6.0% increase in tuition rates. Tuition revenue generally varies based on the average tuition charge per credit hour, average credits per student and the average student population. Average student enrollment for fiscal 2006 increased to approximately 68,500 students compared to approximately 62,400 students for the same period last year. We derived 91.2% and 90.6% of our net revenues from tuition and fees paid by, or on behalf of, our students in fiscal 2006 and fiscal 2005, respectively.

Bookstore and housing revenue is largely a function of the average student population. Net housing revenues increased by 14.2% to $50.1 million in fiscal 2006 compared to $43.9 million in fiscal 2005 and revenues from bookstore sales (which includes supplies and other items) in fiscal 2006 grew by 9.0% to $40.2 million.

Educational Services

Our educational services expense increased by $68.9 million, or 10.8%, to $709.3 million in fiscal 2006 from $640.4 million in fiscal 2005, due primarily to the incremental costs incurred to support higher student enrollment. Educational services expense includes faculty and certain administrative compensation, rent and other facility operating costs, cost of sales, bad debt, and depreciation and amortization. As a percentage of revenue, educational services expense decreased approximately 220 basis points to 60.6% in fiscal 2006 from 62.8% in fiscal 2005. A cumulative lease accounting adjustment of $3.8 million that was recorded in March 2005 accounted for 30 basis points of this decrease and a reduction in fixed asset impairments and write-offs of $1.8 million from $2.7 million in fiscal 2005 to $0.9 million in fiscal 2006 contributed a 19 basis points reduction as a percentage of revenue. Further, continued leverage on administrative personnel and facilities drove 100 basis points improvement as a percentage of revenue and supply store margins grew from 34.0% in fiscal 2005 to 37.5% in fiscal 2006 which drove improvement in supply store costs of 24 basis points as a percentage of revenue. Bad debt expense decreased 79 basis points as a percentage of revenue compared to the prior year due to a continued strength in accounts receivable collections as well as increases in alternative loans received by our students which are used to pay tuition. These private loans are made to our students by financial institutions and are non-recourse to the institution. The use of these loans by our students results in the reduction of student receivable balances. Other components of educational services decreased as a percentage of revenue, including supplies, travel and other operating expenses as a result of cost control efforts. These decreases were partially offset by the effect of non-cash share based compensation, which increased by $13.1 million, or 110 basis points as a percentage of revenue.

General and Administrative

General and administrative expense was $304.5 million in fiscal 2006, an increase of 49.4% from $203.8 million in fiscal 2005. The increase was primarily due to costs associated with the Transactions, non-cash compensation expenses (including SFAS No. 123(R) expense) and higher advertising expenditures. As a percentage of net revenue, general and administrative expense increased 602 basis points over fiscal 2005. Costs associated with the Transactions during fiscal 2006 were $40.1 million, or 343 basis points, consisting of $30.2 million of accounting, placement, other financing investment banking, legal and other professional fees and costs, and $9.9 million of employee compensation and payroll taxes. Non-cash share-based compensation expense was $19.1 million in fiscal 2006 compared to $1.2 million in fiscal 2005, an increase of 150 basis points as a percentage of net revenue. A reduction in fixed asset impairments and write-offs from $1.4 million in fiscal 2005 to zero in fiscal 2006 also contributed 14 basis points reduction as a percentage of revenue. Additionally, we increased our investment in advertising by $27.6 million, an increase of 157 basis points as a percentage of net revenue. These increases were offset slightly by decreases in telecommunications, audit, travel and supplies as a percentage of net revenue as a result of cost control efforts.

48

Amortization of Intangible Assets

Amortization of intangibles decreased $0.8 million to $5.7 million in fiscal 2006, as compared to $6.5 million in fiscal 2005. The decrease was due to certain intangible assets becoming fully amortized, partially offset by higher amortization expense relating to the fair market value of definite-lived intangibles recorded as a result of the Transactions.

Income before Interest and Income Taxes

Income before interest and taxes (operating income) decreased by $17.9 million to $150.7 million in fiscal 2006 from $168.6 million in the prior year period. The corresponding margin decreased approximately 366 basis points to 12.9% for the fiscal year as compared to 16.6% for the prior year due to the factors described above.

Interest Expense, Net

Interest expense for fiscal 2006 including the Transactions was $16.6 million, partially offset by interest income of $7.8 million resulting in $8.8 million of net interest expense compared to net interest income of $0.2 million in fiscal year 2005. The increase in net interest expense was due primarily to the new debt and amortization of financing costs related to the Transactions.

Provision for Income Taxes

Our effective tax rate was 43.1% for fiscal 2006, as compared to 39.8% for fiscal 2005. The change in the tax rate as compared to the prior year was primarily due to an increase in permanent items (specifically nondeductible costs incurred with respect to the Transactions) and valuation allowances that were recorded against deferred tax assets associated with state net operating loss carry forwards. It was determined that it is no longer “more likely than not” that these deferred tax assets will be realized as a result of anticipated state tax net operating losses arising from interest expense on acquisition-related debt.

The effective tax rate differed from the combined federal and state statutory rates due primarily to the valuation allowance related to deferred tax assets arising from operating losses, expenses that are non-deductible for tax purposes, and the tax impact of the expensing of equity compensation pursuant to SFAS No. 123(R).

Net Income

Net income decreased by $20.9 million to $80.7 million in fiscal 2006 from $101.6 million the year ago period due to the factors described above.

49

Year Ended June 30, 2005 compared with Year Ended June 30, 2004

Net Revenues

Our net revenues increased by 19.5% to $1,019.3 million in fiscal 2005 from $853.0 million in fiscal 2004 primarily due to increases in student enrollment and tuition rates. Average quarterly student enrollment was approximately 62,400 in fiscal 2005 compared to approximately 53,700 in fiscal 2004, an increase of 16.1%. Average final 2005 student enrollment growth and revenue growth was favorably affected by the full year results of acquisitions that occurred in early fiscal 2004. Average tuition rates increased by approximately 6.8% compared to fiscal 2004. Tuition revenue generally varies based on the average tuition charge per credit hour, type of program, specific curriculum and the average student population. We derived 90.6% and 90.8% of our net revenues from tuition and fees paid by, or on behalf of, our students in fiscal 2005 and fiscal 2004, respectively.

Bookstore and housing revenue is largely a function of the average student population. Net housing revenues increased by 15.5% to $43.9 million in fiscal 2005 compared to $38.0 million in fiscal 2004 and revenues from bookstore sales (which include supplies and other items) in fiscal 2005 grew by 16.1% to $36.9 million.

Educational Services

Our educational services expense increased by $94.3 million, or 17.3%, to $640.4 million in fiscal 2005 from $546.1 million in fiscal 2004, due primarily to the incremental costs incurred to support higher levels of student enrollment. Educational services expense includes faculty and certain administrative compensation, rent and other facility operating costs, cost of sales, bad debt, and depreciation and amortization. Overall, educational services expense as a percentage of net revenue decreased approximately 120 basis points to 62.8% in fiscal 2005 from 64.0% in fiscal 2004. The decrease was primarily due to salaries expense and rent expense declining as a percentage of net revenue, both resulting from improved operating leverage. This operating leverage was partially offset by higher depreciation and amortization expense as a percentage of net revenue along with the net impact of the cumulative lease accounting adjustment recorded during the third quarter of fiscal 2005 to comply with a recent interpretation of the lease accounting rules. This lease accounting adjustment increased depreciation expense and reduced rent expense, resulting in a net $3.8 million non-cash cumulative charge. Fiscal 2005 results also include non-cash, pretax charges of approximately $4.2 million related to fixed asset impairments and write-offs. Other improvements as a percentage of net revenue include legal, supplies and telecommunication expenses. Other components of educational services expenses, including bad debt expense, as a percentage of revenue were relatively flat compared to the comparable period in fiscal 2004.

General and Administrative

General and administrative expense was $203.8 million for fiscal 2005, an increase of 22.1% from $167.0 million in fiscal 2004. The increase was primarily due to costs associated with higher levels of student enrollment, including higher advertising and salaries. Other expense categories missing as a percentage of revenue include audit, consulting and Sarbanes-Oxley compliance expenses. As a percentage of net revenue, general and administrative expense increased approximately 40 basis points to 20.0% as compared to 19.6% in fiscal 2004. This increase as a percentage of net revenue was primarily a result of higher advertising expense in fiscal 2005 as compared with fiscal 2004. The increase in advertising expense was primarily due to the need to generate increased inquiries from perspective students and marketing efforts for start-ups. We focused on new sources of inquiries such as the Internet to better target advertising spending. We also continued to utilize other advertising mediums such as television and print media.

Amortization of Intangible Assets

Amortization of intangibles decreased to $6.5 million in fiscal 2005, as compared to $6.9 million in fiscal 2004 due to certain short-lived intangible assets becoming fully amortized, partially offset by higher amortization expense for deferred software costs related to online curriculum programs.

50

Interest Expense, Net

Net interest income was $0.2 million in fiscal 2005 as compared to net interest expense of $2.5 million in comparable year ago period. Net interest income on short-term investments was offset in part by $0.4 million of amortization of fees paid in connection with securing our revolving credit agreement and interest expense on mortgage indebtedness at two of our schools. We expensed $0.5 million in commitment fees related to our revolving credit agreement in fiscal 2005.

We had borrowings under mortgage obligations of approximately $5.3 million and $3.4 million at June 30, 2005 and June 30, 2004, respectively.

Provision for Income Taxes

Our effective tax rate was 39.8% for fiscal 2005, as compared to 41.0% for fiscal 2004. The change in the tax rate as compared to the prior year was primarily due to a reduction in tax reserves recorded during fiscal 2005 related to the favorable resolution of a tax audit. The tax rate in fiscal 2004 was higher than the prior year because we established a valuation allowance against the deferred tax assets related to the cumulative Canadian net operating losses. It was determined that it was no longer “more likely than not” that these deferred tax assets would be realized. We continued to fully reserve against all deferred tax assets related to our Canadian operations during fiscal 2005. The favorable impact of the resolution of the audit on the fiscal 2005 tax rate was partially offset by valuation allowances established with regard to deferred tax assets arising from fiscal 2005 Canadian and certain state net operating losses, and by the distribution of taxable income to states with higher tax rates.

The effective tax rate differed from the combined federal and state statutory rates due primarily to the reduction in tax reserves related to the favorable resolution of a tax audit, the increase in the valuation allowance related to deferred tax assets arising from operating losses, and expenses that are non-deductible for tax purposes.

Net Income

Net income increased by $24.6 million to $101.6 million in fiscal 2005 from $77.0 million in fiscal 2004. The increase is attributable to improved results from operations and, to a lesser extent, net interest income and a lower effective tax rate in fiscal 2005 as compared to fiscal 2004.

Quarterly Financial Results

Our quarterly revenues and income fluctuate primarily as a result of the pattern of student enrollments. Student enrollment at our Art Institute schools has typically peaked in the fall (fiscal second quarter), when the largest number of recent high school and college graduates traditionally begin post-secondary education programs. The first quarter is typically the lowest revenue recognition quarter due to student vacations. The seasonality of our business has decreased over the last several years due to an increased percentage of students at our schools enrolling in bachelor’s programs and the effect of recent acquisitions.

51

The following table sets forth our quarterly results for fiscal 2004, 2005 and 2006.

Quarterly Financial Data (in thousands)

Predecessor	Quarter ended
Fiscal 2004	September 30		December 31		March 31		June 30
Net Revenues	$	168,976	$	232,980	$	235,150	$	215,913
Income before interest and income taxes		8,069		54,468		44,668		25,781
Income before income taxes		7,379		53,648		44,085		25,399
Net income		4,501		32,157		25,447		14,909
Predecessor	Quarter ended
Fiscal 2005	September 30		December 31		March 31		June 30
Net Revenues	$	213,594	$	275,808	$	274,599	$	255,337
Income before interest and income taxes		14,471		65,110		55,467		33,540
Income before income taxes		13,748		64,850		55,743		34,467
Net income		8,153		39,580		34,226		19,615

	Predecessor									Successor			Combined
Fiscal 2006	Quarter ended September 30		Quarter ended December 31		Quarter ended March 31		Period from April 1 through May 31			Period from June 1 through June 30			Period from April 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006
Net Revenues	$	252,985	$	312,611	$	312,533	$	217,634		$	74,397		$	292,031
Income (loss) before interest and income taxes		20,655		77,852		64,624		5,528			(17,962	)		(12,434	)
Income (loss) before income taxes		21,359		79,296		66,800		6,554			(32,068	)		(25,514	)
Net income (loss)		13,952		47,629		40,358		(1,533	)		(19,659	)		(21,192	)

During fiscal 2005, we changed our method of accounting for marketing and admissions activity to expense the costs when incurred rather than allocate the expense to each quarter during a fiscal year. This change had no effect on the annual results.

Liquidity and Funds of Capital Resources

Our primary source of cash is tuition collected from our students. We finance our operating activities primarily from cash generated from operations. Acquisitions have historically been financed through cash generated from operations as well as borrowing on our revolving credit facility. We believe that cash flow from operations, supplemented from time to time with borrowings under our $300.0 million revolving credit agreement, will provide adequate funds for ongoing operations, planned expansion to new locations, planned capital expenditures and debt service during the next twelve months.

Year Ended June 30, 2006 Compared with Year Ended June 30, 2005

As of June 30, 2006, our net working capital deficit was $34.1 million as compared to a net working capital of $47.0 million as of June 30, 2005, an overall reduction of $81.1 million. Net working capital is calculated based on total current assets less total current liabilities. Advanced payments and amounts outstanding under our revolving credit facility are directly offset in cash and cash equivalents and do not contribute to the change in net working capital. The change in net working capital from June 30, 2005 to June 30, 2006 was primarily a result of the following changes in financial position:

Cash, cash equivalents and restricted cash. Cash, cash equivalents and restricted cash, excluding the impact of amounts outstanding under our revolving credit facility and advanced payments, decreased by $57.5 million as

52

of June 30, 2006 as compared to June 30, 2005, primarily as a result of incremental costs associated with the Transactions. This was slightly offset by an increase of $5.1 million of restricted cash over the same period as a result of an increase in Title IV funds received in excess of charges applied to respective students’ accounts and cash held to collateralize certain outstanding letters of credits.

Prepaid income taxes. Prepaid income taxes increased by $10.5 million to $26.6 million as of June 30, 2006 from $16.2 million as of June 30, 2005 due to an overpayment of fiscal 2006 income taxes in the third quarter. This overpayment was a result of uncertainty related to the close of the Transactions at the time the estimated payment for fiscal 2006 was due.

Current deferred income taxes. Deferred income taxes increased by $9.8 million to $23.6 million as of June 30, 2006 from $13.9 million as of June 30, 2005 primarily as a result of deferred tax assets associated with restricted share compensation recognized in fiscal 2006 offset by additional valuation allowances on certain state net operating losses as a result of the Transactions.

Accrued interest. Accrued interest on outstanding indebtedness increased by $13.4 million as of June 30, 2006 as compared to June 30, 2005, which was a result of the debt related to the Transactions.

Accrued advertising. Accrued advertising expense increased by $3.3 million as of June 30, 2006 as compared to June 30, 2005 primarily a result of investment in advertising spending.

Payroll and related tax accruals (including management incentive compensation). Payroll and related taxes increased by $3.7 million, or 13.0%, from $28.7 million as of June 30, 2005 primarily as a result of our overall growth.

Unearned tuition. The increase in unearned tuition of $7.2 million, or 24.5%, is a result of growth in our student population as well as slight differences in timing of the summer academic terms in fiscal 2006 as compared to fiscal 2005 at our Argosy University and South University campuses.

Accounts payable. Accounts payable increased by $11.4 million to $41.5 million as of June 30, 2006 from $30.1 million as of June 30, 2005 due to overall company growth as well as differences in the timing of payments on expenditures in fiscal 2006 as compared to fiscal 2005.

Cash generated from operations for fiscal 2006 and higher borrowings led to a higher cash balance as of June 30, 2006, as compared to the prior fiscal year. Net cash flow from operations was $279.3 million and $192.5 million in fiscal 2006 and 2005, respectively. Our primary source of cash flow from operations is tuition collected from and on behalf of our students. The increase in cash flow from operations in fiscal 2006 compared to fiscal 2005 was the result of the 14.8% growth in net tuition revenue coupled with improved operating expense management. Additionally, advanced payments increased $56.0 million in fiscal 2006 as compared to fiscal 2005 primarily as a result of timing of drawdowns on Title IV funds. These increases were offset by Transaction costs of $40.1 million, including $30.2 million of accounting, placement, other financings, investment banking, legal and other professional fees and costs and $9.9 million of employee compensation and payroll taxes.

In fiscal 2006, cash on hand and net cash flow from operations were primarily used to fund the cash component of the Transactions of $227.7 million and invest $65.6 million in capital expenditures. During fiscal 2005, cash on hand, net cash flow from operations and $21.2 million from the exercise of stock options were primarily used to fund the repayment of $125.1 million outstanding on our revolving credit facility as of June 30, 2004, invest in $74.9 million in capital expenditures and fund the repayment of a note issued in connection with our acquisition of Brown Mackie College as well as fund an escrow payment associated with the acquisition of South University.

Net accounts receivable increased by $0.3 million compared to fiscal 2005, which represented a decrease as a percentage of revenue from 5.7% in fiscal 2005 to 5.0% in fiscal 2006. Net accounts receivable can be affected

53

significantly by the changes in the start dates of academic terms from year to year. As of June 30, 2006, there were no significant changes to the start dates of academic terms in session. Days sales outstanding (“DSO”) in receivables decreased from 20.6 days at June 30, 2005 to 18.1 days at June 30, 2006. We calculate DSO by dividing net accounts receivable by average daily revenue for the preceding quarter. Quarterly average daily revenue is determined by taking the total revenue for a quarter and dividing by the number of days in a quarter. The decrease in DSO was primarily due to better collections along with greater use of third party loans by our students. As a means of controlling our credit risk, we have established alternative loan programs with student loan lenders. These programs, which are non-recourse to us, help bridge the funding gap created by tuition rates that rise faster than financial aid sources. We believe that these loans are attractive to our students because they provide for repayment post graduation and are available to borrowers with lower than average credit ratings.

Capital expenditures were $65.6 million, or 5.6% of revenue, for fiscal 2006 as compared to $74.9 million, or 7.3% of revenue, in fiscal 2005. The reduction of capital expenditures as a percentage of revenue was due to our continued focus on capital efficiency as well as delays in certain information technology and facility related projects. We expect fiscal 2007 capital expenditures to increase back to the level in fiscal 2005 as a percentage of revenue, primarily due to increased investment in our start up campuses and online operations as well as spending carried over to fiscal 2007 from fiscal 2006 projects.

Our existing revolving credit facility allows for borrowings of up to $300 million. As of June 30, 2006, we had $160 million outstanding under this facility and were in compliance with all covenants. All amounts outstanding on the revolving credit facility were repaid on July 3, 2006.

We lease most of our facilities and anticipate that future commitments on existing leases will be paid from cash provided from operating activities. We also expect to extend the terms of leases that will expire or enter into similar long term commitments for comparable space. We guarantee a significant portion of real estate lease obligations for our subsidiaries.

We paid off a mortgage on the building occupied by Western State University College of Law in March 2006, which resulted in approximately $3.3 million in principal payments in fiscal 2006.

The following table describes our commitments at June 30, 2006 under various contracts and agreements (in thousands):

	Total amounts committed		Payments due by period
			2007		2008-2009		20010-2011		2012- Thereafter
Revolving credit loans(1)	$	160,000	$		$		$		$	160,000
Term loan(2)		1,185,000		11,850		23,700		23,700		1,125,750
Senior notes(3)		375,000		—		—		—		375,000
Senior subordinated notes(4)		385,000		—		—		—		385,000
Standby letters of credit(5)		—		—		—		—		—
Mortgage debt of consolidated entity(6)		1,864		174		389		453		848
Capital leases		3,101		771		1,659		671		—
Sub-total long-term debt		2,109,965		12,795		25,748		24,824		2,046,598
Interest payments(7)		1,273,885		165,495		328,164		324,436		455,790
Operating leases(8)		581,615		86,955		155,256		113,553		225,851
Unconditional purchase obligations(9)		21,338		12,426		7,093		917		902
Total commitments	$	3,986,803	$	277,671	$	516,261	$	463,730	$	2,729,141

(1) Our revolving loans, if any, mature on June 1, 2012. The $160 million of borrowing outstanding under our revolving credit facility was repaid on July 3, 2006.

(2) Our term loan matures on June 1, 2013.

54

(3) Our Senior Notes are due June 1, 2014.

(4) Our Senior Subordinated Notes are due June 1, 2016.

(5) As of June 30, 2006 there were no standby letters of credit.

(6) Our mortgage debt of consolidated entity matures on January 2, 2014.

(7) Interest payments are based on either the fixed rate or the variable rate as of June 30, 2006 and assume that repayments are in accordance with the loan agreements without giving effect to mandatory prepayments.

(8) Our operating lease obligations extend through 2020.

(9) We have various contractual obligations that extend through 2014 for services.

As of June 30, 2006, we were highly leveraged and had an outstanding $2,110.0 million in aggregate indebtedness with an additional $140.0 million of borrowing capacity available under our revolving credit facility. Our liquidity requirements are significant and include debt service and capital expenditures. For fiscal 2006, pro forma interest expense, not including non-cash amortization of deferred financing fees, was $165.7 million.

Effective July 2006, we entered into interest rate swap agreements to manage the variable rate portion of $750.0 million of debt under our term loan facility. Under the terms of the interest rate swap agreements, we receive payments based on variable interest rates based on the three-month LIBOR and make payments on a fixed rate of 5.397% plus the applicable margin.

Management expects our cash flows from operations, combined with cash on hand and availability under our new revolving credit facility, to provide sufficient liquidity to fund our current obligations, projected working capital requirements and capital spending for a period that includes the next 12 months.

Year Ended June 30, 2005 Compared with Year Ended June 30, 2004

At June 30, 2005, our working capital was approximately $47.0 million. This is compared to a working capital deficit of $76.5 million at June 30, 2004.

Cash generated from operations for fiscal 2005 led to higher cash and lower borrowing balances at June 30, 2005, as compared to the prior fiscal year. Partially offsetting the significant decrease in debt was the growth in advance payments and unearned tuition due to an increase in enrollment. During fiscal 2005, cash on hand, net cash flow from operations, and $21.2 million from the exercise of stock options were primarily used to fund the repayment of a note issued in connection with our acquisition of Brown Mackie College, an escrow payment associated with the acquisition of South University, repayment of $125.1 million outstanding on our revolving credit facility at June 30, 2004, as well as invest in $74.9 million in capital expenditures. In fiscal 2004 cash on hand and $166.3 million of net cash flow from operations, along with proceeds from both the net increase in debt of $90.1 million and the issuance of stock of $12.0 million were primarily used to fund the cash component of acquisitions of $157.8 million, repay $35 million outstanding on our revolving credit facility at June 30, 2003, and invest $82.3 in capital expenditures.

Net cash flow from operations was $192.5 million and $166.3 million in fiscal 2005 and 2004, respectively. The increase from prior year net cash flow from operations was primarily attributable to an increase in net income of $24.6 million and an increase in non-cash items of $26.6 million. These increases were partially offset by $24.9 million less cash generated from working capital primarily due to the timing of income tax installment payments.

Net accounts receivable increased by $5.8 million compared to fiscal 2004, which represented a decrease as a percentage of revenue from 6.1% in fiscal 2004 to 5.7% in fiscal 2005. Days sales outstanding (“DSO”) in receivables decreased from 22.0 days at June 30, 2004 to 20.6 days at June 30, 2005. We calculate DSO by dividing net accounts receivable by average daily revenue for the preceding quarter. Quarterly average daily revenue is determined by taking the total revenue for a quarter and dividing by the number of days in a quarter.

55

The decrease in DSO was primarily due to better collections along with greater use of third party loans by our students. As a means of controlling our credit risk, we have established alternative loan programs with student loan lenders. These programs, which are non-recourse to us, help bridge the funding gap created by tuition rates that rise faster than financial aid sources. We believe that these loans are attractive to our students because they provide for repayment post graduation and are available to borrowers with lower than average credit ratings.

Capital expenditures were $74.9 million or 7.3% of revenue for of fiscal 2005, compared to $82.3 million, or 9.6% of revenue in fiscal 2004. The reduction of capital expenditures as a percentage of revenue was due to our continued focus on capital efficiency as well as decreased spending in fiscal 2005 resulting from delays in the commencement of capital projects. The fiscal 2005 capital expenditures include investments in schools acquired or started during the previous several years and schools added in fiscal 2005, continued expansion and improvements to current facilities, additional or replacement school and housing facilities, and classroom and administrative technology.

Contingencies

The Art Institute of Dallas has been placed on probation by the Commission on Colleges of the Southern Association of Colleges and Schools (the “Commission”) due to the school’s failure to satisfactorily document clearly identified expected outcomes and assessments for its programs and services as required by the Commission’s institutional effectiveness comprehensive standard. The Commission, in connection with reaffirming the accreditation of The Art Institute of Dallas for a ten year period in December 2003, required the school to provide evidence of compliance with this standard by December 2005. The probationary period is through at least December 2006 and may be extended for an additional year for good cause. The Commission may remove its grant of accreditation to The Art Institute of Dallas if the school does not satisfactorily address the issues raised by the Commission. As of October 2005, approximately 1,300 students attended The Art Institute of Dallas, which is one of 32 Art Institute schools.

In addition to the matter described above, we are a defendant in certain legal proceedings arising out of the conduct of our business. In the opinion of management, based upon an investigation of these claims and discussion with legal counsel, the ultimate outcome of such legal proceedings, individually and in the aggregate, will not have a material adverse effect on our consolidated financial position, results of operations or liquidity.

Senior Secured Credit Facilities

Overview. Our senior secured credit facilities consists of a $1,185.0 million term loan facility and a $300.0 million revolving credit facility of which we are the primary borrower. The revolving credit facility includes borrowing capacity available for letters of credit and for borrowings on same-day notice, referred to as swing line loans.

Interest Rate and Fees. Borrowings under the senior secured credit facilities bear interest at a rate equal to LIBOR plus an applicable margin or, at our option, an applicable margin plus an alternative base rate determined by reference to the higher of (x) the prime rate as published in The Wall Street Journal and (y) the federal funds rate plus  ¹/2 of 1%. The initial applicable margin for borrowings under the revolving credit facility is 1.25% with respect to base rate borrowings and 2.25% with respect to LIBOR borrowings and, under the term loan facility, 1.50% with respect to base rate borrowings and 2.50% with respect to LIBOR borrowings. The applicable margin for borrowings under the senior secured credit facilities may be reduced subject to our attaining certain leverage ratios.

We utilize interest rate swap agreements, which are contractual agreements to exchange payments based on underlying interest rates, to manage the floating rate portion of our debt under our term loan facility. On June 6, 2006, we entered into two five year interest rate swap agreements, for the total notional amount of $750 million, in order to hedge a portion of its exposure to variable interest payments associated with the senior secured credit

56

facilities. The interest rate swaps are for $375.0 million effective July 1, 2006 and $375.0 million effective July 3, 2006. Under the terms of the interest rate swaps, we receive payments based on variable interest rates based on the three-month LIBOR and make payments based on a fixed rate of 5.397% plus the applicable margin.

In addition to paying interest on outstanding principal under the senior secured credit facilities, we are required to pay a commitment fee to the lenders under the revolving credit facility in respect of the unutilized commitments thereunder. The initial commitment fee rate is 0.50% per annum. The commitment fee rate may be reduced to 0.375% subject to our attaining certain leverage ratios. We must also pay customary letter of credit fees.

Amortization. We are required to repay installments on the loans under the term loan facility in quarterly principal amounts equal to 0.25% of their initial total funded principal amount calculated as of the closing date for the first six years and nine months, with the remaining amount payable on the date that is seven years from the date of the closing of the senior secured credit facilities.

Principal amounts outstanding under the revolving credit facility are due and payable in full at maturity, six years from the date of the closing of the senior secured credit facilities.

Certain Covenants and Events of Default. The senior secured credit agreement contains a number of covenants that, among other things, restrict, subject to certain exceptions, our ability to:

• incur additional indebtedness;

• create liens on assets;

• engage in mergers or consolidations;

• sell assets;

• pay dividends and distributions or repurchase our capital stock;

• make investments, loans or advances;

• make capital expenditures;

• repay subordinated indebtedness (including the senior subordinated notes offered hereby);

• make certain acquisitions;

• engage in certain transactions with affiliates;

• enter into certain restrictive agreements;

• amend agreements governing our subordinated indebtedness (including the senior subordinated notes offered hereby) and our constitutive documents;

• change the nature of our business; and

• change the status of Education Management Holdings LLC as a passive holding company.

In addition, the senior secured credit agreement requires us to maintain the following financial covenants:

• a maximum total leverage ratio; and

• a minimum interest coverage ratio.

The senior secured credit agreement also contains certain customary affirmative covenants and events of default.

57

Senior Notes and Senior Subordinated Notes

The indentures governing the senior notes and senior subordinated notes being offered hereby will limit our (and most or all of our subsidiaries’) ability to:

• incur additional indebtedness;

• pay dividends on or make other distributions or repurchase our capital stock;

• make certain investments;

• enter into certain types of transactions with affiliates;

• use assets as security in other transactions; and

• sell certain assets or merge with or into other companies.

Subject to certain exceptions, the indentures governing the notes will permit us and our restricted subsidiaries to incur additional indebtedness, including secured indebtedness. See “Description of Notes.”

Covenant Compliance

Under the senior secured credit facilities, we are required to satisfy and a maximum total leverage ratio, a minimum interest coverage ratio and other financial conditions tests. As of June 30, 2006, we were in compliance with the financial and nonfinancial covenants. Our continued ability to meet those financial ratios and tests can be affected by events beyond our control, and we cannot assure you that we will meet those ratios and tests. A breach of any of these covenants could result in a default under the senior secured credit facilities. Upon the occurrence of an event of default under the senior secured credit facilities, the lenders could elect to declare all amounts outstanding under the senior secured credit facilities to be immediately due and payable and terminate all commitments to extend further credit.

Adjusted earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortization (“EBITDA”) is a non-GAAP measure used to determine our compliance with certain covenants contained in the indentures governing the notes and in our senior secured credit facilities. Adjusted EBITDA is defined as EBITDA further adjusted to exclude unusual items and other adjustments permitted in calculating covenant compliance under the indentures governing the notes and our senior secured credit facilities. We believe that the inclusion of supplementary adjustments to EBITDA applied in presenting Adjusted EBITDA is appropriate to provide additional information to investors to demonstrate compliance with our financing covenants.

The breach of covenants in our senior secured credit facilities that are tied to ratios based on Adjusted EBITDA could result in a default under that agreement, in which case the lenders could elect to declare all amounts borrowed due and payable. Any such acceleration would also result in a default under our indentures governing the notes. Additionally, under our senior secured credit facilities and the indentures governing the notes, our ability to engage in activities such as incurring additional indebtedness, making investments and paying dividends is also tied to ratios based on Adjusted EBITDA.

Adjusted EBITDA does not represent net income (loss) or cash flow from operations as those terms are defined by GAAP and does not necessarily indicate whether cash flows will be sufficient to fund cash needs. While Adjusted EBITDA and similar measures are frequently used as measures of operations and the ability to meet debt service requirements, these terms are not necessarily comparable to other similarly titled captions of other companies due to the potential inconsistencies in the method of calculation. Adjusted EBITDA does not reflect the impact of earnings or charges resulting from matters that we may consider not to be indicative of our ongoing operations. In particular, the definition of Adjusted EBITDA in the senior credit facilities and the indentures allows us to add back certain non-cash, extraordinary, unusual or non-recurring charges that are deducted in calculating net income (loss). However, these are expenses that may recur, vary greatly and are difficult to predict. Further, our debt instruments require that Adjusted EBITDA be calculated for the most recent four fiscal quarters. As a result, the measure can be disproportionately affected by a particularly strong or weak quarter. Further, it may not be comparable to the measure for any subsequent four-quarter period or any complete fiscal year.

58

The following is a reconciliation of net income (loss), which is a GAAP measure of our operating results, to Adjusted EBITDA as defined in our debt agreements, and the calculation of the fixed charge coverage ratio, net debt and net debt to Adjusted EBITDA ratio under the indentures governing the notes. The terms and related calculations are defined in the indentures governing the notes.

	Predecessor						Successor			Combined
(in millions)	Year ended June 30, 2005			Period from July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006			Period from June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006			Year Ended June 30, 2006
Net income (loss)	$	101.6		$	100.4		$	(19.7	)	$	80.7
Interest (income) expense, net		(0.2	)		(5.3	)		14.1			8.8
Taxes		67.2			73.6			(12.4	)		61.2
Depreciation and amortization(1)		84.1			62.9			7.4			70.3
EBITDA		252.7			231.6			(10.6	)		221.0
Reversal of impact of unfavorable lease liabilities(2)											(0.2	)
Equity compensation expense(3)											32.2
Transaction and advisory fees(4)											40.1
Adjusted EBITDA										$	293.1

(1) Depreciation and amortization includes non-cash charges related to fixed asset impairments and write offs of $0.9 million in fiscal 2006 and $4.2 million in fiscal 2005. The year ended June 30, 2005 also includes $19.5 million related to cumulative adjustments for changes in lease accounting.

(2) Represents non-cash income due to the amortization of $7.3 million of unfavorable lease liabilities resulting from fair value adjustments required under purchase accounting as part of the Transactions.

(3) Represents non-cash equity compensation recognized in accordance with Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 123(R), “Share-Based Payment.”

(4) Represents costs associated with the Transactions of $30.2 million of accounting, placement, other financing, investment banking, legal and other professional fees and costs, and $9.9 million of employee compensation and payroll taxes. Also includes advisory fees paid to Sponsors of $0.4 million under our management agreement with Providence Equity and Goldman Sachs Capital Partners.

Our covenant requirements and pro forma ratios for the twelve months ended June 30, 2006 are as follows:

	Covenant Requirements	Pro Forma Ratios
Senior secured credit facilities(1)
Minimum Adjusted EBITDA to consolidated interest expense ratio	1.40x	1.77x
Maximum consolidated total debt to Adjusted EBITDA	8.25x	6.30x
Notes
Minimum Adjusted EBITDA to fixed charges ratio required to incur additional debt pursuant to ratio provisions	2.00x	1.77x

(1) These covenants are not required under the credit agreement until December 31, 2006.

Regulations

U.S. Department of Education regulations require Title IV program funds received by our schools in excess of the tuition and fees owed by the relevant students at that time to be, with these students’ permission,

59

maintained and classified as restricted funds until they are billed for the portion of their education program related to those funds. Funds transferred through electronic funds transfer programs are held in a separate cash account and released when certain conditions are satisfied. These restrictions have not significantly affected our ability to fund daily operations.

Education institutions participating in Title IV programs must satisfy a series of specific standards of financial responsibility. The U.S. Department of Education has adopted standards to determine an institution’s financial responsibility to participate in Title IV programs. The regulations establish three ratios: (i) the equity ratio, intended to measure an institution’s capital resources, ability to borrow and financial viability; (ii) the primary reserve ratio, intended to measure an institution’s ability to support current operations from expendable resources; and (iii) the net income ratio, intended to measure an institution’s profitability. Each ratio is calculated separately, based on the figures in the institution’s most recent annual audited financial statements, and then weighted and combined to arrive at a single composite score. Such composite score must be at least 1.5 for the institution to be deemed financially responsible without conditions or additional oversight. If an institution fails to meet any of these requirements, it may be deemed to be not financially responsible by the U.S. Department of Education, or otherwise ineligible to participate in Title IV programs.

Regulations promulgated under the HEA also require all proprietary education institutions to comply with the 90/10 Rule, which prohibits participating schools from deriving 90% or more of total revenue from Title IV programs in any year. An institution that violates the 90/10 Rule becomes immediately ineligible to participate in the Title IV programs, and may not reapply for eligibility until the following fiscal year.

Use of Estimates and Critical Accounting Policies

General

In preparing our financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States, judgments and estimates are made about the amounts reflected in the consolidated financial statements that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities, and the reported amounts of revenue and expenses, during the reporting period. As part of the financial reporting process, our management collaborates to determine the necessary information on which to base judgments and develop estimates used to prepare the consolidated financial statements. Historical experience and available information are used to make these judgments and estimates. However, different amounts could be reported using different assumptions and in light of changes in facts and circumstances. Therefore, actual amounts could differ from the estimates reflected in the condensed consolidated financial statements appearing elsewhere in this prospectus.

Our management makes judgments and estimates on an ongoing basis that include, but are not limited to, revenue recognition, allowance for doubtful accounts, valuations of goodwill and indefinite-lived intangible assets, valuations of acquired finite-lived intangible assets and loss contingencies. Further description of how these estimates are developed is provided below.

We believe that the following critical accounting policies comprise the more significant judgments and estimates used in the preparation of the consolidated financial statements.

Purchase Accounting

As discussed above, the Transactions were completed on June 1, 2006 and was financed by a combination of equity invested by the Sponsors and other investors, borrowings under our senior secured credit facilities, the issuance of the notes and EDMC’s cash on hand. These funds, net of proceeds from the exercise of outstanding stock options, were used to purchase all EDMC’s shares of common stock that were issued and outstanding, immediately prior to the completion of the Transactions. The purchase price included the $3.4 billion purchase of the outstanding common stock and settlement of stock options outstanding, and transaction costs of $105.0 million, of which $59.6 million was allocated to the cost of issuing debt while the remaining $45.4 million was

60

included in the overall purchase price. Under business combination accounting, the total purchase price was allocated to our net tangible and identifiable intangible assets based on their estimated fair values established by an independent appraisal firm as of June 1, 2006. The excess of the purchase price over the net tangible and identifiable intangible assets was recorded as goodwill. The preliminary allocation of the purchase price for property and equipment, intangible assets and deferred income taxes was based upon valuation data at the date of the Transactions and the estimates and assumptions are subject to change.

Revenue Recognition and Receivables

We bill tuition and housing revenues at the beginning of an academic term and recognize the revenue on a pro rata basis over the term of instruction or occupancy. For most of our programs, the academic and fiscal quarters are the same; therefore, unearned revenue is not significant at the end of a fiscal quarter. However, Argosy University and Brown Mackie College and to a lesser degree South University and certain Art Institutes have educational programs with starting and ending dates that differ from our fiscal quarters. Therefore, at the end of the fiscal quarter, we have revenue from these programs that has not yet been earned in accordance with the Securities and Exchange Commission’s Staff Accounting Bulletin No. 104, “Revenue Recognition in Financial Statements.”

Refunds are calculated and paid in accordance with federal, state and accrediting agency standards.

The trade receivable balances are comprised of individually insignificant amounts due primarily from students throughout the United States and Canada. Our accounts receivable balances at each balance sheet date consist of amounts related to revenue from current or former students for classes which have occurred or prior periods of occupancy in our housing facilities for which payment has not been received; or obligations of current students for tuition, housing and other items related to academic terms in progress for which payment has not been received.

We determine our allowance for doubtful accounts for most locations primarily by categorizing gross receivables based upon the enrollment status (in-school vs. out-of-school) of the student and establishing a reserve based on the likelihood of collection, considering our historical experience. Student accounts are monitored through an aging process whereby past due accounts are pursued. When certain criteria are met (primarily aging past the due date by more than four months) and internal collection measures have been taken without success, the accounts of former students are placed with an outside collection agency. Student accounts in collection are reserved at a range of 85% to 100% and are evaluated on a case-by-case basis before being written off. If current collection trends differ significantly from historical collections, an adjustment would be required to our allowance. Historically, however, the allowance for doubtful accounts has been within our estimate of uncollectible accounts.

Share-Based Payment

Beginning on July 1, 2005, we began accounting for stock-based compensation in accordance with SFAS No. 123(R), Share-Based Payment (SFAS No. 123(R)) using the modified prospective method.

We are now required to record the fair value of stock-based compensation awards as expenses in the consolidated statement of operations. Under the fair value recognition provisions of this statement, share-based compensation cost is measured at the grant date based on the value of the award and is recognized as expense over the vesting period. For current and past grants of stock options, we utilized the Black-Scholes valuation model in determining the fair value of share-based awards at the grant date. This valuation requires judgment, including estimating the risk free interest rate, expected life of the option and expected volatility rate. In addition, judgment is also required in estimating the amount of share-based awards that are expected to be forfeited. If actual results differ significantly from these estimates, stock-based compensation expense and our results of operations could be materially impacted.

61

During the fiscal year 2006, we granted employees restricted shares instead of issuing stock options. These restricted shares also resulted in compensation expense under SFAS No. 123(R).

As a result of the Transactions, the vesting restrictions on all stock options and shares of restricted stock were removed. We accelerated the recognition of compensation expense under SFAS No. 123(R) to fully recognize the remaining expense on all equity instruments.

In August 2006, our board of directors approved a new stock option plan for executive management and key personnel. No options under this plan were awarded as of June 30, 2006.

Leases

We lease most of our administrative and educational facilities under operating lease agreements. Before entering into a lease, an analysis is performed to determine whether a lease should be classified as a capital or an operating lease according to SFAS No. 13, “Accounting for Leases”, as amended. These lease agreements typically contain tenant improvement allowances and rent holidays. Tenant improvement allowances are recorded as a leasehold improvement asset (which is included in Property and Equipment, net) when the leasehold asset is placed in service and both the tenant improvement asset and related deferred rent liability are amortized on a straight-line basis over the shorter of the term of the lease or useful life of the asset as additional depreciation expense and a credit to rent expense, respectively. For leases that contain a rent holiday, total rent payments are recognized straight-line over the entire lease term. Lease agreements sometimes contain quantifiable rent escalation clauses, which are accounted for on a straight-line basis over the life of the lease. Our lease terms generally range from one to twenty years with one or more renewal options. For leases with renewal options, we record rent expense on a straight-line basis over the original lease term, exclusive of the renewal period. When a renewal occurs, we record rent expense over the new term. Rent is expensed as we gain “possession and/or control” over the new space regardless of whether the facility is substantially complete or whether a build out occurs because rent capitalization during construction ceased on January 1, 2006 due to updated accounting rules. We also lease space from time to time on a short-term basis in order to provide specific courses or programs.

Capitalization of Internally Developed Software Costs

Statement of Position 98-1 (SOP 98-1), “Accounting for the Costs of Computer Software Developed or Obtained for Internal Use” requires the capitalization of direct costs incurred in connection with developing or obtaining software for internal use, including external direct costs of materials and services and payroll and payroll related costs for employees who are directly associated with and devote time to an internal use software development project. We capitalize our online curriculum development costs under this standard.

Long-Lived Assets

Property and equipment are recorded at their estimated cost less accumulated depreciation. Buildings are depreciated over the estimated useful life of 30 years using the straight-line method. Leasehold improvement and capitalized lease costs are amortized over the shorter of the original lease term exclusive of any renewal periods, or their estimated useful lives. The majority of our property and equipment are depreciated over estimated useful lives ranging from three to ten years using the straight-line method. Accelerated depreciation methods are generally used for income tax purposes. The Predecessor applied the straight-line method using the half year convention which was not materially different than using the date the assets were placed in service. Amortization of intangibles relates to the values assigned to identifiable intangible assets. These intangible assets arose principally from the Transactions, acquisition of schools and development of curriculum for various online programs.

We evaluate the recoverability of the goodwill and indefinite lived intangible assets attributable to each reporting unit as required under SFAS No. 142, “Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets”, by comparing the fair value of each reporting unit with its carrying value. The evaluation is performed at least annually and

62

additionally when potential impairment indicators exist as required by SFAS No. 142. Management applies judgment when performing these evaluations to determine the financial projections used to assess the fair value of each reporting unit. The fair market value of the reporting units is estimated by applying multiples to earnings before interest, taxes and depreciation. To validate the multiples used we compare the multiples to recent identified transactions where similar businesses were sold.

Effective April 1, 2005, the Predecessor changed its regional structure to form seven operating divisions by geographic locations within North America. These regions were the Northeast, Southeast, North Central, Central, South Central, Northwest and Southwest regions. Due to the reorganization of the division structure, the Predecessor reallocated goodwill for impairment testing purposes based upon the new operating division structure in the fiscal fourth quarter of 2005. In connection with the reallocation of goodwill, the Predecessor performed an impairment test as of April 1, 2005 and determined goodwill was not impaired. Shortly thereafter, in July 2005, the Predecessor refined the regional structure from seven to six operating divisions. At that time, the Predecessor completed its annual impairment test for the fiscal year beginning July 1, 2005 and determined goodwill was not impaired. The Successor maintained the same organizational structure as the Predecessor relative to determination of reporting units as of June 30, 2006.

We evaluate the recoverability of property and equipment and intangible assets with finite lives whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate the carrying amount of any such assets may not be fully recoverable in accordance with SFAS No. 144, “Accounting for the Impairment or Disposal of Long-Lived Assets”. Changes in circumstances may include economic conditions or operating performance. When impairment indicators arise from changing conditions, we perform an evaluation based upon assumptions about the estimated future cash flows. If the projected undiscounted future cash flows are less than the carrying value, we determine the fair value of the asset based upon a discounted cash flow model or a third-party valuation. When utilizing a discounted cash flow model to determine fair value, if the discounted cash flows are less than the carrying value of the asset, an impairment loss is recognized. See Note 5 of the audited financial statements for additional information regarding the change in estimates for useful lives and fair market values of as a result of business combination accounting.

Income Taxes

We account for income taxes in accordance with SFAS No. 109, “Accounting for Income Taxes,” which requires the use of the asset and liability method. Under this method, deferred tax assets and liabilities result from (i) temporary differences in the recognition of income and expense for financial and federal income tax reporting requirements, and (ii) differences between the recorded value of assets acquired in business combinations accounted for as purchases for financial reporting purposes and their corresponding tax bases.

As of June 30, 2006, we had state net operating loss carry forwards of approximately $68.2 million available to offset future taxable income and a related deferred tax asset of $4.9 million. The carry forwards expire at varying dates beginning in fiscal 2007 through fiscal 2026. We have determined that it is currently “more likely than not” that the deferred tax assets associated with $53.7 million of its state net operating loss carry forwards will not be realized and have established a valuation allowance equal to the gross deferred tax asset balance of $4.0 million related to these net operating loss carry forwards. In addition, certain of our state net operating losses may be subject to annual limitation due to these states’ adoption of the ownership change limitations imposed by Internal Revenue Code Section 382 or similar state provisions, which could result in the expiration of these state net operating loss carry forwards before they can be utilized.

As of June 30, 2006, we had Canadian net operating loss carry forwards of approximately $5.1 million available to offset future taxable income and a related deferred tax asset of $1.6 million. The carry forwards expire at varying dates beginning in fiscal 2009 through fiscal 2016. As of June 30, 2006, we had additional Canadian deferred tax assets of $2.0 million related to temporary items. We have determined that it is currently more likely than not that the deferred tax assets related to our Canadian net operating losses and temporary items will not be realized and have established a valuation allowance equal to the gross deferred tax assets.

63

Accrued health insurance and incentive compensation

We are self-insured for health benefits provided to our employees, requiring us to exercise significant judgment to record the estimated liability. We record an accrual for known claims and an estimate for incurred but not yet reported claims based upon information received from third parties, including professional actuaries.

We maintain a cash bonus program for some of our senior employees. The expense for this bonus plan is based upon our financial performance as well as other factors. All payments under this bonus plan are subject to our Board of Directors’ approval.

Internal Controls over Financial Reporting

Because of its inherent limitations, internal controls over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with policies or procedures may deteriorate.

New Accounting Standards

In May 2005, the FASB issued SFAS No. 154, “Accounting Changes and Error Corrections”, which changes the requirements for the accounting and reporting of a change in accounting principle. SFAS No. 154 applies to all voluntary changes in accounting principles as well as to changes required by an accounting pronouncement that does not include specific transition provisions. SFAS No. 154 eliminates the requirement to include the cumulative effect of changes in accounting principle in the income statement and instead requires that changes in accounting principle be retroactively applied. A change in accounting estimate continues to be accounted for in the period of change and future periods if necessary. A correction of an error continues to be reported by restating prior period financial statements. SFAS No. 154 is effective for us as of July 1, 2006.

On July 13, 2006, the FASB issued FIN No. 48, “Accounting for Uncertainty in Income Taxes—An Interpretation of FASB Statement No. 109” which clarifies the accounting for uncertainty in income taxes recognized in an enterprise’s financial statements in accordance with SFAS No. 109, “Accounting for Income Taxes”. FIN No. 48 also prescribes a recognition threshold and measurement attribute for the financial statement recognition and measurement of a tax position taken or expected to be taken in a tax return. FIN No. 48 also provides guidance on derecognition, classification, interest and penalties, accounting in interim periods, disclosure, and transition. FIN No. 48 is effective for fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2006. We are in the process of evaluating the potential impact of FIN No. 48, if any.

Effect of Inflation

We do not believe our operations have been materially affected by inflation.

Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk

We are exposed to market risks in the ordinary course of business that include foreign currency exchange rates. We typically do not utilize forward or option contracts on foreign currencies or commodities. We are subject to fluctuations in the value of the Canadian dollar relative to the U.S. dollar. We do not believe we are subject to material risks from reasonably possible near-term change in exchange rates.

The fair values of cash and cash equivalents, accounts receivable, accounts payable and accrued expenses, to the extent the underlying liability will be settled in cash, approximated carrying values because of the short-term nature of these instruments. The derivative financial instrument is carried at fair value, which is based on the amount we would pay to terminate the agreement. The fair value and carrying amounts of our long-term debt are approximately equivalent.

64

We have a 1% partnership interest in an entity that is consolidated in our statements and has an outstanding mortgage on one of our leased facilities in the amount of $1.9 million at June 30, 2006.

As of June 30, 2006, we had total debt of $2,110.0 million, including $1,345.0 million in variable rate debt. Effective July 2006, $750.0 million of the variable rate portion of this debt was hedged by the interest rate swaps. In fiscal 2006, our weighted average interest rate was 8.483% on outstanding debt on a combined basis. As of June 30, 2005, we had $62.0 million in variable rate debt. In fiscal 2005, weighted average interest rate was 4.16% on outstanding debt. A hypothetical change of 1.25% in interest rates from June 30, 2006 levels would have increased or decreased interest expense by approximately $1.2 million for the variable-rate debt in fiscal 2006. On a pro forma basis the annualized impact of a change of 1.25% in interest rates would be an increase or decrease of $14.8 million for the variable rate debt.

On June 6, 2006, in order to minimize the effect of variable interest rates, we entered into two five year interest rate swap agreements that fixed the interest rate for $750.0 million of our variable rate debt starting July 2006, which will impact interest expense in the fiscal year 2007. The interest rate swaps are for $375.0 million, effective July 1, 2006 and $375.0 million, effective July 3, 2006, and fix our interest rates at 5.397% plus the applicable margin. The swap agreements expire on July 1, 2011. In fiscal 2007, we will have variable rate debt of $435.0 million, excluding $160.0 million under our revolving credit facility, which will be subject to market rate risk, due to the fact that our interest payments will fluctuate as market changes cause the underlying interest rates to change. Under the terms of the interest rate swap agreements, we receive payments based on variable interest rates based on the three-month LIBOR and make payments based on a fixed rate of 5.397%. The net receipt or payment from the interest rate swap agreement is recorded in interest expense. The interest rate swap agreements are designated and qualify as cash flow hedges under SFAS No. 133, “Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities.” As such, the swap agreements are accounted for as an asset in the consolidated balance sheet at fair value, net of tax. The fair value of the swap agreements are estimated based on current settlement prices and quoted market prices of comparable contracts. For the period ended June 30, 2006, we recorded an unrealized after-tax gain of $2.5 million in other comprehensive income (loss) related to the change in market value on the swap agreements. The change in market value of the swap agreements may be recognized in the statement of operations if certain terms of the senior secured credit facility change, if the loan is extinguished or if the swap agreements are terminated prior to maturity.

65

BUSINESS

Our Company

We are among the largest providers of post-secondary education in North America, with more than 72,000 active students as of the fall of 2005. Our educational institutions offer students the opportunity to earn undergraduate and graduate degrees in a broad range of disciplines, including media arts, design, psychology and behavioral sciences, education, information technology, legal studies, business, health sciences and culinary arts. Since 1996, we have generated a compounded annual enrollment growth rate of 18.4% and a compounded annual revenue growth rate of 23.0%. For the twelve months ended June 30, 2006, we generated revenues and Adjusted EBITDA of $1,170.2 million and $293.1 million, respectively.

Over our 35-year operating history, we have expanded the reach of our educational systems and currently operate 71 schools across 24 states in the United States and two Canadian provinces. Additionally, we offer an online education platform, enabling our students to pursue degrees online or through a flexible combination of both online and local campuses. Our programs enable students to earn various degrees, including Doctorate, Master’s, Bachelor’s and Associate’s, as well as certain specialized non-degree diplomas. These academic programs are designed with a distinct emphasis on applied, career-oriented content and are primarily taught by faculty members that possess practical and relevant professional experience in their respective fields.

Our student population includes both traditional students, typically recent high school graduates pursuing their first higher education degree, and working adults, who are pursuing additional education in their current field or preparing for a new profession. Based on information collected by us from graduating students and employers, we believe that of the approximately 12,300 undergraduate students who graduated from our institutions during the calendar year ended December 31, 2005, approximately 88% of those available for employment obtained employment in their fields of study or a related field within six months of graduation. Similar to traditional public and private colleges and universities, each of our schools located in the United States is recognized by accreditation agencies and by the U.S. Department of Education, enabling students to access federal student loans, grants and other forms of public and private financial aid.

Our schools are organized and managed through four educational systems, each focused on specific programmatic and degree areas:

• The Art Institutes. The Art Institutes offer Master’s, Bachelor’s and Associate’s degree programs, as well as certain non-degree diploma programs, in graphic design, media arts and animation, multimedia and web design, game art and design, video and digital media production, interior and industrial design, culinary arts, photography and fashion. Students can pursue their degree at one of our 31 Art Institute campuses in 18 states and two Canadian provinces, including online programs through The Art Institute Online, a division of The Art Institute of Pittsburgh.

• Argosy University. Argosy University is primarily focused on Doctorate and Master’s degree programs in clinical psychology, counseling, education and business administration. It also offers Bachelor’s and Associate’s degrees in similar fields. There are 18 Argosy University locations in 12 states and online programs.

• Brown Mackie Colleges. The Brown Mackie Colleges offer Associate’s degree programs, as well as certain non-degree diploma programs, in health sciences, business, information technology, legal studies and design technologies. There are 16 Brown Mackie College campuses in seven states, primarily in the Midwestern United States.

• South University. South University offers undergraduate and graduate degree programs in business, legal studies, information technology and health sciences fields through five campuses in the Southeastern United States and online programs.

In addition to the educational systems listed above, we also operate Western State University College of Law in California, which offers Juris Doctor degrees.

66

We have provided educational services for more than 35 years since the acquisition of our first Art Institute in Pittsburgh in 1970. Throughout our history, we have selectively pursued acquisitions to augment our network, program and degree offerings with established franchises such as Argosy University in 2001 and South University and American Education Centers (renamed the Brown Mackie Colleges) in 2003. Of the 26 acquisitions we have completed, the majority have been select acquisitions of single campuses where the economics of acquiring an existing school were more favorable than opening a new school.

Industry Overview

We believe the post-secondary education market in the U.S. is a $320 billion annual market, which includes public and private two-year and four-year degree granting institutions, graduate and professional schools, and non-degree vocational schools offering specialized diplomas. In the U.S., there are over 17 million students enrolled in over 6,000 institutions that offer Doctorate, Master’s, Bachelor’s and Associate’s degrees and diploma programs. According to the National Center of Education Statistics, traditional students, typically recent high school graduates under 25 years of age who are pursuing their first higher education degree, represent approximately 61% of the national student population, with the remaining 39% comprising non-traditional students, who are largely working adults pursuing additional education in their current field or preparing for a new profession.

We believe there are a number of factors contributing to the long-term growth of the post-secondary industry. First, the shift toward a services-based economy increases the demand for higher levels of education. According to the Bureau of Labor Statistics, over the next decade 61% of projected growth in employment is expected to come from jobs that require at least some college experience. Second, according to the U.S. Census Bureau, the median annual income in 2004 for a person with a Bachelor’s degree was 62% higher than that of a high school graduate. This income benefit of education has helped increase the percentage of adults over 25 years of age with Bachelor’s degrees from 11% in 1970 to 28% in 2004. Third, government and private financial aid in various forms, including loan guarantees, grants and tax benefits for post-secondary students, has consistently increased from $4.4 billion to $142.7 billion between 1971 and 2005, representing a compounded annual growth rate of 10.7%. We believe this support will continue as the government emphasizes the development of a highly-skilled, educated workforce to maintain global competitiveness. Finally, the strong demand for post-secondary education has enabled educational institutions to consistently increase tuition and fees, with public four-year colleges increasing tuition and fees by 6.9% annually on average over the last ten years, according to the College Board.

We believe that for-profit providers will capture an increasing share of the growing demand for post-secondary education, as this demand has been largely unaddressed by traditional public and private universities. Non-profit public and private institutions may face limited financial capability to expand their offerings in response to the growing demand for education, due to a mix of state funding challenges, declining contributions and significant expenditures on research and the professor tenure system. Certain private institutions may also control enrollments to preserve the perceived prestige and exclusivity of their degree offerings. Additionally, we believe traditional non-profit institutions generally have not emphasized flexible course schedules and online offerings that appeal to working adults, nor have they aggressively pursued fully online course offerings.

As a result, for-profit post-secondary education providers continue to have significant opportunities for growth. The National Center of Education Statistics has reported that, over the last 7 years, enrollments at for-profit post-secondary education institutions have experienced a compounded annual growth rate of approximately 11%, compared to compounded annual growth rate of approximately 2% for traditional non-profit colleges and universities over the same time period. For-profit providers have continued their strong growth, principally due to the higher flexibility of their programmatic offerings and learning structure, their emphasis on applied, career-oriented content and their ability to consistently roll out new campuses and programs. Despite rapid growth, the market share of post-secondary education captured by for-profit providers remains relatively modest with ample room for continued growth. In 2003, according to the National Center for Education

67

Statistics, for-profit institutions accounted for approximately 6% of all post-secondary enrollments, up from 4% in 1997. In addition, for-profit post-secondary providers continue to enlarge the size of the education market through targeting underserved students who might otherwise forgo post-secondary education, increasing marketing budgets and investment in online education, which is the fastest growing segment of the post-secondary market.

The post-secondary education industry is highly fragmented, with no one provider controlling significant market share. Students choose among providers based on programs and degrees offered, program flexibility and convenience, quality of instruction, placement rates, reputation and recruiting effectiveness. Such multi-faceted market fragmentation results in significant differentiation among various education providers, limited direct competition and minimal overlap between for-profit providers. The main competitors of for-profit post-secondary education providers are local public and private two-year junior and community colleges, traditional public and private undergraduate and graduate colleges and, to a lesser degree, other for-profit, career-oriented schools.

Our Strengths

We believe that the combination of the following strengths differentiates our business:

• Flexible, diverse program offerings and broad degree capabilities. Our operational infrastructure and management approach are highly flexible and enable us to adapt quickly to changing market trends. We continuously monitor and adjust our programs based on changes in demand for new programs, degrees, schedules and delivery methods. We provide education to our students through traditional classroom settings as well as through online instruction. Our educational institutions offer a diverse range of academic programs in the following areas:

— Business	— Health sciences
— Information technology	— Media arts
— Education	— Design
— Law and legal studies	— Fashion
— Psychology and behavioral science	— Culinary arts

Our breadth of programmatic and degree offerings enables us to appeal to a diverse range of potential students. This helps to reduce our exposure to a decline in popularity in any one area of study. Our online education platform enables us to leverage our unique educational systems to expand our total addressable market, reaching new students who would otherwise not have the opportunity to attend classes at one of our local campuses.

• National presence. We have 71 school locations in 24 states and two Canadian provinces. Our schools are located primarily in major metropolitan areas and we focus our marketing efforts on generating demand within a 100-mile radius of the campus. Throughout our history, we have invested in our schools in order to develop what we believe is an exceptional portfolio of schools, offering state-of-the-art facilities and learning infrastructure. Our schools provide attractive and efficient learning environments including many elements found in traditional colleges, such as libraries, bookstores and laboratories, as well as the modern equipment necessary for the various programs we offer. This aids us in recruiting and retaining students and faculty. For the fiscal year ended June 30, 2006, no single campus accounted for more than 5.5% of our total revenues.

• Strong reputation for positive student outcomes. We believe that the success of our business is based upon our ability to generate positive outcomes for our students in terms of education, graduate employment and starting salary. We use these performance metrics to determine a part of our management compensation both at the corporate and campus level. This focus on student achievement has resulted in a consistent record of high student retention and graduate employment rates, which have been critically important in maintaining a strong reputation among students, faculty and employers.

68

Based on information collected by us from graduating students and employers, we believe that, of the approximately 12,300 undergraduate students who graduated from our institutions during the calendar year ended December 31, 2005, approximately 88% of those available for employment obtained employment in their fields of study or a related field within six months of graduation. Employers of our graduates include companies such as Nordstrom, Electronic Arts, Expo Design Center, Ethan Allen and Nike.

• Strong regulatory reputation and recognition. Each of our schools located in the United States is authorized to offer educational programs and grant degrees or diplomas by the state in which the school is located and is accredited by a national or regional accreditation agency recognized by the U.S. Department of Education. Authorization by the state and accreditation by a recognized accrediting agency enables our students to access federal student loans, grants and other forms of public and private financial aid. In the regulated post-secondary education market, maintaining accreditation and state authorization at various levels is critical for operating existing schools, opening new schools and introducing new programs. We have established a culture of compliance and devote substantial resources to ensure that we meet applicable rules, standards and laws. Our success in this regard is evidenced by the success we have had maintaining the licensing and accreditation of our schools.

• Highly attractive business model. We have predictable and consistent revenue growth, a scalable operating cost structure and significant operating cash flow generation.

• Predictable and consistent revenue growth. We believe that our revenue model is highly predictable given the extended period of student enrollment, historically stable retention rates and annual tuition increases. Since 1996, we have demonstrated a compounded annual enrollment growth rate of 18.4% while increasing our tuition on average by 5.7% annually. This combination of enrollment growth and tuition increases has resulted in a compounded annual revenue growth rate of 23.0% since 1996.

• Margin expansion from scalable cost structure. Management’s focus on increasing the efficiency of our existing physical infrastructure and leveraging the costs of operating these facilities over a broader student population is a key component of our operating margin improvement. The scalable nature of our cost structure at the campus level has enabled us to consistently expand our EBITDA margins in each of the last 10 years, improving from 15.4% in fiscal 1996 to 18.9% in fiscal 2006, an average of more than 30 basis points of annual improvement. With an aim towards maximizing utilization, we monitor and make adjustments to our facilities’ operation plan based on changes in demand for new programs, class schedules and other elements of our operations. In addition, we expect our shared location strategy to allow us to continue to leverage our historical investment in school facilities and to control our ongoing operational and maintenance costs.

• Significant operating cash flow generation. The combination of moderate maintenance capital requirements and a positive benefit from working capital enables us to convert a significant portion of our revenue to cash available for investment in existing campuses, organic growth initiatives and debt service. Additionally, given the advanced payment of tuition and fees which is customary for the post-secondary education industry, our working capital is on average a source of cash, although subject to significant seasonal fluctuations.

Our Business Strategy

We intend to pursue the following key elements of our current business strategy:

• Augment and improve our academic curricula and programs

Create new and revise existing academic programs. We continually strive to identify emerging industry trends in order to understand the evolving educational needs of our students and the employment market. We rapidly develop and introduce new programs in response to these needs with the assistance of our curriculum advisory teams, which consist of over 1,200 industry experts and employers. For example, during fiscal 2006, we introduced six new academic programs, including

69

criminal justice, fashion and retail management, simulation and virtual environments, and community college executive leadership. We also regularly evaluate our existing program offerings and revise existing courses to meet changing market needs.

Rollout existing programs to additional schools. Our broad base of 71 schools enables us to drive growth through introducing programs that have been successful at one school to other schools within our systems. During fiscal 2006, we successfully rolled out 87 existing educational programs to additional schools. The rollout of existing programs at additional campuses allows us to drive enrollment growth at existing locations with minimal incremental costs, leverage existing curriculum development and quickly capitalize on identified market needs.

• Continue to improve our marketing and student services

Increase and optimize the use of marketing resources. We continuously evaluate the efficiency of various marketing media channels by student, program, campus and school systems, which enables us to rapidly optimize the allocation of our marketing budget. We also put significant emphasis on recruiting qualified admission officers. During fiscal 2006, we increased the number of admissions officers at our schools by approximately 36%.

Continue to emphasize student services. In student services, we focus on student retention and assisting our students in obtaining full-time employment. We maintain dedicated career services personnel at our schools, who provide assistance by establishing relationships with potential employers and preparing students for interviews and post-graduate employment. We also evaluate the placement of our students from each of our programs to assist us in determining how to allocate our resources in the future. Our focus on student outcomes also helps us to maintain a strong student retention rate and manage our cohort loan default rates, enhancing profitability and regulatory compliance. It also helps us to attract new students, because approximately 26% of the new students at our Art Institutes first come to us through referrals, generally from satisfied existing students and alumnus.

• Expand the number of online students. We believe that a significant growth opportunity exists in offering fully-online programs to students who may not otherwise have attended our schools. As the quality and acceptance of online education continues to increase, we continue to invest in both expanding our online course offerings and enhancing our online marketing presence. Online programs primarily target students who are not able to pursue campus-based post-secondary education, due to schedule and location constraints, and thus address an additional market beyond our campus-based target demographics. Online courses provide these students flexible schedules which can be tailored around a student’s working hours and can be combined with traditional on-campus classes. Online offerings represent an attractive avenue for growth that utilizes many of our existing education curricula while requiring less capital expenditures relative to campus-based expansion. Our online efforts continue to experience significant success, with approximately 4,100 students taking all of their courses online and approximately 9,100 students taking at least one of their courses online during the fall term of 2005, compared to approximately 2,500 and 6,400 students, respectively, during the same term in 2004.

• Grow our portfolio of schools in a capital-efficient manner

Develop new school locations. We believe that there are many attractive opportunities available to us to develop new school locations in the United States. Prior to opening a new campus, we perform a detailed analysis of the geographic area, including ranking the statistical attractiveness of a metropolitan area based on population size and growth, the percentage of the population likely to pursue education in a particular program area and the level of unmet demand represented by a student population not served by existing local post-secondary educational institutions. In opening new campuses, we utilize our centralized infrastructure and existing curricula to cost-effectively expedite the opening and ramp-up of a location. Since the beginning of fiscal year 2005, we have opened eight new school locations.

Utilize shared services locations. Since fiscal 2004, we have combined the facilities and administrative functions of some of our schools that are located in the same geographic regions. The administrative

70

services which are combined for two or more schools located within a single facility may include career services, finance, human resources and information technology, among other functions. Currently, 24 of our schools are in shared services locations, and we plan to continue to utilize this model for new campuses in order to minimize capital expenditures and operating expenses, and increase facility utilization.

Student Recruitment and Marketing

We use marketing tools such as the Internet, radio, local newspaper, television and print media advertising, telephone campaigns, and direct mail campaigns to attract new students to our schools. In addition, the general reputation of our schools and referrals from current students, alumni and employers is an important source of new students. We also employ approximately 150 representatives who make presentations at high schools to promote The Art Institutes. These representatives also participate in college fairs and other inquiry-generating activities. In fiscal 2006, representatives conducted over 20,000 high school visits and attended approximately 2,700 career events. We estimate that new students at the Art Institutes made their initial inquiry based on the following percentages in fiscal 2006 and 2005:

	Year ended June 30,
	2006		2005
Internet advertising and our websites	44	%	35	%
Referrals from other students and graduates	26	%	30	%
High school recruitment programs	15	%	17	%
Broadcast advertising	7	%	9	%
Print media	2	%	3	%
Direct mail campaigns	2	%	2	%
Other recruiting efforts	4	%	4	%

In recent years we have experienced significant increases in the number of inquiries from prospective students due to our increased reliance on marketing through internet advertising and our websites, which convert at a lower rate than other forms of marketing. We expect this increased reliance on the internet to obtain initial inquiries from students to continue.

Our internal advertising agency creates publications, television and radio commercials, videos and other promotional materials for our schools. The agency is also responsible for inquiry generation, media planning and placement, online marketing, website development and branding.

Student Admissions and Retention

The admissions and entrance standards of each school are designed to identify those students who are best equipped to meet the requirements of their chosen fields of study and successfully complete their programs. In evaluating prospective students, we seek individuals with, among other things, a strong desire to learn, passion for their area of interest, and initiative. We believe that a success-oriented student body results in higher retention and placement rates, increased student and employer satisfaction, and lower student default rates on government loans. To be qualified for admission to one of our schools, each applicant must have received a high school diploma or a General Education Development certificate. Our graduate and Doctorate programs require an undergraduate degree. Most of our schools interview prospective students to assess their qualifications, their interest in the programs offered by the school and their commitment to their education. In addition, the curricula, student services, education costs, available financial resources and student housing options, if applicable, are reviewed during interviews.

Due to our broad program offerings, our students come from a wide variety of backgrounds. The estimated average age of a new student at all of our schools during fiscal 2006 was 26 years old.

71

Our students may fail to finish their programs for a variety of personal, academic or financial reasons. To reduce the risk of student withdrawals, each of our schools devotes staff resources to advising students regarding academic and financial matters, part-time employment and, if applicable, housing. Remedial courses are mandated for our undergraduate and graduate students with lower academic skill levels and tutoring is encouraged for students experiencing academic difficulties. Our net annual persistence rate, which measures the number of students who are enrolled during a fiscal year and either graduate or advance to the next fiscal year, for all of our students was approximately 67.5% in fiscal 2006 as compared to 67.4% in fiscal 2005.

Education Programs

The relationship of each of our schools with potential employers for our students plays a significant role in the development and adaptation of school curriculum. Most of our schools have one or more program advisory boards composed of members of the local and regional communities or employers in the fields which we serve. These boards provide valuable input to the school’s education department, which allows the school to keep programs current and provide students with the training and skills that employers seek.

Our wide range of academic programs culminate in the awarding of diploma certificates through Doctorate degrees. In the fall of 2005, the enrollment by degree for all our schools was as follows:

• Bachelor’s degrees—46%

• Associate’s degrees—31%

• Doctorate degrees—9%

• Diploma and Certificates—9%

• Master’s degrees—5%

The type of degrees and programs we offer vary by each of our schools. The following summarizes the programs offered at each of our educational systems. Not all programs are offered at each school location within an educational system.

The Art Institutes. The Art Institutes offer the following degree programs. For internal purposes, we classify the degree programs at The Art Institutes according to four “schools” or areas of study.

The School of Design

Associate’s Degree

Advertising

Graphic Design

Graphic Design Production

Industrial Design Technology

Interior Design

Interior Planning with AutoCAD

Home Furnishings Merchandising

Kitchen & Bath Design

Bachelor’s Degree

Advertising

Advertising Design

Design Management

Entertainment Design

Graphic Design

Illustration

72

Illustration & Design

Industrial Design

Industrial Design & Technology

Interior Design

Visual Communications

Web Design

Yacht & Marine Design

Master’s Degree

Graphic Design

Interior Design

The School of Fashion

Associate’s Degree

Accessory Design

Apparel Design

Apparel Accessory Design

Fashion Design

Fashion Marketing

Fashion Merchandising

Fashion Production

Visual Merchandising

Bachelor’s Degree

Apparel Design

Fashion Design

Fashion Marketing & Management

Fashion Marketing

Fashion Merchandising

Fashion & Retail Management

The School of Media Arts

Associate’s Degree

Animation

Animation Art & Design

Audio Production

Broadcasting

Digital Arts

Drafting Technology with AutoCAD

Interactive Media Design

Interactive Media Design Production

Photography

Photographic Imaging

Video Production

Bachelor’s Degree

Audio Production

Audio & Media Technology

Computer Animation

Digital Filmmaking & Video Production

73

Digital Media Production

Digital Photography

Film & Digital Production

Game Art & Design

Interactive Media Design

Media Arts & Animation

Photography

Photographic Imaging

Visual Effects & Motion Graphics

Visual & Game Programming

Visual & Entertainment Arts

Video Production

Master’s Degree

Computer Animation

Film

Visual Arts

The School of Culinary Arts

Arts Associate’s Degree

Culinary Arts

Culinary Arts & Restaurant Management

Hotel & Restaurant Management

Restaurant & Catering Management

Restaurant & Catering Operations

Baking and Pastry

Bachelor’s Degree

Culinary Management

Culinary Arts Management

Culinary Arts

Argosy University. The following degree programs are offered by Argosy University.

Psychology and Behavioral Sciences

Doctor of Psychology

Clinical Psychology

School Psychology

Doctor of Education

Counselor Education and Supervision

Counseling Psychology

Organizational Leadership

Pastoral Community Counseling

Master of Arts

Clinical Psychology

Clinical Psychology/Marriage and Family Therapy

Counseling Psychology

Counseling Psychology/Marriage and Family Therapy

74

Forensic Psychology

Guidance Counseling

Marriage and Family Therapy

Mental Health Counseling

Professional Counseling

Sport-Exercise Psychology

School Psychology

Education Specialist Degree

School Counseling

Bachelor of Arts

Psychology (degree completion)

Associate of Applied Science

Criminal Justice

Paralegal

Education

Doctor of Education

Instructional Leadership

Educational Leadership

Community College Executive Leadership

Master of Arts in Education

Instructional Leadership

Educational Leadership

Educational Specialist

Instructional Leadership

Educational Leadership

Business

Doctor of Business Administration

Master of Business Administration

Master of Science

Health Services Management

Management

Bachelor of Science

Business Administration (degree completion)

Associate of Applied Science

Accounting Technology

Business Management

Computer Programming and Applications

Computer Software Technology

75

Health Sciences

Associate of Applied Science

Diagnostic Medical Sonography

Histotechnology

Medical Assisting

Radiologic Technology

Veterinary Technology

Associate of Science

Dental Hygiene

Medical Laboratory Technician

Radiation Therapy

Western State College of Law

Law

Juris Doctor

Brown Mackie Colleges. Brown Mackie College schools offer the following primary degree programs.

Health Sciences

Associate’s Degrees

Administration in Gerontology

Healthcare Administration

Gerontology

Medical Assisting

Medical Office Management

Nursing

Occupational Therapy Assistant

Optical Science

Pharmacy Technology

Physical Therapist Assistant

Surgical Technology

Legal Studies

Associate’s Degrees

Criminal Justice

Paralegal

Business

Associate’s Degrees

Accounting Technology

Business Management

Sales and Marketing

Information Technology

Associate’s Degrees

Electronics

Computer Networking and Applications

Computer Programming and Applications

76

Computer Software Technology

Database Technology

Information Technology

Design Technologies

Associate’s Degrees

Audio/Video Production

Computer Aided Design and Drafting Technology

Graphic Design

South University. South University offers the following degree programs.

School of Health Professions

Master’s Degrees

Anesthesiologist Assistant

Business Administration

Nursing

Physician Assistant Studies

Professional Counseling

Bachelor’s Degrees

Health Science

Physician Assistant Studies

Nursing

RN-BSN

Associate’s Degrees

Allied Health Science

Medical Assisting

Physical Therapist Assisting

School of Pharmacy

Doctorate Degrees

Doctor of Pharmacy

School of Business

Master’s Degrees

Healthcare Administration

Criminal Justice

Masters in Business Administration

Bachelor’s Degrees

Business Administration

Criminal Justice

Graphic Design

Healthcare Management

Legal Studies

Information Technology

77

Associate’s Degrees

Accounting

Business Administration

Graphic Design

Information Technology

Paralegal Studies

Graduate Employment

We measure our success as an educator of students to a significant extent by the ability of our students to find jobs in their chosen field of employment upon graduation from our schools. Most of our schools provide career development instruction to our students in order to assist the students in developing essential job-search skills. In addition to individualized training in interviewing, networking techniques and resume-writing, most of our schools require students to take a career development course. Additionally, we provide ongoing placement resources to our students and recent graduates. Career services departments also assist current students in finding part-time employment while attending school. Students in certain of our Doctorate programs spend up to a year in a paid internship in their chosen field.

Each school’s career services department plays a role in marketing the school’s curriculum to the community in order to produce job leads for graduates. Career services advisors educate employers about the caliber of our graduates. These advisors participate in professional organizations, trade shows and community events to keep apprised of industry trends and maintain relationships with key employers. Career services staff visit employer sites to learn more about their operations and better understand their employment needs. As of June 30, 2006, the career services departments of our schools had approximately 220 employees. We estimate that our career services departments maintain contact with over 60,000 employers nationwide.

Based on information collected by us from graduating students and employers, we believe that of the approximately 12,300 undergraduate students who graduated from our schools during the calendar year ended December 31, 2005, approximately 88% of the available graduates obtained employment in their fields of study, or in related fields of study, within six months of graduation. The graduate employment rates presented in this prospectus exclude students who are pursuing further education, deceased, in active military service, who have medical conditions that prevent them from working, who are continuing in a career unrelated to their program of study because they currently earn salaries which exceed those paid to entry-level employees, or who are international students no longer residing in the United States. The average salary paid to our available graduating undergraduate students from The Art Institutes, the Brown Mackie Colleges and South University for calendar year 2005 who obtained employment in their fields of study, or in related fields of study, was approximately $28,700.

Accreditation

In the United States, accreditation is a process through which an institution submits itself to qualitative review by an organization of peer institutions. Accrediting agencies primarily examine the academic quality of the instructional programs of an institution, and a grant of accreditation is generally viewed as certification that an institution’s programs meet generally accepted academic standards. Accrediting agencies also review the administrative and financial operations of the institutions they accredit to ensure that each institution has the resources to perform its educational mission.

Pursuant to provisions of the Higher Education Act of 1965, as amended (“HEA”), the U.S. Department of Education relies on accrediting agencies to determine whether institutions’ educational programs qualify the institutions to participate in federal financial aid programs under Title IV of the HEA. The HEA and its implementing regulations specify certain standards that all recognized accrediting agencies must adopt in connection with their review of post-secondary institutions. All of our U.S. schools are accredited by an institutional accrediting agency recognized by the U.S. Department of Education.

78

In addition to the institutional accreditations described above, eight Art Institutes offer interior design programs that have programmatic accreditation by the Council for Interior Design Accreditation and fourteen Art Institutes offer culinary programs accredited by the American Culinary Federation. Ten Argosy University locations have received accreditation by the American Psychological Association for their Doctor of Psychology programs and one Argosy University location is accredited by the Council for Accreditation of Counseling and Related Educational Programs (CACREP). While these programmatic accreditations cannot be relied upon for our schools to obtain and maintain certification to participate in the Title IV programs they are commonly relied upon in the relevant professions as indicators of the quality of the academic program.

The following table shows the location of each of our schools at June 30, 2006, the name under which it operates, the year of its establishment, the date we opened or acquired it, and the institutional accrediting agency (for schools accredited by more than one recognized accrediting agency, the primary accrediting agency is listed first). No accreditation is shown for The Art Institute of Toronto as the Province of Ontario has no accreditation process for post-secondary schools. The Art Institute of Toronto is registered with the Ontario Ministry of Training, Colleges and Universities.

School	Location	Calendar Year Established	Fiscal Year EDMC Acquired/ Opened	Accrediting Agency
The Art Institutes
The Art Institute of Atlanta	Atlanta, GA	1949	1971	Commission on Colleges of the Southern Association of Colleges and Schools (“SACS”)
The Art Institute of California—Los Angeles	Los Angeles, CA	1997	1998	Accrediting Council of Independent Colleges and Schools (“ACICS”)
The Art Institute of California—Orange County	Orange County, CA	2000	2001	ACICS (as a branch of The Art Institute of California—Los Angeles)
The Art Institute of California—San Diego	San Diego, CA	1981	2001	Accrediting Commission of Career Schools and Colleges of Technology (“ACCSCT”)
The Art Institute of California—Inland Empire	San Bernardino, CA	2006	2006	ACCSCT (as a branch of The Art Institute of California-San Diego)
The Art Institute of California—San Francisco	San Francisco, CA	1939	1998	ACICS (as a branch of The Art Institute of California—Los Angeles)
The Art Institute of Charlotte	Charlotte, NC	1973	2000	ACICS
The Art Institute of Colorado	Denver, CO	1952	1976	ACICS
The Art Institute of Dallas	Dallas, TX	1964	1985	SACS
The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale	Fort Lauderdale, FL	1968	1974	ACICS
The Art Institute of Houston	Houston, TX	1974	1979	SACS
The Art Institute of Indianapolis	Indianapolis, IN	2006	2006	ACCSCT (as a branch of The Art Institute of Las Vegas)
The Art Institute of Las Vegas	Las Vegas, NV	1983	2001	ACCSCT
The Art Institute of New York City	New York, NY	1980	1997	ACICS

79

School	Location	Calendar Year Established	Fiscal Year EDMC Acquired/ Opened	Accrediting Agency
The Art Institute of Ohio—Cincinnati	Cincinnati, OH	2004	2005	ACICS (as a branch of Brown Mackie College—Findlay)
The Art Institute of Philadelphia	Philadelphia, PA	1971	1980	ACICS
The Art Institute of Phoenix	Phoenix, AZ	1995	1996	ACICS (as a branch of The Art Institute of Colorado)
The Art Institute of Pittsburgh	Pittsburgh, PA	1921	1970	ACICS; candidate with Middle States Association of Colleges & Schools of the Commission on Higher Education
The Art Institute of Portland	Portland, OR	1963	1998	Northwest Commission on Colleges and Universities (“NWCCU”)
The Art Institute of Seattle	Seattle, WA	1946	1982	NWCCU
The Art Institute of Tampa	Tampa, FL	2004	2004	SACS (as a branch of the Miami International University of Art & Design)
The Art Institute of Toronto	Toronto, Ontario	1997	2002	None
The Art Institute of Vancouver	Vancouver, BC	1998	2003	Private Career Training Institutions Agency of British Columbia (“PCTIA”)
The Art Institute of Washington	Arlington, VA	2000	2001	SACS (as a branch of The Art Institute of Atlanta)
The Art Institutes International Minnesota	Minneapolis, MN	1964	1997	ACICS
Bradley Academy for the Visual Arts	York, PA	1952	2004	ACCSCT
California Design College	Los Angeles, CA	1991	2003	ACICS
The Illinois Institute of Art—Chicago	Chicago, IL	1916	1996	ACCSCT; Higher Learning Commission (HLC) of the North Central Association
The Illinois Institute of Art—Schaumburg	Schaumburg, IL	1983	1996	ACCSCT (as a branch of The Illinois Institute of Art-Chicago); HLC
Miami International University of Art & Design	Miami, FL	1965	2002	SACS
The New England Institute of Art	Boston, MA	1988	2000	New England Association of Schools and Colleges
Argosy University				HLC (all locations)
Argosy University/Atlanta	Atlanta, GA	1990	2002
Argosy University/Chicago	Chicago, IL	1976	2002
Argosy University/Dallas	Dallas, TX	2002	2002
Argosy University/Denver	Denver, CO	2006	2006
Argosy University/Honolulu	Honolulu, HI	1979	2002
Argosy University/Inland Empire	San Bernardino, CA	2006	2006
Argosy University/Nashville	Nashville, TN	2001	2001
Argosy University/Orange County	Orange, CA	1999	2002

80

School	Location	Calendar Year Established	Fiscal Year EDMC Acquired/ Opened	Accrediting Agency
Argosy University/Phoenix	Phoenix, AZ	1997	2002
Argosy University/San Diego	San Diego, CA	2006	2006
Argosy University/San Francisco	Point Richmond, CA	1998	2002
Argosy University/Santa Monica	Santa Monica, CA	2006	2006
Argosy University/Sarasota	Sarasota, FL	1969	2002
Argosy University/Schaumburg	Schaumburg, IL	1979	2002
Argosy University/Seattle	Seattle, WA	1997	2002
Argosy University/Tampa	Tampa, FL	1997	2002
Argosy University/Twin Cities	Eagan, MN	1961	2002
Argosy University/Washington D.C.	Arlington, VA	1994	2002
Western State University College of Law	Fullerton, CA	1966	2002	Commission on Colleges of the Western Association of Schools and Colleges; provisionally accredited by American Bar Association
South University				SACS (all locations)
South University/Savannah	Savannah, GA	1899	2004
South University/Montgomery	Montgomery, AL	1997	2004
South University/West Palm Beach	West Palm Beach, FL	1974	2004
South University/Columbia	Columbia, SC	1935	2004
South University/Tampa	Tampa, FL	2006	2006
Brown Mackie Colleges
Brown Mackie College—Akron	Akron, OH	1980	2004	ACICS (as a branch of Brown Mackie College—Cincinnati)
Brown Mackie College—Cincinnati	Cincinnati, OH	1927	2004	ACICS
Brown Mackie College—Findlay	Findlay, OH	1986	2004	ACICS
Brown Mackie College—Northern Kentucky	Ft. Mitchell, KY	1927	2004	ACICS (as a branch of Brown Mackie College—Cincinnati)
Brown Mackie College—North Canton	North Canton, OH	1984	2004	ACICS
Brown Mackie College—Atlanta	Norcross, GA	1969	2004	ACICS (as a branch of The Art Institute of Charlotte
Brown Mackie College—Lenexa	Lenexa, KS	1984	2004	HLC (as a branch of The Brown Mackie College—Salina)
Brown Mackie College—Salina	Salina, KS	1892	2004	HLC
Brown Mackie College—Merrillville	Merrillville, IN	1984	2004	ACICS
Brown Mackie College—Michigan City	Michigan City, IN	1890	2004	ACICS (as a branch of Brown Mackie College—Merrillville)

81

School	Location	Calendar Year Established	Fiscal Year EDMC Acquired/ Opened	Accrediting Agency
Brown Mackie College—Moline	Moline, IL	1985	2004	ACICS (as a branch of Brown Mackie College—Merrillville)
Brown Mackie College—Fort Wayne	Fort Wayne, IN	1991	2004	ACICS (as a branch of Brown Mackie College—South Bend)
Brown Mackie College—South Bend	South Bend, IN	1882	2004	ACICS
Brown Mackie College—Louisville	Louisville, KY	1935	2004	ACICS
Brown Mackie College—Hopkinsville	Hopkinsville, KY	1995	2004	ACICS (as a branch of Brown Mackie College—Louisville)
Brown Mackie College—Miami	Miami, FL	2004	2005	ACICS (as a branch of Brown Mackie College—Cincinnati)

Accrediting agencies monitor each educational institution’s performance across a broad range of areas. Monitoring is performed through generally annual self-reporting and through the conduct of periodic site visits by representatives of the accrediting agency and qualified persons from peer institutions. In the event an accrediting agency determines that such school’s performance in one or more areas falls below certain parameters, the accrediting agency may require the school to supply it with supplemental reports on the accrediting agency’s specific areas of concern until that school meets the accrediting agency’s performance guideline or standard. As of August 31, 2006, eleven of our schools were required to provide such supplemental reports. Of these eleven schools on supplement reporting status, six schools (including The Art Institute of Dallas which was placed on probation by SACS in December 2005) are required to request and receive permission from their accrediting agency prior to filing an application for a new location or program offering.

Student Financial Assistance

Many students at our U.S. schools rely, at least in part, on financial assistance to pay for the cost of their education. In the United States, the largest sources of such support are the federal student aid programs under Title IV of the HEA. Additional sources of funds include other federal grant programs, state grant and loan programs, private loan programs and institutional grants and scholarships. To provide students access to financial assistance resources available through Title IV programs, a school must be (i) authorized to offer its programs of instruction by the relevant agency of the states in which it is located, (ii) accredited by an agency recognized by the U.S. Department of Education, and (iii) certified as an eligible institution by the U.S. Department of Education. In addition, the school must ensure that Title IV program funds are properly accounted for and disbursed in the correct amounts to eligible students and remain in compliance generally with the Title IV program regulations. During fiscal 2006, approximately 68% of our net revenues were indirectly derived from Title IV programs.

As in the U.S., there are certain risks associated with operating post-secondary institutions in Canada, including but not limited to: failure of our schools to comply with extensive regulations, violations of which could result in financial penalties, restrictions on our operations, or loss of external financial aid funding for our students. The provinces or national government may change the law or reduce funding for student financial aid programs, which could harm our student population and revenue. If our schools do not maintain their approvals, they may not operate or participate in federal student financial aid programs. Government and regulatory agencies may conduct compliance reviews, bring claims or initiate litigation against us. During fiscal 2006, less than 2% of our net revenues were from our schools located in Canada.

82

Nature of Federal Support for Post-Secondary Education

While the states support public colleges and universities primarily through direct state subsidies, the federal government provides a substantial part of its support for post-secondary education in the form of grants and loans to students who can use this support at any institution that has been certified as eligible by the U.S. Department of Education. Students at our U.S. schools receive loans, grants and work-study funding to fund their education under several Title IV programs, of which the two largest are the Federal Family Education Loan (“FFEL”) program and the Federal Pell Grant (“Pell”) program. Our U.S. schools also participate in the Federal Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant (“FSEOG”) program, the Federal Perkins Loan (“Perkins”) program, and the Federal Work-Study (“FWS”) program.

FFEL. The FFEL program consists of two types of loans: Stafford loans, which are made available to students regardless of financial need, and PLUS loans, which are made available to parents of undergraduate students classified as dependents and, as of July 1, 2006, graduate students. Under the Stafford loan program, an undergraduate student may borrow up to $3,500 for the first academic year, $4,500 for the second academic year and, in certain educational programs, $5,500 for each of the third and fourth academic years. Students who are classified as independent can obtain up to an additional $4,000 for each of the first and second academic years and, depending upon the educational program, an additional $5,000 for each of the third and fourth academic years. Students enrolled in programs higher than a bachelor-level program can borrow up to $20,500 per academic year. Students enrolled in certain graduate-level health professions can receive an additional $12,500 per academic year. Prior to July 1, 2006, undergraduate students were only permitted to borrow up to $2,625 for the first academic year and $3,500 for the second academic year under the Stafford loan program. Students enrolled in programs higher than a bachelor-level were limited to borrowing up to $18,500 per academic year prior to July 1, 2006. Amounts received by students in our U.S. schools under the Stafford loan program equaled approximately 45% of our net revenues in fiscal 2006. Currently, PLUS loans may be obtained by the parent(s) of a dependent student in an amount not to exceed the difference between the total cost of that student’s education (including allowable educational expenses) and other aid to which that student is entitled. Amounts received by parents of students in our U.S. schools under the PLUS loan program in fiscal 2006 equaled approximately 14% of our net revenues in fiscal 2006.

Pell. Pell grants are the primary component of the Title IV programs under which the U.S. Department of Education makes grants to students who demonstrate financial need. Every eligible student is entitled to receive a Pell grant; there is no institutional allocation or limit. During fiscal 2006, Pell grants ranged up to $4,050 per year, depending on student need and other factors. Amounts received by students enrolled in our U.S. schools in fiscal 2005 under the Pell program represented approximately 8% of our net revenues in fiscal 2006.

FSEOG. FSEOG awards are designed to supplement Pell grants for the neediest students. FSEOG grants at our schools generally range in amount from $300 to $1,200 per year. However, the availability of FSEOG awards is limited by the amount of those funds allocated to an institution under a formula that takes into account the size of the institution, its costs and the income levels of its students. We are required to make a 25% matching contribution for all FSEOG program funds disbursed. Resources for this institutional contribution may include institutional grants and scholarships and, in certain states, portions of state grants and scholarships. Amounts received by students in our U.S. schools under the FSEOG program in fiscal 2006 represented less than 1% of our net revenues.

Perkins. Eligible undergraduate students may borrow up to $4,000 under the Perkins program during each academic year, with an aggregate maximum of $20,000. Eligible graduate students may borrow up to $6,000 in Perkins loans each academic year, with an aggregate maximum of $40,000. Perkins loans have a 5% interest rate and repayment is delayed until nine months after a student ceases enrollment as at least a half-time student. Perkins loans are made available to those students who demonstrate the greatest financial need. Perkins loans are made from a revolving account, with 75% of new funding contributed by the U.S. Department of Education and the remainder by the applicable school. Subsequent federal capital contributions, which must be matched by school funds, may be received if an institution meets certain requirements. Each school collects payments on

83

Perkins loans from its former students and re-lends those funds to currently enrolled students. Collection and disbursement of Perkins loans is the responsibility of each participating institution. During fiscal 2006, we collected approximately $8.2 million from our former students. We were not required to make any matching contributions in fiscal 2006. The Perkins loans disbursed to students in our U.S. schools in fiscal 2006 represented less than 1% of our net revenues

Federal Work-Study. Under the Federal Work-Study program, federal funds are made available to pay up to 75% of the cost of part-time employment of eligible students, based on their financial need, to perform work for the institution or for off-campus public or non-profit organizations. Most of our schools participate in the Federal Work-Study program. In order to participate in the program, each year a school must have at least 7% of the school’s Federal Work-Study program allocation paid to students performing community service work and at least one student in a literacy job. In fiscal 2006, ten of our schools did not meet this requirement. To our knowledge, there have not been any penalties assessed to schools who have not met this requirement, but we cannot be assured that a penalty will not be assessed in the future. In fiscal 2005, Federal Work-Study funds represented less than 1% of our net revenues.

New Title IV Programs. Effective July 1, 2006, Congress enacted two new Title IV federal aid programs, the Academic Competitive Grant (ACG) and the National SMART (Science and Mathematics Access to Retain Talent) Grant. Both these new programs require students to be eligible for a Pell grant and to attend school on a full-time basis. The ACG is designed for students in degree programs who have recently graduated from a high school with a rigorous curriculum. Students may receive a maximum of $750 of ACG during their first academic year and $1,300 during their second academic year. The National SMART Grant is designed for students in their third or fourth academic year with a cumulative grade point average of 3.0 or greater in certain designated bachelor degree or higher programs. Eligible students students may receive up to $4,000 in each of their third and fourth academic year.

Legislative Action. Political and budgetary concerns can significantly affect the Title IV programs. The U.S. Congress generally reauthorizes the HEA approximately every six years. The next reauthorization of the HEA is being discussed in Congress and may result in numerous legislative changes. In addition, the U.S. Congress determines federal appropriations for Title IV programs on an annual basis. The U.S. Congress can also make changes in the laws affecting Title IV programs in those annual appropriations bills and in other laws it enacts between HEA reauthorizations. Since a significant percentage of our revenue is derived from Title IV programs, any action by the U.S. Congress that significantly reduced Title IV program funding or the ability of our schools or students to participate in the Title IV programs would have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations or financial condition. Legislative action also could increase our administrative costs and require us to adjust our practices in order for our schools to comply fully with Title IV program requirements.

Other Financial Assistance Sources

Students at several of our U.S. schools participate in state grant programs. In fiscal 2006, approximately 3% of our net revenues were indirectly derived from state grant programs. In addition, certain students at some of our U.S. schools receive financial aid provided by the U.S. Department of Veterans Affairs, the U.S. Department of the Interior (Bureau of Indian Affairs) and the Rehabilitative Services Administration of the U.S. Department of Education (vocational rehabilitation funding). In fiscal 2006, financial assistance from such federal programs equaled less than 1% of our net revenues. Our schools also provide institutional grants and scholarships to qualified students. In fiscal 2006, institutional scholarships had a value equal to approximately 2% of our net revenues.

We have also arranged alternative supplemental loan programs that allow students to repay a portion of their loans after graduation and allow students with lower than average credit ratings to obtain loans. The primary objective of these loan programs is to lower the monthly payments required of students. Such loans are without recourse to us or our schools. In fiscal 2006, alternative loans represented approximately 19% of our net revenues as compared to approximately 15% of net revenues in fiscal 2005.

84

Availability of Lenders

A limited number of lending institutions provide a substantial majority of the federally guaranteed loans obtained by our students to help pay their direct costs of attendance. While we believe that other lenders or the Federal Direct Loan program would be willing to make federally guaranteed student loans to our students if federally guaranteed loans were no longer available from our current lenders, there can be no assurances in this regard. In addition, the HEA requires the establishment of lenders of last resort in every state to ensure that loans are available to students at any school that cannot otherwise identify lenders willing to make federally guaranteed loans to its students.

We estimate that three student loan guaranty agencies guaranteed over 90% of all federally guaranteed student loans made to students enrolled at our U.S. schools during fiscal 2006. We believe that other guaranty agencies would be willing to guarantee federal loans to our students if any of the three current agencies ceased guaranteeing those loans or reduced the volume of loans they guarantee, although there can be no assurances in this regard.

Federal Oversight of Title IV Programs

Our U.S. schools are subject to audits or program compliance reviews by various external agencies, including the U.S. Department of Education, its Office of Inspector General, and state, guaranty and accrediting agencies. The HEA and its implementing regulations also require that an institution’s administration of Title IV program funds be audited annually by an independent accounting firm. If the U.S. Department of Education or another regulatory agency determines that an institution has improperly disbursed Title IV or state program funds or violated a provision of the HEA or state law or their implementing regulations, the affected institution may be required to repay such funds to the U.S. Department of Education or the appropriate state agency or lender and may be assessed an administrative fine. Although we endeavor to comply with the all federal and state laws and implementing regulations, we cannot guarantee that our interpretation of the relevant rules will be upheld by the U.S. Department of Education, other agencies, or upon judicial review.

If the U.S. Department of Education is dissatisfied with an institution’s administration of the Title IV programs, it can also transfer the institution from the advance system of receiving Title IV program funds to the cash monitoring or reimbursement method of payment, under which a school may have to advance its own funds to students and provide documentation to the U.S. Department of Education that the funds were properly disbursed prior to receiving reimbursement from the Title IV programs.

Violations or alleged violations of Title IV program requirements also could subject us to other civil and criminal sanctions, including a proceeding to impose a fine, place restrictions on an institution’s participation in Title IV programs or terminate its eligibility to participate in Title IV programs. The U.S. Department of Education also may initiate an emergency action to temporarily suspend an institution’s participation in Title IV programs without advance notice if it determines that a regulatory violation creates an imminent risk of material loss of public funds.

The HEA requires each accrediting agency recognized by the U.S. Department of Education to undergo comprehensive periodic review by the U.S. Department of Education to ascertain whether such accrediting agency is adhering to required standards. We are not aware of any reason that any of the agencies that accredit our institutions would not be approved as a result of such review. In any event, if an accreditation agency is not approved by the U.S. Department of Education, the HEA grants affected institutions reasonable opportunity to apply for accreditation from a different agency.

Cohort Default Rates. If, at any given point, an institution’s FFEL cohort default rate equals or exceeds 25% for each of the three most recent federal fiscal years, it will no longer be eligible to participate in the Title IV programs for the remainder of the federal fiscal year in which the U.S. Department of Education determines that such institution has lost its eligibility and for the two subsequent federal fiscal years. If, at any given point, an

85

institution’s Perkins cohort default rate equals or exceeds 50% for each of the three most recent federal fiscal years it will no longer be eligible to participate in the Perkins programs for the remainder of the federal fiscal year in which the U.S. Department of Education determines that such institution has lost its eligibility and for the two subsequent federal fiscal years.

None of our schools has had an FFEL cohort default rate of 25% or greater for any of the last three consecutive federal fiscal years. The most recent year for which FFEL cohort default rates have been calculated is the official rates for federal fiscal year 2004. The official combined FFEL cohort default rate for borrowers at our schools for federal fiscal year 2004 was 5.8% and our individual schools’ rates ranged from 1.4% to 13.9%.

If an institution’s FFEL cohort default rate equals or exceeds 25% in any of the three most recent federal fiscal years, or if its cohort default rate for loans under the Perkins program exceeds 15% for the most recent federal award year (July 1 through June 30), that institution may be placed on provisional certification status for up to three years. Provisional certification does not by itself limit an institution’s access to Title IV program funds, but does subject that institution to closer review by the U.S. Department of Education and possible summary adverse action if that institution commits a material violation of Title IV program requirements.

To our knowledge, the U.S. Department of Education considers provisional certification based on an institution’s exceeding the cohort default rate thresholds described in the previous paragraph only when that institution is otherwise subject to a U.S. Department of Education renewal of certification review. As of June 30, 2006, 20 of our schools had Perkins cohort default rates in excess of 15% for students who were to begin repayment during the federal award year ending June 30, 2006, the most recent year for which such rates have been calculated. Funds from the Perkins program did not exceed 3% of these schools’ net revenues in fiscal 2006. None of these schools has been placed on provisional certification solely for this reason. During the year ended June 30, 2006, six of our schools that recently entered the Perkins program had Perkins cohort default rates which exceeded 50% for such year. Each of these schools had less than 20 students in the cohort year.

Each of our schools whose students participate in the FFEL program maintains a student loan default management plan if its default rate equals or exceeds 5%. Those plans provide for extensive loan counseling, methods to increase student persistence and completion rates and graduate employment rates, strategies to increase graduate salaries and, for most schools, the use of external agencies to assist the school with loan counseling and loan servicing after a student ceases to attend that school. These activities are in addition to the loan servicing and collection activities of FFEL lenders and guaranty agencies. The historical default rates experienced by Argosy University and Western State University College of Law have been quite low, and therefore these schools have engaged in significantly fewer default management activities.

Regulatory Oversight. The U.S. Department of Education is required to conduct periodic reviews to determine whether to renew the eligibility and certification of every institution participating in Title IV programs. Generally such reviews occur every three to six years. A denial of renewal of certification precludes a school from continuing to participate in Title IV programs. Currently all of our schools are operating under a Temporary Provisional Program Participation Agreement with the U.S. Department of Education due to the change in control which occurred in connection with the Transactions.

Financial Responsibility Standards. All institutions participating in Title IV programs must satisfy certain standards of financial responsibility. Institutions are evaluated for compliance with these requirements as part of the U.S. Department of Education’s renewal of certification process, and also annually as each institution submits its audited financial statements to the U.S. Department of Education. For the year ended June 30, 2006, we believe that, with the exception of three schools, on an individual institution basis, each of our schools then participating in Title IV programs satisfied the financial responsibility standards. At our consolidated parent company level, our financial statements will not satisfy the financial responsibility standards for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2006 and for the foreseeable future. Following the Transactions, the U.S. Department of Education separately considered our and our schools’ compliance with the financial responsibility requirements at our consolidated parent company level. The U.S. Department of Education has informed us that we will be

86

required to post a letter of credit of approximately $87.9 million and will be subject to provisional certification and additional financial and cash monitoring with respect to our disbursement of Title IV funds due to our failure to satisfy the financial responsibility standards at our consolidated parent company level after the completion of the Transactions. The letter of credit, provisional certification and financial and heightened cash monitoring will be in effect until at least March 2008 and may continue beyond that date.

Return of Title IV Funds. Institutions that receive Title IV funds must follow requirements that ensure the return to the federal student financial aid programs of all unearned funds of a student who withdraws from a program. If refunds are not properly calculated and timely paid, institutions are subject to adverse actions by the U.S. Department of Education. We have posted letters of credit for three of our schools because independent audits indicated that they had exceeded federal thresholds for allowable number of late refunds during at least one of their two most recent fiscal years. Our 2006 annual financial aid compliance audits have not been completed, therefore the number of schools requiring a letter of credit may increase. We have instituted practices and procedures at recently acquired schools to expedite refunds of FFEL program funds, including payment of refunds by electronic fund transfers.

Administrative Capability Requirements. Regulations of the U.S. Department of Education specify extensive criteria an institution must satisfy to establish that it has the requisite “administrative capability” to participate in Title IV programs. These criteria require, among other things, that the institution comply with all applicable federal student financial aid regulations; have capable and sufficient personnel to administer the Title IV programs; have acceptable methods of defining and measuring the satisfactory academic progress of its students; provide financial aid counseling to its students; and submit all reports and financial statements required by the regulations. If an institution fails to satisfy any of these criteria, the U.S. Department of Education may require the repayment of federal student financial aid funds; transfer the institution from the advance system of payment of Title IV program funds to the cash monitoring or reimbursement method of payment; place the institution on provisional certification status; or commence a proceeding to impose a fine or to limit, suspend or terminate the participation of the institution in Title IV programs.

Restrictions on Operating Additional Schools. The HEA generally requires that certain educational institutions be in full operation for two years before applying to participate in Title IV programs. However, under the HEA and applicable regulations, an institution that is certified to participate in Title IV programs may establish an additional location and apply to participate in Title IV programs at that location without reference to the two-year requirement if such additional location satisfies all other applicable requirements. In addition, a school that undergoes a change of ownership resulting in a change in control (as defined under the HEA) must be reviewed and recertified for participation in Title IV programs under its new ownership. Following the Transactions, the Department issued Temporary Provisional Program Participation Agreements allowing each of our school’s students to continue to receive federal funding, subject to the Department’s final review of the applications submitted by the schools for new Provisional Program Participation Agreements following the Transactions. We currently are awaiting issuance of the new Provisional Program Participation Agreements but anticipates that all of our schools will be provisionally certified due to the Transactions. During the time a school is provisionally certified, it may be subject to summary adverse action for a material violation of Title IV program requirements and may not establish additional locations without prior approval from the U.S. Department of Education. However, provisional certification does not otherwise limit an institution’s access to Title IV program funds. Our expansion plans are based, in part, on our ability to add additional locations and acquire schools that can be recertified. The U.S. Department of Education has informed us that it will not seek to impose growth restrictions on any of our schools solely as a result of the Transactions.

The “90/10 Rule.” Under a provision of the HEA commonly referred to as the “90/10 Rule,” an institution will cease to be eligible to participate in Title IV programs if, on a cash accounting basis, more than 90% of its revenues for the prior fiscal year were derived from Title IV programs. Any school that violates the 90/10 Rule immediately becomes ineligible to participate in Title IV programs and is unable to apply to regain eligibility until the following fiscal year. For our schools that disbursed federal financial aid during fiscal 2006, the percentage of revenues derived from Title IV programs ranged from approximately 45.7% to 85.9%, with a weighted average of approximately 65%.

87

Restrictions on Payment of Bonuses, Commissions or Other Incentives. An institution participating in the Title IV programs may not provide any commission, bonus, or other incentive payment based directly or indirectly on success in securing enrollments or financial aid to any person or entity engaged in any student recruiting or admission activities or in making decisions regarding the awarding of Title IV program funds. Effective July 2003, the U.S. Department of Education published new regulations to attempt to clarify this so-called “incentive compensation” law. The new regulations identify twelve compensation arrangements that the U.S. Department of Education has determined are not in violation of the incentive compensation law, including the payment and adjustment of salaries, bonuses and commissions in certain circumstances. The new regulations do not establish clear criteria for compliance in all circumstances, and the Department has announced that it will no longer review and approve individual schools’ compensation plans prior to their implementation. Although we can not provide any assurances that the U.S. Department of Education will not find deficiencies in our compensation plans, we believe that our current compensation plans are in compliance with the HEA and the new regulations promulgated by the Department of Education.

State Authorization and Accreditation Agencies

Each of our U.S. schools is authorized to offer education programs and grant degrees or diplomas by the state in which such school is located. The level of regulatory oversight varies substantially from state to state. In some states, the schools are subject to licensure by the state education agency and also by a separate higher education agency. State laws may establish standards for instruction, qualifications of faculty, location and nature of facilities, financial policies and responsibility and other operational matters. State laws and regulations may limit our ability to obtain authorization to operate in certain states or to award degrees or diplomas or offer new degree programs. Certain states prescribe standards of financial responsibility that are different from those prescribed by the U.S. Department of Education.

Each of our U.S. schools is accredited by a national or regional accreditation agency recognized by the U.S. Department of Education, and some educational programs are also programmatically accredited. The level of regulatory oversight and standards can vary based on the agency. Certain accreditation agencies prescribe standards that are different from those prescribed by the U.S. Department of Education.

If a school does not meet its accreditation or state requirements, its accreditation and/or state licensing could be limited, modified, suspended or terminated. Failure to maintain licensure or institutional accreditation makes a school ineligible to participate in Title IV programs.

Certain of the state authorizing agencies and accrediting agencies with jurisdiction over our schools also have requirements that may, in certain instances, limit our ability to open a new school, acquire an existing school, establish an additional location of an existing school, or add new educational programs.

Canadian Regulation and Financial Aid

Our Canadian schools are subject to regulation in the provinces in which they operate and in the provinces in which they recruit students. Depending on their province of residence, our Canadian students may receive loans under the federally funded Canada Student Loan Program and/or provincial funding from their province of residence. Canadian schools must meet eligibility standards to administer these programs and must comply with all relevant statutes, rules, regulations, and requirements. We believe our Canadian schools currently hold all necessary registrations, approvals, and permits and meet all eligibility requirements to administer these governmental financial aid programs. If our Canadian schools cannot meet these and other eligibility standards or fail to comply with applicable requirements, it could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations or cash flows, or financial condition.

The British Columbia government, through its Ministry of Advanced Education, regulates private career colleges through an arms length accreditation and registration body called the Private Career Training Institutions

88

Agency of British Columbia (“PCTIA”) and provides financial assistance to eligible students through the British Columbia Student Assistance Program (“BCSAP”). In Ontario, the government regulates private career colleges through the Ministry of Training Colleges and Universities and provides student assistance through the Ontario Student Assistance Program (“OSAP”). In both provinces, the student aid programs are substantially the same and include two main components a federal component under the Canada Student Loan Program, which is combined with a provincial portion and administered through the respective provincial OSAP or the BCSAP programs. In order to maintain the right to administer student assistance; our schools must abide by the rules, regulations, and administrative manuals and Memorandum of Agreements with the Canada Student Loan Program and the respective OSAP/BCSAP Student Loans Plans.

Institutions cannot automatically acquire student aid designation through the acquisition of other student aid eligible institutions. In the event of a change of ownership, including a change in controlling interest, the respective ministries as well as OSAP or BCSAP, as applicable, require evidence of the institution has continued capacity and a formal undertaking to comply with registration and student aid eligibility requirements. Given that the provincial governments and PCTIA (in the case of British Columbia) periodically revise their respective regulations and other requirements and change their respective interpretations of existing laws and regulations, we cannot assure you that the provincial governments and/or PCTIA will agree with our interpretation of each requirement.

Canadian schools are required to audit their administration of student aid programs annually or as otherwise directed by OSAP or BCSAP, as the case may be. We believe we have complied with these requirements.

Employees

At June 30, 2006, we employed approximately 6,700 full time employees, of whom approximately 1,900 were faculty members, and approximately 1,800 part-time employees excluding student employees, of whom approximately 1,600 were faculty members. In addition, we also had approximately 2,500 adjunct faculty members at June 30, 2006. Adjunct faculty members work on a term-to-term basis, while part-time faculty members work a regular part-time schedule. We had approximately 1,500 part-time student employees as of June 30, 2006, including approximately 1,400 under the federal work-study program.

Competition

The post-secondary education market is highly fragmented and competitive. Our schools compete for students with traditional public and private two-year and four-year colleges and universities and other proprietary schools, including those that offer distance learning programs. Many public and private colleges and universities, as well as other private career-oriented schools, offer programs similar to those we offer. Public institutions receive substantial government subsidies, and both public and private institutions have access to government and foundation grants, tax-deductible contributions and other financial resources generally not available to proprietary schools. Accordingly, public and private institutions may have facilities and equipment superior to those in the proprietary sector, and can often offer lower effective tuition prices. Some of our competitors in both the public and private sectors also have substantially greater financial and other resources than we do.

Seasonality in Results of Operations

Our quarterly revenues and income fluctuate primarily as a result of the pattern of student enrollments. Student enrollment at the Art Institute schools has typically peaked in the fall (fiscal second quarter), when the largest number of recent high school and college graduates traditionally begin post-secondary education programs. The first quarter is typically the lowest revenue recognition quarter due to student vacations. The seasonality of our business has decreased over the last several years due to an increased percentage of students at our schools enrolling in bachelor’s programs and the effect of recent acquisitions.

89

Properties

Our corporate headquarters are located in Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania. At June 30, 2006, our schools were located in major metropolitan areas in 24 states and two Canadian provinces. Typically, an Art Institute occupies an entire building or several floors or portions of floors in a building. Argosy University campuses, the Brown Mackie Colleges and South University schools are smaller and typically located in office or commercial buildings.

We currently lease most of our administrative and educational facilities under operating lease arrangements. We own a student housing facility in Fort Lauderdale, Florida; buildings occupied by The Art Institutes of Pittsburgh, Colorado and Seattle, by Western State University College of Law in Fullerton, California, by Argosy University in Egan, Minnesota and Sarasota, Florida, and by the Brown Mackie Colleges in Lenexa, Kansas and Akron, Ohio. At June 30, 2006, we owned approximately 0.6 million square feet and leased approximately 3.4 million square feet. The leases typically have remaining terms ranging from less than one year to 20 years.

Many of our facility leases contain provisions prohibiting a change in control of the lessee or permitting the landlord to terminate the lease upon a change in control of the lessee. The Merger Agreement requires us to use commercially reasonable efforts to obtain consents from our landlords, but these consents are not a condition to closing of the Merger. Based primarily upon our belief that (1) we maintain good relations with the substantial majority of our landlords, (2) most of our leases are at market rates and (3) we have historically been able to secure suitable leased property at market rates when needed, we believe that these provisions will not, individually or in the aggregate, have a material adverse effect on our business or financial position.

Legal Proceedings

We are a defendant in certain legal proceedings arising out of the conduct of our business. In the opinion of management, based upon an investigation of these claims and discussion with legal counsel, the ultimate outcome of such legal proceedings, individually and in the aggregate, will not have a material adverse effect on our consolidated financial position, results of operations or liquidity.

90

MANAGEMENT

Our executive officers and directors together with their ages as of September 15, 2006 are as follows:

Name (1)	Age	Position
John R. McKernan, Jr.	58	Chairman of the Board of Directors and Chief Executive Officer
Joseph A. Charlson	36	Senior Vice President—Strategic Marketing and Chief Marketing Officer
John M. Mazzoni	43	President, The Art Institutes
Stacey R. Sauchuk	46	Senior Vice President—Academic Programs and Student Affairs
John T. South, III	59	Senior Vice President and Chancellor, South University
Stephen J. Weiss	43	President, EDMC Online Higher Education
Edward H. West	40	Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer
Adrian M. Jones	42	Director
Leo F. Mullin	64	Director
Paul J. Salem	42	Director
Peter O. Wilde	38	Director

(1) Leeds Equity Partners has the right to appoint a representative on our Board of Directors subject to the receipt of any required approvals pursuant to the terms of the shareholders’ agreement we entered into with the Sponsors upon the closing of the Transactions. Jeffrey T. Leeds currently serves as an observer at the Board meetings on behalf of Leeds Equity Partners under the terms of that agreement.

John R. McKernan, Jr. became our Chief Executive Officer on September 1, 2003. Mr. McKernan joined us as our Vice Chairman and a member of the Board of Directors in June 1999 and continues to serve as Vice Chairman. In March 2003 he became our President and served in that office until September 11, 2003. Mr. McKernan served as Governor of the State of Maine from 1987 to 1995.

Joseph A. Charlson was hired as Senior Vice President—Strategic Marketing in February 2005, was appointed Chief Marketing Officer in August 2005 and named an executive officer in September 2005. Prior to joining us, Mr. Charlson was a Strategy Lead and then Senior Manager—Pharmacy at Target Corporation from July 2003 through February 2005, a management consultant with McKinsey & Company from August 2001 through July 2003 and President of United States Building Technology Inc. from January 1997 through January 2001.

John M. Mazzoni has been our President of The Art Institutes since October 17, 2005. Mr. Mazzoni has been with us for 18 years. From March 2005 to October 2005, he served as Senior Vice President Group Operations. From August 2004 to March 2005, he served as Group Vice President for EDMC. From July 2001 through August 2004 he served as Group Vice President for The Art Institutes. From August 1987 through July 2001, he held several senior management level positions in the areas of Operations, Finance and Information Systems. Prior to joining us, he held a Financial Systems positions at Mellon Bank, NA.

Stacey R. Sauchuk has been our Senior Vice President—Academic Programs and Student Affairs since July 2003 and was appointed as an executive officer in September 2005. Ms. Sauchuk was our Group Vice President from August 2001 through July 2003 and President of The Art Institute of Philadelphia from January 1997 through July 2000. From August 2000 through July 2001, Ms. Sauchuk was an executive search consultant with Witt/Kieffer.

John T. South, III, joined us in July 2003 when we acquired South University, which was owned by Mr. South. Mr. South has served as Chancellor of South University since October 2001 and was appointed the Chairman of the Board of Trustees of Argosy University in February 2006. In his current role with us, Mr. South also oversees the Brown Mackie Colleges. Prior to our acquisition of South University, Mr. South was stockholder and CEO of various affiliated private colleges and Chief Executive Officer of South University since 1975. Mr. South also served as President of South University prior to being appointed Chancellor in October

91

2001. From 1971 to 1975, he was a banking officer with Citizens and Southern National Bank in Atlanta, Ga. From 1969 to 1971, Mr. South served as a First Lieutenant in the U.S. Army. Mr. South currently is on the advisory board of Sun Trust Bank of Savannah.

Stephen J. Weiss joined us as President, EDMC Online Higher Education in October 2003. Prior to joining us, Mr. Weiss served as President and Chief Operating Officer of Capella Education Company from October 1998 to June 2003 and Director, Education Business Unit of Honeywell Corporation from July 1997 to October 1998. Mr. Weiss also serves on the board of directors of AWS Convergence Technologies and on the advisory board of Rittenhouse Capital Partners.

Edward H. West became our Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer upon the consummation of the Transactions. Mr. West is the former Chairman and Chief Executive Officer of ICG Commerce, a position he held from 2002 until 2006. Prior to joining ICG Commerce, Mr. West served as President and Chief Operating Officer from 2001 to 2002 and Chief Financial Officer of Internet Capital Group from 2000 to 2001. Prior to joining Internet Capital Group, Mr. West was an employee of Delta Air Lines from 1994 to 2000, and most recently served as its Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer. Mr. West currently serves on the board of Entercom Communications Corp. and chairs its Audit Committee.

Adrian M. Jones joined Goldman, Sachs & Co. in 1994, and has been a Managing Director within the Principal Investment Area of its Merchant Banking Division since 2002. He serves on the board of directors of Autocam Corporation, Burger King Holding Inc. and Signature Hospital Holding, LLC.

Leo F. Mullin retired as Chief Executive Officer of Delta Air Lines in January 2004 and Chairman in April 2004, after having served as Chief Executive Officer of Delta since 1997 and Chairman since 1999. Mr. Mullin currently serves as a Senior Advisor, on a part-time basis, to Goldman Sachs Capital Partners. Mr. Mullin was Vice Chairman of Unicom Corporation and its principal subsidiary, Commonwealth Edison Company, from 1995 to 1997. He was an executive of First Chicago Corporation from 1981 to 1995, serving as that company’s President and Chief Operating Officer from 1993 to 1995, and as Chairman and Chief Executive Officer of American National Bank, a subsidiary of First Chicago Corporation, from 1991 to 1993. Mr. Mullin is also a Director of Johnson & Johnson, BellSouth Corporation, the Juvenile Diabetes Research Foundation and The Field Museum. He is a member of The Business Council and a member of the Advisory Board of the Carter Center.

Paul J. Salem is a Senior Managing Director and a co-founder of Providence Equity. Prior to Providence Equity in 1992, Mr. Salem worked for Morgan Stanley & Co. in corporate finance and mergers and acquisitions. Prior to that time, Mr. Salem spent four years with Prudential Investment Corporation, an affiliate of Prudential Insurance, where his responsibilities included leveraged buyout transactions and establishing Prudential’s European investment office.

Peter O. Wilde is a Managing Director of Providence Equity. Prior to joining Providence Equity in 2002, Mr. Wilde had been a General Partner at BCI Partners, where he began his career in private equity investing in 1992. Mr. Wilde is also a director of Kerasotes Theatres, Inc., Medical Media Holdings, Pluris Inc. and Survey Sampling International and is chairman of Colorado Cinema Group and The Vendome Group.

Providence Equity and Goldman Sachs each have the right to appoint two representatives to our Board of Directors under the terms of an agreement entered into among our shareholders. The shareholders agreement also provides that Leeds Equity Partners has the right to appoint a representative on our Board of Directors subject to the receipt of any required approvals. Jeffrey T. Leeds currently serves as an observer at the Board meetings on behalf of Leeds Equity Partners under the terms of the shareholders agreement.

92

Executive Compensation

Summary Compensation Table

The following table contains certain information about compensation earned during the last three fiscal years by our chief executive officer, six other executive officers who were the most highly compensated during fiscal 2006 (two of whom have left) and our new Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer who was hired on June 1, 2006 (the “Named Executive Officers”).

							Long Term Compensation (1)
	Annual Compensation						Restricted Stock Award(s) ($)		Securities Underlying Options (#)
	Fiscal Year	Salary ($)		Bonus ($)		Other Compensation ($)				All Other Compensation ($) (2)
John R. McKernan, Jr.   Chairman and Chief Executive Officer	2006 2005 2004	$	452,607 452,747 390,209	$	783,390 640,967 637,327	— — —	$	1,306,875 —   —	—   9,254 350,000	$	109,683 10,350 13,275
J. William Brooks President and Chief Operating Officer(3)	2006 2005 2004		363,603 368,440 191,576		490,236 314,331 313,159	— — —		307,500 —   3,083,000	—   —   334,766		1,442,907 11,359 2,406
Joseph A. Charlson Senior Vice President— Strategic Marketing and Chief Marketing Officer(4)	2006 2005		235,651 78,282		215,929 90,000	— —		153,750 —	—   15,000		11,203 —
John M. Mazzoni President, The Art Institutes	2006 2005 2004		254,965 215,089 200,104		315,017 142,028 171,819	— — —		305,820 —   —	—   —   25,000		23,725 13,373 10,728
John T. South(5) Senior Vice President and Chancellor, South University	2006 2005 2004		261,950 260,337 233,334		307,790 231,019 251,064	109,794 110,044 98,328		243,600 —   —	—   —   16,000		36,254 15,056 549
Stephen J. Weiss President—EDMC Online Higher Education(6)	2006 2005 2004		260,202 261,511 178,519		244,637 208,769 157,500	— — —		169,125 —   —	—   —   30,000		18,584 7,809 405
Edward H. West Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer(7)	2006		20,769		225,000	—		—	—		—

(1) Shares of common stock underlying options have been adjusted for a two-for-one stock split which occurred on December 22, 2003. Restricted stock grants are valued based on the closing price of the Predecessor’s stock on Nasdaq on the day of the grant.

(2) Such amounts represent, to the extent applicable, our matching contributions to our deferred compensation and retirement plans, the dollar value of life insurance premiums we paid with respect to term life insurance and severance benefits received in connection with the Transactions.

	Deferred Compensation Plan		Retirement Plan		Group Life Insurance Premiums		Severance Payments	Total
John R. McKernan, Jr.	$	99,135	$	9,888	$	660	—	$	109,683
J. William Brooks		43,361		5,952		660	1,392,934		1,442,907
Joseph A. Charlson		—		10,585		618	—		11,203
John M. Mazzoni		15,666		7,399		660	—		23,725
John T. South, III		26,443		9,151		660	—		36,254
Stephen J. Weiss		11,945		5,979		660	—		18,584
Edward H. West		—		—		—	—		—

(3) Mr. Brooks served as President and Chief Financial Officer until June 30, 2006.

(4) Mr. Charlson was hired as Senior Vice President of Marketing in February 2005.

93

(5) We reimburse Mr. South for up to $107,000 per year of expenses incurred in connection with business use of a plane owned in part by Mr. South and for certain private club dues under the terms of his employment agreement.

(6) Mr. Weiss was hired as President, EDMC Online Higher Education in October 2003.

(7) Mr. West was hired as Executive Vice President – Chief Financial Officer on June 1, 2006.

Employment Agreements

In connection with the Transactions, we introduced an equity incentive plan and entered into new employment agreements with Mr. McKernan and Mr. West. Additionally, we currently have employment agreements with Joseph A. Charlson, John M. Mazzoni, Stacey R. Sauchuk and John T. South, as well as several other of our officers.

McKernan Employment Agreement. We entered into an employment agreement with Mr. McKernan, dated as of June 1, 2006 (the “McKernan Agreement”). The McKernan Agreement cancelled and superseded Mr. McKernan’s prior employment agreement, dated as of August 5, 2003. The McKernan Agreement is for a five-year term, unless Mr. McKernan is terminated as described below. Under the terms of the McKernan Agreement, Mr. McKernan serves as Chief Executive Officer and Chairman of the Board of Directors. He currently receives a base salary at an annual rate of approximately $550,000, subject to review and discretionary increases by the Board of Directors, plus incentive compensation and other employee benefits under the various benefit plans and programs we maintain for our employees.

Mr. McKernan also purchased $3,000,000 of our common stock pursuant to a purchase agreement with Goldman Sachs and Providence Equity. We granted Mr. McKernan time-vesting and performance-vesting options to purchase 342,105 shares of common stock.

We may terminate the McKernan Agreement with or without cause and Mr. McKernan may resign in each case, other than a termination for cause, upon 30 days advance written notice to the other party. Upon an eligible termination for any reason, Mr. McKernan will continue to receive payment of any base salary earned but unpaid through the date of termination and any other payment or benefit to which he is entitled under the applicable terms of any applicable company arrangements.

If Mr. McKernan is terminated during his term other than for cause (as defined in the McKernan Agreement), or by Mr. McKernan for good reason, Mr. McKernan is entitled to a lump sum severance payment of (i) one and one-half times (or three times if the date of termination is within the first two-year period, or if it is in anticipation of or within two years following a change of control) the sum of Mr. McKernan’s base salary plus the target annual bonus and (ii) a pro-rata annual bonus based on his target annual bonus. “Good reason,” as that term is used above, includes (i) any material diminution of authorities, titles or offices, (ii) any change in the reporting structure such that Mr. McKernan reports to someone other than the Board of Directors, (iii) a relocation of primary place of employment by more than 50 miles, (iv) a material breach of ours of any material obligation to Mr. McKernan and (v) any failure of ours to obtain the assumption in writing of its obligation to perform the McKernan Agreement by any successor following a change of control.

After June 1, 2007, the Board of Directors may request Mr. McKernan to serve as Chairman of the Board of Directors and no longer serve as our Chief Executive Officer. If this occurs, Mr. McKernan will continue being our employee in addition to serving as Chairman of the Board of Directors for the remaining term of his employment agreement, but his work hours will be reduced to 30 hours per week and his salary will be decreased by 40%.

In addition, the McKernan Agreement will terminate prior to its scheduled expiration date in the event of death or disability. In the event of Mr. McKernan’s death during the employment term, we will continue to pay any base salary earned but unpaid through the date of termination and any other payment or benefit to which he is entitled under the applicable terms of any applicable company arrangements in addition to a pro-rata annual bonus payment based on his target annual bonus for the year of such termination.

The McKernan Agreement contains non-competition, non-solicitation and confidentiality covenants. The non-competition provision continues for a period of twenty-four months following termination of employment.

94

West Employment Agreement. We entered into an employment agreement with Edward H. West, dated as of June 1, 2006 (the “West Agreement”), under which Mr. West serves as our Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer. The West Agreement is for a term of three years ending on June 1, 2009 and is subject at the end of that initial term to successive, automatic one-year extensions unless either party gives notice of non-extension to the other party at least 180 days prior to any renewal date. Mr. West currently receives a base salary at an annual rate of $450,000, which is reviewed annually and may be adjusted upward by the Board of Directors, plus an annual bonus and a signing bonus of $225,000 and other employee benefits under the various benefit plans and programs we maintain for our employees.

Mr. West also purchased $500,000 of EDMC common stock pursuant to a purchase agreement with Goldman Sachs and Providence Equity. We granted Mr. West time-vesting and performance-vesting options to purchase 136,842 shares of our common stock.

We may terminate the West Agreement with or without cause and Mr. West may resign in each case, other than a termination for cause, upon 30 days advance written notice to the other party. Upon an eligible termination for any reason, Mr. West will continue to receive payment of any base salary earned but unpaid through the date of termination and any other payment or benefit to which he is entitled under the applicable terms of any applicable company arrangements. Under the West Agreement, if Mr. West is terminated during his term other than for cause (as defined in the West Agreement), or by Mr. West for good reason, Mr. West is entitled to a lump sum severance payment of (i) one and one-half times (or two times if the date of termination is within the first two-year period, or if it is in anticipation of or within two years following a change of control) the sum of Mr. West’s base salary plus the target annual bonus and (ii) a pro-rata annual bonus based on his target annual bonus. “Good reason,” as that term is used above, includes (i) any material diminution of authorities, titles or offices, (ii) any change in the reporting structure such that Mr. West reports to someone other than the Board of Directors, (iii) a relocation of primary place of employment by more than 50 miles, (iv) a material breach of ours of any material obligation to Mr. West and (v) any failure of ours to obtain the assumption in writing of its obligation to perform the West Agreement by any successor following a change of control.

In addition, the West Agreement will terminate prior to its scheduled expiration date in the event of death or disability. In the event of Mr. West’s death during the employment term, we will continue to pay any base salary earned but unpaid through the date of termination and any other payment or benefit to which he is entitled under the applicable terms of any applicable company arrangements in addition to a pro-rata annual bonus payment based on his target annual bonus for the year of such termination.

The West Agreement contains non-competition, non-solicitation and confidentiality covenants. The non-competition provision continues for a period of eighteen months following termination of employment.

Other Employment Agreements. Our employment agreements with Mr. Charlson and Ms. Sauchuck are dated as of September 28, 2005 and our employment agreements with Mr. South and Mr. Mazzoni are dated as of July 14, 2003 and October 12, 2005, respectively. Those agreements include terms similar to the West Agreement, except that such agreements provide for (i) an initial three-year term, with successive automatic one year extensions under terms similar to the West Agreement, (ii) each such officer’s individual position and current compensation, (iii) 12 months of severance and continued fringe benefits following an eligible termination, (iv) continued vesting of outstanding stock awards for a period of 12 months, (v) payment of two times the officer’s salary and average incentive compensation upon an eligible termination in anticipation of or within a two-year period following a change in control of EDMC (including the Merger), (vi) continuation of the non-solicitation and non-competition provisions for a period of twelve months (rather than 18 months) following termination of employment and (vii) the definition of “good reason” is more narrow from the executive’s perspective (making it more difficult for the executive to resign for good reason). Mr. South’s agreement also provides that we will reimburse him for certain private club dues and up to $107,000 per fiscal year in business expenses incurred in connection with use of an airplane of which he is a co-owner. We expect to enter into new employment agreements with all of our executive officers, including Mr. Charlson, Ms. Sauchuck, Mr. South, Mr. Mazzoni and Mr. Weiss.

95

Option Exercises and Sales of Restricted Shares

All outstanding restricted shares and options to acquire shares of common stock of the Predecessor, to the extent not vested before closing of the Transactions, became fully vested and immediately exercisable as a result of the Transactions.

The following table contains, for each of the named executive officers, (1) the number of shares of common stock of the Predecessor subject to options that had previously vested and had become exercisable before closing of the Transactions, (2) the value of such vested options, based on the Transactions consideration of $43.00 per share, (3) the number of shares of common stock of the Predecessor subject to options that became fully vested and exercisable as a result of the Transactions, (4) the value of such options that vested as a result of the Transactions, based on the Transactions consideration of $43.00 per share, (5) the total number of shares subject to previously vested options and options that vested as a result of the Transactions, and (6) the total realized from the exercise of stock options in connection with the Transactions, based on the Transactions consideration of $43.00 per share.

									Total
	Previously Vested Options					Options That Vested as a Result of the Transactions			Total Shares (#)	Total Realized Value ($)
	Shares (#)		Value ($)			Shares (#)	Value ($)
John R. McKernan, Jr.	529,854		$	12,650,385		100,000	$	1,442,000	629,854	$	14,092,385
J. William Brooks	222,383	(1)		2,766,714	(1)	117,383		1,427,964	339,766		4,194,678
Joseph A. Charlson	7,500			91,050		7,500		91,050	15,000		182,100
John M. Mazzoni	29,000			430,500		—		—	29,000		430,500
John T. South, III	16,000			204,000		—		—	16,000		204,000
Stephen J. Weiss	30,000			382,500		—		—	30,000		382,500
Edward H. West(2)	—			—		—		—	—		—

(1) Includes vested options to purchase 5,000 shares of common stock at $30.25 per share held by Mr. Brooks’ wife who was also employed by the Predecessor.

(2) Mr. West was not employed by the Predecessor.

The following table contains, for each of the named executive officers, (1) the number of restricted shares that had previously vested and had become exercisable before closing of the Transactions, (2) the value of such vested restricted shares, based on the Transactions consideration of $43.00 per share, (3) the number of restricted shares that became fully vested and exercisable as a result of the Transactions, (4) the value of such restricted shares that vested as a result of the Transactions, based on the Transactions consideration of $43.00 per share, (5) the total number of restricted shares that previously vested and restricted shares that vested as a result of the Transactions, and (6) the total realized from the sale of restricted shares in connection with the Transactions, based on the Transactions consideration of $43.00 per share.

			Restricted Shares That Vested as a Result of the Transactions			Total
	Previously Vested Restricted Shares					Total Shares (#)	Total Realized Value ($)
	Shares (#)	Value ($)	Shares (#)	Value ($)
John R. McKernan, Jr.	—	—	42,500	$	1,827,500	42,500	$	1,827,500
J. William Brooks(1)	46,514	2,000,102	44,034		1,893,462	90,548		3,893,564
Joseph A. Charlson	—	—	5,000		215,000	5,000		215,000
John M. Mazzoni	—	—	10,000		430,000	10,000		430,000
John T. South, III	—	—	7,500		322,500	7,500		322,500
Stephen J. Weiss	—	—	5,500		236,500	5,500		236,500
Edward H. West(2)	—	—	—		—	—		—

(1) Includes 700 unvested restricted shares held by Mr. Brooks’ wife who was also employed by the Predecessor.

(2) Mr. West was not employed by the Predecessor.

96

PRINCIPAL STOCKHOLDERS

All of the outstanding stock of Education Management Finance Corp. is owned by Education Management LLC, which is wholly-owned by Education Management Holdings LLC. The following table presents information regarding the beneficial ownership of the equity securities of Education Management Corporation, parent of Education Management Holdings LLC, as of September 15, 2006 by each person who is known by us to beneficially own more than 5% of the equity securities of Education Management Corporation, by each of our directors, by each of the named executive officers, and by all of our directors and executive officers as a group. No outstanding options held by our executive officers were exercisable within 60 days of September 15, 2006.

Name and Address of Beneficial Owner (1)	Number of Shares Owned	Percentage of Outstanding Shares Owned
Providence Equity Funds (2)	8,965,000	34.5	%
Goldman Sachs Capital Partners Funds (3)(4)	8,965,000	34.5	%
GS EDMC Investors, LP (4)	1,600,000	6.2	%
GS Private Equity Partners Fund (5)	1,400,000	5.4	%
Leeds Equity Partners (6)	2,000,000	7.7	%
John R. McKernan, Jr.	60,000	*
J. William Brooks	—	*
Joseph A. Charlson	—	*
Adrian M. Jones (3)(4)	10,565,000	40.6	%
John M. Mazzoni	—	*
Leo F. Mullin	—	*
Paul J. Salem (2)	8,965,000	34.5	%
John T. South, III	—	*
Stephen J. Weiss	—	*
Edward H. West	10,000	*
Peter O. Wilde (2)	8,965,000	34.5	%
All executive officers and directors as a group (11 persons)	19,600,000	75.4	%

 *     Less than 1%.

(1) The address of each listed shareholder, unless otherwise noted, is c/o Education Management LLC, 210 Sixth Avenue, 33^rd Floor, Pittsburgh, PA 15222.

(2) Includes (i) 7,223,957 shares of common stock of held by Providence Equity Partners V, LP (“PEP V”), whose general partner is Providence Equity GP V LP, whose general partner is Providence Equity Partners V L.L.C. (“PEP V LLC”); (ii) 1,141,053 shares of common stock held by Providence Equity Partners V-A LP (“PEP V-A),” whose general partner is Providence Equity GP V LP, whose general partner is PEP V LLC; (iii) 598,071 shares of common stock held by Providence Equity Partners IV LP (“PEP IV”), whose general partner is Providence Equity Partners GP IV LP, whose general partner is Providence Equity Partners IV L.L.C. (“PEP IV LLC”), and (iv) 1,929 shares of common stock held by Providence Equity Operating Partners IV LP (“PEOP IV” and, collectively with PEP IV, PEP V and PEP V-A, the “Providence Equity Funds”), whose general partner is Providence Equity Partners GP IV LP, whose general partner is PEP IV LLC. PEP V LLC, may be deemed to share beneficial ownership of the shares owned by PEP V and PEP V-A. PEP V LLC disclaims this beneficial ownership. PEP IV LLC may be deemed to share the beneficial ownership of PEP IV and PEOP IV. PEP IV LLC disclaims this beneficial ownership. Mr. Salem is a member of PEP V LLC and PEP IV LLC and may also be deemed to possess indirect beneficial ownership of the securities owned by the Providence Equity Funds, but disclaim such beneficial ownership. Mr. Wilde is a limited partner of Providence Equity Partners GP IV LP and Providence Equity Partners GP V LP and disclaims beneficial ownership of any securities owned by such limited partnerships. The address of Mr. Salem, Mr. Wilde and each of the entities listed in this footnote is c/o Providence Equity Partners Inc., 50 Kennedy Plaza, 18th Floor, Providence, Rhode Island 02903.

97

(3) Consists of 4,720,611 shares owned by GS Capital Partners V Fund, L.P., 2,438,470 shares owned by GS Capital Partners Fund V Offshore Fund, L.P., 1,618,762 shares owned by GS Capital Partners V Institutional, L.P. and 187,157 shares owned by GS Capital Partners V GmbH & Co. KG (collectively, the “Goldman Sachs Capital Partners Funds”).

(4) The Goldman Sachs Group, Inc. and certain affiliates, including Goldman, Sachs & Co., may be deemed to directly or indirectly own the 10,565,000 shares of common stock which are collectively owned directly or indirectly by the Goldman Sachs Capital Partners Funds and GS EDMC Investors, LP, of which affiliates of The Goldman Sachs Group, Inc. and Goldman, Sachs & Co. are the general partner, managing limited partner or the managing partner. Goldman, Sachs & Co. is the investment manager for certain of the Goldman Sachs Capital Partner Funds and GS EDMC Investors, LP. Goldman, Sachs & Co. is a direct and indirect wholly-owned subsidiary of The Goldman Sachs Group, Inc. The Goldman Sachs Group, Inc., Goldman, Sachs & Co. and the Goldman Sachs Capital Partner Funds and GS EDMC Investors, LP share voting power and investment power with certain of their respective affiliates. Adrian M. Jones is a managing director of Goldman, Sachs & Co. Each of Mr. Jones, The Goldman Sachs Group, Inc. and Goldman, Sachs & Co. disclaims beneficial ownership of the common shares owned directly or indirectly by the Goldman Sachs Capital Partners Funds and GS EDMC Investors, LP, except to the extent of their pecuniary interest therein, if any. The address of the Goldman Sachs Capital Partners Funds, The Goldman Sachs Group, Inc., Goldman Sachs & Co. and Mr. Jones is 85 Broad Street, 10th Floor, New York, New York 10004.

(5) Consists of 427,926 shares owned by GS Private Equity Partners 2000, L.P., 150,626 shares owned by GS Private Equity Partners 2000 Offshore, L.P., 166,192 shares owned by GS Private Equity Partners 2000 – Direct Investment Fund, L.P., 59,656 shares owned by GS Private Equity Partners 2002, L.P., 229,774 shares owned by GS Private Equity Partners 2002 Offshore, L.P., 51,850 shares owned by GS Private Equity Partners 2002 – Direct Investment Fund, L.P., 26,380 shares owned by GS Private Equity Partners 2002 Employee Fund, L.P., 18,554 shares owned by GS Private Equity Partners 2004, L.P., 120,705 shares owned by GS Private Equity Partners 2004 Offshore, L.P., 34,596 shares owned by Multi-Strategy Holdings, LP, 83,372 shares owned by GS Private Equity Partners 2004 – Direct Investment Fund, L.P. and 30,369 shares owned by GS Private Equity Partners 2004 Employee Fund, L.P. (collectively, the “GS Private Equity Partners Funds”). The Goldman Sachs Group, Inc., and certain of its affiliates, including Goldman Sachs Asset Management, L.P., may be deemed to directly or indirectly own in the shares of common stock which are owned by the GS Private Equity Partners Funds, of which affiliates of The Goldman Sachs Group, Inc. and Goldman Sachs Asset Management, L.P. are the general partner, managing limited partner or the managing partner. Goldman Sachs Asset Management, L.P. is the investment manager for certain of the GS Private Equity Partners Funds. Goldman Sachs Asset Management, L.P. is a direct and indirect wholly-owned subsidiary of The Goldman Sachs Group, Inc. The Goldman Sachs Group, Inc., Goldman Sachs Asset Management, L.P. and the GS Private Equity Partners Funds share voting power and investment power with certain of their respective affiliates. Each of The Goldman Sachs Group, Inc. and Goldman Sachs Asset Management, L.P. disclaims beneficial ownership of the common shares owned directly or indirectly by the GS Private Equity Partners Funds except to the extent of their pecuniary interest therein, if any. The address of Goldman Sachs Asset Management, L.P. and the GS Private Equity Partner Funds is 32 Old Slip, 9th Floor, New York, New York 10004.

(6) Shares are owned by Leeds Equity Partners IV, L.P., whose general partner is Leeds Equity Associates IV, L.L.C. Jeffrey T. Leeds, who serves as an observer at our Board meetings, is the President of Leeds Equity Advisors, Inc., which is the Managing Member of Leeds Equity Associates IV, L.L.C. The address of Leeds Equity Partners IV, L.P., Leeds Equity Associates IV, L.L.C., Leeds Equity Advisors, Inc. and Mr. Leeds is 350 Park Avenue, 23^rd Floor, New York, New York 10022.

98

CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

Shareholders’ Agreement

In connection with the Transactions, investment funds designated by the Sponsors acquired shares of capital stock of EDMC. Simultaneously with the closing of the Transactions, we and the Sponsors entered into a shareholders’ agreement. The shareholders’ agreement contains agreements among the parties with respect to the election of our directors, restrictions on the issuance or transfer of shares, including tag-along rights and drag-along rights, other special corporate governance provisions (including the right to approve various corporate actions), registration rights (including customary indemnification provisions) and call options. The shareholders’ agreement does not permit either Sponsor to elect more than two members of the Board or to control the votes of the other Sponsor’s shares. The management participants who hold shares of capital stock (including through the exercise of options) and the Co-Investors are parties to the agreement.

Leeds Equity Partners has the right to appoint a representative on our Board of Directors subject to the receipt of any required approvals. Jeffrey T. Leeds currently serves as an observer at the Board meetings on behalf of Leeds Equity Partners under the terms of the agreement.

Sponsor Management Agreement

Upon completion of the Transactions, we and EDMC entered into a management agreement with affiliates of each of the Sponsors pursuant to which such entities or their affiliates provide management services. Pursuant to such agreement, affiliates of the Sponsors receive an aggregate annual management fee equal to $5.0 million and reimbursement for out-of-pocket expenses incurred by them or their affiliates in connection with the Transactions prior to the closing date and in connection with the provision of services pursuant to the agreement. In addition, pursuant to such agreement, affiliates of the Sponsors also receive aggregate transaction fees of approximately $40.2 million in connection with services provided by such entities related to the Transactions. Finally, the management agreement provides that affiliates of the Sponsors are entitled to receive a fee in connection with certain subsequent financing, acquisition, disposition and change of control transactions based on a percentage of the gross transaction value of any such transaction. The management agreement includes customary exculpation and indemnification provisions in favor of the Sponsors and their affiliates. The term of the management agreement is ten years from the date of the closing of the Merger.

Upon a change of control in our ownership or a public offering of our equity that meets certain conditions, and in recognition of facilitation of such change of control or public offering by affiliates of the Sponsors, these affiliates of the Sponsors may elect to receive, in lieu of annual payments of the management fee, a single lump sum cash payment equal to the then-present value of all then-current and future management fees payable under this agreement, calculated using discount rates equal to the yield on U.S. treasury securities with a maturity on or near the tenth anniversary of the closing date of the Merger. The lump sum payment would only be payable to the extent that it is permitted under the indentures and other agreements governing our indebtedness.

Leeds Equity Partners received a pro rata portion of the management and transaction fees paid to the Sponsors after the Sponsors each sold $50.0 million of EDMC shares to Leeds Equity Partners in July 2006.

Other Relationships

South University, which is a wholly-owned subsidiary of EDMC, leases two of the buildings it occupies from two separate entities owned by the John T. South, III, who is one of our executive officers. Total rental payments, which are included in educational services on the consolidated statements of income, under these arrangements were approximately $1.5 million and $1.4 million for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2006 and 2005, respectively.

Historical Transactions with Management

Robert B. Knutson, who served as our Chairman of the Board until the Merger, and Albert Greenstone, a director emeritus until the Merger, are limited partners, with no managerial authority, in AIPH Limited

99

Partnership, which is the general partner of The Art Institute of Philadelphia Limited Partnership (the “Lessor”). The Art Institute of Philadelphia, a division of a wholly-owned subsidiary of EDMC, leases one of its buildings from the Lessor for approximately $720,000 annually. The Art Institute of Philadelphia is the general partner of AIPH Limited Partnership and consolidates both AIPH Limited Partnership and the Lessor in its financial statements.

J. William Brooks, who served as our President and Chief Operating Officer until June 30, 2006, is married to Nancy Brooks, who we employed as Vice President of Marketing—Brown Mackie College until June 30, 2006. Ms. Brooks received compensation of $128,265 during fiscal 2006 in connection with her employment. Ms. Brooks did not report to Mr. Brooks and he was not responsible for determining her annual compensation or bonus.

100

DESCRIPTION OF OTHER INDEBTEDNESS

Senior Secured Credit Facilities

Overview

In connection with the Transactions, we entered into a senior secured credit facility with Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC, Goldman Sachs Credit Partners L.P. and Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated, as joint lead arrangers and bookrunners. Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC acted as sole and exclusive syndication agent. Merrill Lynch Capital Corporation and Bank of America, N.A. acted as documentation agents.

The senior secured credit facilities provide senior secured financing of $1,485.0 million, consisting of:

• a $1,185.0 million term loan facility; and

• a $300.0 million revolving credit facility.

Education Management LLC is the primary borrower under the senior secured credit facilities. We also have the ability to designate one or more of our other subsidiaries as borrowers under the revolving credit facility. The revolving credit facility includes borrowing capacity for letters of credit and for borrowings on same-day notice referred to as the swingline loans.

Interest Rate and Fees

Borrowings under the senior secured credit facilities bear interest at a rate equal to LIBOR plus an applicable margin or, at our option, an applicable margin plus an alternative base rate determined by reference to the higher of (x) the prime rate as published in The Wall Street Journal and (y) the federal funds rate plus  ¹/2 of 1%. The initial applicable margin for borrowings is, under the revolving credit facility, 1.25% with respect to base rate borrowings and 2.25% with respect to LIBOR borrowings and, under the term loan facility, 1.50% with respect to base rate borrowings and 2.50% with respect to LIBOR borrowings. The applicable margin for borrowings under the senior secured credit facilities may be reduced subject to our attaining certain leverage ratios.

In addition to paying interest on outstanding principal under the senior secured credit facilities, we are required to pay a commitment fee to the lenders under the revolving credit facility in respect of the unutilized commitments thereunder. The initial commitment fee rate is 0.50% per annum. The commitment fee rate may be reduced to 0.375% subject to our attaining certain leverage ratios. We must also pay customary letter of credit fees.

Prepayments

The senior secured credit agreement requires us to prepay outstanding term loans, subject to certain exceptions, with:

• 50% (which percentage will be reduced to 0% if our total leverage ratio is less than a specified threshold) of the annual consolidated excess cash flow of Education Management Holdings LLC and its subsidiaries;

• 100% of the net cash proceeds of all nonordinary course asset sales or other dispositions of property by Education Management Holdings LLC and its subsidiaries (including insurance and condemnation), if we do not commit to reinvest those proceeds in assets useful to our business within one year, which period may be extended for another 180 days so long as there is in effect a contractual commitment to reinvest such proceeds;

101

• 100% of the net cash proceeds of any incurrence of debt by Education Management Holdings LLC and its subsidiaries, other than debt permitted under the senior secured credit agreement.

The foregoing mandatory prepayments are applied to the term loan facility as directed by us.

We may voluntarily repay outstanding loans under the senior secured credit facilities at any time without premium or penalty, other than customary “breakage” costs with respect to LIBOR loans.

Amortization

We are required to repay installments on the loans under the term loan facility in quarterly principal amounts equal to 0.25% of their initial total funded principal amount calculated as of the closing date for the first six years and nine months, with the remaining amount payable on the date that is seven years from the date of the closing of the senior secured credit facilities.

Principal amounts outstanding under the revolving credit facility are due and payable in full at maturity, six years from the date of the closing of the senior secured credit facilities.

Guarantee and Security

All obligations under the senior secured credit agreement are unconditionally guaranteed by Education Management Holdings LLC and each existing and future direct and indirect domestic subsidiary of Education Management Holdings LLC other than any (x) subsidiary that owns or operates a school, (y) or any inactive subsidiary that has less than $100,000 of assets and (z) any direct or indirect domestic subsidiary of a foreign subsidiary of Education Management Holdings LLC, referred to, collectively, as the Guarantors.

All obligations under the senior secured credit facilities, and the guarantees of those obligations, are secured by substantially all the following assets of us and each Guarantor, subject to certain exceptions:

• a pledge of 100% of the capital stock of Education Management LLC, 100% of the capital stock of each Guarantor and 66% of the capital stock of each of our foreign subsidiaries that are directly owned by Education Management LLC or one of the Guarantors; and

• a security interest in, and mortgages on, substantially all tangible and intangible assets of Education Management LLC and each Guarantor.

Certain Covenants and Events of Default

The senior secured credit agreement contains a number of covenants that, among other things, restrict, subject to certain exceptions, our ability to:

• incur additional indebtedness;

• create liens on assets;

• engage in mergers or consolidations;

• sell assets;

• pay dividends and distributions or repurchase our capital stock;

• make investments, loans or advances;

• make capital expenditures;

• repay subordinated indebtedness (including the exchange senior subordinated notes);

102

• make certain acquisitions;

• engage in certain transactions with affiliates;

• enter into certain restrictive agreements;

• amend agreements governing our subordinated indebtedness (including the exchange senior subordinated notes) and our constitutive documents;

• change the nature of our business; and

• change the status of Education Management Holdings LLC as a passive holding company.

In addition, the senior secured credit agreement will require us to maintain the following financial covenants:

• a maximum total leverage ratio; and

• a minimum interest coverage ratio.

The senior secured credit agreement contains certain customary affirmative covenants and events of default.

103

THE EXCHANGE OFFERS

Purpose and Effect of the Exchange Offers

Education Management LLC, Education Management Finance Corp. and the guarantors of the notes have entered into registration rights agreements with the initial purchasers of the outstanding notes in which they agreed, under certain circumstances, to use their reasonable best efforts to file a registration statement relating to offers to exchange the outstanding notes for exchange notes and thereafter cause the registration statement to become effective under the Securities Act no later than 270 days following the closing date of the issuances of the outstanding notes. The exchange notes will have terms identical in all material respects to the outstanding notes, except that the exchange notes will not contain terms with respect to transfer restrictions, registration rights and additional interest for failure to observe certain obligations in the applicable registration rights agreement. The outstanding notes were issued on June 1, 2006.

Under the circumstances set forth below, Education Management LLC, Education Management Finance Corp. and the guarantors will use their reasonable best efforts to cause the SEC to declare effective a shelf registration statement with respect to the resale of the outstanding notes within the time periods specified in the registration rights agreements and keep the statement effective for up to two years after the effective date of the shelf registration statement. These circumstances include:

• if any changes in law, SEC rules or regulations or applicable interpretations thereof by the SEC do not permit us to effect the exchange offers as contemplated by the registration rights agreements;

• if the exchange offers are not consummated within 300 days after the date of issuance of the outstanding notes;

• if any initial purchaser so requests with respect to the outstanding notes not eligible to be exchanged for the exchange notes and held by it within 30 days after the consummation of the exchange offers; or

• if any holder that participates in the exchange offers does not receive freely transferable exchange notes in exchange for tendered outstanding notes.

Under each registration rights agreement, if Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. fail to complete the applicable exchange offer (other than in the event we file a shelf registration statement) or the shelf registration statement, if required thereby, is not declared effective, in either case on or prior to 270 days after the issue date (the “target registration date”), the interest rate on the outstanding notes will be increased by (x) 0.25% per annum for the first 90-day period immediately following the target registration date and (y) an additional 0.25% per annum with respect to each subsequent 90-day period, in each case, until the applicable exchange offer is completed or the shelf registration statement, if required, is declared effective by the SEC or the outstanding notes cease to constitute transfer restricted notes, up to a maximum of 1.00% per annum of additional interest. Copies of the registration rights agreements have been filed as exhibits to the registration statement of which this prospectus is a part.

If you wish to exchange your outstanding notes for exchange notes in the exchange offers, you will be required to make the following written representations:

• you are not our affiliate or an affiliate of any guarantor within the meaning of Rule 405 of the Securities Act;

• you have no arrangement or understanding with any person to participate in a distribution (within the meaning of the Securities Act) of the exchange notes in violation of the provisions of the Securities Act;

• you are not engaged in, and do not intend to engage in, a distribution of the exchange notes; and

• you are acquiring the exchange notes in the ordinary course of your business.

104

Each broker-dealer that receives exchange notes for its own account in exchange for outstanding notes, where the broker-dealer acquired the outstanding notes as a result of market-making activities or other trading activities, must acknowledge that it will deliver a prospectus in connection with any resale of such exchange notes. Please see “Plan of Distribution.”

Resale of Exchange Notes

Based on interpretations by the SEC set forth in no-action letters issued to third parties, we believe that you may resell or otherwise transfer exchange notes issued in the exchange offers without complying with the registration and prospectus delivery provisions of the Securities Act, if:

• you are not our affiliate or an affiliate of any guarantor within the meaning of Rule 405 under the Securities Act;

• you do not have an arrangement or understanding with any person to participate in a distribution of the exchange notes;

• you are not engaged in, and do not intend to engage in, a distribution of the exchange notes; and

• you are acquiring the exchange notes in the ordinary course of your business.

If you are our affiliate or an affiliate of any guarantor, or are engaging in, or intend to engage in, or have any arrangement or understanding with any person to participate in, a distribution of the exchange notes, or are not acquiring the exchange notes in the ordinary course of your business:

• You cannot rely on the position of the SEC set forth in Morgan Stanley & Co. Incorporated (available June 5, 1991) and Exxon Capital Holdings Corporation (available May 13, 1988), as interpreted in the SEC’s letter to Shearman & Sterling, dated July 2, 1993, or similar no-action letters; and

• in the absence of an exception from the position stated immediately above, you must comply with the registration and prospectus delivery requirements of the Securities Act in connection with any resale of the exchange notes.

This prospectus may be used for an offer to resell, resale or other transfer of exchange notes only as specifically set forth in this prospectus. With regard to broker-dealers, only broker-dealers that acquired the outstanding notes as a result of market-making activities or other trading activities may participate in the exchange offers. Each broker-dealer that receives exchange notes for its own account in exchange for outstanding notes, where such outstanding notes were acquired by such broker-dealer as a result of market-making activities or other trading activities, must acknowledge that it will deliver a prospectus in connection with any resale of the exchange notes. Please read “Plan of Distribution” for more details regarding the transfer of exchange notes.

Terms of the Exchange Offers

On the terms and subject to the conditions set forth in this prospectus and in the accompanying letters of transmittal, Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. will accept for exchange in the applicable exchange offer any outstanding notes that are validly tendered and not validly withdrawn prior to the applicable expiration date. Outstanding notes may only be tendered in minimum denominations of $2,000 and integral multiples of $1,000 in excess of $2,000. Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. will issue exchange notes in identical principal amount to outstanding notes surrendered in the applicable exchange offer.

The form and terms of the exchange notes will be identical in all material respects to the form and terms of the outstanding notes except the exchange notes will be registered under the Securities Act, will not bear legends restricting their transfer and will not provide for any additional interest upon our failure to fulfill our obligations under the applicable registration rights agreement to complete the exchange offer, or file, and cause to be

105

effective, a shelf registration statement, if required thereby, within the specified time period. The exchange notes will evidence the same debt as the outstanding notes. The exchange senior notes, the exchange senior notes and the exchange senior subordinated notes will be issued under and entitled to the benefits of the same indentures that authorized the issuance of the outstanding senior notes, the outstanding senior notes and the outstanding senior subordinated notes. For a description of the indentures, see “Description of the Notes and Description of the Subordinated Notes.”

The exchange offers are not conditioned upon any minimum aggregate principal amount of outstanding notes being tendered for exchange.

As of the date of this prospectus, $375 million aggregate principal amount of the 8 ³/4% Senior Notes due 2014 are outstanding and $385 million aggregate principal amount of the 10 ¹/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016 are outstanding. This prospectus and the letters of transmittal are being sent to all registered holders of outstanding notes. There will be no fixed record date for determining registered holders of outstanding notes entitled to participate in the exchange offers. Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. intend to conduct the exchange offers in accordance with the provisions of the registration rights agreements, the applicable requirements of the Securities Act and the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”) and the rules and regulations of the SEC. Outstanding notes that are not tendered for exchange in the exchange offers will remain outstanding and continue to accrue interest and will be entitled to the rights and benefits such holders have under the indentures relating to such holders’ series of outstanding notes and the applicable registration rights agreement except we will not have any further obligation to you to provide for the registration of the outstanding notes under the applicable registration rights agreement.

Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. will be deemed to have accepted for exchange properly tendered outstanding notes when it has given oral or written notice of the acceptance to the exchange agent. The exchange agent will act as agent for the tendering holders for the purposes of receiving the exchange notes from us and delivering exchange notes to holders. Subject to the terms of the applicable registration rights agreement, Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. expressly reserves the right to amend or terminate the applicable exchange offer and to refuse to accept the occurrence of any of the conditions specified below under “—Conditions to the Exchange Offers.”

If you tender your outstanding notes in the exchange offers, you will not be required to pay brokerage commissions or fees or, subject to the instructions in the applicable letter of transmittal, transfer taxes with respect to the exchange of outstanding notes. We will pay all charges and expenses, other than certain applicable taxes described below in connection with the exchange offers. It is important that you read “—Fees and Expenses” below for more details regarding fees and expenses incurred in the exchange offers.

Expiration Date; Extensions, Amendments

As used in this prospectus, the term “expiration date” means 12:00 a.m. midnight, New York City time, on             , 2006. However, if we, in our sole discretion, extend the period of time for which the applicable exchange offer is open, the term “expiration date” will mean the latest time and date to which we shall have extended the expiration of such exchange offer.

To extend the period of time during which an exchange offer is open, we will notify the exchange agent of any extension by oral or written notice, followed by notification by press release or other public announcement to the registered holders of the outstanding notes no later than 9:00 a.m., New York City time, on the next business day after the previously scheduled expiration date.

Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. reserve the right, in their sole discretion:

• to delay accepting for exchange any outstanding notes (if we amend or extend the applicable exchange offer);

106

• to extend either exchange offer or to terminate either exchange offer if any of the conditions set forth below under “—Conditions to the Exchange Offers” have not been satisfied, by giving oral or written notice of such delay, extension or termination to the exchange agent; and

• subject to the terms of the applicable registration rights agreement, to amend the terms of either exchange offer in any manner.

Any delay in acceptance, extension, termination or amendment will be followed as promptly as practicable by oral or written notice to the registered holders of the outstanding notes. If Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. amend an exchange offer in a manner that we determine to constitute a material change, it will promptly disclose the amendment in a manner reasonably calculated to inform the holders of applicable outstanding notes of that amendment.

Conditions to the Exchange Offers

Despite any other term of the exchange offers, Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. will not be required to accept for exchange, or to issue exchange notes in exchange for, any outstanding notes and it may terminate or amend any of the exchange offers as provided in this prospectus prior to the expiration date if in its reasonable judgment:

• the exchange offers or the making of any exchange by a holder violates any applicable law or interpretation of the SEC; or

• any action or proceeding has been instituted or threatened in any court or by or before any governmental agency with respect to the exchange offers that, in our judgment, would reasonably be expected to impair our ability to proceed with the exchange offers.

In addition, Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. will not be obligated to accept for exchange the outstanding notes of any holder that has not made to us:

• the representations described under “—Purpose and Effect of the Exchange Offers,” “—Procedures for Tendering” and “Plan of Distribution;” or

• any other representations as may be reasonably necessary under applicable SEC rules, regulations, or interpretations to make available to us an appropriate form for registration of the exchange notes under the Securities Act.

Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. expressly reserve the right at any time or at various times to extend the period of time during which the exchange offers are open. Consequently, Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. may delay acceptance of any outstanding notes by giving oral or written notice of such extension to their holders. Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. will return any outstanding notes that it does not accept for exchange for any reason without expense to their tendering holder promptly after the expiration or termination of the applicable exchange offer.

Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. expressly reserve the right to amend or terminate either exchange offer and to reject for exchange any outstanding notes not previously accepted for exchange, upon the occurrence of any of the conditions of the exchange offers specified above. Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. will give oral or written notice of any extension, amendment, non-acceptance or termination to the holders of the outstanding notes as promptly as practicable. In the case of any extension, such notice will be issued no later than 9:00 a.m., New York City time, on the next business day after the previously scheduled expiration date.

These conditions are for our sole benefit and Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. may assert them regardless of the circumstances that may give rise to them or waive them in

107

whole or in part at any or at various times prior to the expiration date in our sole discretion. If Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. fail at any time to exercise any of the foregoing rights, this failure will not constitute a waiver of such right. Each such right will be deemed an ongoing right that it may assert at any time or at various times prior to the expiration date.

In addition, Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. will not accept for exchange any outstanding notes tendered, and will not issue exchange notes in exchange for any such outstanding notes, if at such time any stop order is threatened or in effect with respect to the registration statement of which this prospectus constitutes a part or the qualification of the indentures under the Trust Indenture Act of 1939 (the “TIA”).

Procedures for Tendering Outstanding Notes

To tender your outstanding notes in the applicable exchange offer, you must comply with either of the following:

• complete, sign and date the letter of transmittal, or a facsimile of the letter of transmittal, have the signature(s) on the letter of transmittal guaranteed if required by the letter of transmittal and mail or deliver such letter of transmittal or facsimile thereof to the exchange agent at the address set forth below under “—Exchange Agent—Notes” prior to the expiration date; or

• comply with DTC’s Automated Tender Offer Program procedures described below.

• In addition, either:

• the exchange agent must receive certificates for outstanding notes along with the applicable letter of transmittal prior to the expiration date;

• the exchange agent must receive a timely confirmation of book-entry transfer of outstanding notes into the exchange agent’s account at DTC according to the procedures for book-entry transfer described below or a properly transmitted agent’s message prior to the expiration date; or

• you must comply with the guaranteed delivery procedures described below.

Your tender, if not withdrawn prior to the expiration date, constitutes an agreement between us and you upon the terms and subject to the conditions described in this prospectus and in the applicable letter of transmittal.

The method of delivery of outstanding notes, letters of transmittal, and all other required documents to the exchange agent is at your election and risk. We recommend that instead of delivery by mail, you use an overnight or hand delivery service, properly insured. In all cases, you should allow sufficient time to assure timely delivery to the exchange agent before the expiration date. You should not send letters of transmittal or certificates representing outstanding notes to us. You may request that your broker, dealer, commercial bank, trust company or nominee effect the above transactions for you.

If you are a beneficial owner whose outstanding notes are registered in the name of a broker, dealer, commercial bank, trust company, or other nominee and you wish to tender your outstanding notes, you should promptly contact the registered holder and instruct the registered holder to tender on your behalf. If you wish to tender the outstanding notes yourself, you must, prior to completing and executing the applicable letter of transmittal and delivering your outstanding notes, either:

• make appropriate arrangements to register ownership of the outstanding notes in your name; or

• obtain a properly completed bond power from the registered holder of outstanding notes.

The transfer of registered ownership may take considerable time and may not be able to be completed prior to the expiration date.

108

Signatures on the applicable letter of transmittal or a notice of withdrawal, as the case may be, must be guaranteed by a member firm of a registered national securities exchange or of the National Association of Securities Dealers, Inc., a commercial bank or trust company having an office or correspondent in the United States or another “eligible guarantor institution” within the meaning of Rule 17A(d)-15 under the Exchange Act unless the outstanding notes surrendered for exchange are tendered:

• by a registered holder of the outstanding notes who has not completed the box entitled “Special Registration Instructions” or “Special Delivery Instructions” on the applicable letter of transmittal; or

• for the account of an eligible guarantor institution.

If the applicable letter of transmittal is signed by a person other than the registered holder of any outstanding notes listed on the outstanding notes, such outstanding notes must be endorsed or accompanied by a properly completed bond power. The bond power must be signed by the registered holder as the registered holder’s name appears on the outstanding notes and an eligible guarantor institution must guarantee the signature on the bond power.

If the applicable letter of transmittal or any certificates representing outstanding notes, or bond powers are signed by trustees, executors, administrators, guardians, attorneys-in-fact, officers of corporations, or others acting in a fiduciary or representative capacity, those persons should also indicate when signing and, unless waived by us, they should also submit evidence satisfactory to us of their authority to so act.

The exchange agent and DTC have confirmed that any financial institution that is a participant in DTC’s system may use DTC’s Automated Tender Offer Program to tender. Participants in the program may, instead of physically completing and signing the applicable letter of transmittal and delivering it to the exchange agent, electronically transmit their acceptance of the exchange by causing DTC to transfer the outstanding notes to the exchange agent in accordance with DTC’s Automated Tender Offer Program procedures for transfer. DTC will then send an agent’s message to the exchange agent. The term “agent’s message” means a message transmitted by DTC, received by the exchange agent and forming part of the book-entry confirmation, which states that:

• DTC has received an express acknowledgment from a participant in its Automated Tender Offer Program that is tendering outstanding notes that are the subject of the book-entry confirmation;

• the participant has received and agrees to be bound by the terms of the applicable letter of transmittal, or in the case of an agent’s message relating to guaranteed delivery, that such participant has received and agrees to be bound by the applicable notice of guaranteed delivery; and

• we may enforce that agreement against such participant.

DTC is referred to herein as a “book-entry transfer facility.”

Acceptance of Exchange Notes

In all cases, Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. will promptly issue exchange notes for outstanding notes that it has accepted for exchange under the applicable exchange offer only after the exchange agent timely receives:

• outstanding notes or a timely book-entry confirmation of such outstanding notes into the exchange agent’s account at the book-entry transfer facility; and

• a properly completed and duly executed letter of transmittal and all other required documents or a properly transmitted agent’s message.

By tendering outstanding notes pursuant to the applicable exchange offer, you will represent to us that, among other things:

• you are not our affiliate or an affiliate of any guarantor within the meaning of Rule 405 under the Securities Act;

109

• you do not have an arrangement or understanding with any person or entity to participate in a distribution of the exchange notes; and

• you are acquiring the exchange notes in the ordinary course of your business.

In addition, each broker-dealer that is to receive exchange notes for its own account in exchange for outstanding notes must represent that such outstanding notes were acquired by that broker-dealer as a result of market-making activities or other trading activities and must acknowledge that it will deliver a prospectus that meets the requirements of the Securities Act in connection with any resale of the exchange notes. The applicable letter of transmittal states that by so acknowledging and by delivering a prospectus, a broker-dealer will not be deemed to admit that it is an “underwriter” within the meaning of the Securities Act. See “Plan of Distribution.”

Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. will interpret the terms and conditions of the exchange offers, including the letters of transmittal and the instructions to the letters of transmittal, and will resolve all questions as to the validity, form, eligibility, including time of receipt, and acceptance of outstanding notes tendered for exchange. Our determinations in this regard will be final and binding on all parties. Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp. reserve the absolute right to reject any and all tenders of any particular outstanding notes not properly tendered or to not accept any particular outstanding notes if the acceptance might, in its or its counsel’s judgment, be unlawful. We also reserve the absolute right to waive any defects or irregularities as to any particular outstanding notes prior to the expiration date.

Unless waived, any defects or irregularities in connection with tenders of outstanding notes for exchange must be cured within such reasonable period of time as we determine. Neither Education Management LLC, Education Management Finance Corp., the exchange agent, nor any other person will be under any duty to give notification of any defect or irregularity with respect to any tender of outstanding notes for exchange, nor will any of them incur any liability for any failure to give notification. Any outstanding notes received by the exchange agent that are not properly tendered and as to which the irregularities have not been cured or waived will be returned by the exchange agent to the tendering holder, unless otherwise provided in the applicable letter of transmittal, promptly after the expiration date.

Book-Entry Delivery Procedures

Promptly after the date of this prospectus, the exchange agent will establish an account with respect to the outstanding notes at DTC and, as the book-entry transfer facility, for purposes of the exchange offers. Any financial institution that is a participant in the book-entry transfer facility’s system may make book-entry delivery of the outstanding notes by causing the book-entry transfer facility to transfer those outstanding notes into the exchange agent’s account at the facility in accordance with the facility’s procedures for such transfer. To be timely, book-entry delivery of outstanding notes requires receipt of a confirmation of a book-entry transfer, a “book-entry confirmation,” prior to the expiration date. In addition, although delivery of outstanding notes may be effected through book-entry transfer into the exchange agent’s account at the book-entry transfer facility, the applicable letter of transmittal or a manually signed facsimile thereof, together with any required signature guarantees and any other required documents, or an “agent’s message,” as defined below, in connection with a book-entry transfer, must, in any case, be delivered or transmitted to and received by the exchange agent at its address set forth on the cover page of the applicable letter of transmittal prior to the expiration date to receive exchange notes for tendered outstanding notes, or the guaranteed delivery procedure described below must be complied with. Tender will not be deemed made until such documents are received by the exchange agent. Delivery of documents to the book-entry transfer facility does not constitute delivery to the exchange agent.

Holders of outstanding notes who are unable to deliver confirmation of the book-entry tender of their outstanding notes into the exchange agent’s account at the book-entry transfer facility or all other documents required by the applicable letter of transmittal to the exchange agent on or prior to the expiration date must tender their outstanding notes according to the guaranteed delivery procedures described below.

110

Guaranteed Delivery Procedures

If you wish to tender your outstanding notes but your outstanding notes are not immediately available or you cannot deliver your outstanding notes, the applicable letter of transmittal or any other required documents to the exchange agent or comply with the procedures under DTC’s Automatic Tender Offer Program in the case of outstanding notes, prior to the expiration date, you may still tender if:

• the tender is made through an eligible guarantor institution;

• prior to the expiration date, the exchange agent receives from such eligible guarantor institution either a properly completed and duly executed notice of guaranteed delivery, by facsimile transmission, mail, or hand delivery or a properly transmitted agent’s message and notice of guaranteed delivery, that (1) sets forth your name and address, the certificate number(s) of such outstanding notes and the principal amount of outstanding notes tendered; (2) states that the tender is being made thereby; and (3) guarantees that, within three New York Stock Exchange trading days after the expiration date, the letter of transmittal, or facsimile thereof, together with the outstanding notes or a book-entry confirmation, and any other documents required by the letter of transmittal, will be deposited by the eligible guarantor institution with the exchange agent; and

• the exchange agent receives the properly completed and executed letter of transmittal or facsimile thereof, as well as certificate(s) representing all tendered outstanding notes in proper form for transfer or a book-entry confirmation of transfer of the outstanding notes into the exchange agent’s account at DTC all other documents required by the letter of transmittal within three New York Stock Exchange trading days after the expiration date.

Upon request, the exchange agent will send to you a notice of guaranteed delivery if you wish to tender your outstanding notes according to the guaranteed delivery procedures.

Withdrawal Rights

Except as otherwise provided in this prospectus, you may withdraw your tender of outstanding notes at any time prior to 12:00 a.m. midnight, New York City time, on the expiration date.

For a withdrawal to be effective:

• the exchange agent must receive a written notice, which may be by telegram, telex, facsimile or letter, of withdrawal at its address set forth below under “—Exchange Agent”; or

• you must comply with the appropriate procedures of DTC’s Automated Tender Offer Program system.

• Any notice of withdrawal must:

• specify the name of the person who tendered the outstanding notes to be withdrawn;

• identify the outstanding notes to be withdrawn, including the certificate numbers and principal amount of the outstanding notes; and

• where certificates for outstanding notes have been transmitted, specify the name in which such outstanding notes were registered, if different from that of the withdrawing holder.

If certificates for outstanding notes have been delivered or otherwise identified to the exchange agent, then, prior to the release of such certificates, you must also submit:

• the serial numbers of the particular certificates to be withdrawn; and

• a signed notice of withdrawal with signatures guaranteed by an eligible institution unless your are an eligible guarantor institution.

111

If outstanding notes have been tendered pursuant to the procedures for book-entry transfer described above, any notice of withdrawal must specify the name and number of the account at the book-entry transfer facility to be credited with the withdrawn outstanding notes and otherwise comply with the procedures of the facility. We will determine all questions as to the validity, form, and eligibility, including time of receipt of notices of withdrawal and our determination will be final and binding on all parties. Any outstanding notes so withdrawn will be deemed not to have been validly tendered for exchange for purposes of the exchange offers. Any outstanding notes that have been tendered for exchange but that are not exchanged for any reason will be returned to their holder, without cost to the holder, or, in the case of book-entry transfer, the outstanding notes will be credited to an account at the book-entry transfer facility, promptly after withdrawal, rejection of tender or termination of the applicable exchange offer. Properly withdrawn outstanding notes may be retendered by following the procedures described under “—Procedures for Tendering Outstanding Notes” above at any time on or prior to the expiration date.

Exchange Agent

The Bank of New York has been appointed as the exchange agent for the exchange offers. The Bank of New York also acts as trustee under the indentures governing the notes. You should direct all executed letters of transmittal and all questions and requests for assistance, requests for additional copies of this prospectus or of the letters of transmittal, and requests for notices of guaranteed delivery to the exchange agent addressed as follows:

By Registered or Certified Mail:	By Facsimile Transmission:	By Overnight Courier or Hand Delivery:
The Bank of New York 101 Barclay Street—7 East New York, NY 10286 Attn:      Telephone: 212-815-5098	212-298-1915 To Confirm by Telephone: 212-815-5098	The Bank of New York 101 Barclay Street—7 East New York, NY 10286 Attn:      Telephone: 212-815-5098

If you deliver the letter of transmittal to an address other than the one set forth above or transmit instructions via facsimile other than the one set forth above, that delivery or those instructions will not be effective.

Fees and Expenses

Each of the registration rights agreements provides that we will bear all expenses in connection with the performance of our obligations relating to the registration of the exchange notes and the conduct of the exchange offers. These expenses include registration and filing fees, accounting and legal fees and printing costs, among others. We will pay the exchange agent reasonable and customary fees for its services and reasonable out-of-pocket expenses. We will also reimburse brokerage houses and other custodians, nominees and fiduciaries for customary mailing and handling expenses incurred by them in forwarding this prospectus and related documents to their clients that are holders of outstanding notes and for handling or tendering for such clients.

We have not retained any dealer-manager in connection with the exchange offers and will not pay any fee or commission to any broker, dealer, nominee or other person, other than the exchange agent, for soliciting tenders of outstanding notes pursuant to the exchange offers.

Accounting Treatment

We will record the exchange notes in our accounting records at the same carrying value as the outstanding notes, which is the aggregate principal amount as reflected in our accounting records on the date of exchanges. Accordingly, we will not recognize any gain or loss for accounting purposes upon the consummation of the exchange offers. We will record the expenses of the exchange offers as incurred.

112

Transfer Taxes

We will pay all transfer taxes, if any, applicable to the exchanges of outstanding notes under the exchange offers. The tendering holder, however, will be required to pay any transfer taxes, whether imposed on the registered holder or any other person, if:

• certificates representing outstanding notes for principal amounts not tendered or accepted for exchange are to be delivered to, or are to be issued in the name of, any person other than the registered holder of outstanding notes tendered;

• tendered outstanding notes are registered in the name of any person other than the person signing the letter of transmittal; or

• a transfer tax is imposed for any reason other than the exchange of outstanding notes under the exchange offers.

If satisfactory evidence of payment of such taxes is not submitted with the letter of transmittal, the amount of such transfer taxes will be billed to that tendering holder.

Holders who tender their outstanding notes for exchange will not be required to pay any transfer taxes. However, holders who instruct us to register exchange notes in the name of, or request that outstanding notes not tendered or not accepted in the exchange offers be returned to, a person other than the registered tendering holder will be required to pay any applicable transfer tax.

Consequences of Failure to Exchange

If you do not exchange your outstanding notes for exchange notes under the exchange offers, your outstanding notes will remain subject to the restrictions on transfer of such outstanding notes:

• as set forth in the legend printed on the outstanding notes as a consequence of the issuance of the outstanding notes pursuant to the exemptions from, or in transactions not subject to, the registration requirements of the Securities Act and applicable state securities laws; and

• as otherwise set forth in the offering memorandum distributed in connection with the private offerings of the outstanding notes.

In general, you may not offer or sell your outstanding notes unless they are registered under the Securities Act or if the offer or sale is exempt from registration under the Securities Act and applicable state securities laws. Except as required by the registration rights agreements, we do not intend to register resales of the outstanding notes under the Securities Act.

Other

Participating in the exchange offers is voluntary, and you should carefully consider whether to accept. You are urged to consult your financial and tax advisors in making your own decision on what action to take.

We may in the future seek to acquire untendered outstanding notes in open market or privately negotiated transactions, through subsequent exchange offers or otherwise. We have no present plans to acquire any outstanding notes that are not tendered in the exchange offers or to file a registration statement to permit resales of any untendered outstanding notes.

113

DESCRIPTION OF NOTES

General

Certain terms used in this description are defined under the subheading “Certain Definitions.” In this description, the term “Company” refers to Education Management LLC and not any of its Affiliates. “EM Finance” and “Co-Issuer” refer only to Education Management Finance Corp. and not any of its Affiliates, and “Issuers” refers to both of them.

The Issuers are jointly and severally liable for all obligations under the Notes. EM Finance is a Wholly-Owned Subsidiary of the Company that was incorporated in Delaware as a special purpose finance subsidiary to facilitate the offering of the outstanding Notes and other debt securities of the Company. The Company believes that some prospective purchasers of the Notes may be restricted in their ability to purchase debt securities of partnerships or LLCs such as the Company unless the securities are jointly issued by a corporation. EM Finance will not have any substantial operations or assets and will not have any revenues. Accordingly, you should not expect the Company to participate in servicing the principal and interest obligations on the Notes.

The Issuers issued $375,000,000 aggregate principal amount of 8 ³/4% senior notes due 2014 (the “Existing Senior Notes”) and $385,000,000 aggregate principal amount of 10 ¹/4% senior subordinated notes due 2016 (the “Existing Senior Subordinated Notes” and together with the Senior Notes, the “Existing Notes”). In the prospectus, we are offering to exchange the Existing Senior Notes for identical principal amounts of exchange senior notes (the “Exchange Senior Notes, and together with the Existing Senior Notes, the “Senior Notes”) and we are offering to exchange the Existing Senior Subordinated Notes for identical principal amounts of exchange senior subordinated notes due 2016 (the “Exchange Senior Subordinated Notes,” and together with the Existing Senior Subordinated Notes, the “Senior Subordinated Notes”). The Existing Senior Notes were, and the Exchange Senior Notes will be, issued under an Indenture dated June 1, 2006 (the “Senior Indenture”) among the Issuers, the Guarantors and The Bank of New York, as trustee (the “Trustee”). The Existing Senior Subordinated Notes were, and the Exchange Senior Subordinated Notes will be, issued under an Indenture dated June 1, 2006 (the “Subordinated Indenture” and together with the Senior Indenture, the “Indentures”) among the Issuers, the Guarantors and the Trustee. The outstanding Existing Notes were issued in a private transaction that was not subject to the registration requirements of the Securities Act. See “Notice to Investors.” The terms of the outstanding Notes include those stated in the Indentures and those made part of the Indenture by reference to the Trust Indenture Act.

The following description is only a summary of the material provisions of the Indentures, does not purport to be complete and is qualified in its entirety by reference to the provisions of those agreements, including the definitions therein of certain terms used below. We urge you to read the Indentures because they, not this description, define your rights as Holders of the Notes. You may request copies of the Indentures at our address set forth under the heading “Prospectus Summary.”

Brief Description of Senior Notes

The Senior Notes are:

• unsecured senior obligations of the Issuers;

• pari passu in right of payment with or senior to all other Indebtedness of the Issuers (including borrowings under the Senior Credit Facilities);

• effectively subordinated to all secured Indebtedness of the Issuers (including borrowings under the Senior Credit Facilities) to the extent of the value of the assets securing such Indebtedness, and to all liabilities of non-guarantor subsidiaries of the Issuers;

• senior in right of payment to any existing and future Subordinated Indebtedness (as defined with respect to the Senior Notes) of the Issuers, including the Senior Subordinated Notes;

114

• initially guaranteed on an unsecured senior basis by all of the Company’s existing and future direct and indirect domestic Restricted Subsidiaries, other than any subsidiary that directly owns or operates a school or has been formed for such purpose and has no material assets; and

• entitled to registration rights pursuant to a Registration Rights Agreement.

Brief Description of Senior Subordinated Notes

The Senior Subordinated Notes are:

• unsecured senior subordinated obligations of the Issuers;

• subordinated in right of payment to all existing and future Senior Indebtedness of the Issuers (including borrowings under the Senior Credit Facilities and the Senior Notes);

• effectively subordinated to all secured Indebtedness of the Issuers (including borrowings under the Senior Credit Facilities), to the extent of the value of the assets securing such Indebtedness, and to all liabilities of non-guarantor subsidiaries of the Issuers;

• senior in right of payment to any future Subordinated Indebtedness (as defined with respect to the Senior Subordinated Notes) of the Issuers;

• initially guaranteed on an unsecured senior subordinated basis by all of the Company’s existing and future direct and indirect domestic Restricted Subsidiaries, other than any subsidiary that owns or operates a school; and

• entitled to registration rights pursuant to a Registration Rights Agreement.

Guarantees

The Guarantors, as primary obligors and not merely as sureties, jointly and severally, irrevocably and unconditionally, guarantee the performance and full and punctual payment when due, whether at maturity, by acceleration or otherwise, of all obligations of the Issuers under each Indenture and series of the Notes, whether for payment of principal of or interest on or Additional Interest in respect of the Notes, expenses, indemnification or otherwise, on the terms set forth in the applicable Indenture by executing such Indenture. The Guarantors will guarantee the Senior Notes on an unsecured senior basis and the Senior Subordinated Notes on an unsecured senior subordinated basis.

All existing Restricted Subsidiaries, other than as detailed below, guarantee the Notes. Under certain circumstances, future Subsidiaries of the Company will also guarantee the Notes. Each of the Guarantees of the Notes is a general unsecured obligation of each Guarantor and will be effectively subordinated to all Secured Indebtedness of each such entity. The Guarantees of the Senior Notes are pari passu in right of payment with or senior to all Indebtedness of each such entity and the Guarantees of the Senior Subordinated Notes are subordinated in right of payment to all existing and future Senior Indebtedness of each such entity. The Notes are structurally subordinated to Indebtedness of Subsidiaries of the Issuers that do not Guarantee the Notes.

Not all of the Company’s existing Subsidiaries Guarantee the Notes. None of the Company’s existing Foreign Subsidiaries, non-Wholly-Owned Subsidiaries or Subsidiaries that directly own or operate a school guarantee the Notes. In the event of a bankruptcy, liquidation or reorganization of any of these non-guarantor Subsidiaries, the non-guarantor Subsidiaries will pay the holders of their debt and their trade creditors before they will be able to distribute any of their assets to the Company. Although the Indentures limit the incurrence of Indebtedness by non-Guarantor Restricted Subsidiaries, the limitation is subject to a number of significant exceptions. Moreover, the Indentures do not impose any limitation on the incurrence by non-Guarantor Restricted Subsidiaries of liabilities that are not considered Indebtedness under the Indentures. For the year ended June 30, 2006, the guarantor subsidiaries accounted for approximately $4.1 million, or 0.3%, of our total revenue,

115

and a loss approximately $5.7 million, or -2.57%, of our total EBITDA, in each case for the year ended June 30, 2006, and approximately $8.8 million, or 0.2%, of our total assets, and approximately $3.3 million, or 0.1%, of our total liabilities, in each case as of June 30, 2006.

The obligations of each Guarantor under its Guarantees are limited as necessary to prevent the Guarantees from constituting a fraudulent conveyance under applicable law.

Any entity that makes a payment under its Guarantee will be entitled upon payment in full of all guaranteed obligations under the applicable Indenture to a contribution from each other Guarantor in an amount equal to such other Guarantor’s pro rata portion of such payment based on the respective net assets of all the Guarantors at the time of such payment determined in accordance with GAAP.

If a Guarantee were rendered voidable, it could be subordinated by a court to all other indebtedness (including guarantees and other contingent liabilities) of the Guarantor, and, depending on the amount of such indebtedness, a Guarantor’s liability on its Guarantee could be reduced to zero. See “Risk Factors—Risks Related to the Notes—Federal and state fraudulent transfer laws may permit a court to void the guarantees, and, if that occurs, you may not receive any payment on the notes.”

A Guarantee by a Guarantor provides by its terms that it shall be automatically and unconditionally released and discharged upon:

(1) (a) any sale, exchange or transfer (by merger or otherwise) of (i) the Capital Stock of such Guarantor (including any sale, exchange or transfer), after which the applicable Guarantor is no longer a Restricted Subsidiary or (ii) all or substantially all the assets of such Guarantor which sale, exchange or transfer is made in compliance with the provisions of the applicable Indenture;

(b) the release or discharge of the guarantee by such Guarantor of the Senior Credit Facilities or the guarantee which resulted in the creation of such Guarantee, except a discharge or release by or as a result of payment under such guarantee;

I the proper designation of such Guarantor as an Unrestricted Subsidiary under the applicable Indenture; or

(d) the Issuers exercising their legal defeasance option or covenant defeasance option as described under “Legal Defeasance and Covenant Defeasance” or the Issuers’ obligations under the applicable Indenture being discharged in accordance with the terms of such Indenture; and

(2) such Guarantor delivering to the Trustee an Officer’s Certificate and an Opinion of Counsel, each stating that all conditions precedent provided for in the applicable Indenture relating to such transaction have been complied with.

Ranking

Senior Notes

The payment of the principal of, premium, if any, and interest on the Senior Notes and the payment of any Guarantee on the Senior Notes are pari passu with or senior to all other Indebtedness of the Issuers or the relevant Guarantor, as the case may be, but are effectively subordinated to all of the Issuers’ and the Guarantors’ existing and future Secured Indebtedness to the extent of the value of the assets securing such Indebtedness. As of March 31, 2006, the Company had $1,185.0 million of consolidated Indebtedness (excluding letters of credit) that would have been pari passu with the Senior Notes (all of which would have been secured Indebtedness, consisting entirely of Secured Indebtedness under the Senior Credit Facilities). Subject to the limits described below, the Issuers may incur additional Secured Indebtedness.

116

Senior Subordinated Notes

The payment of the principal of, premium, if any, and interest on the Senior Subordinated Notes and the payment of any Guarantee thereof are subordinate in right of payment to the prior payment in cash in full of all Senior Indebtedness of the Issuers or the relevant Guarantor, as the case may be, including the obligations of the Issuers and such Guarantor under the Senior Credit Facilities and the Senior Notes.

The Senior Subordinated Notes are subordinated in right of payment to all of the Issuers’ and the Guarantors’ existing and future Senior Indebtedness and effectively subordinated to all of the Issuers’ and the Guarantors’ existing and future Secured Indebtedness to the extent of the value of the assets securing such Indebtedness. See “—Senior Notes” above.

Although the Indentures contain limitations on the amount of additional Indebtedness that the Issuers and the Guarantors may incur, under certain circumstances the amount of such Indebtedness could be substantial and, in any case, such Indebtedness may be Senior Indebtedness. See “Certain Covenants—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock.”

Paying Agent and Registrar for the Notes

The Issuers maintain one or more paying agents for the Notes in the Borough of Manhattan, City of New York. The initial paying agent for the Notes is the Trustee.

The Issuers maintain a registrar with offices in the Borough of Manhattan, City of New York. The initial registrar is the Trustee. The registrar maintains a register reflecting ownership of the Notes outstanding from time to time and makes payments on and facilitate transfer of Notes on behalf of the Issuers.

The Issuers may change the paying agents or the registrars without prior notice to the Holders. The Issuers or any of their Subsidiaries may act as a paying agent or registrar.

Subordination of the Senior Subordinated Notes

Only Indebtedness of the Issuers or Guarantors that is Senior Indebtedness ranks senior to the Senior Subordinated Notes and the Guarantees in accordance with the provisions of the Indenture. The Senior Subordinated Notes and Guarantees in all respects rank pari passu with all other Senior Subordinated Indebtedness of the relevant Issuer and Guarantor, respectively.

Neither Issuer nor any Guarantor is permitted to pay principal of, premium, if any, or interest on the Senior Subordinated Notes (or pay any other Obligations relating to the Senior Subordinated Notes, including Additional Interest, fees, costs, expenses, indemnities and rescission or damage claims) or make any deposit pursuant to the provisions described under “Legal Defeasance and Covenant Defeasance” or “Satisfaction and Discharge” below and may not purchase, redeem or otherwise retire any Senior Subordinated Notes (collectively, “pay the Senior Subordinated Notes”) (except in the form of Permitted Junior Securities) if either of the following occurs (a “Payment Default”):

(1) any Obligation on any Designated Senior Indebtedness of either Issuer, is not paid in full in cash when due (after giving effect to any applicable grace period); or

(2) any other default on Designated Senior Indebtedness of either Issuer, occurs and the maturity of such Designated Senior Indebtedness is accelerated in accordance with its terms;

unless, in either case, the Payment Default has been cured or waived and any such acceleration has been rescinded or such Designated Senior Indebtedness has been paid in full in cash. Regardless of the foregoing, the Issuers are permitted to pay the Senior Subordinated Notes if the Issuers and the Trustee receive written notice approving such payment from the Representatives of all Designated Senior Indebtedness with respect to which the Payment Default has occurred and is continuing.

117

During the continuance of any default (other than a Payment Default) (a “Non-Payment Default”) with respect to any Designated Senior Indebtedness pursuant to which the maturity thereof may be accelerated without further notice (except such notice as may be required to effect such acceleration) or the expiration of any applicable grace periods, the Issuers are not permitted to pay the Senior Subordinated Notes (except in the form of Permitted Junior Securities) for a period (a “Payment Blockage Period”) commencing upon the receipt by the Trustee (with a copy to the Issuers) of written notice (a “Blockage Notice”) of such Non-Payment Default from the Representative of such Designated Senior Indebtedness specifying an election to effect a Payment Blockage Period and ending 179 days thereafter. The Payment Blockage Period will end earlier if such Payment Blockage Period is terminated:

(1) by written notice to the Trustee and the Issuers from the Person or Persons who gave such Blockage Notice;

(2) because the default giving rise to such Blockage Notice is cured, waived or otherwise no longer continuing; or

(3) because such Designated Senior Indebtedness has been discharged or repaid in full in cash.

Notwithstanding the provisions described above, unless the holders of such Designated Senior Indebtedness or the Representative of such Designated Senior Indebtedness have accelerated the maturity of such Designated Senior Indebtedness, the Issuers and related Guarantors are permitted to resume paying the Senior Subordinated Notes after the end of such Payment Blockage Period. The Senior Subordinated Notes shall not be subject to more than one Payment Blockage Period in any consecutive 360-day period irrespective of the number of defaults with respect to Designated Senior Indebtedness during such period; provided that if any Blockage Notice is delivered to the Trustee by or on behalf of the holders of Designated Senior Indebtedness of the Issuers (other than the holders of Indebtedness under the Senior Credit Facilities), a Representative of holders of Indebtedness under the Senior Credit Facilities may give another Blockage Notice within such period. However, in no event may the total number of days during which any Payment Blockage Period or Periods on the Senior Subordinated Notes is in effect exceed 179 days in the aggregate during any consecutive 360-day period, and there must be at least 181 days during any consecutive 360-day period during which no Payment Blockage Period is in effect. Notwithstanding the foregoing, however, no default that existed or was continuing on the date of delivery of any Blockage Notice to the Trustee will be, or be made, the basis for a subsequent Blockage Notice unless such default has been waived for a period of not less than 90 days (it being acknowledged that any subsequent action, or any breach of any financial covenants during the period after the date of delivery of a Blockage Notice, that, in either case, would give rise to a Non-Payment Default pursuant to any provisions under which a Non-Payment Default previously existed or was continuing shall constitute a new Non-Payment Default for this purpose).

In connection with the Senior Subordinated Notes, in the event of any payment or distribution of the assets of either Issuer upon a total or partial liquidation, dissolution, reorganization, insolvency or bankruptcy of or similar proceeding relating to such Issuer or its property:

(1) the holders of Senior Indebtedness of such Issuer will be entitled to receive payment in full in cash of such Senior Indebtedness before the Holders of the Senior Subordinated Notes are entitled to receive any payment;

(2) until the Senior Indebtedness of such Issuer is paid in full in cash, any payment or distribution to which Holders of the Senior Subordinated Notes would be entitled but for the subordination provisions of the Indenture will be made to holders of such Senior Indebtedness as their interests may appear, except that Holders of Senior Subordinated Notes may receive Permitted Junior Securities; and

(3) if a distribution is made to Holders of the Senior Subordinated Notes that, due to the subordination provisions, should not have been made to them, such Holders of the Senior Subordinated Notes are required to hold it in trust for the holders of Senior Indebtedness of such Issuer and pay it over to them as their interests may appear.

118

The subordination and payment blockage provisions described above will not prevent a Default from occurring under the Subordinated Indenture upon the failure of the Issuers to pay interest or principal with respect to the Senior Subordinated Notes when due by their terms. If payment of the Senior Subordinated Notes is accelerated because of an Event of Default, the Issuers must promptly notify the holders of Designated Senior Indebtedness or the Representative of such Designated Senior Indebtedness of the acceleration. So long as there shall remain outstanding any Senior Indebtedness under the Senior Credit Facilities, a Blockage Notice may be given only by the Representative with respect thereto unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the requisite lenders named therein. If any Designated Senior Indebtedness of the Issuers is outstanding, neither the Issuers nor any Guarantor may pay the Senior Subordinated Notes until five Business Days after the Representatives of all the holders of such Designated Senior Indebtedness receive notice of such acceleration and, thereafter, may pay the Senior Subordinated Notes only if the Subordinated Indenture otherwise permits payment at that time.

Each Guarantor’s obligations under its Guarantee of the Senior Subordinated Notes are senior subordinated obligations of that Guarantor. As such, the rights of Holders to receive payment pursuant to such Guarantee will be subordinated in right of payment to the rights of holders of Senior Indebtedness of such Guarantor. The terms of the subordination and payment blockage provisions described above with respect to the Issuers’ obligations under the Senior Subordinated Notes apply equally to the obligations of such Guarantor under its Guarantee.

A Holder by its acceptance of Senior Subordinated Notes agrees to be bound by such provisions and authorizes and expressly directs the Trustee, on its behalf, to take such action as may be necessary or appropriate to effectuate the subordination provided for in the Subordinated Indenture and appoints the Trustee its attorney-in-fact for such purpose.

By reason of the subordination provisions contained in the Subordinated Indenture, in the event of a liquidation or insolvency proceeding, creditors of the Issuers or a Guarantor who are holders of Senior Indebtedness of the Issuers or such Guarantor, as the case may be, may recover more, ratably, than the Holders of the Senior Subordinated Notes, and creditors who are not holders of Senior Indebtedness may recover less, ratably, than holders of Senior Indebtedness and may recover more, ratably, than the Holders of the Senior Subordinated Notes.

The terms of the subordination provisions described above will not apply to payments from money or the proceeds of Government Securities held in trust by the Trustee for the payment of principal of and interest on the Senior Subordinated Notes pursuant to the provisions described under “Legal Defeasance and Covenant Defeasance” or “Satisfaction and Discharge,” if the foregoing subordination provisions were not violated at the time the applicable amounts were deposited in trust pursuant to such provisions.

Transfer and Exchange

A Holder may transfer or exchange Notes in accordance with the Indentures. The registrar and the Trustee may require a Holder to furnish appropriate endorsements and transfer documents in connection with a transfer of Notes. Holders will be required to pay all taxes due on transfer. The Issuers are not required to transfer or exchange any Note selected for redemption. Also, the Issuers are not required to transfer or exchange any Note for a period of 15 days before a selection of Notes to be redeemed.

Principal, Maturity and Interest

Senior Notes

The Issuers issued $375,000,000 of Senior Notes in this offering. The Senior Notes mature on June 1, 2014. Interest on the Senior Notes accrues at the rate of 8 ³/4% per annum and is payable semi-annually in arrears on June 1 and December 1, commencing on December 1, 2006 to the Holders of Senior Notes of record on the immediately preceding May 15 and November 15. Interest on the Senior Notes accrues from the most recent date to which interest has been paid or, if no interest has been paid, from and including the Issue Date. Interest on the Senior Notes is computed on the basis of a 360-day year comprised of twelve 30-day months.

119

Senior Subordinated Notes

The Issuers issued $385,000,000 of Senior Subordinated Notes in this offering. The Senior Subordinated Notes mature on June 1, 2016. Interest on the Senior Subordinated Notes accrues at the rate of 10 ¹/4% per annum and is payable semi-annually in arrears on June 1 and December 1, commencing on December 1, 2006 to the Holders of Senior Subordinated Notes of record on the immediately preceding May 15 and November 15. Interest on the Senior Subordinated Notes accrues from the most recent date to which interest has been paid or, if no interest has been paid, from and including the Issue Date. Interest on the Senior Subordinated Notes is computed on the basis of a 360 day year comprised of twelve 30-day months.

Additional Notes

Subject to compliance with the covenant described below under the caption “Certain Covenants—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock,” the Issuers may issue additional Senior Notes (“Additional Senior Notes”) or additional Senior Subordinated Notes (“Additional Senior Subordinated Notes” and together with the Additional Senior Notes, “Additional Notes”) from time to time after this offering under the Indentures. The Notes issued under either Indenture and any Additional Notes subsequently issued under such Indenture will be part of the same issue of Notes of such series and will be treated as a single class with the Notes of such series for all purposes under the applicable Indenture, including waivers, amendments, redemptions and offers to purchase. Unless the context requires otherwise, references to “Senior Notes,” “Senior Subordinated Notes” and “Notes” for all purposes of the Indentures and this “Description of Notes” include any Additional Notes that are actually issued.

Payment of Principal and Interest

Principal of, premium, if any, and interest on the Notes is payable at the office or agency of the Issuers maintained for such purpose within the City and State of New York or, at the option of the Issuers, payment of interest may be made by check mailed to the Holders of the Notes at their respective addresses set forth in the register of Holders; provided that all payments of principal, premium, if any, and interest with respect to the Notes represented by one or more global notes registered in the name of or held by DTC or its nominee will be made by wire transfer of immediately available funds to the accounts specified by the Holder or Holders thereof. Until otherwise designated by the Issuers, the Issuers’ office or agency in New York is the office of the Trustee maintained for such purpose.

Mandatory Redemption; Offers to Purchase; Open Market Purchases

The Issuers are not required to make any mandatory redemption or sinking fund payments with respect to the Notes. However, under certain circumstances, the Issuers may be required to offer to purchase Notes as described under the caption “Repurchase at the Option of Holders.” We may at any time and from time to time purchase Notes in the open market or otherwise.

Optional Redemption

Senior Notes

General

At any time prior to June 1, 2010 the Issuers may redeem all or a part of the Senior Notes, upon not less than 30 nor more than 60 days’ prior notice mailed by first-class mail to the registered address of each Holder, at a redemption price equal to 100% of the Senior Notes, plus the Applicable Premium as of, and accrued and unpaid interest and Additional Interest, if any, to, the date of redemption (the “Redemption Date”), subject to the rights of Holders of record on the relevant record date to receive interest due on the relevant interest payment date.

On and after June 1, 2010 the Issuers may redeem the Senior Notes, in whole or in part, upon not less than 30 nor more than 60 days’ prior notice mailed by first class mail to the registered address of each Holder, at a

120

redemption price (expressed as a percentage of the principal amount of the Senior Notes to be redeemed) set forth below, plus accrued and unpaid interest and Additional Interest, if any, to the applicable Redemption Date, subject to the right of Holders of record on the relevant record date to receive interest due on the relevant interest payment date, if redeemed during the twelve-month period beginning on June 1 of each of the years indicated below:

Year	Percentage
2010	104.375	%
2011	102.188	%
2012 and thereafter	100.000	%

Upon Certain Equity Offerings

In addition, until June 1, 2009, the Issuers may, at their option, redeem up to 35% of the aggregate principal amount of Senior Notes issued by them at a redemption price equal to 108.75% of the aggregate principal amount thereof, plus accrued and unpaid interest thereon and Additional Interest, if any, to the applicable Redemption Date, subject to the right of Holders of Senior Notes of record on the relevant record date to receive interest due on the relevant interest payment date, with the net cash proceeds of one or more Equity Offerings; provided that at least 50% of the sum of the aggregate principal amount of Senior Notes originally issued under the Senior Indenture and any Additional Senior Notes that are Senior Notes issued under the Senior Indenture after the Issue Date remains outstanding immediately after the occurrence of each such redemption; provided further that each such redemption occurs within 90 days of the date of closing of each such Equity Offering.

Notice of any redemption upon any Equity Offering may be given prior to the redemption thereof, and any such redemption or notice may, at the Issuers’ discretion, be subject to one or more conditions precedent, including, but not limited to, completion of the related Equity Offering.

The Trustee shall select the Senior Notes to be purchased in the manner described under “Repurchase at the Option of Holders—Selection and Notice.”

Senior Subordinated Notes

General

At any time prior to June 1, 2011 the Issuers may redeem all or a part of the Senior Subordinated Notes, upon not less than 30 nor more than 60 days’ prior notice mailed by first-class mail to the registered address of each Holder, at a redemption price equal to 100% of the Senior Subordinated Notes, plus the Applicable Premium as of, and accrued and unpaid interest and Additional Interest, if any, to, the applicable Redemption Date, subject to the rights of Holders of record on the relevant record date to receive interest due on the relevant interest payment date.

On and after June 1, 2011 the Issuers may redeem the Senior Subordinated Notes, in whole or in part, upon not less than 30 nor more than 60 days’ prior notice mailed by first-class mail to the registered address of each Holder, at a redemption price (expressed as a percentage of the principal amount of the Senior Subordinated Notes to be redeemed) set forth below, plus accrued and unpaid interest and Additional Interest, if any, to the applicable Redemption Date, subject to the right of Holders of record on the relevant record date to receive interest due on the relevant interest payment date, if redeemed during the twelve-month period beginning on June 1 of each of the years indicated below:

Year	Percentage
2011	105.125	%
2012	103.417	%
2013	101.708	%
2014 and thereafter	100.000	%

121

Upon Certain Equity Offerings

In addition, until June 1, 2009, the Issuers may, at their option, redeem up to 35% of the aggregate principal amount of Senior Subordinated Notes issued by them at a redemption price equal to 110.25% of the aggregate principal amount thereof, plus accrued and unpaid interest thereon and Additional Interest, if any, to the applicable Redemption Date, subject to the right of Holders of Senior Subordinated Notes of record on the relevant record date to receive interest due on the relevant interest payment date, with the net cash proceeds of one or more Equity Offerings; provided that at least 50% of the sum of the aggregate principal amount of Senior Subordinated Notes originally issued under the Subordinated Indenture and any Additional Senior Subordinated Notes that are Senior Subordinated Notes issued under the Subordinated Indenture after the Issue Date remains outstanding immediately after the occurrence of each such redemption; provided further that each such redemption occurs within 90 days of the date of closing of each such Equity Offering.

Notice of any redemption upon any Equity Offering may be given prior to the redemption thereof, and any such redemption or notice may, at the Issuers’ discretion, be subject to one or more conditions precedent, including, but not limited to, completion of the related Equity Offering.

The Trustee shall select the Senior Subordinated Notes to be purchased in the manner described under “Repurchase at the Option of Holders—Selection and Notice.”

Repurchase at the Option of Holders

Change of Control

Each Indenture provides that if a Change of Control occurs, unless the Issuers have previously or concurrently mailed a redemption notice with respect to all the outstanding Notes issued under such Indenture as described under “Optional Redemption,” the Issuers will make an offer to purchase all of the Notes issued under such Indenture pursuant to the offer described below (the “Change of Control Offer”) at a price in cash (the “Change of Control Payment”) equal to 101% of the aggregate principal amount thereof plus accrued and unpaid interest and Additional Interest, if any, to the date of purchase, subject to the right of Holders of the Notes of record on the relevant record date to receive interest due on the relevant interest payment date. Within 30 days following any Change of Control in the case of the Senior Notes and 60 days in the case of the Senior Subordinated Notes, the Issuers will send notice of such Change of Control Offer by first-class mail, with a copy to the Trustee, to each Holder of Notes to the address of such Holder appearing in the security register with a copy to the Trustee, with the following information:

(1) that a Change of Control Offer is being made pursuant to the covenant entitled “Change of Control,” and that all Notes properly tendered pursuant to such Change of Control Offer will be accepted for payment by the Issuers;

(2) the purchase price and the purchase date, which will be no earlier than 30 days nor later than 60 days from the date such notice is mailed (the “Change of Control Payment Date”);

(3) that any Note not properly tendered will remain outstanding and continue to accrue interest;

(4) that unless the Issuers default in the payment of the Change of Control Payment, all Notes accepted for payment pursuant to the Change of Control Offer will cease to accrue interest on the Change of Control Payment Date;

(5) that Holders electing to have any Notes purchased pursuant to a Change of Control Offer will be required to surrender such Notes, with the form entitled “Option of Holder to Elect Purchase” on the reverse of such Notes completed, to the paying agent specified in the notice at the address specified in the notice prior to the close of business on the third Business Day preceding the Change of Control Payment Date;

122

(6) that Holders will be entitled to withdraw their tendered Notes and their election to require the Issuers to purchase such Notes, provided that the paying agent receives, not later than the close of business on the 30^th day following the date of the Change of Control notice, a telegram, telex, facsimile transmission or letter setting forth the name of the Holder of the Notes, the principal amount of Notes tendered for purchase, and a statement that such Holder is withdrawing its tendered Notes and its election to have such Notes purchased;

(7) that if the Issuers are redeeming less than all of the Notes, the Holders of the remaining Notes will be issued new Notes and such new Notes will be equal in principal amount to the unpurchased portion of the Notes surrendered. The unpurchased portion of the Notes must be equal to $2,000 or an integral multiple of $1,000 in excess thereof; and

(8) the other instructions, as determined by us, consistent with the covenant described hereunder, that a Holder must follow.

The Issuers will comply with the requirements of Rule 14e-1 under the Exchange Act and any other securities laws and regulations thereunder to the extent such laws or regulations are applicable in connection with the repurchase of Notes pursuant to a Change of Control Offer. To the extent that the provisions of any securities laws or regulations conflict with the provisions of the applicable Indenture, the Issuers will comply with the applicable securities laws and regulations and shall not be deemed to have breached their obligations described in the Indenture by virtue thereof.

On the Change of Control Payment Date, the Issuers will, to the extent permitted by law,

(1) accept for payment all Notes issued by them or portions thereof properly tendered pursuant to the Change of Control Offer,

(2) deposit with the paying agent an amount equal to the aggregate Change of Control Payment in respect of all Notes or portions thereof so tendered, and

(3) deliver, or cause to be delivered, to the Trustee for cancellation the Notes so accepted together with an Officer’s Certificate to the Trustee stating that such Notes or portions thereof have been tendered to and purchased by the Issuers.

The Senior Credit Facilities and Senior Notes limit, and future credit agreements or other agreements relating to Senior Indebtedness to which the Issuers become a party may prohibit or limit the Issuers from purchasing any Senior Subordinated Notes as a result of a Change of Control. In the event a Change of Control occurs at a time when the Issuers are prohibited from purchasing the Senior Subordinated Notes, the Issuers could seek the consent of their lenders and the holders of the Senior Notes to permit the purchase of the Senior Subordinated Notes or could attempt to refinance the borrowings that contain such prohibition. If the Issuers do not obtain such consent or repay such borrowings, the Issuers will remain prohibited from purchasing the Senior Subordinated Notes. In such case, the Issuers’ failure to purchase tendered Senior Subordinated Notes would constitute an Event of Default under the Subordinated Indenture. If, as a result thereof, a default occurs with respect to any Senior Indebtedness, the subordination provisions in the Subordinated Indenture would restrict payments to the Holders of Senior Subordinated Notes under certain circumstances. The Senior Credit Facilities will provide that certain change of control events with respect to the Issuers would constitute a default thereunder. If we experience a change of control that triggers a default under our Senior Credit Facilities, we could seek a waiver of such default or seek to refinance our Senior Credit Facilities. In the event we do not obtain such a waiver or refinance the Senior Credit Facilities, such default could result in amounts outstanding under our Senior Credit Facilities being declared due and payable.

Our ability to pay cash to the Holders of Notes following the occurrence of a Change of Control may be limited by our then-existing financial resources. Therefore, sufficient funds may not be available when necessary to make any required repurchases.

123

The Change of Control purchase feature of the Notes may in certain circumstances make more difficult or discourage a sale or takeover of us and, thus, the removal of incumbent management. The Change of Control purchase feature is a result of negotiations between the Initial Purchasers and the Issuers. We have no present intention to engage in a transaction involving a Change of Control, although it is possible that we could decide to do so in the future. Subject to the limitations discussed below, we could, in the future, enter into certain transactions, including acquisitions, refinancings or other recapitalizations, that would not constitute a Change of Control under the Indentures, but that could increase the amount of indebtedness outstanding at such time or otherwise affect our capital structure or credit ratings. Restrictions on our ability to incur additional Indebtedness are contained in the covenant described under “Certain Covenants—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock.” Such restrictions in each of the Indentures can be waived only with the consent of the Holders of a majority in principal amount of then outstanding Notes issued under such Indenture. Except for the limitations contained in such covenants, however, the Indentures does not contain any covenants or provisions that may afford Holders of the Notes protection in the event of a highly leveraged transaction.

We will not be required to make a Change of Control Offer following a Change of Control if a third party makes the Change of Control Offer in the manner, at the times and otherwise in compliance with the requirements set forth in the Indentures applicable to a Change of Control Offer made by the Issuers and purchases all Notes validly tendered and not withdrawn under such Change of Control Offer. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein, a Change of Control Offer may be made in advance of a Change of Control, conditional upon such Change of Control, if a definitive agreement is in place for the Change of Control at the time of making of the Change of Control Offer.

The definition of “Change of Control” includes a disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company to any Person. Although there is a limited body of case law interpreting the phrase “substantially all,” there is no precise established definition of the phrase under applicable law. Accordingly, in certain circumstances there may be a degree of uncertainty as to whether a particular transaction would involve a disposition of “all or substantially all” of the assets of the Company. As a result, it may be unclear as to whether a Change of Control has occurred and whether a Holder of Notes may require the Issuers to make an offer to repurchase the Notes as described above.

The provisions under each of the Indentures relative to the Issuers’ obligation to make an offer to repurchase the Notes as a result of a Change of Control may be waived or modified with the written consent of the Holders of a majority in principal amount of the Notes issued under such Indenture.

Asset Sales

Each Indenture provides that the Company will not, and will not permit any of its Restricted Subsidiaries to consummate an Asset Sale, unless:

(1) the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary, as the case may be, receives consideration at the time of such Asset Sale at least equal to the fair market value (as determined in good faith by the Company) of the assets sold or otherwise disposed of; and

(2) except in the case of a Permitted Asset Swap, at least 75% of the consideration therefor received by the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary, as the case may be, is in the form of cash or Cash Equivalents; provided, however, that, for purposes of this provision and for no other purpose, each of the following shall be deemed to be cash:

(a) any liabilities (as shown on the Company’s or such Restricted Subsidiary’s most recent balance sheet or in the footnotes thereto) of the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary, other than liabilities that are by their terms subordinated to the Notes issued under such Indenture or, in the case of liabilities of a Guarantor, the Guarantee of such Guarantor, that are assumed by the transferee of any such assets and for which the Company and all of its Restricted Subsidiaries have been validly released by all creditors in writing,

124

(b) any securities received by the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary from such transferee that are converted by the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary into cash (to the extent of the cash received) within 180 days following the closing of such Asset Sale, and

(c) any Designated Non-cash Consideration received by the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary in such Asset Sale having an aggregate fair market value, taken together with all other Designated Non-cash Consideration received pursuant to this clause I that is at that time outstanding, not to exceed 3.0% of Total Assets at the time of the receipt of such Designated Non-cash Consideration, with the fair market value of each item of Designated Non-cash Consideration being measured at the time received and without giving effect to subsequent changes in value.

Within 450 days after the receipt of any Net Proceeds of any Asset Sale, the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary, at its option, may apply the Net Proceeds from such Asset Sale,

(1) to permanently reduce:

(a) in the case of the Senior Indenture, any Secured Indebtedness, and in the case of the Subordinated Indenture, Senior Indebtedness (and in each case to correspondingly reduce commitments with respect thereto);

(b) Obligations under Indebtedness ranking pari passu with such Notes (and to correspondingly reduce commitments with respect thereto) or reduce Obligations under such Notes as provided under “Optional Redemption,” through open-market purchases (to the extent such purchases are at or above 100% of the principal amount thereof) or by making an Asset Sale Offer (in accordance with the procedures set forth below)); provided that in the case of a reduction of Obligations other than under the Notes the Company shall use commercially reasonable efforts to equally and ratably reduce Obligations under such Notes as provided under “Optional Redemption,” through open market purchases (to the extent such purchases are at or above 100% of the principal amount thereof) or by making an offer (in accordance with the procedures set forth below for an Asset Sale Offer) to all Holders of Senior Subordinated Notes to purchase their Senior Subordinated Notes at 100% of the principal amount thereof, plus the amount of accrued but unpaid interest, if any, on the amount of Senior Subordinated Notes that would otherwise be prepaid, or

(c) Indebtedness of a Restricted Subsidiary that is not the Co-Issuer or a Guarantor, other than Indebtedness owed to the Company or another Restricted Subsidiary,

(2) to make (a) an Investment in any one or more businesses, provided that such Investment in any business is in the form of the acquisition of Capital Stock and results in the Company or another of its Restricted Subsidiaries, as the case may be, owning an amount of the Capital Stock of such business such that it constitutes a Restricted Subsidiary, (b) capital expenditures or (c) acquisitions of other assets, in each of (a), (b) and (c), used or useful in a Similar Business, or

(3) to make an investment in (a) any one or more businesses, provided that such Investment in any business is in the form of the acquisition of Capital Stock and results in the Company or another of its Restricted Subsidiaries, as the case may be, owning an amount of the Capital Stock of such business such that it constitutes a Restricted Subsidiary, (b) properties or (c) acquisitions of other assets that, in each of (a), (b) and (c), replace the businesses, properties and/or assets that are the subject of such Asset Sale;

provided that, in the case of clauses (2) and (3) above, a binding commitment shall be treated as a permitted application of the Net Proceeds from the date of such commitment so long as the Company, or such other Restricted Subsidiary enters into such commitment with the good faith expectation that such Net Proceeds will be applied to satisfy such commitment within 180 days of such commitment (an “Acceptable Commitment”); provided further that if any Acceptable Commitment is later cancelled or terminated for any reason before such Net Proceeds are applied, then such Net Proceeds shall constitute Excess Proceeds.

Any Net Proceeds from the Asset Sale that are not invested or applied as provided and within the time period set forth in the first sentence of the preceding paragraph will be deemed to constitute “Excess Proceeds.”

125

When the aggregate amount of Excess Proceeds exceeds $25.0 million, the Issuers shall make an offer to all Holders of the Notes issued under such Indenture and, if required by the terms of any Indebtedness that is pari passu with such Notes (“Pari Passu Indebtedness”), to the holders of such Pari Passu Indebtedness (an “Asset Sale Offer”), to purchase the maximum aggregate principal amount of the Notes of such series and such Pari Passu Indebtedness that is an integral multiple of $1,000 (but in minimum amounts of $2,000) that may be purchased out of the Excess Proceeds at an offer price in cash in an amount equal to 100% of the principal amount thereof, plus accrued and unpaid interest and Additional Interest, if any, to the date fixed for the closing of such offer, in accordance with the procedures set forth in the applicable Indenture. The Issuers will commence an Asset Sale Offer with respect to Excess Proceeds within ten Business Days after the date that Excess Proceeds exceed $25.0 million by mailing the notice required pursuant to the terms of the applicable Indenture, with a copy to the Trustee.

Each Indenture provides that, to the extent that the aggregate amount of Notes and such Pari Passu Indebtedness tendered pursuant to an Asset Sale Offer is less than the Excess Proceeds, the Company may use any remaining Excess Proceeds for general corporate purposes, subject to other covenants contained in such Indenture. If the aggregate principal amount of Notes issued under an Indenture or the Pari Passu Indebtedness surrendered by such holders thereof exceeds the amount of Excess Proceeds, the Trustee shall select the Notes and such Pari Passu Indebtedness to be purchased on a pro rata basis based on the accreted value or principal amount of the Notes or such Pari Passu Indebtedness tendered. Upon completion of any such Asset Sale Offer, the amount of Excess Proceeds under the applicable Indenture shall be reset at zero. Additionally, the Issuers, at their option, may make an Asset Sale Offer using proceeds from any Asset Sale at any time after consummation of such Asset Sale. Upon consummation of such Asset Sale Offer, any Net Proceeds not required to be used to purchase Senior Notes shall not be deemed Excess Proceeds.

Pending the final application of any Net Proceeds pursuant to this covenant, the holder of such Net Proceeds may apply such Net Proceeds temporarily to reduce Indebtedness outstanding under a revolving credit facility or otherwise invest such Net Proceeds in any manner not prohibited by the Indentures.

The Issuers will comply with the requirements of Rule 14e-1 under the Exchange Act and any other securities laws and regulations thereunder to the extent such laws or regulations are applicable in connection with the repurchase of the Notes pursuant to an Asset Sale Offer. To the extent that the provisions of any securities laws or regulations conflict with the provisions of the Indentures, the Issuers will comply with the applicable securities laws and regulations and shall not be deemed to have breached its obligations described in the Indentures by virtue thereof.

The Senior Credit Facilities and Senior Notes limit, and future credit agreements or other agreements relating to Senior Indebtedness to which the Issuers become a party may prohibit or limit, the Issuers from purchasing any Senior Subordinated Notes pursuant to this Asset Sales covenant. In the event the Issuers are prohibited from purchasing the Senior Subordinated Notes, the Issuers could seek the consent of their lenders and the holders of the Senior Notes to the purchase of the Senior Subordinated Notes or could attempt to refinance the borrowings that contain such prohibition. If the Issuers do not obtain such consent or repay such borrowings, they will remain prohibited from purchasing the Senior Subordinated Notes. In such case, the Issuers’ failure to purchase tendered Senior Subordinated Notes would constitute an Event of Default under the Subordinated Indenture. If, as a result thereof, a default occurs with respect to any Senior Indebtedness, the subordination provisions in the Subordinated Indenture would restrict payments to the Holders of the Senior Subordinated Notes under certain circumstances.

Selection and Notice

If the Issuers are redeeming less than all of the Notes issued by them under either Indenture at any time, the Trustee will select the Notes to be redeemed (a) if the Notes are listed on any national securities exchange, in compliance with the requirements of the principal national securities exchange on which the Notes are listed or (b) on a pro rata basis to the extent practicable, by lot or by such other method as the Trustee shall deem fair and appropriate.

126

Notices of purchase or redemption shall be mailed by first-class mail, postage prepaid, at least 30 but not more than 60 days before the purchase or redemption date to each Holder of Notes under the applicable Indenture at such Holder’s registered address, except that redemption notices may be mailed more than 60 days prior to a redemption date if the notice is issued in connection with a defeasance of the Notes or a satisfaction and discharge of the Indentures. If any Note is to be purchased or redeemed in part only, any notice of purchase or redemption that relates to such Note shall state the portion of the principal amount thereof that has been or is to be purchased or redeemed.

The Issuers will issue a new Note of the same series in a principal amount equal to the unredeemed portion of the original Note in the name of the Holder upon cancellation of the original Note. Notes called for redemption become due on the date fixed for redemption. On and after the redemption date, interest ceases to accrue on Notes or portions of them called for redemption.

Certain Covenants

Set forth below are summaries of certain covenants contained in the Indentures. During any period of time that: (i) the Notes issued under the applicable Indenture have Investment Grade Ratings from both Rating Agencies and (ii) no Default has occurred and is continuing under such Indenture (the occurrence of the events described in the foregoing clauses (i) and (ii) being collectively referred to as a “Covenant Suspension Event”), the Company and the Restricted Subsidiaries will not be subject to the following covenants:

(1) “Repurchase at the Option of Holders—Asset Sales”;

(2) “—Limitation on Restricted Payments”;

(3) “—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock”;

(4) clause (4) of the first paragraph of “—Merger, Consolidation or Sale of All or Substantially All Assets— The Company”;

(5) “—Transactions with Affiliates”;

(6) “—Dividend and Other Payment Restrictions Affecting Restricted Subsidiaries”;

(7) “—Limitation on Guarantees of Indebtedness by Restricted Subsidiaries”;

(8) “—Limitations on Layering”; and

(9) “Repurchase at the Option of Holders—Change of Control.”

In the event that the Company and the Restricted Subsidiaries are not subject to the Suspended Covenants under such Indenture for any period of time as a result of the foregoing, and on any subsequent date (the “Reversion Date”) one or both of the Rating Agencies withdraw their Investment Grade Rating or downgrade the rating assigned to the Senior Subordinated Notes below an Investment Grade Rating, then the Company and the Restricted Subsidiaries will thereafter again be subject to the Suspended Covenants under such Indenture with respect to future events. The period of time between the Suspension Date and the Reversion Date is referred to in this description as the “Suspension Period.” The Guarantees of the Guarantors will be suspended during the Suspension Period. Additionally, upon the occurrence of a Covenant Suspension Event, the amount of Excess Proceeds from Net Proceeds shall be reset at zero.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event of any such reinstatement, no action taken or omitted to be taken by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries prior to such reinstatement will give rise to a Default

127

or Event of Default under the Indentures with respect to Notes of the affected series; provided that (1) with respect to Restricted Payments made after any such reinstatement, the amount of Restricted Payments made will be calculated as though the covenant described above under the caption “—Limitation on Restricted Payments” had been in effect prior to, but not during the Suspension Period provided that any Subsidiaries designated as Unrestricted Subsidiaries during the Suspension Period shall automatically become Restricted Subsidiaries on the Reversion Date (subject to the Company’s right to subsequently designate them as Unrestricted in compliance with the covenants set out below) and (2) all Indebtedness incurred, or Disqualified Stock issued, during the Suspension Period will be classified to have been incurred or issued pursuant to clause (3) of the second paragraph of “—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock.”

There can be no assurance that the Notes will ever achieve or maintain Investment Grade Ratings.

Limitation on Restricted Payments

The Company will not, and will not permit any of its Restricted Subsidiaries to, directly or indirectly:

(1) declare or pay any dividend or make any payment or distribution on account of the Company’s or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries’ Equity Interests, including any dividend or distribution payable in connection with any merger or consolidation, other than:

(a) dividends or distributions by the Company payable solely in Equity Interests (other than Disqualified Stock) of the Company; or

(b) dividends or distributions by a Restricted Subsidiary so long as, in the case of any dividend or distribution payable on or in respect of any class or series of securities issued by a Restricted Subsidiary other than a Wholly-Owned Subsidiary, a majority of such class is owned by the Company or another Restricted Subsidiary and the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary receives at least its pro rata share of such dividend or distribution in accordance with its Equity Interests in such class or series of securities;

(2) purchase, redeem, defease or otherwise acquire or retire for value any Equity Interests of the Company or any direct or indirect parent of the Company, including in connection with any merger or consolidation;

(3) make any principal payment on, or redeem, repurchase, defease or otherwise acquire or retire for value, in each case, prior to any scheduled repayment, sinking fund payment or maturity, any Subordinated Indebtedness, other than:

(a) Indebtedness permitted under clauses (7) and (8) of the covenant described under “—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock”; or

(b) the purchase, repurchase or other acquisition of Subordinated Indebtedness purchased in anticipation of satisfying a sinking fund obligation, principal installment or final maturity, in each case due within one year of the date of purchase, repurchase or acquisition; or

(4) make any Restricted Investment

(all such payments and other actions set forth in clauses (1) through (4) above being collectively referred to as “Restricted Payments”), unless, at the time of such Restricted Payment:

(1) no Default shall have occurred and be continuing or would occur as a consequence thereof;

(2) immediately after giving effect to such transaction on a pro forma basis, the Company could incur $1.00 of additional Indebtedness under the provisions of the first paragraph of the covenant described under “—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock”; and

(3) such Restricted Payment, together with the aggregate amount of all other Restricted Payments made by the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries after the Issue Date (including Restricted Payments permitted by

128

clauses (1), (2) (with respect to the payment of dividends pursuant to clause (b)), (5), (6), (9) and (14) (to the extent not deducted in calculating Consolidated Net Income) of the next succeeding paragraph, but excluding all other Restricted Payments permitted by the next succeeding paragraph), is less than the sum of (without duplication)

(a) 50% of the Consolidated Net Income of the Company for the period (taken as one accounting period) beginning April 1, 2006, to the end of the Company’s most recently ended fiscal quarter for which internal financial statements are available at the time of such Restricted Payment, or, in the case such Consolidated Net Income for such period is a deficit, minus 100% of such deficit; plus

(b) 100% of the aggregate net cash proceeds and the fair market value, as determined in good faith by the Company, of marketable securities or other property received by the Company since immediately after the Issue Date (other than net cash proceeds to the extent such net cash proceeds have been used to incur Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock pursuant to clause (12)(a) of the second paragraph of “—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock”) from the issue or sale of:

(i) (A) Equity Interests of the Company, including Treasury Capital Stock (as defined below), but excluding cash proceeds and the fair market value, as determined in good faith by the Company, of marketable securities or other property received from the sale of:

(x) Equity Interests to members of management, directors or consultants of the Company, any direct or indirect parent company of the Company and the Company’ Subsidiaries after the Issue Date to the extent such amounts have been applied to Restricted Payments made in accordance with clause (4) of the next succeeding paragraph; and

(y) Designated Preferred Stock; and

(B) to the extent such net cash proceeds are actually contributed to the Company as equity (other than Disqualified Stock), Equity Interests of any direct or indirect parent company of the Company (excluding contributions of the proceeds from the sale of Designated Preferred Stock of such parent company or contributions to the extent such amounts have been applied to Restricted Payments made in accordance with clause (4) of the next succeeding paragraph); or

(ii) debt securities of the Company that have been converted into or exchanged for such Equity Interests of the Company;

provided, however, that this clause (b) shall not include the proceeds from (W) Refunding Capital Stock (as defined below), (X) Equity Interests or convertible debt securities of the Company sold to a Subsidiary, as the case may be, (Y) Disqualified Stock or debt securities that have been converted into Disqualified Stock or (Z) Excluded Contributions; plus

(c) 100% of the aggregate amount of cash and the fair market value, as determined in good faith by the Company, of marketable securities or other property contributed to the capital of the Company following the Issue Date (other than net cash proceeds (i) to the extent such net cash proceeds have been used to incur Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock pursuant to clause (12)(a) of the second paragraph of “—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock”), (ii) contributed by a Subsidiary or (iii) constituting an Excluded Contribution; plus

(d) 100% of the aggregate amount received (which amount shall not increase Consolidated Net Income) in cash and the fair market value, as determined in good faith by the Company, of marketable securities or other property received by means of (i) the sale or other disposition (other than to the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary) of Restricted Investments made by the Company or its Restricted Subsidiaries and repurchases and redemptions of such Restricted Investments from the Company or its Restricted Subsidiaries and repayments of loans or advances, which constitute Restricted Investments by the Company or its Restricted Subsidiaries, in each case after the Issue Date or, without duplication, (ii) the sale (other than to the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary) of the stock of an Unrestricted Subsidiary or a distribution

129

from an Unrestricted Subsidiary (other than in each case to the extent the Investment in such Unrestricted Subsidiary was made by the Issuer or a Restricted Subsidiary pursuant to clause (7) of the next succeeding paragraph or to the extent such Investment constituted a Permitted Investment) or a dividend from an Unrestricted Subsidiary after the Issue Date; plus

(e) in the case of the redesignation of an Unrestricted Subsidiary as a Restricted Subsidiary after the Issue Date, the fair market value of the Investment in such Unrestricted Subsidiary, as determined by the Company in good faith or if, in the case of an Unrestricted Subsidiary, such fair market value may exceed $40.0 million, in writing by an Independent Financial Advisor, at the time of the redesignation of such Unrestricted Subsidiary as a Restricted Subsidiary, except to the extent the Investment in such Unrestricted Subsidiary was made by the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary pursuant to clause (7) of the next succeeding paragraph or to the extent such Investment constituted a Permitted Investment.

The foregoing provisions will not prohibit:

(1) the payment of any dividend within 60 days after the date of declaration thereof, if at the date of declaration such payment would have complied with the provisions of the applicable Indenture;

(2) (a) the redemption, repurchase, retirement or other acquisition of any Equity Interests (“Treasury Capital Stock”) or Subordinated Indebtedness of the Issuers or any Equity Interests of any direct or indirect parent company of the Company, in exchange for, or out of the proceeds of the substantially concurrent sale (other than to a Restricted Subsidiary) of, Equity Interests of the Company or any direct or indirect parent company of the Company to the extent contributed to the Company as common equity (in each case, other than any Disqualified Stock) (“Refunding Capital Stock”) and (b) if immediately prior to the retirement of Treasury Capital Stock, the declaration and payment of dividends thereon was permitted under clause (6) of this paragraph, the declaration and payment of dividends on the Refunding Capital Stock (other than Refunding Capital Stock the proceeds of which were used to redeem, repurchase, retire or otherwise acquire any Equity Interests of any direct or indirect parent company of the Company) in an aggregate amount per year no greater than the aggregate amount of dividends per annum that were declarable and payable on such Treasury Capital Stock immediately prior to such retirement;

(3) the redemption, repurchase or other acquisition or retirement of Subordinated Indebtedness of the Issuers or a Guarantor made in exchange for, or out of the proceeds of the substantially concurrent sale of, new Indebtedness of the Issuers or a Guarantor, as the case may be, which is incurred in compliance with “—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock” so long as:

(a) the principal amount or accreted value of such new Indebtedness does not exceed the principal amount of (or accreted value, if applicable), plus any accrued and unpaid interest on, the Subordinated Indebtedness being so redeemed, repurchased, acquired or retired for value, plus the amount of any reasonable premium to be paid (including reasonable tender premiums) and any reasonable fees and expenses incurred in connection with the issuance of such new Indebtedness;

(b) such new Indebtedness is subordinated to the Notes or the applicable Guarantee issued under such Indenture at least to the same extent as such Subordinated Indebtedness so purchased, exchanged, redeemed, repurchased, acquired or retired for value;

(c) such new Indebtedness has a final scheduled maturity date equal to or later than the final scheduled maturity date of the Subordinated Indebtedness being so redeemed, repurchased, acquired or retired; and

(d) such new Indebtedness has a Weighted Average Life to Maturity equal to or greater than the remaining Weighted Average Life to Maturity of the Subordinated Indebtedness being so redeemed, repurchased, acquired or retired;

(4) a Restricted Payment to pay for the repurchase, retirement or other acquisition or retirement for value of Equity Interests (other than Disqualified Stock) of the Company or any of its direct or indirect parent companies

130

held by any future, present or former employee, director or consultant of the Company, any of its Subsidiaries or any of its direct or indirect parent companies pursuant to any management equity plan or stock option plan or any other management or employee benefit plan or agreement; provided, however, that the aggregate Restricted Payments made under this clause (4) do not exceed in any calendar year $15.0 million (with unused amounts in any calendar year being carried over to succeeding calendar years subject to a maximum (without giving effect to the following proviso) of $30.0 million in any calendar year); provided further that such amount in any calendar year may be increased by an amount not to exceed:

(a) the cash proceeds from the sale of Equity Interests (other than Disqualified Stock) of the Company and, to the extent contributed to the Company as equity (other than Disqualified Stock), Equity Interests of any of the Company’s direct or indirect parent companies, in each case to members of management, directors or consultants of the Company, any of its Subsidiaries or any of its direct or indirect parent companies that occurs after the Issue Date, to the extent the cash proceeds from the sale of such Equity Interests have not otherwise been applied to the payment of Restricted Payments; plus

(b) the cash proceeds of key man life insurance policies received by the Company or its Restricted Subsidiaries after the Issue Date; less

(c) the amount of any Restricted Payments previously made with the cash proceeds described in clauses (a) and (b) of this clause (4);

and provided further that cancellation of Indebtedness owing to the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries from members of management of the Company, any of the Company’s direct or indirect parent companies or any of the Company’s Restricted Subsidiaries in connection with a repurchase of Equity Interests of the Company or any of its direct or indirect parent companies will not be deemed to constitute a Restricted Payment for purposes of this covenant or any other provision of the Indenture;

(5) the declaration and payment of dividends to holders of any class or series of Disqualified Stock of the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries issued in accordance with the covenant described under “—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock” to the extent such dividends are included in the definition of “Fixed Charges”;

(6) (a) the declaration and payment of dividends to holders of any class or series of Designated Preferred Stock (other than Disqualified Stock) issued by the Company after the Issue Date;

(b) the declaration and payment of dividends to a direct or indirect parent company of the Company, the proceeds of which will be used to fund the payment of dividends to holders of any class or series of Designated Preferred Stock (other than Disqualified Stock) of such parent corporation issued after the Issue Date, provided that the amount of dividends paid pursuant to this clause (b) shall not exceed the aggregate amount of cash actually contributed to the Company from the sale of such Designated Preferred Stock; or

(c) the declaration and payment of dividends on Refunding Capital Stock that is Preferred Stock in excess of the dividends declarable and payable thereon pursuant to clause (2) of this paragraph;

provided, however, in the case of each of (a) and (c) of this clause (6), that for the most recently ended four full fiscal quarters for which internal financial statements are available immediately preceding the date of issuance of such Designated Preferred Stock, after giving effect to such issuance or declaration on a pro forma basis, the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries on a consolidated basis would have had a Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio of at least 2.00 to 1.00;

(7) Investments in Unrestricted Subsidiaries having an aggregate fair market value, taken together with all other Investments made pursuant to this clause (7) that are at the time outstanding, without giving effect to the sale of an Unrestricted Subsidiary to the extent the proceeds of such sale do not consist of cash or marketable securities, not to exceed 2.0% of Total Assets at the time of such Investment (with the fair market value of each Investment being measured at the time made and without giving effect to subsequent changes in value);

131

(8) repurchases of Equity Interests deemed to occur upon exercise of stock options or warrants if such Equity Interests represent a portion of the exercise price of such options or warrants;

(9) the declaration and payment of dividends on the Company’s common stock (or the payment of dividends to any direct or indirect parent entity to fund a payment of dividends on such entity’s common stock), following the first public offering of the Company’s common stock or the common stock of any of its direct or indirect parent companies after the Issue Date, of up to 6% per annum of the net cash proceeds received by or contributed to the Company in or from any such public offering, other than public offerings with respect to the Company’s common stock registered on Form S-8 and other than any public sale constituting an Excluded Contribution;

(10) Restricted Payments that are made with Excluded Contributions;

(11) other Restricted Payments in an aggregate amount taken together with all other Restricted Payments made pursuant to this clause (10) not to exceed the greater of (x) $60.0 million or (y) 1.5% of Total Assets at the time made;

(12) any Restricted Payment made as part of the Transactions and the fees and expenses related thereto or owed to Affiliates (including dividends to any direct or indirect parent of the Company to permit payment by such parent of such costs), in each case to the extent permitted by (or, in the case of a dividend to fund such payment, to the extent such payment, if made by the Company, would be permitted by) the covenant described under “—Transactions with Affiliates”;

(13) the repurchase, redemption or other acquisition or retirement for value of any Subordinated Indebtedness in accordance with the provisions similar to those described under the captions “Repurchase at the Option of Holders—Change of Control” and “Repurchase at the Option of Holders—Asset Sales”; provided that all Notes issued under the Indenture governing such Notes that are tendered by Holders in connection with a Change of Control Offer or Asset Sale Offer, as applicable, have been repurchased, redeemed or acquired for value;

(14) the declaration and payment of dividends by the Company to, or the making of loans to, any direct or indirect parent in amounts required for any direct or indirect parent companies to pay, in each case without duplication,

(a) franchise taxes and other fees, taxes and expenses required to maintain their corporate existence;

(b) federal, state and local income taxes, to the extent such income taxes are attributable to the income of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries and, to the extent of the amount actually received from its Unrestricted Subsidiaries, in amounts required to pay such taxes to the extent attributable to the income of such Unrestricted Subsidiaries; provided that in each case the amount of such payments in any fiscal year does not exceed the amount that the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries would be required to pay in respect of federal, state and local taxes for such fiscal year were the Company, its Restricted Subsidiaries and its Unrestricted Subsidiaries (to the extent described above) to pay such taxes separately from any such parent entity;

(c) customary salary, bonus and other benefits payable to officers and employees of any direct or indirect parent company of the Company to the extent such salaries, bonuses and other benefits are attributable to the ownership or operation of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries;

(d) general corporate operating and overhead costs and expenses of any direct or indirect parent company of the Company to the extent such costs and expenses are attributable to the ownership or operation of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries; and

(e) fees and expenses, other than to Affiliates of the Company (it being understood that Goldman, Sachs & Co., shall not be deemed an Affiliate of the Company for this purpose solely as a result of the equity ownership of the Company’s direct or indirect parent by its Affiliates), related to any unsuccessful equity or debt offering of such parent entity; and

132

(15) the distribution, dividend or otherwise, of shares of Capital Stock of, or Indebtedness owed to the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary by Unrestricted Subsidiaries (other than Unrestricted Subsidiaries, the primary assets of which (i) are cash and/or Cash Equivalents or (ii) were contributed to such Unrestricted Subsidiary in anticipation of such distribution, dividend or other payment, as determined in good faith by the Company);

provided, however, that at the time of, and after giving effect to, any Restricted Payment permitted under clauses (7), (11) and (15), no Default shall have occurred and be continuing or would occur as a consequence thereof.

As of the Issue Date, all of the Company’ Subsidiaries were Restricted Subsidiaries. The Company will not permit any Unrestricted Subsidiary to become a Restricted Subsidiary except pursuant to the last sentence of the definition of “Unrestricted Subsidiary.” For purposes of designating any Restricted Subsidiary as an Unrestricted Subsidiary, all outstanding Investments by the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries (except to the extent repaid) in the Subsidiary so designated will be deemed to be Restricted Payments in an amount determined as set forth in the last sentence of the definition of “Investment.” Such designation will be permitted only if a Restricted Payment in such amount would be permitted at such time, whether pursuant to the first paragraph of this covenant or under clause (7), (10), or (11) of the second paragraph of this covenant, or pursuant to the definition of “Permitted Investments,” and if such Subsidiary otherwise meets the definition of an Unrestricted Subsidiary. Unrestricted Subsidiaries will not be subject to any of the restrictive covenants set forth in the Indentures.

Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock

The Company will not, and will not permit any of its Restricted Subsidiaries to, directly or indirectly, create, incur, issue, assume, guarantee or otherwise become directly or indirectly liable, contingently or otherwise (collectively, “incur” and collectively, an “incurrence”) with respect to any Indebtedness (including Acquired Indebtedness) and the Company will not issue any shares of Disqualified Stock and will not permit any Restricted Subsidiary to issue any shares of Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock; provided, however, that the Company may incur Indebtedness (including Acquired Indebtedness) or issue shares of Disqualified Stock, and any of its Restricted Subsidiaries may incur Indebtedness (including Acquired Indebtedness), issue shares of Disqualified Stock and issue shares of Preferred Stock, if the Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio on a consolidated basis for the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries’ most recently ended four fiscal quarters for which internal financial statements are available immediately preceding the date on which such additional Indebtedness is incurred or such Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock is issued would have been at least 2.00 to 1.00, determined on a pro forma basis (including a pro forma application of the net proceeds therefrom), as if the additional Indebtedness had been incurred, or the Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock had been issued, as the case may be, and the application of proceeds therefrom had occurred at the beginning of such four-quarter period; provided further that the maximum amount that Restricted Subsidiaries that are not Guarantors may incur pursuant to the foregoing shall not exceed $50.0 million.

The foregoing limitations will not apply to:

(1) the incurrence of Indebtedness under Credit Facilities by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries and the issuance and creation of letters of credit and bankers’ acceptances thereunder (with letters of credit and bankers’ acceptances being deemed to have a principal amount equal to the face amount thereof), up to an aggregate principal amount of $1,685.0 million outstanding at any one time, less principal payments actually made by the borrower thereunder in respect of Indebtedness thereunder with Net Proceeds from an Asset Sale;

(2) the incurrence by the Company and any Guarantor of Indebtedness represented by the Notes (including any Guarantee) (other than any Additional Notes) and any notes (including Guarantees thereof) issued in exchange for the Notes pursuant to the Registration Rights Agreement or similar agreement;

(3) Indebtedness of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries in existence on the Issue Date (other than Indebtedness described in clauses (1) and (2));

133

(4) Indebtedness (including Capitalized Lease Obligations), Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock incurred by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries, to finance the purchase, lease or improvement of property (real or personal) or equipment (other than software) that is used or useful in a Similar Business, whether through the direct purchase of assets or the Capital Stock of any Person owning such assets, in an aggregate principal amount at the date of such incurrence (including all Refinancing Indebtedness Incurred to refinance any other Indebtedness incurred pursuant to this clause (4)) not to exceed the greater of (x) $160.0 million and (y) 4% of Total Assets; provided, however, that such Indebtedness exists at the date of such purchase or transaction, or is created within 270 days thereafter (it being understood that any Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock incurred pursuant to this clause (4) shall cease to be deemed incurred or outstanding for purposes of this clause (4) but shall be deemed incurred for the purposes of the first paragraph of this covenant from and after the first date on which the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary could have incurred such Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock under the first paragraph of this covenant without reliance on this clause (4));

(5) Indebtedness incurred by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries constituting reimbursement obligations with respect to letters of credit issued in the ordinary course of business, including letters of credit in respect of workers’ compensation claims, or other Indebtedness with respect to reimbursement type obligations regarding workers’ compensation claims; provided, however, that upon the drawing of such letters of credit or the incurrence of such Indebtedness, such obligations are reimbursed within 30 days following such drawing or incurrence;

(6) Indebtedness arising from agreements of the Company or its Restricted Subsidiaries providing for indemnification, adjustment of purchase price or similar obligations, in each case, incurred or assumed in connection with the disposition of any business, assets or a Subsidiary, other than guarantees of Indebtedness incurred by any Person acquiring all or any portion of such business, assets or a Subsidiary for the purpose of financing such acquisition; provided, however, that

(a) such Indebtedness is not reflected on the balance sheet of the Company, or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries (contingent obligations referred to in a footnote to financial statements and not otherwise reflected on the balance sheet will not be deemed to be reflected on such balance sheet for purposes of this clause (6)(a)); and

(b) the maximum assumable liability in respect of all such Indebtedness shall at no time exceed the gross proceeds including non-cash proceeds (the fair market value of such non-cash proceeds being measured at the time received and without giving effect to any subsequent changes in value) actually received by the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries in connection with such disposition;

(7) Indebtedness of the Company to a Restricted Subsidiary; provided that any such Indebtedness owing to a Restricted Subsidiary that is not the Co-Issuer or a Guarantor is expressly subordinated in right of payment to the Notes issued under such Indenture; provided further that any subsequent issuance or transfer of any Capital Stock or any other event which results in any such Restricted Subsidiary ceasing to be a Restricted Subsidiary or any other subsequent transfer of any such Indebtedness (except to the Company or another Restricted Subsidiary) shall be deemed, in each case, to be an incurrence of such Indebtedness not permitted by this clause;

(8) Indebtedness of a Restricted Subsidiary to the Company or another Restricted Subsidiary; provided that if a Guarantor incurs such Indebtedness to a Restricted Subsidiary that is not the Co-Issuer or a Guarantor, such Indebtedness is expressly subordinated in right of payment to the Notes or the Guarantee of the Notes of such Guarantor issued under such Indenture; provided further that any subsequent transfer of any such Indebtedness (except to the Company or another Restricted Subsidiary) shall be deemed, in each case, to be an incurrence of such Indebtedness not permitted by this clause;

(9) shares of Preferred Stock of a Restricted Subsidiary issued to the Company or another Restricted Subsidiary, provided that any subsequent issuance or transfer of any Capital Stock or any other event which

134

results in any such Restricted Subsidiary ceasing to be a Restricted Subsidiary or any other subsequent transfer of any such shares of Preferred Stock (except to the Company or another of its Restricted Subsidiaries) shall be deemed in each case to be an issuance of such shares of Preferred Stock not permitted by this clause;

(10) Hedging Obligations (excluding Hedging Obligations entered into for speculative purposes) for the purpose of limiting interest rate risk with respect to any Indebtedness permitted to be incurred pursuant to “—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock,” exchange rate risk or commodity pricing risk;

(11) obligations in respect of performance, bid, appeal and surety bonds and completion guarantees provided by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries in the ordinary course of business;

(12) (a) Indebtedness or Disqualified Stock of the Company and Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary equal to 200.0% of the net cash proceeds received by the Company since immediately after the Issue Date from the issue or sale of Equity Interests of the Company or cash contributed to the capital of the Company (in each case, other than proceeds of Disqualified Stock or sales of Equity Interests to the Company or any of its Subsidiaries) as determined in accordance with clauses (3)(b) and (3)(c) of the first paragraph of “—Limitation on Restricted Payments” to the extent such net cash proceeds or cash have not been applied pursuant to such clauses to make Restricted Payments or to make other Investments, payments or exchanges pursuant to the second paragraph of “—Limitation on Restricted Payments” or to make Permitted Investments (other than Permitted Investments specified in clauses (1), (2) or (3) of the definition thereof) and (b) Indebtedness or Disqualified Stock of the Company and Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary not otherwise permitted hereunder in an aggregate principal amount or liquidation preference, which when aggregated with the principal amount and liquidation preference of all other Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock then outstanding and incurred pursuant to this clause (12)(b), does not at any one time outstanding exceed $150.0 million (it being understood that any Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock incurred pursuant to this clause (12)(b) shall cease to be deemed incurred or outstanding for purposes of this clause (12)(b) but shall be deemed incurred for the purposes of the first paragraph of this covenant from and after the first date on which the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary could have incurred such Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock under the first paragraph of this covenant without reliance on this clause (12)(b));

(13) the incurrence or issuance by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary of Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock which serves to refund or refinance any Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock incurred as permitted under the first paragraph of this covenant and clauses (2), (3), (4) and (12)(a) above, this clause (13) and clause (14) below, including additional Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock incurred to pay premiums (including reasonable tender premiums), defeasance costs and fees in connection therewith (the “Refinancing Indebtedness”) prior to its respective maturity; provided, however, that such Refinancing Indebtedness:

(a) has a Weighted Average Life to Maturity at the time such Refinancing Indebtedness is incurred which is not less than the remaining Weighted Average Life to Maturity of the Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock being refunded or refinanced,

(b) to the extent such Refinancing Indebtedness refinances (i) Indebtedness subordinated or pari passu to the Notes issued under such Indenture or any Guarantee thereof, such Refinancing Indebtedness is subordinated or pari passu to the Notes or the Guarantee at least to the same extent as the Indebtedness being refinanced or refunded or (ii) Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock, such Refinancing Indebtedness must be Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock, respectively, and

(c) shall not include:

(i) Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock of a Subsidiary of the Company that is not an Issuer or a Guarantor that refinances Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock of the Company;

135

(ii) Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock of a Subsidiary of the Company, that is not an Issuer or a Guarantor that refinances Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock of a Guarantor; or

(iii) Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock of the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary that refinances Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock of an Unrestricted Subsidiary;

and provided further that, with respect to the Senior Indenture, subclause (a) of this clause (13) will not apply to any refunding or refinancing of any Secured Indebtedness and that, with respect to the Subordinated Indenture, subclause (a) of this clause (13) will not apply to any refunding or refinancing of any Indebtedness outstanding under any Senior Indebtedness;

(14) Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock of (x) the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary incurred to finance an acquisition or (y) Persons that are acquired by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary or merged into the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary in accordance with the terms of the Indentures; provided that after giving effect to such acquisition or merger, either

(a) the Company would be permitted to incur at least $1.00 of additional Indebtedness pursuant to the Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio test set forth in the first sentence of this covenant, or

(b) the Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio of the Company and the Restricted Subsidiaries is greater than immediately prior to such acquisition or merger;

(15) Indebtedness arising from the honoring by a bank or other financial institution of a check, draft or similar instrument drawn against insufficient funds in the ordinary course of business, provided that such Indebtedness is extinguished within two Business Days of its incurrence;

(16) Indebtedness of the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries supported by a letter of credit issued pursuant to the Credit Facilities, in a principal amount not in excess of the stated amount of such letter of credit;

(17) (a) any guarantee by the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary of Indebtedness or other obligations of any Restricted Subsidiary so long as the incurrence of such Indebtedness incurred by such Restricted Subsidiary is permitted under the terms of the applicable Indenture,

(b) any guarantee by a Restricted Subsidiary of Indebtedness of the Company provided that such guarantee is incurred in accordance with the covenant described below under “—Limitation on Guarantees of Indebtedness by Restricted Subsidiaries”; or

(c) any incurrence by EM Finance of Indebtedness as a co-issuer of Indebtedness of the Company that was permitted to be incurred by another provision of this covenant; and

(18) Indebtedness of Foreign Subsidiaries of the Company incurred not to exceed at any one time outstanding and together with any other Indebtedness incurred under this clause (18) 5.0% of the Total Assets of the Foreign Subsidiaries (it being understood that any Indebtedness incurred pursuant to this clause (18) shall cease to be deemed incurred or outstanding for purposes of this clause (18) but shall be deemed incurred for the purposes of the first paragraph of this covenant from and after the first date on which the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary could have incurred such Indebtedness under the first paragraph of this covenant without reliance on this clause (18)).

For purposes of determining compliance with this covenant:

(1) in the event that an item of Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock (or any portion thereof) meets the criteria of more than one of the categories of permitted Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred

136

Stock described in clauses (1) through (18) above or is entitled to be incurred pursuant to the first paragraph of this covenant, the Company, in its sole discretion, will classify or reclassify such item of Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock (or any portion thereof) and will only be required to include the amount and type of such Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock in one of the above clauses; and

(2) at the time of incurrence, the Company will be entitled to divide and classify an item of Indebtedness in more than one of the types of Indebtedness described in the first and second paragraphs above;

provided that all Indebtedness outstanding under the Credit Facilities on the Issue Date will be treated as incurred on the Issue Date under clause (1) of the preceding paragraph.

Accrual of interest, the accretion of accreted value and the payment of interest in the form of additional Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock will not be deemed to be an incurrence of Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock for purposes of this covenant but will be included as Fixed Charges.

For purposes of determining compliance with any U.S. dollar-denominated restriction on the incurrence of Indebtedness, the U.S. dollar-equivalent principal amount of Indebtedness denominated in a foreign currency shall be calculated based on the relevant currency exchange rate in effect on the date such Indebtedness was incurred, in the case of term debt, or first committed, in the case of revolving credit debt; provided that if such Indebtedness is incurred to refinance other Indebtedness denominated in a foreign currency, and such refinancing would cause the applicable U.S. dollar denominated restriction to be exceeded if calculated at the relevant currency exchange rate in effect on the date of such refinancing, such U.S. dollar-denominated restriction shall be deemed not to have been exceeded so long as the principal amount of such refinancing Indebtedness does not exceed the principal amount of such Indebtedness being refinanced.

The principal amount of any Indebtedness incurred to refinance other Indebtedness, if incurred in a different currency from the Indebtedness being refinanced, shall be calculated based on the currency exchange rate applicable to the currencies in which such respective Indebtedness is denominated that is in effect on the date of such refinancing.

Liens

Senior Notes

The Company will not, and will not permit the Co-Issuer or any Guarantor to, directly or indirectly, create, incur, assume or suffer to exist any Lien (except Permitted Liens), on any asset or property of the Company, the Co-Issuer or any Guarantor, or any income or profits therefrom, or assign or convey any right to receive income therefrom, unless:

(1) in the case of Liens securing Subordinated Indebtedness or other Indebtedness that is subordinated or junior in right of payment to the Senior Notes and related Guarantees, the Senior Notes and related Guarantees are secured by a Lien on such property, assets or proceeds that is senior in priority to such Liens; or

(2) in all other cases, the Senior Notes or the Guarantees are equally and ratably secured, except that the foregoing shall not apply to (a) Liens securing the Senior Notes and the related Guarantees and (b) Liens incurred to secure Obligations in respect of any Indebtedness permitted to be incurred pursuant to the covenant described above under “—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock” (other than Subordinated Indebtedness or Indebtedness referred to in clauses (7), (8) or (9) of such covenant); provided that, with respect to Liens securing Obligations permitted under this subclause (b), at the time of incurrence and after giving pro forma effect thereto, the Consolidated Secured Debt Ratio would be no greater than 4.0 to 1.0.

137

Senior Subordinated Notes

The Company will not, and will not permit the Co-Issuer or any Guarantor to, directly or indirectly, create, incur, assume or suffer to exist any Lien (except Permitted Liens) that secures obligations under any Indebtedness ranking pari passu with or subordinated to the Senior Subordinated Notes or any related Guarantee, on any asset or property of the Company, the Co-Issuer or any Guarantor, or any income or profits therefrom, or assign or convey any right to receive income therefrom, unless:

(1) in the case of Liens securing Subordinated Indebtedness, the Senior Subordinated Notes and related Guarantees are secured by a Lien on such property, assets or proceeds that is senior in priority to such Liens; or

(2) in all other cases, the Senior Subordinated Notes or the Guarantees are equally and ratably secured, except that the foregoing shall not apply to (a) Liens securing the Senior Subordinated Notes and the related Guarantees and (b) Liens securing Senior Indebtedness of the Company or any Guarantor.

Merger, Consolidation or Sale of All or Substantially All Assets

The Company

The Company may not consolidate or merge with or into or wind up into (whether or not the Company is the surviving Person), or sell, assign, transfer, lease, convey or otherwise dispose of all or substantially all of its properties or assets, in one or more related transactions, to any Person unless:

(1) the Company is the surviving Person or the Person formed by or surviving any such consolidation or merger (if other than the Company) or to which such sale, assignment, transfer, lease, conveyance or other disposition will have been made is a corporation, partnership, trust or limited liability company organized or existing under the laws of the United States, any State thereof, the District of Columbia, or any territory thereof (such Person, as the case may be, being herein called the “Successor Company”);

(2) the Successor Company, if other than the Company, expressly assumes all the obligations of the Company under the Notes issued under the applicable indenture and the Registration Rights Agreement pursuant to supplemental indentures or other documents or instruments in form reasonably satisfactory to the Trustee;

(3) immediately after such transaction, no Default exists;

(4) immediately after giving pro forma effect to such transaction and any related financing transactions, as if such transactions had occurred at the beginning of the applicable four-quarter period,

(a) the Successor Company would be permitted to incur at least $1.00 of additional Indebtedness pursuant to the Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio test set forth in the first sentence of the covenant described under “—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock,” or

(b) the Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio for the Successor Company, the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries would be greater than such Ratio for the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries immediately prior to such transaction;

(5) each Guarantor, unless it is the other party to the transactions described above, in which case clause (b) of the second succeeding paragraph shall apply, shall have by supplemental indenture confirmed that its Guarantee shall apply to such Person’s obligations under the applicable Indenture, the applicable Notes and the Registration Rights Agreement; and

(6) the Company shall have delivered to the Trustee an Officer’s Certificate and an Opinion of Counsel, each stating that such consolidation, merger or transfer and such supplemental indentures, if any, comply with the Indentures.

138

The Successor Company will succeed to, and be substituted for the Company, under the Indentures, the Guarantees and the Notes, as applicable.

Notwithstanding the foregoing clauses (3) and (4),

(1) any Restricted Subsidiary may consolidate with or merge into or transfer all or part of its properties and assets to the Company, and

(2) the Company may merge with an Affiliate of the Company, solely for the purpose of reincorporating the Company in the United States or any State thereof, the District of Columbia or any territory thereof so long as the amount of Indebtedness of the Issuers and its Restricted Subsidiaries is not increased thereby.

Guarantors

Subject to certain limitations described in the Indentures governing release of a Guarantee upon the sale, disposition or transfer of a guarantor, no Guarantor will, and the Company will not permit any Guarantor to, consolidate or merge with or into or wind up into (whether or not the Company or Guarantor is the surviving Person), or sell, assign, transfer, lease, convey or otherwise dispose of all or substantially all of its properties or assets, in one or more related transactions, to any Person unless:

(1) (a) such Guarantor is the surviving corporation or the Person formed by or surviving any such consolidation or merger (if other than such Guarantor) or to which such sale, assignment, transfer, lease, conveyance or other disposition will have been made is a Person organized or existing under the laws of the jurisdiction of organization of such Guarantor, as the case may be, or the laws of the United States, any State thereof, the District of Columbia, or any territory thereof (such Guarantor or such Person, as the case may be, being herein called the “Successor Person”);

(b) the Successor Person, if other than such Guarantor, expressly assumes all the obligations of such Guarantor under the applicable Indenture and such Guarantor’s related Guarantees pursuant to supplemental indentures or other documents or instruments in form reasonably satisfactory to the Trustee;

(c) immediately after such transaction, no Default exists; and

(d) the Company shall have delivered to the Trustee an Officer’s Certificate and an Opinion of Counsel, each stating that such consolidation, merger or transfer and such supplemental indentures, if any, comply with the Indentures; or

(2) the transaction is made in compliance with the covenant described under “Repurchase at the Option of Holders—Asset Sales.”

Subject to certain limitations described in the Indentures, the Successor Person will succeed to, and be substituted for, such Guarantor under the Indentures and such Guarantor’s Guarantees. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any Guarantor may merge into or transfer all or part of its properties and assets to another Guarantor or the Company.

EM Finance

EM Finance shall not consolidate with, merge into, sell, assign, convey, transfer, lease or otherwise dispose of all or substantially all of its property and assets to, any Person, or permit any Person to merge with or into EM Finance unless:

(1) concurrently therewith, a corporate Wholly-Owned Restricted Subsidiary of the Company organized and validly existing under the laws of the United States of America or any jurisdiction thereof (which may be the

139

continuing Person as a result of such transaction) shall expressly assume, by a supplemental Indenture, executed and delivered to the Trustee and in form and substance satisfactory to the Trustee, all of the obligations of an issuer under the notes, the Indentures and the Registration Rights Agreement; or

(2) after giving effect thereto, at least one obligor on the notes shall be a corporation organized and validly existing under the laws of the United States of America or any jurisdiction thereof; and

(3) immediately after such transaction, no Default or Event of Default will have occurred and be continuing.

Transactions with Affiliates

The Company will not, and will not permit any of its Restricted Subsidiaries to, make any payment to, or sell, lease, transfer or otherwise dispose of any of its properties or assets to, or purchase any property or assets from, or enter into or make or amend any transaction, contract, agreement, understanding, loan, advance or guarantee with, or for the benefit of, any Affiliate of the Company (each of the foregoing, an “Affiliate Transaction”) involving aggregate payments or consideration in excess of $5.0 million, unless:

(1) such Affiliate Transaction is on terms that are not materially less favorable to the Company or its relevant Restricted Subsidiary than those that would have been obtained in a comparable transaction by the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary with an unrelated Person on an arm’s-length basis; and

(2) the Company delivers to the Trustee with respect to any Affiliate Transaction or series of related Affiliate Transactions involving aggregate payments or consideration in excess of $10.0 million, a resolution adopted by the majority of the disinterested members of the board of directors of the Company approving such Affiliate Transaction and set forth in an Officer’s Certificate certifying that such Affiliate Transaction complies with clause (1) above.

The foregoing provisions will not apply to the following:

(1) transactions between or among the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries;

(2) Restricted Payments permitted by the provisions of the Indentures described above under the covenant “—Limitation on Restricted Payments” and the definition of “Permitted Investments”;

(3) the payment of management, consulting, monitoring and advisory fees and related expenses to the Investors pursuant to the Sponsor Management Agreement as in effect on the Issue Date, or any amendment thereto (so long as any such amendment is not disadvantageous to the Holders when taken as a whole as compared to the applicable agreement as in effect on the Issue Date);

(4) the payment of reasonable and customary fees paid to, and indemnities provided on behalf of, officers, directors, employees or consultants of Issuers, any of its direct or indirect parent companies or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries;

(5) transactions in which the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries, as the case may be, delivers to the Trustee a letter from an Independent Financial Advisor stating that such transaction is fair to the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary from a financial point of view or stating that the terms are not materially less favorable to the Company or its relevant Restricted Subsidiary than those that would have been obtained in a comparable transaction by the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary with an unrelated Person on an arm’s-length basis;

(6) any agreement as in effect as of the Issue Date, or any amendment thereto (so long as any such amendment is not disadvantageous to the Holders when taken as a whole as compared to the applicable agreement as in effect on the Issue Date);

140

(7) the existence of, or the performance by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries of its obligations under the terms of, any stockholders agreement (including any registration rights agreement or purchase agreement related thereto) to which it is a party as of the Issue Date and any similar agreements which it may enter into thereafter; provided, however, that the existence of, or the performance by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries of obligations under any future amendment to any such existing agreement or under any similar agreement entered into after the Issue Date shall only be permitted by this clause (6) to the extent that the terms of any such amendment or new agreement are not otherwise disadvantageous to the Holders when taken as a whole;

(8) the Transactions and the payment of all fees and expenses related to the Transactions, in each case as disclosed in this prospectus;

(9) transactions with customers, clients, suppliers, or purchasers or sellers of goods or services, in each case in the ordinary course of business and otherwise in compliance with the terms of the applicable Indenture which are fair to the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries, in the reasonable determination of the board of directors of the Company or the senior management thereof, or are on terms at least as favorable as might reasonably have been obtained at such time from an unaffiliated party;

(10) the issuance of Equity Interests (other than Disqualified Stock) of the Company to any Permitted Holder or to any director, officer, employee or consultant;

(11) payments by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries to any of the Investors (or their Affiliates) made for any financial advisory, financing, underwriting or placement services or in respect of other investment banking activities, including, without limitation, in connection with acquisitions or divestitures which payments are approved by a majority of the board of directors of the Company in good faith;

(12) payments or loans (or cancellation of loans) to employees or consultants of the Company, any of its direct or indirect parent companies or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries and employment agreements, stock option plans and other similar arrangements with such employees or consultants which, in each case, are approved by the Company in good faith; and

(13) investments by the Investors in securities of the Issuers or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries so long as (i) the investment is being offered generally to other investors on the same or more favorable terms and (ii) the investment constitutes less than 5% of the proposed or outstanding issue amount of such class of securities.

Dividend and Other Payment Restrictions Affecting Restricted Subsidiaries

The Company will not, and will not permit any of its Restricted Subsidiaries to, directly or indirectly, create or otherwise cause or suffer to exist or become effective any consensual encumbrance or consensual restriction on the ability of any such Restricted Subsidiary to:

(1) (a) pay dividends or make any other distributions to the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries on its Capital Stock or with respect to any other interest or participation in, or measured by, its profits, or

(b) pay any Indebtedness owed to the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries;

(2) make loans or advances to the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries; or

(3) sell, lease or transfer any of its properties or assets to the Issuers or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries, except (in each case) for such encumbrances or restrictions existing under or by reason of:

(a) contractual encumbrances or restrictions in effect on the Issue Date, including pursuant to the Senior Credit Facilities and the related documentation;

141

(b) the Indentures and the Notes;

(c) purchase money obligations for property acquired in the ordinary course of business that impose restrictions of the nature discussed in clause (3) above on the property so acquired;

(d) applicable law or any applicable rule, regulation or order;

(e) any agreement or other instrument of a Person acquired by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries in existence at the time of such acquisition (but not created in contemplation thereof), which encumbrance or restriction is not applicable to any Person, or the properties or assets of any Person, other than the Person and its Subsidiaries, or the property or assets of the Person and its Subsidiaries, so acquired;

(f) contracts for the sale of assets, including customary restrictions with respect to a Subsidiary of the Company pursuant to an agreement that has been entered into for the sale or disposition of all or substantially all of the Capital Stock or assets of such Subsidiary;

(g) Secured Indebtedness otherwise permitted to be incurred pursuant to the covenants described under “—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock” and “—Liens” that limit the right of the debtor to dispose of the assets securing such Indebtedness;

(h) restrictions on cash or other deposits or net worth imposed by customers under contracts entered into in the ordinary course of business;

(i) other Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock of Foreign Subsidiaries or other Restricted Subsidiaries that are not Guarantors permitted to be incurred subsequent to the Issue Date pursuant to the provisions of the covenant described under “—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock”;

(j) customary provisions in joint venture agreements and other similar agreements relating solely to such joint venture;

(k) customary provisions contained in leases or licenses of intellectual property and other agreements, in each case, entered into in the ordinary course of business; and

(l) any encumbrances or restrictions of the type referred to in clauses (1), (2) and (3) above imposed by any amendments, modifications, restatements, renewals, increases, supplements, refundings, replacements or refinancings of the contracts, instruments or obligations referred to in clauses (a) through (k) above; provided that such amendments, modifications, restatements, renewals, increases, supplements, refundings, replacements or refinancings are, in the good faith judgment of the Issuers, no more restrictive with respect to such encumbrance and other restrictions taken as a whole than those prior to such amendment, modification, restatement, renewal, increase, supplement, refunding, replacement or refinancing.

Limitation on Guarantees of Indebtedness by Restricted Subsidiaries

The Company will not permit any of its Wholly-Owned Subsidiaries that are Restricted Subsidiaries (and non-Wholly-Owned Subsidiaries if such non-Wholly-Owned Subsidiaries guarantee other capital markets debt securities), other than EM Finance, a Guarantor or a Foreign Subsidiary guaranteeing Indebtedness of another Foreign Subsidiary, to guarantee the payment of any Indebtedness of the Issuers or any other Guarantor unless:

(1) such Restricted Subsidiary within 30 days executes and delivers a supplemental indenture to each of the Indentures providing for a Guarantee by such Restricted Subsidiary, except that with respect to a guarantee of Indebtedness of the Company, the Co-Issuer or any Guarantor:

(a) if the Senior Subordinated Notes or such Guarantor’s Guarantee are subordinated in right of payment to such Indebtedness, the Guarantee under the Subordinated Indenture supplemental indenture shall be subordinated to such Restricted Subsidiary’s guarantee with respect to such Indebtedness substantially to the same extent as the Senior Subordinated Notes are subordinated to such Indebtedness; and

142

(b) if such Indebtedness is by its express terms subordinated in right of payment to the Notes issued under such Indenture, or such Guarantor’s Guarantee, any such guarantee by such Restricted Subsidiary with respect to such Indebtedness shall be subordinated in right of payment to such Guarantee substantially to the same extent as such Indebtedness is subordinated to such series of Notes; and

(2) such Restricted Subsidiary waives and will not in any manner whatsoever claim or take the benefit or advantage of, any rights of reimbursement, indemnity or subrogation or any other rights against the Company or any other Restricted Subsidiary as a result of any payment by such Restricted Subsidiary under its Guarantee; and

provided that this covenant shall not be applicable to any guarantee of any Restricted Subsidiary that existed at the time such Person became a Restricted Subsidiary and was not incurred in connection with, or in contemplation of, such Person becoming a Restricted Subsidiary.

Limitation on Layering

The Subordinated Indenture provides that the Company will not, and will not permit the Co-Issuer or any Guarantor to, directly or indirectly, incur any Indebtedness (including Acquired Indebtedness) that is subordinate in right of payment to any Senior Indebtedness of the Company, the Co-Issuer or such Guarantor, as the case may be, unless such Indebtedness is either:

(1) equal in right of payment with the Senior Subordinated Notes or such Guarantor’s Guarantee of the Senior Subordinated Notes, as the case may be; or

(2) expressly subordinated in right of payment to the Senior Subordinated Notes or such Guarantor’s Guarantee of the Senior Subordinated Notes, as the case may be.

The Subordinated Indenture does not treat (1) unsecured Indebtedness as subordinated or junior to Secured Indebtedness merely because it is unsecured or (2) Senior Indebtedness as subordinated or junior to any other Senior Indebtedness merely because it has a junior priority with respect to the same collateral.

Reports and Other Information

Notwithstanding that the Company may not be subject to the reporting requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Exchange Act or otherwise report on an annual and quarterly basis on forms provided for such annual and quarterly reporting pursuant to rules and regulations promulgated by the SEC, each Indenture requires the Company to file with the SEC (and make available to the Trustee and Holders of the Notes (without exhibits), without cost to any Holder, within 15 days after it files them with the SEC) from and after the Issue Date,

(1) within 90 days (or any other time period then in effect under the rules and regulations of the Exchange Act with respect to the filing of a Form 10-K by a non-accelerated filer) after the end of each fiscal year, annual reports on Form 10-K, or any successor or comparable form, containing the information required to be contained therein, or required in such successor or comparable form;

(2) within 45 days after the end of each of the first three fiscal quarters of each fiscal year, reports on Form 10-Q containing all quarterly information that would be required to be contained in Form 10-Q, or any successor or comparable form;

(3) promptly from time to time after the occurrence of an event required to be therein reported, such other reports on Form 8-K, or any successor or comparable form; and

(4) any other information, documents and other reports which the Company would be required to file with the SEC if it were subject to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Exchange Act;

143

in each case, in a manner that complies in all material respects with the requirements specified in such form; provided that the Company shall not be so obligated to file such reports with the SEC if the SEC does not permit such filing, in which event the Company will make available such information to prospective purchasers of Notes, in addition to providing such information to the Trustee and the Holders of the Notes, in each case within 15 days after the time the Company would be required to file such information with the SEC, if it were subject to Sections 13 or 15(d) of the Exchange Act. In addition, to the extent not satisfied by the foregoing, the Issuers will agree that, for so long as any Notes are outstanding, it will furnish to Holders and to securities analysts and prospective investors, upon their request, the information required to be delivered pursuant to Rule 144A(d)(4) under the Securities Act.

In the event that any direct or indirect parent company of the Company’s parent is a guarantor of the Senior Subordinated Notes, the Indentures permit the Issuers to satisfy its obligations in this covenant with respect to financial information relating to the Company by furnishing financial information relating to such parent; provided that the same is accompanied by consolidating information that explains in reasonable detail the differences between the information relating to such parent, on the one hand, and the information relating to the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries on a stand-alone basis, on the other hand.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, such requirements shall be deemed satisfied prior to the commencement of the exchange offers or the effectiveness of the shelf registration statement (1) by the filing with the SEC of any registration statement and any amendments thereto, with such financial information that satisfy Regulation S-X of the Securities Act or (2) by posting reports that would be required to be filed substantially in the form required by the SEC on the Company’s website (or that of any of its parent companies) or providing such reports the Trustee, with financial information that satisfied Regulation S-X of the Securities Act, subject to exceptions consistent with the presentation of financial information in this prospectus, to the extent filed within the times specified above.

Limitation on Business Activities of EM Finance

EM Finance may not hold any assets, become liable for any obligations or engage in any business activities; provided that it may be a co-obligor with respect to the Notes or any other Indebtedness issued by the Company, and may engage in any activities directly related thereto or necessary in connection therewith. EM Finance shall be a Wholly-Owned Subsidiary of the Company at all times.

Events of Default and Remedies

Each Indenture provides that each of the following is an Event of Default:

(1) default in payment when due and payable, upon redemption, acceleration or otherwise, of principal of, or premium, if any, on the Notes issued under such Indenture (whether or not prohibited by the subordination provisions of the Subordinated Indenture);

(2) default for 30 days or more in the payment when due of interest or Additional Interest on or with respect to the Notes issued under such Indenture (whether or not prohibited by the subordination provisions of the Subordinated Indenture);

(3) failure by the Issuers or any Guarantor for 60 days after receipt of written notice given by the Trustee or the Holders of not less than 25% in principal amount of the Notes issued under such Indenture to comply with any of its obligations, covenants or agreements (other than a default referred to in clauses (1) and (2) above) contained in the applicable Indenture or the Notes issued thereunder;

(4) default under any mortgage, indenture or instrument under which there is issued or by which there is secured or evidenced any Indebtedness for money borrowed by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries

144

or the payment of which is guaranteed by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries, other than Indebtedness owed to the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary, whether such Indebtedness or guarantee now exists or is created after the issuance of the Notes, if both:

(a) such default either results from the failure to pay any principal of such Indebtedness at its stated final maturity (after giving effect to any applicable grace periods) or relates to an obligation other than the obligation to pay principal of any such Indebtedness at its stated final maturity and results in the holder or holders of such Indebtedness causing such Indebtedness to become due prior to its stated maturity; and

(b) the principal amount of such Indebtedness, together with the principal amount of any other such Indebtedness in default for failure to pay principal at stated final maturity (after giving effect to any applicable grace periods), or the maturity of which has been so accelerated, aggregate $50.0 million or more at any one time outstanding;

(5) failure by the Company or any Significant Subsidiary to pay final judgments aggregating in excess of $50.0 million, which final judgments remain unpaid, undischarged and unstayed for a period of more than 60 days after such judgment becomes final, and in the event such judgment is covered by insurance, an enforcement proceeding has been commenced by any creditor upon such judgment or decree which is not promptly stayed;

(6) certain events of bankruptcy or insolvency with respect to the Company or any Significant Subsidiary; or

(7) the Guarantee of any Significant Subsidiary shall for any reason cease to be in full force and effect or be declared null and void or any responsible officer of any Guarantor that is a Significant Subsidiary, as the case may be, denies that it has any further liability under its Guarantee or gives notice to such effect, other than by reason of the termination of such Indenture or the release of any such Guarantee in accordance with such Indenture.

If any Event of Default (other than of a type specified in clause (6) above) occurs and is continuing under an Indenture, the Trustee or the Holders of at least 25% in principal amount of the then total outstanding Notes issued thereunder may declare the principal, premium, if any, interest and any other monetary obligations on all the then outstanding Notes issued thereunder to be due and payable immediately; provided, however, that so long as any Indebtedness permitted to be incurred under the Subordinated Indenture as part of the Senior Credit Facilities shall be outstanding, no such acceleration of the Senior Subordinated Notes shall be effective until the earlier of:

(1) acceleration of any such Indebtedness under the Senior Credit Facilities; or

(2) five Business Days after the giving of written notice of such acceleration to the Issuers and the administrative agent under the Senior Credit Facilities.

Upon the effectiveness of such declaration, such principal and interest will be due and payable immediately. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the case of an Event of Default arising under clause (6) of the first paragraph of this section with respect to the Company, all outstanding Notes will become due and payable without further action or notice. The Indentures provide that the Trustee may withhold from the Holders notice of any continuing Default, except a Default relating to the payment of principal, premium, if any, or interest, if it determines that withholding notice is in their interest. In addition, the Trustee shall have no obligation to accelerate the Notes if in the best judgment of the Trustee acceleration is not in the best interest of the Holders of the Notes.

Each Indenture provides that the Holders of a majority in aggregate principal amount of the then outstanding Notes issued thereunder by notice to the Trustee may on behalf of the Holders of all of the Notes of such series waive any existing Default and its consequences under such Indenture except a continuing Default in the payment of interest on, premium, if any, or the principal of any Note of such series held by a non-consenting

145

Holder. In the event of any Event of Default specified in clause (4) above, such Event of Default and all consequences thereof (excluding any resulting payment default, other than as a result of acceleration of the Notes) shall be annulled, waived and rescinded, automatically and without any action by the Trustee or the Holders, if within 20 days after such Event of Default arose:

(1) the Indebtedness or guarantee that is the basis for such Event of Default has been discharged; or

(2) holders thereof have rescinded or waived the acceleration, notice or action (as the case may be) giving rise to such Event of Default; or

(3) the default that is the basis for such Event of Default has been cured.

Subject to the provisions of each Indenture relating to the duties of the Trustee thereunder, in case an Event of Default occurs and is continuing, the Trustee will be under no obligation to exercise any of the rights or powers under either Indenture at the request or direction of any of the Holders of the Notes issued thereunder unless such Holders have offered to the Trustee reasonable indemnity or security against any loss, liability or expense. Except to enforce the right to receive payment of principal, premium (if any) or interest when due, no Holder of a Note may pursue any remedy with respect to the applicable Indenture or the related Notes unless:

(1) such Holder has previously given the Trustee notice that an Event of Default is continuing;

(2) Holders of at least 25% in principal amount of the total outstanding Notes of such series have requested the Trustee to pursue the remedy;

(3) Holders of the Notes of such series have offered the Trustee reasonable security or indemnity against any loss, liability or expense;

(4) the Trustee has not complied with such request within 60 days after the receipt thereof and the offer of security or indemnity; and

(5) Holders of a majority in principal amount of the total outstanding Notes of such series have not given the Trustee a direction inconsistent with such request within such 60-day period.

Subject to certain restrictions, under each Indenture the Holders of a majority in principal amount of the total outstanding Notes issued thereunder are given the right to direct the time, method and place of conducting any proceeding for any remedy available to the Trustee or of exercising any trust or power conferred on the Trustee. The Trustee, however, may refuse to follow any direction that conflicts with law or the applicable Indenture or that the Trustee determines is unduly prejudicial to the rights of any other Holder of a Note of such series or that would involve the Trustee in personal liability.

Each Indenture provides that the Issuers are required to deliver to the Trustee annually a statement regarding compliance with such Indenture, and the Issuers are required, within 30 days, upon becoming aware of any Default, to deliver to the Trustee a statement specifying such Default.

No Personal Liability of Directors, Officers, Employees and Stockholders

No director, officer, employee, incorporator, member or stockholder of the Issuers or any Guarantor or any of their parent companies has any liability for any obligations of the Issuers or the Guarantors under the Notes, the Guarantees or the Indentures or for any claim based on, in respect of, or by reason of such obligations or their creation. Each Holder by accepting Notes waives and releases all such liability. The waiver and release are part of the consideration for issuance of the Notes. Such waiver may not be effective to waive liabilities under the federal securities laws and it is the view of the SEC that such a waiver is against public policy.

146

Legal Defeasance and Covenant Defeasance

The obligations of the Issuers and the Guarantors under each Indenture will terminate (other than certain obligations) and will be released upon payment in full of all of the Notes issued thereunder. The Issuers may, at their option and at any time, elect to have all of their obligations discharged with respect to either series of Notes and have each Guarantor’s obligation discharged with respect to its Guarantee of such Notes (“Legal Defeasance”) and cure all then existing Events of Default except for:

(1) the rights of Holders of such series of Notes to receive payments in respect of the principal of, premium, if any, and interest on such Notes when such payments are due solely out of the trust created pursuant to the applicable Indenture;

(2) the Issuers’ obligations with respect to such Notes concerning issuing temporary Notes, registration of such Notes, mutilated, destroyed, lost or stolen Notes and the maintenance of an office or agency for payment and money for security payments held in trust;

(3) the rights, powers, trusts, duties and immunities of the Trustee, and the Issuers’ obligations in connection therewith; and

(4) the Legal Defeasance provisions of the applicable Indenture.

In addition, the Issuers may, at their option and at any time, elect to have their obligations and those of each Guarantor released with respect to substantially all the restrictive covenants that are described in the applicable Indenture (“Covenant Defeasance”) and thereafter any omission to comply with such obligations shall not constitute a Default with respect to the Notes issued thereunder. In the event Covenant Defeasance occurs with respect to an Indenture, certain events (not including bankruptcy, receivership, rehabilitation and insolvency events pertaining to the Issuers) described under “Events of Default and Remedies” will no longer constitute an Event of Default with respect to the Notes issued thereunder.

In order to exercise either Legal Defeasance or Covenant Defeasance with respect to a series of Notes:

(1) the Issuers must irrevocably deposit with the Trustee, in trust, for the benefit of the Holders of the applicable Notes, cash in U.S. dollars, Government Securities, or a combination thereof, in such amounts as will be sufficient, in the opinion of a nationally recognized firm of independent public accountants, to pay the principal of, premium, if any, and interest due on such Notes on the stated maturity date or on the redemption date, as the case may be, of such principal, premium, if any, or interest on such Notes and the Issuers must specify whether such Notes are being defeased to maturity or to a particular redemption date;

(2) in the case of Legal Defeasance, the Issuers shall have delivered to the Trustee an Opinion of Counsel reasonably acceptable to the Trustee confirming that, subject to customary assumptions and exclusions,

(a) the Issuers have received from, or there has been published by, the United States Internal Revenue Service a ruling, or

(b) since the issuance of the Notes of such series, there has been a change in the applicable U.S. federal income tax law,

in either case to the effect that, and based thereon such Opinion of Counsel shall confirm that, subject to customary assumptions and exclusions, the Holders of the applicable Notes will not recognize income, gain or loss for U.S. federal income tax purposes, as applicable, as a result of such Legal Defeasance and will be subject to U.S. federal income tax on the same amounts, in the same manner and at the same times as would have been the case if such Legal Defeasance had not occurred;

(3) in the case of Covenant Defeasance, the Issuers shall have delivered to the Trustee an Opinion of Counsel reasonably acceptable to the Trustee confirming that, subject to customary assumptions and exclusions,

147

the Holders of the applicable Notes will not recognize income, gain or loss for U.S. federal income tax purposes as a result of such Covenant Defeasance and will be subject to such tax on the same amounts, in the same manner and at the same times as would have been the case if such Covenant Defeasance had not occurred;

(4) no Default (other than that resulting from borrowing funds to be applied to make such deposit and the granting of Liens in connection therewith) shall have occurred and be continuing on the date of such deposit;

(5) such Legal Defeasance or Covenant Defeasance shall not result in a breach or violation of, or constitute a default under the Senior Credit Facilities or any other material agreement or instrument (other than the applicable Indenture) to which, the Issuers or any Guarantor is a party or by which the Issuers or any Guarantor is bound;

(6) the Issuers shall have delivered to the Trustee an Opinion of Counsel to the effect that, as of the date of such opinion and subject to customary assumptions and exclusions following the deposit, the trust funds will not be subject to the effect of Section 547 of Title 11 of the United States Code;

(7) the Issuers shall have delivered to the Trustee an Officer’s Certificate stating that the deposit was not made by the Issuers with the intent of defeating, hindering, delaying or defrauding any creditors of the Issuers or any Guarantor or others; and

(8) the Issuers shall have delivered to the Trustee an Officer’s Certificate and an Opinion of Counsel (which Opinion of Counsel may be subject to customary assumptions and exclusions) each stating that all conditions precedent provided for or relating to the Legal Defeasance or the Covenant Defeasance, as the case may be, have been complied with.

Satisfaction and Discharge

Each Indenture will be discharged and will cease to be of further effect as to all Notes issued thereunder, when either:

(1) all Notes theretofore authenticated and delivered under such Indenture, except lost, stolen or destroyed Notes which have been replaced or paid and Notes for whose payment money has theretofore been deposited in trust, have been delivered to the Trustee for cancellation; or

(2) (a) all Notes issued under such Indenture not theretofore delivered to the Trustee for cancellation have become due and payable by reason of the making of a notice of redemption or otherwise, will become due and payable within one year or are to be called for redemption within one year under arrangements satisfactory to the Trustee for the giving of notice of redemption by the Trustee in the name, and at the expense, of the Issuers and the Issuers or any Guarantor have irrevocably deposited or caused to be deposited with the Trustee as trust funds in trust solely for the benefit of the Holders of the Notes issued under such Indenture, cash in U.S. dollars, Government Securities, or a combination thereof, in such amounts as will be sufficient without consideration of any reinvestment of interest to pay and discharge the entire indebtedness on the Notes issued under such Indenture not theretofore delivered to the Trustee for cancellation for principal, premium, if any, and accrued interest to the date of maturity or redemption;

(b) no Default (other than that resulting from borrowing funds to be applied to make such deposit) with respect to the applicable Indenture or the Notes issued thereunder shall have occurred and be continuing on the date of such deposit or shall occur as a result of such deposit and such deposit will not result in a breach or violation of, or constitute a default under the Senior Credit Facilities or any other material agreement or instrument (other than the applicable Indenture) to which the Issuers or any Guarantor is a party or by which the Issuers or any Guarantor is bound;

(c) the Issuers have paid or caused to be paid all sums payable by it under the applicable Indenture; and

148

(d) the Issuers have delivered irrevocable instructions to the Trustee to apply the deposited money toward the payment of the Notes issued under such Indenture at maturity or the redemption date, as the case may be.

In addition, the Issuers must deliver an Officer’s Certificate and an Opinion of Counsel to the Trustee stating that all conditions precedent to satisfaction and discharge have been satisfied.

Amendment, Supplement and Waiver

Except as provided in the next two succeeding paragraphs, each Indenture, the Notes issued thereunder and any Guarantee may be amended or supplemented with the consent of the Holders of at least a majority in principal amount of the Notes issued thereunder then outstanding, including consents obtained in connection with a purchase of, or tender offer or exchange offer for, such Notes, and any existing Default or compliance with any provision of the applicable Indenture or the Notes issued thereunder may be waived with the consent of the Holders of a majority in principal amount of the then outstanding Notes issued thereunder, other than Notes beneficially owned by the Issuers or their Affiliates (including consents obtained in connection with a purchase of or tender offer or exchange offer for the applicable Notes).

Each Indenture provides that, without the consent of each affected Holder of Notes issued thereunder, an amendment or waiver may not, with respect to any such Notes held by a non-consenting Holder:

(1) reduce the principal amount of such Notes whose Holders must consent to an amendment, supplement or waiver;

(2) reduce the principal of or change the fixed final maturity of any such Note or alter or waive the provisions with respect to the redemption of such Notes (other than provisions relating to the covenants described above under the caption “Repurchase at the Option of Holders”);

(3) reduce the rate of or change the time for payment of interest on any such Note;

(4) waive a Default in the payment of principal of or premium, if any, or interest on such Notes, except a rescission of acceleration of such Notes by the Holders of at least a majority in aggregate principal amount of such Notes and a waiver of the payment default that resulted from such acceleration, or in respect of a covenant or provision contained in the applicable Indenture or any Guarantee which cannot be amended or modified without the consent of all Holders of such series of Notes;

(5) make any such Note payable in money other than that stated therein;

(6) make any change in the provisions of the applicable Indenture relating to waivers of past Defaults or the rights of Holders to receive payments of principal of or premium, if any, or interest on the Notes issued thereunder;

(7) make any change in these amendment and waiver provisions;

(8) impair the right of any Holder of such Notes to receive payment of principal of, or interest on such Holder’s applicable Notes on or after the due dates therefor or to institute suit for the enforcement of any payment on or with respect to such Holder’s Notes;

(9) make any change in the subordination provisions thereof that would adversely affect the Holders of such Notes; or

(10) except as expressly permitted by the applicable Indenture, modify the Guarantees of any Significant Subsidiary in any manner adverse to the Holders of the Notes issued thereunder.

149

Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Issuers, any Guarantor (with respect to a Guarantee or the Indentures to which it is a party) and the Trustee may amend or supplement each Indenture and any Guarantee or Notes without the consent of any Holder:

(1) to cure any ambiguity, omission, mistake, defect or inconsistency;

(2) to provide for uncertificated Notes of such series in addition to or in place of certificated Notes;

(3) to comply with the covenant relating to mergers, consolidations and sales of assets;

(4) to provide the assumption of the Issuers’ or any Guarantor’s obligations to the Holders;

(5) to make any change that would provide any additional rights or benefits to the Holders or that does not adversely affect the legal rights under the applicable Indenture of any such Holder;

(6) to add covenants for the benefit of the Holders or to surrender any right or power conferred upon the Issuers or any Guarantor;

(7) to comply with requirements of the SEC in order to effect or maintain the qualification of the applicable Indenture under the Trust Indenture Act;

(8) to evidence and provide for the acceptance and appointment under the applicable Indenture of a successor Trustee thereunder pursuant to the requirements thereof;

(9) to provide for the issuance of exchange notes or private exchange notes, which are identical to exchange notes except that they are not freely transferable;

(10) to add a Guarantor under the applicable Indenture;

(11) to conform the text of the applicable Indenture, Guarantees or the Notes to any provision of this “Description of Notes” to the extent that such provision in this “Description of Notes” was intended to be a verbatim recitation of a provision of such Indenture, Guarantee or Notes;

(12) to make any amendment to the provisions of the applicable Indenture relating to the transfer and legending of Notes as permitted by the applicable Indenture, including, without limitation to facilitate the issuance and administration of the Notes; provided, however, that (i) compliance with the applicable Indenture as so amended would not result in Notes being transferred in violation of the Securities Act or any applicable securities law and (ii) such amendment does not materially and adversely affect the rights of Holders to transfer Notes; or

(13) to make any other modifications to the Notes or the Indentures of a formal, minor or technical nature or necessary to correct a manifest error, so long as such modification does not adversely affect the rights of any Holder of the Notes in any material respect.

The consent of the Holders is not necessary under either Indenture to approve the particular form of any proposed amendment. It is sufficient if such consent approves the substance of the proposed amendment.

Notices

Notices given by publication will be deemed given on the first date on which publication is made and notices given by first-class mail, postage prepaid, will be deemed given five calendar days after mailing.

150

Concerning the Trustee

Each Indenture contains certain limitations on the rights of the Trustee thereunder, should it become a creditor of the Issuers, to obtain payment of claims in certain cases, or to realize on certain property received in respect of any such claim as security or otherwise. The Trustee will be permitted to engage in other transactions; however, if it acquires any conflicting interest it must eliminate such conflict within 90 days, apply to the SEC for permission to continue or resign.

Each Indenture provides that the Holders of a majority in principal amount of the outstanding Notes issued thereunder will have the right to direct the time, method and place of conducting any proceeding for exercising any remedy available to the Trustee, subject to certain exceptions. The Indentures provide that in case an Event of Default shall occur (which shall not be cured), the Trustee will be required, in the exercise of its power, to use the degree of care of a prudent person in the conduct of his own affairs. Subject to such provisions, the Trustee is under no obligation to exercise any of its rights or powers under the Indentures at the request of any Holder of the Notes, unless such Holder shall have offered to the Trustee security and indemnity satisfactory to it against any loss, liability or expense.

Governing Law

Each Indenture, the Notes and any Guarantee are governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of New York.

Certain Definitions

Set forth below are certain defined terms used in each Indenture. For purposes of each Indenture, unless otherwise specifically indicated, the term “consolidated” with respect to any Person refers to such Person consolidated with its Restricted Subsidiaries, and excludes from such consolidation any Unrestricted Subsidiary as if such Unrestricted Subsidiary were not an Affiliate of such Person.

“Acquired Indebtedness” means, with respect to any specified Person,

(1) Indebtedness of any other Person existing at the time such other Person is merged with or into or became a Restricted Subsidiary of such specified Person, including Indebtedness incurred in connection with, or in contemplation of, such other Person merging with or into or becoming a Restricted Subsidiary of such specified Person, and

(2) Indebtedness secured by a Lien encumbering any asset acquired by such specified Person.

“Acquisition” means the transactions contemplated by the Transaction Agreement.

“Additional Interest” means all additional interest then owing pursuant to the Registration Rights Agreement.

“Affiliate” of any specified Person means any other Person directly or indirectly controlling or controlled by or under direct or indirect common control with such specified Person. For purposes of this definition, “control” (including, with correlative meanings, the terms “controlling,” “controlled by” and “under common control with”), as used with respect to any Person, shall mean the possession, directly or indirectly, of the power to direct or cause the direction of the management or policies of such Person, whether through the ownership of voting securities, by agreement or otherwise.

“Applicable Premium” means, with respect to any Note on any Redemption Date, the greater of:

(1) 1.0% of the principal amount of such Note; and

151

(2) the excess, if any, of (a) the present value at such Redemption Date of (i) the redemption price of such Note at June 1, 2010 in the case of the Senior Notes and June 1, 2011 in the case of the Senior Subordinated Notes (each such redemption price being set forth in the table appearing above under the caption “Optional Redemption”), plus (ii) all required interest payments due on such Note through June 1, 2010 in the case of the Senior Notes and June 1, 2011 in the case of the Senior Subordinated Notes (excluding accrued but unpaid interest to the Redemption Date), computed using a discount rate equal to the Treasury Rate as of such Redemption Date plus 50 basis points in the case of the Senior Notes and 50 basis points in the case of the Senior Subordinated Notes; over (b) the principal amount of such Note.

“Asset Sale” means:

(1) the sale, conveyance, transfer or other disposition, whether in a single transaction or a series of related transactions, of property or assets (including by way of a Sale and Lease-Back Transaction) of the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries (each referred to in this definition as a “disposition”); or

(2) the issuance or sale of Equity Interests of any Restricted Subsidiary (other than Preferred Stock of Restricted Subsidiaries issued in compliance with the covenant described under “—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock”), whether in a single transaction or a series of related transactions;

in each case, other than:

(a) any disposition of Cash Equivalents or obsolete or worn out equipment in the ordinary course of business or any disposition of inventory or goods (or other assets) held for sale in the ordinary course of business;

(b) the disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company in a manner permitted pursuant to the provisions described above under “Certain Covenants—Merger, Consolidation or Sale of All or Substantially All Assets” or any disposition that constitutes a Change of Control pursuant to the Indenture;

(c) the making of any Restricted Payment or Permitted Investment that is permitted to be made, and is made, under the covenant described above under “Certain Covenants—Limitation on Restricted Payments”;

(d) any disposition of assets or issuance or sale of Equity Interests of any Restricted Subsidiary in any transaction or series of transactions with an aggregate fair market value of less than $10.0 million;

(e) any disposition of property or assets or issuance of securities by a Restricted Subsidiary of the Company to the Company or by the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary of the Company to another Restricted Subsidiary of the Company;

(f) to the extent allowable under Section 1031 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, any exchange of like property (excluding any boot thereon) for use in a Similar Business;

(g) the lease, assignment or sub-lease of any real or personal property in the ordinary course of business;

(h) any issuance or sale of Equity Interests in, or Indebtedness or other securities of, an Unrestricted Subsidiary;

(i) foreclosures on assets; and

(j) any financing transaction with respect to property built or acquired by the Issuer or any Restricted Subsidiary after the Issue Date, including Sale and Lease-Back Transactions and asset securitizations permitted by the Indenture.

“Business Day” means each day which is not a Legal Holiday.

152

“Capital Stock” means:

(1) in the case of a corporation, corporate stock;

(2) in the case of an association or business entity, any and all shares, interests, participations, rights or other equivalents (however designated) of corporate stock;

(3) in the case of a partnership or limited liability company, partnership or membership interests (whether general or limited); and

(4) any other interest or participation that confers on a Person the right to receive a share of the profits and losses of, or distributions of assets of, the issuing Person.

“Capitalized Lease Obligation” means, at the time any determination thereof is to be made, the amount of the liability in respect of a capital lease that would at such time be required to be capitalized and reflected as a liability on a balance sheet (excluding the footnotes thereto) in accordance with GAAP.

“Cash Equivalents” means:

(1) United States dollars;

(2) such local currencies held by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary from time to time in the ordinary course of business;

(3) securities issued or directly and fully and unconditionally guaranteed or insured by the U.S. government (or any agency or instrumentality thereof the securities of which are unconditionally guaranteed as a full faith and credit obligation of such government), with maturities of 24 months or less from the date of acquisition;

(4) certificates of deposit, time deposits and eurodollar time deposits with maturities of one year or less from the date of acquisition, bankers’ acceptances with maturities not exceeding one year and overnight bank deposits, in each case with any commercial bank having capital and surplus of not less than $500.0 million in the case of U.S. banks and $100.0 million (or the U.S. dollar equivalent as of the date of determination) in the case of non-U.S. banks;

(5) repurchase obligations for underlying securities of the types described in clauses (3) and (4) entered into with any financial institution meeting the qualifications specified in clause (4) above;

(6) commercial paper rated at least P-1 by Moody’s or at least A-1 by S&P and in each case maturing within 24 months after the date of creation thereof;

(7) marketable short-term money market and similar securities having a rating of at least P-2 or A-2 from either Moody’s or S&P, respectively (or, if at any time neither Moody’s nor S&P shall be rating such obligations, an equivalent rating from another Rating Agency) and in each case maturing within 24 months after the date of creation thereof;

(8) investment funds investing 95% of their assets in securities of the types described in clauses (1) through (7) above;

(9) readily marketable direct obligations issued by any state, commonwealth or territory of the United States or any political subdivision or taxing authority thereof having an Investment Grade Rating from either Moody’s or S&P with maturities of 24 months or less from the date of acquisition;

(10) Indebtedness or Preferred Stock issued by Persons with a rating of “A” or higher from S&P or “A2” or higher from Moody’s with maturities of 24 months or less from the date of acquisition; and

153

(11) Investments with average maturities of 24 months or less from the date of acquisition in money market funds rated AAA- (or the equivalent thereof) or better by S&P or Aaa3 (or the equivalent thereof) or better by Moody’s.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, Cash Equivalents shall include amounts denominated in currencies other than those set forth in clauses (1) and (2) above, provided that such amounts are converted into any currency listed in clauses (1) and (2) as promptly as practicable and in any event within ten Business Days following the receipt of such amounts.

“Change of Control” means the occurrence of any of the following:

(1) the sale, lease or transfer, in one or a series of related transactions, of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company and its Subsidiaries, taken as a whole, to any Person other than a Permitted Holder; or

(2) the Company becomes aware of (by way of a report or any other filing pursuant to Section 13(d) of the Exchange Act, proxy, vote, written notice or otherwise) the acquisition by any Person or group (within the meaning of Section 13(d)(3) or Section 14(d)(2) of the Exchange Act, or any successor provision), including any group acting for the purpose of acquiring, holding or disposing of securities (within the meaning of Rule 13d-5(b)(1) under the Exchange Act), other than the Permitted Holders, in a single transaction or in a related series of transactions, by way of merger, consolidation or other business combination or purchase of beneficial ownership (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 under the Exchange Act, or any successor provision) of 50% or more of the total voting power of the Voting Stock of the Company or any of its direct or indirect parent companies holding directly or indirectly 100% of the total voting power of the Voting Stock of the Company.

“Company” has the meaning set forth in the first paragraph under “General”; provided that when used in the context of determining the fair market value of an asset or liability under the Indenture, “Company” shall be deemed to mean the board of directors of the Company when the fair market value is equal to or in excess of $50.0 million (unless otherwise expressly stated).

“Consolidated Depreciation and Amortization Expense” means with respect to any Person for any period, the total amount of depreciation and amortization expense, including the amortization of deferred financing fees of such Person and its Restricted Subsidiaries for such period on a consolidated basis and otherwise determined in accordance with GAAP.

“Consolidated Interest Expense” means, with respect to any Person for any period, without duplication, the sum of:

(1) consolidated interest expense of such Person and its Restricted Subsidiaries for such period, to the extent such expense was deducted (and not added back) in computing Consolidated Net Income (including (a) amortization of original issue discount resulting from the issuance of Indebtedness at less than par, (b) all commissions, discounts and other fees and charges owed with respect to letters of credit or bankers acceptances, (c) non-cash interest payments (but excluding any non-cash interest expense attributable to the movement in the mark to market valuation of Hedging Obligations or other derivative instruments pursuant to GAAP), (d) the interest component of Capitalized Lease Obligations, and (e) net payments, if any, pursuant to interest rate Hedging Obligations with respect to Indebtedness, and excluding (v) accretion or accrual of discounted liabilities not constituting Indebtedness, (w) any expense resulting from the discounting of any Indebtedness in connection with the application of purchase accounting in connection with any acquisition, (x) any Additional Interest with respect to either series of Notes, (y) amortization of deferred financing fees, debt issuance costs, commissions, fees and expenses, and (z) any expensing of bridge, commitment and other financing fees; plus

(2) consolidated capitalized interest of such Person and its Restricted Subsidiaries for such period, whether paid or accrued; less

154

(3) interest income for such period.

For purposes of this definition, interest on a Capitalized Lease Obligation shall be deemed to accrue at an interest rate reasonably determined by such Person to be the rate of interest implicit in such Capitalized Lease Obligation in accordance with GAAP.

“Consolidated Net Income” means, with respect to any Person for any period, the aggregate of the Net Income, of such Person and its Restricted Subsidiaries for such period, on a consolidated basis, and otherwise determined in accordance with GAAP; provided, however, that, without duplication,

(1) any after-tax effect of extraordinary, non-recurring or unusual gains or losses (less all fees and expenses relating thereto) or expenses (including relating to the Transactions to the extent incurred on or prior to June 30, 2007), severance, relocation costs and curtailments or modifications to pension and post-retirement employee benefit plans and other restructuring costs, shall be excluded,

(2) the Net Income for such period shall not include the cumulative effect of a change in accounting principles during such period,

(3) any after-tax effect of income (loss) from disposed or discontinued operations and any net after-tax gains or losses on disposal of disposed, abandoned or discontinued operations shall be excluded, and

(4) any after-tax effect of gains or losses (less all fees and expenses relating thereto) attributable to asset dispositions other than in the ordinary course of business, as determined in good faith by the Company, shall be excluded,

(5) the Net Income for such period of any Person that is not a Subsidiary, or is an Unrestricted Subsidiary, or that is accounted for by the equity method of accounting, shall be excluded; provided that Consolidated Net Income of the Company shall be increased by the amount of dividends or distributions or other payments that are actually paid in cash (or to the extent converted into cash) to the referent Person or a Restricted Subsidiary thereof in respect of such period,

(6) solely for the purpose of determining the amount available for Restricted Payments under clause (3)(a) of the first paragraph of “Certain Covenants—Limitation on Restricted Payments,” the Net Income for such period of any Restricted Subsidiary (other than any Guarantor) shall be excluded if the declaration or payment of dividends or similar distributions by that Restricted Subsidiary of its Net Income is not at the date of determination wholly permitted without any prior governmental approval (which has not been obtained) or, directly or indirectly, by the operation of the terms of its charter or any agreement, instrument, judgment, decree, order, statute, rule, or governmental regulation applicable to that Restricted Subsidiary or its stockholders, unless such restriction with respect to the payment of dividends or similar distributions has been legally waived, provided that Consolidated Net Income of the Company will be increased by the amount of dividends or other distributions or other payments actually paid in cash (or to the extent converted into cash) to the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary thereof in respect of such period, to the extent not already included therein,

(7) effects of adjustments (including the effects of such adjustments pushed down to the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries) in the property and equipment, software and other intangible assets, deferred revenue and debt line items in such Person’s consolidated financial statements pursuant to GAAP resulting from the application of purchase accounting in relation to the Transactions or any consummated acquisition or the amortization or write-off of any amounts thereof, net of taxes, shall be excluded,

(8) any after-tax effect of income (loss) from the early extinguishment of Indebtedness or Hedging Obligations or other derivative instruments shall be excluded,

155

(9) any impairment charge or asset write-off, in each case, pursuant to GAAP and the amortization of intangibles arising pursuant to GAAP shall be excluded,

(10) any non-cash compensation expense recorded from grants of stock appreciation or similar rights, stock options, restricted stock or other rights shall be excluded, and

(11) accruals and reserves that are established within twelve months after the Issue Date that are so required to be established as a result of the Transactions in accordance with GAAP shall be excluded.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, for the purpose of the covenant described under “Certain Covenants—Limitation on Restricted Payments” only (other than clause (3)(d) thereof), there shall be excluded from Consolidated Net Income any income arising from any sale or other disposition of Restricted Investments made by the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries, any repurchases and redemptions of Restricted Investments from the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries, any repayments of loans and advances which constitute Restricted Investments by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries, any sale of the stock of an Unrestricted Subsidiary or any distribution or dividend from an Unrestricted Subsidiary, in each case only to the extent such amounts increase the amount of Restricted Payments permitted under such covenant pursuant to clause (3)(d) thereof.

“Consolidated Net Tangible Assets” means the total amount of assets (less applicable reserves and other properly deductible items) after deducting (i) all current liabilities (excluding the amount of those which are by their terms extendable or renewable at the option of the obligor to a date more than 12 months after the date as of which the amount is being determined) and (2) all goodwill, tradenames, patents, unamortized debt discount and expense and other intangible assets, all as set forth on the most recent balance sheet of the Company and its consolidated Restricted Subsidiaries and determined in accordance with GAAP.

“Consolidated Secured Debt Ratio” as of any date of determination means, the ratio of (1) Consolidated Total Indebtedness of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries that is secured by Liens as of such date to (2) the Company’s EBITDA for the most recently ended four full fiscal quarters for which internal financial statements are available immediately preceding the date on which such event for which such calculation is being made shall occur, in each case with such pro forma adjustments to Consolidated Total Indebtedness and EBITDA as are appropriate and consistent with the pro forma adjustment provisions set forth in the definition of Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio.

“Consolidated Total Indebtedness” means, as at any date of determination, an amount equal to the sum of (1) the aggregate amount of all outstanding Indebtedness of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries on a consolidated basis consisting of Indebtedness for borrowed money, Obligations in respect of Capitalized Lease Obligations and debt obligations evidenced by promissory notes and similar instruments (and any such Indebtedness of another Person guaranteed, or secured by a lien on any assets of, the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries) and (2) the aggregate amount of all outstanding Disqualified Stock of the Company and all Preferred Stock of its Restricted Subsidiaries on a consolidated basis, with the amount of such Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock equal to the greater of their respective voluntary or involuntary liquidation preferences and maximum fixed repurchase prices, in each case determined on a consolidated basis in accordance with GAAP. For purposes hereof, the “maximum fixed repurchase price” of any Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock that does not have a fixed repurchase price shall be calculated in accordance with the terms of such Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock as if such Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock were purchased on any date on which Consolidated Total Indebtedness shall be required to be determined pursuant to the Indenture, and if such price is based upon, or measured by, the fair market value of such Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock, such fair market value shall be determined reasonably and in good faith by the Company.

“Contingent Obligations” means, with respect to any Person, any obligation of such Person guaranteeing any leases, dividends or other obligations that do not constitute Indebtedness (“primary obligations”) of any

156

other Person (the “primary obligor”) in any manner, whether directly or indirectly, including, without limitation, any obligation of such Person, whether or not contingent,

(1) to purchase any such primary obligation or any property constituting direct or indirect security therefor,

(2) to advance or supply funds

(a) for the purchase or payment of any such primary obligation, or

(b) to maintain working capital or equity capital of the primary obligor or otherwise to maintain the net worth or solvency of the primary obligor, or

(3) to purchase property, securities or services primarily for the purpose of assuring the owner of any such primary obligation of the ability of the primary obligor to make payment of such primary obligation against loss in respect thereof.

“Credit Facilities” means, with respect to the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries, one or more debt facilities, including the Senior Credit Facilities, or other financing arrangements (including, without limitation, commercial paper facilities or indentures) providing for revolving credit loans, term loans, letters of credit or other long-term indebtedness, including any notes, mortgages, guarantees, collateral documents, instruments and agreements executed in connection therewith, and any amendments, supplements, modifications, extensions, renewals, restatements or refundings thereof and any indentures or credit facilities or commercial paper facilities that replace, refund or refinance any part of the loans, notes, other credit facilities or commitments thereunder, including any such replacement, refunding or refinancing facility or indenture that increases the amount permitted to be borrowed thereunder or alters the maturity thereof (provided that such increase in borrowings is permitted under “Certain Covenants—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock”) or adds Restricted Subsidiaries as additional borrowers or guarantors thereunder and whether by the same or any other agent, lender or group of lenders.

“Default” means any event that is, or with the passage of time or the giving of notice or both would be, an Event of Default.

“Designated Non-cash Consideration” means the fair market value of non-cash consideration received by the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary in connection with an Asset Sale that is so designated as Designated Non-cash Consideration pursuant to an Officer’s Certificate, setting forth the basis of such valuation, executed by the principal financial officer of the Company, less the amount of cash or Cash Equivalents received in connection with a subsequent sale of or collection on such Designated Non-cash Consideration.

“Designated Preferred Stock” means Preferred Stock of the Company or any parent company thereof (in each case other than Disqualified Stock) that is issued for cash (other than to a Restricted Subsidiary or an employee stock ownership plan or trust established by the Company or any of its Subsidiaries) and is so designated as Designated Preferred Stock, pursuant to an Officer’s Certificate executed by the principal financial officer of the Company or the applicable parent corporation thereof, as the case may be, on the issuance date thereof, the cash proceeds of which are excluded from the calculation set forth in clause (3) of the first paragraph of the “Certain Covenants—Limitation on Restricted Payments” covenant.

“Designated Senior Indebtedness” means:

(1) any Indebtedness outstanding under the Senior Credit Facilities; and

(2) any other Senior Indebtedness permitted under the Subordinated Indenture, the principal amount of which is $50.0 million or more and that has been designated by the Company as “Designated Senior Indebtedness.”

“Disqualified Stock” means, with respect to any Person, any Capital Stock of such Person which, by its terms, or by the terms of any security into which it is convertible or for which it is putable or exchangeable, or

157

upon the happening of any event, matures or is mandatorily redeemable (other than solely as a result of a change of control or asset sale) pursuant to a sinking fund obligation or otherwise, or is redeemable at the option of the holder thereof (other than solely as a result of a change of control or asset sale), in whole or in part, in each case prior to the date 91 days after the earlier of the maturity date of the Notes issued under such Indenture or the date the applicable Notes are no longer outstanding; provided, however, that if such Capital Stock is issued to any plan for the benefit of employees of the Company or its Subsidiaries or by any such plan to such employees, such Capital Stock shall not constitute Disqualified Stock solely because it may be required to be repurchased by the Company or its Subsidiaries in order to satisfy applicable statutory or regulatory obligations.

“EBITDA” means, with respect to any Person for any period, the Consolidated Net Income of such Person for such period

(1) increased (without duplication) by:

(a) provision for taxes based on income or profits or capital, including, without limitation, state, franchise and similar taxes (such as the Pennsylvania capital tax) and foreign withholding taxes of such Person paid or accrued during such period deducted (and not added back) in computing Consolidated Net Income; plus

(b) Fixed Charges of such Person for such period (including (x) net losses or Hedging Obligations or other derivative instruments entered into for the purpose of hedging interest rate risk and (y) costs of surety bonds in connection with financing activities, in each case, to the extent included in Fixed Charges) to the extent the same was deducted (and not added back) in calculating such Consolidated Net Income; plus

(c) Consolidated Depreciation and Amortization Expense of such Person for such period to the extent the same were deducted (and not added back) in computing Consolidated Net Income; plus

(d) any expenses or charges (other than depreciation or amortization expense) related to any Equity Offering, Permitted Investment, acquisition, disposition, recapitalization or the incurrence of Indebtedness permitted to be incurred by the applicable Indenture (including a refinancing thereof) (whether or not successful), including (i) such fees, expenses or charges related to the offering of the Notes and the Credit Facilities and (ii) any amendment or other modification of the Notes, and, in each case, deducted (and not added back) in computing Consolidated Net Income; plus

(e) the amount of any restructuring charge or reserve deducted (and not added back) in such period in computing Consolidated Net Income, including any one-time costs incurred in connection with acquisitions after the Issue Date and costs related to the closure and/or consolidation of facilities; plus

(f) any other non-cash charges, including any write offs or write downs, reducing Consolidated Net Income for such period (other than any such non-cash charges that represent an accrual or reserve for potential cash items in any future period, and excluding amortization of a prepaid cash item that was paid in a prior period); plus

(g) the amount of any minority interest expense consisting of Subsidiary income attributable to minority equity interests of third parties in any non-Wholly-Owned Subsidiary deducted (and not added back) in such period in calculating Consolidated Net Income; plus

(h) the amount of management, monitoring, consulting and advisory fees and related expenses paid in such period to the Investors to the extent otherwise permitted under clause (3) of “Certain Covenants—Transactions with Affiliates”; plus

(i) any costs or expense incurred by the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary pursuant to any management equity plan or stock option plan or any other management or employee benefit plan or agreement or any stock subscription or shareholder agreement reducing Consolidated Net Income, to the extent that such cost or expenses are funded with cash proceeds contributed to the capital of the Company as equity (other than Disqualified Stock) or net cash proceeds of an issuance of Equity Interest of the Company

158

(other than Disqualified Stock) solely to the extent that such net cash proceeds are excluded from the calculation set forth in clause (3) of the first paragraph under “Certain Covenants—Limitation on Restricted Payments” and the calculation set forth in clause (12) under “Certain Covenants—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuances of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock”; plus

(j) any fees and expenses incurred during such period, or any amortization thereof for such period, in connection with any acquisition, disposition, Investment, Asset Sale, issuance or repayment of Indebtedness, issuance of Equity Interests, refinancing transaction or amendment or modification of any debt instrument (in each case, including any such transaction consummated prior to the Issue Date and any such transaction undertaken but not completed) and any charges or non-recurring merger costs incurred during such period as a result of any such transaction shall be excluded;

(2) decreased by (without duplication) non-cash gains increasing Consolidated Net Income of such Person for such period, excluding any non-cash gains to the extent they represent the reversal of an accrual or reserve for a potential cash item that reduced EBITDA in any prior period, and

(3) increased or decreased by (without duplication):

(a) any net gain or loss resulting in such period from Hedging Obligations and the application of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 133; plus or minus, as applicable,

(b) any net gain or loss resulting in such period from currency translation gains or losses related to currency remeasurements of Indebtedness (including any net loss or gain resulting from hedge agreements for currency exchange risk).

“EMU” means economic and monetary union as contemplated in the Treaty on European Union.

“Equity Interests” means Capital Stock and all warrants, options or other rights to acquire Capital Stock, but excluding any debt security that is convertible into, or exchangeable for, Capital Stock.

“Equity Offering” means any public or private sale of common stock or Preferred Stock (excluding Disqualified Stock) of the Company or any of its direct or indirect parent companies to the extent contributed to the Company as common equity, other than:

(1) public offerings with respect to the Company’s or any direct or indirect parent company’s common stock registered on Form S-8;

(2) issuances to any Subsidiary of the Company; and

(3) any such public or private sale that constitutes an Excluded Contribution.

“euro” means the single currency of participating member states of the EMU.

“Exchange Act” means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and the rules and regulations of the SEC promulgated thereunder.

“Excluded Contribution” means net cash proceeds, marketable securities or Qualified Proceeds received by the Company from

(1) contributions to its common equity capital, and

(2) the sale (other than to a Subsidiary of the Company or to any management equity plan or stock option plan or any other management or employee benefit plan or agreement of the Company) of Capital Stock (other than Disqualified Stock and Designated Preferred Stock) of the Company,

159

in each case designated as Excluded Contributions pursuant to an officer’s certificate executed by the principal financial officer of the Company on the date such capital contributions are made or the date such Equity Interests are sold, as the case may be, which are excluded from the calculation set forth in clause (3) of the first paragraph under “Certain Covenants—Limitation on Restricted Payments.”

“Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio” means, with respect to any Person for any period, the ratio of EBITDA of such Person for such period to the Fixed Charges of such Person for such period. In the event that the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary incurs, assumes, guarantees, redeems, retires, defeases or extinguishes any Indebtedness (other than Indebtedness repaid under any revolving credit facility unless such Indebtedness has been permanently repaid and has not been replaced) or issues or redeems Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock subsequent to the commencement of the period for which the Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio is being calculated but prior to or simultaneously with the event for which the calculation of the Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio is made (the “Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio Calculation Date”), then the Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio shall be calculated giving pro forma effect to such incurrence, assumption, guarantee, redemption, retirement, defeasance or extinguishment of Indebtedness, or such issuance or redemption of Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock, as if the same had occurred at the beginning of the applicable four-quarter period.

For purposes of making the computation referred to above, Investments, acquisitions, dispositions, mergers, consolidations and disposed operations (as determined in accordance with GAAP) that have been made by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries during the four-quarter reference period or subsequent to such reference period and on or prior to or simultaneously with the Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio Calculation Date shall be calculated on a pro forma basis assuming that all such Investments, acquisitions, dispositions, mergers, consolidations and disposed operations (and the change in any associated fixed charge obligations and the change in EBITDA resulting therefrom) had occurred on the first day of the four-quarter reference period. If since the beginning of such period any Person that subsequently became a Restricted Subsidiary or was merged with or into the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries since the beginning of such period shall have made any Investment, acquisition, disposition, merger, consolidation or disposed operation that would have required adjustment pursuant to this definition, then the Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio shall be calculated giving pro forma effect thereto for such period as if such Investment, acquisition, disposition, merger, consolidation or disposed operation had occurred at the beginning of the applicable four-quarter period.

For purposes of this definition, whenever pro forma effect is to be given to a transaction, the pro forma calculations shall be made in good faith by a responsible financial or accounting officer of the Company. If any Indebtedness bears a floating rate of interest and is being given pro forma effect, the interest on such Indebtedness shall be calculated as if the rate in effect on the Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio Calculation Date had been the applicable rate for the entire period (taking into account any Hedging Obligations applicable to such Indebtedness). Interest on a Capitalized Lease Obligation shall be deemed to accrue at an interest rate reasonably determined by a responsible financial or accounting officer of the Company to be the rate of interest implicit in such Capitalized Lease Obligation in accordance with GAAP. For purposes of making the computation referred to above, interest on any Indebtedness under a revolving credit facility computed on pro forma basis shall be computed based upon the average daily balance of such Indebtedness during the applicable period except as set forth in the first paragraph of this definition. Interest on Indebtedness that may optionally be determined at an interest rate based upon a factor of a prime or similar rate, a eurocurrency interbank offered rate, or other rate, shall be deemed to have been based upon the rate actually chosen, or, if none, then based upon such optional rate chosen as the Company may designate.

“Fixed Charges” means, with respect to any Person for any period, the sum of:

(1) Consolidated Interest Expense of such Person for such period;

(2) all cash dividends or other distributions paid (excluding items eliminated in consolidation) on any series of Preferred Stock during such period; and

160

(3) all dividends or other distributions accrued (excluding items eliminated in consolidation) on any series of Disqualified Stock during such period.

“Foreign Subsidiary” means, with respect to any Person, any Restricted Subsidiary of such Person that is not organized or existing under the laws of the United States, any State thereof, the District of Columbia, or any territory thereof and any Restricted Subsidiary of such Foreign Subsidiary.

“GAAP” means generally accepted accounting principles in the United States which are in effect on the Issue Date.

“Government Securities” means securities that are:

(1) direct obligations of the United States of America for the timely payment of which its full faith and credit is pledged; or

(2) obligations of a Person controlled or supervised by and acting as an agency or instrumentality of the United States of America the timely payment of which is unconditionally guaranteed as a full faith and credit obligation by the United States of America,

which, in either case, are not callable or redeemable at the option of the issuers thereof, and shall also include a depository receipt issued by a bank (as defined in Section 3(a)(2) of the Securities Act), as custodian with respect to any such Government Securities or a specific payment of principal of or interest on any such Government Securities held by such custodian for the account of the holder of such depository receipt; provided that (except as required by law) such custodian is not authorized to make any deduction from the amount payable to the holder of such depository receipt from any amount received by the custodian in respect of the Government Securities or the specific payment of principal of or interest on the Government Securities evidenced by such depository receipt.

“guarantee” means a guarantee (other than by endorsement of negotiable instruments for collection in the ordinary course of business), direct or indirect, in any manner (including letters of credit and reimbursement agreements in respect thereof), of all or any part of any Indebtedness or other obligations.

“Guarantee” means the guarantee by any Guarantor of the Issuers’ Obligations under the Indentures.

“Guarantor” means each Restricted Subsidiary that Guarantees the Notes in accordance with the terms of the applicable Indenture.

“Hedging Obligations” means, with respect to any Person, the obligations of such Person under any interest rate swap agreement, interest rate cap agreement, interest rate collar agreement, commodity swap agreement, commodity cap agreement, commodity collar agreement, foreign exchange contract, currency swap agreement or similar agreement providing for the transfer or mitigation of interest rate or currency risks either generally or under specific contingencies.

“Holder” means the Person in whose name a Note is registered on the registrar’s books.

“Indebtedness” means, with respect to any Person, without duplication:

(1) any indebtedness (including principal and premium) of such Person, whether or not contingent:

(a) in respect of borrowed money;

(b) evidenced by bonds, notes, debentures or similar instruments or letters of credit or bankers’ acceptances (or, without duplication, reimbursement agreements in respect thereof);

161

(c) representing the balance deferred and unpaid of the purchase price of any property (including Capitalized Lease Obligations), except (i) any such balance that constitutes a trade payable or similar obligation to a trade creditor, in each case accrued in the ordinary course of business and (ii) any earn-out obligations until such obligation becomes a liability on the balance sheet of such Person in accordance with GAAP; or

(d) representing any Hedging Obligations;

if and to the extent that any of the foregoing Indebtedness (other than letters of credit and Hedging Obligations) would appear as a liability upon a balance sheet (excluding the footnotes thereto) of such Person prepared in accordance with GAAP;

(2) to the extent not otherwise included, any obligation by such Person to be liable for, or to pay, as obligor, guarantor or otherwise, on the obligations of the type referred to in clause (1) of a third Person (whether or not such items would appear upon the balance sheet of the such obligor or guarantor), other than by endorsement of negotiable instruments for collection in the ordinary course of business; and

(3) to the extent not otherwise included, the obligations of the type referred to in clause (1) of a third Person secured by a Lien on any asset owned by such first Person, whether or not such Indebtedness is assumed by such first Person;

provided, however, that notwithstanding the foregoing, Indebtedness shall be deemed not to include Contingent Obligations incurred in the ordinary course of business.

“Independent Financial Advisor” means an accounting, appraisal, investment banking firm or consultant to Persons engaged in Similar Businesses of nationally recognized standing that is, in the good faith judgment of the Company, qualified to perform the task for which it has been engaged.

“Initial Purchasers” means Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC, Goldman, Sachs & Co., Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated and Banc of America Securities LLC.

“Investment Grade Rating” means a rating equal to or higher than Baa3 (or the equivalent) by Moody’s and BBB (or the equivalent) by S&P, or an equivalent rating by any other Rating Agency.

“Investments” means, with respect to any Person, all investments by such Person in other Persons (including Affiliates) in the form of loans (including guarantees), advances or capital contributions (excluding accounts receivable, trade credit, advances to customers, commission, travel and similar advances to officers and employees, in each case made in the ordinary course of business), purchases or other acquisitions for consideration of Indebtedness, Equity Interests or other securities issued by any other Person and investments that are required by GAAP to be classified on the balance sheet (excluding the footnotes) of the Company in the same manner as the other investments included in this definition to the extent such transactions involve the transfer of cash or other property. For purposes of the definition of “Unrestricted Subsidiary” and the covenant described under “Certain Covenants—Limitation on Restricted Payments”:

(1) “Investments” shall include the portion (proportionate to the Company’s equity interest in such Subsidiary) of the fair market value of the net assets of a Subsidiary of the Company at the time that such Subsidiary is designated an Unrestricted Subsidiary; provided, however, that upon a redesignation of such Subsidiary as a Restricted Subsidiary, the Company shall be deemed to continue to have a permanent “Investment” in an Unrestricted Subsidiary in an amount (if positive) equal to:

(a) the Company’s “Investment” in such Subsidiary at the time of such redesignation; less

(b) the portion (proportionate to the Company’s equity interest in such Subsidiary) of the fair market value of the net assets of such Subsidiary at the time of such redesignation; and

162

(2) any property transferred to or from an Unrestricted Subsidiary shall be valued at its fair market value at the time of such transfer, in each case as determined in good faith by the Company.

“Investors” means Goldman Sachs Capital Partners, Providence Equity Partners, Inc. (and Leeds Equity Partners, if it exercises the option to purchase equity of the Company’s parent outstanding on the Issue Date) and each of their respective Affiliates but not including, however, any portfolio companies of any of the foregoing.

“Issue Date” means June 1, 2006.

“Issuers” has the meaning set forth in the first paragraph under “General”.

“Legal Holiday” means a Saturday, a Sunday or a day on which commercial banking institutions are not required to be open in the State of New York.

“Lien” means, with respect to any asset, any mortgage, lien (statutory or otherwise), pledge, hypothecation, charge, security interest, preference, priority or encumbrance of any kind in respect of such asset, whether or not filed, recorded or otherwise perfected under applicable law, including any conditional sale or other title retention agreement, any lease in the nature thereof, any option or other agreement to sell or give a security interest in and any filing of or agreement to give any financing statement under the Uniform Commercial Code (or equivalent statutes) of any jurisdiction; provided that in no event shall an operating lease be deemed to constitute a Lien.

“Moody’s” means Moody’s Investors Service, Inc. and any successor to its rating agency business.

“Net Income” means, with respect to any Person, the net income (loss) of such Person, determined in accordance with GAAP and before any reduction in respect of Preferred Stock dividends.

“Net Proceeds” means the aggregate cash proceeds received by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries in respect of any Asset Sale, including any cash received upon the sale or other disposition of any Designated Non-cash Consideration received in any Asset Sale, net of the direct costs relating to such Asset Sale and the sale or disposition of such Designated Non-cash Consideration, including legal, accounting and investment banking fees, and brokerage and sales commissions, any relocation expenses incurred as a result thereof, taxes paid or payable as a result thereof (after taking into account any available tax credits or deductions and any tax sharing arrangements), amounts required to be applied to the repayment of principal, premium, if any, and interest on Secured Indebtedness, in the case of the Senior Notes, and Senior Indebtedness, in the case of the Senior Subordinated Notes, required (other than required by clause (1) of the second paragraph of “Repurchase at the Option of Holders—Asset Sales”) to be paid as a result of such transaction and any deduction of appropriate amounts to be provided by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries as a reserve in accordance with GAAP against any liabilities associated with the asset disposed of in such transaction and retained by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries after such sale or other disposition thereof, including pension and other post-employment benefit liabilities and liabilities related to environmental matters or against any indemnification obligations associated with such transaction.

“Obligations” means any principal, interest (including any interest accruing subsequent to the filing of a petition in bankruptcy, reorganization or similar proceeding at the rate provided for in the documentation with respect thereto, whether or not such interest is an allowed claim under applicable state, federal or foreign law), penalties, fees, indemnifications, reimbursements (including reimbursement obligations with respect to letters of credit and banker’s acceptances), damages and other liabilities, and guarantees of payment of such principal, interest, penalties, fees, indemnifications, reimbursements, damages and other liabilities, payable under the documentation governing any Indebtedness.

“Officer” means the Chairman of the Board, the Chief Executive Officer, the President, any Executive Vice President, Senior Vice President or Vice President, the Treasurer or the Secretary of the applicable Issuer.

163

“Officer’s Certificate” means a certificate signed on behalf of each Issuer by an Officer of such Issuer, who must be the principal executive officer, the principal financial officer, the treasurer or the principal accounting officer of such Issuer, that meets the requirements set forth in the Indenture.

“Opinion of Counsel” means a written opinion from legal counsel who is acceptable to the Trustee. The counsel may be an employee of or counsel to the Issuers or the Trustee.

“Permitted Asset Swap” means the concurrent purchase and sale or exchange of Related Business Assets or a combination of Related Business Assets and cash or Cash Equivalents between the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries and another Person; provided, that any cash or Cash Equivalents received must be applied in accordance with the “Repurchase at the Option of Holders—Asset Sales” covenant.

“Permitted Holders” means each of the Investors and members of management of the Company (or its direct parent) who are holders of Equity Interests of the Company (or any of its direct or indirect parent companies) on the Issue Date and any group (within the meaning of Section 13(d)(3) or Section 14(d)(2) of the Exchange Act or any successor provision) of which any of the foregoing are members; provided, that, in the case of such group and without giving effect to the existence of such group or any other group, such Investors and members of management, collectively, have beneficial ownership of more than 50% of the total voting power of the Voting Stock of the Company or any of its direct or indirect parent companies.

“Permitted Investments” means:

(1) any Investment in the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries;

(2) any Investment in cash and Cash Equivalents;

(3) any Investment by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries in a Person that is engaged in a Similar Business if as a result of such Investment:

(a) such Person becomes a Restricted Subsidiary; or

(b) such Person, in one transaction or a series of related transactions, is merged or consolidated with or into, or transfers or conveys substantially all of its assets to, or is liquidated into, the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary,

and, in each case, any Investment held by such Person; provided, that such Investment was not acquired by such Person in contemplation of such acquisition, merger, consolidation or transfer;

(4) any Investment in securities or other assets not constituting cash or Cash Equivalents received in connection with an Asset Sale made pursuant to the provisions of “Repurchase at the Option of Holders—Asset Sales” or any other disposition of assets not constituting an Asset Sale;

(5) any Investment existing on the Issue Date;

(6) any Investment acquired by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries:

(a) in exchange for any other Investment or accounts receivable held by the Company or any such Restricted Subsidiary in connection with or as a result of a bankruptcy, workout, reorganization or recapitalization of the issuer of such other Investment or accounts receivable; or

(b) as a result of a foreclosure by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries with respect to any secured Investment or other transfer of title with respect to any secured Investment in default;

(7) Hedging Obligations permitted under clause (10) of the covenant described in “Certain Covenants—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock”;

164

(8) any Investment in a Similar Business having an aggregate fair market value, taken together with all other Investments made pursuant to this clause (8) that are at that time outstanding, not to exceed 3.0% of Total Assets at the time of such Investment (with the fair market value of each Investment being measured at the time made and without giving effect to subsequent changes in value);

(9) Investments the payment for which consists of Equity Interests (exclusive of Disqualified Stock) of the Company, or any of its direct or indirect parent companies; provided, however, that such Equity Interests will not increase the amount available for Restricted Payments under clause (3) of the first paragraph under the covenant described in “Certain Covenants—Limitations on Restricted Payments”;

(10) guarantees of Indebtedness permitted under the covenant described in “Certain Covenants—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock”;

(11) Investments consisting of purchases and acquisitions of inventory, supplies, material or equipment;

(12) additional Investments having an aggregate fair market value, taken together with all other Investments made pursuant to this clause (12) that are at that time outstanding (without giving effect to the sale of an Unrestricted Subsidiary to the extent the proceeds of such sale do not consist of cash or marketable securities), not to exceed 1.5% of Total Assets at the time of such Investment (with the fair market value of each Investment being measured at the time made and without giving effect to subsequent changes in value);

(13) advances to, or guarantees of Indebtedness of, employees not in excess of $5.0 million outstanding at any one time, in the aggregate;

(14) loans and advances to officers, directors and employees for business-related travel expenses, moving expenses and other similar expenses, in each case incurred in the ordinary course of business or consistent with past practices or to fund such Person’s purchase of Equity Interests of the Company or any direct or indirect parent company thereof; and

(15) any transaction to the extent it constitutes an Investment that is permitted and made in accordance with the provisions of the second paragraph of the covenant described under “Certain Covenants—Transactions with Affiliates” (except transactions described in clauses (2), (6), (7) and (9) of such paragraph).

“Permitted Junior Securities” means:

(1) Equity Interests in the Company, any Guarantor or any direct or indirect parent of the Company; or

(2) unsecured debt securities that are subordinated to all Senior Indebtedness (and any debt securities issued in exchange for Senior Indebtedness) to substantially the same extent as, or to a greater extent than, the Senior Subordinated Notes and the related Guarantees are subordinated to Senior Indebtedness under the Subordinated Indenture;

provided that the term “Permitted Junior Securities” shall not include any securities distributed pursuant to a plan of reorganization if the Indebtedness under the Senior Credit Facilities is treated as part of the same class as the Senior Subordinated Notes for purposes of such plan of reorganization; provided further that to the extent that any Senior Indebtedness of the Issuers or the Guarantors outstanding on the date of consummation of any such plan of reorganization is not paid in full in cash on such date, the holders of any such Senior Indebtedness not so paid in full in cash have consented to the terms of such plan of reorganization.

“Permitted Liens” means, with respect to any Person:

(1) pledges or deposits by such Person under workmen’s compensation laws, unemployment insurance laws or similar legislation, or good faith deposits in connection with bids, tenders, contracts (other than for the

165

payment of Indebtedness) or leases to which such Person is a party, or deposits to secure public or statutory obligations of such Person or deposits of cash or U.S. government bonds to secure surety or appeal bonds to which such Person is a party, or deposits as security for contested taxes or import duties or for the payment of rent, in each case incurred in the ordinary course of business;

(2) Liens imposed by law, such as carriers’, warehousemen’s and mechanics’ Liens, in each case for sums not yet overdue for a period of more than 30 days or being contested in good faith by appropriate proceedings or other Liens arising out of judgments or awards against such Person with respect to which such Person shall then be proceeding with an appeal or other proceedings for review if adequate reserves with respect thereto are maintained on the books of such Person in accordance with GAAP;

(3) Liens for taxes, assessments or other governmental charges not yet overdue for a period of more than 30 days or payable or subject to penalties for nonpayment or which are being contested in good faith by appropriate proceedings diligently conducted, if adequate reserves with respect thereto are maintained on the books of such Person in accordance with GAAP;

(4) Liens in favor of the issuers of performance and surety bonds or bid bonds or with respect to other regulatory requirements or letters of credit issued pursuant to the request of and for the account of such Person in the ordinary course of its business;

(5) minor survey exceptions, minor encumbrances, easements or reservations of, or rights of others for, licenses, rights-of-way, sewers, electric lines, telegraph and telephone lines and other similar purposes, or zoning or other restrictions as to the use of real properties or Liens incidental, to the conduct of the business of such Person or to the ownership of its properties which were not incurred in connection with Indebtedness and which do not in the aggregate materially adversely affect the value of said properties or materially impair their use in the operation of the business of such Person;

(6) Liens securing Indebtedness permitted to be incurred pursuant to clauses (1) (“Credit Facility Indebtedness”), (4), 12(b) or (18) of the second paragraph under “Certain Covenants—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock” provided that Liens securing Indebtedness permitted to be incurred pursuant to clause (18) extend only to the assets of Foreign Subsidiaries;

(7) Liens existing on the Issue Date;

(8) Liens on property or shares of stock of a Person at the time such Person becomes a Subsidiary; provided, however, such Liens are not created or incurred in connection with, or in contemplation of, such other Person becoming such a Subsidiary; provided, further, however, that such Liens may not extend to any other property owned by the Issuers or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries;

(9) Liens on property at the time the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary acquired the property, including any acquisition by means of a merger or consolidation with or into the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries; provided, however, that such Liens are not created or incurred in connection with, or in contemplation of, such acquisition; provided, further, however, that the Liens may not extend to any other property owned by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries;

(10) Liens securing Indebtedness or other obligations of a Restricted Subsidiary owing to the Company or another Restricted Subsidiary permitted to be incurred in accordance with the covenant described under “Certain Covenants—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock”;

(11) Liens securing Hedging Obligations so long as related Indebtedness is, and is permitted to be under the applicable Indenture, secured by a Lien on the same property securing such Hedging Obligations;

166

(12) Liens on specific items of inventory of other goods and proceeds of any Person securing such Person’s obligations in respect of bankers’ acceptances issued or created for the account of such Person to facilitate the purchase, shipment or storage of such inventory or other goods;

(13) leases, subleases, licenses or sublicenses granted to others in the ordinary course of business which do not materially interfere with the ordinary conduct of the business of the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries and do not secure any Indebtedness;

(14) Liens arising from Uniform Commercial Code financing statement filings regarding operating leases entered into by the Issuers and its Restricted Subsidiaries in the ordinary course of business;

(15) Liens in favor of an Issuer or any Guarantor;

(16) Liens on equipment of the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries granted in the ordinary course of business to the Issuers’ clients;

(17) Liens to secure any refinancing, refunding, extension, renewal or replacement (or successive refinancing, refunding, extensions, renewals or replacements) as a whole, or in part, of any Indebtedness secured by any Lien referred to in the foregoing clauses (6) (other than Liens securing Credit Facility Indebtedness), (7), (8) and (9); provided, however, that (a) such new Lien shall be limited to all or part of the same property that secured the original Lien (plus improvements on such property), and (b) the Indebtedness secured by such Lien at such time is not increased to any amount greater than the sum of (i) the outstanding principal amount or, if greater, committed amount of the Indebtedness described under clauses (6), (7), (8) and (9) at the time the original Lien became a Permitted Lien under the applicable Indenture, and (ii) an amount necessary to pay any fees and expenses, including premiums, related to such refinancing, refunding, extension, renewal or replacement;

(18) deposits made in the ordinary course of business to secure liability to insurance carriers;

(19) other Liens securing obligations incurred in the ordinary course of business which obligations do not exceed $15.0 million at any one time outstanding;

(20) Liens securing judgments for the payment of money not constituting an Event of Default under clause (5) under the caption “Events of Default and Remedies” so long as such Liens are adequately bonded and any appropriate legal proceedings that may have been duly initiated for the review of such judgment have not been finally terminated or the period within which such proceedings may be initiated has not expired;

(21) Liens in favor of customs and revenue authorities arising as a matter of law to secure payment of customs duties in connection with the importation of goods in the ordinary course of business;

(22) Liens (i) of a collection bank arising under Section 4-210 of the Uniform Commercial Code or any comparable or successor provision on items in the course of collection, (ii) attaching to commodity trading accounts or other commodity brokerage accounts incurred in the ordinary course of business, and (iii) in favor of banking institutions arising as a matter of law encumbering deposits (including the right of set-off) and which are within the general parameters customary in the banking industry;

(23) Liens deemed to exist in connection with Investments in repurchase agreements permitted under “Certain Covenants—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock”; provided that such Liens do not extend to any assets other than those that are the subject of such repurchase agreement;

(24) Liens encumbering reasonable customary initial deposits and margin deposits and similar Liens attaching to commodity trading accounts or other brokerage accounts incurred in the ordinary course of business and not for speculative purposes;

167

(25) Liens that are contractual rights of set-off (i) relating to the establishment of depository relations with banks not given in connection with the issuance of Indebtedness, (ii) relating to pooled deposit or sweep accounts of the Issuers or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries to permit satisfaction of overdraft or similar obligations incurred in the ordinary course of business of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries or (iii) relating to purchase orders and other agreements entered into with customers of the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries in the ordinary course of business; and

(26) during a Suspension Period only, Liens securing Indebtedness, and Indebtedness represented by Sale and Leaseback Transactions, in an amount that does not exceed 15% of Consolidated Net Tangible Assets of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries at any one time outstanding.

For purposes of this definition, the term “Indebtedness” shall be deemed to include interest on such Indebtedness. Additionally, solely for purposes of this definition and the covenant described under “Certain Covenants—Liens,” any Indebtedness incurred during a Suspension Period that could have been incurred in compliance with an applicable provision under the covenant described under “Certain Covenants—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Incurrence of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock,” were such covenant in effect at such time, may be deemed by the Company to have been so incurred.

“Person” means any individual, corporation, limited liability company, partnership, joint venture, association, joint stock company, trust, unincorporated organization, government or any agency or political subdivision thereof or any other entity.

“Preferred Stock” means any Equity Interest with preferential rights of payment of dividends or upon liquidation, dissolution, or winding up.

“Qualified Proceeds” means assets that are used or useful in, or Capital Stock of any Person engaged in, a Similar Business; provided that the fair market value of any such assets or Capital Stock shall be determined by the Company in good faith.

“Rating Agencies” means Moody’s and S&P or if Moody’s or S&P or both shall not make ratings on the Notes publicly available, a nationally recognized statistical rating agency or agencies, as the case may be, selected by the Issuers which shall be substituted for Moody’s or S&P or both, as the case may be.

“Registration Rights Agreement” means the Registration Rights Agreement with respect to the Notes dated as of the Issue Date, among the Issuers, the Guarantors and the Initial Purchasers.

“Related Business Assets” means assets (other than cash or Cash Equivalents) used or useful in a Similar Business, provided that any assets received by the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary in exchange for assets transferred by the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary shall not be deemed to be Related Business Assets if they consist of securities of a Person, unless upon receipt of the securities of such Person, such Person would become a Restricted Subsidiary.

“Representative” means any trustee, agent or representative (if any) for an issue of Senior Indebtedness of the Issuers.

“Restricted Investment” means an Investment other than a Permitted Investment.

“Restricted Subsidiary” means, at any time, any direct or indirect Subsidiary of the Company (including any Foreign Subsidiary) that is not then an Unrestricted Subsidiary; provided, however, that upon the occurrence of an Unrestricted Subsidiary ceasing to be an Unrestricted Subsidiary, such Subsidiary shall be included in the definition of “Restricted Subsidiary.”

168

“S&P” means Standard & Poor’s, a division of The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc., and any successor to its rating agency business.

“Sale and Lease-Back Transaction” means any arrangement providing for the leasing by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries of any real or tangible personal property, which property has been or is to be sold or transferred by the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary to a third Person in contemplation of such leasing.

“SEC” means the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission.

“Secured Indebtedness” means any Indebtedness of the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries secured by a Lien.

“Securities Act” means the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and the rules and regulations of the SEC promulgated thereunder.

“Senior Credit Facilities” means the Credit Facility under the Credit and Guaranty Agreement to be entered into as of the Issue Date by and among Holdco, the Company, the Guarantors party thereto, the lenders party thereto in their capacities as lenders thereunder and the Agents party thereto, including any guarantees, collateral documents, instruments and agreements executed in connection therewith, and any amendments, supplements, modifications, extensions, renewals, restatements, refundings or refinancings thereof and any indentures or credit facilities or commercial paper facilities with banks or other institutional lenders or investors that replace, refund or refinance any part of the loans, notes, other credit facilities or commitments thereunder, including any such replacement, refunding or refinancing facility or indenture that increases the amount borrowable thereunder or alters the maturity thereof (provided that such increase in borrowings is permitted under “Certain Covenants—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock” above).

“Senior Indebtedness” means, with respect to the Subordinated Indenture:

(1) all Indebtedness of the Issuers or any Guarantor outstanding under the Senior Credit Facilities or Senior Notes and related Guarantees (including interest accruing on or after the filing of any petition in bankruptcy or similar proceeding or for reorganization of any Issuer or any Guarantor (at the rate provided for in the documentation with respect thereto, regardless of whether or not a claim for post-filing interest is allowed in such proceedings)), and any and all other fees, expense reimbursement obligations, indemnification amounts, penalties, and other amounts (whether existing on the Issue Date or thereafter created or incurred) and all obligations of any Issuer or any Guarantor to reimburse any bank or other Person in respect of amounts paid under letters of credit, acceptances or other similar instruments;

(2) all Hedging Obligations (and guarantees thereof) owing to a Lender (as defined in the Senior Credit Facilities) or any Affiliate of such Lender (or any Person that was a Lender or an Affiliate of such Lender at the time the applicable agreement giving rise to such Hedging Obligation was entered into), provided that such Hedging Obligations are permitted to be incurred under the terms of the applicable Indenture;

(3) any other Indebtedness of the Issuers or any Guarantor permitted to be incurred under the terms of the Subordinated Indenture, unless the instrument under which such Indebtedness is incurred expressly provides that it is on a parity with or subordinated in right of payment to the Senior Subordinated Notes or any related Guarantee; and

(4) all Obligations with respect to the items listed in the preceding clauses (1), (2) and (3);

provided, however, that Senior Indebtedness shall not include:

(a) any obligation of such Person to the Issuers or any of its Subsidiaries;

169

(b) any liability for federal, state, local or other taxes owed or owing by such Person;

(c) any accounts payable or other liability to trade creditors arising in the ordinary course of business;

(d) any Indebtedness or other Obligation of such Person which is subordinate or junior in any respect to any other Indebtedness or other Obligation of such Person; or

(e) that portion of any Indebtedness which at the time of incurrence is incurred in violation of the Subordinated Indenture; provided, however that such Indebtedness shall be deemed not to have been incurred in violation of the Subordinated Indenture for purposes of this clause if such Indebtedness consists of Designated Senior Indebtedness, and the holder(s) of such Indebtedness of their agent or representative (a) had no actual knowledge at the time of incurrence that the incurrence of such Indebtedness violated the Indenture and (b) shall have received a certificate from an officer of the Issuers to the effect that the incurrence of such Indebtedness does not violate the provisions of the applicable Indenture.

“Senior Subordinated Indebtedness” means, with respect to the Subordinated Indenture:

(1) with respect to the Issuers, Indebtedness which ranks equal in right of payment to the Senior Subordinated Notes issued by the Issuers; and

(2) with respect to any Guarantor, Indebtedness which ranks equal in right of payment to the Guarantee of such entity of Senior Subordinated Notes.

“Significant Subsidiary” means (i) the Co-Issuer or (ii) any Restricted Subsidiary that would be a “significant subsidiary” as defined in Article 1, Rule 1-02 of Regulation S-X, promulgated pursuant to the Securities Act, as such regulation is in effect on the Issue Date.

“Similar Business” means any business conducted or proposed to be conducted by the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries on the Issue Date or any business that is similar, reasonably related, incidental or ancillary thereto.

“Sponsor Management Agreement” means the management agreement between certain of the management companies associated with the Investors and the Company or one of its direct or indirect parent companies as in effect on the Issue Date.

“Subordinated Indebtedness” means, with respect to each Indenture,

(1) any Indebtedness of the Issuers which is by its terms subordinated in right of payment to the Notes issued under such Indenture, and

(2) any Indebtedness of any Guarantor which is by its terms subordinated in right of payment to the Guarantee of such entity of the Notes issued under such Indenture.

“Subsidiary” means, with respect to any Person:

(1) any corporation, association, or other business entity (other than a partnership, joint venture, limited liability company or similar entity) of which more than 50% of the total voting power of shares of Capital Stock entitled (without regard to the occurrence of any contingency) to vote in the election of directors, managers or trustees thereof is at the time of determination owned or controlled, directly or indirectly, by such Person or one or more of the other Subsidiaries of that Person or a combination thereof or is consolidated under GAAP with such Person at such time; and

(2) any partnership, joint venture, limited liability company or similar entity of which

(x) more than 50% of the capital accounts, distribution rights, total equity and voting interests or general or limited partnership interests, as applicable, are owned or controlled, directly or indirectly, by such Person or one or more of the other Subsidiaries of that Person or a combination thereof whether in the form of membership, general, special or limited partnership or otherwise, and

170

(y) such Person or any Restricted Subsidiary of such Person is a controlling general partner or otherwise controls such entity.

“Total Assets” means the total assets of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries on a consolidated basis, as shown on the most recent balance sheet of the Company or such other Person as may be expressly stated.

“Transactions” means the merger contemplated by the Transaction Agreement, the issuance of the Senior Notes and the Senior Subordinated Notes and borrowings under the Senior Credit Facilities on the Issue Date to finance the merger and repay certain debt as described in the prospectus under “The Merger.”

“Transaction Agreement” means the Agreement and Plan of Merger dated as of March 3, 2006 between Education Management Corporation and EM Acquisition Corporation, as the same may be amended prior to the Issue Date.

“Treasury Rate” means, as of any Redemption Date, the yield to maturity as of such Redemption Date of United States Treasury securities with a constant maturity (as compiled and published in the most recent Federal Reserve Statistical Release H.15 (519) that has become publicly available at least two Business Days prior to the Redemption Date (or, if such Statistical Release is no longer published, any publicly available source of similar market data)) most nearly equal to the period from the Redemption Date to June 1, 2010 in the case of the Senior Notes or June 1, 2011 in the case of the Senior Subordinated Notes; provided, however, that if the period from the Redemption Date to such date is less than one year, the weekly average yield on actually traded United States Treasury securities adjusted to a constant maturity of one year will be used.

“Trust Indenture Act” means the Trust Indenture Act of 1939, as amended (15 U.S.C §§ 77aaa-777bbbb).

“Unrestricted Subsidiary” means:

(1) any Subsidiary of the Company which at the time of determination is an Unrestricted Subsidiary (as designated by the Company, as provided below); and

(2) any Subsidiary of an Unrestricted Subsidiary.

The Company may designate any Subsidiary of the Company (including any existing Subsidiary and any newly acquired or newly formed Subsidiary) to be an Unrestricted Subsidiary unless such Subsidiary or any of its Subsidiaries owns any Equity Interests or Indebtedness of, or owns or holds any Lien on, any property of, the Company or any Subsidiary of the Company (other than solely any Subsidiary of the Subsidiary to be so designated); provided that

(1) any Unrestricted Subsidiary must be an entity of which the Equity Interests entitled to cast at least a majority of the votes that may be cast by all Equity Interests having ordinary voting power for the election of directors or Persons performing a similar function are owned, directly or indirectly, by the Company;

(2) such designation complies with the covenants described under “Certain Covenants—Limitation on Restricted Payments”; and

(3) each of:

(a) the Subsidiary to be so designated; and

(b) its Subsidiaries

has not at the time of designation, and does not thereafter, create, incur, issue, assume, guarantee or otherwise become directly or indirectly liable with respect to any Indebtedness pursuant to which the lender has recourse to any of the assets of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary.

171

The Company may designate any Unrestricted Subsidiary to be a Restricted Subsidiary; provided that, immediately after giving effect to such designation, no Default shall have occurred and be continuing and either:

(1) the Company could incur at least $1.00 of additional Indebtedness pursuant to the Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio test described in the first paragraph under “Certain Covenants—Limitation on Incurrence of Indebtedness and Issuance of Disqualified Stock and Preferred Stock”; or

(2) the Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio for the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries would be greater than such ratio for the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries immediately prior to such designation,

in each case on a pro forma basis taking into account such designation.

Any such designation by the Company shall be notified by the Company to the Trustee by promptly filing with the Trustee a copy of the resolution of the board of directors of the Company or any committee thereof giving effect to such designation and an Officer’s Certificate certifying that such designation complied with the foregoing provisions.

“Voting Stock” of any Person as of any date means the Capital Stock of such Person that is at the time entitled to vote in the election of the board of directors of such Person.

“Weighted Average Life to Maturity” means, when applied to any Indebtedness, Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock, as the case may be, at any date, the quotient obtained by dividing:

(1) the sum of the products of the number of years from the date of determination to the date of each successive scheduled principal payment of such Indebtedness or redemption or similar payment with respect to such Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock multiplied by the amount of such payment; by

(2) the sum of all such payments.

“Wholly-Owned Subsidiary” of any Person means a Subsidiary of such Person, 100% of the outstanding Equity Interests of which (other than directors’ qualifying shares) shall at the time be owned by such Person or by one or more Wholly-Owned Subsidiaries of such Person.

172

CERTAIN UNITED STATES FEDERAL INCOME TAX CONSEQUENCES OF THE EXCHANGE OFFERS

The exchange of outstanding notes for exchange notes in the exchange offers will not constitute a taxable event to holders for United States federal income tax purposes. Consequently, no gain or loss will be recognized by a holder upon receipt of an exchange note, the holding period of the exchange note will include the holding period of the outstanding note exchanged therefor and the basis of the exchange note will be the same as the basis of the outstanding note immediately before the exchange.

In any event, persons considering the exchange of outstanding notes for exchange notes should consult their own tax advisors concerning the United States federal income tax consequences in light of their particular situations as well as any consequences arising under the laws of any other taxing jurisdiction.

173

CERTAIN ERISA CONSIDERATIONS

The outstanding notes or the exchange notes may be purchased and held by an employee benefit plan subject to Title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended (“ERISA”), or by an individual retirement account or other plan subject to Section 4975 of the Code. A fiduciary of an employee benefit plan subject to ERISA must, however, determine that the purchase and holding of a note is consistent with its fiduciary duties under ERISA. The fiduciary of an ERISA plan, as well as any other prospective investor subject to Section 4975 of the Code or any similar law, must also determine that the purchase and holding of notes does not result in a non-exempt prohibited transaction as defined in Section 406 of ERISA or Section 4975 of the Code or any similar law. Each purchaser and transferee of a note who is subject to Section 406 of ERISA and/or Section 4975 of the Code or any similar law (“Plan Investor”) will be deemed to have represented to us, by its acquisition and holding of the note, that its acquisition and holding of the notes does not constitute or give rise to a non-exempt prohibited transaction under Section 406 of ERISA, Section 4975 of the Code or any similar law. The sale of any notes to any Plan Investor is in no respect a representation by us or any of our affiliates or representatives that such an investment meets all relevant legal requirements with respect to investments by Plan Investors generally or any particular Plan Investor, or that such an investment is appropriate for Plan Investors generally or any particular Plan Investor.

174

PLAN OF DISTRIBUTION

Each broker-dealer that receives exchange notes for its own account pursuant to an exchange offer must acknowledge that it will deliver a prospectus in connection with any resale of such exchange notes. This prospectus, as it may be amended or supplemented from time to time, may be used by a broker-dealer in connection with resales of exchange notes received in exchange for outstanding notes where such outstanding notes were acquired as a result of market-making activities or other trading activities. We have agreed that, for a period of 180 days after the consummation of the exchange offers, they will make this prospectus, as amended or supplemented, available to any broker-dealer for use in connection with any such resale. In addition, all dealers effecting transactions in the exchange notes may be required to deliver a prospectus.

We will not receive any proceeds from any sale of exchange notes by broker-dealers. Exchange notes received by broker-dealers for their own account pursuant to an exchange offer may be sold from time to time in one or more transactions in the over-the-counter market, in negotiated transactions, through the writing of options on the exchange notes or a combination of such methods of resale, at market prices prevailing at the time of resale, at prices related to such prevailing market prices or at negotiated prices. Any such resale may be made directly to purchasers or through brokers or dealers. who may receive compensation in the form of commissions or concessions from any such broker-dealer and/or the purchasers of any such exchange notes. Any broker-dealer that resells exchange notes that were received by it for its own account pursuant to an exchange offer and any broker or dealer that participates in a distribution of such exchange notes may be deemed to be an “underwriter” within the meaning of the Securities Act and any profit of any such resale of exchange notes and any commission or concessions received by any such persons may be deemed to be underwriting compensation under the Securities Act. The letter of transmittal states that, by acknowledging that it will deliver and by delivering a prospectus, a broker-dealer will not be deemed to admit that it is an “underwriter” within the meaning of the Securities Act.

For a period of 180 days after the consummation of the registered exchange offers we will promptly send additional copies of this prospectus and any amendments or supplements to this prospectus to any broker-dealer that requests such documents in the letter of transmittal. We have agreed to pay all expenses incident to the exchange offers (including the expenses of one counsel for the holders of the outstanding notes) other than commissions or concessions of any broker-dealers and will indemnify you (including any broker-dealers) against certain liabilities, including liabilities under the Securities Act.

175

LEGAL MATTERS

Certain legal matters in connection with the exchange offers will be passed upon for us by Simpson Thacher & Bartlett LLP, New York, New York.

EXPERTS

The consolidated financial statements of Education Management LLC at June 30, 2006 and for the period from June 1, 2006 to June 30, 2006 and the consolidated financial statements of Education Management Corporation and Subsidiaries at June 30, 2005 and for the period from July 1, 2005 to May 31, 2006 and for the years ended June 30, 2005 and 2004 appearing in this Prospectus and Registration Statement have been audited by Ernst & Young LLP, independent registered public accounting firm, as set forth in their report thereon appearing elsewhere herein, and are included in reliance upon such report given on the authority of such firm as experts in accounting and auditing.

WHERE YOU CAN FIND MORE INFORMATION

We and our guarantor subsidiaries have filed with the SEC a registration statement on Form S-4 under the Securities Act with respect to the exchange notes. This prospectus, which forms a part of the registration statement, does not contain all of the information set forth in the registration statement. For further information with respect to us, our guarantor subsidiaries and the exchange notes, reference is made to the registration statement. Statements contained in this prospectus as to the contents of any contract or other document are not necessarily complete. We and our guarantor subsidiaries are not currently subject to the informational requirements of the Exchange Act. As a result of the offering of the exchange notes, we and our guarantor subsidiaries will become subject to the informational requirements of the Exchange Act, and, in accordance therewith, will file reports and other information with the SEC. The registration statements, such reports and other information can be inspected and copied at the Public Reference Room of the SEC located at Room 1580, 100 F Street, N.E., Washington D.C. 20549. Copies of such materials, including copies of all or any portion of the registration statement, can be obtained from the Public Reference Room of the SEC at prescribed rates. You can call the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330 to obtain information on the operation of the Public Reference Room. Such materials may also be accessed electronically by means of the SEC’s home page on the Internet (http://www.sec.gov).

So long as we and our guarantor subsidiaries are subject to the periodic reporting requirements of the Exchange Act, we and our guarantor subsidiaries are required to furnish the information required to be filed with the SEC to the trustee and the holders of the outstanding notes. We and our guarantor subsidiaries have agreed that, even if they are not required under the Exchange Act to furnish such information to the SEC, they will nonetheless continue to furnish information that would be required to be furnished by them and their guarantor subsidiaries by Section 13 of the Exchange Act, including a “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and, with respect to the annual information only, a report thereon by their certified independent accountants to the trustee and the holders of the outstanding notes or exchange notes as if they were subject to such periodic reporting requirements.

176

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC

INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Audited Financial Statements for the Years ended June 30, 2006, 2005 and 2004
Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm	F-2
Consolidated Balance Sheets	F-3
Consolidated Statements of Operations	F-4
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows	F-5
Consolidated Statements of Shareholders’ Equity	F-7
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements	F-8

F-1

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

The Board of Directors and Shareholders of Education Management LLC

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheet of Education Management LLC as of June 30, 2006 (Successor Company) and the consolidated balance sheet of Education Management Corporation and Subsidiaries as of June 30, 2005 (Predecessor Company), and the related consolidated statements of operations, shareholders’ equity, and cash flows of Education Management LLC for the period from June 1, 2006 to June 30, 2006 (Successor Company), and the consolidated statements of operations, shareholders’ equity, and cash flows of Education Management Corporation and Subsidiaries for the period from July 1, 2005 to May 31, 2006, and for the years ended June 30, 2005 and 2004 (Predecessor Company). These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

In our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of Education Management LLC at June 30, 2006 (Successor Company) and the consolidated financial position of Education Management Corporation and Subsidiaries at June 30, 2005 (Predecessor Company), and the consolidated results of Education Management LLC’s operations and their cash flows for the period from June 1, 2006 to June 30, 2006 (Successor Company), and the results of Education Management LLC’s operations and their cash flows for the period from July 1, 2005 to May 31, 2006, and for the years ended June 30, 2005 and 2004 (Predecessor Company), in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles.

As discussed in Note 2(p) to the Consolidated Financial Statements, the Company adopted Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 123(R), “Share-Based Payment”, effective July 1, 2005.

We also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the effectiveness of Education Management LLC’s internal control over financial reporting as of June 30, 2006, based on criteria established in Internal Control-Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission and our report dated September 11, 2006 (not presented herein) expressed an unqualified opinion thereon.

Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania

September 11, 2006

F-2

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS

(Dollars in thousands, except share and per share data)

	Successor			Predecessor
	As of June 30,
	2006			2005
Assets
Current assets:
Cash and cash equivalents	$	263,296		$	171,974
Restricted cash		10,036			4,892
Total cash, cash equivalents and restricted cash		273,332			176,866
Receivables:
Trade, net of allowances of $35,392 and $32,824		50,404			49,481
Notes, advances and other		7,828			8,487
Inventories		6,169			5,598
Deferred income taxes		23,645			13,870
Prepaid income taxes		26,635			16,173
Other current assets		15,190			9,203
Total current assets		403,203			279,678
Property and equipment, net		376,136			325,796
Other long-term assets		80,691			18,294
Intangible assets, net		517,383			17,499
Goodwill		2,568,034			314,760
Total assets	$	3,945,447		$	956,027
Liabilities and shareholders’ equity
Current liabilities:
Current portion of long-term debt	$	12,795		$	4,151
Revolver		160,000			62,000
Accounts payable		41,522			30,112
Accrued liabilities		75,948			52,581
Unearned tuition		36,641			29,411
Advance payments		110,390			54,383
Total current liabilities		437,296			232,638
Long-term debt, less current portion		1,937,170			4,269
Deferred income taxes		220,402			2,145
Deferred rent		61,051			45,369
Other long-term liabilities		6,769			5,596
Shareholders’ equity:
Predecessor:
Preferred Stock, par value $.01 per share; 10,000,000 shares authorized; no shares issued or outstanding		—			—
Common Stock, par value $0.01 per share; 120,000,000 shares authorized; 75,128,629 issued		—			751
Additional paid-in capital		—			328,972
Treasury stock 190,234 shares at cost		—			(1,791	)
Retained earnings		—			331,956
Accumulated other comprehensive income		—			6,122
Total Predecessor shareholders’ equity		—			666,010
Successor:
Capital contribution from Education Management Holdings LLC		1,300,000			—
Accumulated deficit		(19,659	)		—
Accumulated other comprehensive income		2,418			—
Total Successor shareholders’ equity		1,282,759			—
Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity	$	3,945,447		$	956,027

The accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements are an integral part of these statements.

F-3

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS

(Dollars in thousands)

	Successor			Predecessor
	Period from June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006			Period from July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006			For the fiscal years ended June 30,
							2005			2004
Net revenues	$	74,397		$	1,095,763		$	1,019,338		$	853,019
Costs and expenses:
Educational services		64,683			644,644			640,445			546,132
General and administrative		25,967			278,500			203,813			166,990
Amortization of intangible assets		1,709			3,960			6,492			6,911
Total Costs and Expenses		92,359			927,104			850,750			720,033
Income (loss) before interest and income taxes		(17,962	)		168,659			168,588			132,986
Interest (income) expense, net		14,106			(5,350	)		(220	)		2,475
Income (loss) before income taxes		(32,068	)		174,009			168,808			130,511
Provision (benefit) for income taxes		(12,409	)		73,603			67,234			53,497
Net income (loss)	$	(19,659	)	$	100,406		$	101,574		$	77,014

The accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements are an integral part of these statements.

F-4

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

(Dollars in thousands)

	Successor			Predecessor
	Period from June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006			Period from July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006			For the fiscal years ended June 30,
							2005			2004
Cash flows from operating activities:
Net income (loss)	$	(19,659	)	$	100,406		$	101,574		$	77,014
Adjustments to reconcile net income (loss) to net cash flows from operating activities:
Depreciation and amortization		5,676			58,936			58,166			48,376
Landlord allowances for tenant improvements		—			1,353			14,629			1,533
Amortization of intangibles		1,709			3,960			6,492			6,911
Non-cash charges in deferred rent		(407	)		(2,127	)		(692	)		1,861
Non-cash charges related to lease accounting—(Note 2i)		—			—			3,821			—
Stock-based compensation expense		—			32,219			1,044			871
Excess tax benefits from share based payments		—			(5,462	)		—			—
Deferred income taxes		1,199			(8,423	)		424			(2,232	)
Changes in current assets and liabilities:
Restricted cash		(5,293	)		149			1,522			(5,819	)
Receivables		14,675			(12,993	)		(5,703	)		(5,226	)
Inventories		(363	)		(182	)		(545	)		(128	)
Other assets		(3,589	)		(3,008	)		(1,826	)		3,154
Accounts payable		(1,533	)		8,782			2,117			4,126
Accrued liabilities		(26,965	)		77,286			(1,611	)		27,370
Unearned tuition		(52,348	)		59,440			8,927			(146	)
Advance payments		64,539			(8,672	)		4,158			8,611
Total adjustments		(2,700	)		201,258			90,923			89,262
Net cash flows (used in) provided by operating activities		(22,359	)		301,664			192,497			166,276
Cash flows used for investing activities:
Acquisition of Predecessor, net of cash acquired		(3,526,171	)		—			—			—
Acquisition of subsidiaries, net of cash acquired		—			(1,333	)		(12,298	)		(157,777	)
Expenditures for property, equipment & curriculum development		(7,664	)		(57,932	)		(74,883	)		(82,268	)
Landlord allowances for tenant improvements		—			(1,353	)		(14,629	)		(1,533	)
Investment in marketable securities		—			(832,221	)		(266,195	)		—
Redemption of marketable securities		—			832,221			266,195			—
Other items, net		(233	)		4,203			3,711			1,664
Net cash flows used in investing activities		(3,534,068	)		(56,415	)		(98,099	)		(239,914	)
Cash flows from financing activities:
Borrowings under revolving credit facility		210,000			—			72,500			608,245
Payments on revolving credit facility		(50,000	)		(62,000	)		(135,600	)		(518,145	)
Changes in debt balances		(91	)		(3,603	)		2,935			(78	)
Excess tax benefits from share based payments		—			5,462			—			—
Borrowings for the acquisition of Predecessor		1,945,000			—			—			—
Debt issue costs		(59,574	)		—			—			—
Capital contribution from Education Management Holdings LLC		1,300,000			—			—			—
Net proceeds received from stock option and award plans		100,186			16,450			21,169			12,018
Other		—			530			—			—
Net cash flows provided by (used in) financing activities		3,445,521			(43,161	)		(38,996	)		102,040
Effect of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents		124			16			(156	)		(631	)
Net change in cash and cash equivalents		(110,782	)		202,104			55,246			27,771
Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of year		374,078			171,974			116,728			88,957
Cash and cash equivalents, end of year	$	263,296		$	374,078		$	171,974		$	116,728

The accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements are an integral part of these statements.

F-5

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

Supplemental Disclosures of Cash Flow Information (in thousands):

	Successor		Predecessor
	Period from June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006		Period from July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006			For the fiscal years ended June 30,
						2005			2004
Cash paid during the period for:
Interest	$	175	$	674		$	1,108		$	1,779
Income taxes		1,001		41,037			80,182			34,233
Noncash investing and financing activities:
Expenditures in Accounts payable and Accrued liabilities at end of period for property, plant and equipment	$	10,772	$	8,165		$	6,310		$	6,538
Tax benefit for options exercised		—		5,462			10,441			10,460
Proceeds from stock option and award plans:
Proceeds received from issuance of shares and stock options exercised	$	100,186	$	21,912		$	31,610		$	22,478
Excess tax benefit for options exercised		—		(5,462	)		(10,441	)		(10,460	)
Total proceeds from stock option and award plans	$	100,186	$	16,450		$	21,169		$	12,018
Cash paid for acquisition of subsidiaries
Fair value of:
Assets acquired	$	—	$	—		$	—		$	190,210
Liabilities assumed		—		—			—			(14,515	)
		—		—			—			175,695
Cash acquired		—		—			—			(6,918	)
Notes payable		—		—			11,000			(11,000	)
Transaction and Merger expense		—		—			32			—
Contingent payments made		—		1,333			1,266			—
Net cash paid for acquisitions	$	—	$	1,333		$	12,298		$	157,777

The accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements are an integral part of these statements.

F-6

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY

(Dollars in thousands)

	Common Stock at Par Value		Additional Paid-in Capital		Treasury Stock			Retained Earnings (Accumulated Deficit)			Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income			Total
Predecessor
Balance, June 30, 2003	$	722	$	272,702	$	(1,495	)	$	153,368		$	2,482		$	427,779
Comprehensive income:
Net income		—		—		—			77,014			—			77,014
Foreign currency translation		—		—		—			—			545			545
Comprehensive income		—		—		—			—			—			77,559
Issuance of restricted stock		—		871		—			—			—			871
Exercise of stock options		13		10,101		—			—			—			10,114
Tax effect on stock option exercises		—		10,460		—			—			—			10,460
Stock issued under employee stock purchase plan		—		1,904		—			—			—			1,904
Balance, June 30, 2004		735		296,038		(1,495	)		230,382			3,027			528,687
Comprehensive income:
Net income		—		—		—			101,574			—			101,574
Foreign currency translation		—		—		—			—			3,095			3,095
Comprehensive income		—		—		—			—			—			104,669
Shares exchanged under stock based plan		—		—		(296	)		—			—			(296	)
Issuance of restricted stock		1		1,044		—			—			—			1,045
Exercise of stock options		15		18,779		—			—			—			18,794
Tax effect on stock option exercises		—		10,441											10,441
Stock issued under employee stock purchase plan		—		2,670		—			—			—			2,670
Balance, June 30, 2005		751		328,972		(1,791	)		331,956			6,122			666,010
Comprehensive income:
Net income		—		—		—			100,406			—			100,406
Foreign currency translation		—		—		—			—			2,348			2,348
Comprehensive income		—		—		—			—			—			102,754
Shares exchanged under stock based plan		—		—		(351	)		—			—			(351	)
Issuance of restricted stock		—		942		—			—			—			942
Restricted stock expense		—		17,176		—			—			—			17,176
Stock option expense		—		14,080		—			—			—			14,080
Exercise of stock options		8		15,338		—			—			—			15,346
Tax effect on stock compensation		—		5,463		—			—			—			5,463
Stock issued under employee stock purchase plan		1		1,985		—			—			—			1,986
Balance, May 31, 2006	$	760	$	383,956	$	(2,142	)	$	432,362		$	8,470		$	823,406
Successor
Capital contribution from Education Management Holdings LLC	$	—	$	1,300,000	$	—		$	—		$	—		$	1,300,000
Comprehensive loss:
Net loss		—		—		—			(19,659	)		—			(19,659	)
Foreign currency translation		—		—		—			—			(66	)		(66	)
Unrealized gain on interest rate swaps, net of tax		—		—		—			—			2,484			2,484
Comprehensive loss		—		—		—			—			—			(17,241	)
Balance, June 30, 2006	$	—	$	1,300,000	$	—		$	(19,659	)	$	2,418		$	1,282,759

The accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements are an integral part of these statements.

F-7

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1. DESCRIPTION OF BUSINESS, GOVERNANCE AND CHANGE IN OWNERSHIP:

(a) Description of Business

Education Management LLC and its subsidiaries (the Company) is among the largest providers of postsecondary education in North America, with more than 72,000 active students as of the fall of 2005. The Company offers education through four different educational systems including online platforms at three of the four educational systems (Art Institutes, Argosy University, Brown Mackie Colleges and South University). The schools provide students a wide variety of programmatic and degree choices in a flexible learning environment. The curriculum is designed with a distinct emphasis on applied career-oriented content and is primarily taught by faculty members that possess practical and relevant professional experience in their respective fields.

(b) Government Regulations

Each of the Company’s schools located in the United States is recognized by accreditation agencies and by the U.S. Department of Education, enabling students to access federal student loans, grants and other forms of public and private financial aid. Participating institutions are required to administer Title IV program funds in accordance with the Higher Education Act and U.S. Department of Education regulations and must use diligence in approving and disbursing funds and servicing loans. In the event a participating institution does not comply with federal requirements or if student loan default rates are at a level that exceeds certain thresholds set by statute and regulation, that institution could lose its eligibility to participate in Title IV programs or could be required to repay funds determined to have been improperly disbursed. Most of the students that attend the Company’s schools participate in federal and state financial aid and assistance programs.

(c) Change in Ownership

The Company is a wholly owned subsidiary of Education Management Holdings LLC, which is wholly owned by Education Management Corporation (EDMC or the Predecessor). On June 1, 2006, EDMC was acquired by a consortium of private equity investment funds led by Providence Equity Partners and Goldman Sachs Capital Partners (together, the Sponsors). The acquisition was accomplished through the merger of EM Acquisition Corporation into EDMC, with EDMC being the surviving company (the Transaction). Although EDMC continued as the same legal entity after the Transaction, EDMC contributed substantially all of its assets and liabilities to the Company in connection with the Transaction.

Pursuant to the terms of the merger agreement, all outstanding shares of EDMC’s common stock were cancelled in exchange for $43.00 per share in cash by investment funds designated by the Sponsors. The Sponsors, together with certain other investors, became the owners of EDMC. The Transaction was accounted for as a purchase in accordance with Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (SFAS) No. 141, “Business Combinations”. See Note 3. The accompanying consolidated balance sheets and consolidated statements of operations, cash flows and shareholders’ equity are presented for the Predecessor and Successor periods, which relate to the periods preceding the Transaction (July 1, 2003 through May 31, 2006) and the period after completion of the Transaction (June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006), respectively. Accordingly, the Predecessor periods included in the consolidated financial statements relate to EDMC.

2. SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES:

(a) Basis of Consolidation

The consolidated financial statements include the accounts of the Company and its wholly owned subsidiaries and a controlled entity. All significant intercompany transactions and balances have been eliminated.

F-8

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Unless otherwise specified, any reference to a “year” is to a fiscal year ended June 30th. Certain prior year balances have been reclassified to conform to the current year presentation.

(b) Use of Estimates

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the amounts reported. Estimates are used when accounting for the allowance for doubtful accounts, the allocation of purchase price to the estimated fair value of assets acquired during business combinations, depreciation, amortization, employee benefit expenses, contingencies, revenue, expenses and income tax obligations, among others during the reporting periods. Actual amounts realized and ultimately paid could differ from these estimates.

(c) Concentration of Credit Risk

The Company’s accounts receivable balances at each balance sheet date consist of amounts related to revenue from current or former students for classes which have occurred or for prior periods of occupancy in student housing facilities for which payment has not been received, along with obligations of current students for tuition, housing and other items related to academic terms in progress for which payment has not been received.

The Company extends unsecured credit for tuition and fees to a significant portion of the students enrolled at the Company’s institutions. The trade receivable balances are comprised of individually insignificant amounts due primarily from students throughout the United States and Canada. The Company determines its allowance for doubtful accounts for most locations primarily by categorizing gross receivables based upon the enrollment status (in-school student vs. out-of-school student) of the student and establishing a reserve based on the likelihood of collection, which is based upon historical experience. Student accounts are monitored through an aging process whereby past due accounts are pursued. When certain criteria are met (primarily aging past the due date by more than four months) and internal collection measures have been taken without success, the accounts of out-of-school students are placed with an outside collection agency. Student accounts in collection are fully reserved and evaluated on a case-by-case basis before being written off. If current collection trends differ significantly from historic collections, an adjustment would be required to the allowance. Historically, however, the allowance has been within the Company’s estimate of uncollectible accounts.

(d) Cash and Cash Equivalents and Restricted Cash

The Company considers all highly liquid debt instruments purchased with a maturity of three months or less to be cash equivalents. These investments are stated at cost, which, based upon the scheduled maturities, approximates market value.

Many of the schools hold funds from the United States government under various student aid grant and loan programs in separate bank accounts, and serve as trustee for the Department of Education or respective lender, guaranty agency or student borrower, as applicable. The funds held in these bank accounts are not shown as cash or restricted cash on the consolidated balance sheet until the authorization and disbursement process has occurred. Once the authorization and disbursement process to the student has been completed, the funds are transferred to unrestricted accounts and become available for use in current operations. This transfer generally occurs for the period of the academic term for which such funds were authorized with no term being more than 16 weeks in length.

F-9

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

U.S. Department of Education regulations require Title IV program funds received by the Company’s institutions in excess of the charges applied to the relevant students at that time to be, with these students’ permission, maintained and classified as restricted. In addition, some states have similar requirements. Restricted cash balances include $5.3 million and $1.7 million of these amounts at June 30, 2006 and 2005 respectively.

Restricted cash balances also include amounts held in escrow related to the acquisition of South University and for other encumbrances. The Company held $1.4 million and $2.7 million at June 30, 2006 and 2005, respectively, in escrow for future contingent payments related to the South University acquisition. These funds will be transferred to the previous owner upon the satisfaction of certain conditions primarily relating to the development and performance of certain health profession programs. Restricted cash balances also include $2.8 million at June 30, 2006 held to collateralize outstanding letters of credit under the Predecessor’s revolving credit facility. Outstanding letters of credit were previously collateralized by the Predecessor’s undrawn revolving credit facilities. An endowment of $0.5 million required by state law for two of the Company’s schools is also included in restricted cash at June 30, 2006 and 2005 respectively.

(e) Inventories

Inventories consist mainly of textbooks and supplies held for sale to students enrolled in the Company’s educational programs. Inventories are valued at the lower of cost (first-in, first-out) or market.

(f) Property and Equipment

Property and equipment are recorded at their estimated cost less accumulated depreciation. Buildings are depreciated over the estimated useful life of 30 years using the straight-line method. Leasehold improvement and capitalized lease costs are amortized over the shorter of the original lease term exclusive of any renewal periods, or their estimated useful lives. The majority of the Company’s property and equipment are depreciated over estimated useful lives ranging from three to ten years using the straight-line method. Accelerated depreciation methods are generally used for income tax purposes. The Predecessor applied the straight-line method using the half year convention which was not materially different than using the date the assets were placed in service.

(g) Capitalization of Internally Developed Software Cost

Statement of Position 98-1, “Accounting for the Costs of Computer Software Developed or Obtained for Internal Use” requires the capitalization of direct costs incurred in connection with developing or obtaining software for internal use, including external direct costs of materials and services and payroll and payroll related costs for employees who are directly associated with and devote time to an internal use software development project. See Note 4.

(h) Leases

The Company and its subsidiaries lease certain classroom, dormitory and office space as well as equipment and automobiles under operating leases. Before entering into a lease, an analysis is performed to determine whether a lease should be classified as a capital or an operating lease according to SFAS No. 13, “Accounting for Leases”, as amended. The Company also leases space from time to time on a short-term basis in order to provide specific courses or programs.

Certain of the Company’s lease agreements include tenant improvement allowances. These tenant improvement allowances are recorded as a leasehold improvement asset in property and equipment and a related deferred rent liability on the consolidated balance sheet. Leasehold improvement assets are amortized on a straight-line basis over the shorter of the term of the lease or useful life of the asset as additional depreciation expense while deferred rent liabilities are amortized over the term of the lease as a reduction to rent expense.

F-10

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Certain of the Company’s lease agreements include rent escalation clauses, which if fixed and determinable, are recognized on a straight-line basis over the life of the lease in accordance with SFAS No. 13, as amended. Lease terms generally range from one to twenty years with one or more renewal options. For leases with renewal options, the Company records rent expense and amortizes the leasehold improvements on a straight-line basis over the original lease term, exclusive of the renewal period. When a renewal occurs, the Company records rent expense over the new term.

In March 2005, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) issued FASB Interpretation No. (FIN) 47, Accounting for Conditional Assets Retirement Obligations—An Interpretation of FASB Statement No. 143 which requires an entity to recognize a liability for the fair value of a conditional asset retirement obligation when incurred if the liability’s fair value can be reasonably estimated. FIN 47 is effective no later than the end of fiscal years ending after December 15, 2005 and therefore is applicable to the year ended June 30, 2006. The Company adopted FIN 47 in the period ended June 30, 2006 and recorded an asset of $3.1 million in capitalized lease cost and a corresponding liability in deferred rent.

During the third quarter of fiscal 2005, the Predecessor initiated a review of all of its current real estate operating leases and determined that its previous method of accounting for landlord incentives and allowances was not in accordance with guidance issued by the Securities and Exchange Commission in February 2005. The Predecessor had historically accounted for tenant improvement allowances as reductions to the related leasehold improvement asset when cash was received from the landlord. Similarly, these reimbursements were reflected as reductions to capital expenditures in investing activities on the consolidated statements of cash flows. In the past, when tenant improvement allowances were paid directly by the landlord, no accounting entries were made. At March 31, 2005, the Predecessor determined that the appropriate interpretation of FASB Technical Bulletin No. 88-1, “Issues Relating to Accounting for Leases,” requires these allowances to be recorded as a leasehold improvement asset and deferred rent liability on the consolidated balance sheet and as both an investing activity (addition to property and equipment, net) and component of operating activities on the consolidated statements of cash flow. Both items are amortized as a component of educational services expense. The net impact of these accounting adjustments resulted in additional net leasehold improvements and deferred rent liabilities of approximately $35.7 million and $39.5 million, respectively, at March 31, 2005. This adjustment includes approximately $14.6 million of reimbursements from landlords used to fund leasehold improvements. These reimbursements are reflected as an increase to cash flows from operations and an offsetting increase to expenditures for property and equipment (investing activities) in the accompanying consolidated statements of cash flows for fiscal 2005. The Predecessor also reviewed its leases to account for rent holidays and, and in some cases, corrected its accounting to expense rent charges from the date where the Predecessor had “possession and control” of the facility. Amortization expense for the nine months ended March 31, 2005 reflected an increase of approximately $19.5 million, while rent expense was reduced by approximately $15.7 million. The net result was a non-cash, pretax charge of approximately $3.8 million ($2.3 million after tax) reflected in educational services expense in the fiscal 2005 third quarter.

For the fiscal quarter beginning on January 1, 2006, the Predecessor adopted the FASB Staff Position FAS 13-1 “Accounting for Rental Costs incurred during a Construction Period”, which requires companies to expense rental costs associated with ground or building operating leases that are incurred during a construction period.

(i) Goodwill and Intangible Assets

The Company evaluates the recoverability of the goodwill and indefinite lived intangible assets attributable to each reporting unit as required under SFAS No. 142, “Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets”, by comparing

F-11

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

the fair value of each reporting unit with its carrying value. The evaluation is performed at least annually and additionally when potential impairment indicators exist as required by SFAS No. 142. Management applies judgment when performing these evaluations to determine the financial projections used to assess the fair value of each reporting unit. The fair market value of the reporting units is estimated by applying multiples to earnings before interest, taxes and depreciation. To validate the multiples used, the Company compares the multiples to recent identified transactions where similar businesses were sold.

Effective April 1, 2005, the Predecessor changed its regional structure to form seven operating divisions by geographic locations within North America. These regions were the Northeast, Southeast, North Central, Central, South Central, Northwest and Southwest regions. Due to the reorganization of the division structure, the Predecessor reallocated goodwill for impairment testing purposes based upon the new operating division structure in the fiscal fourth quarter of 2005. In connection with the reallocation of goodwill, the Predecessor performed an impairment test as of April 1, 2005 and determined goodwill was not impaired. Shortly thereafter, in July 2005, the Predecessor refined the regional structure from seven to six operating divisions. At that time, the Predecessor completed its annual impairment test for the fiscal year beginning July 1, 2005 and determined goodwill was not impaired. The Successor maintained the same organizational structure as the Predecessor relative to determination of reporting units at June 30, 2006.

The Company evaluates the recoverability of property and equipment and intangible assets with finite lives whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate the carrying amount of any such assets may not be fully recoverable in accordance with SFAS No. 144, “Accounting for the Impairment or Disposal of Long-Lived Assets”. Changes in circumstances may include economic conditions or operating performance. When impairment indicators arise from changing conditions, the Company performs an evaluation based upon assumptions about the estimated future cash flows. If the projected undiscounted future cash flows are less than the carrying value, the Company determines the fair value of the asset based upon a discounted cash flow model or a third-party valuation. When utilizing a discounted cash flow model to determine fair value, if the discounted cash flows are less than the carrying value of the asset, an impairment loss is recognized. See Note 5 for additional information regarding the change in estimates for useful lives and fair market values of as a result of business combination accounting.

(j) Segment Reporting

At June 30, 2006, the Company operated 71 schools in North America as part of a single operating segment. The majority of the Company’s schools provide services to students utilizing similar delivery methods resulting in similar long term financial performance characteristics. The Company does not rely on any major customers as a source of revenues. The Company believes that it meets the criteria for aggregating the operations into a single reporting segment. Effective July 17, 2006, the Company reorganized its operations to a divisional structure aligned by educational systems from the existing regional management structure. The Company is currently assessing the impact this change will have on segment reporting, if any.

(k) Self-Insurance Accruals

The Company self-insures a significant portion of expected losses under medical benefit programs offered to employees. The Company also insures against a large portion of its workers’ compensation claims expense. Accruals recorded for health care benefits were $3.2 million and $3.0 million at June 30, 2006 and 2005 respectively based upon estimates of the ultimate costs to settle unpaid incurred claims, both reported and unreported. These estimates were based upon information received through third parties.

F-12

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(l) Foreign Currency Translation

The financial position and results of operations of the Company’s foreign subsidiaries are measured in the functional currency of these entities, Canadian dollars. Accordingly, the assets and liabilities of the foreign subsidiaries are translated to U.S. dollars using the exchange rates in effect as of the balance sheet date. Revenues and expenses are translated into U.S. dollars using the average monthly exchange rates. Translation adjustments resulting from this process are recorded as a separate component of shareholders’ equity designated as accumulated other comprehensive income in the consolidated balance sheet. Transaction gains or losses during the years presented in the financial statements were not material.

(m) Revenue Recognition

The Company’s net revenues consist of tuition and fees, student housing fees, bookstore sales, restaurant sales in connection with culinary programs, workshop fees, finance charges related to credit extended to students and sales of related study materials, reduced for student refunds and scholarships.

Tuition revenue varies based on the average tuition charge per credit hour, type of program, specific curriculum, the average student population and number of credit hours taken. The Company derived 92.2% of its net revenues from tuition and fees during the Successor period June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006. Net revenues from tuition and fees represented 91.1%, 90.6% and 90.8% for the Predecessor period July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006, fiscal 2005 and fiscal 2004, respectively. Bookstore and housing revenue are largely a function of the average student population.

The Company bills tuition and housing revenues at the beginning of an academic term and recognizes the revenue on a pro rata basis over the term of instruction or occupancy. For most of the Company’s programs, the academic terms and fiscal quarters are the same. Thus, unearned tuition is not significant at the end of a fiscal quarter. However, Argosy University, the Brown Mackie Colleges and to a lesser degree South University and certain Art Institutes have educational programs with academic terms with starting and ending dates that differ from the Company’s fiscal quarters. Therefore, at the end of each fiscal quarter, the Company has tuition from these academic terms where the associated revenue has not yet been earned in accordance with the Securities and Exchange Commission’s Staff Accounting Bulletin No. 104, “Revenue Recognition in Financial Statements”. Advance payments represent that portion of payments received but not earned and are reflected as a current liability in the accompanying consolidated balance sheets. These payments are typically related to future academic periods and are for the most part refundable.

If a student withdraws prior to the end of an academic term, the Company will refund tuition already paid that, pursuant to the respective institution’s refund policy and applicable federal and state law and accrediting agency standards, the institution is not entitled to retain.

(n) Costs and Expenses

Educational services expense consists primarily of costs related to the development, delivery and administration of the Company’s education programs. Major cost components are faculty compensation, administrative salaries, costs of educational materials, facility leases and school occupancy costs, information systems costs and bad debt expense, along with depreciation and amortization of property and equipment.

General and administrative expense consists of marketing and student admissions expenses and certain central staff departmental costs such as executive management, finance and accounting, legal, corporate development and other departments that do not provide direct services.

F-13

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Advertising costs are expensed in the fiscal year incurred and classified as general and administrative expense in the accompanying consolidated statements of operations. The Company’s advertising expense was $10.8 million for the successor period June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006. The Predecessor recorded advertising expense of $80.6 million for the period July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006, $63.5 million for fiscal 2005 and $46.2 million for fiscal 2004.

(o) Contingencies

The Company accrues for costs associated with contingencies related to matters affecting the Company when such costs are probable and reasonably estimable in accordance with SFAS No. 5, “Accounting for Contingencies”. The Company adjusts such accruals as circumstances change or develop.

(p) Stock Compensation

Predecessor:

EDMC maintained a 1996 Stock Incentive Plan, 2003 Incentive Plan and Employee Stock Purchase Plan for directors, executive management and key personnel. Prior to July 1, 2005, EDMC accounted for those plans under the recognition and measurement provisions of APB Opinion No. 25, “Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees”, and related interpretations, as permitted by SFAS No. 123, “Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation”. No option-based employee compensation cost was recognized in the statements of operations for the years ended June 30, 2005 or 2004, as all options granted under those plans had an exercise price equal to the market value of the underlying common stock on the date of grant.

EDMC recorded compensation expense for stock options beginning July 1, 2005, when the Predecessor adopted the fair value recognition provisions of SFAS No. 123(R), “Share-Based Payment,” using the modified-prospective transition method. Under that transition method, compensation cost recognized during the Predecessor period from July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006 includes (a) compensation cost for all share-based payments granted prior to, but not yet vested as of July 1, 2005, based on the grant date fair value estimated in accordance with the original provisions of SFAS No. 123, and (b) compensation cost for all share-based payments granted subsequent to July 1, 2005, based on the grant-date fair value estimated in accordance with the provisions of SFAS No. 123(R). Results for prior periods were not restated.

As a result of adopting SFAS No. 123(R), income before taxes and net income for the predecessor period July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006 was $14.1 million and $8.1 million lower, respectively than if EDMC had continued to account for share-based compensation under APB Opinion No. 25.

Prior to the consummation of the Transaction, $18.7 million of compensation costs related to stock options and restricted stock was recorded as compensation expense. In connection with the Transaction, the remaining unrecognized compensation cost of $13.5 million was recorded as compensation expense resulting in a total non-cash charge under SFAS No. 123(R) of $32.2 million during the period from July 1, 2005 to May 31, 2006.

F-14

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

The following table illustrates the effect on the Predecessor’s net income if the Predecessor had applied the fair value recognition provisions of SFAS No. 123(R) to options granted under the Company’s stock option plans in all periods presented (dollars in thousands).

	Eleven Months ended May 31, 2006		Year ended June 30,
			2005			2004
Net income:
As reported	$	100,406	$	101,574		$	77,014
Add: Stock-based employee compensation expense included in reported net income, net of tax		—		626			542
Deduct: Impact of SFAS 123(R), net of tax		—		(17,108	)		(16,003	)
Pro forma net income	$	100,406	$	85,092		$	61,553
Weighted average fair value of options granted	$	14.50	$	11.75		$	16.58

The Predecessor estimated the fair value of each option award on the date of grant using a Black-Scholes option valuation model and the assumptions in the following table. The risk free interest rate for the periods within the contractual life of the option was generally based on United States Treasury yields at the date of grant. The Predecessor assumed no dividend since it had historically not paid and did not expect to pay dividends in the immediate future. The Predecessor used historical option exercise and termination data behavior to estimate the expected life of an option grant. Expected volatilities were based on historical volatility of the Predecessor’s stock price.

	Eleven Months ended May 31, 2006		Year ended June 30,
			2005		2004
Risk-free interest rate	3.94	%	3.62	%	2.86	%
Expected dividend yield	—		—		—
Expected life of options (years)	4.5		4.5		4.5
Expected volatility rate	30.90	%	39.70	%	53.80	%

Prior to the adoption of SFAS No. 123(R), the Predecessor presented all tax benefits of deductions resulting from the exercise of stock options as operating cash flows in the statements of cash flows. SFAS No. 123(R) requires the cash flows resulting from the tax benefits resulting from tax deductions in excess of the compensation cost recognized for those options to be classified as financing cash flows, with a corresponding reduction in operating cash flows. The total income tax benefit recognized in the statement of operations for share-based compensation plans was $11.8 million for the period July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006.

Successor:

In August 2006, the Company’s board of directors approved the 2006 Stock Option Plan for executive management and key personnel. No options under this plan were awarded as of June 30, 2006.

(q) Income Taxes

The Company accounts for income taxes using the asset and liability method in accordance with Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 109, Accounting for Income Taxes (“SFAS 109”). SFAS 109 requires the recognition of deferred income tax assets and liabilities with respect to expected future income tax consequences of temporary differences between financial reporting and income tax reporting by applying enacted statutory

F-15

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

income tax rates applicable to future years to differences between the financial statement carrying amounts and the income tax basis of existing assets and liabilities. SFAS 109 also requires that deferred income tax assets be reduced by a valuation allowance if it is more likely than not that some portion of the deferred income tax asset will not be realized.

(r) Recently Issued Accounting Standards

In May 2005, the FASB issued SFAS No. 154, “Accounting Changes and Error Corrections”, which changes the requirements for the accounting and reporting of a change in accounting principle. SFAS No. 154 applies to all voluntary changes in accounting principles as well as to changes required by an accounting pronouncement that does not include specific transition provisions. SFAS No. 154 eliminates the requirement to include the cumulative effect of changes in accounting principle in the income statement and instead requires that changes in accounting principle be retroactively applied. A change in accounting estimate continues to be accounted for in the period of change and future periods if necessary. A correction of an error continues to be reported by restating prior period financial statements. SFAS No. 154 is effective for the Company after July 1, 2006.

On July 13, 2006, the FASB issued FIN No. 48, “Accounting for Uncertainty in Income Taxes—An Interpretation of FASB Statement No. 109” which clarifies the accounting for uncertainty in income taxes recognized in an enterprise’s financial statements in accordance with SFAS No. 109, “Accounting for Income Taxes”. FIN No. 48 also prescribes a recognition threshold and measurement attribute for the financial statement recognition and measurement of a tax position taken or expected to be taken in a tax return. FIN No. 48 also provides guidance on derecognition, classification, interest and penalties, accounting in interim periods, disclosure, and transition. FIN No. 48 is effective for fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2006. The Company is in the process of evaluating the potential impact of FIN No. 48, if any.

3. BUSINESS COMBINATION:

The Transaction was completed on June 1, 2006 and was financed by a combination of equity invested by the Sponsors and other investors, borrowings under the Company’s senior secured credit facilities, the issuance by the Company and Education Management Finance Corporation of Senior Notes due 2014 and Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016 and EDMC’s cash on hand. See Note 6 for a description of the Company’s indebtedness. These funds, net of proceeds from the exercise of outstanding stock options, were used to purchase all EDMC’s shares of common stock that were issued and outstanding, immediately prior to the completion of the Transaction.

Sources and Uses:

The sources and uses of the funds for the Transaction are shown in the table below (in thousands):

Sources of funds:			Uses of funds:
Revolving credit facility	$	50,000	Equity purchase price (2)	$	3,380,598
Cash and cash equivalents from Predecessor (1)		374,078	Cash and cash equivalents to Successor (1)		147,750
Senior Secured term loan facilities, due 2013 at 7.63%		1,185,000	Debt issuance costs		59,574
Senior Notes due 2014 at 8.75%		375,000	Transaction costs in purchase price (3)		45,387
Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016 at 10.25%		385,000	Transaction costs incurred by Predecessor (4)		30,279
Equity contribution by Sponsors and other investors		1,300,000	Prepaid advisory fees (See Note 8)		2,932
			Other		2,558
Total sources of funds	$	3,669,078	Total uses of funds	$	3,669,078

F-16

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

(1) Excludes restricted cash.

(2) The holders of outstanding shares of common stock were paid $43.00 in cash per share, in connection with the Transaction. There were no outstanding shares of preferred stock at the date of the Transaction. The equity purchase price is reduced by the stock option proceeds of $100.2 million.

(3) Represents fees and expenses associated with the Transaction paid by the Successor including accounting, legal and investment banking fees, (including transaction fees paid to affiliates of the Sponsors); as well as other transaction costs and professional fees.

(4) Represents fees and expenses associated with the Transaction paid by the Predecessor, including investment banking, legal and other professional fees.

Preliminary Purchase Price Allocation:

The purchase price included the $3.4 billion purchase of the outstanding common stock and settlement of stock options outstanding, and transaction costs of $105.0 million, of which $59.6 million was allocated to the cost of issuing debt while the remaining $45.4 million was included in the overall purchase price.

Under business combination accounting, the total purchase price was allocated to the Company’s net tangible and identifiable intangible assets based on their estimated fair values established by an independent appraisal firm as of June 1, 2006 as set forth below. The excess of the purchase price over the net tangible and identifiable intangible assets was recorded as goodwill. The preliminary allocation of the purchase price for property and equipment, intangible assets and deferred income taxes was based upon valuation data at the date of the Transaction and the estimates and assumptions are subject to change.

The following table summarizes the estimated fair values of the assets acquired and liabilities assumed (in thousands):

Property and equipment	$	368,665
Other long-term assets		17,202
Intangible assets		518,666
Goodwill		2,568,034
Net current assets acquired		340,179
Deferred income tax liabilities		(217,625	)
Deferred rent and other long-term liabilities		(63,895	)
Debt assumed		(5,055	)
Total purchase allocation	$	3,526,171

F-17

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

A summary of the allocation of purchase price to tangible and identifiable intangible assets, other than goodwill, is as follows:

Asset Class	FMV (in thousands)		Weighted- Average Life
Property and Equipment:
Land	$	17,805	Indefinite
Buildings and improvements		71,880	26.6
Leasehold improvements and capitalized lease costs		145,362	10.3
Furniture and equipment		44,173	3.2
Technology and other equipment		64,170	3.1
Software-internal		2,417	1.5
Software-external		10,616	5.9
Library books		12,242	3.4
Total		368,665
Intangible Assets:
Tradename-Art Institute	$	330,000	Indefinite
Licensing, Accreditation & Title IV Program Participation		114,000	Indefinite
Student relationships		39,000	4.5
Favorable leases		16,235	6.0
Programs		10,000	6.4
Online curriculum		6,431	3.3
Tradename-Argosy University		3,000	9.0
Total	$	518,666

Unaudited pro forma financial information:

The following unaudited pro forma results of operations (in millions) assume that the Transaction occurred as of the beginning of each of the periods presented and were reflected in the Company’s results from that date. This unaudited pro forma information should not be relied upon as necessarily being indicative of the historical results that would have been obtained if the Transaction had actually occurred at the beginning of each period presented, nor of the results that may be obtained in the future. The pro forma adjustments include the effect of purchase accounting adjustments, transaction costs (including stock-based compensation charges due to the acceleration of stock options in connection with the Transaction), interest expense and related tax effects.

	Year ended June 30,
	2006		2005
Revenue	$1,170,160		$1,019,338
Net loss	(33,396	)	(56,409	)

Transaction Costs incurred by Predecessor:

During the period from June 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006, the Predecessor recorded costs associated with the Transaction of $52.8 million. These costs consist of $29.4 million of accounting, investment banking, legal and other professional fees and $9.9 million of employee compensation and payroll taxes; and a $13.5 million non-cash charge for stock compensation resulting from the acceleration of stock options and restricted stock.

F-18

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

4. PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT:

Property and equipment consisted of the following at June 30 (in thousands):

	Successor 2006			Predecessor 2005
Asset Class			Useful Life			Useful Life
Land	$	17,805		$	13,069
Buildings and improvements		72,133	15 to 41		79,649	15 to 30
Leasehold improvements and capitalized lease costs		154,024	1 to 20		215,296	1 to 20
Furniture and equipment		45,273	1 to 7		71,848	7
Technology and other equipment		65,727	1 to 7		123,335	3 to 5
Software-internal		2,467	1 to 4		3,825	4
Software-external		11,538	1 to 9		13,738	3 to 10
Library books		12,845	1 to 7		17,160	10
Total		381,812			537,920
Less accumulated depreciation		5,676			212,124
Property and Equipment, net	$	376,136		$	325,796

The useful lives of the assets acquired by the Successor as part of the Transaction set forth above were established as a result of the allocation of fair values at June 1, 2006.

Depreciation and amortization expense was $5.7 million for the Successor period June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006, $58.9 million for the Predecessor period July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006, $54.0 million for fiscal 2005 and $48.4 million for fiscal 2004.

During fiscal 2005, the Predecessor recognized fixed asset impairment charges of approximately $1.6 million related to fixed assets of certain schools in the U.S. and Canada. The Predecessor’s review, based on consideration of the then current fiscal year operating results and the forecasted operating results of these locations, indicated that the estimated future cash flows were insufficient to recover the carrying value of long-lived assets. Accordingly, the Predecessor adjusted the carrying value of these long-lived assets, including leasehold improvements, to management’s estimated fair value, which was based upon fair market valuations performed by a third party and other analysis. Additionally, the Predecessor recorded a charge of $2.6 million in fiscal 2005 based on the result of detailed fixed asset physical inventory and valuation procedures.

F-19

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

5. GOODWILL AND INTANGIBLE ASSETS:

The changes in the carrying amount of goodwill are as follows (in thousands):

Predecessor:
Balance as of June 30, 2004	$	311,525
Contingent payments		1,525
Foreign currency translation		1,710
Balance as of June 30, 2005	$	314,760
Acquisitions and contingent payments		1,333
Foreign currency translation		2,391
Balance as of May 31, 2006	$	318,484
Successor:
Acquisition of predecessor	$	2,562,974
Additional adjustments to fair value subsequent to transaction		5,060
Balance as of June 30, 2006	$	2,568,034

Identifiable intangibles other than goodwill consisted of the following at June 30 (in thousands):

	Successor 2006						Predecessor 2005
Asset Class	Gross Carrying Amount		Accumulated Amortization			Useful life	Gross Carrying Amount		Accumulated Amortization			Useful life
Tradename-Art Institute	$	330,000	$	—		Indefinite	$	—	$	—		—
Tradename-Other		3,000		(28	)	9.0		500		—		Indefinite
Licensing, Accreditation & Title IV Program Participation		114,000		—		Indefinite		5,153		(1,590	)	2 to 17
Curriculum and programs		16,861		(369	)	4 to 8		17,942		(7,367	)	3 to 17
Student contracts, applications & relationships		39,000		(912	)	2 to 9		12,556		(11,377	)	0.5 to 4
Favorable leases and other		16,231		(400	)	1 to 12		3,792		(2,110	)	3 to 11
Total Intangible Assets	$	519,092	$	(1,709	)		$	39,943	$	(22,444	)

Capitalized costs associated with the internal development of online curriculum and programs, which are included in curriculum and programs in the above table were $0.4 million for the Successor period June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006, $3.0 million for the Predecessor period July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006, $3.6 million for fiscal 2005 and $2.0 million for fiscal 2004. Amortization of intangible assets was $1.7 million for the Successor period June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006, $4.0 million for the Predecessor period July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006, $6.5 million for fiscal 2005 and $6.9 million for fiscal 2004.

State authorizations and accreditations of the Company’s schools are renewed over time in cycles ranging from every year to up to every ten years depending upon government and accreditation regulations. The Company considers these renewal processes to be a routine aspect of the overall business and therefore assigned them an indefinite life.

F-20

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Estimated amortization expense for amortizable intangible assets for the next five fiscal years and thereafter is as follows (in thousands):

2007	$18,839
2008	17,641
2009	15,484
2010	6,040
2011 and thereafter	15,379
Total	$73,383

6. DEBT AND DERIVATIVE INSTRUMENTS:

On June 1, 2006, in connection with the Transaction, the Company (i) entered into a new $1,485.0 million senior secured credit facility, consisting of a $1,185.0 million term loan facility with a seven year maturity and a $300.0 million revolving credit facility with a six year maturity, and (ii) issued an aggregate of $760.0 million of senior notes and senior subordinated notes. Borrowings on the revolving credit facility outstanding at June 30, 2006 are classified as short-term debt on the balance sheet as they were repaid on July 3, 2006.

Short-Term Debt:

At June 30, 2006, $160.0 million was outstanding under the $300.0 million revolving credit facility. The revolving credit facility bears interest at prime plus margin of 1.25% at June 30, 2006. The applicable margin for borrowings under the revolving credit facility can change dependent on certain leverage ratios. The Company is obligated to pay a 0.50% rate per annum commitment fee on undrawn amounts under the revolving credit facility. This commitment fee may change based on certain leverage ratios. The revolving credit facility is secured by certain of the Company’s assets and is subject to the Company’s satisfaction of certain covenants and financial ratios described below.

Prior to the completion of the Transaction, the Predecessor’s revolving credit facility allowed for borrowings up to $250.0 million. The agreement contained customary covenants that, among other matters, required EDMC to meet specified financial ratios, restrict the repurchase of common stock and limit the incurrence of additional indebtedness. Outstanding letters of credit of $2.9 million at June 30, 2005 reduced the availability of borrowings under the revolving credit facility. At June 30, 2005, EDMC had $62.0 million outstanding under this facility and was in compliance with all covenants under the agreement. The availability of borrowings under the revolving credit agreement was approximately $185 million at June 30, 2005.

Relevant information regarding borrowings under the revolving credit facility and the prior revolving credit agreement is reflected below (in thousands):

	Successor			Predecessor
	Period from June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006			Period from July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006		For the fiscal years ended June 30,
						2005			2004
Outstanding borrowings, end of period	$	160,000		$	—	$	62,000		$	125,100
Approximate average outstanding balance throughout the period	$	12,333		$	—	$	300		$	26,121
Approximate maximum outstanding balance during the period	$	160,000		$	—	$	125,100		$	125,100
Weighted average annual interest rate for the period		9.47	%		—		4.16	%		2.25	%

F-21

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Long-Term Debt:

The Company had the following long-term debt obligations as of June 30 (in thousands):

	Successor 2006		Predecessor 2005
Senior Secured term loan facilities, due 2013 at 7.63%	$	1,185,000	$	—
Senior Notes due 2014 at 8.75%		375,000		—
Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016 at 10.25%		385,000		—
Capital leases		3,101		3,058
Mortgage debt of consolidated entities		1,864		5,362
		1,949,965		8,420
Less current portion		12,795		4,151
Long term debt, less current portion	$	1,937,170	$	4,269

Senior Secured Credit Facility. The Company issued $1,185.0 million of term loans on June 1, 2006 under the senior secured credit facility. The term loans bear interest at a rate equal to LIBOR plus an applicable margin or, at the Company’s option, an applicable margin plus an alternative base rate determined by reference to the higher of (1) the prime rate of interest quoted in the Wall Street Journal Money Rates Section and (2) the federal funds rate plus  ¹/2 of 1%. The applicable margin for borrowings under the secured credit facility may be reduced subject to satisfying certain leverage ratios.

All obligations under the senior secured credit facilities, including the revolving credit facility, are unconditionally guaranteed by Education Management Holdings LLC and all of the Company’s subsidiaries other than subsidiaries that own or operate a school and inactive subsidiaries that have less than $100,000 of assets. The senior secured credit facilities are secured by pledges of the capital stock of the Company and each guarantor and a security interest in, and mortgages on, substantially all the tangible and intangible assets of the Company and each guarantor.

The senior secured credit facilities require the Company to prepay outstanding term loans, subject to certain exceptions, with excess cash flow and in the event of certain asset sales, casualty and condemnation events and issuances of debt. In addition, the Company is required to make installment payments on the outstanding term loans in quarterly principal amounts of 0.25% of their funded total principal amount for the first six years and nine months, with the remaining amount payable on June 1, 2013.

The Company utilizes interest rate swap agreements, which are contractual agreements to exchange payments based on underlying interest rates, to manage the floating rate portion of its term debt. On June 6, 2006, the Company entered into two five year interest rate swap agreements, for the total notional amount of $750 million, in order to hedge a portion of its exposure to variable interest payments associated with the senior secured credit facilities. The interest rate swaps are for $375.0 million effective July 1, 2006 and $375.0 million effective July 3, 2006. Under the terms of the interest rate swaps, the Company receives payments based on variable interest rates based on the three month LIBOR and makes payments based on a fixed rate of 5.397%. The net receipt or payment from the interest rate swap agreements is recorded in interest expense. The interest rate swaps are designated and qualify as cash flow hedges under SFAS No. 133, Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities. As such, the swaps are accounted for as an asset or a liability in the consolidated balance sheet at fair value, net of tax. The fair value of the swap agreements are estimated based on current settlement prices and quoted market prices of comparable contracts. For the period ended June 30, 2006, the Company recorded an unrealized after-tax gain of $2.5 million in other comprehensive income (loss) related to the change in market value on the swap agreements.

F-22

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

The senior secured credit facilities contain a number of covenants that, among other things, restrict, subject to certain exceptions, the Company’s ability to incur additional indebtedness, pay dividends and distributions on or repurchase capital stock, create liens on assets, enter into sale and leaseback transactions, repay subordinated indebtedness, make investments, loans or advances, make capital expenditures, engage in certain transactions with affiliates, amend certain material agreements, change its lines of business, sell assets and engage in mergers or consolidations. In addition, the Company is required to satisfy and maintain a maximum total leverage ratio and a minimum interest coverage ratio under the senior secured credit facilities.

Senior Notes Due 2014 and Senior Subordinated Notes 2016. The Company issued the senior notes due 2014 and senior subordinated notes due 2016 on June 1, 2006 in connection with the closing of the Transaction. The senior notes due 2014 and senior subordinated notes due 2016 are guaranteed by all of the Company’s subsidiaries other than any subsidiary that owns or operates a school or has been formed for such purpose and has no material assets.

The $375.0 million of senior notes due 2014, which bear interest at 8.75%, are senior unsecured obligations that rank senior in right of payment to future debt and other obligations that are, by their terms, expressly subordinated in right of payment to the senior notes, including the senior subordinated notes due 2016. The senior notes (i) rank equally in right of payment to all existing and future senior debt and other obligations that are not, by their terms, expressly subordinated in right of payment to the senior notes, (ii) are effectively subordinated in right of payment to all existing and future secured debt to the extent of the value of the assets securing such debt, and (iii) are structurally subordinated to all obligations of each subsidiary of the Company that is not a guarantor of the senior notes.

The $385.0 million of senior subordinated notes due 2016, which bear interest at 10.25%, are unsecured senior subordinated obligations that are subordinated in right of payment to the existing and future senior debt, including the senior secured credit facilities and the senior notes due 2014. The senior subordinated notes (i) are senior in right of payment to all future subordinated debt, (ii) are effectively subordinated in right of payment to all existing and future secured debt to the extent of the value of the assets securing such debt, and (iii) are structurally subordinated to all obligations of each subsidiary of the Company that is not a guarantor of the senior subordinated notes.

Interest on the senior notes due 2014 and senior subordinated notes due 2016 is payable semi-annually commencing on December 1, 2006. The senior notes due 2014 and senior subordinated notes due 2016 are redeemable in whole or in part, at the option of the Company, at any time at varying redemption prices that generally include premiums, which are defined in the applicable indentures. In addition, upon a change of control, the Company is required to make an offer to redeem all of the senior notes and senior subordinated notes at a redemption price equal to 101% of the aggregate principal amount thereof plus accrued and unpaid interest.

The indentures governing the senior notes due 2014 and senior subordinated notes due 2016 contain a number of covenants that restrict, subject to certain exceptions, the Company’s ability and the ability of its restricted subsidiaries to incur additional indebtedness or issue certain preferred shares, pay dividends on or make other distributions in respect of its capital stock or make other restricted payments, make certain investments, enter into certain types of transactions with affiliates, create liens securing certain debt without securing the senior notes due 2014 or senior subordinated notes due 2016, as applicable, sell certain assets, consolidate, merge, sell or otherwise dispose of all or substantially all of its assets and designate its subsidiaries as unrestricted subsidiaries.

Other Indebtedness. The Company has a 1% general partnership interest in a consolidated entity that has an outstanding mortgage on one of the Company’s leased facilities in the amount of approximately $1.9 million as

F-23

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

of June 30, 2006. The Company would be required to perform under these guarantees if the subsidiary could not satisfy the obligations. The Company has no guarantees for any unconsolidated entities.

As of June 30, 2006, future annual principal payments on long-term debt related instruments are as follows (in thousands):

2007	$     12,795
2008	12,910
2009	12,838
2010	12,567
2011 and thereafter	1,898,855
Total	$1,949,965

Fair Value of Financial Instruments

The following table presents the carrying amounts and fair values of financial instruments as of June 30:

	Successor 2006		Predecessor 2005
	Carrying Value	Fair Value	Carrying Value	Fair Value
Fair value of interest rate swaps	$       4,424	$       4,424	—	—
Variable rate debt	1,185,000	1,189,444	—	—
Fixed rate debt	764,965	756,440	$8,420	$8,420

The fair values of cash and cash equivalents, accounts receivable, accounts payable and accrued expenses, to the extent the underlying liability will be settled in cash, approximated carrying values because of the short-term nature of these instruments. The derivative financial instrument is carried at fair value, which is based on the amount the Company would pay to terminate the agreement. The fair value and carrying amounts of the Company’s long-term debt are approximately equivalent. The fair value of the debt was determined based on a valuation provided by a qualified third party.

7. COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES:

The Company leases certain classroom, dormitory and office space as well as equipment and automobiles under operating leases that expire on various future dates. Rent expense under these leases was $8.6 million for the Successor period June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006, $84.0 million for the Predecessor period July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006, $73.8 million for fiscal 2005 and $80.5 million for fiscal 2004. Rent expense includes short-term commitments for student housing of $2.5 million for the Successor period June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006, $27.3 million for the Predecessor period July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006, $26.7 million for fiscal 2005 and $23.8 million for fiscal 2004. Certain of the Company’s operating leases contain provisions for escalating payments and options for renewal.

As of June 30, 2006, the approximate annual minimum future commitments under noncancelable, long-term operating leases are as follows (in thousands):

2007	$  99,382
2008	85,195
2009	77,155
2010	61,237
2011 and thereafter	279,984
	$602,953

F-24

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

The Predecessor had a management incentive compensation plan that provided for the awarding of cash bonuses to management personnel using formalized guidelines based upon the operating results of individual schools and the Company as well as other qualitative factors. The Company assumed the previous management compensation plan at the date of the Transaction. These amounts are reflected in accrued liabilities in the accompanying consolidated balance sheets.

The Art Institute of Dallas has been placed on probation by the Commission on Colleges of the Southern Association of Colleges and Schools (the “Commission”) due to the school’s failure to satisfactorily document clearly identified expected outcomes and assessments for its programs and services as required by the Commission’s institutional effectiveness comprehensive standard. The Commission, in connection with reaffirming the accreditation of The Art Institute of Dallas for a ten year period in December 2003, required the school to provide evidence of compliance with this standard by December 2005. The probationary period is through at least December 2006 and may be extended for an additional year for good cause. The Commission may remove its grant of accreditation to The Art Institute of Dallas if the school does not satisfactorily address the issues raised by the Commission. As of October 2005, approximately 1,300 students attended The Art Institute of Dallas, which is one of 32 Art Institute schools.

In addition to the matters described above, the Company is a defendant in certain legal proceedings arising out of the conduct of our business. In the opinion of management, based upon an investigation of these claims and discussion with legal counsel, the ultimate outcome of such legal proceedings, individually and in the aggregate, will not have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial position, results of operations or liquidity.

8. RELATED-PARTY TRANSACTIONS:

In connection with the Transaction, the Company paid the Sponsors $40.7 million in fees and expenses for financial and structural advice and analysis as well as assistance with due diligence investigations and debt financing negotiations. This amount has been allocated as debt issuance costs or included in the overall purchase price of the Transaction. Under the terms of an agreement between the Company and the Sponsors, the Company has agreed to pay the Sponsors advisory fees of $5.0 million annually. As of June 30, 2006, other current assets includes $2.5 million relating to prepaid advisory fees. This agreement includes customary exculpation and indemnification provisions in favor of the Sponsors and their affiliates.

South University, a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company, leases two of the buildings it occupies from two separate entities owned by the President of South University, who became an employee of the Company after the purchase of South University in July 2003. Total rental payments, which are included in educational services on the consolidated statements of operations, under these arrangements, were approximately $0.1 million for the Successor period June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006, $1.4 million for the Predecessor period July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006, $1.4 million for fiscal 2005 and $0.8 million for fiscal 2004.

9. EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS:

The Company sponsors a retirement plan that covers substantially all employees. The Company currently matches 100% of employee contributions to the retirement plan for up to 3% of compensation and 50% of employee contributions between 4% and 6% of compensation. The provisions of the retirement plan allow forfeitures of unvested balances to be used to reduce the Company’s matching contributions. The Company recorded expense relating to the retirement plan of approximately $0.7 million for the Successor period June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006, $8.5 million for the Predecessor period July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006, $6.7 million for fiscal 2005 and $4.4 million for fiscal 2004.

F-25

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

10. OTHER LONG-TERM ASSETS:

Other long-term assets consist of the following at June 30 (in thousands):

	Successor 2006		Predecessor 2005
Deferred debt fees	$	58,935	$	1,295
Deferred compensation plan		6,431		5,418
Cash value of life insurance, face value of $7,815 at June 30, 2006 and $7,580 at June 30, 2005		5,126		4,839
Fair value of interest rate swaps		4,424		—
Investments in federal Perkins Loan Program, net of allowance for estimated future loan losses of $1,682 and $1,682, respectively		3,718		3,718
Other		2,057		3,024
Total	$	80,691	$	18,294

11. ACCRUED LIABILITIES:

Accrued liabilities consist of the following at June 30 (in thousands):

	Successor 2006		Predecessor 2005
Payroll and related taxes	$	32,417	$	28,677
Interest		13,594		169
Advertising		7,993		4,256
Professional fees		4,208		2,479
Self-insurance accrual		3,173		3,044
Capital expenditures		2,789		2,474
Other taxes		2,378		2,247
Office services, equipment and supplies		1,801		898
Rent		573		1,423
Other		7,022		6,914
Total	$	75,948	$	52,581

12. TAXES

The composition of income (loss) before taxes from domestic and foreign locations is as follows (in thousands):

	Successor			Predecessor
	Period from June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006			Period from July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006		For the fiscal years ended June 30,
						2005			2004
Income (loss) before taxes:
Domestic	$	(34,170	)	$	169,759	$	172,838		$	138,888
Foreign		2,102			4,250		(4,030	)		(8,377	)
	$	(32,068	)	$	174,009	$	168,808		$	130,511

F-26

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

The components of the income tax provision (benefit) reflected in the accompanying consolidated statements of operations are as follows (in thousands):

	Successor			Predecessor
	Period from June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006			Period from July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006			For the fiscal years ended June 30,
							2005			2004
Current taxes (benefit):
Federal	$	(10,211	)	$	67,823		$	54,445		$	42,744
State & Local		(3,397	)		14,203			12,365			12,985
Tax benefit of stock options		(39,656	)		(5,000	)		(10,441	)		(10,460	)
Total current tax provision (benefit)		(53,264	)		77,026			56,369			45,269
Deferred tax provision		1,199			(8,423	)		424			(2,232	)
Tax benefit of stock options		39,656			5,000			10,441			10,460
Total provision (benefit) for income taxes	$	(12,409	)	$	73,603		$	67,234		$	53,497

The provision (benefit) for income taxes reflected in the accompanying consolidated statements of operations varies from the amounts that would have been provided by applying the United States federal statutory income tax rate to earnings before income taxes as shown below:

	Successor		Predecessor
	Period from June 1, 2006 through June 30, 2006		Period from July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006		For the fiscal years ended June 30,
					2005		2004
U.S. Federal statutory income tax rate	35.0	%	35.0	%	35.0	%	35.0	%
State and local income taxes, net of U.S. federal income tax benefit	16.2	%	7.1	%	4.7	%	4.5	%
Increase (decrease) in valuation allowance	(10.3	%)	3.4	%	0.6	%	3.1	%
Stock options	0.0	%	(5.5	%)	0.0	%	0.0	%
Permanent items	(2.1	%)	2.3	%	0.0	%	0.0	%
Other, net	(0.1	%)	0.0	%	(0.5	%)	(1.6	%)
Effective income tax rate	38.7	%	42.3	%	39.8	%	41.0	%

F-27

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Net deferred income tax assets (liabilities) consist of the following:

	Successor 2006			Predecessor 2005
Current deferred tax assets:
Allowance for doubtful accounts	$	14,175		$	13,480
Restricted stock and stock options		10,025			—
Other		1,337			390
Gross current deferred tax assets		25,537			13,870
Less valuation allowance		(1,892	)
Total current deferred tax assets	$	23,645		$	13,870
Noncurrent deferred tax assets:
Deferred liabilities	$	7,316		$	5,255
Property and Equipment		—			4,658
Foreign and state net operating losses		6,498			9,698
Other		540			958
Gross noncurrent deferred tax assets		14,354			20,569
Less valuation allowance		(9,734	)		(8,666	)
Total noncurrent deferred tax assets	$	4,620		$	11,903
Noncurrent deferred tax liabilities:
Intangibles	$	216,307		$	14,048
Property and Equipment		6,775			—
Interest rate swap agreement		1,940			—
Total noncurrent deferred tax liabilities	$	225,022		$	14,048
Total net noncurrent deferred tax liabilities	$	220,402		$	2,145

The Company and its immediate parent, Education Management Holdings LLC (Holdings), were organized as single member limited liability companies. As such, the Company and Holdings are disregarded entities for federal and state income tax purposes. The predecessor consolidated group with EDMC as the parent company remains in tact for federal income tax purposes and EDMC remains the corporate taxpayer for state income tax purposes. EDMC will report in its federal and state income tax returns all of the income and expense of Holdings and the Company. Therefore, the consolidated income tax provision is computed on a basis similar to that of the Predecessor and reflects the consolidated income tax provision of EDMC and subsidiaries.

The Company recorded its assets and liabilities at fair market value in conjunction with the Transaction. As part of the business combination accounting, deferred tax liabilities of approximately $218.0 million were recorded related to the book write-up of tangible and intangible property to fair market value. Additionally, deferred tax assets of $45.0 million were recorded with respect to the business combination accounting write-up of the deferred tax asset associated with restricted stock and stock options and write-downs pertaining to unfavorable leases. Also, as a result of anticipated future state tax net operating losses arising from interest expense on acquisition-related debt, the Company has established a valuation allowance of $4.1 million against various deferred tax assets because the Company has determined that it is currently “more likely than not” that those deferred tax assets will not be realized. The overall net deferred tax impact resulting from the business combination accounting was the creation of a net deferred tax liability of $177.1 million.

At June 30, 2006, the Company had state net operating loss carry forwards of approximately $68.2 million available to offset future taxable income and a related deferred tax asset of $4.9 million. The carry forwards

F-28

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

expire at varying dates beginning in fiscal 2007 through fiscal 2026. The Company has determined that it is currently “more likely than not” that the deferred tax assets associated with $53.7 million of its state net operating loss carry forwards will not be realized and has established a valuation allowance equal to the gross deferred tax asset balance of $4.0 million related to these net operating loss carry forwards. In addition, certain of the Company’s state net operating losses may be subject to annual limitation due to these states’ adoption of the ownership change limitations imposed by Internal Revenue Code Section 382 or similar state provisions, which could result in the expiration of these state net operating loss carry forwards before they can be utilized.

At June 30, 2006, the Company had Canadian net operating loss carry forwards of approximately $5.1 million available to offset future taxable income and a related deferred tax asset of $1.6 million. The carry forwards expire at varying dates beginning in fiscal 2009 through fiscal 2016. At June 30, 2006, the Company had additional Canadian deferred tax assets of $2.0 million related to temporary items. The Company has determined that it is currently “more likely than not” that the deferred tax assets related to its Canadian net operating losses and temporary items will not be realized and has established a valuation allowance equal to the gross deferred tax assets.

13. STOCK-BASED COMPENSATION:

The Predecessor maintained a 1996 Stock Incentive Plan and a 2003 Incentive Plan for directors, executive management and key personnel, which provided for the issuance of stock-based incentive awards. An aggregate of 12,000,000 and 5,400,000 shares of Common Stock were reserved for issuance under the 1996 Stock Incentive Plan and 2003 Stock Incentive Plan, respectively. Prior to fiscal 2004, options issued to employees under the 1996 Incentive Plan provide for time-based vesting over three and four years. The majority of the grants made to employees in fiscal 2004, and all grants for fiscal 2005 and the period from July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006 provide for time-based vesting over two years.

The Predecessor also had two non-qualified management stock option plans under which options to purchase shares of Common Stock were granted to management employees prior to 1996. All outstanding options under these non-qualified plans were fully vested prior to fiscal 2004. Under the terms of the plans, the Board of Directors granted options to purchase shares at prices representing the fair market value of the shares at the time of the grant. The maximum term of all equity awards was ten years and it was the Predecessor’s policy to issue new shares upon share option exercises.

During the period from July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006, the Predecessor granted shares of restricted stock to non-employee directors, executive management and key personnel under the 2003 Incentive Plan. The restricted stock awards entitled the holder to shares of common stock as the award vested, including in connection with a change in control of the Predecessor. The Predecessor measured the fair value of restricted stock awards based upon the market price of the underlying common stock at the date of grant. Restricted stock expense was amortized over the applicable vesting period using the straight line method. As of the date of the Transaction, 561,768 shares of restricted stock were outstanding all of which vested in connection with the Transaction. The Predecessor recognized $18.1 million of expense related to restricted stock awards for the period ended May 31, 2006.

The Predecessor also maintained an employee stock purchase plan. The employee stock purchase plan allowed eligible employees of the Predecessor to purchase, at a discount, up to an aggregate of 3,000,000 shares of common stock through periodic payroll deduction. The Predecessor issued 70,496, 110,155, and 81,239 shares of common stock under the employee stock purchase plan in fiscal 2006, 2005, and 2004, respectively. The purchase price discount for participants in the employee stock purchase plan was 15% during fiscal 2004 and 2005. The discount percentage was reduced to 5% in July 2005.

F-29

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

The retirement plan had an ESOP feature which permitted the Predecessor to make contributions of its common stock to the ESOP for the benefit of its employees. The Predecessor was under no further obligation to make ESOP contributions to the Plan, but may have done so at its discretion. The Predecessor did not make any ESOP contributions during the period July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006, fiscal 2005, or fiscal 2004.

Summary of Stock Options:

	Predecessor
	Period from July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006			For the fiscal years ended June 30,
				2005			2004
	Options	Weighted Average Exercise Price		Options	Weighted Average Exercise Price		Options	Weighted Average Exercise Price
Outstanding, beginning of period	5,318,964	$	22.28	6,848,039	$	20.23	5,632,654	$	11.84
Granted	32,575		32.16	276,088		30.57	3,124,214		29.68
Exercised	807,113		18.44	1,514,629		13.39	1,404,317		9.57
Forfeited	153,602		29.20	290,534		28.39	504,512		18.09
Outstanding, end of period	4,390,824	$	22.82	5,318,964	$	22.28	6,848,039	$	20.23
Exercisable, end of period	4,390,824			3,421,058			2,513,866

All outstanding unvested stock options were fully vested and settled in connection with the Transaction.

14. SUPPLEMENTAL GUARANTOR CONDENSED CONSOLIDATING FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

On June 1, 2006, in connection with the Transaction, the Company (i) entered into a new $1,485.0 million senior secured credit facility, consisting of a $1,185.0 million term loan facility with a seven year maturity and a $300.0 million revolving credit facility with a six year maturity, and (ii) issued an aggregate of $760.0 million of senior notes and senior subordinated notes as described in Note 6. The senior notes are jointly and severally and unconditionally guaranteed on a senior unsecured basis and the senior subordinated notes are jointly and severally and unconditionally guaranteed on an unsecured senior subordinated basis, in each case, subject to certain exceptions, by substantially all wholly owned domestic subsidiaries of the Company (collectively, the “Guarantors”). All other subsidiaries of the Company, either direct or indirect, do not guarantee the senior notes and senior subordinated notes (“Non-Guarantors”). The Guarantors also unconditionally guarantee the senior secured credit facilities, described in Note 6.

The following tables present the financial position, results of operations and cash flows of the Company (Parent), the Guarantor Subsidiaries, the Non-Guarantor Subsidiaries and Eliminations as of June 30, 2005 and 2006 and for the periods from July 1, 2005 to May 31, 2006 and from June 1, 2006 to June 30, 2006 and the years ended June 30, 2005 and 2004.

F-30

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

SUPPLEMENTAL CONDENSED CONSOLIDATING BALANCE SHEET (Successor)

June 30, 2006 (in thousands)

	Parent		Guarantor Subsidiaries			Non-Guarantor Subsidiaries			Elimination			Consolidated
Assets
Current:
Cash and cash equivalents	$	5,018	$	170		$	258,108		$	—		$	263,296
Restricted cash		4,766		—			5,270			—			10,036
Trade receivables, net		1,127		30			57,075			—			58,232
Inventories		—		—			6,169			—			6,169
Prepaid expenses, taxes and other current assets		17,426		207			47,837			—			65,470
Total current assets		28,337		407			374,459			—			403,203
Property and equipment, net		29,779		4,552			341,805			—			376,136
Intangible assets, net		897		81			516,405			—			517,383
Goodwill		—		—			2,568,034			—			2,568,034
Intercompany balances		2,206,170		(4,550	)		(2,201,620	)		—			—
Other long term assets		76,057		7			4,627			—			80,691
Investment in subsidiaries		1,105,131		—			—			(1,105,131	)		—
Total assets	$	3,446,371	$	497		$	1,603,710		$	(1,105,131	)	$	3,945,447
Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity
Current:
Short-term and current portion of long-term debt	$	171,874	$	6		$	915		$	—		$	172,795
Accounts payable and other current liabilities		41,816		3,252			219,433			—			264,501
Total current liabilities		213,690		3,258			220,348			—			437,296
Long-term debt, less current portion		1,933,203		9			3,958			—			1,937,170
Other long term liabilities		9,149		38			58,633			—			67,820
Deferred income taxes		7,570		43			212,789			—			220,402
Total liabilities		2,163,612		3,348			495,728			—			2,662,688
Total stockholders' equity		1,282,759		(2,851	)		1,107,982			(1,105,131	)		1,282,759
Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity	$	3,446,371	$	497		$	1,603,710		$	(1,105,131	)	$	3,945,447

F-31

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

SUPPLEMENTAL CONSOLIDATING STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS (Successor)

Period June 1, 2006 to June 30, 2006

(in thousands)

	Parent			Guarantor Subsidiaries			Non-Guarantor Subsidiaries			Elimination			Consolidated
Net revenues	$	—		$	1,673		$	72,724		$	—		$	74,397
Costs and expenses:
Educational services		4,872			33			59,778			—			64,683
General and administrative		(57,471	)		1,815			81,623			—			25,967
Amortization of intangible assets		15			—			1,694			—			1,709
Total Costs and Expenses		(52,584	)		1,848			143,095						92,359
Income (loss) before interest and income taxes		52,584			(175	)		(70,371	)		—			(17,962	)
Interest expense, net		13,883			1			222			—			14,106
Equity in earnings of subsidiaries		45,308			—			—			(45,308	)		—
Income (loss) before income taxes		(6,607	)		(176	)		(70,593	)		45,308			(32,068	)
Provision (benefit) for income taxes		13,052			210			(25,671	)		—			(12,409	)
Net income (loss)	$	(19,659	)	$	(386	)	$	(44,922	)	$	45,308		$	(19,659	)

F-32

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

SUPPLEMENTAL CONDENSED CONSOLIDATING STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS (Successor)

Period June 1, 2006 to June 30, 2006

(in thousands)

	Parent			Guarantor Subsidiaries			Non-Guarantor Subsidiaries			Elimination			Consolidated
Cash Flow From Operating Activities
Net income (loss)	$	(19,659	)	$	(386	)	$	(44,922	)	$	45,308		$	(19,659	)
Non-cash adjustments		44,629			54			8,802			(45,308	)		8,177
Changes in operating assets and liabilities		(123,552	)		629			112,046			—			(10,877	)
Cash Flow provided by (used in) operating activities		(98,582	)		297			75,926			—			(22,359	)
Cash Flow From Investing Activities
Intercompany Transactions		(55,839	)		(247	)		56,086			—			—
Acquisition of Predecessor, net of cash acquired		(3,526,171	)		—			—			—			(3,526,171	)
Cash paid for property and equipment		(1,434	)		(35	)		(6,195	)		—			(7,664	)
Other investing activities					—			(233	)		—			(233	)
Cash provided by (used in) investing activities		(3,583,444	)		(282	)		49,658			—			(3,534,068	)
Cash Flow From Financing Activities
Net borrowings (repayments) of long-term debt		2,104,997			(1	)		(87	)		—			2,104,909
Transaction activities		1,400,186			—			—			—			1,400,186
Other financing activities		(59,574	)		—			—			—			(59,574	)
Cash provided by (used in) financing activities		3,445,609			(1	)		(87	)		—			3,445,521
Effect of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents		—			—			124			—			124
Increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents		(236,417	)		14			125,621			—			(110,782	)
Beginning cash and cash equivalents		241,435			156			132,487						374,078
Ending cash and cash equivalents	$	5,018		$	170		$	258,108		$	—		$	263,296

F-33

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

SUPPLEMENTAL CONSOLIDATING STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS (Predecessor)

Period July 1, 2005 to May 31, 2006

(in thousands)

	Parent			Guarantor Subsidiaries			Non-Guarantor Subsidiaries		Elimination			Consolidated
Net revenues	$	111		$	8,018		$	1,087,634	$	—		$	1,095,763
Costs and expenses:
Educational services		32,873			4,127			607,644		—			644,644
General and administrative		(9,738	)		9,564			278,674		—			278,500
Amortization of intangible assets		166			—			3,794		—			3,960
Total Costs and Expenses		23,301			13,691			890,112		—			927,104
Income (loss) before interest and income taxes		(23,190	)		(5,673	)		197,522		—			168,659
Interest (income) expense, net		(8,127	)		1			2,776		—			(5,350	)
Equity in earnings of subsidiaries		(114,322	)		—			—		114,322			—
Income (loss) before income taxes		99,259			(5,674	)		194,746		(114,322	)		174,009
Provision (benefit) for income taxes		(1,147	)		(698	)		75,448		—			73,603
Net income (loss)	$	100,406		$	(4,976	)	$	119,298	$	(114,322	)	$	100,406

F-34

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

SUPPLEMENTAL CONDENSED CONSOLIDATING SCHEDULE OF CASH FLOWS (Predecessor)

Period July 1, 2005 to May 31, 2006

(in thousands)

	Parent			Guarantor Subsidiaries			Non-Guarantor Subsidiaries			Elimination			Consolidated
Cash Flow From Operating Activities
Net income (loss)	$	100,406		$	(4,976	)	$	119,298		$	(114,322	)	$	100,406
Non-cash adjustments		(105,459	)		212			71,381			114,322			80,456
Changes in operating assets and liabilities		57,435			248			63,119			—			120,802
Cash flow provided by (used in) operating activities		52,382			(4,516	)		253,798			—			301,664
Cash Flow From Investing Activities
Intercompany Transactions		201,506			5,666			(207,172	)		—			—
Cash paid for businesses acquired by the Company, net of cash acquired		(1,333	)		—						—			(1,333	)
Cash paid for property and equipment		(7,691	)		(1,159	)		(50,435	)		—			(59,285	)
Other investing activities		—			—			4,203			—			4,203
Cash provided by (used in) investing activities		192,482			4,507			(253,404	)		—			(56,415	)
Cash Flow From Financing Activities
Net repayments of long-term debt		(62,000	)		—			(3,603	)		—			(65,603	)
Other financing activities		54,624			38			(32,220	)		—			22,442
Cash provided by (used in) financing activities		(7,376	)		38			(35,823	)		—			(43,161	)
Effect of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents		—			—			16			—			16
Increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents		237,488			29			(35,413	)		—			202,104
Beginning cash and cash equivalents		3,947			127			167,900						171,974
Ending cash and cash equivalents	$	241,435		$	156		$	132,487		$	—		$	374,078

F-35

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

SUPPLEMENTAL CONDENSED CONSOLIDATING BALANCE SHEET

June 30, 2005 (in thousands)

	Parent			Guarantor Subsidiaries		Non-Guarantor Subsidiaries		Elimination			Consolidated
Assets
Current:
Cash and cash equivalents	$	3,947		$	127	$	167,900	$	—		$	171,974
Restricted cash		3,225			—		1,667		—			4,892
Trade receivables, net		1,857			195		55,916		—			57,968
Inventory		11			—		5,587		—			5,598
Prepaid expenses, taxes and other current assets		21,514			201		17,531		—			39,246
Total current assets		30,554			523		248,601		—			279,678
Property and equipment, net		25,421			3,605		296,770		—			325,796
Intangible assets, net		1,079			88		16,332		—			17,499
Goodwill		11,237			—		303,523		—			314,760
Intercompany balances		(307,809	)		869		306,940		—			—
Other long-term assets		14,070			7		4,217		—			18,294
Investment in subsidiaries		1,009,962			—		—		(1,009,962	)		—
Total assets	$	784,514		$	5,092	$	1,176,383	$	(1,009,962	)	$	956,027
Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity
Current:
Short-term and current portion of long-term debt	$	62,024		$	6	$	4,121	$	—		$	66,151
Accounts payable and other current liabilities		48,697			2,534		115,256		—			166,487
Total current liabilities		110,721			2,540		119,377		—			232,638
Long-term debt, less current portion		80			22		4,167		—			4,269
Other long-term liabilities		7,512			21		43,432		—			50,965
Deferred income taxes		191			54		1,900		—			2,145
Total liabilities		118,504			2,637		168,876		—			290,017
Total stockholders’ equity		666,010			2,455		1,007,507		(1,009,962	)		666,010
Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity	$	784,514		$	5,092	$	1,176,383	$	(1,009,962	)	$	956,027

F-36

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

SUPPLEMENTAL CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS (Predecessor)

Fiscal Year Ended June 30, 2005

(in thousands)

	Parent			Guarantor Subsidiaries			Non-Guarantor Subsidiaries		Elimination			Consolidated
Net revenues	$	246		$	9,076		$	1,010,016	$	—		$	1,019,338
Costs and expenses:
Educational services		24,319			445			615,681		—			640,445
General and administrative		(49,311	)		10,418			242,706		—			203,813
Amortization of intangible assets		181			—			6,311		—			6,492
Total Costs and Expenses		(24,811	)		10,863			864,698		—			850,750
Income (loss) before interest and income taxes		25,057			(1,787	)		145,318		—			168,588
Interest (income) expense, net		(3,582	)		1			3,361		—			(220	)
Equity in earnings of subsidiaries		(80,796	)		—			—		80,796			—
Income (loss) before income taxes		109,435			(1,788	)		141,957		(80,796	)		168,808
Provision (benefit) for income taxes		7,861			(192	)		59,565		—			67,234
Net income (loss)	$	101,574		$	(1,596	)	$	82,392	$	(80,796	)	$	101,574

F-37

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

SUPPLEMENTAL CONDENSED CONSOLIDATING STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS (Predecessor)

Fiscal Year Ended June 30, 2005

(in thousands)

	Parent			Guarantor Subsidiaries			Non-Guarantor Subsidiaries			Elimination			Consolidated
Cash Flow From Operating Activities
Net income (loss)	$	101,574		$	(1,596	)	$	82,392		$	(80,796	)	$	101,574
Non-cash adjustments		(59,298	)		525			61,861			80,796			83,884
Changes in operating assets and liabilities		(19,074	)		(478	)		26,591			—			7,039
Cash flow provided by (used in) operating activities		23,202			(1,549	)		170,844			—			192,497
Cash Flow From Investing Activities
Intercompany Transactions		33,959			(880	)		(33,079	)		—			—
Cash paid for businesses acquired by the Company, net of cash acquired		(12,298	)		—			—			—			(12,298	)
Cash paid for property and equipment		(15,475	)		2,327			(76,364	)		—			(89,512	)
Other investing activities		—			—			3,711			—			3,711
Cash provided by (used in) investment activities		6,186			1,447			(105,732	)		—			(98,099	)
Cash Flow From Financing Activities
Net borrowings (repayments) of long-term debt		(63,076	)		6			2,905			—			(60,165	)
Other financing activities		31,689			(13	)		(10,507	)		—			21,169
Cash provided by (used in) financing activities		(31,387	)		(7	)		(7,602	)		—			(38,996	)
Effect of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents		—			—			(156	)		—			(156	)
Increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents		(1,999	)		(109	)		57,354			—			55,246
Beginning cash and cash equivalents		5,946			236			110,546			—			116,728
Ending cash and cash equivalents	$	3,947		$	127		$	167,900		$	—		$	171,974

F-38

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

SUPPLEMENTAL CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS (Predecessor)

Fiscal Year Ended June 30, 2004

(in thousands)

	Parent			Guarantor Subsidiaries			Non-Guarantor Subsidiaries		Elimination			Consolidated
Net revenues	$	—		$	11,179		$	841,840	$	—		$	853,019
Costs and expenses:
Educational services		17,019			(384	)		529,497		—			546,132
General and administrative		(40,412	)		9,831			197,571		—			166,990
Amortization of intangible assets		181			—			6,730		—			6,911
Total Costs and Expenses		(23,212	)		9,447			733,798		—			720,033
Income before interest and income taxes		23,212			1,732			108,042		—			132,986
Interest (income) expense, net		(618	)		1			3,092		—			2,475
Equity in earnings of subsidiaries		(62,031	)		—			—		62,031			—
Income (loss) before income taxes		85,861			1,731			104,950		(62,031	)		130,511
Provision for income taxes		8,847			515			44,135		—			53,497
Net income (loss)	$	77,014		$	1,216		$	60,815	$	(62,031	)	$	77,014

F-39

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

SUPPLEMENTAL CONDENSED CONSOLIDATING STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS (Predecessor)

Fiscal Year Ended June 30, 2004

(in thousands)

	Parent			Guarantor Subsidiaries			Non-Guarantor Subsidiaries			Elimination			Consolidated
Cash Flow From Operating Activities
Net income (loss)	$	77,014		$	1,216		$	60,815		$	(62,031	)	$	77,014
Non cash adjustments		(53,411	)		337			48,363			62,031			57,320
Changes in operating assets and liabilities		28,367			418			3,157			—			31,942
Cash flow provided by (used in) operating activities		51,970			1,971			112,335			—			166,276
Cash Flow From Investing Activities
Intercompany Transactions		2,953			4,282			(7,235	)		—			—
Cash paid for businesses acquired by the Company, net of cash acquired		(157,777	)		—			—			—			(157,777	)
Cash paid for property and equipment		(7,347	)		(2,560	)		(73,894	)		—			(83,801	)
Other investing activities		(1,504	)		—			3,168			—			1,664
Cash provided by (used in) investing activities		(163,675	)		1,722			(77,961	)		—			(239,914	)
Cash Flow From Financing Activities
Net borrowings (repayments) of long-term debt		90,100			—			—			—			90,100
Other financing activities		23,349			(3,592	)		(7,817	)		—			11,940
Cash provided by (used in) financing activities		113,449			(3,592	)		(7,817	)		—			102,040
Effect of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents		—			—			(631	)		—			(631	)
Increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents		1,744			101			25,926			—			27,771
Beginning cash and cash equivalents		4,202			135			84,620			—			88,957
Ending cash and cash equivalents	$	5,946		$	236		$	110,546		$	—		$	116,728

F-40

SCHEDULE II

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC AND SUBSIDIARIES

VALUATION AND QUALIFYING ACCOUNTS

(Dollars in thousands)

	Balance at Beginning of Period		Additions Charged to Expenses		Deductions		Other (a)			Balance at End of Period
Allowance accounts for:
Year ended June 30, 2004
Uncollectable accounts receivable	$	26,837	$	22,423	$	8,357	$	—		$	40,903
Estimated future loan losses		1,362		172		—		—			1,534
Deferred tax asset valuation allowance		3,578		4,065		—		—			7,643
Year ended June 30, 2005											—
Uncollectable accounts receivable	$	40,903	$	28,017	$	36,096	$	—		$	32,824
Estimated future loan losses		1,534		147		—		—			1,681
Deferred tax asset valuation allowance		7,643		1,023		—		—			8,666
Year ended June 30, 2006
Uncollectable accounts receivable	$	32,824	$	23,027	$	18,853	$	(1,606	)	$	35,392
Estimated future loan losses		1,681		—		—		—			1,681
Deferred tax asset valuation allowance		8,666		1,068		—		—			9,734

(a) Ai allowance for uncollectable accounts reserve revaluation in connection with Transaction

S-1

Education Management LLC

Education Management Finance Corp.

Offers to Exchange

$375,000,000 principal amount of its 8 ³/4% Senior Notes due 2014 and $385,000,000 principal amount of its 10 ¹/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016, each of which has been registered under the Securities Act of 1933, for any and all of its outstanding 8 ³/4% Senior Notes due 2014 and 10 ³/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016, respectively.

Until the date that is 90 days from the date of this prospectus, all dealers that effect transactions in these securities, whether or not participating in this offering, may be required to deliver a prospectus. This is in addition to the dealers’ obligation to deliver a prospectus when acting as underwriters with respect to their unsold allotments or subscriptions.

PART II

INFORMATION NOT REQUIRED IN PROSPECTUS

Item 20. Indemnification of Directors and Officers.

(a) Education Management Finance Corp. and Brown Mackie Holding Company are each incorporated under the laws of Delaware.

Section 145 of the Delaware General Corporation Law (the “DGCL”) grants each corporation organized thereunder the power to indemnify any person who is or was a director, officer, employee or agent of a corporation or enterprise, against expenses, including attorneys’ fees, judgments, fines and amounts paid in settlement actually and reasonably incurred by him in connection with any threatened, pending or completed action, suit or proceeding, whether civil, criminal, administrative or investigative, other than an action by or in the right of the corporation, by reason of being or having been in any such capacity, if he acted in good faith in a manner reasonably believed to be in, or not opposed to, the best interests of the corporation, and, with respect to any criminal action or proceeding, had no reasonable cause to believe his conduct was unlawful.

Section 102(b)(7) of the DGCL enables a corporation in its certificate of incorporation or an amendment thereto to eliminate or limit the personal liability of a director to the corporation or its stockholders of monetary damages for violations of the directors’ fiduciary duty of care, except (i) for any breach of the director’s duty of loyalty to the corporation or its stockholders, (ii) for acts or omissions not in good faith or that involve intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law, (iii) pursuant to Section 174 of the DGCL (providing for liability of directors for unlawful payment of dividends or unlawful stock purchases or redemptions) or (iv) for any transaction from which a director derived an improper personal benefit.

In accordance with these provisions, the articles of incorporation and/or the bylaws of Education Management Finance Corp. and Brown Mackie Holding Company provide for indemnification of any person who is, was or shall be a director, officer, employee or agent of the corporation, to the full extent permitted by the DGCL, as amended from time to time.

(b) Education Management LLC is a limited liability company organized under the laws of Delaware

Section 18-108 of the Delaware Limited Liability Company Act empowers a Delaware limited liability company to indemnify and hold harmless any member or manager of the limited liability company from and against any and all claims and demands whatsoever.

In accordance with this provisions, the Limited Liability Company Agreement of Education Management LLC state that the company shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the member and any director, officer, partner, stockholder, controlling person or employee of the member, each member of the board of managers and any person serving at the request of the company from any liability, loss or damage incurred by the indemnified party by reason of any act performed or omitted to be performed by the indemnified party in connection with the business of the company including reasonable attorneys’ fees and costs and any amounts expended in the settlement of any such claims of liability, loss or damage; provided however, that if the liability, loss, damage or claim arises out of any action or inaction of an indemnified party, indemnification shall be available only if (a) either (i) the indemnified party, at the time of such action or inaction determined in good faith that its, his or her course of conduct was in, or not opposed to, the best interests of the company or (ii) in the case of inaction by the indemnified party, the indemnified party did not intend its, his or her inaction to be harmful or opposed to the best interests of the company and (b) the action or inaction did not constitute fraud, gross negligence or willful misconduct by the indemnified party.

(c) Higher Education Services, Inc. is incorporated under the laws of Georgia

II-1

Section 14 of the Georgia Business Corporation Code states that a corporation may indemnify an individual who is a party to a proceeding because he or she is or was a director against liability incurred in the proceeding if: (1) such individual conducted himself or herself in good faith; and (2) such individual reasonably believed: (A) in the case of conduct in his or her official capacity, that such conduct was in the best interests of the corporation; (B) in all other cases, that such conduct was at least not opposed to the best interests of the corporation; and (C) in the case of any criminal proceeding, that the individual had no reasonable cause to believe such conduct was unlawful. A corporation may not indemnify a director under this Code section: (1) in connection with a proceeding by or in the right of the corporation, except for reasonable expenses incurred in connection with the proceeding if it is determined that the director has met the relevant standard of conduct; or (2) in connection with any proceeding with respect to conduct for which he or she was adjudged liable on the basis that personal benefit was improperly received by him or her, whether or not involving action in his or her official capacity. The Code further states that a corporation shall indemnify a director who was wholly successful, on the merits or otherwise, in the defense of any proceeding to which he or she was a party because he or she was a director of the corporation against reasonable expenses incurred by the director in connection with the proceeding. A corporation may, before final disposition of a proceeding, advance funds to pay for or reimburse the reasonable expenses incurred by a director who is a party to a proceeding because he or she is a director.

A corporation may indemnify and advance expenses under this part to an officer of the corporation who is a party to a proceeding because he or she is an officer of the corporation to the same extent as a director and f he or she is not a director, to such further extent as may be provided by the articles of incorporation, the bylaws, a resolution of the board of directors, or contract except for liability arising out of conduct that constitutes appropriation, in violation of his or her duties, of any business opportunity of the corporation, acts or omissions which involve intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law, the types of liability set forth in section 14-2-832 of the Code or receipt of an improper personal benefit.

A corporation may purchase and maintain insurance on behalf of an individual who is a director, officer, employee, or agent of the corporation or who, while a director, officer, employee, or agent of the corporation, serves at the corporation’s request as a director, officer, partner, trustee, employee, or agent of another domestic or foreign corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust, employee benefit plan, or other entity against liability asserted against or incurred by him or her in that capacity or arising from his or her status as a director, officer, employee, or agent, whether or not the corporation would have power to indemnify or advance expenses to him or her against the same liability.

The bylaws of Higher Education Services, Inc. provide that the corporation shall indemnify any and all persons who may serve or who have served at any time as directors, trustees or officers to the fullest extent permitted by the Georgia Business Corporation Code.

(d) MCM University Plaza, Inc. is incorporated under the laws of Illinois.

Under Article 8, Section 5 of the Illinois Business Corporation Act, a corporation may indemnify any person who was or is a party, or is threatened to be made a party to any threatened, pending or completed action, suit or proceeding, whether civil, criminal, administrative or investigative (other than an action by or in the right of the corporation) by reason of the fact that he or she is or was a director, officer, employee or agent of the corporation, or who is or was serving at the request of the corporation as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise, against expenses (including attorneys’ fees), judgments, fines and amounts paid in settlement actually and reasonably incurred by such person in connection with such action, suit or proceeding, if such person acted in good faith and in a manner he or she reasonably believed to be in, or not opposed to, the best interests of the corporation, and, with respect to any criminal action or proceeding, had no reasonable cause to believe his or her conduct was unlawful.

A corporation may purchase and maintain insurance on behalf of any such person against any liability asserted him or her and incurred by him or her in any such capacity.

II-2

The bylaws of MCM University Plaza, Inc. provide that the corporation shall indemnify any and all persons whom it shall have the power to indemnify under the provisions of the Illinois Business Corporation Act from and against any and all of the expenses, liabilities or other matters referred to by such provisions.

(e) AIIM Restaurant, Inc. and Argosy University Family Center, Inc. are each incorporated under the laws of Minnesota.

The Minnesota Business Corporation Act provides that a corporation shall indemnify a person made or threatened to be made a party to a proceeding by reason of the former or present official capacity of the person against judgments, penalties, fines, including, without limitation, excise taxes assessed against the person with respect to an employee benefit plan, settlements, and reasonable expenses, including attorneys’ fees and disbursements, incurred by the person in connection with the proceeding, if, with respect to the acts or omissions of the person complained of in the proceeding, the person has not been indemnified by another organization or employee benefit plan for the same judgments, penalties, fines, including, without limitation, excise taxes assessed against the person with respect to an employee benefit plan, settlements, and reasonable expenses, including attorneys’ fees and disbursements, incurred by the person in connection with the proceeding with respect to the same acts or omissions; acted in good faith; received no improper personal benefit; in the case of a criminal proceeding, had no reasonable cause to believe the conduct was unlawful; and in the case of acts or omissions occurring in the official capacity, reasonably believed that the conduct was in the best interests of the corporation, or in the case of acts or omissions occurring in the official capacity, reasonably believed that the conduct was not opposed to the best interests of the corporation.

A corporation may purchase and maintain insurance on behalf of a person in that person’s official capacity against any liability asserted against and incurred by the person in or arising from that capacity, whether or not the corporation would have been required to indemnify the person against the liability under the provisions of this section.

The articles of association and the bylaws of AIIM Restaurant, Inc. and Argosy University Family Center, Inc. provide that directors, officers, committee members and other persons shall have the rights to indemnification provided by the Minnesota Business Corporation Act.

(f) EDMC Aviation, Inc. is incorporated under the laws of Pennsylvania.

Under Section 1741 of the Pennsylvania Business Corporation Law of 1988 (the “PBCL”), subject to certain limitations, a corporation has the power to indemnify directors, officers and other parties under certain prescribed circumstances against expenses (including attorneys’ fees), judgments, fines and amounts paid in settlement actually and reasonably incurred in connection with a threatened, pending or completed action or proceeding, whether civil, criminal, administrative or investigative, to which any of them is a party or threatened to be made a party by reason of his being a representative of the corporation or serving at the request of the corporation as a representative of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise, if he acted in good faith and in a manner he reasonably believed to be in, or not opposed to, the best interests of the corporation and, with respect to any criminal proceeding, had no reasonable cause to believe his conduct was unlawful.

Expenses incurred by parties in defending any action may be paid by the corporation in advance of the final disposition of such action or proceeding upon receipt of an undertaking by or on behalf of the party to repay such amount if it shall ultimately be determined that he is not entitled to be indemnified by the corporation.

The bylaws of EDMC Aviation, Inc. provide that it may indemnify any person who is or was or shall be a director or officer of the corporation, and may indemnify any person who is or was or shall be an employee or agent of the corporation, to the fullest extent permitted by the PBCL, from time to time.

(g) AID Restaurant, Inc. and AIH Restaurant, Inc. are each incorporated under the laws of Texas.

II-3

The Texas Business Organizations Code provides that an enterprise shall indemnify a governing person, former governing person, or delegate against reasonable expenses actually incurred by the person in connection with a proceeding in which the person is a respondent because the person is or was a governing person or delegate if the person is wholly successful, on the merits or otherwise, in the defense of the proceeding. A court that determines, in a suit for indemnification, that a governing person, former governing person, or delegate is entitled to indemnification under this section shall order indemnification and award to the person the expenses incurred in securing the indemnification.

An enterprise may indemnify a governing person, former governing person, or delegate who was, is, or is threatened to be made a respondent in a proceeding to the extent permitted by Section 8.102 of the Code if it is determined in accordance with Section 8.103 that the person acted in good faith; reasonably believed: (i) in the case of conduct in the person’s official capacity, that the person’s conduct was in the enterprise’s best interests; and (ii) in any other case, that the person’s conduct was not opposed to the enterprise’s best interests; and, in the case of a criminal proceeding, did not have a reasonable cause to believe the person’s conduct was unlawful.

The bylaws of AID Restaurant, Inc. and AIH Restaurant, Inc. provide that the corporations indemnify its present and former directors and officers to the fullest extent permitted by the Texas Business Corporation Act.

Item 21. Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules.

(a) Exhibits

2.1	Agreement and Plan of Merger, dated as of March 3, 2006, between EM Acquisition Corporation and Education Management Corporation (“EDMC”) (incorporated herein by reference to the Exhibits filed with EDMC’s Current Report on Form 8-K dated March 9, 2006 and filed March 9, 2006 (Commission File No. 000-21363))
3.1	Certificate of Formation of Education Management LLC
3.2	Limited Liability Company Agreement of Education Management LLC
3.3	Articles of Incorporation of Education Management Finance Corp.
3.4	Bylaws of Education Management Finance Corp.
3.5	Articles of Incorporation of AID Restaurant, Inc.
3.6	Bylaws of AID Restaurant, Inc.
3.7	Articles of Incorporation of AIH Restaurant, Inc.
3.8	Bylaws of AIH Restaurant, Inc.
3.9	Articles of Incorporation of AIIM Restaurant, Inc.
3.10	Bylaws of AIIM Restaurant, Inc.
3.11	Articles of Incorporation of Argosy University Family Center, Inc.
3.12	Bylaws of Argosy University Family Center, Inc.
3.13	Certificate of Incorporation of Brown Mackie Holding Company
3.14	Bylaws of Brown Mackie Holding Company
3.15	Articles of Incorporation of The Connecting Link, Inc.
3.16	Bylaws of The Connecting Link, Inc.
3.17	Articles of Incorporation of EDMC Aviation Inc.
3.18	Bylaws of EDMC Aviation Inc.
3.19	Articles of Incorporation of EDMC Marketing and Advertising, Inc.

II-4

3.20	Bylaws of EDMC Marketing and Advertising, Inc.
3.21	Articles of Incorporation of Higher Education Services, Inc.
3.22	Bylaws of Higher Education Services, Inc.
3.23	Articles of Incorporation of MCM University Plaza, Inc.
3.24	Bylaws of MCM University Plaza, Inc.
4.1	Indenture, dated as of June 1, 2006, among Education Management LLC, Education Management Finance Corp., the Guarantors named therein and The Bank of New York, as Trustee, governing the 8 3/4% Senior Notes*
4.2	Indenture, dated as of June 1, 2006, among Education Management LLC, Education Management Finance Corp., the Guarantors named therein and The Bank of New York, as Trustee, governing the 10 1/4% Senior Subordinated Notes*
5.1	Opinion of Simpson Thacher & Bartlett LLP*
5.2	Opinion of J. Devitt Kramer*
5.3	Opinion of Georgia Counsel*
5.4	Opinion of Illinois Counsel*
5.5	Opinion of Minnesota Counsel*
5.6	Opinion of Texas Counsel*
10.1	Credit and Guaranty Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2006, among Education Management LLC, Education Management Holdings LLC, certain Subsidiaries of Education Management Holdings LLC, the designated Subsidiary Borrowers referred to therein, each lender thereto, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC, as Syndication Agent, BNP Paribas, as Administrative Agent and Collateral Agent and Merrill Lynch Capital Corporation and Bank of America, N.A., as Documentation Agents*
10.2	Pledge and Security Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2006, among Education Management LLC, Education Management Holdings LLC, Education Management Finance Corp., the subsidiaries of Education Management LLC and BNP Paribas, as Collateral Agent*
10.3	Copyright Security Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2006, between Educational Management LLC and BNP Paribas, as Collateral Agent*
10.4	Trademark Security Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2006, between Educational Management LLC and BNP Paribas, as Collateral Agent*
10.5	Subscription Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2006, between EM Acquisition Corporation and each of the Purchasers named therein*
10.6	Management Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2006, between EM Acquisition Corporation, Education Management LLC, Goldman, Sachs & Co. and Providence Equity Partners Inc*
10.7	Shareholders’ Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2006, between EM Acquisition Corporation and each of the Shareholders named therein*
10.8	EDMC Retirement Plan (incorporated by reference to the Exhibits to EDMC’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended June 30, 2003, filed on September 29, 2003 (the “2003 Form 10-K”))
10.9	EDMC Stock Option Plan, effective August 1, 2006*
10.10	EDMC Deferred Compensation Plan, amended for implementation August 1, 2003 (incorporated by reference to the Exhibits filed with the 2003 Form 10-K)

II-5

10.11	EDMC Deferred Compensation Plan, amended for implementation August 1, 2003, with resolution for rescission of 2005 contributions under the AJCA, effected December 14, 2005 (incorporated by reference the Exhibits filed with EDMC’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed on December 19, 2005)
10.14	Fiscal 2007 Management Incentive Compensation Plan*
10.15	Employment Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2006, by and between EDMC and John R. McKernan, Jr.
10.16	Employment Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2006, by and between EDMC and Edward H. West
10.17	Nonqualified Stock Option Agreement (Time-Vesting), between EDMC and John R. McKernan, Jr., effective as of August 1, 2006
10.18	Nonqualified Stock Option Agreement (Performance-Vesting), between EDMC and John R. McKernan, Jr., effective as of August 1, 2006
10.19	Nonqualified Stock Option Agreement (Time-Vesting), between EDMC and Edward H. West, effective as of August 1, 2006
10.20	Nonqualified Stock Option Agreement (Performance-Vesting), between EDMC and Edward H. West, effective as of August 1, 2006
12.1	Computation of Ratio of Earnings to Fixed Charges
21.1	List of Subsidiaries
23.1	Consent of Simpson Thacher & Bartlett LLP (included as part of its opinion filed as Exhibit 5.1 hereto)*
23.2	Consent of J. Devitt Kramer (included as part of his opinion filed as Exhibit 5.2 hereto)*
23.3	Consent of Georgia Counsel (included as part of its opinion filed as Exhibit 5.3 hereto)*
23.4	Consent of Illinois Counsel (included as part of its opinion filed as Exhibit 5.4 hereto)*
23.5	Consent of Minnesota Counsel (included as part of its opinion filed as Exhibit 5.5 hereto)*
23.6	Consent of Texas Counsel (included as part of its opinion filed as Exhibit 5.6 hereto)*
23.7	Consent of Ernst & Young LLP
24.1	Power of Attorney of Education Management LLC
24.2	Power of Attorney of Education Management Finance Corp
24.3	Power of Attorney of AID Restaurant, Inc.
24.4	Power of Attorney of AIH Restaurant, Inc.
24.5	Power of Attorney of AIIM Restaurant, Inc.
24.6	Power of Attorney of Argosy University Family Center
24.7	Power of Attorney of Brown Mackie Holding Company
24.8	Power of Attorney of The Connecting Link, Inc.
24.9	Power of Attorney of EDMC Aviation Inc.
24.10	Power of Attorney of EDMC Marketing and Advertising, Inc.
24.11	Power of Attorney of Higher Education Services, Inc.
24.12	Power of Attorney of MCM University Plaza, Inc.
25.1	Form T-1 Statement of Eligibility under the Trust Indenture Act of 1939 of The Bank of New York with respect to the Indenture governing the 8 3/4% Senior Notes*
25.2	Form T-1 Statement of Eligibility under the Trust Indenture Act of 1939 of The Bank of New York with respect to the Indenture governing the 10 1/4 % Senior Subordinated Notes*

II-6

99.1	Form of Letter of Transmittal*
99.2	Form of Letter to Brokers, Dealers, Commercial Banks, Trust Companies and Other Nominees*
99.3	Form of Letter to Clients*
99.4	Form of Notice of Guaranteed Delivery*

* To be filed by amendment

(b) Financial Statement Schedules

None.

Item 22. Undertakings.

(a) The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes:

(1) to file, during any period in which offers or sales are being made, a post-effective amendment to this registration statement:

(i) to include any prospectus required by Section 10(a)(3) of the Securities Act;

(ii) to reflect in the prospectus any facts or events arising after the effective date of the registration statement (or the most recent post-effective amend) which, individually or in the aggregate, represent a fundamental change in the information set forth in the registration statement. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any increase or decrease in volume of securities offered (if the total dollar value of securities offered would not exceed that which was registered) and any deviation from the low or high end of the estimated maximum offering range may be reflected in the form of prospectus filed with the Commission pursuant to Rule 424(b) if, in the aggregate, the changes in volume and price represent no more that a 20 percent change in the maximum aggregate offering price set forth in the “Calculation of Registration Fee” table in the effective registration statement; and

(iii) to include any material information with respect to the plan of distribution not previously disclosed in the registration statement or any material change to such information in the registration statement;

(2) that, for the purpose of determining any liability under the Securities Act, each such post-effective amendment shall be deemed to be a new registration statement relating to the securities offered therein, and the offering of such securities at that time shall be deemed to be the initial bona fide offering thereof; and

(3) to remove from registration by means of a post-effective amendment any of the securities being registered which remain unsold at the termination of the offering.

(4) That, for the purpose of determining liability of the registrant under the Securities Act to any purchaser in the initial distribution of the securities:

The undersigned registrant undertakes that in a primary offering of securities of the undersigned registrant pursuant to this registration statement, regardless of the underwriting method used to sell the securities to the purchaser, if the securities are offered or sold to such purchaser by means of any of the following communications, the undersigned registrant will be a seller to the purchaser and will be considered to offer or sell such securities to such purchaser:

(i) Any preliminary prospectus or prospectus of the undersigned registrant relating to the offering required to be filed pursuant to Rule 424;

(ii) Any free writing prospectus relating to the offering prepared by or on behalf of the undersigned registrant or used or referred to by the undersigned registrant;

(iii) The portion of any other free writing prospectus relating to the offering containing material information about the undersigned registrant or its securities provided by or on behalf of the undersigned registrant; and

II-7

(iv) Any other communication that is an offer in the offering made by the undersigned registrant to the purchaser.

(b) The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes to respond to requests for information that is incorporated by reference into the prospectus pursuant to Item 4, 10(b) 11 or 13 of Form S-4, within one business day of receipt of such request, and to send the incorporated documents by first class mail or equally prompt means. This includes information contained in documents filed subsequent to the effective date of the registration statement through the date of responding to the request.

(c) The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes to supply by means of a post-effective amendment all information concerning a transaction, and the company being acquired involved therein, that was not the subject of and included in the registration statement when it became effective.

(d) Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act of 1933 may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons of the registrant pursuant to the foregoing provisions, or otherwise, the registrant has been advised that in the opinion of the SEC such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by the registrant of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer or controlling person of the registrant in the successful defense of any action, suit or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer or controlling person in connection with the securities being registered, the registrant will, unless in the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question whether such indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.

II-8

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the registrant has duly caused this Registration Statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the City of Pittsburgh, Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, on September 26, 2006.

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC
By:	/s/    JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.
Name:	John R. McKernan, Jr.
Title:	Chief Executive Officer

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this Registration Statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

Signature	Title	Date
/s/    JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.         John R. McKernan, Jr.	Chief Executive Officer (Principal Executive Officer) and Chairman of the Board of Directors	September 26, 2006
* Edward H. West	Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer (Principal Financial Officer)	September 26, 2006
* Christopher M. Lynne	Vice President and Controller (Principal Accounting Officer)	September 26, 2006
* Adrian M. Jones	Director	September 26, 2006
* Leo F. Mullin	Director	September 26, 2006
* Peter O. Wilde	Director	September 26, 2006
* Paul J. Salem	Director	September 26, 2006

*By:	/s/    JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.
	John R. McKernan, Jr. Attorney-in-Fact

II-9

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the registrant has duly caused this Registration Statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the City of Pittsburgh, Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, on 26, 2006.

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT FINANCE CORP.
By:	/s/    JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.
Name:	John R. McKernan, Jr.
Title:	President

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this Registration Statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

Signature	Title	Date
/s/    JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.         John R. McKernan, Jr.	President (Principal Executive Officer)	September 26, 2006
* Edward H. West	Chief Financial Officer (Principal Financial Officer)	September 26, 2006
* Christopher M. Lynne	Controller (Principal Accounting Officer)	September 26, 2006
* Leo F. Mullin	Director	September 26, 2006
* Adrian M. Jones	Director	September 26, 2006
* Peter O. Wilde	Director	September 26, 2006
* Paul J. Salem	Director	September 26, 2006

*By:	/s/    JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.
	John R. McKernan, Jr. Attorney-in-Fact

II-10

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the registrant has duly caused this Registration Statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the City of Pittsburgh, Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, on September 26, 2006.

AID RESTAURANT, INC.
By:	/S/    SIMON LUMLEY
Name:	Simon Lumley
Title:	President

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this Registration Statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

Signature	Title	Date
/S/    SIMON LUMLEY         Simon Lumley	President (Principal Executive Officer) and Director	September 26, 2006
* Edward H. West	Principal Financial Officer	September 26, 2006
* Christopher M. Lynne	Controller and Principal Accounting Officer	September 26, 2006

*By:	/s/    JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.
	John. R. McKernan, Jr. Attorney-in-Fact

II-11

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the registrant has duly caused this Registration Statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the City of Pittsburgh, Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, on September 26, 2006.

AIH RESTAURANT, INC.
By:	/S/    LARRY HORN
Name:	Larry Horn
Title:	President

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this Registration Statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

Signature	Title	Date
/S/    LARRY HORN         Larry Horn	President (Principal Executive Officer) and Director	September 26, 2006
* Edward H. West	Principal Financial Officer	September 26, 2006
* Christopher M. Lynne	Principal Accounting Officer	September 26, 2006

*By:	/s/    JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.
	John. R. McKernan, Jr. Attorney-in-Fact

II-12

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the registrant has duly caused this Registration Statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the City of Pittsburgh, Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, on September 26, 2006.

AIIM RESTAURANT, INC.
By:	/S/    JOSEPH MARZANO
Name:	Joseph Marzano
Title:	President

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this Registration Statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

Signature	Title	Date
/S/    JOSEPH MARZANO         Joseph Marzano	President (Principal Executive Officer) and Director	September 26, 2006
* Edward H. West	Principal Financial Officer	September 26, 2006
* Christopher M. Lynne	Principal Accounting Officer	September 26, 2006

*By:	/s/    JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.
	John R. McKernan, Jr. Attorney-in-Fact

II-13

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the registrant has duly caused this Registration Statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the City of Pittsburgh, Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, on September 26, 2006.

ARGOSY UNIVERSITY FAMILY CENTER, INC.
By:	/S/    WILLIAM COWAN
Name:	William Cowan
Title:	President

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this Registration Statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

Signature	Title	Date
/S/    WILLIAM COWAN         William Cowan	President (Principal Executive Officer) and Director	September 26, 2006
* Edward H. West	Principal Financial Officer	September 26, 2006
* Christopher M. Lynne	Principal Accounting Officer	September 26, 2006

*By:	/s/    JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.
	John R. McKernan, Jr. Attorney-in-Fact

II-14

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the registrant has duly caused this Registration Statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the City of Pittsburgh, Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, on September 26, 2006.

BROWN MACKIE HOLDING COMPANY
By:	/S/    DANNY FINUF
Name:	Danny Finuf
Title:	President

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this Registration Statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

Signature	Title	Date
/S/    DANNY FINUF	President (Principal Executive Officer)	September 26, 2006
Danny Finuf
*	Principal Financial Officer and Director	September 26, 2006
Edward H. West
*	Principal Accounting Officer	September 26, 2006
Christopher M. Lynne
/s/    JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.	Director	September 26, 2006
John R. McKernan
*	Director	September 26, 2006
Stacey R. Sauchuk

*By:	/s/    JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.
	John R. McKernan, Jr.
	Attorney-in-Fact

II-15

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the registrant has duly caused this Registration Statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the City of Pittsburgh, Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, on September 26, 2006.

THE CONNECTING LINK, INC.
By:	/S/    GREGORY O’BRIEN
Name:	Gregory O’Brien
Title:	President

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this Registration Statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

Signature	Title	Date
/S/    GREGORY O’BRIEN         Gregory O’Brien	President (Principal Executive Officer) and Director	September 26, 2006
* Edward H. West	Principal Financial Officer and Director	September 26, 2006
* Christopher M. Lynne	Principal Accounting Officer	September 26, 2006
/S/    JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.         John R. McKernan, Jr.	Director	September 26, 2006
* John T. South, III	Director	September 26, 2006

*By:	/s/    JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.
	John R. McKernan, Jr.
	Attorney-in-Fact

II-16

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the registrant has duly caused this Registration Statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the City of Pittsburgh, Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, on September 26, 2006.

EDMC AVIATION, INC.
By:	/S/    JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.
Name:	John R. McKernan, Jr.
Title:	President

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this Registration Statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

Signature	Title	Date
/S/    JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.         John R. McKernan, Jr.	President (Principal Executive Officer) and Director	September 26, 2006
* Edward H. West	Principal Financial Officer and Director	September 26, 2006
* Christopher M. Lynne	Principal Accounting Officer	September 26, 2006
* Stacey R. Sauchuk	Director	September 26, 2006

*By:	/S/    JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.
	John R. McKernan, Jr.
	Attorney-in-Fact

II-17

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the registrant has duly caused this Registration Statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the City of Pittsburgh, Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, on September 26, 2006.

EDMC MARKETING AND ADVERTISING, INC.
By:	/S/    JOSEPH A. CHARLSON
Name:	Joseph A. Charlson
Title:	President

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this Registration Statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

Signature	Title	Date
/S/    JOSEPH A. CHARLSON         Joseph A. Charlson	President (Principal Executive Officer)	September 26, 2006
* Edward H. West	Principal Financial Officer and Director	September 26, 2006
* Christopher M. Lynne	Principal Accounting Officer	September 26, 2006
/S/    JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.         John R. McKernan, Jr.	Director	September 26, 2006
* John T. South, III	Director	September 26, 2006

*By:	/S/    JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.
	John R. McKernan, Jr.
	Attorney-in-Fact

II-18

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the registrant has duly caused this Registration Statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the City of Pittsburgh, Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, on September 26, 2006.

HIGHER EDUCATION SERVICES, INC.
By:	/S/    JOHN T. SOUTH, III
Name:	John T. South, III
Title:	President

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this Registration Statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

Signature	Title	Date
/s/    John T. South, III         John T. South, III	President (Principal Executive Officer) and Director	September 26, 2006
* Edward H. West	Principal Financial Officer and Director	September 26, 2006
* Christopher M. Lynne	Principal Accounting Officer	September 26, 2006
/s/    JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.         John R. McKernan, Jr.	Director	September 26, 2006
* John T. South, III	Director	September 26, 2006

*By:	/s/    JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.
	John R. McKernan, Jr. Attorney-in-Fact

II-19

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the registrant has duly caused this Registration Statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the City of Pittsburgh, Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, on September 26, 2006.

MCM UNIVERSITY PLAZA, INC.
By:	/s/    GREGORY O’BRIEN
Name:	Gregory O’Brien
Title:	President

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this Registration Statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

Signature	Title	Date
/s/    GREGORY O’BRIEN         Gregory O’Brien	President (Principal Executive Officer) and Director	September 26, 2006
* Edward H. West	Principal Financial Officer and Director	September 26, 2006
* Christopher M. Lynne	Principal Accounting Officer	September 26, 2006
/S/ JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR. John R. McKernan, Jr.	Director	September 26, 2006
* John T. South, III	Director	September 26, 2006

*By:	/S/    JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.
	John R. McKernan, Jr. Attorney-in-Fact

II-20

EX-3.1

Exhibit 3.1

State of Delaware

Secretary of State

Division of Corporations

Delivered 06:21 PM 03/15/2006

FILED 06:08 PM 03/15/2006

SW 060252471 – 4126217 FILE

CERTIFICATE OF FORMATION

OF

EM SUBSIDIARY 2, LLC

A Limited Liability Company

FIRST: The name of the limited liability company is:

EM Subsidiary 2, LLC

SECOND: The address of the limited liability company’s registered office in the State of Delaware is 2711 Centerville Road, Suite 400 in the City of Wilmington, County of New Castle. The name of its registered agent at such address is Corporation Service Company.

THE UNDERSIGNED, being the individual forming the limited liability company, has executed, signed and acknowledged this Certificate of Formation this 15th day of March, 2006.

Name:	Ann Martin Criss
Title:	Authorized Person

EX-3.2

Exhibit 3.2

LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY AGREEMENT

of

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC

This LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY AGREEMENT (the “Agreement”), of Education Management LLC, a Delaware limited liability company (the “Company”), having an address at c/o Corporation Service Company, 2711 Centerville Road, Suite 400 in the City of Wilmington, County of New Castle, Delaware 19801, is made by Education Management Holdings LLC, the sole member of the Company (the “Managing Member”), and dated as of May 31, 2006.

1. Formation. The Company has been formed as a Delaware limited liability company pursuant to the Delaware Limited Liability Company Act (the “LLC Act”). A Certificate of Formation of the Company was filed with the Secretary of State of Delaware on March 15, 2006.

2. Registered Office and Principal Place of Business. The registered office of the Company in the State of Delaware shall be located at c/o Corporation Service Company, 2711 Centerville Road, Suite 400 in the City of Wilmington, County of New Castle, Delaware 19801 and its registered agent for service of process on the Company at such address is Corporation Service Company. The principal place of business of the Company shall be located at c/o Education Management Corporation, 210 Sixth Avenue, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15222, or at such other places as the Managing Member may determine.

3. Fiscal Year. The fiscal year of the Company (the “Fiscal Year”) shall end on June 30 of each year. The Company shall have the same fiscal year for income tax and for financial and accounting purposes.

4. Purpose. The Company is formed for the purpose of engaging in any lawful business permitted by the LLC Act or the laws of any jurisdiction in which the Company may do business. The Company shall have the power to engage in all activities and transactions that the Members deem necessary or advisable in connection with the foregoing.

5. Management. The Managing Member is hereby designated as an authorized person, within the meaning of the LLC Act, to do and perform, or cause to be done and performed, all such acts, deeds and things and to make, execute and deliver, or cause to be made, executed and delivered, all such agreements, undertakings, documents, instruments or certificates in the name and on behalf of the Company or otherwise as he may deem necessary or appropriate in furtherance of the ordinary course of business of the Company. Education Management Holdings LLC is hereby designated as the Managing Member of the Company. The Company has no other members on the date hereof. The Managing Member shall have the power to do any and all acts necessary or convenient to or for the furtherance of the purposes described herein, including all powers, statutory or otherwise, possessed by members of a limited liability company under the laws of the State of Delaware. Specifically, the Managing Member is hereby designated as an authorized person, within the meaning of the LLC Act, to execute, deliver and

file any amendments to and/or restatements of the Certificate of Formation of the Company and any applications necessary for the Company to qualify to do business in a jurisdiction in which the Company may wish to conduct business.

6. Board of Directors.

a. The Board of Directors (the “Board”) shall possess all rights and powers of managers as provided in the LLC Act and otherwise by law; provided, however, that the Managing Member shall continue to possess all of the rights and powers described in Section 5.

b. The initial Board shall consist of the following individuals and each such person shall serve as a director in accordance with the procedures set forth in the Bylaws of Education Management Corporation:

John R. McKernan Jr.

Adrian M. Jones

Leo F. Mullin

Paul J. Salem

Peter O. Wilde

7. Officers.

a. The Board or the Managing Member shall elect a president, vice president, secretary, principal accounting officer and such other officers or assistant officers as it deems advisable. Any number of offices may be held by the same person.

b. The officers shall have such authority, perform such duties and serve for such period of time as may be determined by or under the direction of the Board or the Managing Member.

8. Capital Contributions. The Managing Member shall make capital contributions to the Company at such times, and in such amounts, as the Managing Member shall determine in its sole discretion.

9. Allocations, Distributions, Profits and Losses. So long as Education Management Holdings LLC is the sole member of the Company, all items of income, profit and loss of the Company shall be allocated to the Managing Member and all cash and other distributable assets of the Company shall be distributed to the Managing Member. Distributions shall be made at such time, to such extent and in such manner as the Managing Member shall determine in its sole discretion.

10. Term. The Company shall continue in full force and effect until terminated by operation of the LLC Act or upon the sole election of the Managing Member.

11. Return of Capital. The Members have no right to receive any distributions which include a return of all or any part of their capital contributions, provided that upon the dissolution and winding up of the Company, the assets of the Company shall be distributed as provided in Section 18-804 of the Act.

12. Additional Members. The Company may, at the Managing Member’s sole discretion, issue additional membership interests to other persons and admit them to the Company as members.

13. Liability. The personal liability of the Managing Member to the Company is eliminated or limited to the fullest extent permitted under the LLC Act, and the Managing Member shall have no liability to the Company except as expressly required by the LLC Act.

14. Indemnification. The Company shall indemnify, to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law under Section 145 of the Delaware General Corporation law, treating for these purposes, as if the Company were a corporation subject to Section 145 of the Delaware General Corporation Law, any person who was or is a party or is threatened to be made a party to any threatened, pending or completed action, suit or proceeding, whether civil, criminal, administrative or investigative (a “Proceeding”), by reason of the fact that such person is or was a Managing Member, director or officer of the Company, or is or was serving at the request of the Company as a director or officer of a corporation or of a partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise or entity, whether or not for profit, whether domestic or foreign, including service with respect to an employee benefit plan, its participants or beneficiaries, against all liability, loss and expense (including attorneys’ fees and amounts paid in settlement) actually and reasonably incurred by such person in connection with such Proceeding, whether or not the indemnified liability arises or arose from any Proceeding by or in the right of the Company.

15. Books and Records. The Company shall keep or cause to be kept full and accurate accounts of the transactions of the Company in proper books and records of account which shall set forth all information required by the LLC Act. Such books and records shall be maintained on the basis utilized in preparing the Company’s United States federal income tax returns.

16. Severability. Every term and provision of this Agreement is intended to be severable. If any term or provision hereof is illegal or invalid for any reason whatsoever, such term or provision will be enforced to the maximum extent permitted by law and, in any event, such illegality or invalidity shall not affect the validity or the remainder of this Agreement.

17. Amendment. This Agreement may be amended and/or restated at any time with the consent of the Managing Member.

18. Governing Law. This Agreement shall be construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of the State of Delaware, all rights and remedies being governed by said laws.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned has executed this Agreement as of      May , 2006.

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT HOLDINGS LLC
By:	EDUCATION MANAGEMENT CORPORATION, its managing member
By:
Name:
Title:

EX-3.3

Exhibit 3.3

CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION

of

Education Management Finance Corp.

The undersigned, in order to form a corporation for the purpose hereinafter stated, under and pursuant to the provisions of the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware (“DGCL”), hereby certifies that:

1. The name of the corporation is Education Management Finance Corp.

2. The registered office in the State of Delaware is The Corporation Trust Company, Corporation Trust Center, 1209 Orange Street, Wilmington, New Castle County, Delaware 19801. The name of its registered agent at such address is The Corporation Trust Company.

3. The purpose of the corporation is to engage in any lawful act or activity for which corporations may be organized under the DGCL.

4. The total number of shares of stock that the corporation is authorized to issue is 1,000 shares of Common Stock, par value $0.01 per share.

5. The name and address of the sole incorporator is K. Derek Pease, 425 Lexington Avenue, New York, New York 10017.

6. In furtherance and not in limitation of the powers conferred by statute, the board of directors of the corporation, acting by majority vote, may alter, amend or repeal the By-laws of the corporation.

7. The corporation reserves the right to amend, alter, change or repeal any provision contained in this Certificate of Incorporation, in the manner now or hereafter prescribed by statute, and all rights conferred upon stockholders herein are granted subject to this reservation.

8. Except as otherwise provided by the DGCL as the same exists or may hereafter be amended, no director of the corporation shall be personally liable to the corporation or its stockholders for monetary damages for breach of fiduciary duty as a director. Any repeal or modification of this Article Eight by the stockholders of the corporation shall not adversely affect any right of protection of a director of the corporation existing at the time of such repeal or modification.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF THE UNDERSIGNED, being the incorporator for the purpose of forming a corporation pursuant to the DGCL, has signed this Certificate of Incorporation on May     , 2006.

K. Derek Pease

Sole Incorporator

EX-3.4

Exhibit 3.4

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT FINANCE CORP.

BYLAWS

ARTICLE ONE

STOCKHOLDERS

SECTION 1.1. Annual Meeting. An annual meeting of stockholders for the election of directors and for the transaction of such other business as may properly be presented at the meeting shall be held on such date and at such time as may from time to time be designated by resolution duly adopted by the Board of Directors, at such place (within or without the State of Delaware) as the Board of Directors, the Chairman of the Board, the Executive Committee, if any, or the President may fix.

SECTION 1.2. Special Meetings. A special meeting of stockholders may be called for any proper purpose, notice of which was given in the notice of meeting, at any time by the Board of Directors, the Chairman of the Board, the Executive Committee, if any, or the President and shall be called by any of them or by the Secretary upon receipt of a written request to do so specifying the matter or matters, appropriate for action at such a meeting, that are proposed to be presented at the meeting, signed by holders of record of a majority of the shares of stock that would be entitled to be voted on such matter or matters if the meeting were held on the day such request is received and the record date for such meeting were the close of business on the preceding day. Any such meeting shall be held on such date, at such time and at such place, within or without the State of Delaware, as shall be determined by the body or person calling such meeting and as shall be stated in the notice of such meeting.

SECTION 1.3. Notice of Meeting. For each meeting of stockholders written notice shall be given stating the place, date and hour and, in the case of a special meeting, the purpose or purposes for which the meeting is called and, if other than the place where the meeting is to be held, the place within the city in which the meeting is to be held where the list of stockholders required by Section 1.10 is to be open for examination at least 10 days prior to the meeting. Except as otherwise provided by Delaware law, the written notice of any meeting shall be given not less than 10 nor more than 60 days before the date of the meeting to each stockholder entitled to vote at such meeting. If mailed, notice shall be deemed to be given when deposited in the United States mail, postage prepaid, directed to the stockholder at his address as it appears on the records of the Corporation.

SECTION 1.4. Quorum. Except as otherwise required by law or in the Certificate of Incorporation, the holders of record of a majority of the shares of stock entitled to be voted present in person or represented by proxy at a meeting shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of business at the meeting, but, in the absence of a quorum, the holders of record present in person or represented by proxy at such meeting may vote to adjourn the meeting from time to time until a quorum is obtained.

SECTION 1.5. Presiding Officer and Secretary at Meetings. Each meeting of stockholders shall be presided over by the Chairman of the Board or, in his absence, by the President or, if neither is present, by the person designated in writing by the Chairman of the Board or, if no such person is present, then by a person designated by the Board of Directors; if no such person is present, then the stockholders at the meeting present in person or represented by proxy shall by plurality vote elect a person to act as chairman of the meeting. The Secretary, or in his absence an Assistant Secretary, shall act as secretary of the meeting, or, if no such officer is present, a secretary of the meeting shall be designated by the chairman of the meeting.

SECTION 1.6. Voting. Except as otherwise provided by law or in the Certificate of Incorporation, and subject to the provisions of Section 1.11:

(a) each stockholder of record shall be entitled at every meeting of stockholders to one vote for each share standing in his name on the books of the Corporation;

(b) directors shall be elected by a plurality vote;

(c) each matter, other than election of directors, properly presented to any meeting, shall be decided by a majority of the votes cast on the matter; and

(d) election of directors and the vote on any other matter presented to a meeting shall be by written ballot only if so ordered by the chairman of the meeting or if so requested by any stockholder at the meeting present in person or represented by proxy entitled to vote in such election or on such matter, as the case may be.

SECTION 1.7. Proxies. Each stockholder entitled to vote at a meeting of stockholders or to express consent or dissent to corporate action in writing without a meeting may authorize another person or persons to act for him by proxy, but no such proxy shall be voted or acted upon after three years from its date, unless the proxy provides for a longer period.

SECTION 1.8. Adjourned Meetings. A meeting of stockholders may be adjourned to another time or place as provided in Sections 1.4 or 1.6(c). Unless the Board of Directors fixes a new record date, stockholders of record for an adjourned meeting shall be as originally determined for the meeting from which the adjournment was taken. If the adjournment is for more than 30 days, or if after the adjournment a new record date is fixed for the adjourned meeting, a notice of the adjourned meeting shall be given to each stockholder of record entitled to vote at the meeting. At the adjourned meeting, provided a quorum is present, any business may be transacted that might have been transacted at the meeting as originally called.

SECTION 1.9. Consent of Stockholders in Lieu of Meeting. Any action that may be taken at any annual or special meeting of stockholders may be taken without a meeting, without prior notice and without a vote, if one or more consents in writing, setting forth the action so taken and signed by the holders of outstanding stock having not less than the minimum number of votes that would be necessary to authorize or take such action at a meeting at which all shares entitled to vote thereon were present and voted, are delivered to the Corporation by delivery to its registered office in the State of Delaware by hand or by certified or registered

2

mail, return receipt requested, to its principal place of business, or to an officer or agent of the Corporation having custody of the book in which proceedings of meetings of stockholders are recorded. Every consent shall bear the date of signature of each stockholder signing the consent and no written consent shall be effective to take the corporate action referred to therein unless written consents signed by a sufficient number of stockholders to take the action are delivered to the Corporation, in the manner required by law, within 60 days of the earliest dated consent so delivered. Prompt notice of the taking of such action shall be given to each stockholder that did not consent in writing.

SECTION 1.10. List of Stockholders Entitled to Vote. A complete list of the stockholders entitled to vote at every meeting of stockholders, arranged in alphabetical order and showing the address of each stockholder and the number of shares registered in the name of each stockholder, shall be prepared and shall be open to the examination of any stockholder for any purpose germane to the meeting, during ordinary business hours, for a period of at least 10 days prior to the meeting, either at a place within the city where the meeting is to be held, which place shall be specified in the notice of the meeting, or, if not so specified, at the place where the meeting is to be held. Such list shall be produced and kept at the time and place of the meeting during the whole time thereof and may be inspected by any stockholder who is present.

SECTION 1.11. Fixing of Record Date. The Board of Directors, by resolution, may fix a date for determining the stockholders of record, which record date shall not be earlier than the date of such resolution. The record date shall be determined as follows:

(a) The record date for stockholders entitled to notice of or to vote at any meeting of stockholders or any adjournment thereof shall not be more than 60 nor less than 10 days before the date of the meeting. If no such record date is fixed by the Board of Directors, the record date shall be the close of business on the day immediately preceding the day on which notice is given, or, if notice is waived, at the close of business on the day immediately preceding the day on which the meeting is held. The record date shall apply to any adjournment of the meeting unless the Board of Directors fixes a new record date for the adjourned meeting.

(b) The record date for determining the stockholders entitled to consent to corporate action in writing without a meeting shall not be more than 10 days after the date upon which the resolution fixing the record date is adopted by the Board of Directors. If no such record date is fixed by the Board of Directors, the record date shall be determined as follows:

(i) if no prior action by the Board of Directors is required under the Delaware General Corporation Law, the record date shall be the first date on which a signed written consent setting forth the action taken or proposed to be taken is delivered to the Corporation pursuant to the requirements of Section 1.9; and

(ii) if prior action by the Board of Directors is required under the Delaware General Corporation Law, the record date shall be the close of business on the day on which the Board of Directors adopts a resolution taking such prior action.

3

(c) The record date for determining the stockholders entitled to receive payment of any dividend or other distribution or allotment of any rights or the stockholders entitled to exercise any rights in respect of any change, conversion or exchange of stock, or for the purpose of any other lawful action, shall be not more than 60 days prior to such action. If no such record date is fixed by the Board of Directors, the record date for determining stockholders for any such purpose shall be the close of business on the day on which the Board of Directors adopts the resolution relating to such purpose.

ARTICLE TWO

DIRECTORS

SECTION 2.1. General Powers. The business and affairs of the Corporation shall be managed by or under the direction of the Board of Directors.

SECTION 2.2. Number; Term of Office. The number of directors that shall constitute the whole Board of Directors shall be determined by action of the Board of Directors taken by the affirmative vote of a majority of the whole Board of Directors or, if the Board of Directors shall not have taken such action, it shall be the number of directors elected by the sole incorporator. Directors shall be elected at the annual meeting of stockholders to hold office, subject to Sections 2.3 and 2.4, until the next annual meeting of stockholders and until their respective successors are elected and qualified.

SECTION 2.3. Resignation. Any director of the Corporation may resign at any time by giving written notice of such resignation to the Board of Directors, the Chairman of the Board, the President or the Secretary of the Corporation. Any such resignation shall take effect at the time specified therein or, if no time is specified, upon receipt thereof by the Board of Directors or one of the above-named officers. Unless specified therein, the acceptance of such resignation shall not be necessary to make it effective. When one or more directors shall resign from the Board of Directors effective at a future date, a majority of the directors then in office, including those who have so resigned, shall have power to fill such vacancy or vacancies, the vote thereon to take effect when such resignation or resignations shall become effective, and each director so chosen shall hold office as provided in these Bylaws in the filling of other vacancies.

SECTION 2.4. Removal. Any one or more directors may be removed, with or without cause, by the holders of a majority of the shares entitled to vote at an election of directors.

SECTION 2.5. Vacancies; Newly Created Directorships. Vacancies and newly created directorships resulting from any increase in the authorized number of directors may be filled by a vote of a majority of the directors then in office, although less than a quorum, or by

4

the sole remaining director, and the directors so chosen shall hold office, subject to Sections 2.3 and 2.4, until the next annual meeting of stockholders and until their respective successors are elected and qualified.

SECTION 2.6. Regular and Annual Meetings; Notice. Regular meetings of the Board of Directors shall be held at such time and at such place (within or without the State of Delaware) as the Board of Directors may from time to time prescribe. No notice need be given of any regular meeting, and a notice, if given, need not specify the purposes thereof. A meeting of the Board of Directors may be held without notice immediately after an annual meeting of stockholders at the same place as that at which such meeting was held.

SECTION 2.7. Special Meetings; Notice. A special meeting of the Board of Directors may be called at any time by the Board of Directors, the Chairman of the Board, the Executive Committee, if any, the President or any person acting in the place of the President and shall be called by any one of them or by the Secretary upon receipt of a written request to do so specifying the matter or matters, appropriate for action at such a meeting, proposed to be presented at the meeting and signed by at least two directors. Any such meeting shall be held at such time and at such place (within or without the State of Delaware) as shall be determined by the body or person calling such meeting. Notice of such meeting stating the time and place thereof shall be given (a) by deposit of the notice in the United States mail, first class, postage prepaid, at least seven days before the day fixed for the meeting, addressed to each director at his address as it appears on the Corporation’s records or at such other address as the director may have furnished the Corporation for that purpose, or (b) by delivery of the notice similarly addressed for dispatch by telex, telecopy, telegraph, cable or radio or by delivery of the notice by telephone or in person, in each case at least 24 hours before the time fixed for the meeting.

SECTION 2.8. Presiding Officer and Secretary at Meetings. Each meeting of the Board of Directors shall be presided over by the Chairman of the Board, or in his absence by the President, if a director, or if neither is present, by such member of the Board of Directors as shall be chosen by a majority of the directors present. The Secretary, or in his absence an Assistant Secretary, shall act as secretary of the meeting, or if no such officer is present, a secretary of the meeting shall be designated by the person presiding over the meeting.

SECTION 2.9. Quorum; Voting. A majority of the whole Board of Directors shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of business, but in the absence of a quorum a majority of those present (or if only one be present, then that one) may adjourn the meeting, without notice other than announcement at the meeting, until such time as a quorum is present. Except as otherwise required by law, the Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws, the vote of a majority of the directors present at a meeting at which a quorum is present shall be the act of the Board of Directors.

SECTION 2.10. Meeting by Telephone. Members of the Board of Directors or of any committee thereof may participate in meetings of the Board of Directors or of such committee by means of conference telephone or similar communications equipment by means of which all persons participating in the meeting can hear each other, and such participation shall constitute presence in person at such meeting.

5

SECTION 2.11. Action Without Meeting. Any action required or permitted to be taken at any meeting of the Board of Directors or of any committee thereof may be taken without a meeting if all members of the Board of Directors or of such committee, as the case may be, consent thereto in writing and the writing or writings are filed with the minutes of proceedings of the Board of Directors or of such committee.

SECTION 2.12. Executive and Other Committees. The Board of Directors may, by resolution passed by a majority of the whole Board of Directors, designate an Executive Committee or one or more other committees, each such committee to consist of one or more directors as the Board of Directors may from time to time determine. Any such committee, to the extent provided in such resolution or resolutions, shall have and may exercise all the powers and authority of the Board of Directors in the management of the business and affairs of the Corporation, including the power to authorize the seal of the Corporation to be affixed to all papers that may require it; but no such committee shall have such power or authority in reference to amending the Certificate of Incorporation (except for such amendments as by law are expressly permitted to be made by committees of the Board of Directors), adopting an agreement of merger or consolidation, recommending to the stockholders the sale, lease or exchange of all or substantially all of the Corporation’s property and assets, recommending to the stockholders a dissolution of the Corporation or a revocation of a dissolution, or amending the Bylaws; and unless the resolution shall expressly so provide, no such committee shall have the power or authority to declare a dividend or to authorize the issuance of stock or to adopt a certificate of ownership and merger. The Board of Directors may designate one or more directors as alternate members of any committee who, in the absence or disqualification of a member or members of a committee at a meeting, may replace such absent or disqualified member or members at such meeting. In the absence of such a designation, the member or members thereof present at any meeting and not disqua1ified from voting, whether or not he or they constitute a quorum, may unanimously appoint another member of the Board of Directors to act at the meeting in the place of any such absent or disqualified member. Each such committee other than the Executive Committee shall have such name as may be determined from time to time by the Board of Directors.

SECTION 2.13. Compensation. A director shall receive such compensation, if any, for his services as a director as may from time to time be fixed by the Board of Directors, which compensation may be based, in whole or in part, upon his attendance at meetings of the Board of Directors or of its committees. He may also be reimbursed for his expenses in attending any meeting.

ARTICLE THREE

OFFICERS

SECTION 3.1. Election; Qualification. The officers of the Corporation shall have such titles and duties as are set forth in a resolution adopted by the Board of Directors. The Board of Directors may elect such officers as it may from time to time determine. Two or more offices may be held by the same person.

6

SECTION 3.2. Term of Office. Each officer shall hold office from the time of his election and qualification until the expiration of the term for which he is elected and until the time his successor is elected and qualified, unless sooner he shall die or resign or shall be removed pursuant to Section 3.4.

SECTION 3.3. Resignation. Any officer of the Corporation may resign at any time by giving written notice of such resignation to the Board of Directors, the Chairman of the Board, the President or the Secretary of the Corporation. Any such resignation shall take effect at the time specified therein or, if no time be specified, upon receipt thereof by the Board of Directors or one of the above-named officers. Unless specified therein, the acceptance of such resignation shall not be necessary to make it effective.

SECTION 3.4. Removal. Any officer of the Corporation may be removed at any time, with or without cause, by the vote of a majority of the whole Board of Directors.

SECTION 3.5. Vacancies. Any vacancy, however caused, in any office of the Corporation may be filled by the Board of Directors.

SECTION 3.6. Compensation. The compensation of each officer shall be such as the Board of Directors may from time to time determine.

SECTION 3.7. Chairman of the Board. The Chairman of the Board shall be the chief executive officer of the Corporation and shall have general charge of the business and affairs of the Corporation, subject, however, to the right of the Board of Directors to confer specified powers on officers and subject generally to the direction of the Board of Directors and the Executive Committee, if any.

SECTION 3.8. President. The President shall have charge of the general business and affairs of the Corporation under the supervision of the Chairman of the Board, subject to the right of the Board of Directors to confer specified powers on officers and subject generally to the direction of the Board of Directors and the Executive Committee, if any. During the absence of the Chairman of the Board or his inability to act, the President shall exercise the powers and perform the duties of the Chairman of the Board, subject to the direction of the Board of Directors and the Executive Committee, if any.

SECTION 3.9. Vice President. Each Vice President shall have such powers and duties as generally pertain to the office of Vice President and as the Board of Directors or the President may from time to time prescribe. During the absence of the President or his inability to act, the Vice President, or if there shall be more than one Vice President then that one designated by the Board of Directors, shall exercise the powers and shall perform the duties of the President, subject to the direction of the Board of Directors and the Executive Committee, if any.

SECTION 3.10. Secretary. The Secretary shall keep the minutes of all meetings of stockholders and of the Board of Directors. He shall be custodian of the corporate seal and shall affix it or cause it to be affixed to such instruments as require such seal and attest the same and shall exercise the powers and shall perform the duties incident to the office of Secretary, subject to the direction of the Board of Directors and the Executive Committee, if any.

7

SECTION 3.11. Treasurer. The Treasurer shall have care of all funds and securities of the Corporation and shall exercise the powers and shall perform the duties incident to the office of Treasurer, subject to the direction of the Board of Directors and the Executive Committee, if any.

SECTION 3.12. Other Officers. The Board of Directors may designate any other officers of the Corporation, including one or more Assistant Secretaries and one or more Assistant Treasurers, who shall exercise the powers and shall perform the duties incident to their offices, subject to the direction of the Board of Directors and the Executive Committee, if any.

ARTICLE FOUR

INDEMNIFICATION

SECTION 4.1. Indemnification. (1) The Corporation shall indemnify, subject to the requirements of subsection (d) of this Section, any person who was or is a party or is threatened to be made a party to any threatened, pending or completed action, suit or proceeding, whether civil, criminal, administrative or investigative (other than an action by or in the right of the Corporation), by reason of the fact that he is or was a director, officer, employee or agent of the Corporation, or is or was serving at the request of the Corporation as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise, against expenses (including attorneys’ fees), judgments, fines and amounts paid in settlement actually and reasonably incurred by him in connection with such action, suit or proceeding if he acted in good faith and in a manner he reasonably believed to be in or not opposed to the best interests of the Corporation and, with respect to any criminal action or proceeding, had no reasonable cause to believe his conduct was unlawful. The termination of any action, suit or proceeding by judgment, order, settlement, conviction or upon a plea of nolo contendere or its equivalent, shall not, of itself, create a presumption that the person did not act in good faith and in a manner which he reasonably believed to be in or not opposed to the best interests of the Corporation and, with respect to any criminal action or proceeding, had reasonable cause to believe that his conduct was unlawful.

(i) The Corporation shall indemnify, subject to the requirements of subsection (d) of this Section, any person who was or is a party or is threatened to be made a party to any threatened, pending or completed action or suit by or in the right of the Corporation to procure a judgment in its favor by reason of the fact that he is or was a director, officer, employee or agent of the Corporation or is or was serving at the request of the Corporation as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise, against expenses (including attorneys’ fees) actually and reasonably incurred by him in connection with the defense or settlement of such action or suit if he acted in good faith and in a manner he reasonably believed to be in or not opposed to the best interests of the Corporation and except that no indemnification shall be made in respect of any claim, issue or matter as to which such person shall have been adjudged to be liable to the Corporation unless and only to the extent that the Court of Chancery of the State of Delaware or the court in which such action or suit was brought shall determine upon application that, despite the adjudication of liability but in view of all the circumstances of the case, such person is fairly and reasonably entitled to indemnity for such expenses which the Court of Chancery of the State of Delaware or such other court shall deem proper.

8

(ii) To the extent that a director, officer, employee or agent of the Corporation has been successful on the merits or otherwise in defense of any action, suit or proceeding referred to in subsections (a) and (b) of this Section, or in defense of any claim, issue or matter therein, the Corporation shall indemnify him against expenses (including attorneys’ fees) actually and reasonably incurred by him in connection therewith.

(iii) Any indemnification under subsections (a) and (b) of this Section (unless ordered by a court) shall be made by the Corporation only as authorized in the specific case upon a determination that indemnification of the director, officer, employee or agent is proper in the circumstances because he has met the applicable standard of conduct set forth in subsections (a) and (b) of this Section. Such determination shall be made (1) by the Board of Directors by a majority vote of a quorum consisting of directors who were not parties to such action, suit or proceeding, or (2) if such a quorum is not obtainable, or, even if obtainable a quorum of disinterested directors so directs, by independent legal counsel in a written opinion, or (3) by the stockholders.

(iv) Expenses incurred by a director, officer, employee or agent in defending a civil or criminal action, suit or proceeding may be paid by the Corporation in advance of the final disposition of such action, suit or proceeding upon receipt of an undertaking by or on behalf of such director or officer to repay such amount if it shall ultimately be determined that he is not entitled to be indemnified by the Corporation as authorized in this Section. Such expenses incurred by other employees and agents may be so paid upon such terms and conditions, if any, as the Board of Directors deems appropriate.

(v) The indemnification and advancement of expenses provided by, or granted pursuant to, the other subsections of this Section shall not limit the Corporation from providing any other indemnification or advancement of expenses permitted by law nor shall they be deemed exclusive of any other rights to which a person seeking indemnification or advancement of expenses may be entitled under any bylaw, agreement, vote of stockholders or disinterested directors or otherwise, both as to action in his official capacity and as to action in another capacity while holding such office.

(vi) The Corporation may purchase and maintain insurance on behalf of any person who is or was a director, officer, employee or agent of the Corp oration, or is or was serving at the request of the Corporation as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise against any liability asserted against him and incurred by him in any such capacity, or arising out of his status as such, whether or not the Corporation would have the power to indemnify him against such liability under the provisions of this Section.

(vii) For the purposes of this Section, references to “the Corporation” shall include, in addition to the resulting corporation, any constituent corporation (including any constituent of a constituent) absorbed in a consolidation or merger which, if its separate existence had continued, would have had power and authority to indemnify its directors, officers,

9

employees or agents, so that any person who is or was a director, officer, employee or agent of such constituent corporation, or is or was serving at the request of such constituent corporation as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise, shall stand in the same position under the provisions of this Section with respect to the resulting or surviving corporation as he would have with respect to such constituent corporation if its separate existence had continued.

(viii) For purposes of this Section, references to “other enterprises” shall include employee benefit plans; references to “fines” shall include any excise taxes assessed on a person with respect to an employee benefit plan; and references to “serving at the request of the Corporation” shall include any service as a director, officer, employee or agent of the Corporation which imposes duties on, or involves services by, such director, officer, employee, or agent with respect to any employee benefit plan, its participants, or beneficiaries; and a person who acted in good faith and in a manner he reasonably believed to be in the interest of the participants and beneficiaries of an employee benefit plan shall be deemed to have acted in a manner “not opposed to the best interests of the Corporation” as referred to in this Section.

(ix) The indemnification and advancement of expenses provided by, or granted pursuant to, this Section shall, unless otherwise provided when authorized or ratified by the Board of Directors, continue as to a person who has ceased to be a director, officer, employee or agent of the Corporation and shall inure to the benefit of the heirs, executors and administrators of such a person.

ARTICLE FIVE

CAPITAL STOCK

SECTION 5.1. Stock Certificates. The interest of each holder of stock of the Corporation shall be evidenced by a certificate or certificates in such form as the Board of Directors may from time to time prescribe, provided the Board of Directors may by resolution provide that some or all of any or all classes or series of its stock shall be uncertificated shares. Notwithstanding the adoption of such a resolution by the Board of Directors, every holder of uncertificated shares, upon request, shall be entitled to receive from the Corporation a certificate representing the number of shares registered in such stockholder’s name on the books of the Corporation. Each stock certificate and certificate representing previously uncertificated shares shall be signed by or in the name of the Corporation by the Chairman of the Board or the President or a Vice President and by the Treasurer or an Assistant Treasurer or the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary. Any or all of the signatures appearing on any such certificate or certificates may be a facsimile. If any officer, transfer agent or registrar who has signed or whose facsimile signature has been placed upon any such certificate shall have ceased to be such officer, transfer agent or registrar before such certificate is issued, it may be issued by the Corporation with the same effect as if he were such officer, transfer agent or registrar at the date of issue.

SECTION 5.2. Transfer of Stock. Shares of stock of the Corporation shall be transferable on the books of the Corporation by the holder of record thereof or by his attorney,

10

pursuant to applicable law and such rules and regulations as the Board of Directors shall from time to time prescribe. Any shares represented by a certificate shall be transferable only upon surrender of the certificate with an assignment endorsed thereon or attached thereto duly executed and with such proof of authenticity of signatures as the Corporation may reasonably require.

SECTION 5.3. Holders of Record. Prior to due presentment for registration of transfer, the Corporation may treat the holder of record of a share of its stock as the complete owner thereof exclusively entitled to vote, to receive notifications and otherwise entitled to all the rights and powers of a complete owner thereof, notwithstanding notice to the contrary.

SECTION 5.4. Lost, Destroyed, Mutilated or Stolen Certificates. The Corporation shall issue a new certificate of stock or uncertificated shares to replace a certificate theretofore issued by it alleged to have been lost, destroyed, mutilated or stolen, if the owner or his legal representative (i) submits a written request for the replacement of the certificate, together with the mutilated certificate or such evidence as the Board of Directors may deem satisfactory of the loss, destruction or theft of the certificate, and such request is received by the Corporation before the Corporation has notice that the certificate has been acquired by a bona fide purchaser, (ii) files with the Corporation a bond sufficient to indemnify the Corporation against any claim that may be made against it on account of the alleged loss, destruction, mutilation or theft of any such certificate or the issuance of any such new certificate and (iii) satisfies such other terms and conditions as the Board of Directors may from time to time prescribe.

ARTICLE SIX

MISCELLANEOUS

SECTION 6.1. Waiver of Notice. Whenever notice is required to be given by the Certificate of Incorporation, the Bylaws or any provision of the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware, a written waiver thereof, signed by the person entitled to notice, whether before or after the time required for such notice, shall be deemed equivalent to notice. Attendance of a person at a meeting shall constitute a waiver of notice of such meeting, except when the person attends a meeting for the express purpose of objecting, at the beginning of the meeting, to the transaction of any business because the meeting is not lawfully called or convened.

Neither the business to be transacted at, nor the purpose of, any regular or special meeting of the stockholders, directors or members of a committee of directors need be specified in any written waiver of notice.

SECTION 6.2. Fiscal Year. The fiscal year of the Corporation shall start on such date as the Board of Directors shall from time to time prescribe.

SECTION 6.3. Corporate Seal. The corporate seal shall be in such form as the Board of Directors may from time to time prescribe, and the same may be used by causing it or a facsimile thereof to be impressed or affixed or in any other manner reproduced.

11

ARTICLE SEVEN

AMENDMENT OF BYLAWS

SECTION 7.1. Amendment. The Bylaws may be adopted, amended or repealed by the stockholders of the Corporation or by the Board of Directors by a majority vote of the whole Board of Directors.

12

EX-3.5

Exhibit 3.5

Articles of Incorporation

Pursuant to Article 3.02

Texas Business

Corporation Act

Article 1 – Corporate Name

The name of the corporation is as set forth below:

AID Restaurant, Inc.

Article 2 – Registered Agent and Registered Office

The initial registered agent is an individual resident of the state whose name is set forth below:

Paul R. McGuirk

The business address of the registered agent and the registered office address is:

Two North Park Avenue

8080 Park Lane, Suite 100

Dallas, TX 75231-5993

Article 3 – Directors

The number of directors constituting the initial board of directors and the names and addresses of the person or persons who are to serve as directors until the first meeting of shareholders or until their successors are elected and qualified are set forth below:

Paul R. McGuirk

Two North Park Avenue

8080 Park Lane, Suite 100

Dallas, TX 75231-5993

Article 4 – Authorized Shares

The total number of shares the corporation is authorized to issue is 1,000 and the shares shall have no par value.

Article 5 – Initial Capitalization

The corporation will not commence business until it has received for the issuance of its shares consideration of the value of one thousand dollars ($1,000).

Article 6 –Duration

The period of duration is perpetual.

Article 7 – Purpose

The purpose for which the corporation is organized is for the transaction of any and all lawful business for which corporations may be incorporated under the Texas Business Corporation Act.

Incorporator

The name and address of the incorporator is set forth below.

Kathleen Clover

300 Sixth Avenue, 8^th Floor

Pittsburgh, PA 15222

Effective Date of Filing

This document will become effective when the document is filed by the secretary of state.

Execution

The undersigned incorporator signs these articles of incorporation subject to the penalties imposed by law for the submission of a false fraudulent document.

/s/ Kathleen Clover

Signature of Incorporator

2

EX-3.6

Exhibit 3.6

BYLAWS

OF

AID RESTAURANT, INC.

(a Texas corporation)

ARTICLE I

SHAREHOLDERS

1. SHARE CERTIFICATES. Certificates representing shares of the corporation shall set forth thereon the statements prescribed by Articles 2.19 and 2.22 of the Texas Business Corporation Act and by any other applicable provision of law, including any limitation or denial of preemptive rights, which shall be signed by the President or a Vice-President of the corporation, and may be sealed with the seal of the corporation or a facsimile thereof. The signatures of any such officers upon a certificate may be facsimiles. In case any officer who has signed or whose facsimile signature has been placed upon such certificate shall have ceased to be such officer before such certificate is issued, it may be issued by the corporation with the same effect as if he were such officer at the date of its issuance.

No certificate shall be issued for any share until the consideration therefor has been fully paid.

2. SHARE TRANSFERS. Upon compliance with any provisions restricting the transferability of shares that may be set forth in the Articles of Incorporation, these Bylaws, or any written agreement in respect thereof, and, in accordance with the provisions of Articles 2.19 and 2.22 of the Texas Business Corporation Act, transfers of shares of the corporation shall be made only on the share transfer records of the corporation by the registered holder thereof, or by his attorney thereunto authorized by power of attorney duly executed and filed with the Secretary of the corporation, or with a transfer agent or a registrar and on surrender of the certificate or certificates for such shares properly endorsed and the payment of all taxes thereon, if any. Except as may be otherwise provided by law, the person in whose name shares stand on the share transfer records of the corporation shall be deemed the owner thereof for all purposes as regards the corporation; provided that whenever any transfer of shares shall be made for collateral security, and not absolutely, such fact, if known to the Secretary of the corporation, shall be so expressed in the entry of transfer.

3. RECORD DATE FOR SHAREHOLDERS. For the purpose of determining shareholders entitled to notice of or to vote at any meeting of shareholders or any adjournment thereof, or entitled to receive a distribution (other than a distribution involving a purchase or redemption by the corporation of any of its own shares) or a share dividend, or in order to make a determination of shareholders for any other proper purpose (other than determining shareholders entitled to consent to action by shareholders proposed to be taken without a meeting of shareholders), the Board of Directors of the corporation may provide that the share transfer records shall be closed for a stated period not to exceed, in any case, sixty days. If the share

transfer records shall be closed for the purpose of determining the shareholders entitled to notice of or to vote at a meeting of shareholders, such share transfer records shall be closed for at least ten days immediately preceding such meeting. In lieu of closing the share transfer records, the Board of Directors may fix in advance a date as the record date for any such determination of shareholders, such date to be not more than sixty days and, in case of a meeting of shareholders, not less than ten days prior to the date on which the particular action, requiring such determination of shareholders, is to be taken. If the share transfer records are not closed and no record date is fixed for the determination of shareholders entitled to notice of or to vote at a meeting of shareholders, or shareholders entitled to receive a distribution (other than a distribution involving a purchase or redemption by the corporation of any of its own shares) or a share dividend, the date on which notice of the meeting is mailed or the date on which the resolution of the Board of Directors declaring such distribution or share dividend is adopted, as the case may be, shall be the record date for such determination of shareholders. When a determination of shareholders entitled to vote at any meeting of shareholders has been made as provided in this section, such determination shall apply to any adjournment thereof except where the determination has been made through the closing of share transfer records and the stated period of closing has expired. Unless a record date shall have previously been fixed or determined pursuant to this section, whenever action by shareholders is proposed to be taken by consent in writing without a meeting of shareholders, the Board of Directors may fix a record date for the purpose of determining shareholders entitled to consent to that action, which record date shall not precede, and shall not be more than ten days after, the date upon which the resolution fixing the record date is adopted by the Board of Directors. If no record date has been fixed by the Board of Directors and the prior action of the Board of Directors is not required by the Texas Business Corporation Act, the record date for determining shareholders entitled to consent to action in writing without a meeting shall be the first date on which a signed written consent setting forth the action taken or proposed to be taken is delivered to the corporation as provided in Section A of Article 9.10 of the Texas Business Corporation Act or an officer or agent of the corporation having custody of the books in which proceedings of meetings of shareholders are recorded. Delivery shall be by hand or by certified or registered mail, return receipt requested. Delivery to the corporation’s principal place of business shall be addressed to the president or the principal executive officer of the corporation. If no record date shall have been fixed by the Board of Directors and prior action of the Board of Directors is required by the Texas Business Corporation Act, the record date for determining shareholders entitled to consent to action in writing without a meeting shall be at the close of business on the date on which the Board of Directors adopts a resolution taking such prior action.

4. MEANING OF CERTAIN TERMS. As used herein in respect of the right to notice of a meeting of shareholders or a waiver thereof or to participate or vote thereat or to consent or dissent in writing in lieu of a meeting, as the case may be, the term “share” or “shares” or “shareholder” or “shareholders” refers to an outstanding share or shares and to a holder or holders of record of outstanding shares when the corporation is authorized to issue only one class of shares, and said reference is also intended to include any outstanding share or shares and any holder or holders of outstanding shares of any class upon which or upon whom the Articles of Incorporation confer such rights where there are two or more classes or series of shares or upon which or upon whom the Texas Business Corporation Act confers such rights notwithstanding that the Articles of Incorporation may provide for more than one class or series of shares, one or more of which are limited or denied such rights thereunder.

2

5. SHAREHOLDER MEETINGS.

• TIME. The annual meeting shall be held on the date fixed from time to time by the Board of Directors; provided that any such date shall not be more than thirteen months after the date of the preceding annual meeting. A special meeting shall be held on the date fixed by the directors except when the Texas Business Corporation Act confers the right to call a special meeting upon the shareholders.

• PLACE. Annual meetings and special meetings shall be held at such place within or without the State of Texas as shall be fixed from time to time by the Board of Directors. In the event of failure of the Board of Directors to fix such place, any such meeting shall be held at the registered office of the corporation in Texas.

• CALL. Annual meetings may be called by the directors or the President or by any officer instructed by the directors or the President to call the meeting. Special meetings may be called in like manner or by any other person or persons authorized to do so by the provisions of the Texas Business Corporation Act.

• NOTICE OR WAIVER OF NOTICE. Written or printed notice stating the place, day, and hour of the meeting and, in case of a special meeting, the purpose or purposes for which the meeting is called, shall be delivered not less than ten days (or not less than any such other minimum period of days as may be prescribed by the Texas Business Corporation Act) nor more than sixty days before the date of the meeting, either personally or by mail, by or at the direction of the President, the Secretary, or the officer or person calling the meeting, to each shareholder. The notice of any annual meeting shall also contain a statement of the purpose or purposes thereof whenever the Texas Business Corporation Act shall require such statement. The notice of any annual or special meeting shall also include, or be accompanied by, any additional statements, information, or documents prescribed by the Texas Business Corporation Act. Whenever any notice is required to be given to any shareholder, a waiver thereof in writing signed by any such shareholder, whether before or after the time stated therein, shall be the equivalent to giving such notice. Notice need not be given to a shareholder in circumstances in which the Texas Business Corporation Act authorizes the omission of such notice.

• VOTING LIST. The officer or agent having charge of the share transfer records for shares of the corporation shall make, at least ten days before each meeting of shareholders, a complete list of the shareholders entitled to vote at the meeting or any adjournment thereof, arranged in alphabetical order, with the address of, and the number of shares held by, each. The list shall be kept on file at the registered office or principal place of business of the corporation in the State of Texas for a period of at least ten days prior to the meeting and shall be subject to inspection by any shareholder at any time during usual business hours. Such list shall also be produced and kept open at the time and place of the meeting and shall be subject to the inspection of any shareholder during the whole time of the meeting. The original share transfer records shall be prima facie evidence as to who are the shareholders entitled to examine such list or share transfer records or to vote at any meeting of shareholders.

• CONDUCT OF MEETING. Meetings of the shareholders shall be presided over by one of the following officers in the order of seniority and if present and acting - - the

3

Chairman of the Board, if any, the Vice-Chairman of the Board, if any, the President, a Vice-President, or, if none of the foregoing is in office and present and acting, by a chairman to be chosen by the shareholders. The Secretary of the corporation, or in his absence, an Assistant Secretary, shall act as secretary of every meeting, but, if neither the Secretary nor an Assistant Secretary is present, the Chairman of the meeting shall appoint a secretary of the meeting.

• PROXY REPRESENTATION. Every shareholder may authorize another person or persons to act for him by proxy in all matters in which a shareholder is entitled to participate, whether for the purposes of determining his presence at a meeting, or whether by waiving notice of any meeting, voting or participating at a meeting, or expressing consent or dissent without a meeting, or otherwise. Every proxy shall be executed in writing by the shareholder. No proxy shall be valid after eleven months from the date of its execution, unless otherwise provided in the proxy.

• INSPECTORS - APPOINTMENT. The directors, in advance of any meeting, may, but need not, appoint one or more inspectors to act at the meeting or any adjournment thereof. If an inspector or inspectors are not appointed, the person presiding at the meeting may, but need not, appoint one or more inspectors. In case any person who may be appointed as an inspector fails to appear or act, the vacancy may be filled by appointment made by the directors in advance of the meeting or at the meeting by the person presiding thereat. Each inspector, if any, before entering upon the discharge of his duties, shall take and sign an oath faithfully to execute the duties of inspector at such meeting with strict impartiality and according to the best of his ability. The inspectors, if any, shall determine the number of shares outstanding and the voting power of each, the shares represented at the meeting, the existence of a quorum, the validity and effect of proxies, and shall receive votes, ballots, or consents, hear and determine all challenges and questions arising in connection with the right to vote, count and tabulate all votes, ballots, or consents, determine the result, and do such acts as are proper to conduct the election or vote with fairness to all shareholders. On request of the person presiding at the meeting or any shareholder, the inspector or inspectors, if any, shall make a report in writing of any challenge, question or matter determined by him or them and execute a certificate of any fact found by him or them.

• QUORUM. With respect to any meeting of shareholders, a quorum shall be present for any matter to be presented at that meeting if the holders of a majority of the shares entitled to vote at the meeting are represented at the meeting in person or by proxy. Once a quorum is present at a meeting of shareholders, the shareholders represented in person or by proxy at the meeting may conduct such business as may properly be brought before the meeting until it is adjourned, and the subsequent withdrawal from the meeting of any shareholder or the refusal of any shareholder represented in person or by proxy to vote shall not affect the presence of a quorum at the meeting. The shareholders represented in person or by proxy at a meeting of shareholders at which a quorum is not present may adjourn the meeting until such time and to such place as may be determined by a vote of the holders of a majority of the shares represented in person or by proxy at that meeting.

• VOTING. Shareholders shall not be entitled to cumulate their votes in the election of directors. In the election of directors, a plurality of the votes cast shall elect. Except as the Texas Business Corporation Act, the Articles of Incorporation, or these Bylaws may

4

otherwise provide, the affirmative vote of the holders of a majority of the shares entitled to vote on and that voted for or against or expressly abstained with respect to that matter at a meeting of shareholders at which quorum is present shall be the act of the shareholders.

6. INFORMAL ACTION. Any action required by the Texas Business Corporation Act to be taken at a meeting of shareholders, and any action which may be taken at any annual or special meeting of shareholders may be taken without a meeting, without prior notice, and without a vote pursuant to the provisions of Article 9.10 of the Texas Business Corporation Act.

Subject to the provisions required or permitted by the Texas Business Corporation Act for notice of meetings, shareholders may participate in and hold a meeting by means of conference telephone or similar communications equipment by means of which all persons participating in the meeting can hear each other. Participation in a meeting pursuant to this paragraph shall constitute presence in person at such meeting, except where a person participates in the meeting for the express purpose of objecting to the transaction of any business on the ground that the meeting is not lawfully called or convened.

ARTICLE II

BOARD OF DIRECTORS

1. FUNCTIONS GENERALLY. The powers of the corporation shall be exercised by or under the authority of, and the business and affairs of the corporation shall be managed under the direction of, a Board of Directors.

2. QUALIFICATIONS AND NUMBER. A director need not be a shareholder, a citizen of the United States, or a resident of the State of Texas. The initial Board of Directors shall consist of one (1) person, which is the number of directors fixed in the Articles of Incorporation, and which shall be the fixed number of directors until changed. The number of directors may be increased or decreased by an amendment to these Bylaws or by other action of the directors or the shareholders, but no decrease in the number of directors shall have the effect of shortening the term of any incumbent director. The number of directors shall never be less than one. The full Board of Directors shall consist of the number of directors fixed herein.

3. ELECTION AND TERM. The initial Board of Directors shall consist of the directors named in the Articles of Incorporation and shall hold office until the first annual meeting of shareholders and until their successors have been elected and qualified. Thereafter, directors who are elected at an annual meeting of shareholders, and directors who are elected in the interim to fill vacancies and newly created directorships, shall hold office until the next succeeding annual meeting of shareholders and until their successors have been elected and qualified. In the interim between annual meetings of shareholders or of special meetings of shareholders called for the election of directors, any vacancies in the Board of Directors, including vacancies resulting from the removal of directors by the shareholders but which are not filled by said shareholders, may be filled by the affirmative vote of a majority of the remaining directors, although less than a quorum exists. Subject to any limitations imposed by Article 2.34 of the Texas Business Corporation Act, any directorship to be filled by reason of an increase in the number of directors may be filled by election at an annual meeting or at a special meeting of shareholders called for that purpose.

5

4. MEETINGS.

• TIME. Meetings shall be held at such time as the Board shall fix, except that the first meeting of a newly elected Board shall be held as soon after its election as the directors may conveniently assemble.

• PLACE. Meetings shall be held at such place within or without the State of Texas as shall be fixed by the Board.

• CALL. No call shall be required for regular meetings for which the time and place have been fixed. Special meetings may be called by or at the direction of the Chairman of the Board, if any, the Vice-Chairman of the Board, if any, of the President, or of a majority of the directors in office.

• NOTICE OR ACTUAL OR CONSTRUCTIVE WAIVER. No notice shall be required for regular meetings for which the time and place have been fixed. Written, oral, or any other mode of notice of the time and place shall be given for special meetings in sufficient time for the convenient assembly of the directors thereat. The notice of any meeting need not specify the business to be transacted or the purpose of the meeting. Any requirement of furnishing a notice shall be waived by any director who signs a waiver of notice before or after the meeting. Attendance of a director at a meeting shall constitute a waiver of notice of the meeting, except where the director attends the meeting for the express purpose of objecting to the transaction of any business because the meeting is not lawfully called or convened.

• QUORUM AND ACTION. A majority of the full Board of Directors shall constitute a quorum unless a different number or portion is required by law. Except as herein otherwise provided, and except as may be otherwise provided by law, the Articles of Incorporation, or these Bylaws, the act of a majority of the directors present at a meeting at which a quorum is present shall be the act of the Board of Directors.

• CHAIRMAN OF THE MEETING. Meetings of the Board of Directors shall be presided over by the following persons in the order of seniority and if present and acting - the Chairman of the Board, if any, the Vice-Chairman of the Board, if any, the President, or any other director chosen by the Board.

5. REMOVAL OF DIRECTORS. The entire Board of Directors or any individual director may be removed from office in conformance with the provisions of Article 2.32 of the Texas Business Corporation Act.

6. COMMITTEES. The Board of Directors, may, by resolution adopted by a majority of the full Board, designate from among its members one or more committees, each of which shall be comprised of one or more of its members, and may designate one or more of its members as alternate members of any committee, who may, subject to any limitations imposed by the Board, replace absent or disqualified members at any meeting of that committee. Any such committee, to the extent provided in the resolution, shall have and may exercise all of the authority of the Board of Directors except such authority as may not be delegated under the Texas Business Corporation Act.

6

7. INFORMAL ACTION. Any action required or permitted to be taken at a meeting of directors or of any committee, if any, may be taken without a meeting if a consent in writing, setting forth the action so taken, shall be signed by all of the members of the Board of Directors or committee, as the case may be.

Subject to the provisions required or permitted by the Texas Business Corporation Act for notice of meetings, members of the Board of Directors, or members of any committee designated by the Board of Directors, may participate in and hold a meeting by means of conference telephone or similar communications equipment by means of which all persons participating in the meeting can hear each other. Participation in a meeting pursuant to this paragraph shall constitute presence in person at such meeting, except where a person participates in the meeting for the express purpose of objecting to the transaction of any business on the ground that the meeting is not lawfully called or convened.

ARTICLE III

OFFICERS

The corporation shall have a President and a Secretary, each of whom shall be elected by the Board of Directors at such time and in such manner as the Board may deem appropriate. The corporation may have such other officers, including assistant officers, and agents as may be deemed necessary, each or any of whom may be elected or appointed by the directors or may be chosen in such manner as the directors shall determine. Any two or more offices may be held by the same person.

Unless otherwise provided in the resolution of election or appointment, each officer shall hold office until the meeting of the Board of Directors following the next annual meeting of shareholders and until his successor has been elected and qualified.

The officers and agents of the corporation shall have the authority and perform the duties in the management of the corporation as determined by the resolution electing or appointing them, as the case may be.

The Board of Directors may remove any officer or agent whenever in its judgment the best interests of the corporation will be served thereby.

ARTICLE IV

REGISTERED OFFICE AND AGENT - SHAREHOLDERS RECORD

The address of the initial registered office of the corporation and the name of the initial registered agent of the corporation are set forth in the original Articles of Incorporation.

The corporation shall keep at its registered office in the State of Texas or at its principal place of business, or at the office of its transfer agent or registrar, if any, a record of its

7

shareholders, as prescribed by Article 2.44 of the Texas Business Corporation Act and shall keep on file at said registered office the voting list of shareholders for a period of at least ten days prior to any meeting of shareholders.

ARTICLE V

CORPORATE SEAL

The corporate seal shall have inscribed thereon the name of the corporation and shall be in such form and contain such other words and/or figures as the Board of Directors shall determine or the law require.

ARTICLE VI

FISCAL YEAR

The fiscal year of the corporation shall be fixed, and shall be subject to change, by the Board of Directors.

ARTICLE VII

INDEMNIFICATION OF DIRECTORS AND OFFICERS

Article 2.02-1 of the Texas Business Corporation Act (the “Article”) permits the corporation to indemnify its present and former directors and officers to the extent and under the circumstances set forth therein. In addition, in some instances, indemnification is required by the Article. The corporation hereby elects to and does hereby indemnify all persons to the fullest extent permitted or required by the Article promptly upon request of any such person making a request for indemnity hereunder. Such obligation to so indemnify and to so make such determinations may be specifically enforced by resort to any court of competent jurisdiction. Further, the corporation shall pay or reimburse the reasonable expenses of such persons covered hereby in advance of the final disposition of any proceeding to the fullest extent permitted by the Article and subject to the conditions thereof.

ARTICLE VIII

BYLAW AMENDMENT

After the adoption of the initial Bylaws by the initial Board of Directors, the Board of Directors may amend or repeal the Bylaws or adopt new Bylaws except as otherwise provided by Article 2.23 of the Texas Business Corporation Act or any other applicable provision of law.

Adopted and approved by the sole shareholder of AID Restaurant, Inc. on the 17th day of January, 2002.

8

EX-3.7

Exhibit 3.7

The State of Texas

Secretary of State

CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION

OF

AIH RESTAURANT, INC.

CHARTER NUMBER 01306912

THE UNDERSIGNED, AS SECRETARY OF STATE OF THE STATE OF TEXAS, HEREBY CERTIFIES THAT THE ATTACHED ARTICLES OF INCORPORATION FOR THE ABOVE NAMED CORPORATION HAVE BEEN RECEIVED IN THIS OFFICE AND ARE FOUND TO CONFORM TO LAW.

ACCORDINGLY, THE UNDERSIGNED, AS SECRETARY OF STATE, AND BY VIRTUE OF THE AUTHORITY VESTED IN THE SECRETARY BY LAW, HEREBY ISSUES THIS CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION.

ISSUANCE OF THIS CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION DOES NOT AUTHORIZE THE USE OF A CORPORATE NAME IN THIS STATE IN VIOLATION OF THE RIGHTS OF ANOTHER UNDER THE FEDERAL TRADEMARK ACT OF 1946, THE TEXAS TRADEMARK LAW, THE ASSUMED BUSINESS OR PROFESSIONAL NAME ACT OR THE COMMON LAW.

DATED MAR. 29, 1994

EFFECTIVE MAR. 29, 1994

ASSISTANT SECRETARY OF STATE

Secretary of State

ARTICLES OF INCORPORATION	FILED In the Office of the Secretary of State of Texas
OF	MAR 29 1994
AIH RESTAURANT, INC.	Corporations Section

The undersigned natural person of the age of eighteen years or more, acting as incorporator of a corporation under the Texas Business Corporation Act, hereby adopts the following Articles of Incorporation for such corporation:

ARTICLE I

The name of the corporation is AIH Restaurant, Inc.

ARTICLE II

The period of the corporation’s duration is perpetual.

ARTICLE III

The purpose or purposes for which the corporation is organized are to transact any or all lawful business for which corporations may be organized under the Texas Business Corporation Act.

ARTICLE IV

The aggregate number of shares which the corporation shall have authority to issue is 1,000 shares of common stock of the par value of $.01 each.

No shareholder of the corporation shall have the right of cumulative voting at any election of directors or upon any other matter.

No holder of securities of the corporation shall be entitled as a matter of right, preemptive or otherwise, to subscribe for or purchase any securities of the corporation now or hereafter authorized to be issued, or securities held in the treasury of the corporation, whether issued or sold for cash or other consideration or as a share dividend or otherwise. Any such securities may be issued or disposed of by the board of directors to such persons and on such terms as in its discretion it shall deem advisable.

ARTICLE V

If, with respect to any matter for which the affirmative vote or concurrence of the shareholders of the corporation is required, any provision of the Texas Business Corporation Act would, but for this Article V, require the affirmative vote or concurrence of the holders of shares

having more than a majority of the votes entitled to vote on such matter, or of any class or series thereof, the affirmative vote or concurrence of the holders of shares having only a majority of the votes entitled to vote on such matter, or of any class or series thereof, shall be required with respect to any such matter.

ARTICLE VI

The corporation will not commence business until it has received for the issuance of its shares consideration of the value of not less than One Thousand Dollars ($1,000), consisting of money, labor done or property actually received.

ARTICLE VII

A. No director of the corporation shall be liable to the corporation or any of its shareholders for monetary damages for an act or omission in the director’s capacity as a director, except that this Article VIII shall not authorize the elimination or limitation of liability of a director of the corporation to the extent the director is found liable for: (i) a breach of such director’s duty of loyalty to the corporation or its shareholders; (ii) an act or omission not in good faith that constitutes a breach of duty of such director to the corporation or an act or omission that involves intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of the law; (iii) a transaction from which such director received an improper benefit, whether or not the benefit resulted from an action taken within the scope of the director’s office; or (iv) an act or omission for which the liability of a director is expressly provided by an applicable statute.

B. If the Texas Business Corporation Act, the Texas Miscellaneous Corporation Laws Act or any other applicable Texas statute hereafter is amended to authorize the further elimination or limitation of the liability of directors of the corporation, then the liability of a director of the corporation shall be limited to the fullest extent permitted by the Texas Business Corporation Act, the Texas Miscellaneous Corporation Laws Act and such other applicable Texas statute, as so amended, and such limitation of liability shall be in addition to, and not in lieu of, the limitation on the liability of a director of the corporation provided by the foregoing provisions of this Article VIII.

C. Any repeal of or amendment to this Article VIII shall be prospective only and shall not adversely affect any limitation on the liability of a director of the corporation existing at the time of such repeal or amendment.

ARTICLE VIII

The post office address of the corporation’s initial registered office is 811 Dallas, Houston, Texas 77002, and the name of its initial registered agent at such address is CT Corporation System.

ARTICLE IX

The number of directors constituting the initial board of directors is one, and the name and address of the person who is to serve as director until the first annual meeting of the shareholders or until his successor is elected and qualified is:

- 2 -

Name	Address
Steven R. Gregg	1900 Yorktown
	Houston, TX 77056

ARTICLE X

The name and address of the incorporator are:

Name	Address
Robert E. Wilson	1301 McKinney, Suite 5100
	Houston, TX 77010-3095

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand this 28th day of March, 1994.

Robert E. Wilson

- 3 -

EX-3.8

Exhibit 3.8

AIH RESTAURANT, INC.

Adopted on January 26, 1995

BYLAWS

ARTICLE I

OFFICES

Section 1.01. Principal Place of Business. The principal place of business of the corporation and the office of its transfer agent or registrar may be located outside the State of Texas.

Section 1.02. Other Offices. The corporation may also have offices at such other places both within and without the State of Texas as the board of directors may from time to time determine or the business of the corporation may require.

ARTICLE II

MEETINGS OF SHAREHOLDERS

Section 2.01. Time and Place of Meetings. Meetings of shareholders for any purpose may be held at such time and place within or without the State of Texas as shall be stated in the notice of the meeting or in a duly executed waiver of notice thereof.

Section 2.02. Annual Meeting. The annual meeting of shareholders shall be held annually at such date and time as shall be designated from time to time by the board of directors and stated in the notice of meeting.

Section 2.03. Special Meetings. Special meetings of the shareholders for any purpose or purposes may be called by the president and shall be called by the president or secretary at the request in writing of a majority of the board of directors, or at the request in writing of shareholders owning at least ten percent of all the shares entitled to vote at the meetings. A request for a special meeting shall state the purpose or purposes of the proposed meeting, and business transacted at any special meeting of shareholders shall be limited to the purposes stated in the notice.

Section 2.04. Notice of Meeting. Written notice stating the place, day and hour of the meeting and, in the case of a special meeting, the purpose or purposes for which the meeting is called, shall be delivered not less than ten nor more than sixty days before the date of the meeting, either personally or by mail, by or at the direction of the president, the secretary, or the officer or persons calling the meeting, to each shareholder entitled to vote at such meeting.

Section 2.05. Quorum. The holders of a majority of the shares issued and outstanding and entitled to vote thereat, present in person or represented by proxy, shall constitute a quorum at all meetings of the shareholders for the transaction of business except as otherwise provided by statute or by the articles of incorporation. If, however, a quorum shall not be present or

represented at any meeting of the shareholders, the shareholders entitled to vote thereat, present in person or represented by proxy, shall have power to adjourn the meeting from time to time, without notice other than announcement at the meeting, until a quorum shall be present or represented. After an adjournment, at any reconvened meeting any business may be transacted that might have been transacted if the meeting had been held in accordance with the original notice thereof, provided a quorum shall be present or represented thereat.

Section 2.06. Vote Required. With respect to any matter, other than the election of directors, the affirmative vote of the holders of a majority of the shares entitled to vote on that matter and represented in person or by proxy at a meeting of shareholders at which a quorum is present, shall decide such matter, unless the matter is one upon which a different vote is required by law or by the articles of incorporation. Unless otherwise required by law or by the articles of incorporation, directors shall be elected by a plurality of the votes cast by the holders of shares entitled to vote in the election of directors at a meeting of shareholders at which a quorum is present.

Section 2.07. Voting; Proxies. Each outstanding share having voting power shall be entitled to one vote on each matter submitted to a vote at a meeting of shareholders. Any shareholder may vote either in person or by proxy executed in writing by the shareholder. A telegram, telex, cablegram or similar transmission by the shareholder, or a photographic, photostatic, facsimile or similar reproduction of a writing executed by the shareholder shall be treated as an execution in writing for purposes of this Section 2.07.

Section 2.08. Action Without Meeting. Any action required to, or which may, be taken at any annual or special meeting of shareholders may be taken without a meeting, without prior notice and without a vote, if a consent or consents in writing, setting forth the action so taken shall be signed by the holder or holders of all the shares entitled to vote with respect to the action that is the subject of the consent. A telegram, telex, cablegram or similar transmission by a shareholder, or a photographic, photostatic, facsimile or similar reproduction of a writing signed by a shareholder, shall be regarded as signed by a shareholder for purposes of this Section 2.08.

ARTICLE III

DIRECTORS

Section 3.01. Powers. The powers of the corporation shall be exercised by or under the authority of, and the business and affairs of the corporation shall be managed under the direction of, the board of directors.

Section 3.02. Number, Election and Term. The number of directors that shall constitute the whole board of directors shall be not less than one. Such number of directors shall from time to time be fixed and determined by the directors and shall be set forth in the notice of any meeting of shareholders held for the purpose of electing directors. The directors shall be elected at the annual meeting of shareholders, except as provided in Section 3.03 of these bylaws, and each director elected shall hold office until his successor shall be elected and qualify. Directors need not be residents of Texas or shareholders of the corporation.

2

Section 3.03. Vacancies. Any vacancy occurring in the board of directors may be filled by a majority of the remaining directors though less than a quorum of the board of directors. A director elected to fill a vacancy shall be elected for the unexpired term of his predecessor in office.

Section 3.04. Change in Number. The number of directors may be increased or decreased from time to time as provided in these bylaws but no decrease shall have the effect of shortening the term of any incumbent director. Any directorship to be filled by reason of an increase in the number of directors may be filled by election at an annual or special meeting of shareholders or may be filled by the board of directors for a term of office continuing only until the next election of one or more directors by the shareholders; provided that the board of directors may not fill more than two such directorships during the period between any two successive annual meetings of shareholders.

Section 3.05. Removal. Any director may be removed either for or without cause at any special meeting of shareholders duly called and held for such purpose.

Section 3.06. Place of Meetings. Meetings of the board of directors, regular or special, may be held either within or without the State of Texas.

Section 3.07. Regular Meetings. The first meeting of each newly elected board of directors shall be held at such time and place as shall be fixed by the vote of the shareholders at the annual meeting and no notice of such meeting shall be necessary to the newly elected directors in order legally to constitute the meeting, provided a quorum shall be present. In the event that the shareholders fail to fix the time and place of such first meeting, it shall be held without notice immediately following the annual meeting of shareholders, and at the same place, unless by the unanimous consent of the directors then elected and serving such time or place shall be changed.

Section 3.08. Notice of Regular Meetings. Regular meetings of the board of directors may be held upon such notice, or without notice, and at such time and at such place as shall from time to time be determined by the board.

Section 3.09. Special Meetings. Special meetings of the board of directors may be called by the chairman of the board of directors or the president and shall be called by the secretary on the written request of a majority of the directors. Notice of each special meeting of the board of directors shall be given to each director at least 24 hours before the time of the meeting.

Section 3.10. Waiver and Requirements of Notice. Attendance of a director at any meeting shall constitute a waiver of notice of such meeting, except where a director attends for the express purpose of objecting to the transaction of any business on the ground that the meeting is not lawfully called or convened. Except as may be otherwise provided by law or by the articles of incorporation or by these bylaws, neither the business to be transacted at, nor the purpose of, any regular or special meeting of the board of directors need be specified in the notice or waiver of notice of such meeting.

Section 3.11. Quorum; Vote Required. At all meetings of the board of directors a majority of the directors shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of business and the act of a

3

majority of the directors present at any meeting at which there is a quorum shall be the act of the board of directors, unless otherwise specifically provided by law, the articles of incorporation or these bylaws. If a quorum shall not be present at any meeting of directors, the directors present thereat may adjourn the meeting from time to time, without notice other than announcement at the meeting, until a quorum shall be present.

Section 3.12. Committees. The board of directors, by resolution passed by a majority of the full board, may from time to time designate a member or members of the board to constitute committees that shall in each case consist of one or more directors and may designate one or more of its members as alternate members of any committee, who may, subject to any limitations imposed by the board of directors, replace absent or disqualified members at any meeting of that committee. Any such committee shall have and may exercise such powers, as the board may determine and specify in the respective resolutions appointing them. A majority of all the members of any such committee may determine its action and fix the time and place of its meetings, unless the board of directors shall otherwise provide. The board of directors shall have power at any time to change the number, subject as aforesaid, and members of any such committee, to fill vacancies and to discharge any such committee.

Section 3.13. Action Without Meeting. Any action required or permitted to be taken at a meeting of the board of directors or any committee may be taken without a meeting if a consent in writing, setting forth the action so taken, is signed by all the members of the board of directors or committee, as the case may be.

Section 3.14. Compensation. By resolution of the board of directors, the directors may be paid their expenses, if any, of attendance at each meeting of the board of directors, or a meeting of a committee thereof, and may be paid a fixed sum for attendance at each meeting of the board of directors, or a meeting of a committee thereof, or a stated salary as director. No such payment shall preclude any director from serving the corporation in any other capacity and receiving compensation therefor.

ARTICLE IV

NOTICES

Section 4.01. Form of Notice; Delivery. Any notice to directors or shareholders shall be in writing and shall be delivered personally or mailed to the directors or shareholders at their respective addresses appearing on the books of the corporation. Notice by mail shall be deemed to be given at the time when the same shall be deposited in the United States mail, postage prepaid. Notice to directors may also be given by telegram, telex, cablegram, facsimile or other similar transmission.

Section 4.02. Waiver. Whenever any notice is required to be given under the provisions of the statutes or of the articles of incorporation or of these bylaws, a waiver thereof in writing signed by the person or persons entitled to such notice, whether before or after the time stated therein, shall be deemed equivalent to the giving of such notice.

4

ARTICLE V

OFFICERS

Section 5.01. Officers. The officers of the corporation shall be elected by the board of directors and shall consist of a president and a secretary, neither of whom need be a member of the board of directors. Two or more offices may be held by the same person.

Section 5.02. Additional Officers. The board of directors may also elect a chairman of the board, a vice chairman of the board, an assistant president, a treasurer, and one or more vice presidents, assistant secretaries and assistant treasurers. The board of directors may appoint such other officers and assistant officers and agents as it shall deem necessary, who shall hold their offices for such terms and shall have such authority and exercise such powers and perform such duties as shall be determined from time to time by the board by resolution not inconsistent with these bylaws.

Section 5.03. Compensation. The salaries of all officers and agents of the corporation shall be fixed by the board of directors. The board of directors shall have the power to enter into contracts for the employment and compensation of officers for such terms as the board deems advisable.

Section 5.04. Term; Removal; Vacancies. The officers of the corporation shall hold office until their successors are elected or appointed and qualify, or until their death or until their resignation or removal from office. Any officer elected or appointed by the board of directors may be removed at any time by the board, but such removal shall be without prejudice to the contract rights, if any, of the person so removed. Election or appointment of an officer or agent shall not of itself create contract rights. Any vacancy occurring in any office of the corporation by death, resignation, removal or otherwise shall be filled by the board of directors.

Section 5.05. Chairman of the Board. The chairman of the board, if one is elected, shall preside at all meetings of the board of directors and shall have such other powers and duties as may from time to time be prescribed by the board of directors, upon written directions given to him pursuant to resolutions duly adopted by the board of directors.

Section 5.06. Vice Chairman of the Board. The vice chairman of the board, if one is elected, shall, in the absence or disability of the chairman of the board, perform the duties and have the authority and exercise the powers of the chairman of the board. He shall perform such other duties and have such other authority and powers as the board of directors may from time to time prescribe or as the chairman of the board may from time to time delegate.

Section 5.07. President. The president shall be the chief executive officer of the corporation, shall have general and active management of the business of the corporation and shall see that all orders and resolutions of the board of directors are carried into effect. He shall preside at all meetings of the shareholders.

Section 5.08. Vice Presidents. The vice presidents in the order of their seniority, unless otherwise determined by the board of directors, shall, in the absence or disability of the president, perform the duties and have the authority and exercise the powers of the president. They shall perform such other duties and have such other authority and powers as the board of directors may from time to time prescribe or as the president may from time to time delegate.

5

Section 5.09. Secretary. The secretary shall attend all meetings of the board of directors and all meetings of shareholders and record all of the proceedings of the meetings of the board of directors and of the shareholders in a minute book to be kept for that purpose and shall perform like duties for the standing committees when required. He shall give, or cause to be given, notice of all meetings of the shareholders and special meetings of the board of directors, and shall perform such other duties as may be prescribed by the board of directors or president, under whose supervision he shall be. He shall keep in safe custody the seal of the corporation and, when authorized by the board of directors, shall affix the same to any instrument requiring it and, when so affixed, it shall be attested by his signature or by the signature of an assistant secretary or of the treasurer. The secretary shall perform such other duties and have such other powers as the board of directors may from time to time prescribe or as the president may from time to time delegate.

Section 5.10. Assistant Secretaries. The assistant secretaries in the order of their seniority, unless otherwise determined by the board of directors, shall, in the absence or disability of the secretary, perform the duties and exercise the powers of the secretary. They shall perform such other duties and have such other powers as the board of directors may from time to time prescribe or as the president may from time to time delegate.

Section 5.11. Treasurer. The treasurer, if one is elected, shall have custody of the corporate funds and securities and shall keep full and accurate accounts and records of receipts, disbursements and other transactions in books belonging to the corporation, and shall deposit all moneys and other valuable effects in the name and to the credit of the corporation in such depositories as may be designated from time to time by the board of directors. The treasurer shall disburse the funds of the corporation as may be ordered by the board of directors, taking proper vouchers for such disbursements, and shall render the president and the board of directors, when so directed, an account of all his transactions as treasurer and of the financial condition of the corporation. The treasurer shall perform such other duties and have such other powers as the board of directors may from time to time prescribe or as the president may from time to time delegate. If required by the board of directors, the treasurer shall give the corporation a bond of such type, character and amount as the board of directors may require.

Section 5.12. Assistant Treasurers. The assistant treasurers in the order of their seniority, unless otherwise determined by the board of directors, shall, in the absence or disability of the treasurer, perform the duties and exercise the powers of the treasurer. They shall perform such other duties and have such other powers as the board of directors may from time to time prescribe or the president may from time to time delegate.

6

ARTICLE VI

CERTIFICATES REPRESENTING SHARES

Section 6.01. Certificates. The shares of the corporation shall be represented by certificates signed by the president or a vice president and the secretary or an assistant secretary of the corporation, and may be sealed with the seal of the corporation or a facsimile thereof.

Section 6.02. Facsimile Signatures. The signatures of the president or a vice president and the secretary or an assistant secretary upon a certificate may be facsimiles. In case any officer who has signed or whose facsimile signature has been placed upon such certificate shall have ceased to be such officer before such certificate is issued, it may be issued by the corporation with the same effect as if he were such officer at the date of its issue.

Section 6.03. Lost Certificates. The board of directors may direct a new certificate to be issued in place of any certificate theretofore issued by the corporation alleged to have been lost or destroyed. When authorizing such issue of a new certificate, the board of directors, in its discretion and as a condition precedent to the issuance thereof, may prescribe such terms and conditions as it deems expedient and may require such indemnities as it deems adequate to protect the corporation from any claim that may be made against it with respect to any such certificate alleged to have been lost or destroyed.

Section 6.04. Transfers. Upon surrender to the corporation or the transfer agent of the corporation of a certificate representing shares duly endorsed or accompanied by proper evidence of succession, assignment or authority to transfer, a new certificate shall be issued to the person entitled thereto and the old certificate canceled and the transaction recorded upon the transfer records of the corporation.

Section 6.05. Closing of Transfer Records. For the purpose of determining shareholders (i) entitled to notice of or to vote at any meeting of shareholders, or, after an adjournment thereof, at any reconvened meeting, (ii) entitled to receive a distribution (other than a distribution involving a purchase or redemption by the corporation of any of its own shares) or a share dividend or (iii) for any other proper purpose (other than determining shareholders entitled to consent to action by shareholders proposed to be taken without a meeting of shareholders), the board of directors may provide that the share transfer records shall be closed for a stated period but not to exceed, in any ease, sixty days. If the share transfer records shall be closed for the purpose of determining shareholders entitled to notice of or to vote at a meeting of shareholders, such records shall be closed for at least ten days immediately preceding such meeting. In lieu of closing the share transfer records, the board of directors may fix in advance a date as the record date for any such determination of shareholders, such date in any case to be not more than sixty days and, in the case of a meeting of shareholders, not less than ten days, prior to the date on which the particular action requiring such determination of shareholders, is to be taken. If the share transfer records are not closed and no record date is fixed for the determination of shareholders entitled to notice of or to vote at a meeting of shareholders, or shareholders entitled to receive a distribution (other than a distribution involving a purchase or redemption by the corporation of any of its own shares) or a share dividend, the date on which notice of the meeting is mailed or the date on which the resolution of the board of directors declaring such distribution

7

or share dividend is adopted, as the case may be, shall be the record date for such determination of shareholders. When a determination of shareholders entitled to vote at any meeting of shareholders has been made as provided in this Section 6.05, such determination shall be applied after an adjournment thereof to any reconvened meeting except where the determination has been made through the closing of the share transfer records and the stated period of closing has expired.

Section 6.06. Fixing Record Dates for Consents to Action. Unless a record date shall have previously been fixed or determined, whenever action by shareholders is proposed to be taken by consent in writing without a meeting of shareholders, the board of directors may fix a record date for the purpose of determining shareholders entitled to consent to that action which record date shall not precede, and shall not be more than ten days after, the date upon which the resolution fixing the record date is adopted by the board of directors. If no record date has been fixed by the board of directors and prior action of the board of directors is not required by law, the record date for determining shareholders entitled to consent to action in writing without a meeting shall be the first date on which a signed written consent setting forth the action taken proposed to be taken is delivered to the corporation in the manner required by Section 2.08 of these bylaws. If no record date shall have been fixed by the board of directors and prior action of the board of directors is required by law, the record date for determining shareholders entitled to consent to action in writing without a meeting shall be at the close of business on the date on which the board of directors adopts a resolution taking such prior action.

Section 6.07. Registered Shareholders. Except as otherwise required by law, the corporation shall be entitled to regard the person in whose name any shares are registered in the share transfer records at any particular time as the owner of those shares at that time for purposes of voting those shares, receiving distributions, share dividends or notices in respect thereof, transferring those shares, exercising rights of dissent with respect to those shares, exercising or waiving any preemptive right with respect to those shares, entering into agreements with respect to those shares or giving proxies with respect to those shares. Except as otherwise required by law, neither the corporation nor any of its officers, directors, employees or agents shall be liable for regarding that person as the owner of those shares at that time for those purposes, regardless of whether that person does not possess a certificate for those shares.

Section 6.08. List of Shareholders. The officer or agent having charge of the transfer books for shares shall make, at least ten days before each meeting of shareholders, a complete list of the shareholders entitled to vote at such meeting, arranged in alphabetical order, with the address of each and the number of shares held by each, which list, for a period of ten days prior to such meeting, shall be kept on file at the registered office or principal place of business of the corporation and shall be subject to inspection by any shareholder at any time during usual business hours. Such list shall also be produced and kept open at the time and place of the meeting and shall be subject to the inspection of any shareholder during the whole time of the meeting. The original share ledger or transfer book, or a duplicate thereof, shall be prima facie evidence as to who are the shareholders entitled to examine such list or share ledger or transfer book or to vote at any meeting of the shareholders.

8

ARTICLE VII

GENERAL PROVISIONS

Section 7.01. Distributions and Share Dividends. Subject to the provisions of the articles of incorporation relating thereto, if any, distributions and share dividends may be declared by the board of directors, in its discretion, at any regular or special meeting, pursuant to law. Subject to any provisions of the articles of incorporation, distributions may be made by the transfer of money or other property (except the corporation’s own shares or rights to acquire such shares) or by the issuance of indebtedness of the corporation, and share dividends may be paid in the corporation’s own authorized but unissued shares or in treasury shares.

Section 7.02. Reserve Funds. Before payment of any distribution or share dividend, there may be set aside out of any funds of the corporation available for distributions or share dividends such sum or sums as the directors from time to time, in their absolute discretion, think proper as a reserve fund for meeting contingencies, or for equalizing distributions or share dividends, or for repairing or maintaining any property of the corporation, or for such other purpose as the directors shall think conducive to the interest of the corporation, and the directors may modify or abolish any such reserve in the manner in which it was created.

Section 7.03. Checks. All checks or demands for money and notes of the corporation shall be signed by such officer or officers or such other person or persons as the board of directors may from time to time designate.

Section 7.04. Fiscal Year. The fiscal year of the corporation shall be fixed by resolution of the board of directors; provided, that if such fiscal year is not fixed by the board of directors it shall be the calendar year.

Section 7.05. Seal. The corporate seal shall be circular in form with a five-pointed star in the center and with the name of the corporation around the margin or in such form as may be prescribed by the board of directors. The seal may be used by causing it or a facsimile thereof to be impressed or affixed or in any manner reproduced.

Section 7.06. Books and Records. The corporation shall keep books and records of account and shall keep minutes of the proceedings of its shareholders, its board of directors and each committee of its board of directors. The corporation shall keep at its registered office or principal place of business, or at the office of its transfer agent or registrar, a record of the original issuance of shares issued by the corporation and a record of each transfer of those shares that have been presented to the corporation for registration of transfer. Such records shall contain the names and addresses of all past and current shareholders of the corporation and the number and class or series of shares issued by the corporation held by each of them.

Section 7.07. Invalid Provisions. If any provision of these bylaws is held to be illegal, invalid, or unenforceable under present or future laws, such provision shall be fully severable; these bylaws shall be construed and enforced as if such illegal, invalid, or unenforceable provision had never comprised a part hereof; and the remaining provisions hereof shall remain in full force and effect and shall not be affected by the illegal, invalid, or unenforceable provision

9

or by its severance herefrom. Furthermore, in lieu of such illegal, invalid, or unenforceable provision there shall be added automatically as a part of these bylaws a provision as similar in terms to such illegal, invalid, or unenforceable provision as may be possible and be legal, valid, and enforceable.

Section 7.08. Headings. The headings used in these bylaws are for reference purposes only and do not affect in any way the meaning or interpretation of these bylaws.

ARTICLE VIII

INDEMNIFICATION OF DIRECTORS AND OFFICERS

Article 2.02-1 of the Texas Business Corporation Act (the “Article”) permits the corporation to indemnify its present and former directors and officers to the extent and under the circumstances set forth therein. In addition, in some instances, indemnification is required by the Article. The corporation hereby elects to and does hereby indemnify all such persons to the fullest extent permitted or required by the Article promptly upon request of any such person making a request for indemnity hereunder. Such obligation to so indemnify and to so make such determinations may be specifically enforced by resort to any court of competent jurisdiction. Further, the corporation shall pay or reimburse the reasonable expenses of such persons covered hereby in advance of the final disposition of any proceeding to the fullest extent permitted by the Article and subject to the conditions thereof.

ARTICLE IX

AMENDMENTS

These bylaws may be altered, amended, or repealed or new bylaws may be adopted by the affirmative vote of a majority of the whole board of directors at any regular or special meeting; provided, that these bylaws may not be altered, amended, or repealed so as to be inconsistent with law or any provision of the articles of incorporation.

10

EX-3.9

Exhibit 3.9

STATE OF MINNESOTA

SECRETARY OF STATE

CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION

I, Mary Kiffmeyer, Secretary of State of Minnesota, do certify that: Articles of incorporation, duly signed and acknowledged under oath, have been filed on this date in the office of the Secretary of State, for the incorporation of the following corporation, under and in accordance with the provisions of the chapter of Minnesota Statutes listed below.

This corporation is now legally organized under the laws of Minnesota.

Corporate Name: AIIM Restaurant, Inc.

Corporate Charter Number: 11E-915

Chapter Formed Under: 302A

This certificate has been issued on 06/09/2000.

Secretary of State

ARTICLES OF INCORPORATION

OF

AIIM RESTAURANT, INC.

The undersigned, being a natural person of at least eighteen years of age, does hereby act as incorporator in adopting the following Articles of Incorporation for the purpose of incorporating a corporation for profit pursuant to Chapter 302A, Minnesota Statutes.

FIRST: The name of the corporation (hereinafter called the “Corporation”) is: AIIM Restaurant, Inc.

SECOND: The address of the initial registered office of the Corporation in the State of Minnesota is c/o Corporation Service Company, Multifoods Tower, 33 South Sixth Street, Minneapolis 55402, and the name of the initial registered agent of the Corporation at that address is Corporation Service Company. The said initial registered office is located in the County of Hennepin.

THIRD: The aggregate number of shares that the Corporation has authority to issue is 1,000, all of which are of a par value of $.01 dollar each and are of the same class and series and are Common shares.

FOURTH: The name and the address of the incorporator are as follows:

NAME	ADDRESS
Kathleen Clover, Esq.	300 Sixth Avenue, 8th Floor
	Pittsburgh, PA 15222

FIFTH: The duration of the Corporation shall be perpetual.

SIXTH: The Corporation has general business purposes and, in furtherance of the corporate purposes, the Corporation shall have all of the powers conferred upon corporations incorporated under Chapter 302A, Minnesota Statutes.

SEVENTH: No shareholder entitled to vote in the election of directors shall be entitled to the right to cumulative voting in any such election.

EIGHTH: Any action required or permitted to be taken at a meeting of the Board of Directors of the Corporation, other than an action requiring shareholder approval, may be taken by written action signed by the number of directors that would be required to take the same action at a meeting of the Board of Directors at which all directors were present.

NINTH: The Corporation shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Chapter 302A, Minnesota Statutes, as the same may be amended and supplemented, indemnify any and all persons whom it shall have power to indemnify under said Chapter from and against any and all of the expenses, liabilities, or other matters referred to in or covered by said Chapter.

TENTH: No holder of the shares of any class of the Corporation shall be entitled to preemptive rights.

I certify that I am authorized to execute this document and I further certify that I understand that by signing this document, I am subject to the penalties of perjury as set forth in Section 609.48, Minnesota Statues, as if I had signed this document under oath.

Signed on June 9, 2000
	Kathleen Clover, Esq., Incorporator

STATE OF MINNESOTA

FILED

JUN 09 2000

Mary Kiffmeyer

Secretary of State

EX-3.10

Exhibit 3.10

BYLAWS

OF

AIIM RESTAURANT, INC.

ARTICLE 1.

OFFICES

1.1) Registered Office —

The registered office of the Corporation shall be located within the State of Minnesota, as set forth in the Articles of Incorporation. The Board of Directors shall have authority to change the registered office of the Corporation and a statement evidencing any such change shall be filed with the Secretary of State of Minnesota as required by law.

1.2) Offices —

The Corporation may have other offices, including its principal business office, either within or without the State of Minnesota.

ARTICLE 2.

CORPORATE SEAL

2.1) Corporate Seal —

The Board of Directors shall determine whether or not the Corporation will adopt a corporate seal. If a corporate seal is adopted, inscribed on the corporate seal shall be the name of the Corporation and the words “Corporate Seal,” and when so directed by the Board of Directors, a duplicate of the seal may be kept and used by the Secretary of the Corporation.

ARTICLE 3.

SHAREHOLDERS

3.1) Regular Meetings —

Regular meetings of the shareholders shall be held at the Corporation’s principal office or such other place within or without the State of Minnesota as is designated by the Board of Directors. Regular meetings may be held annually or on a less frequent periodic basis, as established by a resolution of the Board of Directors, or may be held on call by the Board of Directors from time to time as and when the Board determines. At each regular meeting, the shareholders shall elect qualified successors for directors who serve for an indefinite term or whose terms have expired or are due to expire within six (6) months after

the date of the meeting, and may transact such other business which properly comes before them. The foregoing notwithstanding, in the event a regular meeting of the shareholders has not been held for a period of fifteen (15) months, a shareholder or group of shareholders holding three percent (3%) or more of the issued and outstanding voting shares may demand that a regular meeting of the shareholders be held by giving written notice to the President or Treasurer of the Corporation. Within thirty (30) days after receipt of the notice, the Board shall cause a regular meeting of the shareholders to be called and held within ninety (90) days of receipt of the notice. Any regular meeting held pursuant to such a request by a shareholder or shareholders shall be held within the county where the principal executive office of the Corporation is located.

3.2) Special Meetings —

Special meetings of the shareholders shall be called by the President or Treasurer, or such other officer as may be designated by the Board of Directors, upon request of two members of the Board of Directors, or upon a written request of shareholders holding ten percent (10%) or more of the shares entitled to vote. The request must specify the purpose of the meeting. Within thirty (30) days after receipt of the request, the Board of Directors must call a special meeting of the shareholders to be held within ninety (90) days of receipt of the request. Any special meeting held pursuant to such a request by a shareholder or shareholders shall be held within the county where the principal executive office of the Corporation is located.

3.3) Meeting By Electronic Communications —

A conference among shareholders by any means of communication through which the shareholders may simultaneously hear each other during the conference constitutes a regular or special meeting of shareholders if the number of shares held by the shareholders participating in the conference would be sufficient to constitute a quorum at a meeting, and if the same notice is given of the conference to every holder of shares entitled to vote as would be required for a shareholders meeting under these Bylaws. In any shareholders’ meeting, a shareholder may participate by any means of communication through which the shareholder, other shareholders so participating, and all shareholders physically present at the meeting may simultaneously hear each other during the meeting.

3.4) Quorum —

Business may be transacted at any duly held meeting of shareholders at which a quorum is present. The holders of a majority of the voting power of the shares entitled to vote at a meeting are a quorum. The shareholders present at the meeting may continue to transact business until adjournment, even though a number of shareholders withdraw leaving less than a quorum. If a quorum is not present at any meeting, those present have the power to adjourn the meeting from time to time until the requisite number of voting shares are present. The date, time, and place of the reconvened meeting shall be announced at the time of adjournment, and notice of the reconvened meeting shall be given to all shareholders who were not present at the time of adjournment. Any business which might have been transacted at the meeting which was adjourned may be transacted at the reconvened meeting.

2

3.5) Voting —

At each shareholders’ meeting, every shareholder having the right to vote is entitled to vote in person or by proxy. Shareholders have one (1) vote for each share having voting power standing in their name on the books of the Corporation, unless otherwise provided in the Articles of Incorporation of the Corporation, or these Bylaws, or in the terms of the shares. Upon the demand of any shareholder, the vote for directors or the vote upon any question before the meeting shall be by ballot. All elections and questions shall be decided by a majority vote of the number of shares entitled to vote and represented at any meeting at which there is a quorum, except as otherwise required by statute, the Articles of Incorporation, these Bylaws, or by agreement among the shareholders.

3.6) Notice of Meeting —

Notice of regular or special meetings of the shareholders shall be given by an officer or agent of the Corporation to each shareholder shown on the books of the Corporation to be the holder of record of shares entitled to vote at the meeting. If the notice is to be mailed, then the notice must be mailed to each shareholder at the shareholder’s address as shown on the books of the Corporation at least five (5) calendar days prior to the meeting. If the notice is not mailed, then the notice must be given at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to the meeting. The notice must contain the date, time, and place of the meeting, and in the case of a special meeting, must also contain a statement of the purpose of the meeting. In no event shall notice be given more than sixty (60) days prior to the meeting.

3.7) Proxies —

At all meetings of shareholders, a shareholder may vote by proxy executed in writing by the shareholder or by his duly authorized attorney-in-fact. Such proxies must be filed with an officer of the Corporation before or at the time of the meeting. No proxy shall be valid after eleven (11) months from the date of its execution, unless otherwise provided in the proxy.

3.8) Closing Transfer Books —

The Board of Directors may close the stock transfer books for a period of time which does not exceed sixty (60) days preceding any of the following: the date of any meeting of shareholders; the payment of dividends; the allotment of rights; or the change, conversion, or exchange of shares.

3.9) Record Date —

In lieu of closing the stock transfer books, the Board of Directors may fix in advance a date, not exceeding sixty (60) days preceding the date of any of the events described in Section 3.8, as a record date for the determination of shareholders entitled to notice of and to vote at any meeting and any meeting subsequent to adjournment; to receive any dividend or allotment of rights; or to exercise the rights in respect to any change, conversion, or exchange of shares. In such case, only those shareholders of record on the record date so fixed shall be entitled to receive notice of and to vote at the meeting and any meeting subsequent to

3

adjournment thereof, to receive a dividend or allotment of rights, to exercise such rights, as the case may be, notwithstanding any transfer of any shares on the books of the Corporation after any record date so fixed. If the share transfer books are not closed and no record date is fixed for determination of the shareholders of record, then the date on which notice of the meeting is mailed or the date of adoption of a resolution of the Board of Directors declaring a dividend, allotment of rights, change, conversion, or exchange of shares, as the case may be, shall be the record date of such determination.

3.10) Presiding Officer —

The President of the Corporation shall preside over all meetings of the shareholders. In the absence of the President, the shareholders may choose any person present to act as a presiding officer.

3.11) Order of Business —

The suggested order of business at the regular meeting, and so far as possible at all other meetings of the shareholders, shall be:

1. Roll call.

2. Proof of due notice of meeting, unanimous attendance, or waiver of notice.

3. Reading and disposal of any unapproved minutes.

4. Annual reports of all officers and committees.

5. Election of directors.

6. Unfinished business.

7. New business.

8. Adjournment.

3.12) Written Action by Shareholders —

Any action which may be taken at a meeting of the shareholders may be taken without a meeting and notice if a consent in writing, setting forth the action so taken, is signed by all of the shareholders entitled to notice of a meeting for such purpose.

4

ARTICLE 4.

DIRECTORS

4.1) General Powers —

The property, affairs, and business of the Corporation shall be managed by the Board of Directors.

4.2) Shareholder Management —

The holders of shares entitled to vote for directors may, by unanimous affirmative vote, take any action which the Board of Directors is otherwise empowered to take, in accordance with the provisions of Section 302A.201 of the Minnesota Statutes and laws amendatory thereof or supplementary thereto.

4.3) Number —

The number of directors shall be fixed by resolution of the shareholders at their regular meetings or special meetings called for that purpose; provided, however, that the number may be increased by resolution of the Board of Directors. Any newly created directorships resulting from an action by the Board of Directors shall be filled by a majority vote of the directors serving at the time of increase.

4.4) Qualifications and Term of Office —

Directors need not be shareholders or residents of the State of Minnesota. The Board of Directors shall be elected by the shareholders at their regular meeting and at any special shareholders’ meeting called for that purpose. A director elected for an indefinite term shall serve until the next regular meeting of the shareholders and until the director’s successor is elected and qualifies, or until the earlier death, resignation, removal, or disqualification of the director. A director elected for a fixed term of office, which shall not exceed five (5) years, shall hold office until the director’s successor is elected and qualifies, or until the earlier death, resignation, removal, or disqualification of the director.

4.5) Quorum —

A majority of the Board of Directors constitutes a quorum for the transaction of business; provided, however, that if any vacancies exist by reason of death, resignation, or otherwise, a majority of the remaining directors constitutes a quorum. If less than a quorum is present at any meeting, a majority of the directors present may adjourn the meeting from time to time without further notice.

5

4.6) Action of Directors —

The acts of a majority of the directors present at a meeting at which a quorum is present are the acts of the Board of Directors.

4.7) Meetings —

Meetings of the Board of Directors may be held from time to time at any place, within or without the State of Minnesota, that the Board of Directors may select. If the Board of Directors fails to select a place for a meeting, the meeting shall be held at the principal executive office of the Corporation. The President or any director may call a meeting of the Board of Directors by giving notice to all directors of the date, time, and place of the meeting. If the notice is to be mailed, then the notice must be mailed to each director at least five (5) calendar days prior to the meeting. If the notice is not mailed, then the notice must be given at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to the meeting. If the date, time, and place of the meeting of the Board of Directors have been announced at a previous meeting of the Board of Directors, no additional notice of such meeting is required, except that notice shall be given to all directors who were not present at the previous meeting. Notice of the meeting of the Board of Directors need not state the purposes of the meeting. A director may orally or in writing waive notice of the meeting. Attendance by a director at a meeting of the Board of Directors is also a waiver of notice of such meeting, except where the director objects at the beginning of the meeting to the transaction of business because the meeting allegedly is not lawfully called or convened and does not participate thereafter in the meeting.

4.8) Meeting By Electronic Communications —

A conference among directors by any means of communication through which the directors may simultaneously hear each other during the conference constitutes a meeting of the Board of Directors if the number of directors participating in the conference would be sufficient to constitute a quorum at a meeting, and if the same notice is given of the conference as would be required for a Board of Directors’ meeting under these Bylaws. In any Board of Directors’ meeting, a director may participate by any means of communication through which the director, other directors so participating, and all directors physically present at the meeting may simultaneously hear each other during the meeting.

4.9) Compensation —

Directors may receive such compensation as may be determined from time to time by resolution of the Board of Directors.

4.10) Committees —

By the affirmative vote of a majority of the directors, the Board of Directors may establish a committee or committees having the authority of the Board of Directors in the management of the business of the Corporation to the extent provided in the resolution adopted by the Board of Directors. A committee shall consist of one or more persons, who need not be directors, appointed by affirmative vote of a majority of the directors present. A majority of the members of the committee present at any meeting of the committee is a

6

quorum for the transaction of business, unless a larger or smaller proportion or number is provided in the resolution approved by the Board of Directors. Minutes of any committees created by the Board of Directors shall be available upon request to members of the committee and to any director.

4.11) Action by Absent Director —

A director may give advance written consent or opposition to a proposal to be acted upon at a Board of Directors’ meeting by giving a written statement to the President, Treasurer, or any director setting forth a statement of the proposal to be voted on and containing a statement of the director’s voting preference with regard to the proposal. An advance written statement does not constitute presence of the director for purposes of determining a quorum, but the advance written statement shall be counted in the vote on the subject proposal provided that the proposal acted on at the meeting is substantially the same or has substantially the same effect as the proposal set forth in the advance written statement. The advance written statement by a director on a proposal shall be included in the records of the Board of Directors’ action on the proposal.

4.12) Removal of Directors by Shareholders —

At any duly called meeting of the shareholders, the affirmative vote of a number of shares sufficient to elect a director may remove any or all of the directors, with or without cause, and may elect replacements.

4.13) Removal of Directors by Board of Directors —

Any director who has been elected by the Board of Directors to fill a vacancy on the Board of Directors, or to fill a directorship created by action of the Board of Directors, and who has not subsequently been re-elected by the shareholders, may be removed by a majority vote of all directors constituting the Board, exclusive of the director whose removal is proposed.

4.14) Vacancies —

Any vacancy on the Board of Directors may be filled by vote of the remaining directors, even though less than a quorum.

4.15) Order of Business —

The suggested order of business at any meeting of the directors shall be:

1. Roll call.

2. Proof of due notice of meeting, unanimous attendance, or waiver of notice.

3. Reading and disposal of any unapproved minutes.

4. Reports of officers and committees.

5. Election of officers.

6. Unfinished business.

7. New business.

8. Adjournment.

7

4.16) Written Action by Directors —

Any action which may be taken at a meeting of the Board of Directors may be taken without a meeting and notice thereof if a consent in writing setting forth the action taken is signed by all of the directors; provided, however, that if the action does not require approval by the shareholders, the action may be taken by a consent signed by the number of directors required to take the action at a duly held meeting of the Board of Directors at which all of the directors are present. In the event a written action is signed by less than all the directors, any director not signing the action will be notified as soon as reasonably possible of the content of the action and the effective date of the action. Failure to provide the notice does not invalidate the written action. A director who does not sign or consent to the written action has no liability for the action or actions so taken.

4.17) Dissent From Action —

A director of the Corporation who is present at a meeting of the Board of Directors at which any action is taken shall be presumed to have assented to the action taken unless the director objects at the beginning of the meeting to the transaction of business because the meeting is not lawfully called or convened and does not participate thereafter, or unless the director votes against the action at the meeting, or is prohibited from voting on the action.

ARTICLE 5.

OFFICERS

5.1) Election of Officers —

The Board of Directors shall, from time to time, elect a President, who may also be designated as Chief Executive Officer, and a Treasurer, who may also be designated as Chief Financial Officer. The Board of Directors may elect, but shall not be required to elect, a Secretary, one or more Vice Presidents, and a Chairman of the Board. In addition, the Board of Directors may elect such other officers and agents as it may deem necessary. The officers shall exercise such powers and perform such duties as are prescribed by applicable statutes, the Articles of Incorporation, the Bylaws, or as may be determined from time to time by the Board of Directors. Any number of offices may be held by the same person.

5.2) Term of Office —

The officers shall hold office until their successors are elected and qualify; provided, however, that any officer may be removed with or without cause by the affirmative vote of a majority of the directors present at a Board of Directors’ meeting.

8

5.3) President (Chief Executive Officer) —

The President shall:

(a) Have general active management of the business of the Corporation;

(b) When present, preside at all meetings of the shareholders;

(c) When present, and if there is no Chairman of the Board, preside at all meetings of the Board of Directors;

(d) See that all orders and resolutions of the Board of Directors are carried into effect;

(e) Sign and deliver in the name of the Corporation any deeds, mortgages, bonds, contracts or other instruments pertaining to the business of the Corporation, except in cases in which the authority to sign and deliver is required by law to be exercised by another person or is expressly delegated by the Articles of Incorporation or Bylaws or by the Board of Directors to some other officer or agent of the Corporation;

(f) Maintain records of and, whenever necessary, certify all proceedings of the Board of Directors and the shareholders; and

(g) Perform other duties prescribed by the Board of Directors.

All other officers shall be subject to the direction and authority of the President.

5.4) Treasurer (Chief Financial Officer) —

The Treasurer shall:

(a) Review the Corporation’s financial performance and serve as financial advisor to the Board of Directors and the President on the financial management of the Corporation;

(b) Be responsible for recommendations and establishment of policies, to be approved by the President or the Board of Directors, for management of the Corporation’s revenues and expenses;

(c) Be responsible for implementation of financial procedures adopted by the President or the Board of Directors;

(d) Cause the following things to be done:

(1) Keep accurate financial records for the Corporation;

(2) Deposit all money, drafts, and checks in the name of and to the credit of the Corporation in the banks and depositories designated by the Board of Directors;

(3) Endorse for deposit all notes, checks, and drafts received by the Corporation as ordered by the Board of Directors, making proper vouchers therefor; and

9

(4) Disburse corporate funds and issue checks and drafts in the name of the Corporation, as ordered by the Board of Directors.

(e) Render to the President and the Board of Directors, whenever requested, an account of all transactions by the Treasurer and of the financial condition of the Corporation; and

(f) Perform other duties prescribed by the Board of Directors or by the President.

5.5) Vice President —

Each Vice President, if any, has such powers and shall perform such duties as may be specified in these Bylaws or prescribed by the Board of Directors. In the event of absence or disability of the President, the Vice President shall succeed to the President’s powers and duties. If there are two or more Vice Presidents, the order of succession shall be determined through seniority by the order in which elected or as otherwise prescribed by the Board of Directors.

5.6) Secretary —

The Secretary, if any, shall attend all meetings of the shareholders and the Board of Directors. The Secretary shall act as clerk and shall record all the proceedings of the meetings in the minute book of the Corporation and shall give proper notice of meetings of shareholders and the Board of Directors. The Secretary shall keep the seal of the Corporation, if any, and shall affix the seal to any instrument requiring it and shall attest the seal, and shall perform such other duties as may be prescribed from time to time by the Board of Directors.

5.7) Chairman of the Board —

The Chairman of the Board, if any, shall:

(a) When present, preside at all meetings of the Board of Directors; and

(b) Perform other duties prescribed by the Board of Directors.

5.8) Assistant Officers —

In the event of absence or disability of any Vice President, Secretary, or Treasurer, the assistant to such officer, if any, shall succeed to the powers and duties of the absent officer until the principal officer resumes his duties or a replacement is elected by the Board of Directors. If there are two or more assistants, the order of succession shall be determined through seniority by the order in which elected or as otherwise prescribed by the Board of Directors. The assistant officers shall exercise such other powers and duties as may be delegated to them from time to time by the Board of Directors or the principal officer under whom they serve, but at all times remain subordinate to the principal officers they are designated to assist.

10

ARTICLE 6.

INDEMNIFICATION

6.1) Indemnification —

Directors, officers, committee members, and other persons shall have the rights to indemnification provided by Section 302A.521 of the Minnesota Statutes and law amendatory thereof and supplementary thereto.

ARTICLE 7.

SHARES AND THEIR TRANSFER

7.1) Certificates of Shares —

Unless the Board of Directors has provided that the Corporation’s shares are to be uncertificated, every owner of shares of the Corporation shall be entitled to a certificate, to be in such form as the Board of Directors prescribes, certifying the number of shares owned by such owner. The certificates for shares shall be numbered in the order in which they are issued and shall be signed in the name of the Corporation by the President or a Vice President and by the Secretary or Assistant Secretary, or the Treasurer, or any other officer of the Corporation authorized by the Board of Directors and shall have the corporate seal, if any, affixed thereto. A record shall be kept of the name of the person owning the shares represented by each certificate, the number of shares represented by each certificate, the respective issue dates thereof, and in the case of cancellation, the respective dates of cancellation. Except as provided in Section 7.5 of this Article 7, every certificate surrendered to the Corporation for exchange or transfer shall be canceled, and no other certificate shall be issued in exchange for any existing certificate until such existing certificate is canceled.

7.2) Uncertificated Shares —

The Board of Directors, by a majority vote of directors present at a duly called meeting, may provide that any or all shares or classes or series of shares are to be uncertificated shares. In that case, any shareholder who is issued uncertificated shares shall be provided with the information legally required to be disclosed in a certificate.

7.3) Issuance of Shares —

The Board of Directors is authorized to issue shares of the capital stock of the Corporation up to the number of shares authorized by the Articles of Incorporation. Shares may be issued for any consideration, including, without limitation, money or other tangible or intangible property received by the Corporation or to be received by the Corporation under a written agreement, or services rendered to the Corporation or to be rendered to the Corporation under a written agreement, as authorized by a resolution approved by the affirmative vote of a majority of the directors present, valuing all nonmonetary consideration and establishing a price in money or other consideration, or a minimum price, or a general

11

formula or method by which the price will be determined. Upon authorization by resolution approved by the affirmative vote of a majority of the directors present, the Corporation may, without any new or additional consideration, issue shares of its authorized and unissued capital stock in exchange for or in conversion of its outstanding shares, or issue its own shares pro rata to its shareholders or the shareholders of one or more classes or series, to effectuate share dividends or splits, including reverse share splits. No shares of a class or series shall be issued to the holders of shares of another class or series, unless issuance is either expressly provided for in the Articles of Incorporation or is approved at a meeting by the affirmative vote of the holders of a majority of the voting power of all shares of the same class or series as the shares to be issued.

7.4) Transfer of Shares —

Transfer of shares on the books of the Corporation may be authorized only by the shareholder named in the certificate or the shareholder’s legal representative or duly authorized attorney-in-fact and only upon surrender for cancellation of the certificate for such shares. The shareholder in whose name shares stand on the books of the Corporation shall be considered the owner thereof for all purposes regarding the Corporation. No transfer of stock is valid or effective unless approved by the City Council of Minneapolis, Minnesota.

7.5) Lost Certificates —

Any shareholder claiming a certificate for shares to be lost or destroyed shall make an affidavit or affirmation of that fact in such form as the Board of Directors may require and shall, if the directors so require, give the Corporation a bond of indemnity in form and with one or more sureties satisfactory to the Board of Directors and in an amount determined by the Board of Directors, to indemnify the Corporation against any claim that may be made against it on account of the alleged loss or destruction of the certificate. A new certificate may then be issued in the same tenor and for the same number of shares as the one alleged to have been destroyed or lost.

7.6) Transfer Agent and Registrar —

The Board of Directors may appoint one or more transfer agents or transfer clerks and one or more registrars and may require all certificates for shares to bear the signature or signatures of any of them.

7.7) Facsimile Signature —

Where any certificate is manually signed by a transfer agent, a transfer clerk, or a registrar appointed by the Board of Directors to perform such duties, a facsimile or engraved signature of the officers and a facsimile corporate seal, if any, may be inscribed on the certificate in lieu of the actual signatures and seal.

12

ARTICLE 8.

FISCAL YEAR

8.1) Fiscal Year —

The fiscal year of the Corporation shall end on June 30 of each year.

ARTICLE 9.

FINANCIAL AND PROPERTY MANAGEMENT

9.1) Checks —

All checks, drafts, other orders for the payment of money, notes, or other evidences of indebtedness issued in the name of the Corporation shall be signed by the President or Treasurer, or any other officer or officers, agent or agents of the Corporation, as may from time to time be determined by resolution of the Board of Directors.

9.2) Deposits —

All funds of the Corporation not otherwise employed shall be deposited from time to time to the credit of the Corporation in such banks, trust companies, or other depositories as the Board of Directors may select.

9.3) Voting Securities Held by Corporation —

The President, or other officer or agent designated by the Board of Directors, shall have full power and authority on behalf of the Corporation to attend, act at, and vote at any meeting of security or interest holders of other corporations or entities in which the Corporation may hold securities or interests. At the meeting, the President or other designated agent shall possess and exercise any and all rights and powers incident to the ownership of the securities or interests which the Corporation holds.

ARTICLE 10.

AMENDMENTS

10.1) Amendments —

The Board of Directors of the Corporation is expressly authorized to make Bylaws of the Corporation and from time to time to adopt, amend, or repeal Bylaws so made to the extent and in the manner prescribed by the Minnesota Statutes. The Board of Directors shall not adopt, amend, or repeal a Bylaw fixing a quorum for meetings of shareholders, prescribing procedures for removing directors or filling vacancies in the Board of Directors, or fixing the number of directors or their classifications, qualifications, or terms of office, but may adopt or amend a Bylaw to increase the number of directors. The authority of the Board of Directors is subject to the power of the voting shareholders to adopt, change, or repeal the Bylaws by a vote of shareholders holding a majority of the shares entitled to vote and present or represented at any regular meeting or special meeting called for that purpose.

13

ARTICLE 11.

REPAYMENT OF DISALLOWED AMOUNTS

11.1) Repayment of Disallowed Amounts —

Any payments made to, or on behalf of, an officer (including a former officer) of the Corporation, e.g., salary, commission, bonus, rent, travel or entertainment expense, which shall be finally disallowed in whole or in part as a deductible expense by the Internal Revenue Service or the tax authority of any state, shall be repaid by such officer to the Corporation to the extent of the amount of such resulting tax, interest, and penalties. For these purposes, the term “final disallowance” shall mean an agreement by the Corporation with the Internal Revenue Service or state tax authority to such disallowance, a determination by the Internal Revenue Service or other such tax authority with respect to which the time to protest or appeal has lapsed, or the final decision of a court establishing such disallowance. A decision of a court shall be deemed final when the period during which an appeal from a decision of the court can be made has lapsed. Such officer may elect to repay the Corporation either in a lump sum, or in installments. If the officer elects to repay the Corporation in a lump sum, the payment of the disallowed amount shall be due within ninety (90) days of the date on which the Corporation notifies the officer of such disallowance. If the officer elects to repay the Corporation in installments, the disallowed amount shall be repaid in no more than twelve (12) equal monthly installments, together with interest at a rate which is the lessor of (a) one percent (1%) in excess of the so-called base rate or prime rate in effect at the Corporation’s principal bank on the date on which the Corporation notifies the officer that an obligation for payment has arisen under this Article 11, or (b) the maximum rate allowed by law. Such monthly installments shall commence on the fifteenth (15th) day of the first calendar month following the calendar month during which the Corporation notifies the officer that such obligation of payment has arisen.

The undersigned, Glenn Johannesen, President of AIIM Restaurant, Inc., hereby certifies that the foregoing Bylaws were adopted as the complete Bylaws of the Corporation by action of the Board of Directors, on the      day of June, 2000.

Glenn Johannesen, President

14

CONTENTS OF BYLAWS

OF

AIIM RESTAURANT, INC.

ARTICLE 1. OFFICES	1
1.1) Registered Office	1
1.2) Offices	1
ARTICLE 2. CORPORATE SEAL	1
2.1) Corporate Seal	1
ARTICLE 3. SHAREHOLDERS	1
3.1) Regular Meetings	1
3.2) Special Meetings	2
3.3) Meeting By Electronic Communications	2
3.4) Quorum	2
3.5) Voting	3
3.6) Notice of Meeting	3
3.7) Proxies	3
3.8) Closing Transfer Books	3
3.9) Record Date	3
3.10) Presiding Officer	4
3.11) Order of Business	4
3.12) Written Action by Shareholders	4
ARTICLE 4. DIRECTORS	5
4.1) General Powers	5
4.2) Shareholder Management	5
4.3) Number	5
4.4) Qualifications and Term of Office	5

4.5) Quorum	5
4.6) Action of Directors	6
4.7) Meetings	6
4.8) Meeting By Electronic Communications	6
4.9) Compensation	6
4.10) Committees	6
4.11) Action by Absent Director	7
4.12) Removal of Directors by Shareholders	7
4.13) Removal of Directors by Board of Directors	7
4.14) Vacancies	7
4.15) Order of Business	7
4.16) Written Action by Directors	8
4.17) Dissent From Action	8
ARTICLE 5. OFFICERS	8
5.1) Election of Officers	8
5.2) Term of Office	8
5.3) President (Chief Executive Officer)	9
5.4) Treasurer (Chief Financial Officer)	9
5.5) Vice President	10
5.6) Secretary	10
5.7) Chairman of the Board	10
5.8) Assistant Officers	10
ARTICLE 6. INDEMNIFICATION	11
6.1) Indemnification	11

ARTICLE 7. SHARES AND THEIR TRANSFER	11
7.1) Certificates of Shares	11
7.2) Uncertificated Shares	11
7.3) Issuance of Shares	11
7.4) Transfer of Shares	12
7.5) Lost Certificates	12
7.6) Transfer Agent and Registrar	12
7.7) Facsimile Signature	12
ARTICLE 8. FISCAL YEAR	13
8.1) Fiscal Year	13
ARTICLE 9. FINANCIAL AND PROPERTY MANAGEMENT	13
9.1) Checks	13
9.2) Deposits	13
9.3) Voting Securities Held by Corporation	13
ARTICLE 10. AMENDMENTS	13
10.1) Amendments	13
ARTICLE 11. REPAYMENT OF DISALLOWED AMOUNTS	14
11.1) Repayment of Disallowed Amounts	14

EX-3.11

Exhibit 3.11

STATE OF MINNESOTA

SECRETARY OF STATE

ARTICLES OF INCORPORATION

BUSINESS AND NONPROFIT CORPORATIONS

The undersigned incorporator(s) is an (are) individual(s) 18 years of age or older and adopt the following articles of incorporation to form a (mark ONLY one):

x FOR PROFIT BUSINESS CORPORATION (Chapter 302A)

¨ NONPROFIT CORPORATION (Chapter 317A)

ARTICLE 1 NAME

The name of the corporation is:

Argosy Community Center, Inc.

ARTICLE II REGISTERD OFFICE ADDRESS AND AGENT

The registered office address of the corporation is:

33 South Sixth Street

Multifoods Tower

Minneapolis, MN 55402

The registered agent at the above address:

Corporation Service Company

ARTICLE III SHARES

The corporation is authorized to issue a total of 1,000 shares.

ARTICLE IV INCORPORATORS

I (We) the undersigned incorporator(s) certify that I am (we are) authorized to sign these articles and that the information in these articles is true and correct. I (We) also understand that if any of this information is intentionally or knowingly misstated that criminal penalties will apply as if I (we) has signed these articles under oath. (Provide the name and address of each incorporator. Each incorporator must sign below. List incorporators on an additional sheet if you have more than two incorporators.)

Kathleen Clover

210 Sixth Ave., 33^rd Floor

Pittsburgh, PA 15222

/s/ Kathleen Clover

Signature

Print name and phone number of person to be contacted if there is a question about the filing of these articles.

Sue Minahan

412-562-0900

AMENDMENT OF ARTICLES OF INCORPORATION

CORPORATE NAME: (List the name of the company prior to any desired name change)

Argosy Community Center, Inc.

The following amendment(s) to articles regulating the above corporation were adopted: (Insert full text of newly amended article(s) indicating which article(s) is (are) being amended or added.) If the full text of the amendment will not fit in the space provided, attach additional numbered pages. (Total number of pages including this form                 .)

ARTICLE I

The name of the corporation is Argosy University Family Center, Inc.

This amendment has been approved pursuant to Minnesota Statues chapter 302A or 317A. I certify that I am authorized to execute this amendment and I further certify that I understand that by signing this amendment, I am subject to the penalties of perjury as set forth in section 609.A8 as if I had signed this amendment under oath.

/s/ Sue Minahan

(Signature of Authorized Person)

Name and address of contact person:

Sue Minahan, Asst. Secretary

(412) 562-0900

EX-3.12

Exhibit 3.12

BYLAWS

OF

ARGOSY UNIVERSITY FAMILY CENTER, INC.

ARTICLE 1.

OFFICES

1.1) Registered Office —

The registered office of the Corporation shall be located within the State of Minnesota, as set forth in the Articles of Incorporation. The Board of Directors shall have authority to change the registered office of the Corporation and a statement evidencing any such change shall be filed with the Secretary of State of Minnesota as required by law.

1.2) Offices —

The Corporation may have other offices, including its principal business office, either within or without the State of Minnesota.

ARTICLE 2.

CORPORATE SEAL

2.1) Corporate Seal —

The Board of Directors shall determine whether or not the Corporation will adopt a corporate seal. If a corporate seal is adopted, inscribed on the corporate seal shall be the name of the Corporation and the words “Corporate Seal,” and when so directed by the Board of Directors, a duplicate of the seal may be kept and used by the Secretary of the Corporation.

ARTICLE 3.

SHAREHOLDERS

3.1) Regular Meetings —

Regular meetings of the shareholders shall be held at the Corporation’s principal office or such other place within or without the State of Minnesota as is designated by the Board of Directors. Regular meetings may be held annually or on a less frequent periodic basis, as established by a resolution of the Board of Directors, or may be held on call by the Board of Directors from time to time as and when the Board determines. At each regular meeting, the shareholders shall elect qualified successors for directors who serve for an indefinite term or whose terms have expired or are due to expire within six (6) months after

the date of the meeting, and may transact such other business which properly comes before them. The foregoing notwithstanding, in the event a regular meeting of the shareholders has not been held for a period of fifteen (15) months, a shareholder or group of shareholders holding three percent (3%) or more of the issued and outstanding voting shares may demand that a regular meeting of the shareholders be held by giving written notice to the President or Treasurer of the Corporation. Within thirty (30) days after receipt of the notice, the Board shall cause a regular meeting of the shareholders to be called and held within ninety (90) days of receipt of the notice. Any regular meeting held pursuant to such a request by a shareholder or shareholders shall be held within the county where the principal executive office of the Corporation is located.

3.2) Special Meetings —

Special meetings of the shareholders shall be called by the President or Treasurer, or such other officer as may be designated by the Board of Directors, upon request of two members of the Board of Directors, or upon a written request of shareholders holding ten percent (10%) or more of the shares entitled to vote. The request must specify the purpose of the meeting. Within thirty (30) days after receipt of the request, the Board of Directors must call a special meeting of the shareholders to be held within ninety (90) days of receipt of the request. Any special meeting held pursuant to such a request by a shareholder or shareholders shall be held within the county where the principal executive office of the Corporation is located.

3.3) Meeting By Electronic Communications—

A conference among shareholders by any means of communication through which the shareholders may simultaneously hear each other during the conference constitutes a regular or special meeting of shareholders if the number of shares held by the shareholders participating in the conference would be sufficient to constitute a quorum at a meeting, and if the same notice is given of the conference to every holder of shares entitled to vote as would be required for a shareholders meeting under these Bylaws. In any shareholders’ meeting, a shareholder may participate by any means of communication through which the shareholder, other shareholders so participating, and all shareholders physically present at the meeting may simultaneously hear each other during the meeting.

3.4) Quorum —

Business may be transacted at any duly held meeting of shareholders at which a quorum is present. The holders of a majority of the voting power of the shares entitled to vote at a meeting are a quorum. The shareholders present at the meeting may continue to transact business until adjournment, even though a number of shareholders withdraw leaving less than a quorum. If a quorum is not present at any meeting, those present have the power to adjourn the meeting from time to time until the requisite number of voting shares are present. The date, time, and place of the reconvened meeting shall be announced at the time of adjournment, and notice of the reconvened meeting shall be given to all shareholders who were not present at the time of adjournment. Any business which might have been transacted at the meeting which was adjourned may be transacted at the reconvened meeting.

2

3.5) Voting —

At each shareholders’ meeting, every shareholder having the right to vote is entitled to vote in person or by proxy. Shareholders have one (1) vote for each share having voting power standing in their name on the books of the Corporation, unless otherwise provided in the Articles of Incorporation of the Corporation, or these Bylaws, or in the terms of the shares. Upon the demand of any shareholder, the vote for directors or the vote upon any question before the meeting shall be by ballot. All elections and questions shall be decided by a majority vote of the number of shares entitled to vote and represented at any meeting at which there is a quorum, except as otherwise required by statute, the Articles of Incorporation, these Bylaws, or by agreement among the shareholders.

3.6) Notice of Meeting —

Notice of regular or special meetings of the shareholders shall be given by an officer or agent of the Corporation to each shareholder shown on the books of the Corporation to be the holder of record of shares entitled to vote at the meeting. If the notice is to be mailed, then the notice must be mailed to each shareholder at the shareholder’s address as shown on the books of the Corporation at least five (5) calendar days prior to the meeting. If the notice is not mailed, then the notice must be given at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to the meeting. The notice must contain the date, time, and place of the meeting, and in the case of a special meeting, must also contain a statement of the purpose of the meeting. In no event shall notice be given more than sixty (60) days prior to the meeting.

3.7) Proxies —

At all meetings of shareholders, a shareholder may vote by proxy executed in writing by the shareholder or by his duly authorized attorney-in-fact. Such proxies must be filed with an officer of the Corporation before or at the time of the meeting. No proxy shall be valid after eleven (11) months from the date of its execution, unless otherwise provided in the proxy.

3.8) Closing Transfer Books —

The Board of Directors may close the stock transfer books for a period of time which does not exceed sixty (60) days preceding any of the following: the date of any meeting of shareholders; the payment of dividends; the allotment of rights; or the change, conversion, or exchange of shares.

3.9) Record Date —

In lieu of closing the stock transfer books, the Board of Directors may fix in advance a date, not exceeding sixty (60) days preceding the date of any of the events described in Section 3.8, as a record date for the determination of shareholders entitled to notice of and to vote at any meeting and any meeting subsequent to adjournment; to receive any dividend or allotment of rights; or to exercise the rights in respect to any change, conversion, or exchange of shares. In such case, only those shareholders of record on the record date so fixed shall be entitled to receive notice of and to vote at the meeting and any meeting subsequent to

3

adjournment thereof, to receive a dividend or allotment of rights, to exercise such rights, as the case may be, notwithstanding any transfer of any shares on the books of the Corporation after any record date so fixed. If the share transfer books are not closed and no record date is fixed for determination of the shareholders of record, then the date on which notice of the meeting is mailed or the date of adoption of a resolution of the Board of Directors declaring a dividend, allotment of rights, change, conversion, or exchange of shares, as the case may be, shall be the record date of such determination.

3.10) Presiding Officer —

The President of the Corporation shall preside over all meetings of the shareholders. In the absence of the President, the shareholders may choose any person present to act as a presiding officer.

3.11) Order of Business —

The suggested order of business at the regular meeting, and so far as possible at all other meetings of the shareholders, shall be:

1. Roll call.

2. Proof of due notice of meeting, unanimous attendance, or waiver of notice.

3. Reading and disposal of any unapproved minutes.

4. Annual reports of all officers and committees.

5. Election of directors.

6. Unfinished business.

7. New business.

8. Adjournment.

3.12) Written Action by Shareholders —

Any action which may be taken at a meeting of the shareholders may be taken without a meeting and notice if a consent in writing, setting forth the action so taken, is signed by all of the shareholders entitled to notice of a meeting for such purpose.

4

ARTICLE 4.

DIRECTORS

4.1) General Powers —

The property, affairs, and business of the Corporation shall be managed by the Board of Directors.

4.2) Shareholder Management —

The holders of shares entitled to vote for directors may, by unanimous affirmative vote, take any action which the Board of Directors is otherwise empowered to take, in accordance with the provisions of Section 302A.201 of the Minnesota Statutes and laws amendatory thereof or supplementary thereto.

4.3) Number —

The number of directors shall be fixed by resolution of the shareholders at their regular meetings or special meetings called for that purpose; provided, however, that the number may be increased by resolution of the Board of Directors. Any newly created directorships resulting from an action by the Board of Directors shall be filled by a majority vote of the directors serving at the time of increase.

4.4) Qualifications and Term of Office —

Directors need not be shareholders or residents of the State of Minnesota. The Board of Directors shall be elected by the shareholders at their regular meeting and at any special shareholders’ meeting called for that purpose. A director elected for an indefinite term shall serve until the next regular meeting of the shareholders and until the director’s successor is elected and qualifies, or until the earlier death, resignation, removal, or disqualification of the director. A director elected for a fixed term of office, which shall not exceed five (5) years, shall hold office until the director’s successor is elected and qualifies, or until the earlier death, resignation, removal, or disqualification of the director.

4.5) Quorum —

A majority of the Board of Directors constitutes a quorum for the transaction of business; provided, however, that if any vacancies exist by reason of death, resignation, or otherwise, a majority of the remaining directors constitutes a quorum. If less than a quorum is present at any meeting, a majority of the directors present may adjourn the meeting from time to time without further notice.

5

4.6) Action of Directors —

The acts of a majority of the directors present at a meeting at which a quorum is present are the acts of the Board of Directors.

4.7) Meetings —

Meetings of the Board of Directors may be held from time to time at any place, within or without the State of Minnesota, that the Board of Directors may select. If the Board of Directors fails to select a place for a meeting, the meeting shall be held at the principal executive office of the Corporation. The President or any director may call a meeting of the Board of Directors by giving notice to all directors of the date, time, and place of the meeting. If the notice is to be mailed, then the notice must be mailed to each director at least five (5) calendar days prior to the meeting. If the notice is not mailed, then the notice must be given at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to the meeting. If the date, time, and place of the meeting of the Board of Directors have been announced at a previous meeting of the Board of Directors, no additional notice of such meeting is required, except that notice shall be given to all directors who were not present at the previous meeting. Notice of the meeting of the Board of Directors need not state the purposes of the meeting. A director may orally or in writing waive notice of the meeting. Attendance by a director at a meeting of the Board of Directors is also a waiver of notice of such meeting, except where the director objects at the beginning of the meeting to the transaction of business because the meeting allegedly is not lawfully called or convened and does not participate thereafter in the meeting.

4.8) Meeting By Electronic Communications —

A conference among directors by any means of communication through which the directors may simultaneously hear each other during the conference constitutes a meeting of the Board of Directors if the number of directors participating in the conference would be sufficient to constitute a quorum at a meeting, and if the same notice is given of the conference as would be required for a Board of Directors’ meeting under these Bylaws. In any Board of Directors’ meeting, a director may participate by any means of communication through which the director, other directors so participating, and all directors physically present at the meeting may simultaneously hear each other during the meeting.

4.9) Compensation —

Directors may receive such compensation as may be determined from time to time by resolution of the Board of Directors.

4.10) Committees —

By the affirmative vote of a majority of the directors, the Board of Directors may establish a committee or committees having the authority of the Board of Directors in the management of the business of the Corporation to the extent provided in the resolution adopted by the Board of Directors. A committee shall consist of one or more persons, who need not be directors, appointed by affirmative vote of a majority of the directors present. A majority of the members of the committee present at any meeting of the committee is a

6

quorum for the transaction of business, unless a larger or smaller proportion or number is provided in the resolution approved by the Board of Directors. Minutes of any committees created by the Board of Directors shall be available upon request to members of the committee and to any director.

4.11) Action by Absent Director —

A director may give advance written consent or opposition to a proposal to be acted upon at a Board of Directors’ meeting by giving a written statement to the President, Treasurer, or any director setting forth a statement of the proposal to be voted on and containing a statement of the director’s voting preference with regard to the proposal. An advance written statement does not constitute presence of the director for purposes of determining a quorum, but the advance written statement shall be counted in the vote on the subject proposal provided that the proposal acted on at the meeting is substantially the same or has substantially the same effect as the proposal set forth in the advance written statement. The advance written statement by a director on a proposal shall be included in the records of the Board of Directors’ action on the proposal.

4.12) Removal of Directors by Shareholders —

At any duly called meeting of the shareholders, the affirmative vote of a number of shares sufficient to elect a director may remove any or all of the directors, with or without cause, and may elect replacements.

4.13) Removal of Directors by Board of Directors —

Any director who has been elected by the Board of Directors to fill a vacancy on the Board of Directors, or to fill a directorship created by action of the Board of Directors, and who has not subsequently been re-elected by the shareholders, may be removed by a majority vote of all directors constituting the Board, exclusive of the director whose removal is proposed.

4.14) Vacancies —

Any vacancy on the Board of Directors may be filled by vote of the remaining directors, even though less than a quorum.

4.15) Order of Business —

The suggested order of business at any meeting of the directors shall be:

1. Roll call.

2. Proof of due notice of meeting, unanimous attendance, or waiver of notice.

3. Reading and disposal of any unapproved minutes.

4. Reports of officers and committees.

5. Election of officers.

6. Unfinished business.

7. New business.

8. Adjournment.

7

4.16) Written Action by Directors —

Any action which may be taken at a meeting of the Board of Directors may be taken without a meeting and notice thereof if a consent in writing setting forth the action taken is signed by all of the directors; provided, however, that if the action does not require approval by the shareholders, the action may be taken by a consent signed by the number of directors required to take the action at a duly held meeting of the Board of Directors at which all of the directors are present. In the event a written action is signed by less than all the directors, any director not signing the action will be notified as soon as reasonably possible of the content of the action and the effective date of the action. Failure to provide the notice does not invalidate the written action. A director who does not sign or consent to the written action has no liability for the action or actions so taken.

4.17) Dissent From Action —

A director of the Corporation who is present at a meeting of the Board of Directors at which any action is taken shall be presumed to have assented to the action taken unless the director objects at the beginning of the meeting to the transaction of business because the meeting is not lawfully called or convened and does not participate thereafter, or unless the director votes against the action at the meeting, or is prohibited from voting on the action.

ARTICLE 5.

OFFICERS

5.1) Election of Officers —

The Board of Directors shall, from time to time, elect a President, who may also be designated as Chief Executive Officer, and a Treasurer, who may also be designated as Chief Financial Officer. The Board of Directors may elect, but shall not be required to elect, a Secretary, one or more Vice Presidents, and a Chairman of the Board. In addition, the Board of Directors may elect such other officers and agents as it may deem necessary. The officers shall exercise such powers and perform such duties as are prescribed by applicable statutes, the Articles of Incorporation, the Bylaws, or as may be determined from time to time by the Board of Directors. Any number of offices may be held by the same person.

5.2) Term of Office —

The officers shall hold office until their successors are elected and qualify; provided, however, that any officer may be removed with or without cause by the affirmative vote of a majority of the directors present at a Board of Directors’ meeting.

8

5.3) President (Chief Executive Officer) —

The President shall:

(a) Have general active management of the business of the Corporation;

(b) When present, preside at all meetings of the shareholders;

(c) When present, and if there is no Chairman of the Board, preside at all meetings of the Board of Directors;

(d) See that all orders and resolutions of the Board of Directors are carried into effect;

(e) Sign and deliver in the name of the Corporation any deeds, mortgages, bonds, contracts or other instruments pertaining to the business of the Corporation, except in cases in which the authority to sign and deliver is required by law to be exercised by another person or is expressly delegated by the Articles of Incorporation or Bylaws or by the Board of Directors to some other officer or agent of the Corporation;

(f) Maintain records of and, whenever necessary, certify all proceedings of the Board of Directors and the shareholders; and

(g) Perform other duties prescribed by the Board of Directors.

All other officers shall be subject to the direction and authority of the President.

5.4) Treasurer (Chief Financial Officer) —

The Treasurer shall:

(a) Review the Corporation’s financial performance and serve as financial advisor to the Board of Directors and the President on the financial management of the Corporation;

(b) Be responsible for recommendations and establishment of policies, to be approved by the President or the Board of Directors, for management of the Corporation’s revenues and expenses;

(c) Be responsible for implementation of financial procedures adopted by the President or the Board of Directors;

(d) Cause the following things to be done:

(1) Keep accurate financial records for the Corporation;

(2) Deposit all money, drafts, and checks in the name of and to the credit of the Corporation in the banks and depositories designated by the Board of Directors;

(3) Endorse for deposit all notes, checks, and drafts received by the Corporation as ordered by the Board of Directors, making proper vouchers therefor; and

9

(4) Disburse corporate funds and issue checks and drafts in the name of the Corporation, as ordered by the Board of Directors.

(e) Render to the President and the Board of Directors, whenever requested, an account of all transactions by the Treasurer and of the financial condition of the Corporation; and

(f) Perform other duties prescribed by the Board of Directors or by the President.

5.5) Vice President —

Each Vice President, if any, has such powers and shall perform such duties as may be specified in these Bylaws or prescribed by the Board of Directors. In the event of absence or disability of the President, the Vice President shall succeed to the President’s powers and duties. If there are two or more Vice Presidents, the order of succession shall be determined through seniority by the order in which elected or as otherwise prescribed by the Board of Directors.

5.6) Secretary —

The Secretary, if any, shall attend all meetings of the shareholders and the Board of Directors. The Secretary shall act as clerk and shall record all the proceedings of the meetings in the minute book of the Corporation and shall give proper notice of meetings of shareholders and the Board of Directors. The Secretary shall keep the seal of the Corporation, if any, and shall affix the seal to any instrument requiring it and shall attest the seal, and shall perform such other duties as may be prescribed from time to time by the Board of Directors.

5.7) Chairman of the Board —

The Chairman of the Board, if any, shall:

(a) When present, preside at all meetings of the Board of Directors; and

(b) Perform other duties prescribed by the Board of Directors.

5.8) Assistant Officers —

In the event of absence or disability of any Vice President, Secretary, or Treasurer, the assistant to such officer, if any, shall succeed to the powers and duties of the absent officer until the principal officer resumes his duties or a replacement is elected by the Board of Directors. If there are two or more assistants, the order of succession shall be determined through seniority by the order in which elected or as otherwise prescribed by the Board of Directors. The assistant officers shall exercise such other powers and duties as may be delegated to them from time to time by the Board of Directors or the principal officer under whom they serve, but at all times remain subordinate to the principal officers they are designated to assist.

10

ARTICLE 6.

INDEMNIFICATION

6.1) Indemnification —

Directors, officers, committee members, and other persons shall have the rights to indemnification provided by Section 302A.521 of the Minnesota Statutes and law amendatory thereof and supplementary thereto.

ARTICLE 7.

SHARES AND THEIR TRANSFER

7.1) Certificates of Shares —

Unless the Board of Directors has provided that the Corporation’s shares are to be uncertificated, every owner of shares of the Corporation shall be entitled to a certificate, to be in such form as the Board of Directors prescribes, certifying the number of shares owned by such owner. The certificates for shares shall be numbered in the order in which they are issued and shall be signed in the name of the Corporation by the President or a Vice President and by the Secretary or Assistant Secretary, or the Treasurer, or any other officer of the Corporation authorized by the Board of Directors and shall have the corporate seal, if any, affixed thereto. A record shall be kept of the name of the person owning the shares represented by each certificate, the number of shares represented by each certificate, the respective issue dates thereof, and in the case of cancellation, the respective dates of cancellation. Except as provided in Section 7.5 of this Article 7, every certificate surrendered to the Corporation for exchange or transfer shall be canceled, and no other certificate shall be issued in exchange for any existing certificate until such existing certificate is canceled.

7.2) Uncertificated Shares —

The Board of Directors, by a majority vote of directors present at a duly called meeting, may provide that any or all shares or classes or series of shares are to be uncertificated shares. In that case, any shareholder who is issued uncertificated shares shall be provided with the information legally required to be disclosed in a certificate.

7.3) Issuance of Shares —

The Board of Directors is authorized to issue shares of the capital stock of the Corporation up to the number of shares authorized by the Articles of Incorporation. Shares may be issued for any consideration, including, without limitation, money or other tangible or intangible property received by the Corporation or to be received by the Corporation under a written agreement, or services rendered to the Corporation or to be rendered to the Corporation under a written agreement, as authorized by a resolution approved by the affirmative vote of a majority of the directors present, valuing all nonmonetary consideration and establishing a price in money or other consideration, or a minimum price, or a general

11

formula or method by which the price will be determined. Upon authorization by resolution approved by the affirmative vote of a majority of the directors present, the Corporation may, without any new or additional consideration, issue shares of its authorized and unissued capital stock in exchange for or in conversion of its outstanding shares, or issue its own shares pro rata to its shareholders or the shareholders of one or more classes or series, to effectuate share dividends or splits, including reverse share splits. No shares of a class or series shall be issued to the holders of shares of another class or series, unless issuance is either expressly provided for in the Articles of Incorporation or is approved at a meeting by the affirmative vote of the holders of a majority of the voting power of all shares of the same class or series as the shares to be issued.

7.4) Transfer of Shares —

Transfer of shares on the books of the Corporation may be authorized only by the shareholder named in the certificate or the shareholder’s legal representative or duly authorized attorney-in-fact and only upon surrender for cancellation of the certificate for such shares. The shareholder in whose name shares stand on the books of the Corporation shall be considered the owner thereof for all purposes regarding the Corporation. No transfer of stock is valid or effective unless approved by the City Council of Minneapolis, Minnesota.

7.5) Lost Certificates —

Any shareholder claiming a certificate for shares to be lost or destroyed shall make an affidavit or affirmation of that fact in such form as the Board of Directors may require and shall, if the directors so require, give the Corporation a bond of indemnity in form and with one or more sureties satisfactory to the Board of Directors and in an amount determined by the Board of Directors, to indemnify the Corporation against any claim that may be made against it on account of the alleged loss or destruction of the certificate. A new certificate may then be issued in the same tenor and for the same number of shares as the one alleged to have been destroyed or lost.

7.6) Transfer Agent and Registrar —

The Board of Directors may appoint one or more transfer agents or transfer clerks and one or more registrars and may require all certificates for shares to bear the signature or signatures of any of them.

7.7) Facsimile Signature —

Where any certificate is manually signed by a transfer agent, a transfer clerk, or a registrar appointed by the Board of Directors to perform such duties, a facsimile or engraved signature of the officers and a facsimile corporate seal, if any, may be inscribed on the certificate in lieu of the actual signatures and seal.

12

ARTICLE 8.

FISCAL YEAR

8.1) Fiscal Year —

The fiscal year of the Corporation shall end on June 30 of each year.

ARTICLE 9.

FINANCIAL AND PROPERTY MANAGEMENT

9.1) Checks —

All checks, drafts, other orders for the payment of money, notes, or other evidences of indebtedness issued in the name of the Corporation shall be signed by the President or Treasurer, or any other officer or officers, agent or agents of the Corporation, as may from time to time be determined by resolution of the Board of Directors.

9.2) Deposits —

All funds of the Corporation not otherwise employed shall be deposited from time to time to the credit of the Corporation in such banks, trust companies, or other depositories as the Board of Directors may select.

9.3) Voting Securities Held by Corporation —

The President, or other officer or agent designated by the Board of Directors, shall have full power and authority on behalf of the Corporation to attend, act at, and vote at any meeting of security or interest holders of other corporations or entities in which the Corporation may hold securities or interests. At the meeting, the President or other designated agent shall possess and exercise any and all rights and powers incident to the ownership of the securities or interests which the Corporation holds.

13

ARTICLE 10.

AMENDMENTS

10.1) Amendments —

The Board of Directors of the Corporation is expressly authorized to make Bylaws of the Corporation and from time to time to adopt, amend, or repeal Bylaws so made to the extent and in the manner prescribed by the Minnesota Statutes. The Board of Directors shall not adopt, amend, or repeal a Bylaw fixing a quorum for meetings of shareholders, prescribing procedures for removing directors or filling vacancies in the Board of Directors, or fixing the number of directors or their classifications, qualifications, or terms of office, but may adopt or amend a Bylaw to increase the number of directors. The authority of the Board of Directors is subject to the power of the voting shareholders to adopt, change, or repeal the Bylaws by a vote of shareholders holding a majority of the shares entitled to vote and present or represented at any regular meeting or special meeting called for that purpose.

ARTICLE 11.

REPAYMENT OF DISALLOWED AMOUNTS

11.1) Repayment of Disallowed Amounts —

Any payments made to, or on behalf of, an officer (including a former officer) of the Corporation, e.g., salary, commission, bonus, rent, travel or entertainment expense, which shall be finally disallowed in whole or in part as a deductible expense by the Internal Revenue Service or the tax authority of any state, shall be repaid by such officer to the Corporation to the extent of the amount of such resulting tax, interest, and penalties. For these purposes, the term “final disallowance” shall mean an agreement by the Corporation with the Internal Revenue Service or state tax authority to such disallowance, a determination by the Internal Revenue Service or other such tax authority with respect to which the time to protest or appeal has lapsed, or the final decision of a court establishing such disallowance. A decision of a court shall be deemed final when the period during which an appeal from a decision of the court can be made has lapsed. Such officer may elect to repay the Corporation either in a lump sum, or in installments. If the officer elects to repay the Corporation in a lump sum, the payment of the disallowed amount shall be due within ninety (90) days of the date on which the Corporation notifies the officer of such disallowance. If the officer elects to repay the Corporation in installments, the disallowed amount shall be repaid in no more than twelve (12) equal monthly installments, together with interest at a rate which is the lessor of (a) one percent (1%) in excess of the so-called base rate or prime rate in effect at the Corporation’s principal bank on the date on which the Corporation notifies the officer that an obligation for payment has arisen under this Article 11, or (b) the maximum rate allowed by law. Such monthly installments shall commence on the fifteenth (15th) day of the first calendar month following the calendar month during which the Corporation notifies the officer that such obligation of payment has arisen.

The undersigned, William Cowan, President of Argosy Community Center, Inc., hereby certifies that the foregoing Bylaws were adopted as the complete Bylaws of the Corporation by action of the Board of Directors, on the 9th day of May, 2003.

William Cowan, President

14

EX-3.13

Exhibit 3.13

Delaware	PAGE 1
The First State

I, HARRIET SMITH WINDSOR, SECRETARY OF STATE OF THE STATE OF DELAWARE, DO HEREBY CERTIFY THE ATTACHED IS A TRUE AND CORRECT COPY OF THE CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION OF “BROWN MACKIE HOLDING COMPANY”, FILED IN THIS OFFICE ON THE THIRTIETH DAY OF JUNE, A.D. 2005, AT 10:41 O’CLOCK A.M.

A FILED COPY OF THIS CERTIFICATE HAS BEEN FORWARDED TO THE NEW CASTLE COUNTY RECORDER OF DEEDS.

	Harriet Smith Windsor, Secretary of State
3993686 8100 050545619	AUTHENTICATION: 3994128 DATE: 07-01-05

STATE of DELAWARE

CERTIFICATE of INCORPORATION

A STOCK CORPORATION

• First: The name of this Corporation is Brown Mackie Holding Company .

• Second: Its registered office in the State of Delaware is to be located at 2711 Centerville Road, Suite 400 Street, in the City of Wilmington County of New Castle Zip Code 19808 . The registered agent in charge thereof is Corporation Service Company .

Third: The purpose of the corporation is to engage in any lawful act or activity for which corporations may be organized under the General Corporation Law of Delaware.

• Fourth: The amount of the total stock of this corporation is authorized to issue is 1,000 shares (number of authorized shares) with a par value of $1.00 per share.

• Fifth: The name and mailing address of the incorporator are as follows:

Name Sue Minahan

Mailing Address EDMC, 210 Sixth Ave. 33rd Fl., Pittsburgh, PA 15222 

                                                                          Zip Code                     

• I, The Undersigned, for the purpose of forming a corporation under the laws of the State of Delaware, do make, file and record this Certificate, and do certify that the facts herein stated arc true, and I have accordingly hereunto set my hand this 29^th day of June , A.D. 20 05 .

BY:
	(Incorporator)
NAME:	Sue Minahan
	(type or print)

State of Delaware

Secretary of State

Division of Corporations

Delivered 10:55 AM 06/30/2005

FILED 10:41 AM 06/30/2005

RV 050545619 - 3993686 FILE

EX-3.14

Exhibit 3.14

BYLAWS

OF

BROWN MACKIE HOLDING COMPANY

(a Delaware corporation)

ARTICLE I

STOCKHOLDERS

1. CERTIFICATES REPRESENTING STOCK. Certificates representing stock in the corporation shall be signed by, or in the name of, the corporation by the Chairperson or Vice-Chairperson of the Board of Directors, if any, or by the President or a Vice-President and by the Treasurer or an Assistant Treasurer or the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary of the corporation. Any or all the signatures on any such certificate may be a facsimile. In case any officer, transfer agent, or registrar who has signed or whose facsimile signature has been placed upon a certificate shall have ceased to be such officer, transfer agent, or registrar before such certificate is issued, it may be issued by the corporation with the same effect as if such person were such officer, transfer agent, or registrar at the date of issue.

Whenever the corporation shall be authorized to issue more than one class of stock or more than one series of any class of stock, and whenever the corporation shall issue any shares of its stock as partly paid stock, the certificates representing shares of any such class or series or of any such partly paid stock shall set forth thereon the statements prescribed by the General Corporation Law. Any restrictions on the transfer or registration of transfer of any shares of stock of any class or series shall be noted conspicuously on the certificate representing such shares.

The corporation may issue a new certificate of stock or uncertificated shares in place of any certificate theretofore issued by it, alleged to have been lost, stolen, or destroyed, and the Board of Directors may require the owner of the lost, stolen, or destroyed certificate, or such owner’s legal representative, to give the corporation a bond sufficient to indemnify the corporation against any claim that may be made against it on account of the alleged loss, theft, or destruction of any such certificate or the issuance of any such new certificate or uncertificated shares.

2. UNCERTIFICATED SHARES. Subject to any conditions imposed by the General Corporation Law, the Board of Directors of the corporation may provide by resolution or resolutions that some or all of any or all classes or series of the stock of the corporation shall be uncertificated shares. Within a reasonable time after the issuance or transfer of any uncertificated shares, the corporation shall send to the registered owner thereof any written notice prescribed by the General Corporation Law.

- 1 -

3. FRACTIONAL SHARE INTERESTS. The corporation may, but shall not be required to, issue fractions of a share. If the corporation does not issue fractions of a share, it shall (1) arrange for the disposition of fractional interests by those entitled thereto, (2) pay in cash the fair value of fractions of a share as of the time when those entitled to receive such fractions are determined, or (3) issue scrip or warrants in registered form (either represented by a certificate or uncertificated) or bearer form (represented by a certificate) which shall entitle the holder to receive a full share upon the surrender of such scrip or warrants aggregating a full share. A certificate for a fractional share or an uncertificated fractional share shall, but scrip or warrants shall not unless otherwise provided therein, entitle the holder to exercise voting rights, to receive dividends thereon, and to participate in any of the assets of the corporation in the event of liquidation. The Board of Directors may cause scrip or warrants to be issued subject to the conditions that they shall become void if not exchanged for certificates representing the full shares or uncertificated full shares before a specified date, or subject to the conditions that the shares for which scrip or warrants are exchangeable may be sold by the corporation and the proceeds thereof distributed to the holders of scrip or warrants, or subject to any other conditions which the Board of Directors may impose.

4. STOCK TRANSFERS. Upon compliance with provisions restricting the transfer or registration of transfer of shares of stock, if any, transfers or registration of transfers of shares of stock of the corporation shall be made only on the stock ledger of the corporation by the registered holder thereof, or by the registered holder’s attorney thereunto authorized by power of attorney duly executed and filed with the Secretary of the corporation or with a transfer agent or a registrar, if any, and, in the case of shares represented by certificates, on surrender of the certificate or certificates for such shares of stock properly endorsed and the payment of all taxes due thereon.

5. RECORD DATE FOR STOCKHOLDERS. In order that the corporation may determine the stockholders entitled to notice of or to vote at any meeting of stockholders or any adjournment thereof, the Board of Directors may fix a record date, which record date shall not precede the date upon which the resolution fixing the record date is adopted by the Board of Directors, and which record date shall not be more than sixty nor less than ten days before the date of such meeting. If no record date is fixed by the Board of Directors, the record date for determining stockholders entitled to notice of or to vote at a meeting of stockholders shall be at the close of business on the day next preceding the day on which notice is given, or, if notice is waived, at the close of business on the day next preceding the day on which the meeting is held. A determination of stockholders of record entitled to notice of or to vote at a meeting of stockholders shall apply to any adjournment of the meeting; provided, however, that the Board of Directors may fix a new record date for the adjourned meeting. In order that the corporation may determine the stockholders entitled to consent to corporate action in writing without a meeting, the Board of Directors may fix a record date, which record date shall not precede the date upon which the resolution fixing the record date is adopted by the Board of Directors, and which date shall not be more than ten days after the date upon which the resolution fixing the record date is adopted by the Board of Directors. If no record date has been fixed by the Board of Directors, the record date for

- 2 -

determining the stockholders entitled to consent to corporate action in writing without a meeting, when no prior action by the Board of Directors is required by the General Corporation Law, shall be the first date on which a signed written consent setting forth the action taken or proposed to be taken is delivered to the corporation by delivery to its principal place of business or an officer or agent of the corporation having custody of the book in which proceedings of meetings of stockholders are recorded. If no record date has been fixed by the Board of Directors and prior action by the Board of Directors is required by the General Corporation Law, the record date for determining stockholders entitled to consent to corporate action in writing without a meeting shall be at the close of business on the day on which the Board of Directors adopts the resolution taking such prior action. In order that the corporation may determine the stockholders entitled to receive payment of any dividend or other distribution or allotment of any rights or the stockholders entitled to exercise any rights in respect of any change, conversion, or exchange of stock, or for the purpose of any other lawful action, the Board of Directors may fix a record date, which record date shall not precede the date upon which the resolution fixing the record date is adopted, and which record date shall be not more than sixty days prior to such action. If no record date is fixed, the record date for determining stockholders for any such purpose shall be at the close of business on the day on which the Board of Directors adopts the resolution relating thereto.

6. MEANING OF CERTAIN TERMS. As used herein in respect of the right to notice of a meeting of stockholders or a waiver thereof or to participate or vote thereat or to consent or dissent in writing in lieu of a meeting, as the case may be, the term “share” or “shares” or “share of stock” or “shares of stock” or “stockholder” or “stockholders” refers to an outstanding share or shares of stock and to a holder or holders of record of outstanding shares of stock when the corporation is authorized to issue only one class of shares of stock, and said reference is also intended to include any outstanding share or shares of stock and any holder or holders of record of outstanding shares of stock of any class upon which or upon whom the certificate of incorporation confers such rights where there are two or more classes or series of shares of stock or upon which or upon whom the General Corporation Law confers such rights notwithstanding that the certificate of incorporation may provide for more than one class or series of shares of stock, one or more of which are limited or denied such rights thereunder; provided, however, that no such right shall vest in the event of an increase or a decrease in the authorized number of shares of stock of any class or series which is otherwise denied voting rights under the provisions of the certificate of incorporation, except as any provision of law may otherwise require.

7. STOCKHOLDER MEETINGS.

• TIME. The annual meeting shall be held on the date and at the time fixed, from time to time, by the directors, provided, that the first annual meeting shall be held on a date within thirteen months after the organization of the corporation, and each successive annual meeting shall be held on a date within thirteen months after the date of the preceding annual meeting. A special meeting shall be held on the date and at the time fixed by the directors.

• PLACE. Annual meetings and special meetings may be held at such place, either

- 3 -

within or without the State of Delaware, as the directors may, from time to time, fix. Whenever the directors shall fail to fix such place, the meeting shall be held at the registered office of the corporation in the State of Delaware. The board of directors may also, in its sole discretion, determine that the meeting shall not be held at any place, but may instead be held solely by means of remote communication as authorized by Section 211(a)(2) of the Delaware General Corporation Law. If a meeting by remote communication is authorized by the board of directors in its sole discretion, and subject to guidelines and procedures as the board of directors may adopt, stockholders and proxyholders not physically present at a meeting of stockholders may, by means of remote communication participate in a meeting of stockholders and be deemed present in person and vote at a meeting of stockholders whether such meeting is to be held at a designated place or solely by means of remote communication, provided that (a) the corporation shall implement reasonable measures to verify that each person deemed present and permitted to vote at the meeting by means of remote communication is a stockholder or proxyholder, (b) the corporation shall implement reasonable measures to provide such stockholders and proxyholders a reasonable opportunity to participate in the meeting and to vote on matters submitted to the stockholders, including an opportunity to read or hear the proceedings of the meeting substantially concurrently with such proceedings, and (c) if any stockholder or proxyholder votes or takes other action at the meeting by means of remote communication, a record of such vote or other action shall be maintained by the corporation.

• CALL. Annual meetings and special meetings may be called by the directors or by any officer instructed by the directors to call the meeting.

• NOTICE OR WAIVER OF NOTICE. Written notice of all meetings shall be given, which shall state the place, if any, date, and hour of the meeting, the means of remote communication, if any, by which stockholders and proxyholders may be deemed to be present in person and vote at such meeting, and in the case of a special meeting, the purpose or purposes for which the meeting is called. The notice of an annual meeting shall state that the meeting is called for the election of directors and for the transaction of other business which may properly come before the meeting, and shall (if any other action which could be taken at a special meeting is to be taken at such annual meeting) state the purpose or purposes. The notice of any meeting shall also include, or be accompanied by, any additional statements, information, or documents prescribed by the General Corporation Law. Except as otherwise provided by the General Corporation Law, the written notice of any meeting shall be given not less than ten days nor more than sixty days before the date of the meeting to each stockholder entitled to vote at such meeting. If mailed, notice is given when deposited in the United States mail, postage prepaid, directed to the stockholder at such stockholder’s address as it appears on the records of the corporation. If a meeting is adjourned to another time or place, notice need not be given of the adjourned meeting if the time, place, if any, thereof, and the means of remote communications, if any, by which stockholders and proxyholders may be deemed to be present in person and vote at such adjourned meeting are announced at the meeting at which the adjournment is taken. At the adjourned meeting the corporation may transact any business which might have been transacted at the original meeting. If the adjournment is for more than 30 days, or if after the adjournment a new record date is fixed for the adjourned meeting,

- 4 -

a notice of the adjourned meeting shall be given to each stockholder of record entitled to vote at the meeting. Whenever notice is required to be given under the Delaware General Corporation Law, certificate of incorporation or bylaws, a written waiver signed by the person entitled to notice, or a waiver by electronic transmission by the person entitled to notice, whether before or after the time stated therein, shall be deemed equivalent to notice. Attendance of a stockholder at a meeting of stockholders shall constitute a waiver of notice of such meeting, except when the stockholder attends the meeting for the express purpose of objecting, at the beginning of the meeting, to the transaction of any business because the meeting is not lawfully called or convened. Neither the business to be transacted at, nor the purpose of, any regular or special meeting of the stockholders need be specified in any written waiver of notice or any waiver by electronic transmission unless so required by the certificate of incorporation or these bylaws.

• STOCKHOLDER LIST. The officer who has charge of the stock ledger of the corporation shall prepare and make, at least ten days before every meeting of stockholders, a complete list of the stockholders entitled to vote at the meeting, arranged in alphabetical order, and showing the address of each stockholder and the number of shares registered in the name of each stockholder. Such list shall be open to the examination of any stockholder, for any purpose germane to the meeting for a period of at least ten days prior to the meeting on a reasonably accessible electronic network, provided that the information required to gain access to such list is provided with the notice of the meeting or during ordinary business hours at the principal place of business of the corporation. In the event that the corporation determines to make the list available on an electronic network, the corporation may take reasonable steps to ensure that such information is available only to stockholders of the corporation. If the meeting is to be held at a place, then the list shall be produced and kept at the time and place of the meeting during the whole time thereof, and may be inspected by any stockholder who is present. If the meeting is to be held solely by means of remote communication, then the list shall also be open to the examination of any stockholder during the whole time of the meeting on a reasonably accessible electronic network, and the information required to access such list shall be provided with the notice of the meeting. The stock ledger shall be the only evidence as to who are the stockholders entitled to examine the stock ledger, the list required by this section or the books of the corporation, or to vote in person or by proxy at any meeting of stockholders.

• CONDUCT OF MEETING. Meetings of the stockholders shall be presided over by one of the following officers in the order of seniority and if present and acting - the Chairperson of the Board, if any, the Vice-Chairperson of the Board, if any, the President, a Vice-President, or, if none of the foregoing is in office and present and acting, by a chairperson to be chosen by the stockholders. The Secretary of the corporation, or in such Secretary’s absence, an Assistant Secretary, shall act as secretary of every meeting, but if neither the Secretary nor an Assistant Secretary is present the chairperson of the meeting shall appoint a secretary of the meeting.

• PROXY REPRESENTATION. Each stockholder entitled to vote at a meeting of stockholders or to express consent or dissent to corporate action in writing without a meeting may authorize another person or persons to act for such stockholder by proxy, but no such proxy shall be

- 5 -

voted or acted upon after 3 years from its date, unless the proxy provides for a longer period. A stockholder may execute a writing authorizing another person or persons to act for such stockholder as proxy. Execution may be accomplished by the stockholder or such stockholder’s authorized officer, director, employee or agent signing such writing or causing such person’s signature to be affixed to such writing by any reasonable means including, but not limited to, by facsimile signature. A stockholder may also authorize another person or persons to act for such stockholder as proxy by transmitting or authorizing the transmission of a telegram, cablegram, or other means of electronic transmission to the person who will be the holder of the proxy or to a proxy solicitation firm, proxy support service organization or like agent duly authorized by the person who will be the holder of the proxy to receive such transmission, provided that any such telegram, cablegram or other means of electronic transmission must either set forth or be submitted with information from which it can be determined that the telegram, cablegram or other electronic transmission was authorized by the stockholder. If it is determined that such telegrams, cablegrams or other electronic transmissions are valid, the inspectors or, if there are no inspectors, such other persons making the determination shall specify the information upon which they relied. Any copy, facsimile telecommunication or other reliable reproduction of the writing or transmission created pursuant to Section 212(c) of the Delaware General Corporation Law may be substituted or used in lieu of the original writing or transmission for any and all purposes for which the original writing or transmission could be used, provided that such copy, facsimile telecommunication or other reproduction shall be a complete reproduction of the entire original writing or transmission. A duly executed proxy shall be irrevocable if it states that it is irrevocable and, if, and only as long as, it is coupled with an interest sufficient in law to support an irrevocable power. A proxy may be made irrevocable regardless of whether the interest with which it is coupled is an interest in the stock itself or an interest in the corporation generally.

• INSPECTORS. The directors, in advance of any meeting, may, but need not, appoint one or more inspectors of election to act at the meeting or any adjournment thereof. If an inspector or inspectors are not appointed, the person presiding at the meeting may, but need not, appoint one or more inspectors. In case any person who may be appointed as an inspector fails to appear or act, the vacancy may be filled by appointment made by the directors in advance of the meeting or at the meeting by the person presiding thereat. Each inspector, if any, before entering upon the discharge of duties of inspector, shall take and sign an oath faithfully to execute the duties of inspector at such meeting with strict impartiality and according to the best of such inspector’s ability. The inspectors, if any, shall determine the number of shares of stock outstanding and the voting power of each, the shares of stock represented at the meeting, the existence of a quorum, the validity and effect of proxies, and shall receive votes, ballots, or consents, hear and determine all challenges and questions arising in connection with the right to vote, count and tabulate all votes, ballots, or consents, determine the result, and do such acts as are proper to conduct the election or vote with fairness to all stockholders. On request of the person presiding at the meeting, the inspector or inspectors, if any, shall make a report in writing of any challenge, question, or matter determined by such inspector or inspectors and execute a certificate of any fact found by such inspector or inspectors. Except as may otherwise be required by subsection (e) of Section 231 of the General Corporation Law, the provisions of that Section shall not apply to the corporation.

- 6 -

• QUORUM. The holders of a majority of the outstanding shares of stock shall constitute a quorum at a meeting of stockholders for the transaction of any business. The stockholders present may adjourn the meeting despite the absence of a quorum.

• VOTING. Each share of stock shall entitle the holder thereof to one vote. Directors shall be elected by a plurality of the votes of the shares present in person or represented by proxy at the meeting and entitled to vote on the election of directors. Any other action shall be authorized by a majority of the votes cast except where the General Corporation Law prescribes a different percentage of votes and/or a different exercise of voting power, and except as may be otherwise prescribed by the provisions of the certificate of incorporation and these Bylaws. In the election of directors, and for any other action, voting need not be by ballot.

8. STOCKHOLDER ACTION WITHOUT MEETINGS. Except as any provision of the General Corporation Law may otherwise require, any action required by the General Corporation Law to be taken at any annual or special meeting of stockholders, or any action which may be taken at any annual or special meeting of stockholders, may be taken without a meeting, without prior notice and without a vote, if a consent in writing, setting forth the action so taken, shall be signed by the holders of outstanding stock having not less than the minimum number of votes that would be necessary to authorize or take such action at a meeting at which all shares entitled to vote thereon were present and voted. A telegram, cablegram or other electronic transmission consenting to an action to be taken and transmitted by a stockholder or proxyholder, or by a person or persons authorized to act for a stockholder or proxyholder, shall be deemed to be written, signed and dated for the purposes of this section, provided that any such telegram, cablegram or other electronic transmission sets forth or is delivered with information from which the corporation can determine that the telegram, cablegram or other electronic transmission was transmitted by the stockholder or proxyholder or by a person or persons authorized to act for the stockholder or proxyholder and the date on which such stockholder or proxyholder or authorized person or persons transmitted such telegram, cablegram or electronic transmission. The date on which such telegram, cablegram or electronic transmission is transmitted shall be deemed to be the date on which such consent was signed. No consent given by telegram, cablegram or other electronic transmission shall be deemed to have been delivered until such consent is reproduced in paper form and until such paper shall be delivered to the corporation by delivery to its principal place of business or an officer or agent of the corporation having custody of the book in which the proceedings of meetings of stockholders are recorded, to the extent and in the manner provided by resolution of the board of directors of the corporation. Any copy, facsimile or other reliable reproduction of a consent in writing may be substituted or used in lieu of the original writing for any and all purposes for which the original writing could be used, provided that such copy, facsimile or other reproduction shall be a complete reproduction of the entire original writing. Prompt notice of the taking of the corporate action without a meeting by less than unanimous written consent shall be given to those stockholders who have not consented in writing. Action taken pursuant to this paragraph shall be subject to the provisions of Section 228 of the General Corporation Law.

- 7 -

ARTICLE II

DIRECTORS

1. FUNCTIONS AND DEFINITION. The business and affairs of the corporation shall be managed by or under the direction of the Board of Directors of the corporation. The Board of Directors shall have the authority to fix the compensation of the members thereof. The use of the phrase “whole board” herein refers to the total number of directors which the corporation would have if there were no vacancies.

2. QUALIFICATIONS AND NUMBER. A director need not be a stockholder, a citizen of the United States, or a resident of the State of Delaware. The initial Board of Directors shall consist of three (3) persons. Thereafter the number of directors constituting the whole board shall be at least one. Subject to the foregoing limitation and except for the first Board of Directors, such number may be fixed from time to time by action of the stockholders or of the directors, or, if the number is not fixed, the number shall be three (3). The number of directors may be increased or decreased by action of the stockholders or of the directors.

3. ELECTION AND TERM. The first Board of Directors, unless the members thereof shall have been named in the certificate of incorporation, shall be elected by the incorporator or incorporators and shall hold office until the first annual meeting of stockholders and until their successors are elected and qualified or until their earlier resignation or removal. Any director may resign at any time upon notice given in writing or by electronic transmission to the corporation. Thereafter, directors who are elected at an annual meeting of stockholders, and directors who are elected in the interim to fill vacancies and newly created directorships, shall hold office until the next annual meeting of stockholders and until their successors are elected and qualified or until their earlier resignation or removal. Except as the General Corporation Law may otherwise require, in the interim between annual meetings of stockholders or of special meetings of stockholders called for the election of directors and/or for the removal of one or more directors and for the filling of any vacancy in that connection, newly created directorships and any vacancies in the Board of Directors, including unfilled vacancies resulting from the removal of directors for cause or without cause, may be filled by the vote of a majority of the remaining directors then in office, although less than a quorum, or by the sole remaining director.

4. MEETINGS.

• TIME. Meetings shall be held at such time as the Board shall fix, except that the first meeting of a newly elected Board shall be held as soon after its election as the directors may conveniently assemble.

• PLACE. Meetings shall be held at such place within or without the State of Delaware as shall be fixed by the Board.

- 8 -

• CALL. No call shall be required for regular meetings for which the time and place have been fixed. Special meetings may be called by or at the direction of the Chairperson of the Board, if any, the Vice-Chairperson of the Board, if any, of the President, or of a majority of the directors in office.

• NOTICE OR ACTUAL OR CONSTRUCTIVE WAIVER. No notice shall be required for regular meetings for which the time and place have been fixed. Written, oral, or any other mode of notice of the time and place shall be given for special meetings in sufficient time for the convenient assembly of the directors thereat. Whenever notice is required to be given under the Delaware General Corporation Law, certificate of incorporation or bylaws, a written waiver signed by the person entitled to notice, or a waiver by electronic transmission by the person entitled to notice, whether before or after the time stated therein, shall be deemed equivalent to notice. Attendance of any such person at a meeting shall constitute a waiver of notice of such meeting, except when such person attends a meeting for the express purpose of objecting, at the beginning of the meeting, to the transaction of any business because the meeting is not lawfully called or convened. Neither the business to be transacted at, nor the purpose of, any regular or special meeting of the directors need be specified in any written waiver of notice.

• QUORUM AND ACTION. A majority of the whole Board shall constitute a quorum except when a vacancy or vacancies prevents such majority, whereupon a majority of the directors in office shall constitute a quorum, provided, that such majority shall constitute at least one-third of the whole Board. A majority of the directors present, whether or not a quorum is present, may adjourn a meeting to another time and place. Except as herein otherwise provided, and except as otherwise provided by the General Corporation Law, the vote of the majority of the directors present at a meeting at which a quorum is present shall be the act of the Board. The quorum and voting provisions herein stated shall not be construed as conflicting with any provisions of the General Corporation Law and these Bylaws which govern a meeting of directors held to fill vacancies and newly created directorships in the Board or action of disinterested directors.

Any member or members of the Board of Directors or of any committee designated by the Board, may participate in a meeting of the Board, or any such committee, as the case may be, by means of conference telephone or similar communications equipment by means of which all persons participating in the meeting can hear each other.

• CHAIRPERSON OF THE MEETING. The Chairperson of the Board, if any and if present and acting, shall preside at all meetings. Otherwise, the Vice-Chairperson of the Board, if any and if present and acting, or the President, if present and acting, or any other director chosen by the Board, shall preside.

5. REMOVAL OF DIRECTORS. Except as may otherwise be provided by the General Corporation Law, any director or the entire Board of Directors may be removed, with or without cause, by the holders of a majority of the shares then entitled to vote at an election of directors.

- 9 -

6. COMMITTEES. The Board of Directors may designate one or more committees, each committee to consist of one or more of the directors of the corporation. The Board may designate one or more directors as alternate members of any committee, who may replace any absent or disqualified member at any meeting of the committee. In the absence or disqualification of any member of any such committee or committees, the member or members thereof present at any meeting and not disqualified from voting, whether or not such member or members constitute a quorum, may unanimously appoint another member of the Board of Directors to act at the meeting in the place of any such absent or disqualified member. Any such committee, to the extent provided in the resolution of the Board, shall have and may exercise all the powers and authority of the Board of Directors in the management of the business and affairs of the corporation with the exception of any power or authority the delegation of which is prohibited by Section 141 of the General Corporation Law, and may authorize the seal of the corporation to be affixed to all papers which may require it.

7. WRITTEN ACTION. Any action required or permitted to be taken at any meeting of the Board of Directors or any committee thereof may be taken without a meeting if all members of the Board or committee, as the case may be, consent thereto in writing or electronic transmission, and the writing or writings or electronic transmission or transmissions are filed with the minutes of proceedings of the Board or committee. Such filing shall be in paper form if the minutes are maintained in paper form and shall be in electronic form if the minutes are maintained in electronic form.

ARTICLE III

OFFICERS

The officers of the corporation shall consist of a President, a Secretary, a Treasurer, and, if deemed necessary, expedient, or desirable by the Board of Directors, a Chairperson of the Board, a Vice-Chairperson of the Board, an Executive Vice-President, one or more other Vice-Presidents, one or more Assistant Secretaries, one or more Assistant Treasurers, and such other officers with such titles as the resolution of the Board of Directors choosing them shall designate. Except as may otherwise be provided in the resolution of the Board of Directors choosing such officer, no officer other than the Chairperson or Vice-Chairperson of the Board, if any, need be a director. Any number of offices may be held by the same person, as the directors may determine.

Unless otherwise provided in the resolution choosing such officer, each officer shall be chosen for a term which shall continue until the meeting of the Board of Directors following the next annual meeting of stockholders and until such officer’s successor shall have been chosen and qualified.

All officers of the corporation shall have such authority and perform such duties in the management and operation of the corporation as shall be prescribed in the resolutions of the

- 10 -

Board of Directors designating and choosing such officers and prescribing their authority and duties, and shall have such additional authority and duties as are incident to their office except to the extent that such resolutions may be inconsistent therewith. The Secretary or an Assistant Secretary of the corporation shall record all of the proceedings of all meetings and actions in writing of stockholders, directors, and committees of directors, and shall exercise such additional authority and perform such additional duties as the Board shall assign to such Secretary or Assistant Secretary. Any officer may be removed, with or without cause, by the Board of Directors. Any vacancy in any office may be filled by the Board of Directors.

- 11 -

ARTICLE IV

CORPORATE SEAL

The corporate seal shall be in such form as the Board of Directors shall prescribe.

ARTICLE V

FISCAL YEAR

The fiscal year of the corporation shall be fixed, and shall be subject to change, by the Board of Directors.

ARTICLE VI

CONTROL OVER BYLAWS

Subject to the provisions of the certificate of incorporation and the provisions of the General Corporation Law, the power to amend, alter, or repeal these Bylaws and to adopt new Bylaws may be exercised by the Board of Directors or by the stockholders.

- 12 -

EX-3.15

Exhibit 3.15

  Secretary of State Corporations Division 315 West Tower #2 Martin Luther King, Jr. Dr. Atlanta, Georgia 30334-1530 DOCKET NUMBER CONTROL NUMBER DATE INC/AUTH/FILED JURISDICTION PRINT DATE FORM NUMBER : 021220069
: J909222
: 05/09/1989
: GEORGIA
: 05/02/2002
: 215

CORPORATION SERVICE COMPANY

SHEILA PITTARD

1201 HAYS ST.

TALLAHASSEE, FL 32301

CERTIFIED COPY

I, Cathy Cox, the Secretary of State of the State of Georgia, do hereby certify under the seal of my office that the attached documents are true and correct copies of documents filed under the name of

THE CONNECTING LINK, INC.

A DOMESTIC PROFIT CORPORATION

Said entity was formed in the jurisdiction set forth above and has filed in the Office of Secretary of State on the date set forth above its certificate of limited partnership, articles of incorporation, articles of association, articles of organization or application for certificate of authority to transact business in Georgia.

This certificate is issued pursuant to Title 14 of the Official Code of Georgia Annotated and is prima-facie evidence of the existence or nonexistence of the facts stated herein.

Cathy Cox

Secretary of State

Secretary of State Business Services and Regulation Suite 306, West Tower 2 Martin Luther King Jr. Dr. Atlanta, Georgia 30334     CHARTER NUMBER DATE INCORPORATED COUNTY EXAMINER TELEPHONE   :8909222 :May 09, 1989 :GWINNETT :MARILYN M MATEEN :404-656-2811

MAILED TO:

MICHAEL S. WEBB, ATTY.

3483 SATELLITE BLVD., STE 217

DULUTH, GA 30136

CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION

I, MAX CLELAND, SECRETARY OF STATE AND THE CORPORATIONS COMMISSIONER OF THE STATE OF GEORGIA DO HEREBY CERTIFY, UNDER THE SEAL OF MY OFFICE, THAT

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  – – – – – – – – – –

“THE CONNECTING LINK, INC.”

– –– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –  – – – – – – – – – –

HAS BEEN DULY INCORPORATED UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF GEORGIA ON THE DATE SET FORTH ABOVE, BY THE FILING OF ARTICLES OF INCORPORATION IN THE OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY OF STATE AND THE FEES THEREFOR PAID, AS PROVIDED BY LAW, AND THAT ATTACHED HERETO IS A TRUE COPY OF SAID ARTICLES OF INCORPORATION.

WITNESS, MY HAND AND OFFICIAL SEAL, IN THE CITY OF ATLANTA AND THE STATE OF GEORGIA ON THE DATE SET FORTH BELOW.

DATE: MAY 15, 1989

MAX CLELAND

SECRETARY OF STATE

H. WAYNE HOWELL

DEPUTY SECRETARY OF STATE

2

ARTICLES OF INCORPORATION

OF

THE CONNECTING LINK, INC.

I.

Tree name of the corporation is “THE CONNECTING LINK, INC.”

II.

The corporation is organized pursuant to the provisions of the Georgia Business Corporation Code.

III.

The corporation shall have perpetual duration.

IV.

The corporation is a corporation for profit and is organized for the following purposes: To provide an educational consulting service for public and private school teachers, instructors, and professors, and universities, colleges and other learning institutions; to offer graduate and post-graduate classes, courses and studies for public and private school teachers, instructors and professors, to publish books, and audio and video tapes, and other educational materials; to conduct communication skills workshops; to do any and all things or acts incidental thereto; and to engage in any lawful act or activity for which corporations maybe organized under the Georgia Business Corporation Code.

V.

The Corporation shall have authority, acting by its board of directors, to issue not more than 100,000 shares of a common class of stock having no par value.

The Corporation may purchase its own shares of capital stock out of unreserved and unrestricted earned surplus and capital surplus available therefor and as otherwise provided by law.

The Board of Directors may from time to time distribute to shareholders out of capital surplus of the corporation a portion of its assets, in cash or in property, or in both cash and property.

The Corporation shall be authorized to Issue its capital stock pursuant to such plan or plans as it may from time to time adopt in accordance with the provisions of § 1244 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1954, as amended, and the initial Board of Directors shall be authorized to adopt the initial plan for the issuance of such capital stock.

3

VI.

The corporation shall not commence business until it shall have received consideration of not less than $500 in value for the issuance of its shares.

VII.

The address of the initial registered office of the corporation is 243 Blazing Ridge Way, Lawrenceville, Gwinnett County, Georgia 30245. The initial registered agent at the address is Bernard F. Cleveland.

VIII.

The initial board of directors shall consist of two members. Their names and addresses are as follows:

Bernard F. Cleveland

243 Blazing Ridge Way

Lawrenceville, Georgia 30245

Kathleen P. Cleveland

243 Blazing Ridge Way

Lawrenceville, Georgia 30245

IX.

The names and addresses of the incorporators are:

Bernard F. Cleveland

243 Blazing Ridge Way

Lawrenceville, Georgia 30245

Kathleen P. Cleveland

243 Blazing Ridge Way

Lawrenceville, Georgia 30245

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned incorporator has executed these Articles of incorporation.

This      day of May, 1989.

MICHAEL S. WEBB

Attorney for Incorporators

State Bar No. 744637

The Crescent — Suite 217

3483 Satellite Boulevard

Duluth, Georgia 30136

(404) 476-9793

4

CONSENT TO APPOINTMENT AS REGISTERED AGENT

To: Max Cleland

Secretary of State

Ex-Officio Corporation

Commissioner

State of Georgia

I BERNARD F. CLEVELAND

do hereby consent to serve as registered agent for the corporation

THE CONNECTING LINK, INC.

This 28^th day of April, 1989.

BERNARD F. CLEVELAND

Address of registered agent:

243 Blazing Ridge Way

Lawrenceville, Georgia 30245

5

EX-3.16

Exhibit 3.16

BYLAWS

OF

THE CONNECTING LINK, INC.

(a Georgia corporation)

ARTICLE I

SHAREHOLDERS

1. SHARE CERTIFICATES. Certificates evidencing fully-paid shares of the corporation shall set forth thereon the statements prescribed by Section 14-2-625 of the Georgia Business Corporation Code (“Business Corporation Code”) and by any other applicable provision of law, shall be signed, either manually or in facsimile, by one or more of the following officers: the President, a Vice-President, the Secretary, an Assistant Secretary, the Treasurer, an Assistant Treasurer, or by one or more officers designated by the Board of Directors, and may bear the corporate seal or its facsimile. If the person who signed a share certificate, either manually or in facsimile, no longer holds office when the certificate is issued, the certificate is nevertheless valid. If the certificate is signed in facsimile, then it must be countersigned by a transfer agent or registered by a registrar other than the corporation itself or an employee of the corporation. The transfer agent or registrar may sign either manually or by facsimile.

2. FRACTIONAL SHARES OR SCRIP. The corporation may: issue fractions of a share or pay in money the value of fractions of a share; arrange for disposition of fractional shares by or for the account of the shareholders; and issue scrip in registered or bearer form entitling the holder to receive a full share upon surrendering enough scrip to equal a full share. Each certificate representing scrip must be conspicuously labeled “scrip” and must contain the information required by subsection (b) of Section 14-2-625 of the Business Corporation Code. The holder of a fractional share is entitled to exercise the rights of a shareholder, including the right to vote, to receive dividends, and to participate in the assets of the corporation upon liquidation. The holder of scrip is not entitled to any of these rights unless the scrip provides for them. The Board of Directors may authorize the issuance of scrip subject to any conditions considered desirable, including (a) that the scrip will become void if not exchanged for full shares before a specified date; and (b) that the shares for which the scrip is exchangeable may be sold and the proceeds paid to the scripholders.

3. SHARE TRANSFERS. Upon compliance with any provisions restricting the transferability of shares that may be set forth in the articles of incorporation, these Bylaws, or any written agreement in respect thereof, transfers of shares of the corporation shall be made only on the books of the corporation by the registered holder thereof, or by his attorney thereunto authorized by

1

power of attorney duly executed and filed with the Secretary of the corporation, or with a transfer agent or a registrar and on surrender of the certificate or certificates for such shares properly endorsed and the payment of all taxes thereon, if any. Except as may be otherwise provided by law or these Bylaws, the person in whose name shares stand on the books of the corporation shall be deemed the owner thereof for all purposes as regards the corporation; provided that whenever any transfer of shares shall be made for collateral security, and not absolutely, such fact, if known to the Secretary of the corporation, shall be so expressed in the entry of transfer.

4. RECORD DATE FOR SHAREHOLDERS. For the purpose of determining shareholders entitled to notice of or to vote at any meeting of shareholders or any adjournment thereof, to demand a special meeting, or to take any other action, the Board of Directors of the corporation may fix a date as the record date for any such determination of shareholders, such date in any case to be not more than seventy days before the meeting or action requiring such determination of shareholders. A determination of shareholders entitled to notice of or to vote at a shareholders’ meeting is effective for any adjournment of the meeting unless the Board of Directors fixes a new record date, which it must do if the meeting is adjourned to a date more than one hundred twenty days after the date fixed for the original meeting.

5. MEANING OF CERTAIN TERMS. As used herein in respect of the right to notice of a meeting of shareholders or a waiver thereof or to participate or vote thereat or to consent or dissent in writing in lieu of a meeting, as the case may be, the term “share” or “shares” or “shareholder” or “shareholders” refers to an outstanding share or shares and to a holder or holders of record of outstanding shares when the corporation is authorized to issue only one class of shares, and said reference is also intended to include any outstanding share or shares and any holder or holders of record of outstanding shares of any class upon which or upon whom the articles of incorporation confer such rights where there are two or more classes or series of shares or upon which or upon whom the Business Corporation Code confers such rights notwithstanding that the articles of incorporation may provide for more than one class or series of shares, one or more of which are limited or denied such rights thereunder.

6. SHAREHOLDER MEETINGS.

• TIME. The annual meeting shall be held on the date fixed from time to time by the directors. A special meeting shall be held on the date fixed from time to time by the directors except when the Business Corporation Code confers the right to call a special meeting upon the shareholders.

• PLACE. Annual meetings and special meetings shall be held at such place in or out of the State of Georgia as the directors shall from time to time fix.

• CALL. Annual meetings may be called by the directors or the Chairperson of the Board of Directors, the President, or the Secretary or by any officer instructed by the directors or the President to call the meeting. Special meetings may be called in like manner.

2

• NOTICE OR ACTUAL OR CONSTRUCTIVE WAIVER OF NOTICE. The corporation shall notify shareholders of the date, time, and place of each annual and special shareholders’ meeting. Such notice shall be no fewer than ten nor more than sixty days before the meeting date. Unless the Business Corporation Code or the articles of incorporation require otherwise, notice of an annual meeting shall not be required to include a description of the purpose or purposes for which the meeting is called. Notice of a special meeting must include a description of the purpose or purposes for which the meeting is called. Unless the Business Corporation Code or the articles of incorporation require otherwise, the corporation is required to give notice only to shareholders entitled to vote at the meeting. A shareholder may waive any notice required by the Business Corporation Code, the articles of incorporation or the Bylaws before or after the time stated in the notice. The waiver must be in writing, be signed by the shareholder entitled to the notice, and be delivered to the corporation for inclusion in the minutes or filing with the corporate records. A shareholder’s attendance at a meeting waives objection to lack of notice or defective notice of the meeting, unless the shareholder at the beginning of the meeting objects to holding the meeting or transacting business at the meeting; and waives objection to consideration of a particular matter at the meeting that is not within the purpose or purposes described in the meeting notice, unless the shareholder objects to considering the matter when it is presented. The term “notice” as used in this paragraph shall mean notice as prescribed by Section 14-2-141 of the Business Corporation Code.

• VOTING LIST FOR MEETING. After fixing a record date for a meeting, the corporation shall prepare an alphabetical list of the names of all its shareholders who are entitled to notice of a shareholders’ meeting. The list must be arranged by voting group, and within each voting group by class or series of shares, and show the address of and number of shares held by each shareholder. The shareholders’ list must be available for inspection by any shareholder, his agent, or his attorney at the time and place of the meeting.

• CONDUCT OF MEETING. Meetings of the shareholders shall be presided over by one of the following officers in the order of seniority and if present and acting—the Chairperson of the Board, if any, the Vice-Chairperson of the Board, if any, the President, a Vice-President, if any, or, if none of the foregoing is in office and present and acting, by a chairperson to be chosen by the shareholders. The Secretary of the corporation, or in his absence, an Assistant Secretary, shall act as secretary of every meeting, but, if neither the Secretary nor an Assistant Secretary is present, the chairperson of the meeting shall appoint a secretary of the meeting.

• PROXY REPRESENTATION. A shareholder or his or her agent or attorney in fact may appoint a proxy to vote or otherwise act for the shareholder by executing a writing which authorizes another person or other persons to vote or otherwise act for the shareholder in accordance with the provisions of Section 14-2-722 of the Business Corporation Code.

• SHARES HELD BY NOMINEES. The corporation may establish a procedure by which the beneficial owner of shares that are registered in the name of a nominee is recognized by the corporation as the shareholder. The extent of this recognition may be determined in the procedure.

3

• QUORUM. Unless the articles of incorporation or the Business Corporation Code provides otherwise, a majority of the votes entitled to be cast on the matter by the voting group constitutes a quorum of that voting group for action on that matter. Once a share is represented for any purpose at a meeting other than solely to object to holding the meeting or transacting business at the meeting, it is deemed present for quorum purposes for the remainder of the meeting and for any adjournment of that meeting unless a new record date is or must be set for that adjourned meeting.

• VOTING. Directors are elected by a plurality of the votes cast by the shares entitled to vote in the election at a meeting at which a quorum is present. If a quorum exists, action on a matter, other than the election of directors, by a voting group is approved if the votes cast within the voting group favoring the action exceed the votes cast opposing the action unless the articles of incorporation, a Bylaw authorized by the articles under Section 14-2-1021 of the Business Corporation Code, or the Business Corporation Code requires a greater number of affirmative votes.

7. ACTION WITHOUT MEETING. Action required or permitted by the provisions of the Business Corporation Code to be taken at a shareholders’ meeting may be taken without a meeting in accordance with the provisions of Section 14-2-704 of the Business Corporation Code.

8. ADJOURNMENT. The holders of a majority of the voting shares represented at a meeting, whether or not a quorum is present, may adjourn such meeting from time to time.

ARTICLE II

BOARD OF DIRECTORS

1. FUNCTIONS GENERALLY - COMPENSATION. All corporate powers shall be exercised by or under the authority of, and the business and affairs of the corporation managed under the direction of, a Board of Directors. The Board may fix the compensation of directors.

2. QUALIFICATIONS AND NUMBER. Directors shall be natural persons who are eighteen years of age or older, but need not be shareholders, citizens of the United States, or a residents of the State of Georgia. The number of directors shall not be less than 1 (one) nor more than five (5). The number of directors may be fixed or changed from time to time, within such minimum and maximum, by the shareholders or by the Board of Directors. If not so fixed, the number shall be three (3). The number of directors shall never be less than one.

3. TERMS AND VACANCIES. The terms of directors expire at the next annual shareholders’ meeting following their election. A decrease in the number of directors does not shorten an incumbent director’s term. A director elected to fill a vacancy shall be elected for the unexpired term of his or her predecessor in office. Any directorship to be filled by reason of an increase in the number of directors may be filled by the Board of Directors, but only for a term of

4

office continuing until the next election of directors by the shareholders and until the election and qualification of the successor. Despite the expiration of a director’s term, he or she continues to serve until his or her successor is elected and qualifies or until there is a decrease in the number of directors. If a vacancy occurs on the Board of Directors, including a vacancy resulting from an increase in the number of directors, the shareholders or the Board of Directors may fill the vacancy; or if the directors remaining in office constitute fewer than a quorum of the Board of Directors, they may fill the vacancy by the affirmative vote of a majority of all the directors remaining in office.

4. MEETINGS.

• TIME. Meetings shall be held at such time as the Board shall fix, except that the first meeting of a newly elected Board shall be held as soon after its election as the directors may conveniently assemble.

• PLACE. The Board of Directors may hold regular or special meetings in or out of the State of Georgia at such place as shall be fixed by the Board.

• CALL. No call shall be required for regular meetings for which the time and place have been fixed. Special meetings may be called by or at the direction of the Chairperson of the Board, if any, the Vice-Chairperson of the Board, if any, of the President, or of a majority of the directors in office.

• NOTICE OR ACTUAL OR CONSTRUCTIVE WAIVER. Regular meetings of the Board of Directors may be held without notice of the date, time, place, or purpose of the meeting. Written, or oral, notice of the time and place shall be given for special meetings in sufficient time for the convenient assembly of the directors thereat. The notice of any meeting need not describe the purpose of the meeting. A director may waive any notice required by the Business Corporation Code or by these Bylaws before or after the date and time stated in the notice. A director’s attendance at or participation in a meeting waives any required notice to him or her of the meeting unless the director at the beginning of the meeting or promptly upon his or her arrival objects to holding the meeting or transacting business at the meeting and does not thereafter vote for or assent to action taken at the meeting. Except as hereinbefore provided, a waiver shall be in writing, signed by the director entitled to the notice, and delivered to the corporation for inclusion in the minutes or filing with the corporate records.

• QUORUM AND ACTION. A quorum of the Board of Directors consists of a majority of the number of directors prescribed in or fixed in accordance with these Bylaws or unless otherwise specifically provided by the Business Corporation Code. If a quorum is present when a vote is taken, the affirmative vote of a majority of directors present shall be the act of the Board of Directors. The Board of Directors may permit any or all directors to participate in a regular or special meeting by, or conduct the meeting through use of, any means of communication by which all directors participating may simultaneously hear each other during the meeting. A director participating in a meeting by this means is deemed to be present in person at the meeting.

5

• CHAIRMAN OF THE MEETING. Meetings of the Board of Directors shall be presided over by the following directors in the order of seniority and if present and acting—the Chairperson of the Board, if any, the Vice-Chairperson of the Board, if any, the President, or any other director chosen by the Board.

5. REMOVAL OF DIRECTORS. The shareholders may remove one or more directors with or without cause pursuant to the provisions of Section 14-2-808 of the Business Corporation Code.

6. COMMITTEES. The Board of Directors may create one or more committees and appoint members of the Board of Directors to serve on them. Each committee may have one or more members, who serve at the pleasure of the Board of Directors. The provisions of Sections 14-2-820 through 14-2-824 of the Business Corporation Code, which govern meetings, action without meetings, notice and waiver of notice, and quorum and voting requirements, apply to committees and their members as well. To the extent specified by the Board of Directors or these Bylaws, each committee may exercise the authority of the Board of Directors under Section 14-2-801 of the Business Corporation Code except such authority as may not be delegated under the Business Corporation Code.

7. ACTION WITHOUT MEETING. Action required or permitted by the Business Corporation Code to be taken at a Board of Directors’ meeting may be taken without a meeting if the action is taken by all members of the Board. The action must be evidenced by one or more written consents describing the action taken, signed by each director, and delivered to the corporation for inclusion in the minutes or filing with the corporate records.

ARTICLE III

OFFICERS

The corporation shall have a President, and a Secretary, and such other officers as may be deemed necessary, who may be appointed by the directors. The same individual may simultaneously hold more than one office in the corporation. A duly appointed officer may appoint one or more officers or assistant officers.

Each officer of the corporation shall have the authority and shall perform the duties prescribed by the Board of Directors or by direction of an officer authorized by the Board of Directors to prescribe the duties of other officers; provided, that the Secretary shall have the responsibility for preparing minutes of the directors’ and shareholders’ meetings and for authenticating records of the corporation, and provided further, that unless the Articles of Incorporation or a resolution of the Board of Directors provide otherwise, the President shall have the authority to conduct all ordinary business and may execute and deliver on behalf of the corporation any contract, conveyance, or similar document not requiring approval by the Board of Directors or shareholders as provided in the Business Corporation Code.

6

The Board of Directors may remove any officer at any time with or without cause.

ARTICLE IV

REGISTERED OFFICE AND AGENT

The address of the initial registered office of the corporation and the name of the initial registered agent of the corporation are set forth in the original articles of incorporation.

ARTICLE V

CORPORATE SEAL

The corporate seal shall have inscribed thereon the name of the corporation and shall be in such form and contain such other words and/or figures as the Board of Directors shall determine or the law require.

ARTICLE VI

FISCAL YEAR

The fiscal year of the corporation shall be fixed, and shall be subject to change, by the Board of Directors.

ARTICLE VII

CONTROL OVER BYLAWS

The corporation’s Board of Directors may amend or repeal the Bylaws, except as otherwise required by the Business Corporation Code. Notwithstanding the foregoing provision, the corporation’s shareholders may amend or repeal the Bylaws or adopt new Bylaws.

7

EX-3.17

Exhibit 3.17

PENNSYLVANIA DEPARTMENT OF STATE

CORPORATION BUREAU

Articles of Incorporation-For Profit

(15 Pa. C.S.)

	X Business-stock (§ 1306)	— Management (§ 2703)
Entity Number	— Business-nonstock (§ 2102)	— Professional (§ 2903)
3165779	— Business-statutory close (§ 2303)	— Insurance (§ 3101)
	— Cooperative (§ 7102)

In compliance with the requirements of the applicable provisions (relating to corporations and unincorporated associations), the undersigned, desiring to incorporate for profit, hereby states that:

1. The name of the corporation (corporate designator required, i.e., “corporation”, “incorporated”, “limited”, “company”, or any abbreviation. “Professional corporation” or “PC”):

EDMC Aviation, Inc.

2. The (a) address of this corporation’s current registration office in this Commonwealth (post office box, alone, is not acceptable) or (b) name of its commercial registered office provider and the county of venue is:

(a) Number and Street

210 Sixth Avenue, 33^rd Floor

Pittsburgh, PA 15222

Allegheny County

3. The corporation is incorporated under the provisions of the Business Corporation Law of 1988.

4. The aggregate number of shares authorized: 1,000 NPV

5. The name and address, including number and street, if any, of each incorporator (all incorporators must sign below):

Belinda Schory

600 N. 2^nd Street, Suite 500

Harrisburg, PA 17101

6. The specified effective date, if any             

                                         month/day/year hour, if any

7. Additional provisions of the articles, if any, attach an 8  ¹/2 by 11 sheet.

8. Statutory close corporation only. Neither the corporation nor any shareholder shall make an offering of any of its shares of any class that would constitute a “public offering” within the meaning of the Securities Act of 1933 (15 U.S.C. 77a et seq.)

9. Cooperative corporations only. Complete and strike out inapplicable term:

The common bond of membership among its members/shareholders is:                     .

IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, the incorporator(s) has/have signed these Articles of Incorporation this 29^th day of August, 2003.

/s/ Belinda Schory

Signature

2

EX-3.18

Exhibit 3.18

BYLAWS

OF

EDMC AVIATION, INC.

(a Pennsylvania corporation)

ARTICLE I

SHAREHOLDERS

1. SHARE CERTIFICATES. Certificates representing shares shall set forth thereon the statements prescribed by Section 1528 of the Business Corporation Law of 1988 and by any other applicable provision of law, shall be executed, by facsimile or otherwise, by the President or a Vice-President and by the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary or the Treasurer or an Assistant Treasurer, or by any other officer or officers authorized to do so by the Board of Directors.

2. FRACTIONAL SHARE INTERESTS OR SCRIP. The corporation may but shall not be required to create and issue fractions of a share, either represented by a certificate or uncertificated, which, unless otherwise provided in the articles of incorporation, shall represent proportional interests in all the voting rights, preferences, limitations, and special rights, if any, of full shares. If the corporation creates but does not provide for the issuance of fractions of a share, it shall: (1) arrange for the disposition of fractional interests by those entitled thereto; (2) pay in money the fair value of fractions of a share determined at the time and in the manner provided in the plan, amendment, or resolution of the Board providing for the creation of the fractional interests; or (3) issue scrip or other evidence of ownership, in registered form (either represented by a certificate or uncertificated) or in bearer form (represented by a certificate), entitling the holder to receive a full share upon the surrender of the scrip or other evidence of ownership aggregating a full share, or the transfer of uncertificated scrip aggregating a full share, but which shall not, unless otherwise provided therein or with respect thereto, entitle the holder to exercise any voting right, to receive dividends or to participate in any of the assets of the corporation in the event of liquidation. The scrip or other evidence of ownership may be issued subject to the condition that it shall become void if not exchanged for full shares before a specified date, or subject to the condition that the shares for which the scrip or evidence of ownership is exchangeable may be sold and the proceeds thereof distributed to the holders of the scrip or evidence of ownership, or subject to any other conditions that the corporation deems advisable.

3. SHARE TRANSFERS. Upon compliance with provisions restricting the transferability of shares, if any, transfers of shares of the corporation shall be made only on the transfer books for shares of the corporation by the record holder thereof, or by his attorney thereunto authorized by power of attorney duly executed and filed with the Secretary of the corporation or with a transfer agent or a registrar, if any, and on surrender of the certificate or certificates for such shares properly endorsed and the payment of all taxes due thereon.

4. RECORD DATE FOR SHAREHOLDERS. The corporation may fix a time prior to the date of any meeting of shareholders as a record date for the determination of the shareholders entitled to notice of, or to vote at, the meeting, which time, except in the case of an adjourned meeting, shall be not more than ninety days prior to the date of the meeting of shareholders. Only shareholders of record on the date fixed shall be so entitled notwithstanding any transfer of shares on the books of the corporation after any record date fixed as provided in this Section. The Board of Directors may similarly fix a record date for the determination of shareholders of record for any other purpose. When a determination of shareholders of record has been made as provided in this Section for purposes of a meeting, the determination shall apply to any adjournment thereof unless the Board fixes a new record date for the adjourned meeting.

If a record date is not fixed: (1) the record date for determining shareholders entitled to notice of or to vote at a meeting of shareholders shall be at the close of business on the day next preceding the day on which notice is given or, if notice is waived, at the close of business on the day immediately preceding the day on which the meeting is held; (2) the record date for determining shareholders entitled to express consent or dissent to corporate action in writing without a meeting, when prior action by the Board of Directors is not necessary, shall be the close of business on the day on which the first written consent or dissent is filed with the Secretary of the corporation; (3) the record date for determining shareholders for any other purpose shall be at the close of business on the day on which the Board of Directors adopts the resolution relating thereto.

5. CERTIFICATION BY NOMINEE. The Board of Directors may adopt a procedure pursuant to the provisions of Section 1763 of the Business Corporation Law of 1988 whereby a shareholder may certify in writing to the corporation that all or a portion of the shares registered in the name of the shareholder are held for the account of a specified person or persons.

6. MEANING OF CERTAIN TERMS. As used herein in respect of the right to notice of a meeting of shareholders or a waiver thereof or to participate or vote thereat or to consent or dissent in writing in lieu of a meeting, as the case may be, the term “share” or “shares” or “shareholder” or “shareholders” refers to an outstanding share or shares and to a holder or holders of record of outstanding shares when the corporation is authorized to issue only one class of shares, and said reference is also intended to include any outstanding share or shares and any holder or holders of record of outstanding shares of any class upon which or upon whom the articles of incorporation confer such rights where there are two or more classes or series of shares or upon which or upon whom the Business Corporation Law of 1988 confers such rights notwithstanding that the articles of incorporation may provide for more than one class or series of shares, one or more of which are limited or denied such rights thereunder.

7. SHAREHOLDER MEETINGS.

• TIME. The annual meeting shall be held on the date fixed, from time to time, by the directors, provided, that at least one meeting of the shareholders shall be held in each calendar year for the election of directors. A special meeting shall be held on the date fixed by the directors except when the Business Corporation Law of 1988 confers the right to fix the date upon a shareholder or shareholders. An adjournment or adjournments of any duly organized annual or

special meeting may be taken, provided, that any meeting at which directors are to be elected shall be adjourned only from day to day or for such longer periods not exceeding fifteen days each as the shareholders who are present and entitled to vote shall direct, until the directors have been elected.

• PLACE. Annual meetings and special meetings shall be held at such place, within or without the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, as the directors may, from time to time, fix. Whenever the directors shall fail to fix such place, or, whenever shareholders entitled to call a special meeting shall call the same, the meeting shall be held at the registered office of the corporation in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.

• CALL. The annual meeting may be called by the directors or the President or by any officer instructed by the directors or the President to call the meeting, or if, in any calendar year, an annual meeting shall not be called by the directors or by any authorized officer and shall not be held, any shareholder may call any such meeting at any time thereafter. A special meeting may be called by the directors or the President or by any officer instructed by the directors or the President to call the meeting or by the shareholders whenever the Business Corporation Law of 1988 confers such right upon them.

• NOTICE OR ACTUAL OR CONSTRUCTIVE WAIVER OF NOTICE. Written notice of every meeting of the shareholders shall be given by, or at the direction of, the Secretary or other authorized person and shall state the place, day, and hour of the meeting and any other information required by any provision of the Business Corporation Law of 1988. The notice of a special meeting shall state the general nature of the business to be transacted. In all cases, the notice shall comply with the express requirements of the Business Corporation Law of 1988. Whenever the language of a proposed resolution is included in a written notice of a meeting required to be given under the provisions of the Business Corporation Law of 1988 or the articles of incorporation or these Bylaws the shareholders’ meeting considering the resolution may without further notice adopt it with such clarifying or other amendments as do not enlarge its original purpose. Written notice of any meeting shall be given to a shareholder personally or by sending a copy thereof by first class or express mail, postage prepaid, or by telegram (with messenger service specified, telex or TWX (with answerback received) or courier service, charges prepaid, or by facsimile transmission, to his address (or to his telex, TWX, or facsimile number) appearing on the books of the corporation, at least five days before the date of the meeting, unless any provision of the Business Corporation Law of 1988 shall prescribe a greater elapsed period of time. If the corporation is not a closely held corporation as defined by Section 1103 of the Business Corporation Law of 1988 and if it gives notice by mail of any regular or special meeting of the shareholders (or any other notice required by the Business Corporation Law of 1988 or by the articles of incorporation or these Bylaws to be given to all shareholders or to all holders of a class or series of shares) at least twenty days prior to the day named for the meeting or any corporate or shareholder action specified in the notice, the corporation may use any class of postpaid mail. If a meeting is adjourned it shall not be necessary to give any notice of the adjourned meeting or of the business to be transacted at an adjourned meeting, other than by announcement at the meeting at which such adjournment is taken, unless the Board of Directors fixes a new record date for the adjourned meeting or the Business Corporation Law of 1988 requires notice of the business to be transacted and such notice has not been previously given. Whenever any written notice is required to be given to any shareholder or shareholders under the Business Corporation Law of 1988 or the articles of

incorporation or these Bylaws, a waiver thereof in writing, signed by the shareholder or shareholders, whether before or after the time stated therein, shall be deemed equivalent to the giving of the notice. Neither the business to be transacted at, nor the purpose of, a meeting need be specified in the waiver of notice of the meeting. The attendance of a shareholder at a meeting shall constitute a waiver of notice by him except where he attends the meeting for the express purpose of objecting, at the beginning of the meeting, to the transaction of any business because the meeting was not lawfully called or convened.

• VOTING LISTS. The officer or agent having charge of the transfer books for shares of the corporation shall make, before each meeting of shareholders, a complete list of the shareholders entitled to vote at the meeting, arranged in alphabetical order, with the address of and the number of shares held by each. The list shall be produced and kept open at the time and place of the meeting, and shall be subject to the inspection of any shareholder during the whole time of the meeting for the purposes thereof, except as otherwise provided by the Business Corporation Law of 1988. The original share register or transfer book, or a duplicate thereof kept in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, shall be prima facie evidence as to who are the shareholders entitled to examine the list or share register or transfer book, or to vote at any meeting of shareholders.

• CONDUCT OF MEETING. Meetings of the shareholders shall be presided over by one of the following officers in the order of seniority and if present and acting—the Chairman of the Board, if any, the Vice-Chairman of the Board, if any, the President, a Vice-President, or, if none of the foregoing is in office and present and acting, by a chairman to be chosen by the shareholders. The Secretary of the corporation, or in his absence, an Assistant Secretary, shall act as secretary of every meeting, but if neither the Secretary nor an Assistant Secretary is present the Chairman of the meeting shall appoint a secretary of the meeting.

• PROXY REPRESENTATION. Every shareholder entitled to vote at a meeting of shareholders or to express consent or dissent to corporate action in writing without a meeting may authorize another person to act for him by proxy. The presence of, or vote or other action at a meeting of shareholders, or the expression of consent or dissent to corporate action in writing, by a proxy of a shareholder shall constitute the presence of, or vote or action by, or written consent or dissent of the shareholder for the purposes of this Section. Where two or more proxies of a shareholder are present, the corporation shall, unless otherwise expressly provided in the proxy, accept as the vote of all shares represented thereby the vote cast by a majority of them and, if a majority of the proxies cannot agree whether the shares represented shall be voted or upon the manner of voting the shares, the voting of the shares shall be divided equally among those persons. Except as may otherwise be permitted by the Business Corporation Law of 1988, every proxy shall be executed in writing by the shareholder or by his duly authorized attorney-in-fact and filed with the Secretary of the corporation. A proxy, unless coupled with an interest, shall be revocable at will, notwithstanding any other agreement or any provision in the proxy to the contrary, but the revocation of a proxy shall not be effective until written notice thereof has been given to the Secretary of the corporation. An unrevoked proxy shall not be valid after three years from the date of execution unless a longer time is expressly provided therein. A proxy shall not be revoked by the death or incapacity of the maker unless, before the vote is counted or the authority is exercised, written notice of the death or incapacity is given to the Secretary of the corporation. A proxy may be made irrevocable regardless of whether the interest with which it is coupled is an interest in the share itself or an interest in the corporation generally.

• JUDGES OF ELECTION. In advance of any meeting of shareholders, the Board of Directors may appoint judges of election, who need not be shareholders, to act at the meeting or any adjournment thereof. If judges of election are not so appointed, the presiding officer of the meeting may, and on the request of any shareholder shall, appoint judges of election at the meeting. The number of judges shall be one or three. A person who is a candidate for office to be filled at the meeting shall not act as a judge.

In case any person appointed as a judge fails to appear or fails or refuses to act, the vacancy may be filled by appointment made by the Board of Directors in advance of the convening of the meeting or at the meeting by the presiding officer thereof. The judges of election shall determine the number of shares outstanding and the voting power of each, the shares represented at the meeting, the existence of a quorum, the authenticity, validity, and effect of proxies, receive votes or ballots, hear and determine all challenges and questions in any way arising in connection with the right to vote, count and tabulate all votes, determine the result and do such acts as may be proper to conduct the election or vote with fairness to all shareholders. The judges of election shall perform their duties impartially, in good faith, to the best of their ability and as expeditiously as is practical. If there are three judges of election, the decision, act, or certificate of a majority shall be effective in all respects as the decision, act, or certificate of all.

On request of the presiding officer of the meeting, or of any shareholder, the judges shall make a report in writing of any challenge or question or matter determined by them, and execute a certificate of any fact found by them. Any report or certificate made by them shall be prima facie evidence of the facts stated therein.

• QUORUM. A shareholders’ meeting duly called shall not be organized for the transaction of business unless a quorum is present. The presence at a duly organized meeting of the shareholders entitled to cast at least a majority of the votes that all shareholders are entitled to cast on a particular matter shall constitute a quorum for the purpose of considering the matter. The shareholders so present can continue to do business until adjournment notwithstanding the withdrawal of enough shareholders to leave less than a quorum. If a meeting cannot be organized because a quorum has not attended, those present may adjourn the meeting to such time and place as they may determine, provided, however, that those shareholders entitled to vote who attend a meeting of shareholders at which directors are to be elected that has been previously adjourned for lack of a quorum, shall nevertheless constitute a quorum for the purpose of electing directors, although less than a quorum as fixed in this Section, and provided that those shareholders entitled to vote who attend a meeting of shareholders that has been previously adjourned for one or more periods aggregating at least fifteen days because of an absence of a quorum, although less than a quorum as fixed in this Section, shall nevertheless constitute a quorum for the purpose of acting upon any matter set forth in the notice of the meeting if the notice states that those shareholders who attend the adjourned meeting shall nevertheless constitute a quorum for the purpose of acting upon the matter.

• VOTING. Except in elections for directors, and except as the Business Corporation Law of 1988 shall otherwise provide, whenever any corporate action is to be taken by

vote of the shareholders, it shall be authorized upon requiring the affirmative vote of a majority of the votes cast by all the shareholders entitled to vote thereon and, if any shareholders are entitled to vote as a class, upon receiving the affirmative vote of a majority of the votes cast by the shareholders entitled to vote as a class. In each election for directors, the candidates receiving the highest number of votes shall be elected.

8. TELEPHONE PARTICIPATION. One or more shareholders may participate in a meeting of the shareholders by means of conference telephone or similar communications equipment by means of which all shareholders participating in the meeting can hear each other.

9. INFORMAL ACTION. Any action required or permitted to be taken at a meeting of the shareholders or of a class of shareholders may be taken without a meeting upon the written consent of shareholders who would have been entitled to cast the minimum number of votes that would be necessary to authorize the action at a meeting at which all shareholders entitled to vote thereon were present and voting. The consents shall be filed with the Secretary of the corporation. Action taken by less than all of the shareholders entitled to vote thereon, or less than all of a class of shareholders entitled to vote thereon, shall not become effective until after at least ten days’ written notice of the action has been given to each shareholder entitled to vote thereon who has not consented thereto.

10. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS. The Board of Directors shall furnish the shareholders with the financial statements specified in Section 1554 of the Business Corporation Law of 1988, except as otherwise provided by that Section.

ARTICLE II

BOARD OF DIRECTORS

1. FUNCTIONS GENERALLY. Unless otherwise provided by statute, all powers enumerated in Section 1502 of, and elsewhere in, the Business Corporation Law of 1988 or otherwise vested by law in a business corporation shall be exercised by or under the authority of, and the business and affairs of the corporation shall be managed under the direction of, a Board of Directors. The Board of Directors shall have the authority to fix the compensation of directors for their services and a director may be a salaried officer of the corporation.

2. QUALIFICATIONS AND NUMBER. Each director shall be a natural person of full age. A director need not be a shareholder, a citizen of the United States, or a resident of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania. The initial Board of Directors shall consist of one (1) person. Except for the first Board of Directors, such number may be fixed from time to time by action of the shareholders or of the directors, or, if the number is not so fixed, the number shall be one (1). The number of directors may be increased or decreased by action of shareholders or of the directors.

3. ELECTION AND TERM. The first Board of Directors shall consist of the directors selected by the incorporator. Each initial director shall hold office until the first annual meeting of shareholders and until his successor has been selected and qualified or until his earlier death, resignation, or removal. Thereafter, each director who is selected at an annual meeting of

shareholders, and each director who is selected in the interim to fill vacancies and newly created directorships, shall hold office until the next annual meeting of shareholders and until his successor has been elected and qualified or until his earlier death, resignation, or removal. A decrease in the number of directors shall not have the effect of shortening the term of any incumbent director.

4. MEETINGS.

• TIME. Meetings shall be held at such time as the Board shall fix, except that the first meeting of a newly elected Board shall be held as soon after its election as the directors may conveniently assemble.

• PLACE. Meetings shall be held at such place within or without the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania as shall be fixed by the Board.

• CALL. No call shall be required for regular meetings for which the time and place have been fixed. Special meetings may be called by or at the direction of the Chairman of the Board, if any, of the President, or of a majority of the directors in office.

• NOTICE OR ACTUAL OR CONSTRUCTIVE WAIVER. No notice shall be required for regular meetings for which the time and place have been fixed. Written, oral, or any other mode of notice of the time and place shall be given for special meetings in sufficient time for the convenient assembly of the directors thereat. The notice of any meeting need not specify the business to be transacted at, or the purpose of, the meeting. Any requirement of furnishing a written notice shall be waived by any director who signs a waiver of notice in writing before or after the time stated therein, or who attends the meeting except for the express purpose of objecting, at the beginning of the meeting, to the transaction of any business because the meeting was not lawfully called or convened.

• QUORUM AND ACTION. A majority of the directors in office shall be necessary to constitute a quorum for the transaction of business. A majority of the directors present, whether or not a quorum is present, may adjourn a meeting to another time and place. Except as herein otherwise provided, and except as may be otherwise provided by the Business Corporation Law of 1988, acts of a majority of the directors present and voting at a meeting at which a quorum is present shall be the acts of the Board of Directors. When a meeting is adjourned, it shall not be necessary to give any notice of the adjourned meeting or of the business to be transacted at an adjourned meeting, other than by announcement at the meeting at which such adjournment is taken.

• CHAIRMAN OF THE MEETING. The Chairman of the Board, if any and if present and acting, shall preside at all meetings. Otherwise, the President, if present and acting, or any other director chosen by the Board, shall preside.

5. REMOVAL OF DIRECTORS BY SHAREHOLDERS. The entire Board of Directors or any individual director may be removed from office in accordance with the provisions of Section 1726 of the Business Corporation Law of 1988. In case the entire Board or any one or more directors be so removed, new directors may be elected at the same meetings.

6. COMMITTEES. The Board of Directors may, by resolution adopted by a majority of the directors in office establish one or more committees, each committee to consist of one or more of the directors of the corporation. The Board may designate one or more directors as alternate members of any committee, who may replace any absent or disqualified member at any meeting of the committee or for the purposes of any written action by the committee. Any such committee, to the extent provided in such resolution, shall have and may exercise all of the powers and authority of the Board of Directors, except that a committee shall not have any power or authority as to any matter in respect of which the Business Corporation Law of 1988 prohibits the delegation of power or authority to a committee. In the absence or disqualification of a member and alternate member or members of a committee or committees, the member or members thereof present at any meeting and not disqualified from voting, whether or not he or they constitute a quorum, may unanimously appoint another director to act at the meeting in the place of the absent or disqualified member. No provision of this Article shall be construed as purporting to negate the provisions of subsection (c) of Section 1731 of the Business Corporation Law of 1988.

7. INFORMAL ACTION. Any action required or permitted to be taken at a meeting of the Board of Directors may be taken without a meeting if, prior to or subsequent to the action, a consent or consents thereto by all of the directors in office is filed with the Secretary of the corporation.

8. TELEPHONE PARTICIPATION. One or more directors may participate in a meeting of the Board of Directors by means of conference telephone or similar communications equipment by means of which all persons participating in the meeting can hear each other.

ARTICLE III

OFFICERS

The corporation shall have a President, a Secretary, and a Treasurer, and may have such other officers and assistant officers as the Board of Directors shall authorize from time to time. The President and the Secretary shall be natural persons of full age. The Treasurer may be a corporation, but, if a natural person, shall be of full age. The Board of Directors shall elect and fix the compensation of all officers and assistant officers. Unless the Board shall otherwise require, it shall not be necessary for any of the officers of the corporation to be directors. Any number of offices may be held by the same person. The Board of Directors may secure the fidelity of any or all of the officers by bond or otherwise.

The Board of Directors, as soon as may be after its election in each year, shall elect or appoint a President, a Secretary, and a Treasurer, and from time to time may appoint one or more Vice Presidents and such Assistant Secretaries, Assistant Treasurers, and such other officers, agents, and employees as it may deem proper. The term of office of all officers shall be one year and until their respective successors are elected and qualify or until their earlier death, resignation, or removal.

All officers, as between themselves and the corporation, shall have such authority and perform such duties in the management of the corporation as may be determined by or pursuant to resolutions or orders of the Board of Directors.

Any officer or agent may be removed by the Board of Directors with or without cause. The Board of Directors may fill any vacancy resulting from removal or otherwise.

ARTICLE IV

REGISTERED OFFICE-CORPORATE RECORDS

Subject to Section 109 of the Associations Code, the address of the initial registered office of the corporation in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania is set forth in the original articles of incorporation.

The corporation shall keep at its registered office in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania or principal place of business wherever situated or at the office of its registrar or transfer agent a share register giving the names and addresses of all shareholders and the number and class of shares held by each.

ARTICLE V

FISCAL YEAR

The fiscal year of the corporation shall be fixed, and shall be subject to change, by the Board of Directors.

ARTICLE VI

INDEMNIFICATION OF OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS

To the fullest extent permitted by the Business Corporation Law of 1988, the corporation shall indemnify any and all persons who may serve or who have served at any time as directors or officers, or who, at the request of the Board of Directors, may serve or at any time have served as directors or officers of another corporation in which the corporation at such time owned or may own shares of stock or of which it was or may be a creditor, and their respective heirs, administrators, successors and assigns. Such indemnification shall be in addition to any other rights to which those indemnified may be entitled under any law, by-law, agreement, shareholder vote or otherwise.

ARTICLE VII

CONTROL OVER BYLAWS

After the adoption of the initial Bylaws by the incorporator, and except as otherwise required by the provisions of the Business Corporation Law of 1988, the authority to adopt, amend, and repeal the Bylaws is expressly vested in the Board of Directors, subject to the power of the shareholders to change such action.

EX-3.19

Exhibit 3.19

  Secretary of State Corporations Division 315 West Tower #2 Martin Luther King, Jr. Dr. Atlanta, Georgia 30334-1530 DOCKET NUMBER CONTROL NUMBER DATE INC/AUTH/FILED JURISDICTION PRINT DATE FORM NUMBER :061520012 :J416301 :11/01/1984 :GEORGIA :06/01/2006 :215

CORPORATION SERVICE COMPANY

POLLYE JANISSE

1201 HAYS ST

TALLAHASSEE FL 32301

CERTIFIED COPY

I, Cathy Cox, the Secretary of State of the State of Georgia, do hereby certify under the seal of my office that the attached documents are true and correct copies of documents filed under the name of

EDMC MARKETING AND ADVERTISING, INC.

A DOMESTIC PROFIT CORPORATION

Said entity was formed in the jurisdiction set forth above and has filed in the Office of Secretary of State on the date set forth above its certificate of limited partnership, articles of incorporation, articles of association, articles of organization or application for certificate of authority to transact business in Georgia.

This certificate is issued pursuant to Title 14 of the Official Code of Georgia Annotated and is prima-facie evidence of the existence or nonexistence of the facts stated herein.

Cathy Cox

Secretary of State

Secretary of State Corporations Division 315 West Tower #2 Martin Luther King, Jr. Dr. Atlanta, Georgia 30334-1530 DOCKET NUMBER CONTROL NUMBER EFFECTIVE DAT REFERENCE PRINT DATE FORM NUMBER : K92030768
: J416301
: 07/19/1999
: 0048
: 07/22/1999
: 611

AXIS RESEARCH, INC.

70 MANSELL COURT

SUITE 100

ROSWELL, GA 30076

CERTIFICATE OF NAME CHANGE AMENDMENT

I, Cathy Cox, the Secretary of State and the Corporations Commissioner of the State of Georgia, do hereby certify under the seal of my office that

EMC MARKETING & ADVERTISING, INC.

A DOMESTIC PROFIT CORPORATION

has filed articles of amendment in the Office of the Secretary of State changing its name to

EDMC MARKETING AND ADVERTISING, INC.

and has paid the required fees as provided by Title 14 of the Official Code of Georgia Annotated. Attached hereto is a true and correct copy of said articles of amendment.

WITNESS my hand and official seal in the City of Atlanta and the State of Georgia on the date set forth above.

Cathy Cox

Secretary of State

ARTICLES OF AMENDMENT

OF

EMC MARKETING AND ADVERTISING, INC.

To the Secretary of State

State of Georgia

Pursuant to the provisions of the Georgia Business Corporation Code, the corporation hereinafter named (the “Corporation”) does hereby adopt the following Articles of Amendment.

1. The name of the Corporation is EMC Marketing and Advertising, Inc.

2. Article 1 of the Articles of Incorporation of the Corporation is hereby amended so as henceforth to read as follows:

“The name of the Corporation is EDMC Marketing and Advertising, Inc.”

3. The amendment herein provided for was duly recommended by the Board of Directors of the Corporation to the shareholders of the Corporation on June 17, 1999.

4. The amendment herein provided for was duly approved by the shareholders of the Corporation on June 17, 1999 in accordance with the provisions of Section 14-2-1003 of the Georgia Business Corporation Code.

Executed on June 17,1999.

EMC MARKETING AND ADVERTISING, INC.
By:
	Anthony F Mediate, President

SECRETARY OF STATE

JUL 19 1:00 P.M. ‘99

Secretary of State Business Services and Regulation Suite 315, West Tower #2 Martin Luther King Jr. Dr. Atlanta, Georgia 30334-1530 DOCKET NUMBER CONTROL NUMBER EFFECTIVE DATE REFERENCE PRINT DATE FORM NUMBER : 930130715
: 8416301
: 01/08/1993
: 0045
: 02/18/1993
: 611

CYNTHIA L. WOOLHEATER

ECKERT, SEAMANS, CHERIN & MELLOTT

600 GRANT ST. 42ND FLOOR

PITTSBURGH PA 15219

CERTIFICATE OF NAME CHANGE AMENDMENT

I, MAX CLELAND, Secretary of State and the Corporation Commissioner of the State of Georgia, do hereby certify under the seal of my office that

EMC ADVERTISING, INC.

A DOMESTIC PROFIT CORPORATION

has filed articles of amendment in the office of the Secretary of State changing its name to

EMC MARKETING & ADVERTISING, INC.

and has paid the required fees as provided by Title 14 of the Official Code of Georgia Annotated. Attached hereto is a true and correct copy of said articles of amendment.

WITNESS my hand and official seal in the City of Atlanta and the State of Georgia on the date set forth above.

MAX CLELAND

SECRETARY OF STATE

VERLEY J. SPIVEY

DEPUTY SECRETARY OF STATE

ARTICLES OF AMENDMENT

OF

EMC ADVERTISING, INC.

To the Secretary of State

State of Georgia

Pursuant to the provisions of the Georgia Business Corporation Code, the corporation hereinafter named (the “corporation”) does hereby adopt the following Articles of Amendment.

1. The name of the corporation is EMC Advertising, Inc.

2. Article I of the Articles of Incorporation of the corporation is hereby amended so as henceforth to read as follows:“The name of the corporation is EMC Marketing & Advertising, Inc.”

3. The amendment herein provided for was duly recommended by the Board of Directors of the corporation to the shareholders of the corporation on January 4, 1993.

4. The amendment herein provided for was duly approved by the shareholders of the corporation on January 5, 1993 in accordance with the provisions of Section 14-2-1003 of the Georgia Business Corporation Code.

Executed on January 5, 1993

EMC ADVERTISING, INC.
By
	Mark C. Coulson, Assistant Secretary

SECRETARY OF STATE”

FEB 17 2:15 PM ‘93

PUBLISHER’S AFFIDAVIT

STATE OF GEORGIA, – County of Fulton.

Before me, the undersigned, a Notary Public, this day personally came CATHY WRIGHT , who, being duly sworn, according to law, says that SHE is the AGENT of the Daily Report Company, publishers of the Fulton County Daily Report, official newspaper published at Atlanta, in said county and State, and that the publication, of which the annexed is a true copy, was published in said paper on the 19th, 26th day(s) of JANUARY , 1993 , and on the      days of             , 19        , as provided by law.

Subscribed and sworn to before me this

28 day of JANUARY, 1993.

Notary Public, DeKalb County, Georgia

My Commission expires on              29, 1993

STATE OF GEORGIA

OFFICE OF SECRETARY OF STATE

I, Max Cleland, Secretary of State of the State of Georgia, do hereby certify that

“EMC ADVERTISING, INC.”

has been duly incorporated under the laws of the State of Georgia on the 1st day of November, 1984, by the filing of articles of incorporation in the office of the Secretary of State and the fees therefor paid, as provided by law, and that attached hereto is a true copy of said articles of incorporation.

IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set

my hand and affixed the seal of my office, at the

Capitol, in the City of Atlanta, this 1st day of

November in the year of our Lord One Thousand

Nine Hundred and Eighty Four and of the

Independence of the United States of America the

Two Hundred and Nine.

SECRETARY OF STATE EX OFFICIO

CORPORATION

COMMISSIONER OF THE STATE OF GEORGIA

ARTICLES OF INCORPORATION

OF

EMC ADVERTISING, INC.

We, the undersigned natural persons of the age of eighteen years or more, acting as incorporators of a corporation under the Georgia Business Corporation Code, do hereby adopt the following Articles of Incorporation for such corporation:

FIRST: The name of the corporation is: EMC ADVERTISING, INC.

SECOND: The corporation is organized pursuant to the provisions of the Georgia Business Corporation Code.

THIRD: The period of its duration is perpetual.

FOURTH: The purpose or purposes for which the corporation is organized are: any and all lawful purposes for which a corporation may be incorporated under the laws of Georgia, including, but not limited to, the ownership and operation of an advertising agency.

FIFTH: The aggregate number of shares which the corporation shall have authority to issue is One Thousand (1,000), of the par value of One Dollar ($1.00) each.

SIXTH: The corporation will not commence business until it has received the sun of Five Hundred Dollars ($500) as consideration for the issuance of shares.

SEVENTH: The address of the initial registered office of the corporation is 2 Peachtree Street, N.W., c/o C T Corporation System, Atlanta, Georgia 30383 and the name of its initial registered agent at such address is C T Corporation System.

EIGHTH: Provisions limiting or denying to shareholders the preemptive right to acquire additional shares of the corporation are: no shareholder shall be entitled as a matter of right to subscribe or receive additional shares of any class of stock of the corporation, whether now or hereafter authorized, or any bonds, debentures or other

securities convertible into stock, but such additional shares of stock other securities convertible into stock may be issued or disposed of by the board of directors to such persons and on such terms as in its discretion it shall deem advisable.

NINTH: Provisions not inconsistent with the Georgia Business Corporation Code or with any law limiting in any manner the corporate powers conferred by said code are: N/A.

TENTH: The number of directors constituting the initial board of directors shall be three (3); and the names and addresses of each person who is to serve as a member thereof are:

NAME	ADDRESS
Richard D. Royston	3376 Peachtree Rd., N.E.
	Atlanta, GA 30326
Robert B. Knutson	300 Sixth Avenue
	Pittsburgh, PA 15219
Ellis J. Mathews	300 Sixth Avenue
	Pittsburgh, PA 15219

ELEVENTH: The names and addresses of the incorporators are:

NAME	ADDRESS
Rose M. Ogden	Oliver Bldg., Mellon Sq.
	Pittsburgh, PA 15222
Eileen E. Pallotta	Oliver Bldg., Mellon Sq.
	Pittsburgh, PA 15222
Mary Jo Galasso	Oliver Bldg., Mellon Sq.
	Pittsburgh, PA 15222

TWELFTH: In all elections for directors every shareholder, entitled to vote shall have the right to vote, in person or by proxy, the number of shares of stock owed by him, for as many persons as there are directors to be elected, or to cumulate the vote of said shares, and give one candidate as many votes as the number of directors multiplied by the number of his shares of stock shall equal, or to distribute the votes on the same principle among as many candidates as he may see fit.

In witness whereof, we have hereunto set our hands this 3rd day of October, 1984.

Rose M. Ogden

Eileen E. Pallotta

Mary Jo Galasso

RECEIVED

1984 NO. 2:40

SECRET

CORPORA

EX-3.20

Exhibit 3.20

BYLAWS

OF

EDMC MARKETING AND ADVERTISING, INC.

(a Georgia corporation)

ARTICLE I

SHAREHOLDERS

1. SHARE CERTIFICATES. Certificates evidencing fully-paid shares of the corporation shall set forth thereon the statements prescribed by Section 14-2-625 of the Georgia Business Corporation Code (“Business Corporation Code”) and by any other applicable provision of law, shall be signed, either manually or in facsimile, by one or more of the following officers: the President, a Vice-President, the Secretary, an Assistant Secretary, the Treasurer, an Assistant Treasurer, or by one or more officers designated by the Board of Directors, and may bear the corporate seal or its facsimile. If the person who signed a share certificate, either manually or in facsimile, no longer holds office when the certificate is issued, the certificate is nevertheless valid. If the certificate is signed in facsimile, then it must be countersigned by a transfer agent or registered by a registrar other than the corporation itself or an employee of the corporation. The transfer agent or registrar may sign either manually or by facsimile.

2. FRACTIONAL SHARES OR SCRIP. The corporation may: issue fractions of a share or pay in money the value of fractions of a share; arrange for disposition of fractional shares by or for the account of the shareholders; and issue scrip in registered or bearer form entitling the holder to receive a full share upon surrendering enough scrip to equal a full share. Each certificate representing scrip must be conspicuously labeled “scrip” and must contain the information required by subsection (b) of Section 14-2-625 of the Business Corporation Code. The holder of a fractional share is entitled to exercise the rights of a shareholder, including the right to vote, to receive dividends, and to participate in the assets of the corporation upon liquidation. The holder of scrip is not entitled to any of these rights unless the scrip provides for them. The Board of Directors may authorize the issuance of scrip subject to any conditions considered desirable, including (a) that the scrip will become void if not exchanged for full shares before a specified date; and (b) that the shares for which the scrip is exchangeable may be sold and the proceeds paid to the scripholders.

3. SHARE TRANSFERS. Upon compliance with any provisions restricting the transferability of shares that may be set forth in the articles of incorporation, these Bylaws, or any written agreement in respect thereof, transfers of shares of the corporation shall be made only on the books of the corporation by the registered holder thereof, or by his attorney thereunto authorized by

1

power of attorney duly executed and filed with the Secretary of the corporation, or with a transfer agent or a registrar and on surrender of the certificate or certificates for such shares properly endorsed and the payment of all taxes thereon, if any. Except as may be otherwise provided by law or these Bylaws, the person in whose name shares stand on the books of the corporation shall be deemed the owner thereof for all purposes as regards the corporation; provided that whenever any transfer of shares shall be made for collateral security, and not absolutely, such fact, if known to the Secretary of the corporation, shall be so expressed in the entry of transfer.

4. RECORD DATE FOR SHAREHOLDERS. For the purpose of determining shareholders entitled to notice of or to vote at any meeting of shareholders or any adjournment thereof, to demand a special meeting, or to take any other action, the Board of Directors of the corporation may fix a date as the record date for any such determination of shareholders, such date in any case to be not more than seventy days before the meeting or action requiring such determination of shareholders. A determination of shareholders entitled to notice of or to vote at a shareholders’ meeting is effective for any adjournment of the meeting unless the Board of Directors fixes a new record date, which it must do if the meeting is adjourned to a date more than one hundred twenty days after the date fixed for the original meeting.

5. MEANING OF CERTAIN TERMS. As used herein in respect of the right to notice of a meeting of shareholders or a waiver thereof or to participate or vote thereat or to consent or dissent in writing in lieu of a meeting, as the case may be, the term “share” or “shares” or “shareholder” or “shareholders” refers to an outstanding share or shares and to a holder or holders of record of outstanding shares when the corporation is authorized to issue only one class of shares, and said reference is also intended to include any outstanding share or shares and any holder or holders of record of outstanding shares of any class upon which or upon whom the articles of incorporation confer such rights where there are two or more classes or series of shares or upon which or upon whom the Business Corporation Code confers such rights notwithstanding that the articles of incorporation may provide for more than one class or series of shares, one or more of which are limited or denied such rights thereunder.

6. SHAREHOLDER MEETINGS.

• TIME. The annual meeting shall be held on the date fixed from time to time by the directors. A special meeting shall be held on the date fixed from time to time by the directors except when the Business Corporation Code confers the right to call a special meeting upon the shareholders.

• PLACE. Annual meetings and special meetings shall be held at such place in or out of the State of Georgia as the directors shall from time to time fix.

• CALL. Annual meetings may be called by the directors or the Chairperson of the Board of Directors, the President, or the Secretary or by any officer instructed by the directors or the President to call the meeting. Special meetings may be called in like manner.

2

• NOTICE OR ACTUAL OR CONSTRUCTIVE WAIVER OF NOTICE. The corporation shall notify shareholders of the date, time, and place of each annual and special shareholders’ meeting. Such notice shall be no fewer than ten nor more than sixty days before the meeting date. Unless the Business Corporation Code or the articles of incorporation require otherwise, notice of an annual meeting shall not be required to include a description of the purpose or purposes for which the meeting is called. Notice of a special meeting must include a description of the purpose or purposes for which the meeting is called. Unless the Business Corporation Code or the articles of incorporation require otherwise, the corporation is required to give notice only to shareholders entitled to vote at the meeting. A shareholder may waive any notice required by the Business Corporation Code, the articles of incorporation or the Bylaws before or after the time stated in the notice. The waiver must be in writing, be signed by the shareholder entitled to the notice, and be delivered to the corporation for inclusion in the minutes or filing with the corporate records. A shareholder’s attendance at a meeting waives objection to lack of notice or defective notice of the meeting, unless the shareholder at the beginning of the meeting objects to holding the meeting or transacting business at the meeting; and waives objection to consideration of a particular matter at the meeting that is not within the purpose or purposes described in the meeting notice, unless the shareholder objects to considering the matter when it is presented. The term “notice” as used in this paragraph shall mean notice as prescribed by Section 14-2-141 of the Business Corporation Code.

• VOTING LIST FOR MEETING. After fixing a record date for a meeting, the corporation shall prepare an alphabetical list of the names of all its shareholders who are entitled to notice of a shareholders’ meeting. The list must be arranged by voting group, and within each voting group by class or series of shares, and show the address of and number of shares held by each shareholder. The shareholders’ list must be available for inspection by any shareholder, his agent, or his attorney at the time and place of the meeting.

• CONDUCT OF MEETING. Meetings of the shareholders shall be presided over by one of the following officers in the order of seniority and if present and acting—the Chairperson of the Board, if any, the Vice-Chairperson of the Board, if any, the President, a Vice-President, if any, or, if none of the foregoing is in office and present and acting, by a chairperson to be chosen by the shareholders. The Secretary of the corporation, or in his absence, an Assistant Secretary, shall act as secretary of every meeting, but, if neither the Secretary nor an Assistant Secretary is present, the chairperson of the meeting shall appoint a secretary of the meeting.

• PROXY REPRESENTATION. A shareholder or his or her agent or attorney in fact may appoint a proxy to vote or otherwise act for the shareholder by executing a writing which authorizes another person or other persons to vote or otherwise act for the shareholder in accordance with the provisions of Section 14-2-722 of the Business Corporation Code.

• SHARES HELD BY NOMINEES. The corporation may establish a procedure by which the beneficial owner of shares that are registered in the name of a nominee is recognized by the corporation as the shareholder. The extent of this recognition may be determined in the procedure.

3

• QUORUM. Unless the articles of incorporation or the Business Corporation Code provides otherwise, a majority of the votes entitled to be cast on the matter by the voting group constitutes a quorum of that voting group for action on that matter. Once a share is represented for any purpose at a meeting other than solely to object to holding the meeting or transacting business at the meeting, it is deemed present for quorum purposes for the remainder of the meeting and for any adjournment of that meeting unless a new record date is or must be set for that adjourned meeting.

• VOTING. Directors are elected by a plurality of the votes cast by the shares entitled to vote in the election at a meeting at which a quorum is present. If a quorum exists, action on a matter, other than the election of directors, by a voting group is approved if the votes cast within the voting group favoring the action exceed the votes cast opposing the action unless the articles of incorporation, a Bylaw authorized by the articles under Section 14-2-1021 of the Business Corporation Code, or the Business Corporation Code requires a greater number of affirmative votes.

7. ACTION WITHOUT MEETING. Action required or permitted by the provisions of the Business Corporation Code to be taken at a shareholders’ meeting may be taken without a meeting in accordance with the provisions of Section 14-2-704 of the Business Corporation Code.

8. ADJOURNMENT. The holders of a majority of the voting shares represented at a meeting, whether or not a quorum is present, may adjourn such meeting from time to time.

ARTICLE II

BOARD OF DIRECTORS

1. FUNCTIONS GENERALLY - COMPENSATION. All corporate powers shall be exercised by or under the authority of, and the business and affairs of the corporation managed under the direction of, a Board of Directors. The Board may fix the compensation of directors.

2. QUALIFICATIONS AND NUMBER. Directors shall be natural persons who are eighteen years of age or older, but need not be shareholders, citizens of the United States, or a residents of the State of Georgia. The number of directors shall not be less than 1 (one) nor more than five (5). The number of directors may be fixed or changed from time to time, within such minimum and maximum, by the shareholders or by the Board of Directors. If not so fixed, the number shall be three (3). The number of directors shall never be less than one.

3. TERMS AND VACANCIES. The terms of directors expire at the next annual shareholders’ meeting following their election. A decrease in the number of directors does not shorten an incumbent director’s term. A director elected to fill a vacancy shall be elected for the unexpired term of his or her predecessor in office. Any directorship to be filled by reason of an increase in the number of directors may be filled by the Board of Directors, but only for a term of

4

office continuing until the next election of directors by the shareholders and until the election and qualification of the successor. Despite the expiration of a director’s term, he or she continues to serve until his or her successor is elected and qualifies or until there is a decrease in the number of directors. If a vacancy occurs on the Board of Directors, including a vacancy resulting from an increase in the number of directors, the shareholders or the Board of Directors may fill the vacancy; or if the directors remaining in office constitute fewer than a quorum of the Board of Directors, they may fill the vacancy by the affirmative vote of a majority of all the directors remaining in office.

4. MEETINGS.

• TIME. Meetings shall be held at such time as the Board shall fix, except that the first meeting of a newly elected Board shall be held as soon after its election as the directors may conveniently assemble.

• PLACE. The Board of Directors may hold regular or special meetings in or out of the State of Georgia at such place as shall be fixed by the Board.

• CALL. No call shall be required for regular meetings for which the time and place have been fixed. Special meetings may be called by or at the direction of the Chairperson of the Board, if any, the Vice-Chairperson of the Board, if any, of the President, or of a majority of the directors in office.

• NOTICE OR ACTUAL OR CONSTRUCTIVE WAIVER. Regular meetings of the Board of Directors may be held without notice of the date, time, place, or purpose of the meeting. Written, or oral, notice of the time and place shall be given for special meetings in sufficient time for the convenient assembly of the directors thereat. The notice of any meeting need not describe the purpose of the meeting. A director may waive any notice required by the Business Corporation Code or by these Bylaws before or after the date and time stated in the notice. A director’s attendance at or participation in a meeting waives any required notice to him or her of the meeting unless the director at the beginning of the meeting or promptly upon his or her arrival objects to holding the meeting or transacting business at the meeting and does not thereafter vote for or assent to action taken at the meeting. Except as hereinbefore provided, a waiver shall be in writing, signed by the director entitled to the notice, and delivered to the corporation for inclusion in the minutes or filing with the corporate records.

• QUORUM AND ACTION. A quorum of the Board of Directors consists of a majority of the number of directors prescribed in or fixed in accordance with these Bylaws or unless otherwise specifically provided by the Business Corporation Code. If a quorum is present when a vote is taken, the affirmative vote of a majority of directors present shall be the act of the Board of Directors. The Board of Directors may permit any or all directors to participate in a regular or special meeting by, or conduct the meeting through use of, any means of communication by which all directors participating may simultaneously hear each other during the meeting. A director participating in a meeting by this means is deemed to be present in person at the meeting.

5

• CHAIRMAN OF THE MEETING. Meetings of the Board of Directors shall be presided over by the following directors in the order of seniority and if present and acting—the Chairperson of the Board, if any, the Vice-Chairperson of the Board, if any, the President, or any other director chosen by the Board.

5. REMOVAL OF DIRECTORS. The shareholders may remove one or more directors with or without cause pursuant to the provisions of Section 14-2-808 of the Business Corporation Code.

6. COMMITTEES. The Board of Directors may create one or more committees and appoint members of the Board of Directors to serve on them. Each committee may have one or more members, who serve at the pleasure of the Board of Directors. The provisions of Sections 14-2-820 through 14-2-824 of the Business Corporation Code, which govern meetings, action without meetings, notice and waiver of notice, and quorum and voting requirements, apply to committees and their members as well. To the extent specified by the Board of Directors or these Bylaws, each committee may exercise the authority of the Board of Directors under Section 14-2-801 of the Business Corporation Code except such authority as may not be delegated under the Business Corporation Code.

7. ACTION WITHOUT MEETING. Action required or permitted by the Business Corporation Code to be taken at a Board of Directors’ meeting may be taken without a meeting if the action is taken by all members of the Board. The action must be evidenced by one or more written consents describing the action taken, signed by each director, and delivered to the corporation for inclusion in the minutes or filing with the corporate records.

ARTICLE III

OFFICERS

The corporation shall have a President, and a Secretary, and such other officers as may be deemed necessary, who may be appointed by the directors. The same individual may simultaneously hold more than one office in the corporation. A duly appointed officer may appoint one or more officers or assistant officers.

Each officer of the corporation shall have the authority and shall perform the duties prescribed by the Board of Directors or by direction of an officer authorized by the Board of Directors to prescribe the duties of other officers; provided, that the Secretary shall have the responsibility for preparing minutes of the directors’ and shareholders’ meetings and for authenticating records of the corporation, and provided further, that unless the Articles of Incorporation or a resolution of the Board of Directors provide otherwise, the President shall have the authority to conduct all ordinary business and may execute and deliver on behalf of the corporation any contract, conveyance, or similar document not requiring approval by the Board of Directors or shareholders as provided in the Business Corporation Code.

6

The Board of Directors may remove any officer at any time with or without cause.

ARTICLE IV

REGISTERED OFFICE AND AGENT

The address of the initial registered office of the corporation and the name of the initial registered agent of the corporation are set forth in the original articles of incorporation.

ARTICLE V

CORPORATE SEAL

The corporate seal shall have inscribed thereon the name of the corporation and shall be in such form and contain such other words and/or figures as the Board of Directors shall determine or the law require.

ARTICLE VI

FISCAL YEAR

The fiscal year of the corporation shall be fixed, and shall be subject to change, by the Board of Directors.

ARTICLE VII

CONTROL OVER BYLAWS

The corporation’s Board of Directors may amend or repeal the Bylaws, except as otherwise required by the Business Corporation Code. Notwithstanding the foregoing provision, the corporation’s shareholders may amend or repeal the Bylaws or adopt new Bylaws.

7

EX-3.21

Exhibit 3.21

Secretary of State Business Services and Regulation Suite 315, West Tower 2 Martin Luther King Jr. Dr. Atlanta, Georgia 30334-1530 CONTROL NUMBER EFFECTIVE DATE COUNTY REFERENCE PRINT DATE FORM NUMBER : 9203070
: 02/25/1992
: CHATHAM
: 0010
: 02/29/1992
: 311

DON L. WATERS

200 E. ST. JULIAN STREET

THIRD FLOOR

SAVANNAH GA 31401

CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION

I, MAX CLELAND, Secretary of State and the Corporation Commissioner of the State of Georgia, do hereby certify under the sea! of my office that

HIGHER EDUCATION SERVICES, INC.

has been duly incorporated under the laws of the State of Georgia on the effective date stated above by the filing of articles of incorporation in the office of the Secretary of State and by the paying of fees as provided by Title 14 of the Official Code of Georgia Annotated.

WITNESS my hand and official seal in the City of Atlanta and the State of Georgia on the date set forth above.

MAX CLELAND

SECRETARY OF STATE

VERLEY J. SPIVEY

DEPUTY SECRETARY OF STATE

ARTICLES OF INCORPORATION

OF

HIGHER EDUCATION SERVICES, INC.

I.

The name of the corporation is: “HIGHER EDUCATION SERVICES, INC.”

II.

The corporation shall have all of the powers and shall enjoy all of the rights, privileges and immunities as provided for under the Georgia Business Corporation Code.

III.

The corporation shall have the authority to issue not more than 1000 shares of common stock of no par value.

IV.

The initial registered office of the corporation shall be located at 200 East St. Julian St., Third Floor, Savannah, Chatham County, Georgia 31401. The initial registered agent of the corporation is Don L. Waters.

V.

The name and address of the incorporator is Don L. Waters, Hunter, Maclean, Exley & Dunn, P.C., 200 East St. Julian Street, Third Floor, Savannah, Georgia 31401.

VI.

The mailing address of the initial principal office of the corporation is 709 Mall Boulevard, Savannah, Georgia 31406.

VII.

The corporation may make distributions to its shareholders and/or purchase its own shares to the fullest extent permitted by the Georgia Business Corporation Code as the same now exists or hereafter may be amended.

VIII.

(a) To the fullest extent permitted by the Georgia Business Corporation Code as the same exists or may hereafter be amended, a director of the corporation shall have no personal liability to the corporation or its shareholders for monetary damages for breach of his/her duty of care or other duty as a director, provided that no provision shall eliminate the liability of a director:

(i) for any appropriation, in violation of his/her duties, of any business opportunity of the corporation;

(ii) for acts or omissions which involve intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law;

(iii) for the types of liability set forth in Section 14-2-832 of the Georgia Business Corporation Code (or any future statute of similar import); or

(iv) for any transaction from which the director derived an improper personal benefit.

(b) This provision shall not eliminate the liability of a director for any act or omission occurring prior to the date when these Articles of Incorporation become effective. Any repeal, amendment or modification of the foregoing paragraph of this provision by the shareholders of the corporation shall not adversely affect any right, benefit or protection of a director of the corporation existing at the time of such repeal, amendment or modification.

IX.

Any action required by the Georgia Business Corporation Code to be taken at a meeting of the shareholders of the corporation or any action which may be taken at a meeting of the shareholders of the corporation may be taken without a meeting if written consent, setting forth the action so taken, is signed by persons who would be entitled to vote at a meeting those shares having voting power to cast not less than the minimum number of votes that would be necessary to authorize or take such action at a meeting at which all shareholders entitled to vote were present and voted.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned incorporator has set his hand and seal to these Articles of Incorporation, this 9th day of January, 1992.

	(L.S.)
Don L. Waters, Incorporator

SECRETARY OF STATE

FEB 25 13 PM ‘92

BSR (1)

4

EX-3.22

Exhibit 3.22

AMENDED AND RESTATED

BYLAWS

OF

HIGHER EDUCATION SERVICES, INC.

(a Georgia corporation)

ARTICLE I

SHAREHOLDERS

1. SHARE CERTIFICATES. Certificates evidencing fully-paid shares of the corporation shall set forth thereon the statements prescribed by Section 14-2-625 of the Georgia Business Corporation Code (“Business Corporation Code”) and by any other applicable provision of law, shall be signed, either manually or in facsimile, by one or more of the following officers: the President, a Vice-President, the Secretary, an Assistant Secretary, the Treasurer, an Assistant Treasurer, or by one or more officers designated by the Board of Directors, and may bear the corporate seal or its facsimile. If the person who signed a share certificate, either manually or in facsimile, no longer holds office when the certificate is issued, the certificate is nevertheless valid. If the certificate is signed in facsimile, then it must be countersigned by a transfer agent or registered by a registrar other than the corporation itself or an employee of the corporation. The transfer agent or registrar may sign either manually or by facsimile.

2. FRACTIONAL SHARES OR SCRIP. The corporation may: issue fractions of a share or pay in money the value of fractions of a share; arrange for disposition of fractional shares by or for the account of the shareholders; and issue scrip in registered or bearer form entitling the holder to receive a full share upon surrendering enough scrip to equal a full share. Each certificate representing scrip must be conspicuously labeled “scrip” and must contain the information required by subsection (b) of Section 14-2-625 of the Business Corporation Code. The holder of a fractional share is entitled to exercise the rights of a shareholder, including the right to vote, to receive dividends, and to participate in the assets of the corporation upon liquidation. The holder of scrip is not entitled to any of these rights unless the scrip provides for them. The Board of Directors may authorize the issuance of scrip subject to any conditions considered desirable, including (a) that the scrip will become void if not exchanged for full shares before a specified date; and (b) that the shares for which the scrip is exchangeable may be sold and the proceeds paid to the scripholders.

3. SHARE TRANSFERS. Upon compliance with any provisions restricting the transferability of shares that may be set forth in the articles of incorporation, these Bylaws, or any written agreement in respect thereof, transfers of shares of the corporation shall be made only on the books of the corporation by the registered holder thereof, or by his attorney thereunto authorized by power of attorney duly executed and filed with the Secretary of the corporation, or with a transfer

- 1 -

agent or a registrar and on surrender of the certificate or certificates for such shares properly endorsed and the payment of all taxes thereon, if any. Except as may be otherwise provided by law or these Bylaws, the person in whose name shares stand on the books of the corporation shall be deemed the owner thereof for all purposes as regards the corporation; provided that whenever any transfer of shares shall be made for collateral security, and not absolutely, such fact, if known to the Secretary of the corporation, shall be so expressed in the entry of transfer.

4. RECORD DATE FOR SHAREHOLDERS. For the purpose of determining shareholders entitled to notice of or to vote at any meeting of shareholders or any adjournment thereof, to demand a special meeting, or to take any other action, the Board of Directors of the corporation may fix a date as the record date for any such determination of shareholders, such date in any case to be not more than seventy days before the meeting or action requiring such determination of shareholders. A determination of shareholders entitled to notice of or to vote at a shareholders’ meeting is effective for any adjournment of the meeting unless the Board of Directors fixes a new record date, which it must do if the meeting is adjourned to a date more than one hundred twenty days after the date fixed for the original meeting.

5. MEANING OF CERTAIN TERMS. As used herein in respect of the right to notice of a meeting of shareholders or a waiver thereof or to participate or vote thereat or to consent or dissent in writing in lieu of a meeting, as the case may be, the term “share” or “shares” or “shareholder” or “shareholders” refers to an outstanding share or shares and to a holder or holders of record of outstanding shares when the corporation is authorized to issue only one class of shares, and said reference is also intended to include any outstanding share or shares and any holder or holders of record of outstanding shares of any class upon which or upon whom the articles of incorporation confer such rights where there are two or more classes or series of shares or upon which or upon whom the Business Corporation Code confers such rights notwithstanding that the articles of incorporation may provide for more than one class or series of shares, one or more of which are limited or denied such rights thereunder.

6. SHAREHOLDER MEETINGS.

• TIME. The annual meeting shall be held on the date fixed from time to time by the directors. A special meeting shall be held on the date fixed from time to time by the directors except when the Business Corporation Code confers the right to call a special meeting upon the shareholders.

• PLACE. Annual meetings and special meetings shall be held at such place in or out of the State of Georgia as the directors shall from time to time fix.

• CALL. Annual meetings may be called by the directors or the Chairperson of the Board of Directors, the President, or the Secretary or by any officer instructed by the directors or the President to call the meeting. Special meetings may be called in like manner.

• NOTICE OR ACTUAL OR CONSTRUCTIVE WAIVER OF NOTICE. The corporation shall notify shareholders of the date, time, and place of each annual and special

- 2 -

shareholders’ meeting. Such notice shall be no fewer than ten nor more than sixty days before the meeting date. Unless the Business Corporation Code or the articles of incorporation require otherwise, notice of an annual meeting shall not be required to include a description of the purpose or purposes for which the meeting is called. Notice of a special meeting must include a description of the purpose or purposes for which the meeting is called. Unless the Business Corporation Code or the articles of incorporation require otherwise, the corporation is required to give notice only to shareholders entitled to vote at the meeting. A shareholder may waive any notice required by the Business Corporation Code, the articles of incorporation or the Bylaws before or after the time stated in the notice. The waiver must be in writing, be signed by the shareholder entitled to the notice, and be delivered to the corporation for inclusion in the minutes or filing with the corporate records. A shareholder’s attendance at a meeting waives objection to lack of notice or defective notice of the meeting, unless the shareholder at the beginning of the meeting objects to holding the meeting or transacting business at the meeting; and waives objection to consideration of a particular matter at the meeting that is not within the purpose or purposes described in the meeting notice, unless the shareholder objects to considering the matter when it is presented. The term “notice” as used in this paragraph shall mean notice as prescribed by Section 14-2-141 of the Business Corporation Code.

• VOTING LIST FOR MEETING. After fixing a record date for a meeting, the corporation shall prepare an alphabetical list of the names of all its shareholders who are entitled to notice of a shareholders’ meeting. The list must be arranged by voting group, and within each voting group by class or series of shares, and show the address of and number of shares held by each shareholder. The shareholders’ list must be available for inspection by any shareholder, his agent, or his attorney at the time and place of the meeting.

• CONDUCT OF MEETING. Meetings of the shareholders shall be presided over by one of the following officers in the order of seniority and if present and acting - the Chairperson of the Board, if any, the Vice-Chairperson of the Board, if any, the President, a Vice-President, if any, or, if none of the foregoing is in office and present and acting, by a chairperson to be chosen by the shareholders. The Secretary of the corporation, or in his absence, an Assistant Secretary, shall act as secretary of every meeting, but, if neither the Secretary nor an Assistant Secretary is present, the chairperson of the meeting shall appoint a secretary of the meeting.

• PROXY REPRESENTATION. A shareholder or his or her agent or attorney in fact may appoint a proxy to vote or otherwise act for the shareholder by executing a writing which authorizes another person or other persons to vote or otherwise act for the shareholder in accordance with the provisions of Section 14-2-722 of the Business Corporation Code.

• SHARES HELD BY NOMINEES. The corporation may establish a procedure by which the beneficial owner of shares that are registered in the name of a nominee is recognized by the corporation as the shareholder. The extent of this recognition may be determined in the procedure.

• QUORUM. Unless the articles of incorporation or the Business Corporation Code provides otherwise, a majority of the votes entitled to be cast on the matter by the voting group

- 3 -

constitutes a quorum of that voting group for action on that matter. Once a share is represented for any purpose at a meeting other than solely to object to holding the meeting or transacting business at the meeting, it is deemed present for quorum purposes for the remainder of the meeting and for any adjournment of that meeting unless a new record date is or must be set for that adjourned meeting.

• VOTING. Directors are elected by a plurality of the votes cast by the shares entitled to vote in the election at a meeting at which a quorum is present. If a quorum exists, action on a matter, other than the election of directors, by a voting group is approved if the votes cast within the voting group favoring the action exceed the votes cast opposing the action unless the articles of incorporation, a Bylaw authorized by the articles under Section 14-2-1021 of the Business Corporation Code, or the Business Corporation Code requires a greater number of affirmative votes.

7. ACTION WITHOUT MEETING. Action required or permitted by the provisions of the Business Corporation Code to be taken at a shareholders’ meeting may be taken without a meeting in accordance with the provisions of Section 14-2-704 of the Business Corporation Code.

8. ADJOURNMENT. The holders of a majority of the voting shares represented at a meeting, whether or not a quorum is present, may adjourn such meeting from time to time.

ARTICLE II

BOARD OF DIRECTORS

1. FUNCTIONS GENERALLY - COMPENSATION. All corporate powers shall be exercised by or under the authority of, and the business and affairs of the corporation managed under the direction of, a Board of Directors. The Board may fix the compensation of directors.

2. QUALIFICATIONS AND NUMBER. Directors shall be natural persons who are eighteen years of age or older, but need not be shareholders, citizens of the United States, or a residents of the State of Georgia. The number of directors shall not be less than one nor more than eight. The number of directors may be fixed or changed from time to time, within such minimum and maximum, by the shareholders or by the Board of Directors. If not so fixed, the number shall be three. The number of directors shall never be less than one.

3. TERMS AND VACANCIES. The terms of the initial directors of the corporation expire at the first shareholders’ meeting at which directors are elected. The terms of all other directors expire at the next annual shareholders’ meeting following their election. A decrease in the number of directors does not shorten an incumbent director’s term. A director elected to fill a vacancy shall be elected for the unexpired term of his or her predecessor in office. Any directorship to be filled by reason of an increase in the number of directors may be filled by the Board of Directors, but only for a term of office continuing until the next election of directors by the shareholders and until the election and qualification of the successor. Despite the expiration of a director’s term, he or she continues to serve until his or her successor is elected and qualifies or until

4

there is a decrease in the number of directors. If a vacancy occurs on the Board of Directors, including a vacancy resulting from an increase in the number of directors, the shareholders or the Board of Directors may fill the vacancy; or if the directors remaining in office constitute fewer than a quorum of the Board of Directors, they may fill the vacancy by the affirmative vote of a majority of all the directors remaining in office.

4. MEETINGS.

• TIME. Meetings shall be held at such time as the Board shall fix, except that the first meeting of a newly elected Board shall be held as soon after its election as the directors may conveniently assemble.

• PLACE. The Board of Directors may hold regular or special meetings in or out of the State of Georgia at such place as shall be fixed by the Board.

• CALL. No call shall be required for regular meetings for which the time and place have been fixed. Special meetings may be called by or at the direction of the Chairperson of the Board, if any, the Vice-Chairperson of the Board, if any, of the President, or of a majority of the directors in office.

• NOTICE OR ACTUAL OR CONSTRUCTIVE WAIVER. Regular meetings of the Board of Directors may be held without notice of the date, time, place, or purpose of the meeting. Written, or oral, notice of the time and place shall be given for special meetings in sufficient time for the convenient assembly of the directors thereat. The notice of any meeting need not describe the purpose of the meeting. A director may waive any notice required by the Business Corporation Code or by these Bylaws before or after the date and time stated in the notice. A director’s attendance at or participation in a meeting waives any required notice to him or her of the meeting unless the director at the beginning of the meeting or promptly upon his or her arrival objects to holding the meeting or transacting business at the meeting and does not thereafter vote for or assent to action taken at the meeting. Except as hereinbefore provided, a waiver shall be in writing, signed by the director entitled to the notice, and delivered to the corporation for inclusion in the minutes or filing with the corporate records.

• QUORUM AND ACTION. A quorum of the Board of Directors consists of a majority of the number of directors prescribed in or fixed in accordance with these Bylaws or unless otherwise specifically provided by the Business Corporation Code. If a quorum is present when a vote is taken, the affirmative vote of a majority of directors present shall be the act of the Board of Directors. The Board of Directors may permit any or all directors to participate in a regular or special meeting by, or conduct the meeting through use of, any means of communication by which all directors participating may simultaneously hear each other during the meeting. A director participating in a meeting by this means is deemed to be present in person at the meeting.

• CHAIRMAN OF THE MEETING. Meetings of the Board of Directors shall be presided over by the following directors in the order of seniority and if present and acting - the Chairperson of the Board, if any, the Vice-Chairperson of the Board, if any, the President, or any other director chosen by the Board.

- 5 -

5. REMOVAL OF DIRECTORS. The shareholders may remove one or more directors with or without cause pursuant to the provisions of Section 14-2-808 of the Business Corporation Code.

6. COMMITTEES. The Board of Directors may create one or more committees and appoint members of the Board of Directors to serve on them. Each committee may have one or more members, who serve at the pleasure of the Board of Directors. The provisions of Sections 14-2-820 through 14-2-824 of the Business Corporation Code, which govern meetings, action without meetings, notice and waiver of notice, and quorum and voting requirements, apply to committees and their members as well. To the extent specified by the Board of Directors or these Bylaws, each committee may exercise the authority of the Board of Directors under Section 14-2-801 of the Business Corporation Code except such authority as may not be delegated under the Business Corporation Code.

7. ACTION WITHOUT MEETING. Action required or permitted by the Business Corporation Code to be taken at a Board of Directors’ meeting may be taken without a meeting if the action is taken by all members of the Board. The action must be evidenced by one or more written consents describing the action taken, signed by each director, and delivered to the corporation for inclusion in the minutes or filing with the corporate records.

ARTICLE III

OFFICERS

The corporation shall have a President, and a Secretary, and such other officers as may be deemed necessary, who may be appointed by the directors. The same individual may simultaneously hold more than one office in the corporation. A duly appointed officer may appoint one or more officers or assistant officers.

Each officer of the corporation shall have the authority and shall perform the duties prescribed by the Board of Directors or by direction of an officer authorized by the Board of Directors to prescribe the duties of other officers; provided, that the Secretary shall have the responsibility for preparing minutes of the directors’ and shareholders’ meetings and for authenticating records of the corporation, and provided further, that unless the Articles of Incorporation or a resolution of the Board of Directors provide otherwise, the President shall have the authority to conduct all ordinary business and may execute and deliver on behalf of the corporation any contract, conveyance, or similar document not requiring approval by the Board of Directors or shareholders as provided in the Business Corporation Code.

The Board of Directors may remove any officer at any time with or without cause.

- 6 -

ARTICLE IV

REGISTERED OFFICE AND AGENT

The address of the initial registered office of the corporation and the name of the initial registered agent of the corporation are set forth in the original articles of incorporation.

ARTICLE V

CORPORATE SEAL

The corporate seal shall have inscribed thereon the name of the corporation and shall be in such form and contain such other words and/or figures as the Board of Directors shall determine or the law require.

ARTICLE VI

FISCAL YEAR

The fiscal year of the corporation shall be fixed, and shall be subject to change, by the Board of Directors.

ARTICLE VII

INDEMNIFICATION OF DIRECTORS AND OFFICERS

To the fullest extent permitted by applicable law, the corporation shall indemnify any and all persons who may serve or who have served at any time as directors, trustees or officers, or who, at the request of the Board of Directors, may serve or at any time have served as directors or officers of another corporation in which the corporation at such time owned or may own shares of stock or of which it was or may be a creditor, and their respective heirs, administrators, successors and assigns. Such indemnification shall be in addition to any other rights to which those indemnified may be entitled under any law, bylaw, agreement, shareholder vote or otherwise.

ARTICLE VIII

CONTROL OVER BYLAWS

The corporation’s Board of Directors may amend or repeal the Bylaws, except as otherwise required by the Business Corporation Code. Notwithstanding the foregoing provision, the corporation’s shareholders may amend or repeal the Bylaws or adopt new Bylaws.

- 7 -

EX-3.23

Exhibit 3.23

ARTICLES OF INCORPORATION

1. CORPORATE NAME: MCM University Plaza, Inc.

(The corporate name must contain the word “corporation”, “company”, “incorporated”, “limited”, or an abbreviation thereof.)

2. Initial Registered Agent: William S. Herst

Initial Registered Office:	555 Skokie Boulevard, Suite 500
	Northbrook, IL 60062
	Cook County

3. Purpose or purposes for which the corporation is organized:

(If not sufficient space to cover this point, add one or more sheets of this size.)

The transaction of any or all lawful purposes for which corporations may be incorporated under the Illinois Business Corporation Act of 1983.

4. Paragraph 1: Authorized Shares, Issued Shares and Consideration Received:

Class	Par Value per Share		Number of Shares Authorized	Number of Shares Proposed to be Issued	Consideration to be Received Therefor
Common	$	NPV	1,000,000	1,000	$	1,000.00
				Total =	$	1,000.00

5. NAME(S) & ADDRESS(ES) OF INCORPORATOR(S)

The undersigned incorporator(s) hereby declare(s), under penalties of perjury, that the statements made in the foregoing Articles of Incorporation are true.

Dated November 21, 1996.

Signature and Name

/s/ William S. Herst

Signature

William S. Herst

555 Skokie Boulevard, Suite 500

Northbrook, Illinois 60062

EX-3.24

Exhibit 3.24

BYLAWS

OF

MCM UNIVERSITY PLAZA, INC.

(an Illinois corporation)

ARTICLE I

SHAREHOLDERS

1. SHARE CERTIFICATES. Certificates representing shares of the corporation shall set forth thereon the statements prescribed by Section 6.35 of the Business Corporation Act of 1983 and by any other applicable provision of law, shall be signed by the appropriate corporate officers, and may be sealed with the seal of the corporation or a facsimile thereof. If a certificate is countersigned by a transfer agent, or a registrar, other than the corporation itself or its employee, any other signatures or countersignature on the certificate may be facsimiles. In case any officer of the corporation, or any officer or employee of the transfer agent or registrar who has signed or whose facsimile signature has been placed upon such certificate ceases to be an officer of the corporation, or an officer or employee of the transfer agent or registrar before such certificate is issued, the certificate may be issued by the corporation with the same effect as if the officer of the corporation, or the officer or employee of the transfer agent or registrar, had not ceased to be such at the date of its issue.

No certificate shall be issued for any share until such share is fully paid.

2. FRACTIONAL SHARE INTERESTS OR SCRIP. The corporation may, but shall not be obliged to, issue a certificate for a fractional share, and, by action of the Board of Directors, may in lieu thereof, pay cash equal to the value of said fractional share or issue scrip in registered or bearer form which shall entitle the holder to receive a certificate for a full share upon the surrender of such scrip aggregating a full share. A certificate for a fractional share shall, but scrip shall not unless otherwise provided therein, entitle the holder to exercise fractional voting rights, to receive dividends thereon, and to participate in any of the assets of the corporation in the event of liquidation. The Board of Directors may cause scrip to be issued subject to the condition that it shall become void if not exchanged for certificates representing full shares before a specified date, or subject to the condition that the shares for which the scrip is exchangeable may be sold by the corporation or by an agent on behalf of the holder thereof and the proceeds thereof distributed to the holders of such scrip or subject to any other conditions which the Board of Directors may deem advisable.

3. SHARE TRANSFERS. Upon compliance with any provisions restricting the transferability of shares that may be set forth in the Articles of Incorporation, these Bylaws, or any written agreement in respect thereof, transfers of shares of the corporation shall be made only on the books of the corporation by the registered holder thereof, or by his or her other attorney thereunto authorized by power of attorney duly executed and filed with the Secretary of the corporation, or

with a transfer agent or a registrar and on surrender of the certificate or certificates for such shares properly endorsed and the payment of all taxes thereon if any. Except as may be otherwise provided by law, the person in whose name shares stand on the books of the corporation shall be deemed the owner thereof for all purposes as regards the corporation; provided that whenever any transfer of shares shall be made for collateral security, and not absolutely, such fact, if known to the Secretary of the corporation, shall be so expressed in the entry of transfer.

4. RECORD DATE FOR SHAREHOLDERS. For the purpose of determining shareholders entitled to notice of or to vote at any meeting of shareholders, or shareholders entitled to receive payment of any dividend, or in order to make a determination of shareholders for any other proper purpose, the Board of Directors of the corporation may fix in advance a date as the record date for any such determination of shareholders, such date in any case to be not more than sixty days and, for a meeting of shareholders, not less than ten days, or in the case of a merger, consolidation, share exchange, dissolution, or sale, lease, or exchange of assets, not less than 20 days, immediately preceding such meeting. If no record date is fixed for the determination of shareholders entitled to notice of or to vote at a meeting of shareholders, or shareholders entitled to receive payment of a dividend, the date on which notice of the meeting is mailed or the date on which the resolution of the Board of Directors declaring such dividend is adopted, as the case may be, shall be the record date for such determination of shareholders. When a determination of shareholders entitled to vote at any meeting of shareholders has been made as provided in this section, such determination shall apply to any adjournment thereof.

5. MEANING OF CERTAIN TERMS. As used herein in respect of the right to notice of a meeting of shareholders or a waiver thereof or to participate or vote thereat or to consent or dissent or object in writing in lieu of a meeting, as the case may be, the term “share” or “shares” or “shareholder” or “shareholders” refers to an outstanding share or shares and to a holder or holders of record of outstanding shares when the corporation is authorized to issue only one class of shares, and said reference is also intended to include any outstanding share or shares and any holder or holders of record of outstanding shares of any class upon which or upon whom the Articles of Incorporation confer such rights where there are two or more classes or series of shares or upon which or upon whom the Business Corporation Act of 1983 confers such rights notwithstanding that the Articles of Incorporation may provide for more than one class or series of shares, one or more of which are limited or denied such rights thereunder.

6. SHAREHOLDER MEETINGS.

• TIME. The annual meeting shall be held on the second Monday in November each year or at such other time as determined by the Board of Directors. A special meeting shall be held on the date fixed by the directors except when the Business Corporation Act of 1983 confers the right to call a special meeting upon the shareholders.

• PLACE. Annual meetings and special meetings shall be held at such place as the Board of Directors shall by resolution from time to time provide.

• CALL. Annual meetings may be called by the directors or the President or the Secretary or by any officer instructed by the directors or the President to call the meeting. Special meetings may be called in like manner or by the holders of at least one-fifth of the shares.

• NOTICE OR WAIVER OF NOTICE. Written notice stating the place, day, and hour of the meeting and, in case of a special meeting, the purpose or purposes for which the meeting is called, shall be delivered not less than ten days (or not less than any such other minimum period of days as may be prescribed by the Business Corporation Act of 1983) nor more than sixty days before the date of the meeting, either personally or by mail, by or at the direction of the President, the Secretary, or the officer or persons calling the meeting, to each shareholder. The notice of any annual or special meeting shall also include, or be accompanied by, any additional statements, information, or documents prescribed by the Business Corporation Act of 1983. If mailed, such notice shall be deemed to be delivered when deposited in the United States mail addressed to the shareholder at his or her address as it appears on the records of the corporation, with postage thereon prepaid. Whenever any notice is required to be given to any shareholder, a waiver thereof in writing signed by him or her, whether before or after the time stated therein, shall be the equivalent to the giving of such notice.

• VOTING LIST. The officer or agent having charge of the transfer book for shares of the corporation shall make, within twenty days after the record date for a meeting of shareholders or ten days before such meeting, whichever is earlier, a complete list of the shareholders entitled to vote at such meeting, arranged in alphabetical order, with the address of and the number of shares held by each, which list, for a period of ten days prior to such meeting, shall be kept on file at the registered office of the corporation and shall be subject to inspection by any shareholder at any time during usual business hours. Such list shall also be produced and kept open at the time and place of the meeting and shall be subject to the inspection of any shareholder during the whole time of the meeting. The original share ledger or transfer book, or a duplicate thereof kept in the State of Illinois shall be prima facie evidence as to who are the shareholders entitled to examine such list or share ledger or transfer book or to vote at any meeting of shareholders.

• CONDUCT OF MEETING. Meetings of the shareholders shall be presided over by one of the following officers in the order of seniority and if present and acting - the Chairman of the Board, if any, the Vice - Chairman of the Board, if any, the President, a Vice - President, or, if none of the foregoing is in office and present and acting, by a chairman to be chosen by the shareholders. The Secretary of the corporation, or in his or her absence, an Assistant Secretary, shall act as secretary of every meeting, but, if neither the Secretary nor an Assistant Secretary is present, the Chairman of the meeting shall appoint a secretary of the meeting.

• INSPECTORS - APPOINTMENT. At any meeting of shareholders, the chairman of the meeting may, or upon the request of any shareholder shall, appoint one or more persons as inspectors for such meeting, unless an inspector or inspectors shall have been previously appointed for such meeting by the directors. Such inspectors shall ascertain and report the number of shares represented at the meeting, based upon their determination of the validity and effect of proxies;

count all votes and report the results; and do such other acts as are proper to conduct the election and voting with impartiality and fairness to all the shareholders. Each report of an inspector shall be in writing and signed by him or her or by a majority of them if there be more than one inspector acting at such meeting. If there is more than one inspector, the report of a majority shall be the report of the inspectors. The report of the inspector or inspectors on the number of shares represented at the meeting and the results of the voting shall be prima facie evidence thereof.

• PROXY REPRESENTATION. A shareholder may appoint a proxy to vote or otherwise act for him or her by delivering a valid appointment form to the person so appointed, or to a proxy solicitation firm, proxy support service organization, or like agent duly authorized by the person or persons to receive the transmission, in accordance with the provisions of Section 7.50 of the Business Corporation Act of 1983. No proxy shall be valid after the expiration of eleven months from the date of thereof, unless otherwise provided in the proxy.

• QUORUM. A majority of the outstanding shares entitled to vote on the respective matter shall constitute a quorum.

• VOTING. Except as the Business Corporation Act of 1983 and the Articles of Incorporation shall otherwise provide, the affirmative vote of the majority of the shares represented at the meeting and entitled to vote on the respective matter, a quorum being present, shall be the act of the shareholders.

7. INFORMAL ACTION. Any action required to be taken or which may be taken at a meeting of the shareholders may be taken without a meeting and without a vote, if a consent in writing, setting forth the action so taken, shall be signed (i) by the holders of outstanding shares having not less than the minimum number of votes that would be necessary to authorize or take such action at a meeting at which all shares entitled to vote thereon were present and voting or (ii) by all of the shareholders entitled to vote with respect to the subject matter thereof.

ARTICLE II

BOARD OF DIRECTORS

1. FUNCTIONS GENERALLY - COMPENSATION. The business and the affairs of the corporation shall be managed by or under the direction of a Board of Directors. The Board, by the affirmative vote of a majority of the directors then in office, and irrespective of any personal interest of any of its members, shall have authority to establish reasonable compensation of all directors for services to the corporation as directors, officers, or otherwise, notwithstanding the provisions of Section 8.60 of the Business Corporation Act of 1983.

2. QUALIFICATIONS AND NUMBER. A director need not be a shareholder, a citizen of the United States, or a resident of the State of Illinois. The initial Board of Directors shall consist of three (3) persons, and which shall be the fixed number of directors until changed. The number of directors of the corporation shall be not less than two (2) nor more than five (5), and the

number of directors may be fixed or changed from time to time, within such minimum and maximum number of directors, by the directors or the shareholders without further amendment to these Bylaws. Such maximum may not exceed such minimum by more than five. A decrease in the number of directors does not shorten an incumbent director’s term. The full Board of Directors shall consist of the number of directors fixed or changed as herein provided.

3. ELECTION AND TERM. The initial Board of Directors shall hold office until the first annual meeting of shareholders and until their successors have been elected and qualified. Thereafter, directors who are elected at an annual meeting of shareholders, and directors who are elected in the interim to fill vacancies and newly created directorships, shall hold office until the next succeeding annual meeting of shareholders and until their successors have been elected and qualified. Vacancies and newly created directorships may be filled at an annual meeting of shareholders or a special meeting of shareholders called for that purpose, and vacancies arising between meetings of shareholders by reason of an increase in the number of directors or otherwise may be filled by the Board of Directors.

4. MEETINGS.

• TIME. Meetings shall be held at such time as the Board shall fix, except that the first meeting of a newly elected Board shall be held as soon after its election as the directors may conveniently assemble.

• PLACE. Meetings shall be held at such place within or without the State of Illinois as shall be fixed by the Board.

• CALL. No call shall be required for regular meetings for which the time and place have been fixed. Special meetings may be called by or at the direction of the Chairman of the Board, if any, the Vice-Chairman of the Board, if any, of the President, or of a majority of the directors in office.

• NOTICE OR ACTUAL OR CONSTRUCTIVE WAIVER. No notice shall be required for regular meetings for which the time and place have been fixed. Written, oral, or any other mode of notice of the time and place shall be given for special meetings in sufficient time for the convenient assembly of the directors thereat. Neither the business to be transacted at, nor the purpose of, any regular or special meeting of the Board of Directors need be specified in the notice or waiver of notice of such meeting. Whenever any notice is required to be given to any director, a waiver thereof in writing signed by him or her, whether before or after the time stated therein, shall be deemed equivalent to the giving of such notice. Attendance of a director at a meeting shall constitute a waiver of notice of such meeting except where the director attends the meeting for the express purpose of objecting to the transaction of any business because the meeting is not lawfully called or convened.

• QUORUM AND ACTION. A majority of the full Board of Directors shall constitute a quorum. Except as herein otherwise provided, and except as may be otherwise provided by the Business Corporation Act of 1983, the act of the majority of the directors present at a meeting at which a quorum is present shall be the act of the Board of Directors.

• CHAIRMAN OF THE MEETING. Meetings of the Board of Directors shall be presided over by the following directors in the order of seniority and if present and acting—the Chairman of the Board, if any, the Vice-Chairman of the Board, if any, the President, or any other director chosen by the Board.

5. REMOVAL OF DIRECTORS. The entire Board of Directors or any individual director may be removed at any time, with or without cause, in accordance with the provisions of Section 8.35 of the Business Corporation Act of 1983.

6. COMMITTEES. The Board of Directors, may, by resolution adopted by a majority of the full Board, designate from among its members one or more committees. Each committee shall have two or more members, who serve at the pleasure of the Board of Directors. A committee to the extent provided in such resolution, shall have and may exercise all of the authority of the Board of Directors except such authority as may not be delegated under the Business Corporation Act of 1983.

7. INFORMAL ACTION. Any action required to be taken or any action which may be taken at a meeting of directors or of a committee thereof, if any, may be taken without a meeting if a consent in writing, setting forth the action so taken, shall be signed by all of the directors entitled to vote with respect to the subject matter thereof, or all of the members of such committee, as the case may be.

Members of the Board of Directors or of any committee of said Board may participate in and act at any meeting of the Board or of any such committee, as the case may be, through the use of a conference telephone or other communications equipment by means of which all persons participating in the meeting can hear each other. Participation in such a meeting shall constitute attendance and presence in person at the meeting of the person or persons so participating.

ARTICLE III

OFFICERS

The officers of the corporation shall consist of a President, one or more Vice-Presidents if and as the directors shall determine, a Secretary, and a Treasurer, each of whom shall be elected by the directors. The corporation may have such other officers and assistant officers and agents as may be deemed necessary, each or any of whom may be elected or appointed by the directors or may be chosen in such manner as the directors shall determine. Any two or more offices may be held by the same person.

Unless otherwise provided in the resolution of election or appointment, each officer shall hold office until the meeting of the Board of Directors following the next annual meeting of shareholders and until his or her successor has been elected and qualified.

The officers and agents of the corporation shall have the authority and perform the duties in the management of the corporation as determined by the resolution electing or appointing them, as the case may be.

Any officer or agent of the corporation may be removed by the Board of Directors whenever in its judgment the best interests of the corporation will be served thereby.

ARTICLE IV

INDEMNIFICATION

The corporation shall, to the fullest extent permitted by the provisions of the Business Corporation Act of 1983, as the same may be amended and supplemented, indemnify any and all persons whom it shall have power to indemnify under said provisions from and against any and all of the expenses, liabilities, or other matters referred to in or covered by said provisions, and the indemnification provided for herein shall not be deemed exclusive of any other rights to which those seeking indemnification may be entitled under any Bylaw, agreement, vote of shareholders or disinterested directors, or otherwise, both as to action in his or her official capacity and as to action in another capacity while holding such office, and shall continue as to a person who has ceased to be a director, officer, employee, or agent, and shall inure to the benefit of the heirs, executors, and administrators of such a person.

ARTICLE V

REGISTERED OFFICE AND AGENT - SHAREHOLDERS RECORD

The address of the initial registered office of the corporation in the State of Illinois and the name of the initial registered agent of the corporation are set forth in the original Articles of Incorporation.

The corporation shall keep at its registered office in the State of Illinois or at its principal place of business in Illinois, or at the office of its transfer agent or registrar, if any, in the State of Illinois a record of its shareholders, giving the names and addresses of all shareholders and the number and class of the shares held by each. The corporation shall also keep at its registered office, for a period of at least ten days, the voting list prescribed by Section 7.30 of the Business Corporation Act of 1983.

ARTICLE VI

CORPORATE SEAL

The corporate seal shall have inscribed thereon the name of the corporation and shall be in such form and contain such other words and/or figures as the Board of Directors shall determine or the law require.

ARTICLE VII

FISCAL YEAR

The fiscal year of the corporation shall be fixed, and shall be subject to change, by the Board of Directors.

ARTICLE VIII

CONTROL OVER BYLAWS

After the initial Bylaws of the corporation shall have been adopted in the manner prescribed by the Business Corporation Act of 1983, the Bylaws of the corporation may be made, altered, amended, or repealed by the shareholders or the Board of Directors.

EX-10.15

Exhibit 10.15

EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT

EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT, dated as of June 1, 2006 (the “Employment Agreement”), by and between Education Management Corporation, a Pennsylvania corporation (together with its successors and assigns, the “Company”), and John R. McKernan, Jr. (the “Executive”).

WHEREAS, pursuant to the Agreement and Plan of Merger, dated as of March 3, 2006, by and between EM Acquisition Corporation, a Pennsylvania corporation (“Merger Co”) and the Company, Merger Co has merged with and into the Company, with the Company continuing as the surviving corporation;

WHEREAS, the Executive and the Company were parties to an Amended and Restated Employment Agreement, dated August 5, 2003 (the “Original Employment Agreement”), under the terms of which the Executive served as the Company’s Vice Chairman, Chief Executive Officer and President;

WHEREAS, the Company desires to continue to employ the Executive and utilize his management services as indicated herein, and the Executive desires to be employed by the Company, all on the terms and conditions set forth in this Employment Agreement; and

WHEREAS, the Executive and the Company (each of the Executive and the Company, a “Party,” and collectively, the “Parties”) intend this Employment Agreement to cancel and supersede the Original Employment Agreement effective upon the date hereof (the “Effective Date”).

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants contained herein and other valid consideration the sufficiency of which is acknowledged, the Parties agree as follows:

Section 1. Employment.

1.1 Term. The Company agrees to employ the Executive, and the Executive agrees to be employed by the Company, in each case pursuant to this Employment Agreement, for a period commencing on the date hereof (the “Effective Date”) and ending on the earlier of (i) the fifth (5th) anniversary of the Effective Date and (ii) the termination of the Executive’s employment in accordance with Section 3 hereof (the “Term”).

1.2 Duties. During the Term and until the Transition Event (as hereinafter defined), the Executive shall serve as the Company’s Chief Executive Officer (“CEO”). During the Term, and both before and after the Transition Event, the Executive shall serve as a member of the board of directors of the Company (the “Board”) and as the Chairman of the Board (with service as Chairman of the Board to commence upon the resignation of the

Company’s current Chairman of the Board), and in such other positions as an officer or director of the Company and its affiliates as the Executive and the Board shall mutually agree from time to time. Subject to Section 1.3 below, the Executive shall have all authorities, duties and responsibilities customarily exercised by an individual serving in the foregoing positions at an entity of the size and nature of the Company; shall be assigned no duties or responsibilities that are materially inconsistent with, or that materially impair his ability to discharge, the foregoing duties and responsibilities; shall have such additional duties and responsibilities, consistent with the foregoing, as may be from time to time assigned to him by the Board; and in his capacity as CEO shall report solely and directly to the Board.

1.3 Transition Event. Upon at least 15 days prior written notice from the Board, but effective no earlier than the first (1st) anniversary of the Effective Date, the Executive shall resign as CEO (the “Transition Event”). After the Transition Event, the Executive shall continue as an employee of the Company and as a member of, and Chairman of, the Board. Upon the Transition Event, the Executive’s compensation shall be reduced as set forth below. Upon and after the Transition Event, the Executive shall, in his capacity as an employee, perform such duties, functions and responsibilities, commensurate with his positions, as reasonably requested by the Board or the then CEO.

1.4 Exclusivity. During the Term, the Executive shall devote his full business time and attention to the business and affairs of the Company, shall faithfully serve the Company, and shall in all material respects conform to and comply with such lawful and reasonable directions and instructions given to him by the Board as are consistent with Section 1.2 and 1.3 hereof. During the Term, the Executive shall use his reasonable best efforts to promote and serve the interests of the Company and shall not (prior to the Transition Event) engage in any other business activity, whether or not such activity shall be engaged in for pecuniary profit. Notwithstanding the foregoing, after the Transition Event, the Executive (x) will not be expected to devote to the Company more than an average of approximately thirty (30) hours per week, and (y) may take on other employment or engagements so long as they do not materially interfere with his ability to perform his duties hereunder. Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this Section 1.4, but subject to the other provisions of this Employment Agreement, the Executive may (i) serve, with the prior approval of the Board (such approval not to be unreasonably withheld), on the boards of a reasonable number of business entities, trade associations and charitable organizations, (ii) engage in charitable activities and community affairs, (iii) accept and fulfill a reasonable number of speaking engagements, and (iv) manage his personal investments and affairs; provided that such activities do not either individually or in the aggregate materially interfere with the performance of his duties hereunder.

Section 2. Compensation.

2.1 Salary. During the Term, the Company shall pay to the Executive a salary at an annual rate of five hundred fifty thousand dollars ($550,000), payable in

2

accordance with the Company’s standard payroll policies (the “Base Salary”). The Base Salary will be reviewed annually and may be adjusted upward by the Board (or a committee thereof) in its discretion, based on competitive data and the Executive’s performance. Upon the Transition Event, the Base Salary will automatically be reduced by forty percent (40%). Except as provided in the immediately preceding sentence, the Base Salary may not be reduced for any reason during the Term (including for the purpose of determining target Annual Bonus amounts under Section 2.2 and severance benefits under Section 3).

2.2 Annual Bonus. The Executive will be entitled to an annual incentive bonus (the “Annual Bonus”) for each fiscal year of the Company that ends during the Term, subject to the fourth sentence of this Section 2.2. For the fiscal year ended June 30, 2006, the Executive’s Annual Bonus will be the sum of (i) eleven-twelfths of the amount determined based on actual performance results in accordance with the formula that applied in the Original Employment Agreement, and (ii) one-twelfth of the Executive’s target bonus as set forth herein. The Executive’s target bonus will be one hundred twenty-five percent (125%) of the Base Salary (or, for the fiscal year in which the Transition Event occurs, 125% of the weighted average of the Base Salary for the portion of the year before the Transition Event and the portion of the year after the Transition Event). The actual Annual Bonus paid for any year (with the exception of the portion of the fiscal year 2006 bonus which is based on the target bonus set forth herein) will depend on meeting Company and individual performance standards set annually by the Board (or a committee thereof) in consultation with the Executive. The Annual Bonus will be paid in cash within seventy-five (75) days of the end of the fiscal year.

2.3 Equity. On or about the Effective Date, the Executive will purchase three million dollars ($3,000,000) of Common Stock of the Company pursuant to a purchase agreement between GS Capital Partners V Fund, L.P., Providence Equity Partners V L.P. and the Executive substantially in the form attached hereto as Exhibit A. Promptly after the date this Employment Agreement is executed, the Company will grant to the Executive time-vesting and performance-vesting options to purchase 342,105 shares of Common Stock of the Company, 171,052 of which will be pursuant to a time-vesting option agreement between the Company and the Executive substantially in the form attached hereto as Exhibit B, and 171,053 of which will be pursuant to a performance-vesting option agreement between the Company and the Executive substantially in the form attached hereto as Exhibit C.

2.4 Employee Benefits. During the Term, the Executive shall be entitled to participate in such health, group insurance, welfare, pension, and other employee benefit and perquisite plans, programs and arrangements as are made generally available from time to time to senior executives of the Company (which shall include customary life insurance and disability plans), such participation in each case to be on terms and conditions no less favorable to the Executive than to other senior executives of the Company generally.

3

2.5 Vacation. During the Term, the Executive shall be entitled to paid vacation in accordance with the Company’s vacation policy as in effect from time to time.

2.6 Business Expenses. The Company shall pay or reimburse the Executive for all commercially reasonable business out-of-pocket expenses that the Executive incurs during the Term in performing his duties under this Employment Agreement upon presentation of documentation and in accordance with the expense reimbursement policy of the Company as approved by the Board (or a committee thereof) and in effect from time to time.

2.7 Attorney’s Fees. The Company agrees to promptly pay all fees and charges of the Executive’s attorneys reasonably incurred by the Executive in connection with the negotiation and execution of this Employment Agreement and related agreements and arrangements, it being understood that the Executive shall have no liability with respect to any fees or expenses of any accountants or compensation consultants engaged by the Company in connection with this matter.

Section 3. Employment Termination.

3.1 Termination of Employment. The Company may terminate the Executive’s employment hereunder for any reason during the Term, and the Executive may voluntarily terminate his employment hereunder for any reason during the Term, in each case (other than a termination by the Company for Cause) at any time upon not less than thirty (30) days’ notice to the other Party. Upon any termination of the Executive’s employment hereunder for any reason, the Executive shall be entitled to (i) any Base Salary earned but unpaid through the date of termination; (ii) any other payment or benefit to which he is entitled under the applicable terms of any applicable plan, program, agreement or arrangement of the Company or its affiliates (each, a “Company Arrangement”), including the plans, programs, agreements, and arrangements referred to in Sections 2.2 through 2.7 and 8.1 ((i) and (ii) being, collectively, the “Accrued Amounts”); provided, however, that if the Executive’s employment hereunder is terminated (x) by the Company for Cause, or (y) by the Executive voluntarily without Good Reason and not for death or Disability and prior to the fifth anniversary of the Effective Date, then any Annual Bonus earned pursuant to Section 2.2 in respect of a prior fiscal year, but not yet paid or due to be paid, shall be forfeited.

3.2 Certain Terminations.

(a) Termination by the Company Other Than For Cause; Termination by the Executive for Good Reason. If the Executive’s employment hereunder is terminated by the Company during the Term other than for Cause, or by the Executive with Good Reason, in addition to the Accrued Amounts the Executive shall be entitled to a lump sum severance payment of (i) one and one-half (1.5) times (or three (3) times if the date of termination is on or before the second (2nd) anniversary of the Effective Date or if the Executive

4

reasonably demonstrates that the termination is In Anticipation Of or within two (2) years following a “Change in Control” as defined in the Company’s 2006 Stock Option Plan) the sum of the Executive’s Base Salary plus the target Annual Bonus and (ii) a pro-rata Annual Bonus (determined by multiplying the target Annual Bonus for the year of termination by a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of days he was employed by the Company during such fiscal year and the denominator of which is the number of days in such fiscal year) (the “Pro-Rata Annual Bonus Payment”) ((i) and (ii), collectively the “Severance Payment”), subject to the provisions of the last sentence of Section 4.7 below. The Company’s obligations to make the Severance Payment shall be conditioned upon the Executive’s execution, delivery and non-revocation of a valid and enforceable general release of claims substantially in the form attached hereto as Exhibit D (the “Release”). Subject to Section 3.2(e), the Severance Payment will be paid to the Executive as soon as practicable following the effectiveness of the Release.

(b) Termination Due to Death or Disability. If the Executive’s employment hereunder is terminated during the Term due to the Executive’s death or Disability, the Company shall pay the Executive or his estate, as applicable, in addition to the Accrued Amounts, a Pro-Rata Annual Bonus Payment for the year of such termination.

(c) Termination Due to Expiration of the Term. If the Executive’s employment hereunder is terminated due to the expiration of the Term, the Company shall pay the Executive, in addition to the Accrued Amounts, a Pro-Rata Annual Bonus Payment for the year of such termination. Subject to Section 3.2(e), the Pro-Rata Annual Bonus Payment will be paid to the Executive as soon as practicable following the effectiveness of the Release.

(d) Definitions. For purposes of this Section 3.2, the following terms shall have the following meanings:

(i) “Good Reason” shall mean the occurrence of any of the following events without either the Executive’s prior written consent or full cure within thirty (30) days after he gives written notice to the Company describing the event and requesting cure: (i) other than as required after a Transition Event pursuant to Section 1.3, any material diminution in the Executive’s authorities, titles or offices, or the assignment to the Executive of duties that materially impair his ability to perform the duties normally assigned to the chief executive officer of a corporation of the size and nature of the Company; (ii) other than as required after a Transition Event pursuant to Section 1.3, any change in the reporting structure so that the Executive reports to someone other than the Board; (iii) any relocation of the Company’s principal office, or of the Executive’s own principal place of employment, to a location more than fifty (50) miles from Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania; (iv) any material breach by the Company or any of its affiliates of any material obligation to the Executive; or (v) any failure of the Company to obtain the assumption in writing of its obligation to perform this Employment Agreement by any successor to all or substantially all of the assets of the Company within fifteen (15) days after any merger, consolidation, sale or similar transaction, except where such assumption occurs

5

by operation of law. If the Company fails to cure a Good Reason event during the thirty (30) day cure period, the Executive must terminate his employment within sixty (60) days after the expiration of such thirty (30) day period if such termination is to be treated as for Good Reason based on such uncured Good Reason event.

(ii) “Cause” shall mean (i) the Executive’s willful and continued failure to use his best efforts to perform his reasonably assigned duties (other than on account of Disability); (ii) the Executive is indicted for, convicted of, or enters a plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, (x) a felony or (y) a misdemeanor involving moral turpitude; (iii) in carrying out his duties under this Employment Agreement, the Executive engages in (x) gross negligence causing material harm to the Company, its business or reputation, (y) willful and material misconduct, or (z) willful and material breach of fiduciary duty; or (iv) the Executive willfully and materially breaches (x) the restrictive covenants described in Section 4 of this Employment Agreement or (y) any of the material written policies of the Company listed on Exhibit E, as in effect on the Effective Date. The determination of whether Cause exists shall be made, prior to the termination becoming effective, at a duly called meeting of the Board at which the Executive has been given notice of the grounds claimed to constitute Cause and an opportunity to be heard together with his counsel, and shall require a vote of not less than a majority of the members of the Board; provided that any such determination of Cause by the Board shall be subject to de novo review, at the Executive’s election, through arbitration in accordance with Section 8.6

(iii) “Disability” shall mean the Executive is entitled to receive long-term disability benefits under the long-term disability plan of the Company in which Executive participates, or, if there is no such plan, the Executive’s inability, due to physical or mental incapacity, to substantially perform his duties and responsibilities under this Employment Agreement for one hundred eighty (180) consecutive days.

(iv) “In Anticipation Of” shall mean that the termination (i) was at the request of a third party that has taken steps reasonably calculated to effect a Change in Control or (ii) otherwise arose in connection with a Change in Control that has been proposed, so long as in either case such Change in Control shall actually have occurred.

(e) Section 409A. If the Executive is a “specified employee” for purposes of Section 409A of the United States Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, and the regulations thereunder (“Section 409A”), any Severance Payment required to be made pursuant to Section 3.2 which is subject to Section 409A shall not be paid until one day after the date which is six (6) months from the date of termination.

3.3 Exclusive Remedy. The foregoing payments upon termination of the Executive’s employment shall constitute the exclusive severance payments due the Executive upon a termination of his employment under this Employment Agreement.

6

3.4 Resignation from All Positions. Upon the termination of the Executive’s employment with the Company for any reason, the Executive shall be deemed to have resigned, as of the date of such termination, from all positions he then holds as an officer, director, employee and member of the board (and any committee thereof) of the Company and any of its subsidiaries.

3.5 Cooperation. Following the termination of the Executive’s employment with the Company for any reason, the Executive agrees to reasonably cooperate with the Company upon reasonable request of the Board and to be reasonably available to the Company with respect to matters arising out of the Executive’s services to the Company and its subsidiaries. The Company shall reimburse the Executive for expenses reasonably incurred in connection with such matters as agreed by the Executive and the Board and, to the extent the Executive is required to spend substantial time on such matters, the Company shall compensate the Executive at an hourly rate based on the Executive’s most recent Base Salary rate.

Section 4. Unauthorized Disclosure; Non-Solicitation; Non-Competition; Proprietary Rights.

4.1 Unauthorized Disclosure. The Executive agrees and understands that in the Executive’s position with the Company, the Executive has been and will be exposed to and has and will receive non-public information relating to the confidential affairs of the Company and its affiliates, including, without limitation, technical information, intellectual property, business and marketing plans, strategies, customer information, software, other information concerning the products, promotions, development, financing, expansion plans, business policies and practices of the Company and its affiliates and other non-public forms of information considered by the Company and its affiliates to be confidential and in the nature of trade secrets (including, without limitation, ideas, research and development, know-how, technical data, customer and supplier lists, pricing and cost information and business and marketing plans and proposals) (collectively, the “Confidential Information”). The Executive agrees that at all times during the Executive’s employment with the Company and thereafter, the Executive shall not disclose such Confidential Information, either directly or indirectly, to any individual, corporation, partnership, limited liability company, association, trust or other entity or organization, including a government or political subdivision or an agency or instrumentality thereof (each a “Person”) without the prior written consent of the Company and shall not use or attempt to use any such information in any manner other than in connection with his employment with the Company, unless required by law to disclose such information, in which case the Executive shall provide the Company with written notice of such requirement as far in advance of such anticipated disclosure as possible. This confidentiality covenant has no temporal, geographical or territorial restriction. Upon termination of the Executive’s employment with the Company, the Executive shall promptly supply to the Company (or destroy, at the Company’s option) all property, keys, notes, memoranda, writings, lists, files, reports, customer lists, correspondence, tapes, disks, cards, surveys, maps, logs, machines, technical data and any other

7

tangible product or document which has been produced by, received by or otherwise submitted to the Executive during or prior to the Executive’s employment with the Company, and any copies thereof in his (or capable of being reduced to his) possession; provided that nothing in this Employment Agreement or elsewhere shall prevent the Executive from retaining and utilizing: documents relating to his personal benefits, entitlements and obligations; documents relating to his personal tax obligations; his desk calendar, rolodex, and the like; and such other records and documents as may reasonably be approved by the Company.

4.2 Non-Competition. By and in consideration of the Company’s entering into this Employment Agreement and the payments to be made and benefits to be provided by the Company hereunder, and in further consideration of the Executive’s exposure to the Confidential Information of the Company and its affiliates, the Executive agrees that the Executive shall not, during the Executive’s employment with the Company (whether during the Term or thereafter) and for a period of twenty-four (24) months thereafter (the “Restriction Period”), directly or indirectly (other than in connection with carrying out his responsibilities for the Company and its affiliates), own, manage, operate, join, control, be employed by, or participate in the ownership, management, operation or control of, or be connected in any manner with, including, without limitation, holding any position as a stockholder, director, officer, consultant, independent contractor, employee, partner, or investor in, any Restricted Enterprise (as defined below); provided, that in no event shall ownership of three percent (3%) or less of the outstanding securities of any class of any issuer whose securities are registered under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, standing alone, be prohibited by this Section 4.2, so long as the Executive does not have, or exercise, any rights to manage or operate the business of such issuer other than rights as a stockholder thereof. For purposes of this paragraph, “Restricted Enterprise” shall mean any Person that is actively engaged in any geographic area in which the Company or any of its subsidiaries operates or markets in any business which is in material competition with the business of the Company or any of its subsidiaries (i) conducted during the preceding twelve (12) months (or following the Executive’s termination of employment, the twelve (12) months preceding the date of termination of the Executive’s employment with the Company) or (ii) proposed to be conducted by the Company or any of its subsidiaries in the Company’s business plan as in effect at that time (or following the Executive’s termination of employment, the business plan as in effect as of the date of termination of the Executive’s employment with the Company). During the Restriction Period, upon request of the Company, the Executive shall notify the Company of the Executive’s then-current employment status.

4.3 Non-Solicitation of Employees. During the Restriction Period (other than in connection with carrying out his responsibilities for the Company and its affiliates), the Executive shall not directly or indirectly contact, induce or solicit (or assist any Person to contact, induce or solicit) for employment any person who is, or within six (6) months prior to the date of such solicitation was, an employee of the Company or any of its subsidiaries.

8

4.4 Interference with Business Relationships. During the Restriction Period (other than in connection with carrying out his responsibilities for the Company and its affiliates), the Executive shall not directly or indirectly contact, induce or solicit (or assist any Person to contact, induce or solicit) any customer or client of the Company or its subsidiaries to terminate its relationship or otherwise cease doing business in whole or in part with the Company or its subsidiaries, or directly or indirectly interfere with (or assist any Person to interfere with) any material relationship between the Company or its subsidiaries and any of its or their customers or clients so as to cause harm to the Company or its affiliates.

4.5 Proprietary Rights. Upon reasonable request, the Executive shall disclose promptly to the Company any and all inventions, discoveries, and improvements (whether or not patentable or registrable under copyright or similar statutes), and all patentable or copyrightable works, initiated, conceived, discovered, reduced to practice, or made by him, either alone or in conjunction with others, during the Executive’s employment with the Company and related to the business or activities of the Company and its affiliates (the “Developments”). Except to the extent any rights in any Developments constitute a work made for hire under the U.S. Copyright Act, 17 U.S.C. § 101 et seq. that are owned ab initio by the Company and/or its applicable affiliate, the Executive assigns all of his right, title and interest in all Developments (including all intellectual property rights therein) to the Company or its nominee without further compensation, including all rights or benefits therefor, including without limitation the right to sue and recover for past and future infringement. The Executive acknowledges that any rights in any developments constituting a work made for hire under the U.S. Copyright Act, 17 U.S.C § 101 et seq. are owned upon creation by the Company and/or its applicable affiliate as the Executive’s employer. Whenever reasonably requested to do so by the Company, the Executive shall execute any and all applications, assignments or other instruments which the Company shall deem necessary to apply for and obtain trademarks, patents or copyrights of the United States or any foreign country or otherwise protect the interests of the Company and its affiliates therein, at the Company’s sole expense. These obligations shall continue beyond the end of the Executive’s employment with the Company with respect to inventions, discoveries, improvements or copyrightable works initiated, conceived or made by the Executive while employed by the Company, and shall be binding upon the Executive’s employers, assigns, executors, administrators and other legal representatives. If the Company is unable for any reason, after reasonable effort, to obtain the Executive’s signature on any document needed in connection with the actions described in this Section 4.5, the Executive hereby irrevocably designates and appoints the Company and its duly authorized officers and agents as the Executive’s agent and attorney in fact to act for and in the Executive’s behalf to execute, verify and file any such documents and to do all other lawfully permitted acts to further the purposes of this Section 4.5 with the same legal force and effect as if executed by the Executive.

4.6 Confidentiality of Agreement. The Parties agree not to disclose the terms of this Employment Agreement to any Person (other than in connection with carrying

9

out responsibilities for the Company or its affiliates); provided that (i) the Executive may disclose the terms of this Employment Agreement in confidence to his immediate family, creditors, financial and other professional advisors, and attorneys, so long as every such Person to whom the Executive makes such disclosure agrees not to disclose the terms of this Employment Agreement further and (ii) the Company may disclose the terms of this Employment Agreement in confidence to its creditors, professional advisors and attorneys, and otherwise when required by law, subpoena, court order or the like.

4.7 Remedies. The Executive agrees that any breach of the terms of this Section 4 would result in irreparable injury and damage to the Company for which the Company would have no adequate remedy at law; the Executive therefore also agrees that in the event of said breach or any threat of breach, the Company shall be entitled to an immediate injunction and restraining order, from any court with jurisdiction over the Executive and the matter, to prevent such breach and/or threatened breach and/or continued breach by the Executive and/or any and all Persons acting for and/or with the Executive, without having to prove damages. The Company shall also be entitled to any other remedies to which the Company may be entitled at law or in equity, including, without limitation, damages and/or relief pursuant to the last sentence of this Section 4.7. The Parties further agree that the provisions of the covenants contained in this Section 4 are reasonable and necessary to protect the businesses of the Company and its affiliates because of the Executive’s access to Confidential Information and his material participation in the operation of such businesses. In the event that the Executive willfully and materially breaches any of the covenants set forth in this Section 4, then in addition to any injunctive relief, the Executive will promptly return to the Company a pro-rata portion of any Severance Payment or Pro-Rata Annual Bonus Payment that the Company has paid to the Executive, equal to the product of (x) the amount of the Severance Payment or Pro-Rata Annual Bonus Payment, as applicable, and (y) a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of days from the date of such breach through the 730^th day following the date the Executive’s employment hereunder terminates, and the denominator of which is 730.

4.8 No Other Post-Employment Restrictions. There shall be no contractual, or similar, restrictions on the Executive’s right to terminate his employment with the Company, or on his post-employment activities, other than as expressly set forth in this Employment Agreement.

4.9 Permitted Statements. Nothing in this Employment Agreement shall restrict any Person from making truthful statements (provided any such statement does not include Confidential Information) (i) when required by law, subpoena, court order or the like; (ii) when requested by a governmental, regulatory, or similar body or entity; or (iii) in confidence to a professional advisor for the purpose of securing professional advice.

10

Section 5. Representations.

Each Party represents and warrants (i) that such Party is not subject to any contract, arrangement, agreement, policy or understanding, or to any statute, governmental rule or regulation, that in any way limits such Party’s ability to enter into and fully perform such Party’s obligations under this Employment Agreement (including, for avoidance of doubt, the agreements of which forms are appended hereto); (ii) that such Party is not otherwise unable to enter into and fully perform such Party’s obligations under this Employment Agreement (including the agreements of which forms are appended hereto); and (iii) that, upon the execution and delivery of this Employment Agreement by both Parties, this Employment Agreement shall be such Party’s valid and binding obligation, enforceable against such Party in accordance with its terms, except to the extent that enforceability may be limited by applicable bankruptcy, insolvency or similar laws affecting the enforcement of creditors’ rights generally. The Company represents and warrants that it is fully authorized by action of the Board, and by actions of any other Person whose authorization is required, to enter into this Employment Agreement and to perform its obligations under it.

Section 6. Non-Disparagement.

From and after the Effective Date and following termination of the Executive’s employment with the Company, the Executive and the Company agree not to make any statement (other than statements made by the Executive in connection with carrying out his responsibilities for the Company and its affiliates) that is intended to become public, or that should reasonably be expected to become public, and that criticizes, ridicules, disparages or is otherwise derogatory of the other Party or, in the case of statements about the Company, any of its subsidiaries, affiliates, employees, officers, directors or stockholders. For such purpose, statements by “the Company” shall mean only (i) the Company by press release or other formally released announcement and (ii) the executive officers and directors thereof and not any other employees.

Section 7. Taxes.

7.1 All amounts paid to the Executive under this Employment Agreement during or following the Term shall be subject to withholding and other employment taxes imposed by applicable law.

7.2 If (i) the aggregate of all amounts and benefits due to the Executive under this Employment Agreement or under any other Company Arrangement would, if received by the Executive in full and valued under Section 280G of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 as from time to time amended (the “Code”), constitute “parachute payments” as defined in and under Section 280G of the Code (collectively, “280G Benefits”), and if (ii) such aggregate would, if reduced by all federal, state and local taxes applicable thereto, including the excise tax imposed pursuant to Section 4999 of the Code, be less than the amount the Executive would receive, after all taxes, if the Executive received aggregate 280G Benefits equal (as valued under

11

Section 280G of the Code) to only three times the Executive’s “base amount” as defined in and under Section 280G of the Code, less $1.00, then (iii) such 280G Benefits payable in cash, and/or such benefits under the performance-vesting option of which a form of agreement is attached hereto as Exhibit C, in either case as the Executive shall select shall (to the extent that the reduction of such 280G Benefits can achieve the intended result) be reduced or eliminated to the extent necessary so that the aggregate 280G Benefits received by the Executive will not constitute parachute payments. The determinations with respect to this Section 7.2 shall be made by an independent auditor (the “Auditor”) paid by the Company. The Auditor shall be the Company’s regular independent auditor unless the Executive reasonably objects to the use of that firm, in which event the Auditor will be a nationally recognized United States public accounting firm chosen by the Parties.

7.3 It is possible that after the determinations and selections made pursuant to Section 7.2 the Executive will receive 280G Benefits that are, in the aggregate, either more or less than the amount provided under Section 7.2 (hereafter referred to as an “Excess Payment” or “Underpayment”, respectively). If it is established, pursuant to a final determination of a court or an Internal Revenue Service proceeding that has been finally and conclusively resolved, that an Excess Payment has been made, then the Executive shall promptly pay an amount equal to the Excess Payment to the Company, together with interest on such amount at the applicable federal rate (as defined in and under Section 1274(d) of the Code) from the date of the Executive’s receipt of such Excess Payment until the date of such payment. In the event that it is determined (x) by arbitration pursuant to Section 8.6, (y) by a court or (z) by the Auditor upon request by a Party, that an Underpayment has occurred, the Company shall promptly pay an amount equal to the Underpayment to the Executive, together with interest on such amount at the applicable federal rate from the date such amount would have been paid to the Executive had the provisions of Section 7.2 not been applied until the date of such payment.

7.4 Notwithstanding the foregoing, if it appears that any amount or benefit that is to be paid to the Executive under this Employment Agreement or any other plan, program, agreement, or arrangement of the Company or any of its affiliates may constitute a “parachute payment” under Section 280G(b)(2) of the Code, the Company shall use its best reasonable efforts to obtain shareholder approval of such payments for purposes of Section 280G(b)(5) of the Code.

12

Section 8. Miscellaneous.

8.1 Indemnification. The Company shall indemnify the Executive (including, for avoidance of doubt, advancement of expenses) to the fullest extent provided under the Company’s Certificate of Incorporation and By-Laws (or, if greater, applicable law) in the event that (x) he was or is a party or is threatened to be made a party to any threatened, pending or completed action, suit or proceeding (civil or criminal), or (y) that any claim, or demand for information, is made or threatened to be made against him, in each case by reason of the fact that he is or was a director, officer, employee or agent of the Company or any of its affiliates; provided, however, that the Executive shall not be entitled to indemnification under this Section 8.1 relating to claims, actions, suits or proceedings arising from his breach of this Employment Agreement. Expenses incurred by the Executive in defending any such claim, action, suit or proceeding shall accordingly be paid by the Company in advance of the final disposition of such claim, action, suit or proceeding upon receipt of an undertaking by or on behalf of the Executive to repay such amount if it shall ultimately be determined that he is not entitled to be indemnified by the Company as authorized in this Section 8.1. In addition, a directors’ and officers’ liability insurance policy (or policies) shall be kept in place, during the Term and for six (6) years thereafter, providing coverage to the Executive that is no less favorable to him in any respect (including with respect to scope, exclusions, amounts, and deductibles) than the coverage then being provided with respect to periods after the Effective Date to any other present or former senior executive or director of the Company.

8.2 Amendments and Waivers. This Employment Agreement and any of the provisions hereof may be amended, waived (either generally or in a particular instance and either retroactively or prospectively), modified or supplemented, in whole or in part, only by written agreement signed by the Parties that specifically identifies the provisions affected; provided, that the observance of any provision of this Employment Agreement may be waived by the Party that will lose the benefit of such provision as a result of such waiver, but only through a signed writing that specifically identifies such provision. The waiver by either Party of a breach of any provision of this Employment Agreement shall not operate or be construed as a further or continuing waiver of such breach or as a waiver of any other or subsequent breach, except as otherwise explicitly provided for in such waiver. Except as otherwise expressly provided herein, no failure on the part of either Party to exercise, and no delay in exercising, any right, power or remedy hereunder, or otherwise available in respect hereof at law or in equity, shall operate as a waiver thereof, nor shall any single or partial exercise of such right, power or remedy by such Party preclude any other or further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right, power or remedy.

8.3 Assignment. No rights or obligations of the Company under this Employment Agreement may be assigned or transferred by the Company except that such rights and obligations may be assigned or transferred pursuant to a merger or consolidation, or the sale or liquidation of all or substantially all of the business and assets of the Company, provided that

13

the assignee or transferee is the successor to all or substantially all of the business and assets of the Company and such assignee or transferee assumes the liabilities, obligations and duties of the Company, as contained in this Employment Agreement, either contractually or as a matter of law. In the event of any merger, consolidation, other combination, sale of business and assets, or liquidation as described in the preceding sentence, the Company shall use its best reasonable efforts to cause such assignee or transferee to promptly and expressly assume the liabilities, obligations and duties of the Company hereunder. The duties and covenants of Executive under this Employment Agreement, being personal, may not be assigned or delegated. The Executive shall be entitled, to the extent permitted under applicable law, to select and change a beneficiary or beneficiaries to receive any compensation or benefit hereunder following the Executive’s death by giving written notice thereof to the Company.

8.4 Notices. All notices, requests, demands, claims and other communications provided for under the terms of this Employment Agreement shall be in writing. Any notice, request, demand, claim or other communication hereunder shall be sent by (i) personal delivery (including receipted courier service) or overnight delivery service, (ii) facsimile during normal business hours, with confirmation of receipt, to the number indicated, (iii) reputable commercial overnight delivery service courier or (iv) registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, postage prepaid and addressed to the intended recipient as set forth below:

If to the Company:	c/o Goldman Sachs Capital Partners
	85 Broad Street
	New York, NY 10004
	Attention: Adrian Jones
	Facsimile: 212-357-5505
	c/o Providence Equity Partners
	50 Kennedy Plaza, 18th Floor
	Providence, RI 02903
	Attention: Peter Wilde
	Facsimile: 401-751-1790
with a copy to:	Fried, Frank, Harris, Shriver & Jacobson, LLP
	One New York Plaza
	New York, NY 10004
	Attention: Donald P. Carleen, Esq.
	Facsimile: 212-859-4000

14

If to the Executive:	John R. McKernan, at his principal office at the Company (during the Term), and at all times to his principal residence as reflected in the records of the Company.
with a copy to:	Morrison Cohen LLP
	909 Third Avenue, 27th Floor
	New York, NY 10022
	Attention: Robert M. Sedgwick, Esq.
	Facsimile: 212-735-8708

All such notices, requests, consents and other communications shall be deemed to have been given when received. Either Party may change the facsimile numbers or addresses to which notices, requests, demands, claims and other communications to such Party are to be delivered by giving the other Party notice in the manner then set forth.

8.5 Governing Law. Except as otherwise required by federal law, this Employment Agreement shall be construed and enforced in accordance with its express terms (including, without limitation, Sections 8.7 through 8.11), and otherwise in accordance with the laws of the State of New York, without giving effect to the conflicts of law principles thereof.

8.6 Arbitration. Other than with respect to provisions under Section 4 of this Employment Agreement, in the event of any dispute, controversy or claim between the Parties that arises out of or relates to this Employment Agreement, the Executive’s employment with the Company, or any termination of such employment, then either Party may, by written notice to the other, require that such dispute, controversy or claim be submitted to arbitration in accordance with the Commercial Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association (the “AAA”). The arbitrator or arbitrators shall be selected by agreement of the Parties or, if they do not agree on an arbitrator or arbitrators within thirty (30) days after one Party has notified the other of his or its desire to have the matter settled by arbitration, then the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be selected by the AAA in New York, New York. The determination reached in such arbitration shall be final and binding on the Parties without any right of appeal or further dispute, except as otherwise required by applicable law. Unless otherwise agreed by the Parties, any such arbitration shall take place in New York, New York.

8.7 Severability. Whenever possible, each provision or portion of any provision of this Employment Agreement, including those contained in Section 4 hereof, will be interpreted in such manner as to be effective and valid under applicable law but the invalidity or unenforceability of any provision or portion of any provision of this Employment Agreement in any jurisdiction shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the remainder of this Employment Agreement in that jurisdiction or the validity or enforceability of this Employment Agreement, including that provision or portion of any provision, in any other jurisdiction. In

15

addition, should a court or arbitrator determine that any provision or portion of any provision of this Employment Agreement, including those contained in Section 4 hereof, is not reasonable or valid, either in period of time, geographical area, or otherwise, the Parties agree that such provision should be interpreted and enforced to the maximum extent which such court or arbitrator deems reasonable or valid.

8.8 Entire Agreement. From and after the date hereof, this Employment Agreement, and the other agreements being executed in connection herewith, constitute the entire agreement between the Parties, and supersede all prior representations, agreements and understandings (including any prior course of dealings), both written and oral, between the Parties with respect to the subject matter hereof, including, without limitation, the Original Employment Agreement, except with respect to rights accrued as of the Effective Date (e.g., unpaid salary, unreimbursed business expenses, etc.). The terms of this Employment Agreement, and of the agreements of which forms are attached hereto, shall control over those of any inconsistent Company Arrangements with respect to the subject matter hereof.

8.9 Counterparts. This Employment Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original, but all such counterparts shall together constitute one and the same instrument. Signatures delivered by facsimile shall be effective for all purposes.

8.10 Binding Effect. This Employment Agreement shall inure to the benefit of, and be binding on, the successors and assigns of each of the Parties, to the extent provided herein. In the event of the Executive’s death or a judicial determination of his incompetence, references in this Employment Agreement to the Executive shall be deemed, as appropriate, to be references to his estate, beneficiaries, or legal representatives.

8.11 General Interpretive Principles. The name assigned this Employment Agreement and headings of the sections, paragraphs, subparagraphs, clauses and subclauses of this Employment Agreement are for convenience of reference only and shall not in any way affect the meaning or interpretation of any of the provisions hereof. Words of inclusion shall not be construed as terms of limitation herein, so that references to “include,” “includes” and “including” shall not be limiting and shall be regarded as references to non-exclusive and non-characterizing illustrations. Any reference to a Section of the Code shall be deemed to include any successor to such Section.

8.12 Mitigation/Offset. The Executive shall be under no obligation to seek other employment or to otherwise mitigate the obligations of the Company under this Employment Agreement, and there shall be no offset against amounts or benefits due Executive under this Employment Agreement or otherwise on account of any claim (other than any preexisting debts then due in accordance with their terms) the Company or its affiliates may have against him or any remuneration or other benefit earned or received by Executive after such termination.

16

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties have executed this Employment Agreement as of the date first written above.

	EDUCATION MANAGEMENT CORPORATION
	By:
John R. McKernan, Jr.		Name:
		Title:

17

Exhibit A

PURCHASE AGREEMENT

Exhibit B

TIME-VESTING OPTION AGREEMENT

Exhibit C

PERFORMANCE-VESTING OPTION AGREEMENT

Exhibit D

WAIVER AND RELEASE OF CLAIMS

1. In consideration of the payments and benefits to be made under the Employment Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2006 (the “Employment Agreement”), to which John R. McKernan, Jr. (the “Executive”) and Education Management Corporation (the “Company”) (each of the Executive and the Company, a “Party,” and collectively, the “Parties”) are parties, the sufficiency of which the Executive acknowledges, the Executive, with the intention of binding himself and his heirs, executors, administrators and assigns, does hereby release, remise, acquit and forever discharge the Company and each of its subsidiaries and affiliates (the “Company Affiliated Group”), their present and former officers, directors, executives, shareholders, agents, attorneys, employees and employee benefit plans (and the fiduciaries thereof), and the successors, predecessors and assigns of each of the foregoing (collectively, the “Company Released Parties”), of and from any and all claims, actions, causes of action, complaints, charges, demands, rights, damages, debts, sums of money, accounts, financial obligations, suits, expenses, attorneys’ fees and liabilities of whatever kind or nature in law, equity or otherwise, whether accrued, absolute, contingent, unliquidated or otherwise and whether now known or unknown, suspected or unsuspected, which the Executive, individually or as a member of a class, now has, owns or holds, or has at any time heretofore had, owned or held, arising on or prior to the date hereof, against any Company Released Party that arises out of, or relates to, the Employment Agreement, the Executive’s employment with the Company, or any termination of such employment, including claims (i) for severance or vacation benefits, unpaid wages, salary or incentive payments, (ii) for breach of contract, wrongful discharge, impairment of economic opportunity, defamation, intentional infliction of emotional harm or other tort, (iii) for any violation of applicable state and local labor and employment laws (including, without limitation, all laws concerning unlawful and unfair labor and employment practices) and (iv) for employment discrimination under any applicable federal, state or local statute, provision, order or regulation, and including, without limitation, any claim under Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 (“Title VII”), the Civil Rights Act of 1988, the Fair Labor Standards Act, the Americans with Disabilities Act (“ADA”), the Executive Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended (“ERISA”), the Age Discrimination in Employment Act (“ADEA”), and any similar or analogous state statute, excepting only:

(A) rights of the Executive arising under, or preserved by, this Agreement or Section 3 of the Employment Agreement;

(B) the right of the Executive to receive COBRA continuation coverage in accordance with applicable law;

(C) claims for benefits under any health, disability, retirement, life insurance or other, similar employee benefit plan (within the meaning of Section 3(3) of ERISA) of the Company Affiliated Group; and

(D) rights to indemnification the Executive has or may have under the by-laws or certificate of incorporation of any member of the Company Affiliated Group or as an insured under any director’s and officer’s liability insurance policy now or previously in force.

2. The Employee acknowledges and agrees that the release of claims set forth in this Agreement is not to be construed in any way as an admission of any liability whatsoever by any Company Released Party, any such liability being expressly denied.

3. The release of claims set forth in this Agreement applies to any relief no matter how called, including, without limitation, wages, back pay, front pay, compensatory damages, liquidated damages, punitive damages, damages for pain or suffering, costs, and attorneys’ fees and expenses.

4. The Executive specifically acknowledges that his acceptance of the terms of the release of claims set forth in this Agreement is, among other things, a specific waiver of his rights, claims and causes of action under Title VII, ADEA, ADA and any state or local law or regulation in respect of discrimination of any kind; provided, however, that nothing herein shall be deemed, nor does anything contained herein purport, to be a waiver of any right or claim or cause of action which by law the Executive is not permitted to waive.

5. As to rights, claims and causes of action arising under the ADEA, the Executive acknowledges that he has been given but not utilized a period of twenty-one (21) days to consider whether to execute this Agreement. If the Executive accepts the terms hereof and executes this Agreement, he may thereafter, for a period of seven (7) days following (and not including) the date of execution, revoke this Agreement as it relates to the release of claims arising under the ADEA. If no such revocation occurs, this Agreement shall become irrevocable in its entirety, and binding and enforceable against the Executive, on the day next following the day on which the foregoing seven-day period has elapsed. If such a revocation occurs, the Executive shall irrevocably forfeit any right to payment of the Severance Payment and/or Pro-Rata Annual Bonus Payment (as such terms are defined in the Employment Agreement), but the remainder of the Employment Agreement shall continue in full force.

6. Other than as to rights, claims and causes of action arising under the ADEA, the release of claims set forth in this Agreement shall be immediately effective upon execution by the Executive.

7. The Executive acknowledges and agrees that he has not, with respect to any transaction or state of facts existing prior to the date hereof and other than as specifically disclosed to the Company, filed any complaints, charges or lawsuits against any Company Released Party with any governmental agency, court or tribunal.

8. The Executive acknowledges that he has been advised to seek, and has had the opportunity to seek, the advice and assistance of an attorney with regard to the release of

claims set forth in this Agreement, and has been given a sufficient period within which to consider the release of claims set forth in this Agreement.

9. The Executive acknowledges that the release of claims set forth in this Agreement relates only to claims which exist as of the date of this Agreement.

10. The Executive acknowledges that the Severance Payment and/or Pro-Rata Annual Bonus Payment he is receiving in connection with the release of claims set forth in this Agreement and his obligations under this Agreement are in addition to anything of value to which the Executive is entitled from the Company.

11. Each provision hereof is severable from this Agreement, and if one or more provisions hereof are declared invalid, the remaining provisions shall nevertheless remain in full force and effect. If any provision of this Agreement is so broad, in scope, or duration or otherwise, as to be unenforceable, such provision shall be interpreted to be only so broad as is enforceable.

12. This Agreement constitutes the complete agreement of the Parties in respect of the subject matter hereof and shall supersede all prior agreements between the Parties in respect of the subject matter hereof except to the extent set forth herein.

13. The failure to enforce at any time any of the provisions of this Agreement or to require at any time performance by another party of any of the provisions hereof shall in no way be construed to be a waiver of such provisions or to affect the validity of this Agreement, or any part hereof, or the right of any party thereafter to enforce each and every such provision in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

14. This Agreement may be executed in several counterparts, each of which shall be deemed to be an original, but all of which together shall constitute one and the same instrument. Signatures delivered by facsimile shall be deemed effective for all purposes.

15. This Agreement shall be binding upon any and all successors and assigns of the Executive and the Company.

16. Except for issues or matters as to which federal law is applicable, this Agreement shall be governed by and construed and enforced in accordance with its express terms, and otherwise in accordance with the laws of the State of New York without giving effect to the conflicts of law principles thereof.

[signature page follows]

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this Agreement has been signed by or on behalf of each of the Parties, all as of [                    ].

	EDUCATION MANAGEMENT CORPORATION
	By:
John R. McKernan, Jr.		Name:
		Title:

Exhibit E

MATERIAL WRITTEN POLICIES

1. Education Management Corporation Code of Business Ethics and Conduct

2. Education Management Corporation Policy Statement on Inside Information and Insider Trading

EX-10.16

Exhibit 10.16

EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT

EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT, dated as of June 1, 2006 (the “Employment Agreement”), by and between Education Management Corporation, a Pennsylvania corporation (together with its successors and assigns, the “Company”), and Edward H. West (the “Executive”) (each of the Executive and the Company, a “Party,” and collectively, the “Parties”).

WHEREAS, the Company desires to employ the Executive and utilize his management services as indicated herein, and the Executive desires to be employed by the Company, all on the terms and conditions set forth in this Employment Agreement.

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants contained herein and other valid consideration the sufficiency of which is acknowledged, the Parties agree as follows:

Section 1. Employment.

1.1. Term. The Company agrees to employ the Executive, and the Executive agrees to be employed by the Company, in each case pursuant to this Employment Agreement, for a period commencing on the date hereof (the “Effective Date”) and ending on the third (3rd) anniversary of the Effective Date (the “Initial Term”); provided, however, that the term of this Employment Agreement and the Executive’s employment hereunder shall renew automatically for successive one (1) year periods (each, a “Renewal Term”), unless at least one hundred eighty (180) days prior to the end of the Initial Term or any subsequent anniversary of the Effective Date, either party shall have given notice to the other party that this Employment Agreement shall terminate on that anniversary date (the Initial Term, together with any Renewal Terms, the “Term”). Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Executive’s employment shall be subject to earlier termination in accordance with Section 3 hereof.

1.2. Duties. During the Term, the Executive shall serve as the Company’s Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer (“CFO”), and such other positions as officer or director of the Company and its affiliates as the Executive and the Board of directors of the Company (the “Board”) shall mutually agree from time to time. In such positions, the Executive shall perform such duties, functions and responsibilities during the Term commensurate with the Executive’s positions. Subject to Section 1.3 below, the Executive shall have all authorities, duties and responsibilities customarily exercised by an individual serving in the foregoing positions at an entity of the size and nature of the Company; shall be assigned no duties or responsibilities that are materially inconsistent with, or that materially impair his ability to discharge, the foregoing duties and responsibilities; shall have such additional duties and responsibilities, consistent with the foregoing, as may be from time to time assigned to him; and in his capacity as CFO shall report solely and directly to the Chief Executive Officer of the Company (the “CEO”).

1.3. Exclusivity. During the Term, the Executive shall devote his full business time and attention to the business and affairs of the Company, shall faithfully serve the Company, and shall in all material respects conform to and comply with such lawful and reasonable directions and instructions given to him as are consistent with Sections 1.2 and 1.3 hereof. During the Term, the Executive shall use his reasonable best efforts to promote and

serve the interests of the Company and shall not engage in any other business activity, whether or not such activity shall be engaged in for pecuniary profit. Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this Section 1.3, but subject to the other provisions of this Employment Agreement, the Executive may (i) engage in charitable activities and community affairs, (ii) serve, with the prior approval of the Board (such approval not to be unreasonably withheld), on the boards of a reasonable number of business entities, trade associations and charitable organizations, (iii) accept and fulfill a reasonable number of speaking engagements, and (iv) manage his personal investments and affairs; provided that such activities do not either individually or in the aggregate materially interfere with the performance of his duties hereunder.

Section 2. Compensation.

2.1. Salary. As compensation for the performance of the Executive’s services hereunder, during the Term, the Company shall pay to the Executive a salary at an annual rate of four hundred fifty thousand dollars ($450,000), payable in accordance with the Company’s standard payroll policies (the “Base Salary”). The Base Salary will be reviewed annually and may be adjusted upward by the Board (or a committee thereof) in its discretion, based on competitive data and the Executive’s performance.

2.2. Bonus.

(a) Annual Bonus. The Executive will be eligible for an annual incentive bonus (the “Annual Bonus”) for each complete fiscal year occurring during the Term. The Executive’s target bonus will be one hundred twenty-five percent (125%) of the Base Salary. The actual Annual Bonus paid for any year will depend on meeting Company and individual performance standards established by the Board; provided, however, that for the fiscal year ending June 30, 2007, such goals will be determined by the Board in consultation with the Executive. The Annual Bonus will be paid in cash within seventy-five (75) days of the end of the fiscal year.

(b) Signing Bonus. The Executive acknowledges that he has received a signing bonus in the amount of $225,000.

2.3. Equity. Promptly after the date this Employment Agreement is executed, the Company will grant to the Executive time-vesting and performance-vesting options to purchase 136,842 shares of Common Stock of the Company, fifty percent (50%) of which will be pursuant to a time-vesting option agreement between the Company and the Executive substantially in the form attached hereto as Exhibit A, and fifty percent (50%) of which will be pursuant to a performance-vesting option agreement between the Company and the Executive substantially in the form attached hereto as Exhibit B.

2.4. Employee Benefits. During the Term, the Executive shall be eligible to participate in such health and other employee welfare, retirement and other employee benefit plans and programs, and perquisites, of the Company as in effect from time to time on the same basis as similarly situated executives of the Company.

2.5. Vacation. During the Term, the Executive shall be entitled to paid vacation in accordance with the Company’s vacation policy as in effect from time to time.

2

2.6. Business Expenses. The Company shall pay or reimburse the Executive for all commercially reasonable business out-of-pocket expenses that the Executive incurs during the Term in performing his duties under this Employment Agreement upon presentation of documentation and in accordance with the expense reimbursement policy of the Company as approved by the Board (or a committee thereof) and in effect from time to time.

2.7. Attorney’s Fees. The Company agrees to promptly pay all fees and charges of the Executive’s attorneys reasonably incurred by the Executive in connection with the negotiation and execution of this Employment Agreement, his purchase of common stock of the Company, and related agreements.

2.8. Relocation Expenses.

(a) For the first 15 months of the Term or until the Executive relocates to the Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania metropolitan area, if earlier, the Executive will be provided with Company housing in such area and will be reimbursed for reasonable travel expenses, including tax gross-up payments, if applicable for weekly round trips to the Philadelphia metropolitan area.

(b) When the Executive permanently relocates to such area, the Company, in accordance with the Company’s relocation policy, will bear the cost of customary relocation expenses for the Executive and his family, including tax gross-up payments, if necessary.

(c) The Executive will also be reimbursed for any out-of-pocket legal expenses related to such relocation (subject to pre-approval by the Board).

Section 3. Employment Termination.

3.1. Termination of Employment. The Company may terminate the Executive’s employment hereunder for any reason during the Term, and the Executive may voluntarily terminate his employment hereunder for any reason during the Term, in each case (other than a termination by the Company for Cause) at any time upon not less than thirty (30) days’ notice to the other Party. Upon any termination of the Executive’s employment hereunder for any reason during the Term, the Executive shall be entitled to (i) any Base Salary earned but unpaid through the date of termination; (ii) any other payment or benefit to which he is entitled under the applicable terms of any applicable plan, program, agreement or arrangement of the Company or its affiliates (each, a “Company Arrangement”), including the plans, programs, agreements and arrangements referred to in Sections 2.2 through 2.7 and 8.1 ((i) and (ii) being, collectively, the “Accrued Amounts”); provided, however, that if the Executive’s employment hereunder is terminated (x) by the Company for Cause, or (y) by the Executive voluntarily without Good Reason and not for death or Disability, then any Annual Bonus earned pursuant to Section 2.2 in respect of a prior fiscal year, but not yet paid or due to be paid, shall be forfeited.

3.2. Certain Terminations.

(a) Termination by the Company Other than for Cause; Termination by the Executive for Good Reason. If the Executive’s employment hereunder is

3

terminated by the Company during the Term other than for Cause, or by the Executive with Good Reason, in addition to the Accrued Amounts the Executive shall be entitled to a lump sum severance payment of (i) one and one-half (1.5) times (or two (2) times if (x) the Executive reasonably demonstrates that the termination is In Anticipation Of, or (y) occurring within two (2) years following, a “Change in Control” (as defined in the Company’s 2006 Stock Option Plan)) the sum of the Executive’s Base Salary plus the target Annual Bonus and (ii) a pro-rata Annual Bonus (determined by multiplying the target Annual Bonus for the year of termination by a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of days he was employed by the Company during such fiscal year and the denominator of which is the number of days in such fiscal year) (the “Pro-Rata Annual Bonus Payment”) ((i) and (ii), collectively the “Severance Payment”), subject to the provisions of the last sentence of Section 4.8 hereof. The Company’s obligations to make the Severance Payment shall be conditioned upon the Executive’s execution, delivery and non-revocation of a valid and enforceable general release of claims substantially in the form attached hereto as Exhibit C (the “Release”). Subject to Section 3.2(e), the Severance Payment will be paid to the Executive as soon as practicable following the effectiveness of the Release. The Company shall also reimburse the Executive, on a monthly basis, for an amount of his COBRA premiums (for the duration of COBRA continuation coverage, not to exceed eighteen (18) months following termination of employment) equal to difference between (x) the amount of COBRA premium charged to the Executive minus (y) the amount of premium charged to actively employed senior executives for like coverage as that elected by the Executive.

(b) Termination at Expiration of the Term at the Company’s Request. If the Executive’s employment hereunder is terminated solely as a result of the Company’s electing under Section 1.1 not to renew the Employment Agreement at the expiration of the then current Term by giving notice thereof to the Executive, and the Executive terminates his employment within thirty (30) days after the end of the Term, then such termination of employment shall be considered a termination without Cause hereunder.

(c) Termination Due to Death or Disability. If the Executive’s employment hereunder is terminated during the Term due to the Executive’s death or Disability, the Company shall pay the Executive or his estate, as applicable, in addition to the Accrued Amounts, a Pro-Rata Annual Bonus Payment for the year of such termination.

(d) Definitions. For purposes of this Section 3.2, the following terms shall have the following meanings:

(1) “Good Reason” shall mean the occurrence of any of the following events without either the Executive’s prior written consent or full cure within thirty (30) days after he gives written notice to the Company describing the event and requesting cure: (i) any material diminution in the Executive’s authorities, titles or offices, or the assignment to the Executive of duties that materially impair his ability to perform the duties normally assigned to an executive in the Executive’s role at a corporation of the size and nature of the Company; (ii) any change in the reporting structure so that the Executive reports to someone other than the CEO; (iii) any relocation of the Company’s principal office, or of the Executive’s own principal place of employment, to a location more than fifty (50) miles from Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania; (iv) any material breach by the Company or any of its affiliates of any material obligation to the Executive; or (v) any failure of the Company to obtain the assumption in writing of its obligation

4

to perform this Employment Agreement by any successor to all or substantially all of the assets of the Company within fifteen (15) days after any merger, consolidation, sale or similar transaction, except where such assumption occurs by operation of law. If the Company fails to cure a Good Reason event during the thirty (30) day cure period, the Executive must terminate his employment within sixty (60) days after the expiration of such thirty (30) day period if such termination is to be treated as for Good Reason based on such uncured Good Reason event.

(2) “Cause” shall mean (i) the Executive’s willful and continued failure to use his best efforts to perform his reasonably assigned duties (other than on account of Disability); (ii) the Executive is indicted for, convicted of, or enters a plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, (x) a felony or (y) a misdemeanor involving moral turpitude; (iii) in carrying out his duties under this Employment Agreement, the Executive engages in (x) gross negligence causing material harm to the Company, its business or reputation, (y) willful and material misconduct, or (z) willful and material breach of fiduciary duty; or (iv) the Executive willfully and materially breaches (x) the restrictive covenants described in Section 4 of this Employment Agreement or (y) any of the material written policies of the Company listed on Exhibit D, as in effect on the Effective Date. The determination of whether Cause exists shall be made, prior to the termination becoming effective, at a duly called meeting of the Board at which the Executive has been given notice of the grounds claimed to constitute Cause and an opportunity to be heard together with his counsel, and shall require a vote of not less than a majority of the members of the Board; provided that any such determination of Cause by the Board shall be subject to de novo review, at the Executive’s election, through arbitration in accordance with Section 8.6. No act or omission of the Executive shall be “willful” if conducted in good faith or with a reasonable belief that such conduct was in the best interests of the Company.

(3) “Disability” shall mean the Executive is entitled to receive long-term disability benefits under the long-term disability plan of the Company in which Executive participates, or, if there is no such plan, the Executive’s inability, due to physical or mental incapacity, to substantially perform his duties and responsibilities under this Employment Agreement for one hundred eighty (180) consecutive days.

(4) “In Anticipation Of” shall mean that the termination (i) was at the request of a third party that has taken steps reasonably calculated to effect a Change in Control or (ii) otherwise arose in connection with a Change in Control that has been proposed, so long as in either case such Change in Control shall actually have occurred.

(e) Section 409A. If the Executive is a “specified employee” for purposes of Section 409A of the United States Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, and the regulations thereunder (“Section 409A”), any Severance Payment required to be made pursuant to Section 3.2 which is subject to postponement under Section 409A shall not be paid until one day after the date which is six (6) months from the date of termination.

3.3. Exclusive Remedy. The foregoing payments upon termination of the Executive’s employment shall constitute the exclusive severance payments due the Executive upon a termination of his employment under this Employment Agreement.

5

3.4. Resignation from All Positions. Upon the termination of the Executive’s employment with the Company for any reason, the Executive shall be deemed to have resigned, as of the date of such termination, from all positions he then holds as an officer, director, employee and member of the board (and any committee thereof) of the Company and any of its subsidiaries.

3.5. Cooperation. Following the termination of the Executive’s employment with the Company for any reason, the Executive agrees to reasonably cooperate with the Company upon reasonable request of the Board and to be reasonably available to the Company (taking into account any other full time employment of the Executive) with respect to matters arising out of the Executive’s services to the Company and its subsidiaries. The Company shall reimburse the Executive for expenses reasonably incurred in connection with such matters as agreed by the Executive and the Board and, to the extent the Executive is required to spend substantial time on such matters, the Company shall compensate the Executive at an hourly rate based on the Executive’s most recent Base Salary.

Section 4. Unauthorized Disclosure; Non-Solicitation; Non-Competition; Proprietary Rights.

4.1. Unauthorized Disclosure. The Executive agrees and understands that in the Executive’s position with the Company, the Executive has been and will be exposed to and has and will receive non-public information relating to the confidential affairs of the Company and its affiliates, including, without limitation, technical information, intellectual property, business and marketing plans, strategies, customer information, software, other information concerning the products, promotions, development, financing, expansion plans, business policies and practices of the Company and its affiliates and other non-public forms of information considered by the Company and its affiliates to be confidential and in the nature of trade secrets (including, without limitation, ideas, research and development, know-how, technical data, customer and supplier lists, pricing and cost information and business and marketing plans and proposals) (collectively, the “Confidential Information”). The Executive agrees that at all times during the Executive’s employment with the Company, except as may be required for the Executive to discharge his duties as an officer of the Company, and thereafter, the Executive shall not disclose such Confidential Information, either directly or indirectly, to any individual, corporation, partnership, limited liability company, association, trust or other entity or organization, including a government or political subdivision or an agency or instrumentality thereof (each a “Person”) without the prior written consent of the Company and shall not use or attempt to use any such information in any manner other than in connection with his employment with the Company, unless required by law to disclose such information, in which case the Executive shall provide the Company with written notice of such requirement as far in advance of such anticipated disclosure as possible. This confidentiality covenant has no temporal, geographical or territorial restriction. Upon termination of the Executive’s employment with the Company, the Executive shall promptly supply to the Company (or destroy, at the Company’s option) all property, keys, notes, memoranda, writings, lists, files, reports, customer lists, correspondence, tapes, disks, cards, surveys, maps, logs, machines, technical data and any other tangible product or document which has been produced by, received by or otherwise submitted to the Executive during or prior to the Executive’s employment with the Company, and any copies thereof in his (or capable of being reduced to his) possession;

6

provided that nothing in this Employment Agreement or elsewhere shall prevent the Executive from retaining and utilizing: documents relating to his personal benefits, entitlements and obligations; documents relating to his personal tax obligations; his desk calendar, rolodex, and the like; and such other records and documents as may reasonably be approved by the Company.

4.2. Non-Competition. By and in consideration of the Company’s entering into this Employment Agreement and the payments to be made and benefits to be provided by the Company hereunder, and in further consideration of the Executive’s exposure to the Confidential Information of the Company and its affiliates, the Executive agrees that the Executive shall not, during the Executive’s employment with the Company (whether during the Term or thereafter) and for a period of eighteen (18) months thereafter (the “Restriction Period”), directly or indirectly (other than in connection with carrying out his responsibilities for the Company and its affiliates), own, manage, operate, join, control, be employed by, or participate in the ownership, management, operation or control of, or be connected in any manner with, including, without limitation, holding any position as a stockholder, director, officer, consultant, independent contractor, employee, partner, or investor in, any Restricted Enterprise (as defined below); provided, that in no event shall ownership of three percent (3%) or less of the outstanding securities of any class of any issuer whose securities are registered under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, standing alone, be prohibited by this Section 4.2, so long as the Executive does not have, or exercise, any rights to manage or operate the business of such issuer other than rights as a stockholder thereof. For purposes of this paragraph, “Restricted Enterprise” shall mean any Person that is actively engaged in any geographic area in which the Company or any of its subsidiaries operates or markets in any business which is in material competition with the business of the Company or any of its subsidiaries (i) conducted during the preceding twelve (12) months (or following the Executive’s termination of employment, the twelve (12) months preceding the date of termination of the Executive’s employment with the Company) or (ii) proposed to be conducted by the Company or any of its subsidiaries in the Company’s business plan as in effect at that time (or following the Executive’s termination of employment, the business plan as in effect as of the date of termination of the Executive’s employment with the Company). During the Restriction Period, upon request of the Company, the Executive shall notify the Company of the Executive’s then-current employment status.

4.3. Non-Solicitation of Employees. During the Restriction Period (other than in connection with carrying out his responsibilities for the Company and its affiliates), the Executive shall not directly or indirectly contact, induce or solicit (or assist any Person to contact, induce or solicit) for employment any person who is, or within six (6) months prior to the date of such solicitation was, an employee of the Company or any of its subsidiaries.

4.4. Interference with Business Relationships. During the Restriction Period (other than in connection with carrying out his responsibilities for the Company and its affiliates), the Executive shall not directly or indirectly contact, induce or solicit (or assist any Person to contact, induce or solicit) any customer or client of the Company or its subsidiaries to terminate its relationship or otherwise cease doing business in whole or in part with the Company or its subsidiaries, or directly or indirectly interfere with (or assist any Person to interfere with) any material relationship between the Company or its subsidiaries and any of its or their customers or clients so as to cause harm to the Company or its affiliates.

7

4.5. Extension of Restriction Period. The Restriction Period shall be tolled for any period during which the Executive is in breach of any of Sections 4.2, 4.3 or 4.4 hereof.

4.6. Proprietary Rights. The Executive shall disclose promptly to the Company any and all inventions, discoveries, and improvements (whether or not patentable or registrable under copyright or similar statutes), and all patentable or copyrightable works, initiated, conceived, discovered, reduced to practice, or made by him, either alone or in conjunction with others, during the Executive’s employment with the Company and related to the business or activities of the Company and its affiliates (the “Developments”). Except to the extent any rights in any Developments constitute a work made for hire under the U.S. Copyright Act, 17 U.S.C. § 101 et seq. that are owned ab initio by the Company and/or its applicable affiliate, the Executive assigns all of his right, title and interest in all Developments (including all intellectual property rights therein) to the Company or its nominee without further compensation, including all rights or benefits therefor, including, without limitation, the right to sue and recover for past and future infringement. The Executive acknowledges that any rights in any developments constituting a work made for hire under the U.S. Copyright Act, 17 U.S.C § 101 et seq. are owned upon creation by the Company and/or its applicable affiliate as the Executive’s employer. Whenever requested to do so by the Company, the Executive shall execute any and all applications, assignments or other instruments which the Company shall deem necessary to apply for and obtain trademarks, patents or copyrights of the United States or any foreign country or otherwise protect the interests of the Company and its affiliates therein, at the Company’s sole expense. These obligations shall continue beyond the end of the Executive’s employment with the Company with respect to inventions, discoveries, improvements or copyrightable works initiated, conceived or made by the Executive while employed by the Company, and shall be binding upon the Executive’s employers, assigns, executors, administrators and other legal representatives. In connection with his execution of this Employment Agreement, the Executive has informed the Company in writing of any interest in any inventions or intellectual property rights that he holds as of the date hereof. If the Company is unable for any reason, after reasonable effort, to obtain the Executive’s signature on any document needed in connection with the actions described in this Section 4.6, the Executive hereby irrevocably designates and appoints the Company and its duly authorized officers and agents as the Executive’s agent and attorney in fact to act for and in the Executive’s behalf to execute, verify and file any such documents and to do all other lawfully permitted acts to further the purposes of this Section 4.6 with the same legal force and effect as if executed by the Executive.

4.7. Confidentiality of Agreement. The Parties agree not to disclose the terms of this Employment Agreement to any Person (other than in connection with carrying out his responsibilities for the Company and its affiliates); provided that (i) the Executive may disclose this Employment Agreement and/or any of its terms to the Executive’s immediate family, financial advisors and attorneys, so long as every such Person to whom the Executive makes such disclosure agrees, in writing, not to disclose the terms of this Employment Agreement further and (ii) the Company may disclose the terms of this Employment Agreement in confidence to its creditors, professional advisors and attorneys, and otherwise when required by law, subpoena, court order or the like.

8

4.8. Remedies. The Executive agrees that any breach of the terms of this Section 4 would result in irreparable injury and damage to the Company for which the Company would have no adequate remedy at law; the Executive therefore also agrees that in the event of said breach or any threat of breach, the Company shall be entitled to an immediate injunction and restraining order, from any court with jurisdiction over the Executive and the matter, to prevent such breach and/or threatened breach and/or continued breach by the Executive and/or any and all Persons acting for and/or with the Executive, without having to prove damages, in addition to any other remedies to which the Company may be entitled at law or in equity, including, without limitation, damages and/or relief pursuant to the last sentence of this Section 4.8. The terms of this Section 4.8 shall not prevent the Company from pursuing any other available remedies for any breach or threatened breach hereof, including, without limitation, the recovery of damages from the Executive. The Executive and the Company further agree that the provisions of the covenants contained in this Section 4 are reasonable and necessary to protect the businesses of the Company and its affiliates because of the Executive’s access to Confidential Information and his material participation in the operation of such businesses. In the event that the Executive willfully and materially breaches any of the covenants set forth in this Section 4, then in addition to any injunctive relief, the Executive will promptly return to the Company a pro-rata portion of any Severance Payment or Pro-Rata Annual Bonus Payment that the Company has paid to the Executive, equal to the product of (x) the amount of the Severance Payment or Pro-Rata Annual Bonus Payment, as applicable, and (y) a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of days from the date of such breach through the 540^th day following the date the Executive’s employment hereunder terminates, and the denominator of which is 540.

4.9. No Other Post-Employment Restrictions. There shall be no contractual, or similar, restrictions on the Executive’s right to terminate his employment with the Company, or on his post-employment activities, other than as expressly set forth in this Employment Agreement.

4.10. Permitted Statements. Nothing in this Employment Agreement shall restrict any Person from making truthful statements (provided any such statement does not include Confidential Information) (i) when required by law, subpoena, court order or the like; (ii) when requested by a governmental, regulatory, or similar body or entity; or (iii) in confidence to a professional advisor for the purpose of securing professional advice.

Section 5. Representations.

Each Party represents and warrants (i) that such Party is not subject to any contract, arrangement, agreement, policy or understanding, or to any statute, governmental rule or regulation, that in any way limits such Party’s ability to enter into and fully perform such Party’s obligations under this Employment Agreement (including, for avoidance of doubt, the agreements of which forms are appended hereto); (ii) that such Party is not otherwise unable to enter into and fully perform such Party’s obligations under this Employment Agreement (including the agreements of which forms are appended hereto); and (iii) that, upon the execution and delivery of this Employment Agreement by both Parties, this Employment Agreement shall be such Party’s valid and binding obligation, enforceable against such Party in accordance with its terms, except to the extent that enforceability may be limited by applicable bankruptcy,

9

insolvency or similar laws affecting the enforcement of creditors’ rights generally. The Company represents and warrants that it is fully authorized by action of the Board, and by actions of any other Person whose authorization is required, to enter into this Employment Agreement and to perform its obligations under it.

Section 6. Non-Disparagement.

From and after the Effective Date and following termination of the Executive’s employment with the Company, the Executive and the Company agree not to make any statement (other than statements made by the Executive in connection with carrying out his responsibilities for the Company and its affiliates) that is intended to become public, or that should reasonably be expected to become public, and that criticizes, ridicules, disparages or is otherwise derogatory of the other Party or, in the case of statements about the Company, any of its subsidiaries, affiliates, employees, officers, directors or stockholders. For such purpose, statements by “the Company” shall mean only (i) the Company by press release or other formally released announcement and (ii) the executive officers and directors thereof and not any other employees.

Section 7. Taxes.

7.1. All amounts paid to the Executive under this Employment Agreement during or following the Term shall be subject to withholding and other employment taxes imposed by applicable law.

7.2. If (i) the aggregate of all amounts and benefits due to the Executive under this Employment Agreement or under any other Company Arrangement would, if received by the Executive in full and valued under Section 280G of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as from time to time amended (the “Code”), constitute “parachute payments” as defined in and under Section 280G of the Code (collectively, “280G Benefits”), and if (ii) such aggregate would, if reduced by all federal, state and local taxes applicable thereto, including the excise tax imposed pursuant to Section 4999 of the Code, be less than the amount the Executive would receive, after all taxes, if the Executive received aggregate 280G Benefits equal (as valued under Section 280G of the Code) to only three times the Executive’s “base amount” as defined in and under Section 280G of the Code, less $1.00, then (iii) such 280G Benefits payable in cash, and/or such benefits under the performance-vesting option of which a form of agreement is attached hereto as Exhibit C, in either case as the Executive shall select shall (to the extent that the reduction of such 280G Benefits can achieve the intended result) be reduced or eliminated to the extent necessary so that the aggregate 280G Benefits received by the Executive will not constitute parachute payments. The determinations with respect to this Section 7.2 shall be made by an independent auditor (the “Auditor”) paid by the Company. The Auditor shall be the Company’s regular independent auditor unless the Executive reasonably objects to the use of that firm, in which event the Auditor will be a nationally recognized United States public accounting firm chosen by the Parties.

7.3. It is possible that after the determinations and selections made pursuant to Section 7.2 the Executive will receive 280G Benefits that are, in the aggregate, either more or less than the amount provided under Section 7.2 (hereafter referred to as an “Excess

10

Payment” or “Underpayment,” respectively). If it is established, pursuant to a final determination of a court or an Internal Revenue Service proceeding that has been finally and conclusively resolved, that an Excess Payment has been made, then the Executive shall promptly pay an amount equal to the Excess Payment to the Company, together with interest on such amount at the applicable federal rate (as defined in and under Section 1274(d) of the Code) from the date of the Executive’s receipt of such Excess Payment until the date of such payment. In the event that it is determined (x) by arbitration pursuant to Section 8.6, (y) by a court or (z) by the Auditor upon request by a Party, that an Underpayment has occurred, the Company shall promptly pay an amount equal to the Underpayment to the Executive, together with interest on such amount at the applicable federal rate from the date such amount would have been paid to the Executive had the provisions of Section 7.2 not been applied until the date of such payment.

7.4. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if it appears that any amount or benefit that is to be paid to the Executive under this Employment Agreement or any other plan, program, agreement, or arrangement of the Company or any of its affiliates may constitute a “parachute payment” under Section 280G(b)(2) of the Code, the Company shall use its best reasonable efforts to obtain shareholder approval of such payments for purposes of Section 280G(b)(5) of the Code.

Section 8. Miscellaneous.

8.1. Indemnification. The Company shall indemnify the Executive to the fullest extent provided under the Company’s Certificate of Incorporation and By-Laws, on the same terms and conditions as such indemnification is generally provided to the CEO and the members of the Board, in the event that he was or is a party or is threatened to be made a party to any threatened, pending or completed action, suit or proceeding, by reason of the fact that the Executive is or was a director, officer, employee or agent of the Company or any of its affiliates; provided, however, that the Executive shall not be entitled to indemnification under this Section 8.1 relating to claims, actions, suits or proceedings arising from his breach of this Employment Agreement. Expenses incurred by the Executive in defending any such claim, action, suit or proceeding shall accordingly be paid by the Company in advance of the final disposition of such claim, action, suit or proceeding upon receipt of an undertaking by or on behalf of the Executive to repay such amount if it shall ultimately be determined that he is not entitled to be indemnified by the Company as authorized in this Section 8.1. In addition, a directors’ and officers’ liability insurance policy (or policies) shall be kept in place, during the Term and thereafter for the duration of any period in which a civil, equitable, criminal or administrative proceeding may be brought against the Executive, providing coverage to the Executive that is no less favorable to him in any respect (including with respect to scope, exclusions, amounts, and deductibles) than the coverage then being provided with respect to periods after the Effective Date to any other present or former senior executive or director of the Company.

8.2. Amendments and Waivers. This Employment Agreement and any of the provisions hereof may be amended, waived (either generally or in a particular instance and either retroactively or prospectively), modified or supplemented, in whole or in part, only by written agreement signed by the Parties that specifically identifies the provisions affected; provided, that the observance of any provision of this Employment Agreement may be waived, but only in a writing specifically identifying the provision to be so waived, by the Party that will

11

lose the benefit of such provision as a result of such waiver. The waiver by either Party of a breach of any provision of this Employment Agreement shall not operate or be construed as a further or continuing waiver of such breach or as a waiver of any other or subsequent breach, except as otherwise explicitly provided for in such waiver. Except as otherwise expressly provided herein, no failure on the part of either Party to exercise, and no delay in exercising, any right, power or remedy hereunder, or otherwise available in respect hereof at law or in equity, shall operate as a waiver thereof, nor shall any single or partial exercise of such right, power or remedy by such Party preclude any other or further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right, power or remedy.

8.3. Assignment. No rights or obligations of the Company under this Employment Agreement may be assigned or transferred by the Company except that such rights and obligations may be assigned or transferred pursuant to a merger or consolidation, or the sale or liquidation of all or substantially all of the business and assets of the Company, provided that the assignee or transferee is the successor to all or substantially all of the business and assets of the Company and such assignee or transferee assumes the liabilities, obligations and duties of the Company, as contained in this Employment Agreement, either contractually or as a matter of law. In the event of any merger, consolidation, other combination, sale of business and assets, or liquidation as described in the preceding sentence, the Company shall use its best reasonable efforts to cause such assignee or transferee to promptly and expressly assume the liabilities, obligations and duties of the Company hereunder. The duties and covenants of Executive under this Employment Agreement, being personal, may not be assigned or delegated. All amounts that become payable to the Executive hereunder shall, in the event of the Executive’s death, be paid to his beneficiary or beneficiaries designated hereunder. The Executive shall be entitled, to the extent permitted under applicable law, to select and change a beneficiary or beneficiaries to receive any compensation or benefit hereunder following the Executive’s death by giving written notice thereof to the Company.

8.4. Notices. All notices, requests, demands, claims and other communications provided for under the terms of this Employment Agreement shall be in writing. Any notice, request, demand, claim or other communication hereunder shall be sent by (i) personal delivery (including receipted courier service) or overnight delivery service, (ii) facsimile during normal business hours, with confirmation of receipt, to the number indicated, (iii) reputable commercial overnight delivery service courier or (iv) registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, postage prepaid and addressed to the intended recipient as set forth below:

If to the Company:	c/o Goldman Sachs Capital Partners
	85 Broad Street
	New York, NY 10004
	Attention: Adrian Jones
	Facsimile: 212-357-5505
	c/o Providence Equity Partners
	50 Kennedy Plaza, 18th Floor
	Providence, RI 02903
	Attention: Peter Wilde
	Facsimile: 401-751-1790

12

with a copy to:	Fried, Frank, Harris, Shriver & Jacobson, LLP
	One New York Plaza
	New York, NY 10004
	Attention: Donald P. Carleen, Esq.
	Facsimile: 212-859-4000
If to the Executive:	Edward H. West, at his principal office
	at the Company (during the Term), and
	at all times to his principal residence as
	reflected in the records of the Company.
with a copy to:	Vedder, Price, Kaufman & Kammholz, P.C.
	222 North LaSalle Street, Suite 2600
	Chicago, Illinois 60601
	Attention: Robert F. Simon, Esq.
	Facsimile: 312-609-5005

All such notices, requests, consents and other communications shall be deemed to have been given when received. Either Party may change the facsimile numbers or addresses to which notices, requests, demands, claims and other communications to such Party are to be delivered by giving the other Party notice in the manner then set forth.

8.5. Governing Law. Except as otherwise required by federal law, this Employment Agreement shall be construed and enforced in accordance with, and the rights and obligations of the Parties shall be governed by, the laws of the State of New York, without giving effect to the conflicts of law principles thereof.

8.6. Arbitration. Other than with respect to provisions under Section 4 of this Employment Agreement, in the event of any dispute, controversy or claim between the Parties that arises out of or relates to this Employment Agreement, the Executive’s employment with the Company, or any termination of such employment, then either Party may, by written notice to the other, require that such dispute, controversy or claim be submitted to arbitration in accordance with the Commercial Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association (the “AAA”). The arbitrator or arbitrators shall be selected by agreement of the Parties or, if they do not agree on an arbitrator or arbitrators within thirty (30) days after one Party has notified the other of his or its desire to have the matter settled by arbitration, then the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be selected by the AAA in New York, New York. The determination reached in such arbitration shall be final and binding on the Parties without any right of appeal or further dispute, except as otherwise required by applicable law. Unless otherwise agreed by the Parties, any such arbitration shall take place in New York, New York.

8.7. Severability. Whenever possible, each provision or portion of any provision of this Employment Agreement, including those contained in Section 4 hereof, will be

13

interpreted in such manner as to be effective and valid under applicable law but the invalidity or unenforceability of any provision or portion of any provision of this Employment Agreement in any jurisdiction shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the remainder of this Employment Agreement in that jurisdiction or the validity or enforceability of this Employment Agreement, including that provision or portion of any provision, in any other jurisdiction. In addition, should a court or arbitrator determine that any provision or portion of any provision of this Employment Agreement, including those contained in Section 4 hereof, is not reasonable or valid, either in period of time, geographical area, or otherwise, the Parties agree that such provision should be interpreted and enforced to the maximum extent which such court or arbitrator deems reasonable or valid.

8.8. Entire Agreement. From and after the date hereof, this Employment Agreement, and the other agreements being executed in connection herewith (including the Executive’s common stock purchase agreement and the agreements therewith), constitute the entire agreement between the Parties, and supersede all prior representations, agreements and understandings (including any prior course of dealings), both written and oral, between the Parties with respect to the subject matter hereof, except with respect to rights accrued as of the Effective Date (e.g., unpaid salary, unreimbursed business expenses, etc.). The terms of this Employment Agreement, and of the agreements of which forms are attached hereto, shall control over those of any inconsistent Company Arrangements with respect to the subject matter hereof.

8.9. Counterparts. This Employment Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original, but all such counterparts shall together constitute one and the same instrument. Signatures delivered by facsimile shall be effective for all purposes.

8.10. Binding Effect. This Employment Agreement shall inure to the benefit of, and be binding on, the successors and assigns of each of the Parties, to the extent provided herein. In the event of the Executive’s death or a judicial determination of his incompetence, references in this Employment Agreement to the Executive shall be deemed, as appropriate, to be references to his estate, beneficiaries, or legal representatives.

8.11. General Interpretive Principles. The name assigned this Employment Agreement and headings of the sections, paragraphs, subparagraphs, clauses and subclauses of this Employment Agreement are for convenience of reference only and shall not in any way affect the meaning or interpretation of any of the provisions hereof. Words of inclusion shall not be construed as terms of limitation herein, so that references to “include,” “includes” and “including” shall not be limiting and shall be regarded as references to non-exclusive and non-characterizing illustrations. Any reference to a Section of the Code shall be deemed to include any successor to such Section.

8.12. Mitigation/Offset. The Executive shall be under no obligation to seek other employment or to otherwise mitigate the obligations of the Company under this Employment Agreement, and there shall be no offset against amounts or benefits due Executive under this Employment Agreement or otherwise on account of any claim (other than any preexisting debts then due in accordance with their terms) the Company or its affiliates may have against him or any remuneration or other benefit earned or received by Executive after such termination.

14

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties have executed this Employment Agreement as of the date first written above.

	EDUCATION MANAGEMENT CORPORATION
	By:
Edward H. West		Name:
		Title:

15

Exhibit A

TIME-VESTING OPTION AGREEMENT

Exhibit B

PERFORMANCE-VESTING OPTION AGREEMENT

Exhibit C

WAIVER AND RELEASE OF CLAIMS

1. In consideration of the payments and benefits to be made under the Employment Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2006 (the “Employment Agreement”), to which Edward H. West (the “Executive”) and Education Management Corporation (the “Company”) (each of the Executive and the Company, a “Party” and collectively, the “Parties”) are parties, the sufficiency of which the Executive acknowledges, the Executive, with the intention of binding himself and his heirs, executors, administrators and assigns, does hereby release, remise, acquit and forever discharge the Company and each of its subsidiaries and affiliates (the “Company Affiliated Group”), their present and former officers, directors, executives, shareholders, agents, attorneys, employees and employee benefit plans (and the fiduciaries thereof), and the successors, predecessors and assigns of each of the foregoing (collectively, the “Company Released Parties”), of and from any and all claims, actions, causes of action, complaints, charges, demands, rights, damages, debts, sums of money, accounts, financial obligations, suits, expenses, attorneys’ fees and liabilities of whatever kind or nature in law, equity or otherwise, whether accrued, absolute, contingent, unliquidated or otherwise and whether now known or unknown, suspected or unsuspected, which the Executive, individually or as a member of a class, now has, owns or holds, or has at any time heretofore had, owned or held, arising on or prior to the date hereof, against any Company Released Party that arises out of, or relates to, the Employment Agreement, the Executive’s employment with the Company, or any termination of such employment, including claims (i) for severance or vacation benefits, unpaid wages, salary or incentive payments, (ii) for breach of contract, wrongful discharge, impairment of economic opportunity, defamation, intentional infliction of emotional harm or other tort, (iii) for any violation of applicable state and local labor and employment laws (including, without limitation, all laws concerning unlawful and unfair labor and employment practices) and (iv) for employment discrimination under any applicable federal, state or local statute, provision, order or regulation, and including, without limitation, any claim under Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 (“Title VII”), the Civil Rights Act of 1988, the Fair Labor Standards Act, the Americans with Disabilities Act (“ADA”), the Executive Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended (“ERISA”), the Age Discrimination in Employment Act (“ADEA”), and any similar or analogous state statute, excepting only:

(A) rights of the Executive arising under, or preserved by, this Agreement or Section 3 and Section 7 of the Employment Agreement;

(B) the right of the Executive to receive COBRA continuation coverage in accordance with applicable law;

(C) claims for benefits under any health, disability, retirement, life insurance or other, similar employee benefit plan (within the meaning of Section 3(3) of ERISA) of the Company Affiliated Group; and

(D) rights to indemnification the Executive has or may have under the by-laws or certificate of incorporation of any member of the

Company Affiliated Group or as an insured under any director’s and officer’s liability insurance policy now or previously in force.

2. The Employee acknowledges and agrees that the release of claims set forth in this Agreement is not to be construed in any way as an admission of any liability whatsoever by any Company Released Party, any such liability being expressly denied.

3. The release of claims set forth in this Agreement applies to any relief no matter how called, including, without limitation, wages, back pay, front pay, compensatory damages, liquidated damages, punitive damages, damages for pain or suffering, costs, and attorneys’ fees and expenses.

4. The Executive specifically acknowledges that his acceptance of the terms of the release of claims set forth in this Agreement is, among other things, a specific waiver of his rights, claims and causes of action under Title VII, ADEA, ADA and any state or local law or regulation in respect of discrimination of any kind; provided, however, that nothing herein shall be deemed, nor does anything contained herein purport, to be a waiver of any right or claim or cause of action which by law the Executive is not permitted to waive.

5. As to rights, claims and causes of action arising under the ADEA, the Executive acknowledges that he has been given but not utilized a period of twenty-one (21) days to consider whether to execute this Agreement. If the Executive accepts the terms hereof and executes this Agreement, he may thereafter, for a period of seven (7) days following (and not including) the date of execution, revoke this Agreement as it relates to the release of claims arising under the ADEA. If no such revocation occurs, this Agreement shall become irrevocable in its entirety, and binding and enforceable against the Executive, on the day next following the day on which the foregoing seven-day period has elapsed. If such a revocation occurs, the Executive shall irrevocably forfeit any right to payment of the Severance Payment and/or Pro-Rata Annual Bonus Payment (as such terms are defined in the Employment Agreement), but the remainder of the Employment Agreement shall continue in full force.

6. Other than as to rights, claims and causes of action arising under the ADEA, the release of claims set forth in this Agreement shall be immediately effective upon execution by the Executive.

7. The Executive acknowledges and agrees that he has not, with respect to any transaction or state of facts existing prior to the date hereof, filed any complaints, charges or lawsuits against any Company Released Party with any governmental agency, court or tribunal.

8. The Executive acknowledges that he has been advised to seek, and has had the opportunity to seek, the advice and assistance of an attorney with regard to the release of claims set forth in this Agreement, and has been given a sufficient period within which to consider the release of claims set forth in this Agreement.

9. The Executive acknowledges that the release of claims set forth in this Agreement relates only to claims which exist as of the date of this Agreement.

10. The Executive acknowledges that the Severance Payment and/or Pro-Rata Annual Bonus Payment he is receiving in connection with the release of claims set forth in this Agreement and his obligations under this Agreement are in addition to anything of value to which the Executive is entitled from the Company.

11. Each provision hereof is severable from this Agreement, and if one or more provisions hereof are declared invalid, the remaining provisions shall nevertheless remain in full force and effect. If any provision of this Agreement is so broad, in scope, or duration or otherwise, as to be unenforceable, such provision shall be interpreted to be only so broad as is enforceable.

12. This Agreement constitutes the complete agreement of the Parties in respect of the subject matter hereof and shall supersede all prior agreements between the Parties in respect of the subject matter hereof except to the extent set forth herein.

13. The failure to enforce at any time any of the provisions of this Agreement or to require at any time performance by another party of any of the provisions hereof shall in no way be construed to be a waiver of such provisions or to affect the validity of this Agreement, or any part hereof, or the right of any party thereafter to enforce each and every such provision in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

14. This Agreement may be executed in several counterparts, each of which shall be deemed to be an original, but all of which together shall constitute one and the same instrument. Signatures delivered by facsimile shall be deemed effective for all purposes.

15. This Agreement shall be binding upon any and all successors and assigns of the Executive and the Company.

16. Except for issues or matters as to which federal law is applicable, this Agreement shall be governed by and construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of the State of New York without giving effect to the conflicts of law principles thereof.

[signature page follows]

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this Agreement has been signed by or on behalf of each of the Parties, all as of [                    ].

	EDUCATION MANAGEMENT CORPORATION
	By:
Edward H. West		Name:
		Title:

Exhibit D

MATERIAL WRITTEN POLICIES

1. Education Management Corporation Code of Business Ethics and Conduct

2. Education Management Corporation Policy Statement on Inside Information and Insider Trading

EX-10.17

Exhibit 10.17

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT CORPORATION

NONQUALIFIED STOCK OPTION AGREEMENT

(Time-Vesting)

THIS AGREEMENT (the “Agreement”), is made effective as of August     , 2006 (the “Date of Grant”), between Education Management Corporation, a Pennsylvania corporation, and John R. McKernan, Jr. (the “Participant”):

R E C I T A L S:

WHEREAS, the Company has adopted the Education Management Corporation 2006 Stock Option Plan (the “Plan”), which Plan is incorporated herein by reference and made a part of this Agreement to the extent set forth in Section 14 below. Capitalized terms not otherwise defined herein or by reference herein shall have the meanings given thereto in the Plan; and

WHEREAS, the Committee has determined that it is in the best interests of the Company and its shareholders to grant an Option to the Participant pursuant to the Plan, the Employment Agreement (the “Employment Agreement”) between the Participant and the Company (the “Parties”) dated as of June 1, 2006 (the “Effective Date”), and the terms set forth herein.

NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, the Parties agree as follows:

1. Grant of the Option. The Company hereby grants to the Participant the right and option (the “Option”) to purchase, on the terms and conditions hereinafter set forth, all or any part of an aggregate of 171,052 Shares, subject to adjustment as set forth in the Plan. The Option Price shall be $50.00, which the Parties agree is not less than the fair market value of a Share as of the date hereof.

2. Duration. Subject to the provisions of the Plan and this Agreement, the Participant may exercise all or any part of the Vested Portion of the Option at any time prior to the tenth anniversary of the Effective Date. The Option may not be cancelled or forfeited without the Participant’s prior written consent prior to such tenth anniversary, other than as expressly provided (x) in Section 8(b) of the Plan (relating to “Transactions”), and then only on per-Share terms no less favorable to the Participant than to any other Participant in the Plan, or (y) in this Agreement.

3. Vesting.

(a) Subject solely to the provisions of Sections 3(b), 3(c), 3(d), 4(a), 4(b) and 4(c) below and Section 8(b) of the Plan, the Option shall vest and become exercisable with respect to 1.667% of the Shares subject to the Option as of June 30, 2006, and thereafter the Option shall vest and become exercisable at the end of each calendar month with respect to an aggregate of 1.667% of the Shares originally subject to the Option (and thus shall be fully vested no later than May 31, 2011, assuming continued Employment). The portion of the Option which has become vested and exercisable as described in Sections 3(a), 3(b), 3(c) or 3(d) is hereinafter referred to as the “Vested Portion.”

(b) Notwithstanding the foregoing and Section 3(c), one hundred percent (100%) of the Shares then subject to the Option shall be accelerated and become vested and exercisable immediately prior to, but subject to the consummation of, a Change in Control.

(c) (i) If the Participant’s Employment is terminated by the Company without Cause or by the Participant for Good Reason (as defined in the Employment Agreement) on or before the second anniversary of the Effective Date, the Option shall continue to vest and become exercisable at the end of each of the next twenty-four months with respect to 1.667% of the Shares then subject to the Option. The remaining portion of the Option shall automatically be canceled without payment of any consideration therefor.

(ii) If the Participant’s Employment is terminated by the Company without Cause or by the Participant for Good Reason at any time following the second anniversary of the Effective Date, and on or before the third anniversary of the Effective Date, the Option shall continue to vest and become exercisable at the end of each of the months thereafter until the fourth anniversary of the Effective Date with respect to 1.667% of the Shares then subject to the Option (the total at the end of the period being 80% of the Shares subject to the Option as of the date of termination). The remaining portion of the Option shall automatically be canceled without payment of any consideration therefor.

(iii) If the Participant’s Employment is terminated by the Company without Cause or by the Participant for Good Reason following the third anniversary of the Effective Date, the Option shall continue to vest and become exercisable at the end of each of the next twelve months with respect to 1.667% of the Shares then subject to the Option. The remaining portion of the Option shall automatically be canceled without payment of any consideration therefor.

For purposes of this Section 3(c), and of the percentages set forth in it, Shares previously subject to the Option, and in respect of which the Option has already been exercised, shall be treated as still subject to the Option. If the Participant’s Employment is terminated by the Company without Cause or by the Participant for Good Reason, the Vested Portion of the Option (including that which continues to vest in accordance with this Section 3(c)) shall remain exercisable until the tenth anniversary of the Effective Date.

(d) Upon the Transition Event (as defined in the Employment Agreement), (i) the Participant shall retain the then Vested Portion of the Option, (ii) the Participant shall forfeit forty percent (40%) of the then unvested portion of the Option, which shall automatically be canceled without payment of consideration therefor, and (iii) the remaining sixty percent (60%) of the then unvested portion of the Option shall continue subject to the terms of this Agreement and shall vest ratably over the remaining portion of the vesting schedule set forth in Section 3(a) hereof. In the event of a termination of the Participant’s Employment in the manner described in Section 3(c) following the Transition Event, the rate at which the Option will continue to vest over the applicable period described in Section 3(c) will be the same rate at which it was vesting immediately before the termination.

2

4. Certain Other Terminations of Employment.

(a) If the Participant’s Employment is terminated by the Company for Cause, the Option shall, whether or not vested, be automatically canceled without payment of consideration therefor. For purposes of this Agreement, it is agreed that whether Cause exists shall be determined in accordance with the Employment Agreement.

(b) If the Participant’s Employment is terminated by the Participant without Good Reason (as defined in the Employment Agreement) and not for death or Disability, the Option shall, to the extent not then or previously vested, automatically be canceled without payment of consideration therefor upon such termination of Employment, and the Vested Portion of the Option shall remain exercisable until 30 days following the date of such termination of Employment.

(c) If the Participant’s Employment is terminated due to the Participant’s death or Disability or due to the expiration of the term of the Employment Agreement, the Option shall, to the extent not then or previously vested, automatically be canceled without payment of consideration therefor, and the Vested Portion of the Option shall remain exercisable until the tenth anniversary of the Effective Date.

5. Exercise of Option.

(a) Subject to Section 2, the Vested Portion of the Option may be exercised by delivering to the Company at its principal office written notice of intent to so exercise; provided that the Option may be exercised with respect to whole Shares only. Such notice shall specify the number of Shares for which the Option is being exercised (the “Purchased Shares”) and shall be accompanied by payment in full of the Option Price in cash or by check or wire transfer; provided, however, that payment of such aggregate Option Price may instead be made, in whole or in part, by one or more of the following: (i) provided that the Company is not then contractually prohibited from permitting exercise in this fashion, the delivery to the Company of a certificate or certificates representing Shares, duly endorsed or accompanied by a duly executed stock power, which delivery effectively transfers to the Company good and valid title to such Shares, free and clear of any pledge, commitment, lien, claim or other encumbrance (such Shares to be valued at their aggregate Fair Market Value on the date of such exercise), provided that if a certificate or certificates representing Shares in excess of the amount required are delivered, a certificate (or other satisfactory evidence of ownership) representing the excess number of Shares shall promptly be returned by the Company, (ii) a reduction in the number of Purchased Shares to be issued upon such exercise having a Fair Market Value on the date of exercise equal to the aggregate Option Price in respect of the Purchased Shares, provided that the Company is not then contractually prohibited from permitting exercise in this fashion, or (iii) other cashless exercise procedures approved by the Committee. The Participant shall not have any rights to dividends or other rights of a stockholder with respect to Shares subject to the Option until the Participant has given written notice of exercise of the Option, paid the Option Price in full for such Shares and, if applicable, has satisfied any other conditions pursuant to the Plan or this Agreement (including provisions for the payment of applicable withholding taxes, which provisions may be made in any of the ways in which the Option Price may be paid). Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement or the Plan, for purposes of this Section 5(a), the Fair Market Value of a Share shall, to the extent necessary to avoid incurring “additional tax,” interest or penalties under Section 409A of the Code, not be treated as

3

greater than the “fair market value” of a Share determined consistently with Section 409A of the Code and the regulations and guidance promulgated thereunder.

(b) Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan or this Agreement to the contrary, the Option may not be exercised prior to the completion of any registration or qualification of the Option or the Shares under applicable state and Federal securities or other laws, or under any ruling or regulation of any governmental body or national securities exchange that the Committee shall in its sole discretion determine to be necessary or advisable, unless an exemption to such registration or qualification is available and satisfied.

(c) The Company shall, upon payment in accordance with Section 5(a) above of the Option Price for Purchased Shares, deliver such Shares as soon as reasonably practicable to the Participant and pay all original issue and transfer taxes and all other fees and expenses incident to such delivery. All Shares delivered upon any exercise of the Option shall, when delivered, (i) be duly authorized, validly issued, fully paid and nonassessable, (ii) be registered for sale, and for resale, under U.S. state and federal securities laws to the extent that other Shares issued under the Plan are then so registered or qualified and (iii) be listed, or otherwise qualified, for trading on any securities exchange or securities market on which other Shares issued under the Plan of the same class are then listed or qualified.

(d) In the event of the Participant’s death, the Vested Portion of the Option shall remain exercisable by the Participant’s executor or administrator, or the person or persons to whom the Participant’s rights under this Agreement shall pass by will or by the laws of descent and distribution, or the person or persons to whom such rights have passed under Section 9, as the case may be, to the extent set forth in Section 3 (and the term “Participant” shall be deemed to include such heir or legatee or permitted transferee). Any such heir or legatee or permitted transferee of the Participant shall take rights herein granted subject to the terms and conditions hereof.

6. Shareholders’ Agreement. The Participant acknowledges that he has become a party to the Shareholders’ Agreement (attached hereto as Exhibit A), as of June 6, 2006, and that he is accordingly subject to the provisions thereof with respect to the Option and the Purchased Shares (it being agreed that, for the avoidance of doubt hereunder, the call rights under Section 8 of the Shareholders’ Agreement apply only to Purchased Shares). The Participant agrees that any provisions of the Shareholders’ Agreement will supersede any provisions of the Plan or this Agreement to the contrary; provided, however, that, notwithstanding the definition of “Equity Call Purchase Price” in Section 8(c) of the Shareholders’ Agreement, the purchase price described in clause (i) of such definition of “Equity Call Purchase Price” shall apply only upon a termination of the Participant’s Employment (x) by the Participant without Good Reason (as defined in the Employment Agreement) and not for death or Disability prior to the earlier of the fifth anniversary of the Effective Date and the occurrence of a Change in Control or (y) by the Company for Cause, and the purchase price described in clause (ii) of such definition of “Equity Call Purchase Price” shall apply in all other circumstances. Except for the foregoing, the provisions of Section 8 of the Shareholders’ Agreement (as modified by Section 17 below) shall apply without modification.

4

7. No Right to Continued Employment. The granting of the Option evidenced hereby and this Agreement shall impose no obligation on the Company or any Affiliate to continue the Employment of the Participant and shall not lessen or affect the Company’s or its Affiliates’ right to terminate the Employment of the Participant.

8. Legend on Certificates. The certificates representing the Shares purchased by exercise of the Option shall be subject to such stop transfer orders and other restrictions as the Committee may reasonably deem advisable under the Plan or the rules, regulations, and other requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission, any stock exchange upon which such Shares are listed, and any applicable Federal or state laws, and the Committee may cause a legend or legends to be put on any such certificates to make appropriate reference to such restrictions, provided, however, that any such legends shall be removed, promptly upon the Participant’s reasonable written request, to the extent that the grounds that supported requiring the legend no longer apply.

9. Transferability. The Option may not be assigned, alienated, pledged, attached, sold or otherwise transferred or encumbered by the Participant otherwise than by will or by the laws of descent and distribution, and any such purported assignment, alienation, pledge, attachment, sale, transfer or encumbrance shall be void and unenforceable against the Company or any Affiliate; provided that the designation of one or more beneficiaries to whom the Option shall be transferred, in whole or in part, upon the death of the Participant shall not constitute a prohibited assignment, alienation, pledge, attachment, sale, transfer or encumbrance; and provided, further, that the Option may be transferred in whole or in part (x) by will or the laws of descent and distribution or (y) gratuitously to any Affiliate (as defined in the Shareholders’ Agreement) who agrees to be bound by the provisions of this Agreement. No transfer of the Option shall be effective to bind the Company unless the Committee shall have been furnished with written notice thereof and a copy of such evidence as the Committee may deem necessary to establish the validity of the transfer and the acceptance by the transferee or transferees of the terms and conditions hereof.

10. Taxes. Prior to the issuance of any Shares upon exercise of the Option, the Participant shall be required to satisfy any applicable withholding taxes in respect of the Option in accordance with Section 5(a) above. Subject to the foregoing, the Participant shall be solely responsible for the payment of all taxes relating to the payment or provision of any amounts or benefits hereunder. All amounts and benefits due to the Participant under this Agreement are subject to Section 7 of the Employment Agreement.

11. Securities Laws. Upon the acquisition of any Shares pursuant to the exercise of the Option, the Participant will make or enter into such written representations, warranties and agreements as the Committee may reasonably request in order to comply with applicable Federal or State securities laws or with this Agreement.

12. Notices. Any notice necessary under this Agreement shall be addressed to the Company in care of its Secretary at the principal executive office of the Company and to the Participant at the address appearing in the personnel records of the Company for the Participant or to either party hereto at such other address as either party may hereafter designate in writing to the other. Any such notice shall be deemed effective upon receipt thereof by the addressee.

5

13. Choice of Law. This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with its express terms, and otherwise in accordance with the laws of the State of New York without giving effect to the principles of conflicts of law, provided that the provisions set forth herein that are required to be governed by the Pennsylvania Business Corporation Law of 1988, as amended, shall be governed by the Pennsylvania Business Corporation Law of 1988, as amended.

14. Option Subject to Plan. By entering into this Agreement, the Participant agrees and acknowledges that the Participant has received and read a copy of the Plan. The Option is subject to the Plan to the extent that the Plan is not inconsistent with this Agreement. The terms and provisions of the Plan, as it may be amended from time to time, are hereby incorporated herein by reference. In the event of any inconsistency between (x) any term or provision of this Agreement and (y) any term or provision of the Plan or any other Company Arrangement (as defined in the Employment Agreement), other than the Employment Agreement, the terms and provisions of this Agreement will govern and prevail.

15. The Company’s Representations. The Company represents and warrants that (a) it is fully authorized, by action of any Person or body whose action is required, to enter into this Agreement and to perform its obligations under it; (b) the execution, delivery and performance of this Agreement by the Company does not violate any applicable law, regulation, order, judgment or decree or any agreement, plan or corporate governance document (x) to which it (or, to the best of its knowledge and belief, any of its security holders or creditors) is a party or (y) by which it (or, to the best of its knowledge and belief, any of its security holders or creditors) is bound; (c) no restrictions prohibiting exercise of the Option in the fashions described in Sections 5(a)(i) or 5(a)(ii) currently exist; and (d) upon the execution and delivery of this Agreement by the Parties, this Agreement shall be the valid and binding obligation of the Company, enforceable in accordance with its terms, except to the extent enforceability may be limited by applicable bankruptcy, insolvency or similar laws affecting the enforcement of creditors’ rights generally.

16. Right to Timely Exercise. In the event that any holder of Shares will receive cash, securities or other property in respect of Shares in connection with a Change in Control, Realization Event, Exit Sale, or Transaction (each a “Covered Transaction”), or that the Participant becomes entitled to participate in a Tag-Along Offer or to exercise registration rights (each also a “Covered Transaction”), then the Company shall take such steps as are necessary to enable the Participant (if he so elects and to the extent the Option is, or becomes, vested and exercisable upon the occurrence of such Covered Transaction) to exercise the Option at a time and in a fashion that will entitle him to receive in exchange for any Shares thus acquired the same consideration, on a per-Share basis, as is received in such Covered Transaction by other holders of Shares, to the extent that the Participant is otherwise entitled to participate in such Covered Transaction.

17. Miscellaneous. Sections 8.2, 8.7 and 8.11 of the Employment Agreement (relating, respectively, to amendments and waivers, severability, and general interpretation principles) shall be deemed incorporated herein in full, with the references to the “Employment Agreement” in such Sections being treated as references to this Agreement, and the references to the “Executive” in such Sections being treated as references to the Participant. For purposes of

6

this Agreement (including Section 6 above), (a) notwithstanding (i) the definition set forth in Section 2(n) of the Plan and (ii) the definition of “Fair Market Value” for purposes of Section 8 of the Shareholders’ Agreement, the “Fair Market Value” of securities of the Company held by the Participant or subject to the Option shall not take into account reductions to reflect minority status or illiquidity that are not applicable to the Principal Stockholders, (b) “Exit Sale” shall mean “Exit Sale” as defined in the Shareholders’ Agreement, (c) “Tag-Along Offer” shall mean “Tag-Along Offer” as defined in the Shareholders’ Agreement and (d) “Employment” shall mean employment under the Employment Agreement. In addition, there shall be submitted for arbitration (as provided in Section 8.6 of the Employment Agreement) any dispute, controversy or claim related to whether the Participant’s termination of Employment was for Cause or Good Reason.

18. Signature in Counterparts. This Agreement may be signed in counterparts, each of which shall be an original, with the same effect as if the signatures thereto and hereto were upon the same instrument. Signatures delivered by facsimile shall be effective for all purposes.

[signature page follows]

7

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties have executed this Agreement, effective as of the Date of Grant.

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT CORPORATION

By:

Name:

Title:

Agreed and acknowledged as

of the date first above written:

John R. McKernan, Jr.

Exhibit A

SHAREHOLDERS’ AGREEMENT

EX-10.18

Exhibit 10.18

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT CORPORATION

NONQUALIFIED STOCK OPTION AGREEMENT

(Performance-Vesting)

THIS AGREEMENT (the “Agreement”), is made effective as of August     , 2006 (the “Date of Grant”), between Education Management Corporation, a Pennsylvania corporation, and John R. McKernan, Jr. (the “Participant”):

R E C I T A L S:

WHEREAS, the Company has adopted the Education Management Corporation 2006 Stock Option Plan (the “Plan”), which Plan is incorporated herein by reference and made a part of this Agreement to the extent set forth in Section 14 below. Capitalized terms not otherwise defined herein or by reference herein shall have the meanings given thereto in the Plan; and

WHEREAS, the Committee has determined that it is in the best interests of the Company and its shareholders to grant an Option to the Participant pursuant to the Plan, the Employment Agreement (the “Employment Agreement”) between the Participant and the Company (the “Parties”) dated as of June 1, 2006 (the “Effective Date”), and the terms set forth herein.

NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, the Parties agree as follows:

1. Grant of the Option. The Company hereby grants to the Participant the right and option (the “Option”) to purchase, on the terms and conditions hereinafter set forth, all or any part of an aggregate of 171,053 Shares, subject to adjustment as set forth in the Plan. The Option Price shall be $50.00, which the Parties agree is not less than the fair market value of a Share as of the date hereof.

2. Duration. Subject to the provisions of the Plan and this Agreement, the Participant may exercise all or any part of the Vested Portion of the Option at any time prior to the tenth anniversary of the Effective Date. The Option may not be cancelled or forfeited without the Participant’s prior written consent prior to such tenth anniversary, other than as expressly provided (x) in Section 8(b) of the Plan (relating to “Transactions”), and then only on per-Share terms no less favorable to the Participant than to any other Participant in the Plan, or (y) in this Agreement.

3. Vesting.

(a) Subject solely to the provisions of Sections 3(b), 3(c), 3(d), 3(e), 4(a), and 4(b) below and Section 8(b) of the Plan, the Option shall vest and become exercisable with respect to the Shares then subject to it at the times, and to the degree, set forth in the following schedule, upon one or more Realization Events:

Cash on Cash Return Realized by Principal Stockholders on Invested Capital	Applicable Percentage
200%	20% of the Shares then subject to the Option
250%	40% of the Shares then subject to the Option (treating Shares in respect of which the Option has already been exercised as, for this purpose, then still subject to the Option)
300%	60% of the Shares then subject to the Option (treating Shares in respect of which the Option has already been exercised as, for this purpose, then still subject to the Option)
350%	80% of the Shares then subject to the Option (treating Shares in respect of which the Option has already been exercised as, for this purpose, then still subject to the Option)
400%	100% of the Shares then subject to the Option

For purposes of this Agreement, “Cash on Cash Return” shall mean the aggregate gross cash return (e.g., without deduction for taxes or for amounts invested by the Principal Stockholders in Shares) realized by the Principal Stockholders on all of the capital invested by them in Shares. Such return shall include cash (and marketable securities) realized as a result of any disposition or exchange of Shares owned by the Principal Stockholders, as well as cash (and marketable securities) received as dividends or other distributions in respect of Shares owned by the Principal Stockholders. The Cash on Cash Return targets shall be separately calculated for, and must be separately satisfied with respect to, capital invested in Shares by the Principal Stockholders after the Effective Date, so that the applicable Cash on Cash Return target stated as a percentage equals 100 + ((x/36) times (y-100)), where x = the number of months that have elapsed from the date of investment through the date the return is being measured, (provided that x shall not exceed 36), and y = the applicable Cash on Cash Return percentage from the schedule above; provided, however, that for purposes of such calculation, returns shall first be attributed to

2

the earliest capital invested.¹ If one or more of the Principal Stockholders ceases to own any Shares, Cash on Cash Return shall thereafter be determined based solely on the returns realized by the remaining Principal Stockholder(s). Immediately following a Realization Event described in clause (ii) of the definition thereof in Section 2(w) of the Plan (a “Clause (ii) Realization Event”), the sum of (x) the Fair Market Value of the remaining Shares owned by the Principal Stockholders, plus (y) the Fair Market Value of property previously received by the Principal Stockholders in respect of Shares in forms other than cash (or marketable securities), shall be considered as cash proceeds received by the Principal Stockholders, and there shall be no further vesting thereafter; provided, however, that in the event that some or all of the proceeds received (or to be received) by the Principal Stockholders in respect of any disposition of Shares owned by them is in the form of contingent payments or proceeds (e.g., installment sale proceeds, earn-out proceeds, escrow amounts, etc.), then, at the time that such contingent payments or proceeds (if any) are received by the Principal Stockholders, the Cash on Cash Return shall be recalculated and the Applicable Percentage above increased if necessary to reflect the receipt of such payments or proceeds. Notwithstanding the foregoing, to the extent that a Clause (ii) Realization Event has not occurred as of the nine-year and six-month anniversary of the Effective Date and there are any contingent payments or proceeds that have not been received by the Principal Stockholders (or property previously received by the Principal Stockholders that has not already been reduced to cash or marketable securities) as of that date, then the Fair Market Value of such contingent payments or proceeds (or property) shall be determined and the Cash on Cash Return shall be recalculated and the Applicable Percentage above increased, if necessary. The portion of the Option which has become vested and exercisable as described in Sections 3(a), 3(b), 3(c) or 3(d) is hereinafter referred to as the “Vested Portion.”

(b) (i) If the Participant’s Employment is terminated by the Company without Cause or by the Participant for Good Reason (as defined in the Employment Agreement) on or before the second anniversary of the Effective Date, the Participant (A) shall vest as of the date of termination of Employment in a portion of the Option equal to the number of Shares then subject to the Option multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is equal to the number of months elapsing from the Effective Date to the date of termination of Employment (the “Months Worked”) and the denominator of which is sixty and (B) shall continue to vest at the end of each of the next twenty-four months in 1.667% of the Shares then subject to the Option. The remaining portion of the Option shall automatically be canceled without payment of any consideration therefor.

(ii) If the Participant’s Employment is terminated by the Company without Cause or by the Participant for Good Reason at any time following the second anniversary of the

¹ For purposes of illustration, to achieve a 60% Applicable Percentage, (i) a 300% Cash on Cash Return would have to be realized on the Principal Stockholders’ initial capital investment and (ii) on subsequently invested capital measured on a realized return to the Principal Stockholders two years following the date of investment, the Cash on Cash Return needed on that subsequently invested capital would be equal to 233% (100 + ((24/36) * (300-100)) = 233).

3

Effective Date, and on or before the third anniversary of the Effective Date, the Participant (A) shall vest as of the date of termination of Employment in a portion of the Option equal to the number of Shares then subject to the Option multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is equal to the Months Worked and the denominator of which is sixty and (B) shall continue to vest at the end of each of the months thereafter until the fourth anniversary of the Effective Date in 1.667% of the Shares then subject to the Option (the total at the end of the period being 80% of the Shares subject to the Option at the date of termination). The remaining portion of the Option shall automatically be canceled without payment of any consideration therefor.

(iii) If the Participant’s Employment is terminated by the Company without Cause or by the Participant for Good Reason following the third anniversary of the Effective Date, the Participant (A) shall vest as of the date of termination of Employment in a portion of the Option equal to the number of Shares then subject to the Option multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is equal to the Months Worked and the denominator of which is sixty and (B) shall continue to vest at the end of each of the next twelve months in 1.667% of the Shares then subject to the Option. The remaining portion of the Option shall automatically be canceled without payment of any consideration therefor.

To the extent the Option has become vested pursuant to this Section 3(b) (or was vested before a termination of Employment described in this Section 3(b)), it shall remain outstanding until the tenth anniversary of the Effective Date, but shall become exercisable only to the extent that the applicable Cash on Cash Return goals set forth in Section 3(a) are attained. For purposes of this Section 3(b) and the percentages set forth in it, Shares previously subject to the Option, and in respect of which the Option has already been exercised, shall be treated as still subject to the Option.

(c) If the Participant’s Employment is terminated due to the expiration of the term of the Employment Agreement, the Participant shall vest in all of the Shares then subject to the Option. To the extent the Option has become vested pursuant to this Section 3(c) (or was vested before a termination of Employment described in this Section 3(c)), it shall remain outstanding until the tenth anniversary of the Effective Date, but shall become exercisable only to the extent that the applicable Cash on Cash Return goals set forth in Section 3(a) are attained.

(d) If the Participant’s Employment is terminated due to his death or Disability, the Participant shall vest in a portion of the Option equal to the number of Shares subject to the Option then outstanding multiplied by a fraction, not greater than one, the numerator of which is equal to the Months Worked and denominator of which is sixty. The remaining portion of the Option shall automatically be canceled without payment of any consideration therefor. To the extent the Option has become vested pursuant to this Section 3(d) (or was vested before a termination of Employment described in this Section 3(d)), it shall remain outstanding until the tenth anniversary of the Effective Date, but shall become exercisable only to the extent that the applicable Cash on Cash Return goals set forth in Section 3(a) are attained. For purposes of this Section 3(d), Shares previously subject to the Option, and

4

in respect of which the Option has already been exercised, shall be treated as still subject to the Option.

(e) Upon the Transition Event (as such term is defined in the Employment Agreement), the number of Shares subject to the Option shall be reduced to an amount determined by multiplying the total number of Shares subject to the Option immediately prior to the Transition Event by a percentage equal to the sum of (x) and (y), where (x) is sixty percent (60%) and (y) is forty percent (40%) times a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of months elapsed from the Effective Date to the date of the Transition Event and the denominator of which is sixty. The number of Shares by which the Option is reduced shall apply first to the portion of the Option (if any) that is not vested and exercisable as of the date of the Transition Event, and then, if necessary to fully effectuate the reduction, to the Vested Portion.

4. Certain Other Terminations of Employment.

(a) If the Participant’s Employment is terminated by the Company for Cause, the Option shall, whether or not vested, be automatically canceled without payment of consideration therefor. For purposes of this Agreement, it is agreed that whether Cause exists shall be determined in accordance with the Employment Agreement.

(b) If the Participant’s Employment is terminated by the Participant without Good Reason (as defined in the Employment Agreement) and not for death or Disability, the Option shall, to the extent not then or previously vested and exercisable, automatically be canceled without payment of consideration therefor upon such termination of Employment, and the Vested Portion of the Option shall remain exercisable until 30 days following the date of such termination of Employment.

5. Exercise of Option.

(a) Subject to Section 2, the Vested Portion of the Option may be exercised by delivering to the Company at its principal office written notice of intent to so exercise; provided that the Option may be exercised with respect to whole Shares only. Such notice shall specify the number of Shares for which the Option is being exercised (the “Purchased Shares”) and shall be accompanied by payment in full of the Option Price in cash or by check or wire transfer; provided, however, that payment of such aggregate Option Price may instead be made, in whole or in part, by one or more of the following: (i) provided that the Company is not then contractually prohibited from permitting exercise in this fashion, the delivery to the Company of a certificate or certificates representing Shares, duly endorsed or accompanied by a duly executed stock power, which delivery effectively transfers to the Company good and valid title to such Shares, free and clear of any pledge, commitment, lien, claim or other encumbrance (such Shares to be valued at their aggregate Fair Market Value on the date of such exercise), provided that if a certificate or certificates representing Shares in excess of the amount required are delivered, a certificate (or other satisfactory evidence of ownership) representing the excess

5

number of Shares shall promptly be returned by the Company, (ii) a reduction in the number of Purchased Shares to be issued upon such exercise having a Fair Market Value on the date of exercise equal to the aggregate Option Price in respect of the Purchased Shares, provided that the Company is not then contractually prohibited from permitting exercise in this fashion, or (iii) other cashless exercise procedures approved by the Committee. The Participant shall not have any rights to dividends or other rights of a stockholder with respect to Shares subject to the Option until the Participant has given written notice of exercise of the Option, paid the Option Price in full for such Shares and, if applicable, has satisfied any other conditions pursuant to the Plan or this Agreement (including provisions for the payment of applicable withholding taxes, which provisions may be made in any of the ways in which the Option Price may be paid). Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement or the Plan, for purposes of this Section 5(a), the Fair Market Value of a Share shall, to the extent necessary to avoid incurring “additional tax,” interest or penalties under Section 409A of the Code, not be treated as greater than the “fair market value” of a Share determined consistently with Section 409A of the Code and the regulations and guidance promulgated thereunder.

(b) Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan or this Agreement to the contrary, the Option may not be exercised prior to the completion of any registration or qualification of the Option or the Shares under applicable state and Federal securities or other laws, or under any ruling or regulation of any governmental body or national securities exchange that the Committee shall in its sole discretion determine to be necessary or advisable, unless an exemption to such registration or qualification is available and satisfied.

(c) The Company shall, upon payment in accordance with Section 5(a) above of the Option Price for Purchased Shares, deliver such Shares as soon as reasonably practicable to the Participant and pay all original issue and transfer taxes and all other fees and expenses incident to such delivery. All Shares delivered upon any exercise of the Option shall, when delivered, (i) be duly authorized, validly issued, fully paid and nonassessable, (ii) be registered for sale, and for resale, under U.S. state and federal securities laws to the extent that other Shares issued under the Plan are then so registered or qualified and (iii) be listed, or otherwise qualified, for trading on any securities exchange or securities market on which other Shares issued under the Plan of the same class are then listed or qualified.

(d) In the event of the Participant’s death, the Vested Portion of the Option shall remain (or become) exercisable by the Participant’s executor or administrator, or the person or persons to whom the Participant’s rights under this Agreement shall pass by will or by the laws of descent and distribution, or the person or persons to whom such rights have passed under Section 9, as the case may be, to the extent set forth in Section 3 (and the term “Participant” shall be deemed to include such heir or legatee or permitted transferee). Any such heir or legatee or permitted transferee of the Participant shall take rights herein granted subject to the terms and conditions hereof.

6

6. Shareholders’ Agreement. The Participant acknowledges that he has become a party to the Shareholders’ Agreement (attached hereto as Exhibit A), as of June 6, 2006, and that he is accordingly subject to the provisions thereof with respect to the Option and the Purchased Shares (it being agreed that, for the avoidance of doubt hereunder, the call rights under Section 8 of the Shareholders’ Agreement apply only to Purchased Shares). The Participant agrees that any provisions of the Shareholders’ Agreement will supersede any provisions of the Plan or this Agreement to the contrary; provided, however, that, notwithstanding the definition of “Equity Call Purchase Price” in Section 8(c) of the Shareholders’ Agreement, the purchase price described in clause (i) of such definition of “Equity Call Purchase Price” shall apply only upon a termination of the Participant’s Employment (x) by the Participant without Good Reason (as defined in the Employment Agreement) and not for death or Disability prior to the earlier of the fifth anniversary of the Effective Date and the occurrence of a Change in Control or (y) by the Company for Cause, and the purchase price described in clause (ii) of such definition of “Equity Call Purchase Price” shall apply in all other circumstances. Except for the foregoing, the provisions of Section 8 of the Shareholders’ Agreement (as modified by Section 17 below) shall apply without modification.

7. No Right to Continued Employment. The granting of the Option evidenced hereby and this Agreement shall impose no obligation on the Company or any Affiliate to continue the Employment of the Participant and shall not lessen or affect the Company’s or its Affiliates’ right to terminate the Employment of the Participant.

8. Legend on Certificates. The certificates representing the Shares purchased by exercise of the Option shall be subject to such stop transfer orders and other restrictions as the Committee may reasonably deem advisable under the Plan or the rules, regulations, and other requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission, any stock exchange upon which such Shares are listed, and any applicable Federal or state laws, and the Committee may cause a legend or legends to be put on any such certificates to make appropriate reference to such restrictions, provided, however, that any such legends shall be removed, promptly upon the Participant’s reasonable written request, to the extent that the grounds that supported requiring the legend no longer apply.

9. Transferability. The Option may not be assigned, alienated, pledged, attached, sold or otherwise transferred or encumbered by the Participant otherwise than by will or by the laws of descent and distribution, and any such purported assignment, alienation, pledge, attachment, sale, transfer or encumbrance shall be void and unenforceable against the Company or any Affiliate; provided that the designation of one or more beneficiaries to whom the Option shall be transferred, in whole or in part, upon the death of the Participant shall not constitute a prohibited assignment, alienation, pledge, attachment, sale, transfer or encumbrance; and provided, further, that the Option may be transferred in whole or in part (x) by will or the laws of descent and distribution or (y) gratuitously to any Affiliate (as defined in the Shareholders’ Agreement) who agrees to be bound by the provisions of this Agreement. No transfer of the Option shall be effective to bind the Company unless the Committee shall have been furnished

7

with written notice thereof and a copy of such evidence as the Committee may deem necessary to establish the validity of the transfer and the acceptance by the transferee or transferees of the terms and conditions hereof.

10. Taxes. Prior to the issuance of any Shares upon exercise of the Option, the Participant shall be required to satisfy any applicable withholding taxes in respect of the Option in accordance with Section 5(a) above. Subject to the foregoing, the Participant shall be solely responsible for the payment of all taxes relating to the payment or provision of any amounts or benefits hereunder. All amounts and benefits due to the Participant under this Agreement are subject to Section 7 of the Employment Agreement.

11. Securities Laws. Upon the acquisition of any Shares pursuant to the exercise of the Option, the Participant will make or enter into such written representations, warranties and agreements as the Committee may reasonably request in order to comply with applicable Federal or State securities laws or with this Agreement.

12. Notices. Any notice necessary under this Agreement shall be addressed to the Company in care of its Secretary at the principal executive office of the Company and to the Participant at the address appearing in the personnel records of the Company for the Participant or to either party hereto at such other address as either party may hereafter designate in writing to the other. Any such notice shall be deemed effective upon receipt thereof by the addressee.

13. Choice of Law. This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with its express terms, and otherwise in accordance with the laws of the State of New York without giving effect to the principles of conflicts of law, provided that the provisions set forth herein that are required to be governed by the Pennsylvania Business Corporation Law of 1988, as amended, shall be governed by the Pennsylvania Business Corporation Law of 1988, as amended.

14. Option Subject to Plan. By entering into this Agreement, the Participant agrees and acknowledges that the Participant has received and read a copy of the Plan. The Option is subject to the Plan to the extent that the Plan is not inconsistent with this Agreement. The terms and provisions of the Plan, as it may be amended from time to time, are hereby incorporated herein by reference. In the event of any inconsistency between (x) any term or provision of this Agreement and (y) any term or provision of the Plan or any other Company Arrangement (as defined in the Employment Agreement), other than the Employment Agreement, the terms and provisions of this Agreement will govern and prevail.

15. The Company’s Representations. The Company represents and warrants that (a) it is fully authorized, by action of any Person or body whose action is required, to enter into this Agreement and to perform its obligations under it; (b) the execution, delivery and performance of this Agreement by the Company does not violate any applicable law, regulation, order, judgment or decree or any agreement, plan or corporate governance document (x) to which it (or,

8

to the best of its knowledge and belief, any of its security holders or creditors) is a party or (y) by which it (or, to the best of its knowledge and belief, any of its security holders or creditors) is bound; (c) no restrictions prohibiting exercise of the Option in the fashions described in Sections 5(a)(i) or 5(a)(ii) currently exist; and (d) upon the execution and delivery of this Agreement by the Parties, this Agreement shall be the valid and binding obligation of the Company, enforceable in accordance with its terms, except to the extent enforceability may be limited by applicable bankruptcy, insolvency or similar laws affecting the enforcement of creditors’ rights generally.

16. Right to Timely Exercise. In the event that any holder of Shares will receive cash, securities or other property in respect of Shares in connection with a Change in Control, Realization Event, Exit Sale, or Transaction (each a “Covered Transaction”), or that the Participant becomes entitled to participate in a Tag-Along Offer or to exercise registration rights (each also a “Covered Transaction”), then the Company shall take such steps as are necessary to enable the Participant (if he so elects and to the extent the Option is, or becomes, vested and exercisable upon the occurrence of such Covered Transaction) to exercise the Option at a time and in a fashion that will entitle him to receive in exchange for any Shares thus acquired the same consideration, on a per-Share basis, as is received in such Covered Transaction by other holders of Shares, to the extent that the Participant is otherwise entitled to participate in such Covered Transaction.

17. Miscellaneous. Sections 8.2, 8.7 and 8.11 of the Employment Agreement (relating, respectively, to amendments and waivers, severability, and general interpretation principles) shall be deemed incorporated herein in full, with the references to the “Employment Agreement” in such Sections being treated as references to this Agreement and the references to the “Executive” in such Sections being treated as references to the Participant. For purposes of this Agreement (including Section 6 above), (a) notwithstanding (i) the definition set forth in Section 2(n) of the Plan and (ii) the definition of “Fair Market Value” for purposes of Section 8 of the Shareholders’ Agreement, the “Fair Market Value” of securities of the Company held by the Participant, or subject to the Option, shall not take into account reductions to reflect minority status or illiquidity that are not applicable to the Principal Stockholders, (b) “Exit Sale” shall mean “Exit Sale” as defined in the Shareholders’ Agreement, (c) “Tag-Along Offer” shall mean “Tag-Along Offer” as defined in the Shareholders’ Agreement and (d) “Employment” shall mean employment under the Employment Agreement. In addition, there shall be submitted for arbitration (as provided in Section 8.6 of the Employment Agreement) any dispute, controversy or claim related to whether the Participant’s termination of Employment was for Cause or Good Reason.

18. Signature in Counterparts. This Agreement may be signed in counterparts, each of which shall be an original, with the same effect as if the signatures thereto and hereto were upon the same instrument. Signatures delivered by facsimile shall be effective for all purposes.

9

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties have executed this Agreement, effective as of the Date of Grant.

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT CORPORATION

By:

Name:

Title:

Agreed and acknowledged as

of the date first above written:

John R. McKernan, Jr.

Exhibit A

SHAREHOLDERS’ AGREEMENT

EX-10.19

Exhibit 10.19

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT CORPORATION

NONQUALIFIED STOCK OPTION AGREEMENT

(Time-Vesting)

THIS AGREEMENT (the “Agreement”), is made effective as of August     , 2006 (the “Date of Grant”), between Education Management Corporation, a Pennsylvania corporation, and Edward H. West (the “Participant”):

R E C I T A L S:

WHEREAS, the Company has adopted the Education Management Corporation 2006 Stock Option Plan (the “Plan”), which Plan is incorporated herein by reference and made a part of this Agreement to the extent set forth in Section 14 below. Capitalized terms not otherwise defined herein or by reference herein shall have the meanings given thereto in the Plan; and

WHEREAS, the Committee has determined that it is in the best interests of the Company and its shareholders to grant an Option to the Participant pursuant to the Plan, the Employment Agreement (the “Employment Agreement”) between the Participant and the Company (the “Parties”) dated as of June 1, 2006 (the “Effective Date”), and the terms set forth herein.

NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, the Parties agree as follows:

1. Grant of the Option. The Company hereby grants to the Participant the right and option (the “Option”) to purchase, on the terms and conditions hereinafter set forth, all or any part of an aggregate of 68,421 Shares, subject to adjustment as set forth in the Plan. The Option Price shall be $50.00, which the Parties agree is not less than the fair market value of a Share as of the date hereof.

2. Duration. Subject to the provisions of the Plan and this Agreement, the Participant may exercise all or any part of the Vested Portion of the Option at any time prior to the tenth anniversary of the Effective Date. The Option may not be cancelled or forfeited without the Participant’s prior written consent prior to such tenth anniversary, other than as expressly provided (x) in Section 8(b) of the Plan (relating to “Transactions”), and then only on per-Share terms no less favorable to the Participant than to any other Participant in the Plan, or (y) in this Agreement.

3. Vesting.

(a) Subject solely to the provisions of Sections 3(b), 3(c), 4(a), 4(b) and 4(c) below and Section 8(b) of the Plan, the Option shall vest and become exercisable on each anniversary of the Effective Date with respect to an aggregate of 20% of the Shares originally subject to the Option. The portion of the Option which has become vested and exercisable as described in Sections 3(a), 3(b) or 3(c) is hereinafter referred to as the “Vested Portion.”

(b) Notwithstanding the foregoing and Section 3(c), one hundred percent (100%) of the Shares then subject to the Option shall be accelerated and become vested and exercisable immediately prior to, but subject to the consummation of, a Change in Control.

(c) (i) If the Participant’s Employment is terminated by the Company without Cause or by the Participant for Good Reason (as defined in the Employment Agreement) before the third anniversary of the Effective Date, the Option shall vest and become exercisable on each of the next two anniversaries of the Effective Date with respect to 20% of the Shares then subject to the Option. The remaining portion of the Option shall automatically be canceled without payment of any consideration therefor.

(ii) If the Participant’s Employment is terminated by the Company without Cause or by the Participant for Good Reason on or after the third anniversary of the Effective Date, the Option shall vest and become exercisable on the next occurring anniversary of the Effective Date with respect to 20% of the Shares then subject to the Option. The remaining portion of the Option shall automatically be canceled without payment of any consideration therefor.

For purposes of this Section 3(c), and of the percentages set forth in it, Shares previously subject to the Option, and in respect of which the Option has already been exercised, shall be treated as still subject to the Option. If the Participant’s Employment is terminated by the Company without Cause or by the Participant for Good Reason, the Vested Portion of the Option (including that which continues to vest in accordance with this Section 3(c)) shall remain exercisable until the tenth anniversary of the Effective Date.

4. Certain Other Terminations of Employment.

(a) If the Participant’s Employment is terminated by the Company for Cause, the Option shall, whether or not vested, be automatically canceled without payment of consideration therefor. For purposes of this Agreement, it is agreed that whether Cause exists shall be determined in accordance with the Employment Agreement.

(b) If the Participant’s Employment is terminated by the Participant without Good Reason (as defined in the Employment Agreement) and not for death or Disability, the Option shall, to the extent not then or previously vested and exercisable, automatically be canceled without payment of consideration therefor, and the Vested Portion of the Option shall remain exercisable until 30 days following the date of termination of Employment.

(c) If the Participant’s Employment is terminated due to the Participant’s death or Disability, the Option shall, to the extent not then or previously vested and exercisable, automatically be canceled without payment of consideration therefor, and the Vested Portion of the Option shall remain exercisable until the tenth anniversary of the Effective Date.

5. Exercise of Option.

(a) Subject to Section 2, the Vested Portion of the Option may be exercised by delivering to the Company at its principal office written notice of intent to so exercise; provided that the Option may be exercised with respect to whole Shares only. Such notice shall specify

2

the number of Shares for which the Option is being exercised (the “Purchased Shares”) and shall be accompanied by payment in full of the Option Price in cash or by check or wire transfer; provided, however, that payment of such aggregate Option Price may instead be made, in whole or in part, by one or more of the following: (i) provided that the Company is not then contractually prohibited from permitting exercise in this fashion, the delivery to the Company of a certificate or certificates representing Shares, duly endorsed or accompanied by a duly executed stock power, which delivery effectively transfers to the Company good and valid title to such Shares, free and clear of any pledge, commitment, lien, claim or other encumbrance (such Shares to be valued at their aggregate Fair Market Value on the date of such exercise), provided that if a certificate or certificates representing Shares in excess of the amount required are delivered, a certificate (or other satisfactory evidence of ownership) representing the excess number of Shares shall promptly be returned by the Company, (ii) a reduction in the number of Purchased Shares to be issued upon such exercise having a Fair Market Value on the date of exercise equal to the aggregate Option Price in respect of the Purchased Shares, provided that the Company is not then contractually prohibited from permitting exercise in this fashion, or (iii) other cashless exercise procedures approved by the Committee. The Participant shall not have any rights to dividends or other rights of a stockholder with respect to Shares subject to the Option until the Participant has given written notice of exercise of the Option, paid the Option Price in full for such Shares and, if applicable, has satisfied any other conditions pursuant to the Plan or this Agreement (including provisions for the payment of applicable withholding taxes, which provisions may be made in any of the ways in which the Option Price may be paid). Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement or the Plan, for purposes of this Section 5(a), the Fair Market Value of a Share shall, to the extent necessary to avoid incurring “additional tax,” interest or penalties under Section 409A of the Code, not be treated as greater than the “fair market value” of a Share determined consistently with Section 409A of the Code and the regulations and guidance promulgated thereunder.

(b) Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan or this Agreement to the contrary, the Option may not be exercised prior to the completion of any registration or qualification of the Option or the Shares under applicable state and Federal securities or other laws, or under any ruling or regulation of any governmental body or national securities exchange that the Committee shall in its sole discretion determine to be necessary or advisable, unless an exemption to such registration or qualification is available and satisfied.

(c) The Company shall, upon payment in accordance with Section 5(a) above of the Option Price for Purchased Shares, deliver such Shares as soon as reasonably practicable to the Participant and pay all original issue and transfer taxes and all other fees and expenses incident to such delivery. All Shares delivered upon any exercise of the Option shall, when delivered, (i) be duly authorized, validly issued, fully paid and nonassessable, (ii) be registered for sale, and for resale, under U.S. state and federal securities laws to the extent that other Shares issued under the Plan are then so registered or qualified and (iii) be listed, or otherwise qualified, for trading on any securities exchange or securities market on which other Shares issued under the Plan of the same class are then listed or qualified.

(d) In the event of the Participant’s death, the Vested Portion of the Option shall remain exercisable by the Participant’s executor or administrator, or the person or persons to whom the Participant’s rights under this Agreement shall pass by will or by the laws of

3

descent and distribution, or the person or persons to whom such rights have passed under Section 9, as the case may be, to the extent set forth in Section 4 (and the term “Participant” shall be deemed to include such heir or legatee or permitted transferee). Any such heir or legatee or permitted transferee of the Participant shall take rights herein granted subject to the terms and conditions hereof.

6. Shareholders’ Agreement. The Participant acknowledges that he has become a party to the Shareholders’ Agreement (attached hereto as Exhibit A), as of June 6, 2006, and that he is accordingly subject to the provisions thereof with respect to the Option and the Purchased Shares (it being agreed that, for the avoidance of doubt hereunder, the call rights under Section 8 of the Shareholders’ Agreement apply only to Purchased Shares). The Participant agrees that any provisions of the Shareholders’ Agreement will supersede any provisions of the Plan or this Agreement to the contrary; provided, however, that, notwithstanding the definition of “Equity Call Purchase Price” in Section 8(c) of the Shareholders’ Agreement, the purchase price described in clause (i) of such definition of “Equity Call Purchase Price” shall apply only upon a termination of the Participant’s Employment (x) by the Participant without Good Reason (as defined in the Employment Agreement) and not for death or Disability prior to the earlier of the fifth anniversary of the Effective Date and the occurrence of a Change in Control or (y) by the Company for Cause, and the purchase price described in clause (ii) of such definition of “Equity Call Purchase Price” shall apply in all other circumstances. Except for the foregoing, the provisions of Section 8 of the Shareholders’ Agreement (as modified by Section 17 below) shall apply without modification.

7. No Right to Continued Employment. The granting of the Option evidenced hereby and this Agreement shall impose no obligation on the Company or any Affiliate to continue the Employment of the Participant and shall not lessen or affect the Company’s or its Affiliates’ right to terminate the Employment of the Participant.

8. Legend on Certificates. The certificates representing the Shares purchased by exercise of the Option shall be subject to such stop transfer orders and other restrictions as the Committee may reasonably deem advisable under the Plan or the rules, regulations, and other requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission, any stock exchange upon which such Shares are listed, and any applicable Federal or state laws, and the Committee may cause a legend or legends to be put on any such certificates to make appropriate reference to such restrictions, provided, however, that any such legends shall be removed, promptly upon the Participant’s reasonable written request, to the extent that the grounds that supported requiring the legend no longer apply.

9. Transferability. The Option may not be assigned, alienated, pledged, attached, sold or otherwise transferred or encumbered by the Participant otherwise than by will or by the laws of descent and distribution, and any such purported assignment, alienation, pledge, attachment, sale, transfer or encumbrance shall be void and unenforceable against the Company or any Affiliate; provided that the designation of one or more beneficiaries to whom the Option shall be transferred, in whole or in part, upon the death of the Participant shall not constitute a prohibited assignment, alienation, pledge, attachment, sale, transfer or encumbrance; and provided, further, that the Option may be transferred in whole or in part (x) by will or the laws of descent and distribution or (y) gratuitously to any Affiliate (as defined in the Shareholders’

4

Agreement) who agrees to be bound by the provisions of this Agreement. No transfer of the Option shall be effective to bind the Company unless the Committee shall have been furnished with written notice thereof and a copy of such evidence as the Committee may deem necessary to establish the validity of the transfer and the acceptance by the transferee or transferees of the terms and conditions hereof.

10. Taxes. Prior to the issuance of any Shares upon exercise of the Option, the Participant shall be required to satisfy any applicable withholding taxes in respect of the Option in accordance with Section 5(a) above. Subject to the foregoing, the Participant shall be solely responsible for the payment of all taxes relating to the payment or provision of any amounts or benefits hereunder. All amounts and benefits due to the Participant under this Agreement are subject to Section 7 of the Employment Agreement.

11. Securities Laws. Upon the acquisition of any Shares pursuant to the exercise of the Option, the Participant will make or enter into such written representations, warranties and agreements as the Committee may reasonably request in order to comply with applicable Federal or State securities laws or with this Agreement.

12. Notices. Any notice necessary under this Agreement shall be addressed to the Company in care of its Secretary at the principal executive office of the Company and to the Participant at the address appearing in the personnel records of the Company for the Participant or to either party hereto at such other address as either party may hereafter designate in writing to the other. Any such notice shall be deemed effective upon receipt thereof by the addressee.

13. Choice of Law. This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with its express terms, and otherwise in accordance with the laws of the State of New York without giving effect to the principles of conflicts of law, provided that the provisions set forth herein that are required to be governed by the Pennsylvania Business Corporation Law of 1988, as amended, shall be governed by the Pennsylvania Business Corporation Law of 1988, as amended.

14. Option Subject to Plan. By entering into this Agreement, the Participant agrees and acknowledges that the Participant has received and read a copy of the Plan. The Option is subject to the Plan to the extent that the Plan is not inconsistent with this Agreement. The terms and provisions of the Plan, as it may be amended from time to time, are hereby incorporated herein by reference. In the event of any inconsistency between (x) any term or provision of this Agreement and (y) any term or provision of the Plan or any other Company Arrangement (as defined in the Employment Agreement), other than the Employment Agreement, the terms and provisions of this Agreement will govern and prevail.

15. The Company’s Representations. The Company represents and warrants that (a) it is fully authorized, by action of any Person or body whose action is required, to enter into this Agreement and to perform its obligations under it; (b) the execution, delivery and performance of this Agreement by the Company does not violate any applicable law, regulation, order, judgment or decree or any agreement, plan or corporate governance document (x) to which it (or, to the best of its knowledge and belief, any of its security holders or creditors) is a party or (y) by which it (or, to the best of its knowledge and belief, any of its security holders or creditors) is

5

bound; (c) no restrictions prohibiting exercise of the Option in the fashions described in Sections 5(a)(i) or 5(a)(ii) currently exist; and (d) upon the execution and delivery of this Agreement by the Parties, this Agreement shall be the valid and binding obligation of the Company, enforceable in accordance with its terms, except to the extent enforceability may be limited by applicable bankruptcy, insolvency or similar laws affecting the enforcement of creditors’ rights generally.

16. Right to Timely Exercise. In the event that any holder of Shares will receive cash, securities or other property in respect of Shares in connection with a Change in Control, Realization Event, Exit Sale, or Transaction (each a “Covered Transaction”), or that the Participant becomes entitled to participate in a Tag-Along Offer or to exercise registration rights (each also a “Covered Transaction”), then the Company shall take such steps as are necessary to enable the Participant (if he so elects and to the extent the Option is, or becomes, vested and exercisable upon the occurrence of such Covered Transaction) to exercise the Option at a time and in a fashion that will entitle him to receive in exchange for any Shares thus acquired the same consideration, on a per-Share basis, as is received in such Covered Transaction by other holders of Shares, to the extent that the Participant is otherwise entitled to participate in such Covered Transaction.

17. Miscellaneous. Sections 8.2, 8.7 and 8.11 of the Employment Agreement (relating, respectively, to amendments and waivers, severability, and general interpretation principles) shall be deemed incorporated herein in full, with the references to the “Employment Agreement” in such Sections being treated as references to this Agreement, and the references to the “Executive” in such Sections being treated as references to the Participant. For purposes of this Agreement (including Section 6 above), (a) notwithstanding (i) the definition set forth in Section 2(n) of the Plan and (ii) the definition of “Fair Market Value” for purposes of Section 8 of the Shareholders’ Agreement, the “Fair Market Value” of securities of the Company held by the Participant, or subject to the Option, shall not take into account reductions to reflect minority status or illiquidity that are not applicable to the Principal Stockholders, (b) “Exit Sale” shall mean “Exit Sale” as defined in the Shareholders’ Agreement and (c) “Tag-Along Offer” shall mean “Tag-Along Offer” as defined in the Shareholders’ Agreement. In addition, there shall be submitted for arbitration (as provided in Section 8.6 of the Employment Agreement) any dispute, controversy or claim related to whether the Participant’s termination of Employment was for Cause or Good Reason.

18. Signature in Counterparts. This Agreement may be signed in counterparts, each of which shall be an original, with the same effect as if the signatures thereto and hereto were upon the same instrument. Signatures delivered by facsimile shall be effective for all purposes.

[signature page follows]

6

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties have executed this Agreement, effective as of the Date of Grant.

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT CORPORATION

By:

Name:

Title:

Agreed and acknowledged as

of the date first above written:

Edward H. West

Exhibit A

SHAREHOLDERS’ AGREEMENT

EX-10.20

Exhibit 10.20

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT CORPORATION

NONQUALIFIED STOCK OPTION AGREEMENT

(Performance-Vesting)

THIS AGREEMENT (the “Agreement”), is made effective as of August     , 2006 (the “Date of Grant”), between Education Management Corporation, a Pennsylvania corporation, and Edward H. West (the “Participant”):

R E C I T A L S:

WHEREAS, the Company has adopted the Education Management Corporation 2006 Stock Option Plan (the “Plan”), which Plan is incorporated herein by reference and made a part of this Agreement to the extent set forth in Section 14 below. Capitalized terms not otherwise defined herein or by reference herein shall have the meanings given thereto in the Plan; and

WHEREAS, the Committee has determined that it is in the best interests of the Company and its shareholders to grant an Option to the Participant pursuant to the Plan, the Employment Agreement (the “Employment Agreement”) between the Participant and the Company (the “Parties”) dated as of June 1, 2006 (the “Effective Date”), and the terms set forth herein.

NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, the Parties agree as follows:

1. Grant of the Option. The Company hereby grants to the Participant the right and option (the “Option”) to purchase, on the terms and conditions hereinafter set forth, all or any part of an aggregate of 68,421 Shares, subject to adjustment as set forth in the Plan. The Option Price shall be $50.00, which the Parties agree is not less than the fair market value of a Share as of the date hereof.

2. Duration. Subject to the provisions of the Plan and this Agreement, the Participant may exercise all or any part of the Vested Portion of the Option at any time prior to the tenth anniversary of the Effective Date. The Option may not be cancelled or forfeited without the Participant’s prior written consent prior to such tenth anniversary, other than as expressly provided (x) in Section 8(b) of the Plan (relating to “Transactions”), and then only on per-Share terms no less favorable to the Participant than to any other Participant in the Plan, or (y) in this Agreement.

3. Vesting.

(a) Subject solely to the provisions of Sections 3(b), 3(c), 4(a), and 4(b) below and Section 8(b) of the Plan, the Option shall vest and become exercisable with respect to the Shares then subject to it at the times, and to the degree, set forth in the following schedule, upon one or more Realization Events:

Cash on Cash Return Realized by Principal Stockholders on Invested Capital	Applicable Percentage
200%	20% of the Shares then subject to the Option
250%	40% of the Shares then subject to the Option (treating Shares in respect of which the Option has already been exercised as, for this purpose, then still subject to the Option)
300%	60% of the Shares then subject to the Option (treating Shares in respect of which the Option has already been exercised as, for this purpose, then still subject to the Option)
350%	80% of the Shares then subject to the Option (treating Shares in respect of which the Option has already been exercised as, for this purpose, then still subject to the Option)
400%	100% of the Shares then subject to the Option

For purposes of this Agreement, “Cash on Cash Return” shall mean the aggregate gross cash return (e.g., without deduction for taxes or for amounts invested by the Principal Stockholders in Shares) realized by the Principal Stockholders on all of the capital invested by them in Shares. Such return shall include cash (and marketable securities) realized as a result of any disposition or exchange of Shares owned by the Principal Stockholders, as well as cash (and marketable securities) received as dividends or other distributions in respect of Shares owned by the Principal Stockholders. The Cash on Cash Return targets shall be separately calculated for, and must be separately satisfied with respect to, capital invested in Shares by the Principal Stockholders after the Effective Date, so that the applicable Cash on Cash Return target stated as a percentage equals 100 + ((x/36) times (y-100)), where x = the number of months that have elapsed from the date of investment through the date the return is being measured, (provided that x shall not exceed 36), and y = the applicable Cash on Cash Return percentage from the schedule above; provided, however, that for purposes of such calculation, returns shall first be attributed to

2

the earliest capital invested.¹ If one or more of the Principal Stockholders ceases to own any Shares, Cash on Cash Return shall thereafter be determined based solely on the returns realized by the remaining Principal Stockholder(s). Immediately following a Realization Event described in clause (ii) of the definition thereof in Section 2(w) of the Plan (a “Clause (ii) Realization Event”), the sum of (x) the Fair Market Value of the remaining Shares owned by the Principal Stockholders, plus (y) the Fair Market Value of property previously received by the Principal Stockholders in respect of Shares in forms other than cash (or marketable securities), shall be considered as cash proceeds received by the Principal Stockholders, and there shall be no further vesting thereafter; provided, however, that in the event that some or all of the proceeds received (or to be received) by the Principal Stockholders in respect of any disposition of Shares owned by them is in the form of contingent payments or proceeds (e.g., installment sale proceeds, earn-out proceeds, escrow amounts, etc.), then, at the time that such contingent payments or proceeds (if any) are received by the Principal Stockholders, the Cash on Cash Return shall be recalculated and the Applicable Percentage above increased if necessary to reflect the receipt of such payments or proceeds. Notwithstanding the foregoing, to the extent that a Clause (ii) Realization Event has not occurred as of the nine-year and six-month anniversary of the Effective Date and there are any contingent payments or proceeds that have not been received by the Principal Stockholders (or property previously received by the Principal Stockholders that has not already been reduced to cash or marketable securities) as of that date, then the Fair Market Value of such contingent payments or proceeds (or property) shall be determined and the Cash on Cash Return shall be recalculated and the Applicable Percentage above increased, if necessary. The portion of the Option which has become vested and exercisable as described in Sections 3(a), 3(b) and 3(c) is hereinafter referred to as the “Vested Portion.”

(b) (i) If the Participant’s Employment is terminated by the Company without Cause or by the Participant for Good Reason (as defined in the Employment Agreement) before the third anniversary of the Effective Date, the Option shall be vested in respect of 20% of the Shares then subject to the Option multiplied by the number of anniversaries of the Effective Date that have elapsed through the date of termination, and shall vest on each of the next two anniversaries of the Effective Date with respect to 20% of the Shares then subject to the Option. The remaining portion of the Option shall automatically be canceled without payment of any consideration therefor.

(ii) If the Participant’s Employment is terminated by the Company without Cause or by the Participant for Good Reason on or after the third anniversary of the Effective Date, the Option shall be vested in respect of 20% of the Shares then subject to the Option multiplied by the number of anniversaries of the Effective Date that have elapsed through the date of termination, and shall vest on the next occurring anniversary of the Effective Date with

¹ For purposes of illustration, to achieve a 60% Applicable Percentage, (i) a 300% Cash on Cash Return would have to be realized on the Principal Stockholders’ initial capital investment and (ii) on subsequently invested capital measured on a realized return to the Principal Stockholders two years following the date of investment, the Cash on Cash Return needed on that subsequently invested capital would be equal to 233% (100 + ((24/36) * (300-100)) = 233).

3

respect to 20% of the Shares then subject to the Option. The remaining portion of the Option shall automatically be canceled without payment of any consideration therefor.

To the extent the Option has become vested pursuant to this Section 3(b) (or was vested before a termination of Employment described in this Section 3(b)), it shall remain outstanding until the tenth anniversary of the Effective Date, but shall become exercisable only to the extent that the applicable Cash on Cash Return goals set forth in Section 3(a) are attained. For purposes of this Section 3(b) and the percentages set forth in it, Shares previously subject to the Option, and in respect of which the Option has already been exercised, shall be treated as still subject to the Option.

(c) If the Participant’s Employment is terminated due to his death or Disability, the Participant shall vest in a portion of the Option equal to the number of Shares subject to the Option then outstanding multiplied by a fraction, not greater than one, the numerator of which is equal to the number of months elapsing from the Effective Date to the date of termination of Employment and denominator of which is sixty. The remaining portion of the Option shall automatically be canceled without payment of any consideration therefor. To the extent the Option has become vested pursuant to this Section 3(c) (or was vested before a termination of Employment described in this Section 3(c)), it shall remain outstanding until the tenth anniversary of the Effective Date, but shall become exercisable only to the extent that the applicable Cash on Cash Return goals set forth in Section 3(a) are attained. For purposes of this Section 3(c), Shares previously subject to the Option, and in respect of which the Option has already been exercised, shall be treated as still subject to the Option.

4. Certain Other Terminations of Employment.

(a) If the Participant’s Employment is terminated by the Company for Cause, the Option shall, whether or not vested, be automatically canceled without payment of consideration therefor. For purposes of this Agreement, it is agreed that whether Cause exists shall be determined in accordance with the Employment Agreement.

(b) If the Participant’s Employment is terminated by the Participant without Good Reason (as defined in the Employment Agreement) and not for death or Disability, the Option shall, to the extent not then or previously vested and exercisable, automatically be canceled without payment of consideration therefor upon such termination of Employment, and the Vested Portion of the Option shall remain exercisable until 30 days following the date of such termination of Employment.

5. Exercise of Option.

(a) Subject to Section 2, the Vested Portion of the Option may be exercised by delivering to the Company at its principal office written notice of intent to so exercise; provided that the Option may be exercised with respect to whole Shares only. Such notice shall specify the number of Shares for which the Option is being exercised (the “Purchased Shares”) and shall

4

be accompanied by payment in full of the Option Price in cash or by check or wire transfer; provided, however, that payment of such aggregate Option Price may instead be made, in whole or in part, by one or more of the following: (i) provided that the Company is not then contractually prohibited from permitting exercise in this fashion, the delivery to the Company of a certificate or certificates representing Shares, duly endorsed or accompanied by a duly executed stock power, which delivery effectively transfers to the Company good and valid title to such Shares, free and clear of any pledge, commitment, lien, claim or other encumbrance (such Shares to be valued at their aggregate Fair Market Value on the date of such exercise), provided that if a certificate or certificates representing Shares in excess of the amount required are delivered, a certificate (or other satisfactory evidence of ownership) representing the excess number of Shares shall promptly be returned by the Company, (ii) a reduction in the number of Purchased Shares to be issued upon such exercise having a Fair Market Value on the date of exercise equal to the aggregate Option Price in respect of the Purchased Shares, provided that the Company is not then contractually prohibited from permitting exercise in this fashion, or (iii) other cashless exercise procedures approved by the Committee. The Participant shall not have any rights to dividends or other rights of a stockholder with respect to Shares subject to the Option until the Participant has given written notice of exercise of the Option, paid the Option Price in full for such Shares and, if applicable, has satisfied any other conditions pursuant to the Plan or this Agreement (including provisions for the payment of applicable withholding taxes, which provisions may be made in any of the ways in which the Option Price may be paid). Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement or the Plan, for purposes of this Section 5(a), the Fair Market Value of a Share shall, to the extent necessary to avoid incurring “additional tax,” interest or penalties under Section 409A of the Code, not be treated as greater than the “fair market value” of a Share determined consistently with Section 409A of the Code and the regulations and guidance promulgated thereunder.

(b) Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan or this Agreement to the contrary, the Option may not be exercised prior to the completion of any registration or qualification of the Option or the Shares under applicable state and Federal securities or other laws, or under any ruling or regulation of any governmental body or national securities exchange that the Committee shall in its sole discretion determine to be necessary or advisable, unless an exemption to such registration or qualification is available and satisfied.

(c) The Company shall, upon payment in accordance with Section 5(a) above of the Option Price for Purchased Shares, deliver such Shares as soon as reasonably practicable to the Participant and pay all original issue and transfer taxes and all other fees and expenses incident to such delivery. All Shares delivered upon any exercise of the Option shall, when delivered, (i) be duly authorized, validly issued, fully paid and nonassessable, (ii) be registered for sale, and for resale, under U.S. state and federal securities laws to the extent that other Shares issued under the Plan are then so registered or qualified and (iii) be listed, or otherwise qualified, for trading on any securities exchange or securities market on which other Shares issued under the Plan of the same class are then listed or qualified.

5

(d) In the event of the Participant’s death, the Vested Portion of the Option shall remain (or become) exercisable by the Participant’s executor or administrator, or the person or persons to whom the Participant’s rights under this Agreement shall pass by will or by the laws of descent and distribution, or the person or persons to whom such rights have passed under Section 9, as the case may be, to the extent set forth in Section 3 (and the term “Participant” shall be deemed to include such heir or legatee or permitted transferee). Any such heir or legatee or permitted transferee of the Participant shall take rights herein granted subject to the terms and conditions hereof.

6. Shareholders’ Agreement. The Participant acknowledges that he has become a party to the Shareholders’ Agreement (attached hereto as Exhibit A), as of June 6, 2006, and that he is accordingly subject to the provisions thereof with respect to the Option and the Purchased Shares (it being agreed that, for the avoidance of doubt hereunder, the call rights under Section 8 of the Shareholders’ Agreement apply only to Purchased Shares). The Participant agrees that any provisions of the Shareholders’ Agreement will supersede any provisions of the Plan or this Agreement to the contrary; provided, however, that, notwithstanding the definition of “Equity Call Purchase Price” in Section 8(c) of the Shareholders’ Agreement, the purchase price described in clause (i) of such definition of “Equity Call Purchase Price” shall apply only upon a termination of the Participant’s Employment (x) by the Participant without Good Reason (as defined in the Employment Agreement) and not for death or Disability prior to the earlier of the fifth anniversary of the Effective Date and the occurrence of a Change in Control or (y) by the Company for Cause, and the purchase price described in clause (ii) of such definition of “Equity Call Purchase Price” shall apply in all other circumstances. Except for the foregoing, the provisions of Section 8 of the Shareholders’ Agreement (as modified by Section 17 below) shall apply without modification.

7. No Right to Continued Employment. The granting of the Option evidenced hereby and this Agreement shall impose no obligation on the Company or any Affiliate to continue the Employment of the Participant and shall not lessen or affect the Company’s or its Affiliates’ right to terminate the Employment of the Participant.

8. Legend on Certificates. The certificates representing the Shares purchased by exercise of the Option shall be subject to such stop transfer orders and other restrictions as the Committee may reasonably deem advisable under the Plan or the rules, regulations, and other requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission, any stock exchange upon which such Shares are listed, and any applicable Federal or state laws, and the Committee may cause a legend or legends to be put on any such certificates to make appropriate reference to such restrictions, provided, however, that any such legends shall be removed, promptly upon the Participant’s reasonable written request, to the extent that the grounds that supported requiring the legend no longer apply.

9. Transferability. The Option may not be assigned, alienated, pledged, attached, sold or otherwise transferred or encumbered by the Participant otherwise than by will or by the

6

laws of descent and distribution, and any such purported assignment, alienation, pledge, attachment, sale, transfer or encumbrance shall be void and unenforceable against the Company or any Affiliate; provided that the designation of one or more beneficiaries to whom the Option shall be transferred, in whole or in part, upon the death of the Participant shall not constitute a prohibited assignment, alienation, pledge, attachment, sale, transfer or encumbrance; and provided, further, that the Option may be transferred in whole or in part (x) by will or the laws of descent and distribution or (y) gratuitously to any Affiliate (as defined in the Shareholders’ Agreement) who agrees to be bound by the provisions of this Agreement. No transfer of the Option shall be effective to bind the Company unless the Committee shall have been furnished with written notice thereof and a copy of such evidence as the Committee may deem necessary to establish the validity of the transfer and the acceptance by the transferee or transferees of the terms and conditions hereof.

10. Taxes. Prior to the issuance of any Shares upon exercise of the Option, the Participant shall be required to satisfy any applicable withholding taxes in respect of the Option in accordance with Section 5(a) above. Subject to the foregoing, the Participant shall be solely responsible for the payment of all taxes relating to the payment or provision of any amounts or benefits hereunder. All amounts and benefits due to the Participant under this Agreement are subject to Section 7 of the Employment Agreement.

11. Securities Laws. Upon the acquisition of any Shares pursuant to the exercise of the Option, the Participant will make or enter into such written representations, warranties and agreements as the Committee may reasonably request in order to comply with applicable Federal or State securities laws or with this Agreement.

12. Notices. Any notice necessary under this Agreement shall be addressed to the Company in care of its Secretary at the principal executive office of the Company and to the Participant at the address appearing in the personnel records of the Company for the Participant or to either party hereto at such other address as either party may hereafter designate in writing to the other. Any such notice shall be deemed effective upon receipt thereof by the addressee.

13. Choice of Law. This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with its express terms, and otherwise in accordance with the laws of the State of New York without giving effect to the principles of conflicts of law, provided that the provisions set forth herein that are required to be governed by the Pennsylvania Business Corporation Law of 1988, as amended, shall be governed by the Pennsylvania Business Corporation Law of 1988, as amended.

14. Option Subject to Plan. By entering into this Agreement, the Participant agrees and acknowledges that the Participant has received and read a copy of the Plan. The Option is subject to the Plan to the extent that the Plan is not inconsistent with this Agreement. The terms and provisions of the Plan, as it may be amended from time to time, are hereby incorporated herein by reference. In the event of any inconsistency between (x) any term or provision of this

7

Agreement and (y) any term or provision of the Plan or any other Company Arrangement (as defined in the Employment Agreement), other than the Employment Agreement, the terms and provisions of this Agreement will govern and prevail.

15. The Company’s Representations. The Company represents and warrants that (a) it is fully authorized, by action of any Person or body whose action is required, to enter into this Agreement and to perform its obligations under it; (b) the execution, delivery and performance of this Agreement by the Company does not violate any applicable law, regulation, order, judgment or decree or any agreement, plan or corporate governance document (x) to which it (or, to the best of its knowledge and belief, any of its security holders or creditors) is a party or (y) by which it (or, to the best of its knowledge and belief, any of its security holders or creditors) is bound; (c) no restrictions prohibiting exercise of the Option in the fashions described in Sections 5(a)(i) or 5(a)(ii) currently exist; and (d) upon the execution and delivery of this Agreement by the Parties, this Agreement shall be the valid and binding obligation of the Company, enforceable in accordance with its terms, except to the extent enforceability may be limited by applicable bankruptcy, insolvency or similar laws affecting the enforcement of creditors’ rights generally.

16. Right to Timely Exercise. In the event that any holder of Shares will receive cash, securities or other property in respect of Shares in connection with a Change in Control, Realization Event, Exit Sale, or Transaction (each a “Covered Transaction”), or that the Participant becomes entitled to participate in a Tag-Along Offer or to exercise registration rights (each also a “Covered Transaction”), then the Company shall take such steps as are necessary to enable the Participant (if he so elects and to the extent the Option is, or becomes, vested and exercisable upon the occurrence of such Covered Transaction) to exercise the Option at a time and in a fashion that will entitle him to receive in exchange for any Shares thus acquired the same consideration, on a per-Share basis, as is received in such Covered Transaction by other holders of Shares, to the extent that the Participant is otherwise entitled to participate in such Covered Transaction.

17. Miscellaneous. Sections 8.2, 8.7 and 8.11 of the Employment Agreement (relating, respectively, to amendments and waivers, severability, and general interpretation principles) shall be deemed incorporated herein in full, with the references to the “Employment Agreement” in such Sections being treated as references to this Agreement and the references to the “Executive” in such Sections being treated as references to the Participant. For purposes of this Agreement (including Section 6 above), (a) notwithstanding (i) the definition set forth in Section 2(n) of the Plan and (ii) the definition of “Fair Market Value” for purposes of Section 8 of the Shareholders’ Agreement, the “Fair Market Value” of securities of the Company held by the Participant, or subject to the Option, shall not take into account reductions to reflect minority status or illiquidity that are not applicable to the Principal Stockholders, (b) “Exit Sale” shall mean “Exit Sale” as defined in the Shareholders’ Agreement and (c) “Tag-Along Offer” shall mean “Tag-Along Offer” as defined in the Shareholders’ Agreement. In addition, there shall be submitted for arbitration (as provided in Section 8.6 of the Employment Agreement) any dispute,

8

controversy or claim related to whether the Participant’s termination of Employment was for Cause or Good Reason.

18. Signature in Counterparts. This Agreement may be signed in counterparts, each of which shall be an original, with the same effect as if the signatures thereto and hereto were upon the same instrument. Signatures delivered by facsimile shall be effective for all purposes.

[signature page follows]

9

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties have executed this Agreement, effective as of the Date of Grant.

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT CORPORATION

By:

Name:

Title:

Agreed and acknowledged as

of the date first above written:

Edward H. West

Exhibit A

SHAREHOLDERS’ AGREEMENT

EX-12.1

Exhibit 12.1

Education Management LLC

Computation of Ratio of Earnings to Fixed Charges (Unaudited)

(Dollars in millions)

	Year ended June 30, 2002		Year ended June 30, 2003		Year ended June 30, 2004		Year ended June 30, 2005		Predecessor		Successor
									July 1, 2005 through May 31, 2006		June 1, 2005 through June 30, 2006
Computation of fixed charges
Interest expense		1.7		1.1		2.2		1.3		0.8		13.8
Amortization of debt issuance costs		0.8		1.0		0.5		0.4		1.3		0.6
Portion of rental expense representative of interest		11.4		14.2		16.9		19.0		18.5		1.9
Total fixed charges	$	13.9	$	16.3	$	19.5	$	20.7	$	20.6	$	16.3
Computation of earnings
Income (loss) before income taxes	$	67.4	$	91.5	$	130.5	$	168.8	$	174.0	$	(32.1	)
Fixed charges per above		13.9		16.3		19.5		20.7		20.6		16.3
Total earnings	$	81.2	$	107.7	$	150.1	$	189.5	$	194.6	$	(15.8	)
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges		5.9		6.6		7.7		9.2		9.4		(1.0	)

*Earnings for the period June 1 through June 30, 2006 were inadequate to cover fixed charges by $32.1

EX-21.1

Exhibit 21.1

Subsidiaries

Entity Name	Jurisdiction of Organization	Ownership
The Art Institutes International, Inc.	Pennsylvania	100% Company
The Art Institute of Pittsburgh	An unincorporated division of The Art Institutes International, Inc.	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
The Art Institute Online	An unincorporated division of The Art Institute of Pittsburgh	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
The Art Institute of Philadelphia	An unincorporated division of The Art Institutes International, Inc.	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
The Art Institute of Atlanta, Inc.	Georgia	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
The Art Institute of Washington, Inc.	District of Columbia	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
The Art Institute of Tennessee – Nashville, Inc.	Tennessee (inactive)	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
TAIC-San Diego, Inc. d/b/a The Art Institute of California-San Diego	California	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
The Art Institute of California- Inland Empire, Inc.	California (inactive)	100% TAIC-San Diego, Inc.
Brown Mackie College-Inland Empire, Inc.	California (inactive)	100% TAIC-San Diego, Inc.
TAIC-San Francisco, Inc. d/b/a The Art Institute of California-San Francisco	California	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
The Art Institute of California-Los Angeles, Inc.	California	100% TAIC –San Francisco, Inc.
The Art Institute of California-Orange County, Inc.	California	100% TAIC- San Francisco, Inc.
The California Design College, Inc.	California	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
The Art Institute of Charlotte, Inc.	North Carolina	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
The Asher School of Business Education Corporation	Delaware	100% The Art Institute of Charlotte, Inc.
The Art Institute of Colorado, Inc.	Colorado	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
The Art Institute of Phoenix, Inc.	Arizona	100% The Art Institute of Colorado, Inc.
The Art Institute of Dallas, Inc.	Texas	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
AID Restaurant, Inc.	Texas	100% The Art Institute of Dallas, Inc.

1

Entity Name	Jurisdiction of Organization	Ownership
The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale, Inc.	Florida	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
The Art Institute of Houston, Inc.	Texas	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
AIH Restaurant, Inc.	Texas	100% The Art Institute of Houston, Inc.
(The) Art Institute of Indianapolis, Inc.	Indiana	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
The Art Institute of Las Vegas, Inc.	Nevada	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
The Art Institute of Michigan, Inc.	Michigan (inactive)	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
The Art Institutes International Minnesota, Inc.	Minnesota	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
The Art Institute of New York City, Inc.	New York	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
The Art Institute of Portland, Inc.	Oregon	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
The Art Institute of Seattle, Inc.	Washington	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
The Illinois Institute of Art, Inc.	Illinois	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
The Illinois Institute of Art at Schaumburg, Inc.	Illinois	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
Miami International University of Art & Design, Inc.	Florida	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
The Art Institute of Tampa, Inc.	Florida	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
The Art Institute of York, Inc.	Pennsylvania	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
The New England Institute of Art, Inc.	Massachusetts	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
EDMC Canada Limited	Nova Scotia	100% The Art Institutes International, Inc.
The Art Institute of Vancouver, Inc. (British Columbia)	British Columbia	100% EDMC Canada Limited
The Art Institute of Vancouver, Inc. (Nova Scotia)	Nova Scotia (presently being dissolved)	100% The Art Institute of Vancouver (British Columbia)
EDMC Marketing and Advertising, Inc.	Georgia	100% Company
AIM Restaurant, Inc.	Minnesota	100% Company

2

Entity Name	Jurisdiction of Organization	Ownership
Argosy Education Group, Inc.	Illinois	100% Company
Argosy University of Florida, Inc.	Florida (inactive)	100% Argosy Education Group, Inc.
Western State University of Southern California	California	100% Argosy Education Group, Inc.
The University of Sarasota, Inc.	Florida	100% Argosy Education Group, Inc.
MCM University Plaza, Inc.	Illinois	100% University of Sarasota, Inc.
The Connecting Link, Inc.	Georgia	100% Argosy Education Group, Inc.
Academic Review, Inc.	Illinois	100% Argosy Education Group, Inc.
Association for Advanced Training in the Behavioral Sciences, Inc.	California	100% Academic Review, Inc.
Argosy University Family Center, Inc.	Minnesota	100% Argosy Education Group, Inc.
South University, Inc.	Georgia	100% Company
South University Research Corp.	Georgia	100% South University, Inc.
South University of Carolina, Inc.	South Carolina	100% South University, Inc.
South University of Alabama, Inc.	Alabama	100% South University, Inc.
South University of Florida, Inc.	Florida	100% South University, Inc.
South University of Tennessee, Inc.	Tennessee (inactive)	100% South University, Inc.
South University of North Carolina, Inc.	North Carolina (inactive)	100% South University, Inc.
Higher Education Services, Inc.	Georgia	100% Company
Brown Mackie Holding Company	Delaware	100% Company
American Education Centers Inc.	Delaware	100% Brown Mackie Holding Company
Brown Mackie College – Miami, Inc.	Florida	100% American Education Centers, Inc.
Brown Mackie College – Tampa, Inc.	Florida (inactive)	100% American Education Centers Inc.
Brown Mackie Education Corporation	Delaware	100% Brown Mackie Holding Company

3

Entity Name	Jurisdiction of Organization	Ownership
Brown Mackie College – Los Angeles, Inc.	California	100% Brown Mackie Education Corporation
Brown Mackie College – San Diego, Inc.	California	100% Brown Mackie Education Corporation
Brown Mackie College- Orange County, Inc.	California	100% Brown Mackie Education Corporation
Commonwealth Business College Education Corporation	Delaware	100% Brown Mackie Holding Company
Brown Mackie College – Ft. Lauderdale, Inc.	Florida (inactive)	100% Commonwealth Business College Education Corporation
Stautzenberger College Education Corporation	Delaware	100% Brown Mackie Holding Company
The Art Institute of Ohio- Cincinnati, Inc.	Ohio	100% Stautzenberger College Education Corporation
Brown Mackie College – Phoenix, Inc.	Arizona (inactive)	100% Stautzenberger College Education Corporation
Brown Mackie College – Indianapolis, Inc.	Indiana (inactive)	100% Stautzenberger College Education Corporation
Michiana College Education Corporation	Delaware	100% Brown Mackie Holding Company
Brown Mackie College – Denver, Inc.	Colorado	100% Michiana College Education Corporation
Southern Ohio College, LLC	Delaware	20% by each of American Education Centers, Inc., Brown Mackie Education Corporation, Commonwealth Business College Education Corporation, Stautzenberger College Education Corporation, and Michiana College Education Corporation
EDMC Aviation, Inc.	Pennsylvania	100% Company
Art Institute of Honolulu, Inc.	Hawaii (inactive)	Shares not issued
Art Institute of Orlando, Inc.	Florida (inactive)	Shares not issued
The Art Institute Online, Inc.	Arizona (inactive)	Shares not issued
New York Institute of Art, Inc.	New York (inactive)	Shares not issued

4

EX-23.7

Exhibit 23.7

CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

We consent to the reference to our firm under the captions “Summary Historical and Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Financial and Other Data” and “Experts” and to the use of our report dated September 11, 2006, in the Registration Statement (Form S-4) and related Prospectus of Education Management LLC dated September 26, 2006.

Ernst & Young LLP

Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania

September 26, 2006

EX-24.1

Exhibit 24.1

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC

POWER OF ATTORNEY

Each person whose signature appears below authorizes each of John R. McKernan, Jr., Edward H. West and J. Devitt Kramer as his or her attorney in fact and agent, with full power of substitution and resubstitution, to execute, in his name and on his behalf, in any and all capacities, a Registration Statement on Form S-4 and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto (and any additional registration statement related thereto permitted by Rule 462(b) promulgated under the Securities Act of 1933 (and all further amendments including post-effective amendments thereto)) relating to an offer to exchange 8 ³/4% Senior Notes due 2014 and 10 ¹/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016 of Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp (together, the “Notes”), and any Market-Maker Registration Statement on Form S-1 and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto, related to the Notes, and to file the same, with all the exhibits thereto, as contemplated under the Registration Rights Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2006, among Education Management LLC, Education Management Finance Corp., the Guarantors named therein, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC, Goldman, Sachs & Co., Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated and Banc of America Securities LLC and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto, and all other documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, necessary or advisable to enable the registrant to comply with the Securities Act of 1933, and any rules, regulations and requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission, in respect thereof, in connection with the registration of the securities which are the subject of such registration statement, which amendments may make such changes in such registration statement as such attorney may deem appropriate, and with full power and authority to perform and do any and all acts and things, whatsoever which any such attorney or substitute may deem necessary or advisable to be performed or done in connection with any or all of the above-described matters, as fully as each of the undersigned could do if personally present and acting, hereby ratifying and approving all acts of any such attorney or substitute.

[Balance of Page Intentionally Blank]

IN WITNESS HEREOF, each of the undersigned has subscribed his or her name as of the 26th day of September 2006.

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT LLC
By:	/S/ JOHN R. MCKERNAN
Name:	John R. McKernan, Jr.
Title:	Chief Executive Officer (Principal Executive Officer) and Chairman of the Board of Directors of Education Management Holdings LLC, the Sole Member
	/S/ JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.
Name:	John R. McKernan, Jr.
Title:	Chief Executive Officer (Principal Executive Officer) and Chairman of the Board of Directors of Education Management Holdings LLC, the Sole Member
	/S/ EDWARD H. WEST
Name:	Edward H. West
Title:	Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer (Principal Financial Officer)
	/S/ CHRISTOPHER M. LYNNE
Name:	Christopher M. Lynne
Title:	Controller (Principal Accounting Officer)
	/S/ ADRIAN M. JONES
Name:	Adrian M. Jones
Title:	Director of the Sole Member
	/S/ LEO F. MULLIN
Name:	Leo F. Mullin
Title:	Director of the Sole Member
	/S/ PETER O. WILDE
Name:	Peter O. Wilde
Title:	Director of the Sole Member
	/S/ PAUL J. SALEM
Name:	Paul J. Salem
Title:	Director of the Sole Member

EX-24.2

Exhibit 24.2

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT FINANCE CORP.

POWER OF ATTORNEY

Each person whose signature appears below authorizes each of John R. McKernan, Jr., Edward H. West and J. Devitt Kramer as his or her attorney in fact and agent, with full power of substitution and resubstitution, to execute, in his name and on his behalf, in any and all capacities, a Registration Statement on Form S-4 and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto (and any additional registration statement related thereto permitted by Rule 462(b) promulgated under the Securities Act of 1933 (and all further amendments including post-effective amendments thereto)) relating to an offer to exchange 8 ³/4% Senior Notes due 2014 and 10 ¹/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016 of Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp (together, the “Notes”), and any Market-Maker Registration Statement on Form S-1 and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto, related to the Notes, and to file the same, with all the exhibits thereto, as contemplated under the Registration Rights Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2006, among Education Management LLC, Education Management Finance Corp., the Guarantors named therein, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC, Goldman, Sachs & Co., Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated and Banc of America Securities LLC and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto, and all other documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, necessary or advisable to enable the registrant to comply with the Securities Act of 1933, and any rules, regulations and requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission, in respect thereof, in connection with the registration of the securities which are the subject of such registration statement, which amendments may make such changes in such registration statement as such attorney may deem appropriate, and with full power and authority to perform and do any and all acts and things, whatsoever which any such attorney or substitute may deem necessary or advisable to be performed or done in connection with any or all of the above-described matters, as fully as each of the undersigned could do if personally present and acting, hereby ratifying and approving all acts of any such attorney or substitute.

[Balance of Page Intentionally Blank]

IN WITNESS HEREOF, each of the undersigned has subscribed his or her name as of the 26th day of September 2006.

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT FINANCE CORP.
By:	/S/ JOHN R. MCKERNAN
Name:	John R. McKernan, Jr.
Title:	President
	/S/ JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.
Name:	John R. McKernan, Jr.
Title:	President (Principal Executive Officer)
	/S/ EDWARD H. WEST
Name:	Edward H. West
Title:	Chief Financial Officer (Principal Financial Officer)
	/S/ CHRISTOPHER M. LYNNE
Name:	Christopher M. Lynne
Title:	Controller (Principal Accounting Officer)
	/S/ ADRIAN M. JONES
Name:	Adrian M. Jones
Title:	Director
	/S/ LEO F. MULLIN
Name:	Leo F. Mullin
Title:	Director
	/S/ PETER O. WILDE
Name:	Peter O. Wilde
Title:	Director
	/S/ PAUL J. SALEM
Name:	Paul J. Salem
Title:	Director

EX-24.3

Exhibit 24.3

AID RESTAURANT, INC.

POWER OF ATTORNEY

Each person whose signature appears below authorizes each of John R. McKernan, Jr., Edward H. West and J. Devitt Kramer as his or her attorney in fact and agent, with full power of substitution and resubstitution, to execute, in his name and on his behalf, in any and all capacities, a Registration Statement on Form S-4 and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto (and any additional registration statement related thereto permitted by Rule 462(b) promulgated under the Securities Act of 1933 (and all further amendments including post-effective amendments thereto)) relating to an offer to exchange 8 ³/4% Senior Notes due 2014 and 10 ¹/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016 of Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp (together, the “Notes”), and any Market-Maker Registration Statement on Form S-1 and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto, related to the Notes, and to file the same, with all the exhibits thereto, as contemplated under the Registration Rights Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2006, among Education Management LLC, Education Management Finance Corp., the Guarantors named therein, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC, Goldman, Sachs & Co., Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated and Banc of America Securities LLC and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto, and all other documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, necessary or advisable to enable the registrant to comply with the Securities Act of 1933, and any rules, regulations and requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission, in respect thereof, in connection with the registration of the securities which are the subject of such registration statement, which amendments may make such changes in such registration statement as such attorney may deem appropriate, and with full power and authority to perform and do any and all acts and things, whatsoever which any such attorney or substitute may deem necessary or advisable to be performed or done in connection with any or all of the above-described matters, as fully as each of the undersigned could do if personally present and acting, hereby ratifying and approving all acts of any such attorney or substitute.

[Balance of Page Intentionally Blank]

IN WITNESS HEREOF, each of the undersigned has subscribed his or her name as of the 26th day of September 2006.

AID RESTAURANT, INC.
By:	/S/ SIMON LUMLEY
Name:	Simon Lumley
Title:	President
	/S/ SIMON LUMLEY
Name:	Simon Lumley
Title:	President (Principal Executive Officer) and Director
	/S/ EDWARD H. WEST
Name:	Edward H. West
Title:	Chief Financial Officer (Principal Financial Officer)
	/S/ CHRISTOPHER M. LYNNE
Name:	Christopher M. Lynne
Title:	Controller and Principal Accounting Officer

EX-24.4

Exhibit 24.4

AIH RESTAURANT, INC.

POWER OF ATTORNEY

Each person whose signature appears below authorizes each of John R. McKernan, Jr., Edward H. West and J. Devitt Kramer as his or her attorney in fact and agent, with full power of substitution and resubstitution, to execute, in his name and on his behalf, in any and all capacities, a Registration Statement on Form S-4 and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto (and any additional registration statement related thereto permitted by Rule 462(b) promulgated under the Securities Act of 1933 (and all further amendments including post-effective amendments thereto)) relating to an offer to exchange 8 ³/4% Senior Notes due 2014 and 10 ¹/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016 of Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp (together, the “Notes”), and any Market-Maker Registration Statement on Form S-1 and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto, related to the Notes, and to file the same, with all the exhibits thereto, as contemplated under the Registration Rights Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2006, among Education Management LLC, Education Management Finance Corp., the Guarantors named therein, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC, Goldman, Sachs & Co., Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated and Banc of America Securities LLC and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto, and all other documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, necessary or advisable to enable the registrant to comply with the Securities Act of 1933, and any rules, regulations and requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission, in respect thereof, in connection with the registration of the securities which are the subject of such registration statement, which amendments may make such changes in such registration statement as such attorney may deem appropriate, and with full power and authority to perform and do any and all acts and things, whatsoever which any such attorney or substitute may deem necessary or advisable to be performed or done in connection with any or all of the above-described matters, as fully as each of the undersigned could do if personally present and acting, hereby ratifying and approving all acts of any such attorney or substitute.

[Balance of Page Intentionally Blank]

IN WITNESS HEREOF, each of the undersigned has subscribed his or her name as of the 26th day of September 2006.

AIH RESTAURANT, INC.
By:	/S/ LARRY HORN
Name:	Larry Horn
Title:	President
	/S/ LARRY HORN
Name:	Larry Horn
Title:	President (Principal Executive Officer) and Director
	/S/ EDWARD H. WEST
Name:	Edward H. West
Title:	Principal Financial Officer
	/S/ CHRISTOPHER M. LYNNE
Name:	Christopher M. Lynne
Title:	Principal Accounting Officer

EX-24.5

Exhibit 24.5

AIIM RESTAURANT, INC.

POWER OF ATTORNEY

Each person whose signature appears below authorizes each of John R. McKernan, Jr., Edward H. West and J. Devitt Kramer as his or her attorney in fact and agent, with full power of substitution and resubstitution, to execute, in his name and on his behalf, in any and all capacities, a Registration Statement on Form S-4 and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto (and any additional registration statement related thereto permitted by Rule 462(b) promulgated under the Securities Act of 1933 (and all further amendments including post-effective amendments thereto)) relating to an offer to exchange 8 ³/4% Senior Notes due 2014 and 10 ¹/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016 of Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp (together, the “Notes”), and any Market-Maker Registration Statement on Form S-1 and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto, related to the Notes, and to file the same, with all the exhibits thereto, as contemplated under the Registration Rights Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2006, among Education Management LLC, Education Management Finance Corp., the Guarantors named therein, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC, Goldman, Sachs & Co., Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated and Banc of America Securities LLC and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto, and all other documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, necessary or advisable to enable the registrant to comply with the Securities Act of 1933, and any rules, regulations and requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission, in respect thereof, in connection with the registration of the securities which are the subject of such registration statement, which amendments may make such changes in such registration statement as such attorney may deem appropriate, and with full power and authority to perform and do any and all acts and things, whatsoever which any such attorney or substitute may deem necessary or advisable to be performed or done in connection with any or all of the above-described matters, as fully as each of the undersigned could do if personally present and acting, hereby ratifying and approving all acts of any such attorney or substitute.

[Balance of Page Intentionally Blank]

IN WITNESS HEREOF, each of the undersigned has subscribed his or her name as of the 26th day of September 2006.

AIIM RESTAURANT, INC.
By:	/S/ JOSEPH MARZANO
Name:	Joseph Marzano
Title:	President
	/S/ JOSEPH MARZANO
Name:	Joseph Marzano
Title:	President (Principal Executive Officer) and Director
	/S/ EDWARD H. WEST
Name:	Edward H. West
Title:	Principal Financial Officer
	/S/ CHRISTOPHER M. LYNNE
Name:	Christopher M. Lynne
Title:	Principal Accounting Officer

EX-24.6

Exhibit 24.6

ARGOSY UNIVERSITY FAMILY CENTER, INC.

POWER OF ATTORNEY

Each person whose signature appears below authorizes each of John R. McKernan, Jr., Edward H. West and J. Devitt Kramer as his or her attorney in fact and agent, with full power of substitution and resubstitution, to execute, in his name and on his behalf, in any and all capacities, a Registration Statement on Form S-4 and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto (and any additional registration statement related thereto permitted by Rule 462(b) promulgated under the Securities Act of 1933 (and all further amendments including post-effective amendments thereto)) relating to an offer to exchange 8 ³/4% Senior Notes due 2014 and 10 ¹/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016 of Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp (together, the “Notes”), and any Market-Maker Registration Statement on Form S-1 and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto, related to the Notes, and to file the same, with all the exhibits thereto, as contemplated under the Registration Rights Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2006, among Education Management LLC, Education Management Finance Corp., the Guarantors named therein, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC, Goldman, Sachs & Co., Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated and Banc of America Securities LLC and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto, and all other documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, necessary or advisable to enable the registrant to comply with the Securities Act of 1933, and any rules, regulations and requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission, in respect thereof, in connection with the registration of the securities which are the subject of such registration statement, which amendments may make such changes in such registration statement as such attorney may deem appropriate, and with full power and authority to perform and do any and all acts and things, whatsoever which any such attorney or substitute may deem necessary or advisable to be performed or done in connection with any or all of the above-described matters, as fully as each of the undersigned could do if personally present and acting, hereby ratifying and approving all acts of any such attorney or substitute.

[Balance of Page Intentionally Blank]

IN WITNESS HEREOF, each of the undersigned has subscribed his or her name as of the 26th day of September 2006.

ARGOSY UNIVERSITY FAMILY CENTER, INC.
By:	/S/ WILLIAM COWAN
Name:	William Cowan
Title:	President
	/S/ WILLIAM COWAN
Name:	William Cowan
Title:	President (Principal Executive Officer) and Director
	/S/ EDWARD H. WEST
Name:	Edward H. West
Title:	Principal Financial Officer
	/S/ CHRISTOPHER M. LYNNE
Name:	Christopher M. Lynne
Title:	Principal Accounting Officer

EX-24.7

Exhibit 24.7

BROWN MACKIE HOLDING COMPANY

POWER OF ATTORNEY

Each person whose signature appears below authorizes each of John R. McKernan, Jr., Edward H. West and J. Devitt Kramer as his or her attorney in fact and agent, with full power of substitution and resubstitution, to execute, in his name and on his behalf, in any and all capacities, a Registration Statement on Form S-4 and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto (and any additional registration statement related thereto permitted by Rule 462(b) promulgated under the Securities Act of 1933 (and all further amendments including post-effective amendments thereto)) relating to an offer to exchange 8 ³/4% Senior Notes due 2014 and 10 ¹/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016 of Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp (together, the “Notes”), and any Market-Maker Registration Statement on Form S-1 and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto, related to the Notes, and to file the same, with all the exhibits thereto, as contemplated under the Registration Rights Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2006, among Education Management LLC, Education Management Finance Corp., the Guarantors named therein, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC, Goldman, Sachs & Co., Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated and Banc of America Securities LLC and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto, and all other documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, necessary or advisable to enable the registrant to comply with the Securities Act of 1933, and any rules, regulations and requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission, in respect thereof, in connection with the registration of the securities which are the subject of such registration statement, which amendments may make such changes in such registration statement as such attorney may deem appropriate, and with full power and authority to perform and do any and all acts and things, whatsoever which any such attorney or substitute may deem necessary or advisable to be performed or done in connection with any or all of the above-described matters, as fully as each of the undersigned could do if personally present and acting, hereby ratifying and approving all acts of any such attorney or substitute.

[Balance of Page Intentionally Blank]

IN WITNESS HEREOF, each of the undersigned has subscribed his or her name as of the 26th day of September 2006.

BROWN MACKIE HOLDING COMPANY
By:	/S/ DANNY FINUF
Name:	Danny Finuf
Title:	President
	/S/ DANNY FINUF
Name:	Danny Finuf
Title:	President (Principal Executive Officer)
	/S/ EDWARD H. WEST
Name:	Edward H. West
Title:	Principal Financial Officer and Director
	/S/ CHRISTOPHER M. LYNNE
Name:	Christopher M. Lynne
Title:	Principal Accounting Officer
	/S/ JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.
Name:	John R. McKernan, Jr.
Title:	Director
	/S/ STACEY R. SAUCHUK
Name:	Stacey R. Sauchuk
Title:	Director

EX-24.8

Exhibit 24.8

THE CONNECTING LINK, INC.

POWER OF ATTORNEY

Each person whose signature appears below authorizes each of John R. McKernan, Jr., Edward H. West and J. Devitt Kramer as his or her attorney in fact and agent, with full power of substitution and resubstitution, to execute, in his name and on his behalf, in any and all capacities, a Registration Statement on Form S-4 and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto (and any additional registration statement related thereto permitted by Rule 462(b) promulgated under the Securities Act of 1933 (and all further amendments including post-effective amendments thereto)) relating to an offer to exchange 8 ³/4% Senior Notes due 2014 and 10 ¹/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016 of Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp (together, the “Notes”), and any Market-Maker Registration Statement on Form S-1 and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto, related to the Notes, and to file the same, with all the exhibits thereto, as contemplated under the Registration Rights Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2006, among Education Management LLC, Education Management Finance Corp., the Guarantors named therein, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC, Goldman, Sachs & Co., Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated and Banc of America Securities LLC and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto, and all other documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, necessary or advisable to enable the registrant to comply with the Securities Act of 1933, and any rules, regulations and requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission, in respect thereof, in connection with the registration of the securities which are the subject of such registration statement, which amendments may make such changes in such registration statement as such attorney may deem appropriate, and with full power and authority to perform and do any and all acts and things, whatsoever which any such attorney or substitute may deem necessary or advisable to be performed or done in connection with any or all of the above-described matters, as fully as each of the undersigned could do if personally present and acting, hereby ratifying and approving all acts of any such attorney or substitute.

[Balance of Page Intentionally Blank]

IN WITNESS HEREOF, each of the undersigned has subscribed his or her name as of the 26th day of September 2006.

THE CONNECTING LINK, INC.
By:	/S/ GREGORY O’BRIEN
Name:	Gregory O’Brien
Title:	President
	/S/ GREGORY O’BRIEN
Name:	Gregory O’Brien
Title:	President (Principal Executive Officer) and Director
	/S/ EDWARD H. WEST
Name:	Edward H. West
Title:	Principal Financial Officer and Director
	/S/ CHRISTOPHER M. LYNNE
Name:	Christopher M. Lynne
Title:	Vice President and Controller (Principal Accounting Officer)
	/S/ JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.
Name:	John R. McKernan, Jr.
Title:	Director
	/S/ JOHN T. SOUTH, III
Name:	John T. South, III
Title:	Director

EX-24.9

Exhibit 24.9

EDMC AVIATION, INC.

POWER OF ATTORNEY

Each person whose signature appears below authorizes each of John R. McKernan, Jr., Edward H. West and J. Devitt Kramer as his or her attorney in fact and agent, with full power of substitution and resubstitution, to execute, in his name and on his behalf, in any and all capacities, a Registration Statement on Form S-4 and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto (and any additional registration statement related thereto permitted by Rule 462(b) promulgated under the Securities Act of 1933 (and all further amendments including post-effective amendments thereto)) relating to an offer to exchange 8 ³/4% Senior Notes due 2014 and 10 ¹/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016 of Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp (together, the “Notes”), and any Market-Maker Registration Statement on Form S-1 and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto, related to the Notes, and to file the same, with all the exhibits thereto, as contemplated under the Registration Rights Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2006, among Education Management LLC, Education Management Finance Corp., the Guarantors named therein, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC, Goldman, Sachs & Co., Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated and Banc of America Securities LLC and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto, and all other documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, necessary or advisable to enable the registrant to comply with the Securities Act of 1933, and any rules, regulations and requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission, in respect thereof, in connection with the registration of the securities which are the subject of such registration statement, which amendments may make such changes in such registration statement as such attorney may deem appropriate, and with full power and authority to perform and do any and all acts and things, whatsoever which any such attorney or substitute may deem necessary or advisable to be performed or done in connection with any or all of the above-described matters, as fully as each of the undersigned could do if personally present and acting, hereby ratifying and approving all acts of any such attorney or substitute.

[Balance of Page Intentionally Blank]

IN WITNESS HEREOF, each of the undersigned has subscribed his or her name as of the 26th day of September 2006.

EDMC AVIATION, INC.
By:	/S/ JOHN R. MCKERNAN
Name:	John R. McKernan, Jr.
Title:	President
	/S/ JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.
Name:	John R. McKernan, Jr.
Title:	President (Principal Executive Officer) and Director
	/S/ EDWARD H. WEST
Name:	Edward H. West
Title:	Chief Financial Officer and Director
	/S/ CHRISTOPHER M. LYNNE
Name:	Christopher M. Lynne
Title:	Principal Accounting Officer
	/S/ STACEY R. SAUCHUK
Name:	Stacey R. Sauchuk
Title:	Director

EX-24.10

Exhibit 24.10

EDMC MARKETING AND ADVERTISING, INC.

POWER OF ATTORNEY

Each person whose signature appears below authorizes each of John R. McKernan, Jr., Edward H. West and J. Devitt Kramer as his or her attorney in fact and agent, with full power of substitution and resubstitution, to execute, in his name and on his behalf, in any and all capacities, a Registration Statement on Form S-4 and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto (and any additional registration statement related thereto permitted by Rule 462(b) promulgated under the Securities Act of 1933 (and all further amendments including post-effective amendments thereto)) relating to an offer to exchange 8 ³/4% Senior Notes due 2014 and 10 ¹/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016 of Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp (together, the “Notes”), and any Market-Maker Registration Statement on Form S-1 and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto, related to the Notes, and to file the same, with all the exhibits thereto, as contemplated under the Registration Rights Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2006, among Education Management LLC, Education Management Finance Corp., the Guarantors named therein, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC, Goldman, Sachs & Co., Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated and Banc of America Securities LLC and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto, and all other documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, necessary or advisable to enable the registrant to comply with the Securities Act of 1933, and any rules, regulations and requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission, in respect thereof, in connection with the registration of the securities which are the subject of such registration statement, which amendments may make such changes in such registration statement as such attorney may deem appropriate, and with full power and authority to perform and do any and all acts and things, whatsoever which any such attorney or substitute may deem necessary or advisable to be performed or done in connection with any or all of the above-described matters, as fully as each of the undersigned could do if personally present and acting, hereby ratifying and approving all acts of any such attorney or substitute.

[Balance of Page Intentionally Blank]

IN WITNESS HEREOF, each of the undersigned has subscribed his or her name as of the 26th day of September 2006.

EDMC MARKETING AND ADVERTISING, INC.
By:	/S/ JOSEPH A. CHARLSON
Name:	Joseph A. Charlson
Title:	President
	/S/ JOSEPH A. CHARLSON
Name:	Joseph A. Charlson
Title:	President (Principal Executive Officer)
	/S/ EDWARD H. WEST
Name:	Edward H. West
Title:	Chief Financial Officer (Principal Financial Officer) and Director
	/S/ CHRISTOPHER M. LYNNE
Name:	Christopher M. Lynne
Title:	Vice President and Controller (Principal Accounting Officer)
	/S/ JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.
Name:	John R. McKernan, Jr.
Title:	Director
	/S/ JOHN T. SOUTH, III
Name:	John T. South, III
Title:	Director

EX-24.11

Exhibit 24.11

HIGHER EDUCATION SERVICES, INC.

POWER OF ATTORNEY

Each person whose signature appears below authorizes each of John R. McKernan, Jr., Edward H. West and J. Devitt Kramer as his or her attorney in fact and agent, with full power of substitution and resubstitution, to execute, in his name and on his behalf, in any and all capacities, a Registration Statement on Form S-4 and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto (and any additional registration statement related thereto permitted by Rule 462(b) promulgated under the Securities Act of 1933 (and all further amendments including post-effective amendments thereto)) relating to an offer to exchange 8 ³/4% Senior Notes due 2014 and 10 ¹/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016 of Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp (together, the “Notes”), and any Market-Maker Registration Statement on Form S-1 and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto, related to the Notes, and to file the same, with all the exhibits thereto, as contemplated under the Registration Rights Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2006, among Education Management LLC, Education Management Finance Corp., the Guarantors named therein, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC, Goldman, Sachs & Co., Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated and Banc of America Securities LLC and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto, and all other documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, necessary or advisable to enable the registrant to comply with the Securities Act of 1933, and any rules, regulations and requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission, in respect thereof, in connection with the registration of the securities which are the subject of such registration statement, which amendments may make such changes in such registration statement as such attorney may deem appropriate, and with full power and authority to perform and do any and all acts and things, whatsoever which any such attorney or substitute may deem necessary or advisable to be performed or done in connection with any or all of the above-described matters, as fully as each of the undersigned could do if personally present and acting, hereby ratifying and approving all acts of any such attorney or substitute.

[Balance of Page Intentionally Blank]

IN WITNESS HEREOF, each of the undersigned has subscribed his or her name as of the 26th day of September 2006.

HIGHER EDUCATION SERVICES, INC.
By:	/S/ JOHN T. SOUTH, III
Name:	John T. South, III
Title:	President
	/S/ JOHN T. SOUTH, III
Name:	John T. South, III
Title:	President (Principal Executive Officer) and Director
	/S/ EDWARD H. WEST
Name:	Edward H. West
Title:	Principal Financial Officer and Director
	/S/ CHRISTOPHER M. LYNNE
Name:	Christopher M. Lynne
Title:	Principal Accounting Officer
	/S/ JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.
Name:	John R. McKernan, Jr.
Title:	Director

EX-24.12

Exhibit 24.12

MCM UNIVERSITY PLAZA, INC.

POWER OF ATTORNEY

Each person whose signature appears below authorizes each of John R. McKernan, Jr., Edward H. West and J. Devitt Kramer as his or her attorney in fact and agent, with full power of substitution and resubstitution, to execute, in his name and on his behalf, in any and all capacities, a Registration Statement on Form S-4 and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto (and any additional registration statement related thereto permitted by Rule 462(b) promulgated under the Securities Act of 1933 (and all further amendments including post-effective amendments thereto)) relating to an offer to exchange 8 ³/4% Senior Notes due 2014 and 10 ¹/4% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2016 of Education Management LLC and Education Management Finance Corp (together, the “Notes”), and any Market-Maker Registration Statement on Form S-1 and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto, related to the Notes, and to file the same, with all the exhibits thereto, as contemplated under the Registration Rights Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2006, among Education Management LLC, Education Management Finance Corp., the Guarantors named therein, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC, Goldman, Sachs & Co., Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated and Banc of America Securities LLC and any amendments including post-effective amendments thereto, and all other documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, necessary or advisable to enable the registrant to comply with the Securities Act of 1933, and any rules, regulations and requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission, in respect thereof, in connection with the registration of the securities which are the subject of such registration statement, which amendments may make such changes in such registration statement as such attorney may deem appropriate, and with full power and authority to perform and do any and all acts and things, whatsoever which any such attorney or substitute may deem necessary or advisable to be performed or done in connection with any or all of the above-described matters, as fully as each of the undersigned could do if personally present and acting, hereby ratifying and approving all acts of any such attorney or substitute.

[Balance of Page Intentionally Blank]

IN WITNESS HEREOF, each of the undersigned has subscribed his or her name as of the 26th day of September 2006.

MCM UNIVERSITY PLAZA, INC.
By:	/S/ GREGORY O’BRIEN
Name:	Gregory O’Brien
Title:	President
	/S/ GREGORY O’BRIEN
Name:	Gregory O’Brien.
Title:	President (Principal Executive Officer) and Director
	/S/ EDWARD H. WEST
Name:	Edward H. West
Title:	Principal Financial Officer and Director
	/S/ CHRISTOPHER M. LYNNE
Name:	Christopher M. Lynne
Title:	Principal Accounting Officer
	/S/ JOHN R. MCKERNAN, JR.
Name:	John R. McKernan, Jr.
Title:	Director
	/S/ JOHN T. SOUTH, III
Name:	John T. South, III
Title:	Director